JP7002523B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, there is known a gaming machine in which a gaming lottery related to the progress of a game is performed when a gaming ball enters a starting port.

In this type of gaming machine, it is determined whether or not there is a gaming ball entering the starting port. Then, when the ball enters the starting opening, a game lottery related to the progress of the game is performed. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player by performing the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In addition, when a game lottery related to the progress of the game is performed, an effect of varyingly displaying a plurality of symbols on the liquid crystal screen is performed. Then, while such an effect is performed, an operation opportunity (such as operating an operation button) may be given to the player until a predetermined valid period elapses, and the game is played through such an operation effect. I try to maintain my interest.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-061263

However, with such conventional gaming machines, there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest in gaming.

Means 1: Judgment means for making a judgment and
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means, and a privilege granting means.
It is possible to generate an operation acceptance period in which the player is allowed to accept the predetermined operation, and if the predetermined operation is accepted within the operation acceptance period, the post-acceptance effect can be executed based on the acceptance. Equipped with a predetermined operation reception effect execution means,
In the operation acceptance period, when the acceptance is not made within the operation acceptance period, the same post-acceptance effect as when the acceptance is made may be generated in the gaming machine.
The post-acceptance effect executed based on the acceptance of the predetermined operation during the operation acceptance period is executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the privilege is given.
When the operation acceptance period occurs, it is possible to output a reception allowance sound suggesting that the player is in a state where acceptance of a predetermined operation is permitted or that acceptance is permitted. ,
When a special allowable sound is output as the reception allowable sound when the operation reception period occurs, the same post-reception effect as when the predetermined operation is not accepted within the operation reception period is performed. Generate,
When the operation acceptance period occurs, if a predetermined allowable sound different from the special allowable sound is output as the acceptance allowable sound, the acceptance is made when the predetermined operation is not accepted within the operation acceptance period. There are times when the same post-reception effect is generated, and there are times when the same post-reception effect is not generated when the reception is made.
If the reception permissible sound is not output in any of the modes when the operation reception period occurs, the same post-reception effect as when the predetermined operation is not received within the operation reception period is performed. It is designed not to occur,
Moreover,
Specific BGM is audible output is possible,
When the operation acceptance period in which the predetermined operation is allowed to be accepted occurs in a state where the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is inaudible, the operation acceptance period occurs when the operation acceptance period occurs. The predetermined allowable sound may be output as the reception allowable sound, or the special allowable sound may be output.
When the operation acceptance period in which the predetermined operation is allowed to be accepted occurs in the state where the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the predetermined allowance is given as the acceptance allowance sound when the operation acceptance period occurs. Sound may be output, but the special permissible sound is not output.
Moreover,
It is possible to display a modeled image display that imitates the target of the predetermined operation, and at least the first mode and the second mode are prepared as modes for displaying the simulated image display.
If the same post-acceptance effect as when the predetermined operation was not accepted and the same post-acceptance effect is started within the operation acceptance period during which the special permissible sound is output as the acceptance permissible sound, after the acceptance. A gaming machine characterized in that, at the time when the effect is started to be executed, the image display is not hidden and is displayed.

According to the present invention, the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. be. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of an operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut along the DD line in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. In (a), in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, a part of the operation button is cut out and the part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to be concealed by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is sectional drawing which cut at the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from behind by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electric connection between a payout control board constituting a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between a board of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit and the like of a payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a payout control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the liquid crystal display on the upper plate side. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S5322). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol ordinary processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the said effect symbol variation start processing in a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by a fixed channel system. It shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship with the game state, the reproduction sound, and the priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or the combination thereof. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a free channel search process in the case of executing the control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the condition which selects the channel which exchanges a sound output (stops a sound reproduction) when a channel is not vacant at the time of output of a new sound in this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the production example for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing when a sound effect is reproduced, (B) shows the channel which each sound effect is output. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of a sound effect in the first half variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of a staging sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each staging sound effect. It is a figure which shows the screen composition example of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each channel group which shows the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs the sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling a volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each effect sound which shows the volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of a sound in this embodiment. This is the first half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control process for controlling the sound based on the parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. It is the latter half of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the volume control processing which performs sound control based on the parameter set for each sound effect of this embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling a volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification is terminated, for each type of the notification sound exemplified in FIG. 155. (A) is an example of processing when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. Is a diagram. (B) is an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It is a figure which shows. (C) is an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It is a figure which shows. (A) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. Is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (C) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (D) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. Is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of production separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process related to the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content which is determined separately for each channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the restriction content which is determined separately for each channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when a channel special opening process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the operation sound output processing under suppression is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the processing related to the channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. An example of the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decoration body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. It is a time chart showing. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in a process other than this process, not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the movable body. It is a time chart which shows an example of the situation on the decoration side. It is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorations at a specific timing during the period when the design changes. .. A time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs in multiple movable decorations at two different timings during the period when the design changes. be. It is a time chart which shows an example about the control contents for realizing the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example about the display contents when the operation is performed a plurality of times. It is a time chart which shows an example about the control contents for realizing the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows the production example using the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows the production example using the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect pattern selection table in the effect mode which can execute the sword withdrawal effect, (A) is shown an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect according to the type of a variation pattern, (B). ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body when the aura member is provided in the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and is (A) the sword delivery state, (B) the first sword pulling state, (C) the second. Indicates the state of sword withdrawal. It is a vertical sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) the sword delivery state, (B) the first sword pulling state, and (C) the second sword pulling state. It is a vertical sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword decoration body and the operation validity period related to the operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body of the modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration body used for the pseudo-ream production. It is a figure which shows the production transition example of the pseudo-continuous production common to all production patterns. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the post-operation effect (drop effect of a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) of the sword decoration body during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the production transition example which becomes a feature of a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production pattern which can be selected based on a variation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo-continuous production, and shows a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo-continuous production, and shows a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo-continuous production, and shows a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , Is a diagram showing a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , Is a diagram showing a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the transition example. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button is once enabled without the sword decoration being effective, and then the sword decoration is activated. It is a figure which shows the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect when "specific operation-related effect" is set as the effect target of the timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the effect content for each type about the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect about the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect is performed as a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the button image BTG is displayed in the mode (the specific effect mode) to which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the case where the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the case where the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the production example when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the production example when the first precursor production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the operation is performed a plurality of times in the mode of one-shot operation when it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, and (b) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the effect example when it was operated in the mode of long-pressing when it was not done. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the effect example when the operation is started in an aspect. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, the symbol change is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set". It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation (release operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state and the operation (setting operation) for setting are performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state and the number of holdings is three, the design is "the second effect pattern (loss fluctuation) in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set". In the time chart showing the processing example when the fluctuation is started and the operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (cancellation operation) or the operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation. be. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol change is started in the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period (specific valid period) in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set, and the execution period of the symbol change is executed. It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation for setting to the automatic button effect state is performed in. It is a figure which shows the production example when the production progresses in the 3rd production pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period to affect "the specific processing which concerns the production such as production setting". It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period to affect "the specific processing which concerns the production such as production setting". It is a time chart which shows an example about the production process regarding the special production reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example which takes the effect progress when the effect after operation is started while keeping "the image which suggests the type of an operation target" as a display state. It is a figure which shows the effect display example which appears in the effect display apparatus 1600 when the effect pattern which the effect progresses is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 285. It is a figure which shows the effect display example which appears in the effect display apparatus 1600 when the effect pattern which the effect progresses is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 285. It is a figure which shows the example of displaying the image as a moving image by sequentially displaying a plurality of images when a specific reception effect occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of the production which appears when the operation by a player is not in time until the timing when the production reception is automatically generated arrives. It is a figure which shows the example of the production which appears when the operation by a player is not in time until the timing when the production reception is automatically generated arrives. It is a figure which shows the example of the production which appears when the operation by a player is not in time until the timing when the production reception is automatically generated arrives. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st reception production and the 2nd reception production in which the time from the occurrence of the permissible period of production reception to the automatic generation of production reception is different. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st reception production and the 2nd reception production in which the time from the occurrence of the permissible period of production reception to the automatic generation of production reception is different. It is a figure which shows the production example which suggests whether or not the reception production which enables the "automatic production function" is generated by the mode of the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the production example which suggests whether or not the reception production which enables the "automatic production function" is generated by the mode of the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the production example which suggests whether or not the reception production which enables the "automatic production function" is generated by the mode of the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is enabled only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is enabled only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is enabled only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. It is a figure for demonstrating a novel directing property using an automatic directing function. It is a time chart which shows an example of a channel allocation situation. It is a time chart which shows an example of a channel allocation situation. It is a time chart which shows an example of a channel allocation situation. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decorative body when a specific condition is satisfied. It is a time chart which shows the modification example with respect to the example shown in FIG. 304. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 which a new symbol change is started arrives in the situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 which a special effect pattern is started arrives in the situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the original position. It is a time chart which shows an example about the limitation on the volume setting and the brightness setting when a penalty is generated for the operation with respect to the sword part 5010. It is a time chart which shows an example about the light emitting mode of the effect lamp during the abnormality notification period corresponding to the specific abnormality detection. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline of the function for executing the effect control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module composition in the peripheral control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of production control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure until the data necessary for the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment is acquired. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in the effect control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of a lamp and a sound in the effect control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function such as a sound and a motor in the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the advance notice effect which is executed in the series of variation display from the variation start to stop of a special symbol in this embodiment, and shows an example of the scheduler and the scheduler data used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which controls lighting and blinking of a lamp in the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls a lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow and the left star character in the star character notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls a right-handed star character in the star character advance notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a middle star character in the star character notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs the motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data which is executed when the power of the gaming machine of this embodiment is turned on. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing the command and the scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the relationship between these configurations. It is a figure explaining the process of executing the scheduler data at the time of power-on of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice effect in a series of variation display from the change start to stop of a special symbol in this embodiment, (A) is the effect executed from the change start to the end, and the effect is executed. The scheduler data for the purpose and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hatchet in the hatchet fall notice. It is a figure explaining the content of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which controls a motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice which is the first half part of the hatchet role fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the hatchet character latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the hatchet character second half fall notice which is the latter half part of the hatchet character fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the hatchet character latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls a motor in the hatchet character latter half fall notice which is the latter half part of the hatchet character fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure of executing the advance notice effect in the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) is the timing to execute the advance notice effect and execution time of the advance notice effect, (B) is The scheduler data driven by each scheduler for executing the advance notice effect is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal display effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the drawing data file in the step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) by the image composition / motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data of this embodiment, (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data, (B) is the structure of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal display in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal display in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the effect SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect SW activation command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage which a step-up notice effect is executed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. .. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, and (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect. A drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for each drawing category in this embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and in particular, shows the evaluation procedure which sets the effect SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the details of the structure of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines the effect SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of effect SW control information, (C). Is a diagram showing an example of the production SW group. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the effect SW flag and effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows effect SW flag, (B) shows effect SW information table. It is a figure which shows the example of the program data which defines the effect SW replacement table information and effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is effect SW replacement table information, (B) is effect SW. Shows the replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of a layer information table (for background). Is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 2). show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal display common block in this embodiment, (A) shows the liquid crystal layer table of a step-up notice effect, (B) shows the structure of the liquid crystal effect common block. .. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal display block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the button mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal display effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing classification which can be determined in the callback function at the time of the callback execution by the effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of each layer and the drawing result of all layers at the time of execution of the advance notice effect of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the common block over a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) is the execution timing of a symbol display and notice effect, (B) is the composition of the liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block, (C). Shows the configuration of the liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block spanning a plurality of periods. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image to a frame buffer by writing the image written to each layer respectively. It is a figure explaining the procedure of converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer in this embodiment and then writing it into a frame buffer. It is a figure explaining the procedure of temporarily storing a display list command group in this embodiment in a peripheral control RAM, and then transferring it to a sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure of transferring a display list command group in this embodiment to a sound source built-in VDP without storing in a peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of the state transition between the non-gaming state and the game execution state. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of performing the expectation effect that a princess character is displayed large as a background image during execution of a specific effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the display example when the help image is displayed in the state which the expectation effect shown in FIG. 378 is performed. It is a figure which shows the display example when the character image PG is displayed so that the display position is changed by the operation by a player. It is a time chart for demonstrating an example of the process when the production restriction period is generated in a non-gaming state. It is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when the production restriction period ends early. It is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the special period (opening-only period). It is a time chart which shows an example about the processing when a game is started when the store opening exclusive period (special period) is set. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the special operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data including the reception allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data including the reception allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the low expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example of the modification when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the effect example which the 1st permissible sound is output in a specific mode at the time of occurrence of "non-suppressed operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)". It is a time chart which shows the example of the production in the case where the "weak suppression mode" and the "strong suppression mode" are sequentially generated in the production corresponding to the high expected fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of the production in the case where the "weak suppression mode" and the "strong suppression mode" are sequentially generated in the production corresponding to the high expected fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of the production in the case where the "weak suppression mode" and the "strong suppression mode" are sequentially generated in the production corresponding to the high expected fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the effect example (movement under restraint reception effect) which appears in "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as an operation target" in the suppression / automatic reception effect. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is generated in the "non-suppressed mode" of "intrinsic reception effect".

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the 20 to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 having a front-rear outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through port of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and a player according to a game state that is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and changes as a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. The effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and the door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are directed to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the lower part for bass inside. It is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 having the speaker 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed inside. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the gaming board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a into which the gaming ball is driven, and the gaming ball launched from the ball launching device 680 is placed on the upper portion of the gaming area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to be guided to the above, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the payout of the game ball can enhance the interest of the player, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front after being disassembled. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 extending to the left frame member 30 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It includes an upper part on the left end side of the front view of the curtain plate member 50 and a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position left and right from the center of the left and right on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Are prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step portion 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness are the same as the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surface of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that the game ball can pass through. The vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and the vertical wall portion 54 bulging forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 and the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. It is provided with a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned in a grid pattern by a plurality of ribs to increase strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has a flat plate shape extending horizontally and a quadrangular outer shape of the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and the lateral fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, under normal conditions, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, is formed in the portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 behind the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the cloaca and the cloaca gradually narrows, the cloaca is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the cloaca 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower lateral fixing portions 88 are provided apart from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. To.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for the upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 show the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 17B is an outer upper side view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. It is in a state.

In this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the front end surface having an arc shape, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. Because the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side and the component force F1 face the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the bearing groove 63 is placed on the main body frame from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the part of the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which a game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. It includes a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that is a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Lock between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be rotated according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

Although the details of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the dish unit 320 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 has an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball lending / returning display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although the details of the effect operation unit 400 will be described later, the large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player and the door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display the effect image. It is equipped with a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although the details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 having a rectangular shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth in front view. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left end side of the front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the view and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably mounted. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the purpose of the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the tubular handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461). , The upper speaker 573, etc., and the door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrating back and forth on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of protruding pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the flange member 143 and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame are interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144, which urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame, a mounting piece connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the flange member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, or is pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. It is provided with a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end thereof narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height of the door frame base 110 below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The decorative substrate 161 on the left side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 162 on the lower left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protrusion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted at a portion outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 on the lower side of the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protrusion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in a rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions that project into the cylinder portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the cylinder portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 by screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylinder portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylinder portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners of the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is used for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit for rotating a key attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and inserted into the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and if it is the corresponding key, either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thereby, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side of the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing plate metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side of the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and FIG. 39 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 mounted on the mounting portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are produced. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in a cross-sectional arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are arranged in a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b, which are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than the center.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to unevenness having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and a main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which are cylindrically projected rearward along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in a strip shape and arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outside of the main body portion 413a in the front-rear direction and having a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and forming a plurality (six) in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical extension from the front end of the main body portion 413a to the front so that the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which is narrowed inward, substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the front side of the outer peripheral edge abutting on the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against it, it moves backward until the rear end abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 toward the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided with the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A transparent portion whose rear is visible with respect to the outer diameter of 410 is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is larger than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner side of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button. It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being decorated with light emission other than the portion targeted for light emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and the center opening 416a penetrating back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and a notch 416c notched at a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by the frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right portions of the cutout portion 416c are attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the first LEDs 422a. It comprises a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The decorative substrate 423 on the right side of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It comprises a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the axis of rotation is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the tubular main body portion 413a rear end side of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Action effect of the production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. In FIG. 45A, a part of the operation button is cut out in a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and the first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame, or the like is intended to hide the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 46A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through port 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projective view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 of the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , Projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. 44, The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation buttons are enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting part 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit mounting of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 or the like from being damaged. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. Although a gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, the gap on the outer periphery of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button is opened from the front side (player side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like on the outer side and the rear side (back side) are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration part 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern with a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. Since the overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of the player, and it can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of them emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since it is arranged inside the tubular main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative board 422 of the decorative board unit 420 is provided. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. It is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the left side of the front view of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower front part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) have a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through opening 111. ing. In the left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. The reflective surface may be provided by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall portion 33.

The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a front-view circular circular lens portion 532a corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a front-view quadrangular square shape corresponding to the square opening 531a. It is provided with a lens unit 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is concave rearward in a conical shape in the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. The input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole toward the front as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel to the front, and the input light is used. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 532c (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160). It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in the square lens portion 532b reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b divides a plurality of concentric grooves into a plurality of radially extending lines, and then divides the plurality of concentric grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Since the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting the lenses in the radial direction, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly luminescently decorated.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multi-faceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-faceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light that the circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted by the light.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square cylinder shape extending back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface of the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U-shape with the front view open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so as to move backward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left. It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535, the lower end of the upper dogleg-shaped part, and the upper end of the lower dogleg-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 has a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are mounted on the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffuser lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffuser lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and the right are open. A box-shaped, opaque right unit left shading member 559 and an impermeable light attached to close the open right side of the right unit left shading member 559 on the left side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit and a right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end portion. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It comprises a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square cylinder shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through opening 111. ing. In the right-side reflective vertical wall portion 568, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As for the reflective surface, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is provided from a reflective material such as metal or resin as well as the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the reflective surface is reflected to the inner surface thereof. It can also be provided by attaching a seal. As will be described later, the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and is a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective vertical wall portion 33.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the decorative board 552B on the lower right side of the door frame is connected to the relay board of the door body of the door frame base unit 100, and the decorative board 552A on the upper right side of the door frame is the decorative board 552B on the lower right side of the door frame. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-back directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens unit 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and each of the main body 553a on the right side of the front view. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of notched portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical divisions when the left diffuser lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 553e as the center. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially toward the front centering on.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light emitted to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f are left on the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arcuate groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body portion 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 can be visually recognized. Can be decorated by the side reflective portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and the decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b, the notch portions 556c which are notched in a square shape from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a on the right side of the front view. Front view of the main body 556a, the accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a and is provided in the vertical direction. On the left side, a plurality of side reflection portions 556f are provided so that each input lens portion 556e is arranged in the vertical direction so as to be the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of notches 556c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. These plurality of notched portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed substantially in the center of each of the right diffuser lens members when the right diffuser lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as the center. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially toward the front centering on.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body portion 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arcuate groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate a more uniform shade of light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflective portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and the decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. It is provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right of the substantially center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided with three sets of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance, with a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The shape of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body portion 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. It can be light-emitting and decorated only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be designated. , Each can be independently luminescently decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each of them.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron composed of a plurality of triangles is arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape of a cuboid.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and the multi-faceted decoration is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends vertically shortly and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward from the door frame left side unit 530 in a large plate shape, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be decorated with light emission.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 greatly protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. FIG. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, and a pair of upper speakers 573 extending to the left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear of the cage open and penetrate back and forth at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of (three left and right) slits 574b that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated vertically, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal that is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown here, the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the above-mentioned outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from the outer outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the inner periphery of the opening window. The structure is such that an outer peripheral light detection unit 35 (left outer peripheral outer light detection unit 35a, right outer outer light detection unit 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery thereof is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has transparency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of the plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the front side of the unit body 271 respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. It is provided with a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surface of each of the door frame top unit 570 is moved rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portions near the left and right ends of the quadrangle extending to the left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right directions on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with an opening 574a penetrating back and forth at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in the diagonally extending portion of the portion protruding forward in a trapezoid on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion diagonally extending forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The front surface of the top right decorative portion 574f is formed so as to be located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a modified pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central portion in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the modified pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape similar to a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of a squared side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of a pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The front of the door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front of the variable pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light and decorate.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 close to both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side to the center side. It is composed of a 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It is equipped with.

In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused in the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, unevenness of a square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emitting decorated by LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, unevenness of a square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emitting decorated by LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 in the top left decorative lens member 579 via the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the direct portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescently decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing to the left. In the door frame top right decorative board 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 in the top right decorative lens member 580 by means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 via the direct portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescently decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a side view substantially square having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting halfway to the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the abbreviation that connects the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a lower wall of a right triangle and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. A door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The middle left decorative board 586 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state where a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower parts of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is a partition. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the relay board of the door body of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are hollowed out backward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the vicinity of both ends in the left-right direction in which the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in good condition, and high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by means of a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Action effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left-right direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through opening 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed (dish unit). It is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to display the effect operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 strongly, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the dish unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move a hand for a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from either side or from the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and it is an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game ball from the upper plate 321 is discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game ball of the lower plate 322 to a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The dish ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction and on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 with the upper plate 321 full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, the door frame 3 arranges the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and also stands the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by reflecting on the right wall portion. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 can be discharged without showing the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so that the main body frame 4 The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 of the above can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand in or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e to the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is doord. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around you.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emission on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the side along the island equipment, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the upper door frame top unit 570 of the through opening 111, and also has front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasize it. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the presence of the machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player. At the same time, the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with a high-quality stereo sound. can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided on the lower side and the upper side of the through port 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration with a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, since the door frame 3 projects the top middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction to the front, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 shows the game board of FIG. 63. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after disassembling. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the gaming board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 having a substantially square shape in front view and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is partitioned, and the rear end of the game area 5a attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that a game ball driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, the table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a large winning opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a gate portion 2003 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view along the clockwise circumferential direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially vertically from the lower ends, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. In this security recess 1008, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the mounting bosses 1010 and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , Is equipped. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through port 1122 that penetrates into the.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120. It is almost the same surface as the front surface. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 in the panel plate 1110, and is forward from the front of the holding step 1121. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engagement step 1115. The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engaging piece 1125 is on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It extends by a predetermined amount toward the center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is connected to the front component 1000. The 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 of the embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower end in the front view and is opened downward to have a notch portion 1152 having the same shape as the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000 and a notch portion 1152 above the notch portion 1152 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and rear so that the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000. It is provided with a fixing hole 1154. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel can be mounted between the front component 1000 and the game panel 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for mounting the table unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the outer side of the game area 5a in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status display 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. The number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. When the second special hold number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the big winning opening 2005 It mainly includes a round display 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface of the front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface of the front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010 into the 3010c, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lock the lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening opening 1126.

Further, the table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a large winning opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. The upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to a substantially center in the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6) It extends to the left and right with an acceptable size, and is formed so that it can be opened and closed according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 capable of always accepting game balls.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a. In the state where the side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf portion is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). Can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of.

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls a game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges the game ball into the game area 5a. The start port unit 2100 is arranged directly under the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending to the left and right along the axis and houses the effect drive board.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal display mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which a lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached up and down on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

As the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , Passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, the player is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the striking can be. , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes the obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When the game ball is discharged from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that it is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), On the downstream side thereof, the area provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 will flow down.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it will be in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". There are "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the large prize opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game balls to be accepted, by accepting the game balls in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lighting LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is performed as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the lottery special lottery result.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is the present invention. The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is located on the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present invention are used. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are used in the second decorative body of the present invention in the present embodiment. The second button inner decorative portion 432 g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention, respectively. ..

Further, each LED and subscreen decorative board mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 in the present embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is used as a light emitting body of the present invention, and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present invention is used as a back decoration means of the present invention. The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A). 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped, the first button decorative portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlapped, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decorative decoration with no perspective, it is possible to attract the player's attention strongly and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Further, a decorative member 432 (or a door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), a door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). At the same time, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the operation of the player, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move the button lens 411. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) come close to each other or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a due to the change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the subscreen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the decorative portion 432 g inside the button (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) with the decoration portion 432g in the second button (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be changed. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) inside the operation button, it is referred to as the first decorative body. Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the second decorative body, the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will be significantly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the player is not in the position, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) Since the crossing mode (overlapping condition) with the lens changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side where the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411 is not provided. Through the operation button on the back side, the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized well, and the first button decoration unit 411a is radially arranged. The decoration can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame inside the operation button can be directed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. It is possible to strongly direct the player's attention to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button is provided with a decorative portion 432 g inside the second button having a plurality of polygonal decorations concentrically centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g The perspective of the decoration can be surely exhibited, and the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g is provided. By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Further, each LED (or subscreen decorative board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436. When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) in the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the light emitting decoration can also entertain the player. At this time, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the lower operation button lower by the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the decorative portion 432 g inside the second button, the decorative board 433 on the left side of the operation button, the decorative board 434 on the right side of the operation button, and the operation button are on. In contrast to the direct light emitted from each LED (or LED477a) of the inner decorative substrate 435 and the inner decorative substrate 436 under the operation button, the first button decorative portion 411a is decorated inside the second button. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for light-emitting decoration, whereas the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminescent-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emittingly decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. (Or, when the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a emitted from the outside, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the player's attention can be obtained.

Further, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door) are arranged. It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move in a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame) inside the operation button do not need to be secured. The side second effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward to make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device) 460A) can be made to stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the outside of the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 on the outside portion of the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal, which can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent some players from feeling frustrated and deteriorating their interest, and at the same time, the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, under the through hole 111. The outer diameter is 10 cm on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side. The operation button 410 that can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within the range of ~ 30 cm, and the decoration inside the operation button that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, it is conventional. In the pachinko machine, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen at the position where the storage plate of the game ball stands out. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is provided with a translucent second button decoration so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b, which are provided with the part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for illuminating the frame side lens 417. It is provided with an inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that separates the second button decorative portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extending portion 413f, or the second LED 422b. , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently emitted and decorated. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly luminescent and decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescent effect can be produced. In addition, various patterns of light emission can be produced by appropriately combining extinguishing, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for light-emitting decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for light-emitting decoration of the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated on the left outside of one operation button. Since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the second button decorative portion. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away as possible from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diverted. The second button decorative portion 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button does not bend or extend, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The luminescent decoration can be entertained by the player without any problem, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration unit 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, by appropriately emitting the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparently. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be luminescently decorated in various patterns, so that the player's interest can be focused on the operation button 410 and the operation button 410. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 is used by the player during the execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate the operation button 410, the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, at the time of executing the player participation type production, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, since it is provided with a translucent main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f in which only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 413f in the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged behind by brightening the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411). It is possible to prevent the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitting decorated in a good state, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button behind and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect) can be decorated by emitting light through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be completely separated from the portion 411b by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outside Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized in which the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not dive into the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light from the operation button 410 is completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411. Can be done. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a can make the second button decoration portion 411b emit light and decorate in a good state, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) inside the operation button is opened from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) inside the operation button. The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be obscured by the second button decorative portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the decoration member 432 in the operation button (the second effect on the door frame side) is compared with the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the appearance of the player can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 is formed in an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light, a light emission effect in which the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410 or a light emission in which the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect and the light emission effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player less bored with various light emission effects and entertain the player. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is driven into the game area 5a by the stored game ball in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3. Along with mounting, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 to attach a predetermined size to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is arranged from that portion. Since the portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 is extended to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing the game ball, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player. can.

Further, at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate second region A2 extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer circumference, and extends upward from the upper end to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball are provided, the game ball in the lower plate 322 is prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball to the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable when the game ball invades the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely exhibited. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate main body 325 on the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening). When a hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can restrict the fingertips and the like from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and thus the fingertips. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be done.

Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate cover 340, 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened because the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. In this state, the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the vertical wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged, reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A surely restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are used as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side in which 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction on the front surface bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed such that a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like. After being prepared for the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that has been taken out, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. A storage plate capable of storing a game ball composed of a lower plate 322 and a lower plate 322 is provided, and the storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are placed outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. It has a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage dishes (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) that stands out in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible in the conventional pachinko machine can be seen, the player is different from the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is open. Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Since the extension unit 325B, the second extension unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 in a range that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second area A2). can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the first expansion portion 325B, and the second expansion portion having the lower plate second region A2 are added to the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. having different sizes are prepared in advance. By installing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, which are sized according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacement) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first expansion unit 325B, and the second expansion unit 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the space in the rear part depends on the amount of protrusion to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second) having different amounts of protrusion to the rear. The lower plate 322 that can be used for the effect operation unit 400A) can be used, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward and is a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (mounting) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, which have shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, various forms can be supported. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game ball is placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where a large amount of the game ball is loaded due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even if a large number of game balls are stored, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate capable of storing the game ball is below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to receive the game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided with the lower plate 321 and the lower plate 322, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, which is of interest to the player. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract. Further, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the game in the lower plate 322 is made difficult for the player. It is possible to prevent the ball from being distracted by making it difficult to notice the flow of the ball, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 that guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to visually recognize the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the cushioning portion 322d, it is assumed that the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open. , The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, it is probable that more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is difficult to see from the front by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 are transferred to the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball. Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guide portion 322c, and the buffer portion 322d, and can be discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the game ball from circulating in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to make sure that the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 is difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately noticed by the ball guide portion 322c or the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is illusion that the game ball is discharged downward (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 from the front, the lower plate can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice the visible size with respect to the size of 322, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game ball as in the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 that bulges forward below the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction. In addition to being provided with a portion 326a, the dish front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped backward. Due to the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a can be made to appear as if it greatly protrudes forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect) can be made to appear. The operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in a position where the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. Since a part of the game ball is wrapped around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the storage amount of the game ball (volume of the lower plate 322) in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play the game while worrying that the lower plate 322 is full of the game ball, the player can concentrate on the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of the 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game ball is sufficiently secured even by tactile sensation, and in the state where the game ball is stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322. Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest. Further, since the fingertips of the hands placed in the lower plate 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reassure the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game ball even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. It is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be provided. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player can enter the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and injuring the player when the hand is put in. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged from the player side. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be made more conspicuous and can strongly attract the attention of the player, and the decoration by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is easy to see. Then, it is possible to entertain the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates up and down, it is a conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in the above, a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. You can play the game with a feeling like that, and you can let the player concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are arranged when viewed from the front. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer to improve the appearance, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. Door frame side effect display device 460 that can present effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The interior decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the operation button is attached, and the outside is surrounded by the outer periphery of the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 having a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 having a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412, and protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side first) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, or the like. (Ii) It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative member 432 provided inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between the lens and the 470) becomes relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative portion 411a or the like, so that the appearance is prevented from being deteriorated, and a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm is prevented. The 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strong. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts and has high appeal.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a cylindrical shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the outside of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) and make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), it is near the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the advancing / retreating direction of the operation button 410. Since it is in an inclined state with respect to (a plane orthogonal to), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button can be made difficult to see, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the decorative member 432 and the door frame inside the operation button arranged in the operation button 410 are arranged. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player with the operation button 410. The 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be realized.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative property). Therefore, the operation button 410 is made to stand out in the pachinko machine 1 and is of interest to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button is formed at the portion of the button frame 412. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation can be performed. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

Further, a button frame 412 that is opaque over the entire circumference from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside with a predetermined width is provided, and the player cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button on the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body 413a and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Can be moved well.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer circumference has no directionality as compared with the case of having a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410 when the player participates in the operation. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and reduces his interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest can be operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). In addition to being able to entertain the production, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410 by the production image and the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). By actively participating and entertaining the player in the player participation type production, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by executing the production in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 raise expectations for the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The button lens 411 in which the first button decorative portion 411a is not formed may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button is not attached to the button frame 412. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed on the portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first) so as to surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. (2) A button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the base unit 450) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround only a part of the entire circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have at least decoration (flat decoration by sticking a sticker, printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or translucent. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Further, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable to apply light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism, etc. on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to, but is recessed from the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to the rear, and is connected to each other behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It may be set to 322, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer part of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and a part of the effect wraps around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). You may be there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape (shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example of denting in a shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be dented in a polygonal prismatic shape or a polyhedral shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation dial, touch panel, etc." "With an operating device", "With a rotating body with decoration on the surface", "With a decorative body with decoration and a movable device that moves the decorative body", "Game Characters, items, logos, and decorations that imitate scenes (dioramas) in three dimensions according to the concept of the machine "," Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns according to the concept of the game machine , Etc. are decorated by a seal, printing, etc. ”, etc., and a member such as a unit or a panel may be attached. Further, the member to be attached to the attachment space 326j (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is shown with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a opened forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is not limited to, but is a dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) having no opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). , A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. It is desirable that the front surface of such a dish unit cover be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine by sealing, printing, attaching decorative members, and the like. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion covers an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322. An example of covering the lower plate with difficulty in viewing from the front is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area of less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided with respect to the circumferential direction. The second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 432 g inside the second button may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the display device 460A or the like is shown so that the rear member can always be visually recognized, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front-rear (or upper and lower) is specified as a predetermined condition. A configuration having a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible by satisfying the above may be used. Here, as the variable light transmission means, "a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side" and "a liquid crystal film that is transparent by turning the power on / off". It becomes opaque or becomes opaque so that the rear side can be seen. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, only the front member or the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized in a normal state. The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen, so that the front member can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, the rear side of the front member is darkened to decorate only the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. The decoration by the surface of the can be shown to the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member, and the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and the front member and the rear member can be shown. When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or, the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. As a result, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, and various decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened, so that it is on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as something like a magic mirror, but even if it is made like a liquid crystal film, the same effect can be obtained. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so that it can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or after. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light emission) by the light of a light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of light emission effects and decoration effects. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As its control configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the generation processing of the control power supply (for example, + 5V). A second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to a game advanced by the first control unit MCG is provided.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Among the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. 69. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, and various control programs such as the main control program that is executed and controls the game operation. A main control input circuit 1310b for inputting a detection signal from a detection switch, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage is mainly provided.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "built-in main control") that updates a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is preset). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and inputs a clock signal to the main control MPU 1310a ( Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function that has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information provided, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. And, it is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output from the various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information for outputting the various signals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 4002 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 for detecting the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and the general, as shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball entered in the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered in. Further, the gate sensor 4003 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 are shown in FIG. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 attached and detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , 2nd special symbol display 1405, 1st special hold number display 1404, 2nd special hold number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status display 1401, and round display 1407. do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001, 2,201 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides a bus 1310ah. Circuits are connected via (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec issues a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310ea and transmission is started to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is provided with BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. .) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various control programs including payout control programs that control operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. It includes a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 and the 952d. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program is to be paid out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have the reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. And, it is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output from the various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information for outputting various signals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects the ball-out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 use the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full in the stored game ball, first receives the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, thereby performing payout control without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cc to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). In When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). (Specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 is output via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error content or error related to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal plate 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hole. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending / returning display unit 330. It is output to the equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending / returning display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power cutoff process even when the power is cut off. As for various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the operation signal is sent to the predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and is triggered by the payout control MPU952a from the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay. The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the lending balance display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

In the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

The ball return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method in which one digit of the three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for specifying the contents to be displayed by turning on are the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input via the board 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the device can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, and is used as a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal to output to the CR unit 6 or to convey that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, among the first control unit MCG, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island facility and capable of electrically connecting or electrically disconnecting an alternating current 24 volt (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , The launch control unit 953 that controls the launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifying circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifying circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improvement circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various alternating currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various boards. It is equipped with a power supply creating circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of a game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control on the first control unit MCG based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is shown in FIG. The effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data), the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. While controlling the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and hour / minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and a knob that rotates the volume of music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. It is equipped with a volume adjusting volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operating.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emission modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of big hit game states and special Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e" for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. It is described as.) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d because the power supply board 931 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board to a lamp via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board side motor drive data for transmitting to drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 5. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decorative drive amplifier board motor to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for the frame decorative drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal of is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , It is input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system goes out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. It is diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various serials I for peripheral control, centering on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with a built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to independently transfer data between devices without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae for peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the input / output devices such as the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control. It has become. That is, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is reset. Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of a big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as a substrate volume 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 may be produced as more powerful, or it may be announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume of the sound can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful by increasing the volume of the game, or that the game state will be advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are schedule data for sound generation that generates sound effects and the like, and schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in a time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. And the game state is instructed (for example, it is instructed to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is an effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object, and Bank0 (1 ms). Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". Subsequent "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, in "(1fr)", when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and the like, since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai. A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak or the like is provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cia is a detection signal from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. Dial created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). It is a storage area in which the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are set. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

In addition, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of Bank0 (1fr), the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, and the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of Bank0 (1ms). The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, the peripheral area of the previous time is executed. When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Ru. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is doord to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. -The DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Motor drive data STM-DAT are set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is generated in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). As the effect backup information (1 ms), every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is applied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr), and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit is used for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed, and are stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as the effect backup information (1 ms), every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is used to copy at high speed, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in this embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example). Etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and special effect flags), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". Subsequent "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU1511a is to be backed up. , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing the pair as one page, and the backup second area. The 1511dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source for control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. To the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and heads toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal. And, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. A forced switching circuit 1512f that connects the circuit so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input while the circuit is connected so as to transmit. It is equipped with. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b display, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, and display of an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu used Image data, selected display image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the image data on the back of the main frame used to display the image of the back of the main frame, which allows the position of each part on the back of the main frame 4 to be visible to the player, and the display of the service mode screen. The service mode screen image data used for, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal display and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400 should be operated.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various peripheral control RAMs 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to 1511cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transferred from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display is arranged near the lower side of the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. Since the control board 1510 outputs the output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, "V-by-One (V-by-One) of THine Electronics Inc. is used in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d. By adopting a differential communication method called "registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a differential interface based on a serial system called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel system. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes. Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 for the image data for the effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. No peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" is to hold the drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP1512a has music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a include a plurality of in the sound source built-in VDP1512a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. By synthesizing the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a, the volume of the combined production sound is actually the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Amplifies to the master volume value, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. ..

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound is simple in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined at the bottom. It is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and the notification sound are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400). If the setting mode is entered and adjusted by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It is designed to flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1. Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period because the muted production sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b draw the character data on the game board side for drawing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and the character data on the door frame side in the display area of the effect display device 460 on the door frame side. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a relay around the frame as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is a differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of a difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, it is possible to take measures against noise.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side directing transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three image signals, a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization. Three synchronized signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is integrated into a unit is arranged. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the discharge device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise due to electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment that receives noise that has invaded the door.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires provided in parallel. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential 1-pair cable for electrically connecting between a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source. Even if it is a mechanism that is not easily affected by noise by adopting a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., the configuration with such hardware alone is due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data in the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later. And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side shall be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Therefore, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 and removing various wirings, by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed. If the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 is used. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the board.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are connected to each other. Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively, separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twist pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cables, one of the wires is red and the other is gray, and of the harness, the wire that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is differentially input to a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a defect has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input, a circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so that the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and is serialized in various ways. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to a door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image to convey that when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is used. It can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side" to convey the problem. Please call the clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. ” By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. The effect based on the effect can be developed by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa as the date, hour, minute and second information. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen of is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, or the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the game board side effect is produced. The decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. Peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and calendar information and time to specify the date and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minute and second, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, 85% is added by 10%, which is the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a 1024-step value from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-step value is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player. Etc.), but the notification sound and the notification sound also flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and are muted. The volume from to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen of is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 can be operated within a predetermined time, or the game board side effect display device 1600 can be demonstrated in a customer waiting state. If the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to the desired level, and if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, he / she sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game is the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The ground (GND) of various boards and the ground (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a emission control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a via the power supply board 931. The synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V), and supplies the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create a direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as “+37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple of + 37V to be supplied, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies it to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the firing solenoid 682 and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply creation circuit 935d has DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is forwarded by the diode PD0. Current flows toward the positive terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns from the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is obstructed by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal. The current is flowing toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. In addition, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and peripherally via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. The + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e supplies + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative board of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared to the case of monitoring the voltage to be applied, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, and the main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 77, the main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and the main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), so that the ripple (alternating current component folded by the voltage) is first removed. Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being connected to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus end of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is used. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU1310a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to each of the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. In addition to the signal, the circuit is such that an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and the error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and a process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 951. The operation signal with HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the transistor MTR0 is turned on by inputting the operation signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistance MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment), which is a reference voltage for comparison of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded over the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) is used. , + 12V is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when + 24V starts to drop from + 24V when the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24, MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when + 12V starts to drop from + 12V when the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 12V voltage is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, and inputs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is the same. (The logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal is used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 for monitoring a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is not connected.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. It is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is reset. No function The main control output circuit 1310cc outputs the payout power failure warning signal to the payout control board 951 and outputs the peripheral power failure warning signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistance MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR 20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 to the payout control board 951 as a payout failure warning signal, is open as shown in FIG. 78. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistance MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is wired. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 on the payout control board 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. 70. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. By doing so, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage is turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. In, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. There is one transistor in each of the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal, and the power failure warning signal and peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is delivered to the payout control board 951. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of 951 and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 is received as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal, and do not have a reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal indicating that the normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is completed is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main pay ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69 are displayed. Drive signals are output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 contains a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU1310a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main-circle serial data from the shift register 1310ea, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also to connect the resistance MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistance MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 has the negative terminal as ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to be the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 ensures that the data is received without any problems or omissions.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. Therefore, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the voltage is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be disrupted and to prevent the command from being omitted, so that the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the omission of a command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main circuit serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main circuit serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cc. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the functionless main control output circuit 1310cc, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt and omits a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit and the like, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly comprises the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. If a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 will be power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a result, the current is obstructed by the diode PD0 in the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, but the payout control MPU952a does not operate, but it is connected to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying the backup power supply to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
In addition to the payout control MPU952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 resets as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are each negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
In the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, and the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) while the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 via the resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR 21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame open switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. To. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 21 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 22 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input]
The main body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) while the 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR 24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29, PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 24 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 to make the logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are in the present embodiment. Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which is a state that does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer uses the outer end frame door opening information output signal to transmit the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame is turned on. 4 is in a state of being released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and main body frame opening switch 619'). In the door frame opening switch 618', the switch is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and the switch is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR42, and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. The payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 kb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is transmitted to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND) and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal that is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the accommodation space is full with the stored game ball. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR 41, the transistor PTR 41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full with the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 passes through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board. When the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side in 951 and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR 41, the transistor PTR 41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball burnout detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the payout motor 834 is driven. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the dispenser motor 834, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the dispenser motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body fails. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the 4th terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. By turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage changes, and the signal is used as the RWMCLR signal and is the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50, and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53, and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56, and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). In the function of canceling the error in), it becomes an error clearing signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42 to turn on the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44, in which the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42 to turn off the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a clears the RAM by erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation that the output terminal of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is instructed to perform RAM clear that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the terminal 3 and the terminal 10 which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952da and input to the voltage switching input terminal, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 has the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal, via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869 from the CR unit 6. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 connects to a rental device such as a game ball. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, via the terminal board 869. And is output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71 and also to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is a pull-up resistor (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. To.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72, PR76, and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 931. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 kb to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 kb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. In, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The XS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is possible or impossible is transmitted to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 kb is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like. In, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function as the payer serial data transmission signal. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

The RWMCLR signal, the payout failure warning signal, the door open signal, the full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) described above are connected to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. In addition to each of the signals 1) and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 may be input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. It can be output, or the payout motor drive signal can be output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function can output the payout motor drive signal to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to this, for example, the payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout failure warning signal, and the like related to the above are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the jackpot information of the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. A game information signal such as an output signal, an information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer shall perform the number of jackpots in which the round is twice (two-round jackpot). The number of big hits of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of times of big hits in 15 rounds) and the number of big hits. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only the two-round jackpot occurs. It may be difficult to get a big hit for 15 rounds. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. do not have.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting an output signal to a hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 has an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the information output signal during probability fluctuation, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to convey the fact, and the main prize ball number information output signal is various winning openings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2,201, and the large winning openings 2005. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in is 10 balls, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal generates a 15-round jackpot. The two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the signal is being displayed, and the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that the variation display is finished (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. This is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal board 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball of the ball is paid out as a prize ball, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. It is a signal to convey that, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, and the hall computer receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to count the number of times to count the number of times to perform the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal to notify each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal is input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is generated. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input and grasp the total number of times the 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT6, the two-round jackpot information output signal is used. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input and grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer is the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is red and outputs a time-saving and medium-time information output signal. As described above, the time-saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time-saving state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time saving state is generated in the pachinko machine 1 when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. At the same time, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time reduction and to grasp the total number of times the time reduction state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. It is possible to grasp that there is, and it is possible to count the number of times that the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times that the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning openings 2005 as shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the ball has reached 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of the game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to be output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having the connector provided in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection from being targeted. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a row from the center left side to the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is, for example, a game ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If a big hit of 15 rounds happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining number is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, as described above, the number of prize balls information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 as the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. For example, a clerk in the hall checks a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying a game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball jam (also, it occurs in the payout device 830). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball squeeze) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working on the game, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall after the 15-round jackpot is completed because the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress. When the game returns to the above state, the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in the period when the 15 round big hit is finished and the 15 round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of gaming balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2,201, and the large winning openings 2005 shown in FIG. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the above, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are used. Through this, we adopted a mechanism to convey information to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the number of game balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of production display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the positive signal and the negative signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It restores to three synchronized signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before serialization). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to do so. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , While being transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the difference. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, so that the door is connected. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored from the peripheral control board 1510 in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 or during the period of demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display. In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. 76, respectively, and the door. The GND terminal, GND terminal, LVDSGND application paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to the ground, respectively.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In a normal operating mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restored to the parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, is abnormal for some reason. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. It is input to the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a is a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d in order to convey to that effect to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. For the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, to provide a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering. It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is peripheral. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that tells that the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 terminal to the D17 terminal, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal have three video signals (18), which are a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs (bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 terminal to D17 terminal, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69. When the signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communication with the pachinko machine 1 and driving the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out a game ball as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), a main control board. The prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number), and command 10H specifies one prize ball and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the payout control board 951 is used from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to Command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH wins. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and a self-check is specified in this command 30H.
After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the special figure 2 tuning effect, the jackpot related, the power on, the normal electric role effect related, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1403. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as a status and "** H" as a mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 tuning effect start command instructs the start of the special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is instructing the end of the special drawing 1 tuning effect, and the variable time state designation command is instructing the probability and the time saving state. The probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state, a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state, and a low probability time saving state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time for variable display of the symbol compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later at a predetermined time can be obtained. In addition to increasing the number of stops displayed compared to the non-time saving state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is longer than that in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), as shown in FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls held (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state). The second starting port 2004 It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 entrainment production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 tuning effect end regarding the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 89, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). (Opening or opening start of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command between the rounds starts while the large winning opening 1 is closed (large starting port unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or the closing is started), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command indicates the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is the jackpot. It instructs the display of symbol information.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is the start during the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit, or The small hit count display command is used to instruct the start of opening), and the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command indicates the start of the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100). It is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of the big winning opening 2005), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the time of closing the big winning opening 1 (starting closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005. Is transmitted by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot symbol display command is opened (when the jackpot unit 2100 opens the jackpot 2005). ) Is sent.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is sent. , Sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands named power-on state and power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. In), the information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored. , Information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, and. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and Amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation occurs). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to specify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the above occurs.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Also sent to.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process. In the transmission process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal symbol tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the device 1402, which are named as the start of the normal map synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command is to instruct the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is to specify the miss, the specific big hit, and the non-specific big hit. The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure tuning effect, and the variable time state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually). As the gaming state, a low-probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the command for specifying the variable state is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the division thereof is as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Hit Opening, Solenoid Open Display, and Solenoid Ending. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per drawing is transmitted at the start of the opening per drawing, and the opening display command is sent when the opening is open (a pair of movable pieces are left and right by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit (even though it is not a big hit) other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, electrical in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When an electrical connection with 4005 or the like is broken or short-circuited, the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed to start, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69. This is to instruct the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when the above occurs.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the door is in the closed state. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 is directed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The main body frame opening notification is instructed when the main body frame is opened, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. This is to instruct the end of the main body frame opening notification when it is in the closed state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Of these, it is transmitted when any of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in a state of being opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to an error cancellation command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. Set it as a status and set the received command as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7 * H" is added to these received commands. Formates the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent at the time of power recovery, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is sent at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is sent at the time of power recovery. , And when the frame state changes. The formatted frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned "8 * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the execution and main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command indicates the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively, and the variable shortening operation end designation command is variable. The state transition from the shortened operation state to the variable shortened non-operation state is instructed, and the high-probability end designation command is instructed to shift the state from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is such that 0 to 4 special symbols 2 are held (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 The number of balls (the number of balls (reserved number) that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. Yes, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Based on the first special symbol display 1403, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command has the function of holding the special symbol 2 to display the second special symbol of the display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening winning command (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or the second When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent to notify the effect, and the command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end designation command is sent. , The special symbol 1 storage command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after digesting the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times", and the special symbol 1 operation hold ball number change. Time (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first start is further performed. It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of holdings decreases). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 2 operation changes (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays a change in the special symbol. When there is a hold number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it for display), and the normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the number of reserved balls is reduced), the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the normal symbol display 1402 When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation is increased (the game ball is displayed at the first start port 2002). It is sent when the number of reserved balls has increased after entering the ball), and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation increases (when the number of reserved balls enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls is increased). When it increases), it will be sent. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the first starting opening, or the second starting opening. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 transmit to that effect mainly by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 consists of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection error and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when out of ball. Represents a bit.) Is set to a value 1, a value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, a value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in stock of 50 or more, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. In the case of a ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is defective. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game ball is repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error clear navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process, which will be described later.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol shown in FIG. 69, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405. A random number for the display pattern, a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the jackpot game state is generated, and this jackpot. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game. A random number for a small hit symbol to be used for determining a small hit symbol, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of this random number for a small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is used to determine a random number for determining whether to open and close the movable piece, and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece is used to determine the initial value. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 69. It is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the random numbers for jackpot determination are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69. As described above, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, first, the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is set to one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or in the process of turning on the power on the main control side, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total is stored in the main control side power cutoff process (power down). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is the main control MPU1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and performs the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number based on the extracted ID code. It is a mechanism to execute and set this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided with the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed to perform the second operation. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “ It is described as "WDT control register"), the timer set value is set, the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU1310a is reached until the time measured by the main control built-in WDT1310af reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT1310af with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, the timer clear setting value is set. The time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time by the WDT1310af with built-in main control by the time set by the timer set value and starting the time again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC 21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC 22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, so that the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning signal. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done. The determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop MIC 22, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop the output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with its logic as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. Is entered in. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, when the state in which the logic is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is latched as LOW.

Following step S14, the main control program is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It is in a state (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is shown in FIG. 72, is activated (boot). I'm waiting until). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. When there is an input of the power failure warning signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure warning signal continues. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S28, in the main control program, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off time processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When they match, this main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, checksum value (sum value), backup flag BK-FLG value, and other game backup information in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the power is turned off, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset power" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device) to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself and then return to the main control board 1310 is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code. Initial value derivation processing that always derives the same fixed value from do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a. ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a to update the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state by hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hardware random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program makes reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. 89 The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt enable (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to input the detection signal input by the operation of the operation switch 954 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted). (Game control side normal operation control means), it is handled as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error generated in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. Functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after the lapse of the predetermined time, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S54, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process in which the output of the power failure clear signal is started is performed in the power failure clear process in step S14. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2107, an attacker solenoid 2108, a first special symbol indicator 1403, a second special symbol indicator 1405, and a first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. 69. , The second special hold number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is supplied. The main control side power cutoff process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms from the time when the power is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the pachinko island equipment is used. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. The waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the device 460 starts (boots) is started to be timed, and immediately before the waiting time is reached. If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, but within a period of about 7ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Therefore, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the power-off processing on the main control side in the power-on processing. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is completed in step S28. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power restoration and there is no intention indication by the hall clerk to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ) There is a problem that it will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process is provided. The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, the game can be advanced. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the backup process for storing the game information due to the progress of this game by supplying the power by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power cutoff processing composed of the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a is main. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) match. Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in RAM is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af to reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff process can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the process of turning on the power of the main control side at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a is used. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeatedly performing the determination of, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared again. By making it impossible to start the time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. The main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the timer interrupt process on the main control side is started, which will be described later. I adopted the mechanism. When the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure in this way, the part covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) can be divided into two parts, one is the part covered by hardware so that the disconnection process is surely completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey the command, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. There is. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. In other words, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the main control return destination command at power-on is turned on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or a power failure when the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 steps. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the large winning opening 2005 shifts from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing member 2107.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and restored according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from. It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is issued. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) in the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 to indicate the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing between the rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmission to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 start the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. A command to indicate the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Will be.

Further, for example, a screen (for example, a screen indicating that the movable piece is expanded to the effect that the gaming state is such that the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player). The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the display (screen to be transmitted to the player) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the start port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The movable piece will shift from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it is expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the game state is possible, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side at the time of power recovery. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot know what kind of game the player should play.

As described above, in the above two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is changed to the current state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, the screen showing how many rounds it is). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. A screen that tells you that there is a message (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It's a big hit. The big prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big prize opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to enter the game ball into the grand prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, in a state where the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game returns. When electricity is turned on, a screen telling that the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "movable pieces" The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the screen that conveys the message "The game is being expanded. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start port." It is possible to instruct the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored thereafter, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes, steps S58 to S68, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power cutoff process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on as shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in a state of being memorized in. In these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is generated. (Including the recovery time), any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving states, high-probability time-saving states, low-probability non-time-saving states, and high-probability non-time-saving states (probability and time-saving states) is restored. It is composed of information indicating whether to do so and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of changes in the special symbol is limited (for example,). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of being performed 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. Therefore, the worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the operator of the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And a series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which is the routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the power-on process on the main control side is used. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later is the normal time described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that has been normally received is input. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001,2201 shown in FIG. Detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 Detects a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 and a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. Detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 to detect a game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. , The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 69. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read and input information. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and the detection from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 and other categories is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2001, 2, 201, and the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game balls entered in the large winning openings 2005. Detection signal from, detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start port 2002, second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start port 2004 When the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time, respectively, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After that, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing a total of two readings, one for the first to third readings to be compared and the other for the second to fourth readings, a total of two readings will be performed due to the effects of chattering and noise. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 It can increase reliability.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining an initial value for a jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The random number is updated in the random number update process and the random number update process in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created and paid out as the prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that fact, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or mainly. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 may be created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to send to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, the number of balls to be paid out will be added to the next number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball by reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area is added, and the number of balls of the added game ball is added. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command reception process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005). , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. It is determined (determined whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. A value of 32767 is set, and the value is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the main control built-in. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a). Is included in the jackpot judgment range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as related to the big hit shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) the large winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2, the figure. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a is set so as to light the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10. The output information is stored in the output information storage area, or the round is performed 15 times. At one time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to turn on the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status display 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified to be related to the normal symbol tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and normally according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is sent to the starting port solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as time-saving and medium-time information output information and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in FIG. 1 related to the synchronization effect and various commands classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 89, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. A big prize is won based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected by various commands classified into commands and big hits. Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric power production, Fig. 90 Various commands classified into notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) and various commands classified into status display (frame state 1 command, error cancellation) shown in Navi commands and frame status 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configure various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310a a to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. It can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data. When the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the power is restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the power-on processing on the main control side shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. , Status, status, which configures the power-on state command, sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the main control return destination command when power-on. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power of the main control side is turned on, and the game information is accommodated. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error generation command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit). ) Is sent a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control). A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control). A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af, the main control MPU1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is a backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, the peripheral control board 1510 issues the main control return destination command at power-on in FIG. 89, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine. It can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power-on recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power-on state command and the power-on main A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and thumb value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. It is possible to display the effect in the display area of. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is restored immediately after the power is restored. At the same time, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by being seen by the player in such a state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 92. In step S38 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on as shown in FIG. And the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to the inspection device of the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process constitutes information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310 in, for example, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is backed up by Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), are compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), is copied back and used as a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a mismatch), the value 0 is forcibly written to each of the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), to make a cold start.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is also backed up by Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. The processing of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. It lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to and write to the transmit buffer register of. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to synchronize with 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmission data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). The 1-byte data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the 1-byte data disappears in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is divided into 1 byte each, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, etc. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. It is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but although so-called frame dropping occurs, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by music and sound effects according to.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time as transmitting, the left side audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the screen data from the first screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate whether it is an aspect.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data is to be output. Electrical drive source The drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that constitutes the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. A normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, and a large prize opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command,) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc. The various commands are classified into, as shown in FIG. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric function production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90, various commands are included. Peripheral control unit 1511 sets the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and that one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the state display shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands such as an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode accompanying the effect operation, for example, the game board side. The effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (the effect device). Error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the game state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. The stored calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Based on the light emission data to be output, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. At the same time, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is provided to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and creates a game board side effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a 1024-step value from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volume 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as audio data serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in Bank0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and specify the copy from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 kb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is used at high speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the effect information (RAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and specify the copy from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies the copy to the Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 1511dc. All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc (Bunk4). All copies are made in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 96 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit stationary processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). End this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is executed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since it is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 95 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the execution of peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether it is completed or not. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so that the processing fails.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time that the above-mentioned processing failed exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 97. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, in which the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in a time series constituting the schedule data. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame-decorated drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data instructed by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the amplifier board side. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The 1-byte data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the 1-byte data is exhausted in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. Of the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a series, a motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is also shown in the figure. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511cag on the motor drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. It is possible to acquire the operation presence / absence of the operation button 410 from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 73 are created. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Judging, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact, and specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Drawing state information acquisition From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the effect display device on the door frame side. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively, and backed up.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cab by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and use Bank0 (1ms) from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the terminal address are copied continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 kb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1ms) is specified. ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95, various processes related to the above-mentioned effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[16-1--4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the receive buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the periphery 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3 in step S1206, that is, a mode in which the status is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the receive buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a slingshot environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data on the peripheral control unit 1511 side are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is affected by noise and changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main peripheral serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73. (Step S1216), and the routine is terminated. This receive command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 75, is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning) is started. It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is started. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is peripheral. Specify the copy of the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example). 1 byte) continuously backed up All copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc, which is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core. The content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank 0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy, and specify the contents from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one of the drawing state information acquisition processes in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511c as the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data), and predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is used as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. Shifts from to the most significant bit B7 bit by bit.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process to be executed as one of the warning processes in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, in this LOCKN signal, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. It is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. And, that is, a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits have a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match, the peripheral control board 1510 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times in the determination of step S1522 that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure each time this routine is executed. (Counting the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. It is designed to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, it is determined that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set in the communication error flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG is the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It is a flag indicating whether or not a problem has definitely occurred. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. At times, it is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one of the warning processes of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101. The door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that fact.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step). S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, the number of screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is instructed to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. To determine if the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is running, while the screen generation schedule. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, during the period in which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or when the pachinko machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used for demonstration. It is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine is in the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the pachinko machine is waiting for customers or during the period during which the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. When it is not the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period during which the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating in the customer waiting state (when it is simply in the customer waiting state). It is designed to end this routine as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Counting the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred even once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is the case as it is. While terminating the routine, even once it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT and the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective, and the transmitter and the transmitter. It is a flag indicating whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection of the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the door frame side effect. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and is for the door frame side effect. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Perform (step S1548) and end this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs the process of drawing to. For example, the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Further, in the communication error display processing, a period during which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU1511a as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is LOCKN in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is a game. Along with performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.") Is repeatedly emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform flow processing. At this time, the process of turning on all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 103.

First, a decorative pattern that is variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the unit steady processing or the like, and the main control side of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main control side of the main control side of the power-on processing shown in FIG. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process, the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the start opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. In each round, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). The round is digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is from the main control board 1310. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command, the left decorative symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative symbol is in the center. , And the variable display of the right decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is stopped. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 can be recognized by the player. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reel rotates from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative symbol from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped by the variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable display start and stop display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized with each other.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is shown as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit for the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is steady. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Because the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is output from the data to the VDP1512a with built-in sound source, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, it follows the screen generation schedule data. Since the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed. Even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the determination of step S1540 in this connection recovery process, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT can be used until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the receiver and the receiver even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not performed. The process of recovering the connection with the player is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. Since the message "There was a problem with the side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, it tells that the drawing data received from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 is an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the steady process, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data has not been started and the screen generation schedule data has not been started in the scheduler update process, the power of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC-. When the CNT value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter is used. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the process of step S1544 in the same process is performed. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it has not reached, the process proceeds to the process of step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1). That is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to the process of step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a problem with the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A problem has occurred in the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk. ”Is displayed and notified, and the drawing data received from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the data is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is displayed again. During the interval period until the start of, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, as described above. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect are used. A state in which there is a problem in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be the above does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is set to the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the signal is reached (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication error display process is always performed so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. The message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed and notified.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is activated, the left decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol are activated. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if it is a number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the connection recovery process is performed. The communication error display process of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device is used. The 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled. On the other hand, the door frame side effect transmitter is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start to the stop display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is information that the player is most interested in the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol being stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which is given is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect in the middle and recovering to the state where the drawing can be performed correctly. By stopping and displaying the decoration pattern on the right side, the drawing of the player's most interesting information is completed.

In this respect, the period during which the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the customer waiting state. During the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case of transmitting the LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, it is differential as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is, in the first place, the LOCKN signal output request data. As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to the control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a tells the effect display drive board 4450 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the effect display drive board 4450 has a problem. The notification image (for example, "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk.") Is controlled by the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to display the effect on the game board side. By outputting to 1600 and outputting a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is played from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the LOCKN signal output request data is received, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal as a response signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN. When no signal is input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Then, when the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. The clerk in the hall can check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without any trouble. ing. Therefore, it is possible to find a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, it is for the door frame side effect. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the receiver ICSDIC0 receives the image. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to convey that the drawn drawing data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a connection confirmation signal to inform that the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is started to be transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage and eliminate the defect. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by discovering and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the effect control microprocessor outputs the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which conveys that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication problem. Generates the message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk." It can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a detects a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall or directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall has a problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by detecting and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications. Is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not started and stopped, the communication problem can be resolved.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the above state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and solving a communication problem between image communications is performed. A connection confirmation signal for transmitting from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is sent to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. While the output is continuously repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the game is played. When the progress of the above is started again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is predetermined when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input. Data pattern (SYNC pattern) can be stopped to be transmitted to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It has become like. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the progress of the game is not executed. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion (distortion of the image) of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 is still present. Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the progress of the game again (every time the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2 is reached), the game can be made to be resolved.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 and a second start, which is a start area in which a game ball launched by a ball launching device 650 toward a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU952a of 70 is implemented.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on side process of FIG. 92 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM is used. The RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as the RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information regarding the payout, and the main control side power supply of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the turn-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time when the power is turned on) has elapsed, the error generated for the payout device 830 is cleared. As an error canceling signal for this purpose, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is not output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor, but is output to the payout control MPU952a which is a payout control microprocessor. ..

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on side process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information related to the above is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit power is turned on. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on) has elapsed, the payout device 830 is operated. As an error release signal for canceling the generated error, an error release function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor 952a without outputting it to the main control MPU1310a which is the game control microprocessor. Since it is provided in combination, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clear function, by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error clear function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 has various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit in which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. do.

In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a gaming ball driven into the gaming area to manipulate the flowing state of the gaming ball as desired and to obtain an unreasonable profit. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such an illegal game act and suppress the illegal act by a light emitting means, a voice alarm, or the like, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area. There is.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control related to the game progress and the production will be summarized.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 has a display mode (design, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310. It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the effect operation unit 400 and the movable member) that contribute to the effect.

In particular, in the main control board 1310, a special symbol process process is performed each time the interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second starting port winning processes are performed. In this first / second start opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning has been won, a process of increasing the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side by one is performed. Will be done.

If the processing flag is 0 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variable start process is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of pending hits is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored. , Update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the result of the jackpot determination memorized above and the current gaming state, etc. After determining and setting the fluctuation time of the special symbol (variation time from the start of the variation display to the stop display, etc.) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variable process is executed. In this variable processing, the timer monitors the variable time determined and set in the variable pattern setting process, and based on the time-out, the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed. To stop. After that, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (loss). The process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the jackpot game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game determined based on the type of the winning jackpot. Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the winning jackpot type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. After updating the game status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect appearing on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for missed reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuation. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined by the reach determination based on the reach random number that the reach is to be performed. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. The loss variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is to be performed. In the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is not performed. , An effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. Further, the fluctuation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is the fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to it, it is possible to appear such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 makes the effect display device 1600 appear the variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the acquired game information, and also changes the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation. Controls such as changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the movable effect unit 3100 after the backside are executed.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Assuming that the main control program has been shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. 104. (YES in step S5231) on condition that the detection signal by the start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first start port 2002), the random number for determining the first big hit is acquired from the above random number counter. A first start port passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol (YES in step S5233). A second start port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variation jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes the game after opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "16R probability variation jackpot", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "8R probability variation jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times to control the 8R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes after the game is repeated twice is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than left-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and right-handed is more advantageous than right-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handedness is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a jackpot game that is open for a long time of up to 8 rounds. Only the state (generally 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, there is a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of winning species). ), The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained when the big hit is won, such as the big hit game state of 16 rounds open for a long time (about 2000 game balls can be obtained) is executed. Therefore, when the transition to the right-handed state is controlled, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, in order to start such open control of the big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, there is a high probability according to the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is in a high-probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. Probability change big hit, 8R Probability change big hit B) is set when the game state is finished, and when the next big hit is made, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) It will be reset with.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. The jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 16R probability variation jackpot B, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is set at the end of the game state, and when the next jackpot is reached, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 to be described later is performed. Or, it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the big hit after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later is performed. Or, it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The fluctuation count counter is a counter that indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the fluctuation count counter is reset, and is used in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is a thing, and it is updated (for example, count-up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B). It is reset when starting the jackpot game state based on.

If the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set as the process of step S5236. To determine. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the large winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving are performed. Each set process such as the number of times counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is set. On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, when the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in the pending state is not lost (unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the pending status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second big hit judgment random number will be performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only maintains the driving of the game ball (right-handed) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the random numbers for determining the two big hits can be continuously performed without interruption.

In addition, the special figure game (design variation) using the second special figure (second special symbol) is limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). However, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5322).

Now, assuming that the first start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 in the process of step S5231, as shown in FIG. 105. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S5421, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) Is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" which is (upper limit value) (step S5242). If it is determined in the process of step S5422 that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to make the state of S5243 to S5245, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, information on the symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on variation pattern numbers for pre-reading determination, etc.) are generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5422, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S5233, the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 106. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, for second jackpot symbol). Random numbers, random numbers for the second variation display pattern) are acquired from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" (step S5252). If it is determined in the process of step S5252 that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to bring the state to the above, the following steps S5253 to S5255 will be performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the second special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, and the small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). The command to be executed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since it is a program module of the above and only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The big hit judgment random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read big hit judgment random number, lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. 1st special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. 2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the determination process of the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )

3. 3. Execution corresponding to the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 108, first steps S5301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is a change display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variation display pattern). The random number stored in the area is read from the RAM of the same main control. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. First-in, first-out (First-In) random numbers related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) The shift operation is performed in the mode of First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize is given to the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). .. Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and responds to the occurrence of a start prize to the second start port 2004. The random numbers extracted by the above are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the variable display hold is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). ..

After that, as the process of step S5305, the big hit determination process, which is the determination process for the hit or miss of the big hit, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is shown in FIG. If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state is low probability for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). The jackpot judgment table for low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high used when the gaming state is high probability time (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability. Then, in the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332. The first big hit judgment random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so as to match the deviation judgment value indicating that the first big hit judgment random number of the type is the above loss (big hit probability at low probability; generally). "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the reference big hit judgment table at the time of low probability, 204 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers match the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 65332 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The above-mentioned second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately 1/321).

Further, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are used. The above-mentioned first big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the off-determination value (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating that the above is lost. The random numbers for determining the second big hit are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). The jackpot judgment value (of the jackpot judgment value) set in the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number. The number of big hits may be the same and the big hit judgment values may be different (the big hit probability is the same), or the number of big hit judgment values may be different (the big hit probability is different). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the low probability and the big hit judgment table at the high probability may be different (they may be different). ..

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5315). ), Set the jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot (step S5316), and end the jackpot determination process.

Further, when it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been lost, the random number for jackpot determination read out matches the small hit determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won based on the selected jackpot determination table. Whether or not it is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (a loss determination is made).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5317 that the result is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the built-in ROM of the main control, and is used when the gaming state is in the high-probability non-time saving state. It is provided with a reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of the above, and a reach determination table in a low-probability state used when the gaming state is a low-probability state (low-probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. The above reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, it matches the reach judgment value indicating that all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers do not reach. In this way, it may not match the reach determination value indicating reach.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the low probability state than in the high probability time reduction state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-time saving state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state and the low-probability state. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the random number for reach is reached and the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating reach is the same as in the low-probability non-time-saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). , The reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 111. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B) and reads out the random number for the first jackpot symbol in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. And the selected symbol determination table are compared with each other to determine the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers) for the determination result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). Random numbers for the first big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) is displayed. Here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other.

In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of the big hit is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big hit symbol. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. .. More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probabilistic jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and production contents for each type of jackpot.
1. 1. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2103 wins nine game balls, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state. Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state. Is controlled by the effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 that is in a relatively advantageous state.

2. 2. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state. Controls the variable display of the special symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or wins a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state. An 8R normal jackpot that performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated, and is controlled by the effect mode indicated by the effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time saving state.

3. 3. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2103 wins nine game balls, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 16R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 16R big hit game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state (success production). ) Is performed, and the effect mode is controlled by the effect display device 1600 to indicate that the effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect was controlled to the high probability time saving state. 16R probability change jackpot

4. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2103 wins nine game balls, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state (failure effect). ) Is performed, and the effect mode is controlled to indicate that the effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect was controlled to the high probability time saving state. 8R Probability change jackpot B

5. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2103 wins nine game balls, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 2R big hit game state, it is special. While controlling the variable display of the symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or winning a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), a specific character during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state Performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which the player is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled by the effect mode indicating that the effect display device 1600 is in a relatively disadvantageous state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 1403, and the big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win a prize at the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 Only the variation display is executed, and a big hit (16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

Also, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that opens the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated 8 times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

If the 8R probability variation jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 8R probability variation jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot symbol is selected as the jackpot symbol. decide. Although not shown, if the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot symbol. If the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, if the big hit flag is not set in the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of the next step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol (the mode when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped) is set. After determining (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Further, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a lost symbol as an mode when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is one of the above lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, missed reach, missed) as the process of step S5337. (May indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the instruction (may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

The peripheral control MPU1511a displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol →. Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU1511a is determined to be a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it is determined to be a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols). In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; reach loss. If the design is determined to be out of order, it is determined to be an outlier design without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different from the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU1511a makes the effect display (special display mode) of the hit time appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. After the start of the game, the effect display during the big hit game will appear.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 112. If this is done (step S5341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of a big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and a small hit flag is selected. If is set (step S5433), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S5345) is selected. When (not shown) is selected (step S5346) and none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when the normal loss (the loss without performing the reach effect) occurs, the time of the loss occurs. (Not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The fluctuation pattern table of this example is used as a random number for jackpot determination (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) and a random number for jackpot symbol (random number for first jackpot symbol, random number for second jackpot symbol). Multiple types are provided for each judgment result based on. Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each random number for the first variable display pattern. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a reads out the variable pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variable pattern tables according to the determination result based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number, and in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the random number for the variable display pattern and acquiring the variable time information associated with the random number for the variable display pattern read out from this table, the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Determine the fluctuation pattern of. As a result, the determination process for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59. Random numbers for different types of variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectation is executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns have high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

The super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game state, the player for the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed. Expectations are increasing. That is, such a super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit, and the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state even if a loss is finally displayed. Will be able to increase. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game state, a high-expected notice effect, which is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern, appears during the period when the super reach effect is being executed. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the first jackpot and the random number for the first jackpot symbol and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state are obtained. A fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common with. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the second big hit and the random number for the second symbol and is used to determine the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 0.1 seconds or more. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 2004 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time-saving state. At the same time as urging, the player has secured time for the second starting port 2004 to win the game ball.

In addition, when 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol is lost, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) is selected. It will be possible to prevent the waste from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the region directly above the gate portion 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate portion 2003 in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%). The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously accepted (a time saving state in which almost all the game balls driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "about 1/32". It will be possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol coming off based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shows the fluctuation time of the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) extremely. It can be set to a short 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is completed in a time (0.1 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so that 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are accepted into the second starting port 2004 one after another, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being ejected without being subjected to the lottery process. ..

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 113, first steps S5371. As the process of, the variation timer in which the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process for the variation pattern (step S5282) is set is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the fluctuation time timer is not 0 even though the fluctuation timer is subtracted by 1 (step S5371), until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the process of steps S5371 and S5372 is performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 114, first steps S5381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the master control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot gaming state (step S5387). The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is set. When the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation count counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step). S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the jackpot game in the above-mentioned jackpot control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variation jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot B) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, and 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game state (battle effect or additional challenge effect) according to the type of the jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the state is in the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) (here). Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is started. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of updating to (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) described above determines that the small hit execution flag is set. The small hit game state will be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is regarded as a loss, and the first special symbol process without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394). That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag and the small hit executing flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is played according to the hold status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S5401 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S5405) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is the mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S5407) for executing a process for controlling the

The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S5402).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S5401 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the above As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

If it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to put the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols into a new pending state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the normal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, if it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the processing of step S5421, as shown in FIG. 117. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S5422, the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Random numbers stored in the earliest storage area among random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random numbers and random numbers with variable figures) are read from the same RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The random numbers (ordinary random numbers, variable random numbers in the normal figure) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) in the time saving state if the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426). In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), a non-time saving hit determination table (not shown) is selected (not shown). Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU1310a, and is used when the game state is the time saving time (high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time-saving normal map hit determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all the 255 types of ordinary random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers were won, and the normal figure is used. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating the deviation. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the game ball is always won in the normal drawing, the movable piece is opened, and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. It controls acceptance as much as possible. Not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be made to match the judgment value per normal figure indicating that the normal random numbers have been won.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it may match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that all 255 types of normal random numbers have been won per normal number. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal map, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won in the normal drawing, so that the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting port is opened. There is no possible control over the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as described above, the winning of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that of the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning. At that time, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. (Ii) The acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004 may be disabled.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol per normal symbol as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S5431), while the normal symbol changes when it is determined to be out of order as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to obtain the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing)). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and the effect according to the game situation can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern specification command reception waiting process, effect symbol change start process, effect symbol change process, effect symbol change stop process, jackpot display process , The big hit in-game process, and the big hit end effect process are executed.

Fluctuation pattern specification command reception wait process: During the period from the main control MPU1310a to the reception of the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern, it is applied to the effect (demo effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variable state and the control related to the jackpot is not performed. While performing control, when a fluctuation pattern command related to the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start processing.

Directional symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol variation period are determined based on the variation pattern command, and the decorative symbol variation is started based on the determined effect content. To control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol change. Of the fluctuation patterns (effect patterns), most of the "variation patterns stopped by the jackpot symbol (effect pattern)" are prepared in the form of being paired with the "variation pattern stopped by the lost symbol (effect pattern)". By functioning as the same fluctuation pattern (effect pattern), it becomes possible to provide an effect as to whether a jackpot symbol appears or a lost symbol appears. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is described below, when the description is described as "predetermined fluctuation pattern" or "specific fluctuation pattern", unless otherwise specified, it is stopped by the "big hit symbol". It means both a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)" and a "predetermined fluctuation pattern stopped by a lost pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)", and as a result of the progress of the production content in the same manner. You will reach a turning point where either the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Process during effect symbol change: Controls to start various effect contents determined in the effect symbol change start process at each timing during the symbol change period, and when the change time ends, the value of the process flag is set to the effect symbol. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.
Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing: Controls to stop the fluctuation of decorative symbols based on the reception of a command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols, and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, when the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and when the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the value of the process flag is changed to the variable pattern specification command reception waiting process. Update to the value corresponding to.

Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

Process during big hit game: Controls various effects during the period when the big hit game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (display effect for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended, etc.) is controlled during the period from the end of the big hit game state to the variable permissible state. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the process of waiting for the variable pattern specification command reception.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern is determined. It is controlled so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on (variation effect).

The effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variable effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variable effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may try to do it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with a part of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (variation effect) is determined in this way, a notice lottery (determination process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By performing control (processing during effect symbol change) to make the advance notice effect won in the advance notice lottery appear at a predetermined timing while the above-determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed, a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. It is designed to suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on the appearance mode of them as a compoundable possibility.

Conventionally, in such a composite effect, a plurality of the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) may be generated and executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. By doing this, it is expected that the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency of executing multiple timer effects while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. , It was considered difficult to fully improve the game entertainment.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" is intended for a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is the first predetermined numerical value. It is executed as a count effect display from (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"), or as a standby display (in preparation, etc.) before starting the count display. Is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, a production (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A) that causes either a production mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (a production mode with a low degree of expectation) or a production mode that is advantageous (a production mode with a high degree of expectation) appears. , B, etc.) is the target of the timer effect, and it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the timer effect on the advance notice side executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the effect target at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. Further, the "timer effect effect target" is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") as the timer effect. Therefore, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the passage of time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count-up or count-down is performed, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to accurately indicate the number of seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (timer effect on the advancer side) as the effect content that appears only when the user wins the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern determined based on the determination table T1 ( It is possible to execute the timer effect (variable side timer effect) that is built in in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if only the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed as the count effect display as "the effect content of the advance notice effect that functions so that the jackpot expectation is added to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, by executing it as "the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command", the degree of expectation from the jackpot expectation indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command It will be possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessary addition (addition of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the advance notice lottery"). For example, if the jackpot expectation when a specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", the jackpot expectation is increased by the combined effect function when the advance timer effect is further executed. For example, it becomes "40%" and the appearance frequency has to be reduced by that amount, but when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, a big hit is expected. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

The degree of expectation of a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the effect pattern). Basically, the expectation of a big hit as the variation number increases. There is a tendency for the degree to increase. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variable side timer effect in which the "conversation notice" is the effect target is executed as the effect content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 (variation number 9). 10) <Variation number 17 (18) is set. Further, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail here, but even in the determination table referred to in the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself itself. As a result, an effect pattern (count variation pattern) in which the variable side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variation side timer effect for the conversation notice. It differs from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that. Further, the variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 9 and 10 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 11 and 10. In No. 12, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in A is executed, and in the variable numbers 13 and 14, the conversation notice and the cut-in A are executed, and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. It differs in that it can be done. Further, the variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 17 and 18 are executed by the variable side timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 19 and 18. In 20, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in B is executed, and in the variable numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. It differs in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice is executed. Is set so that the jackpot expectation tends to be higher when the variable side timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-in A and B is executed.

It should be noted that the "conversation notice" is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and is often added with a relatively low expectation. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and the expectation is relatively high. It is a production that often happens (or a production that always has a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set so that the appearance rate (execution probability) is higher than other effects (cut-in A, B, the character A operation, B, etc. described later) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be done. Further, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable effect is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the content of the advance notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the notice is given. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B, not the cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect content (effect pattern) is obtained for a plurality of variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as a timer effect on the variable side. On top of this, if the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6) such as shortened fluctuation or normal reach effect with low expectation", the count effect display as the timer effect on the advance notice side is displayed. The variation pattern is "the variation pattern that executes the variation side timer effect" while the expectation level UP when the notice side timer effect appears is appropriately secured so that the effect is not won (increasing the premium degree). In the case of "variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22 and the like count fluctuation patterns)", the fluctuation pattern is of the above-mentioned predetermined type (for example, fluctuation) as compared with the case where it is not such a count fluctuation pattern. The ratio corresponding to numbers 1 to 6 etc.) is set to be low.

Here, 14 fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count fluctuation patterns in which the variable side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0) are prepared. Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) (variation numbers 5 and 6) that may be set to individual) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4,7,8,15,16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns in which the variable side timer effect is not executed, and four of them (variation) are prepared. Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variable side timer effect) (count variation pattern), it is more noticeable than the case where the variation side timer effect is not performed. The rate at which it is determined that the count effect display (timer effect on the notice side) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one effect pattern (variable effect) without unnecessarily increasing the degree of expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The rate at which the advance notice side timer effect appears differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern the count fluctuation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice side timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. At that time, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice side timer effect may appear with a low probability. Further, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability is executed, in reality, it is a bigger hit than in the case of loss. The effect pattern that has been won in the above can appear with a higher lottery probability, and the variable number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display is announced depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio to be executed as the effect content (timer effect on the notice side) will be different. Therefore, among the above-mentioned count fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays is high in one effect pattern (variation effect), the type thereof. Depending on the situation, the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear can be further increased, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect content of the same reach type appears, the variable side timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the advance timer side timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern as compared with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation side timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side is determined by the advance notice lottery) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable side timer effect and notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. It will be possible to make it possible, and by extension, it will be possible to realize the production opportunity of the double timer without unnecessary addition of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case, the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "conversation notice" is the effect target and the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "cut-in" is the effect target. The mode of the count display (form, color, etc. of the count number) is different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the mode of the count display of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. By doing so, in combination with "the ratio of appearance of the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect is set to be different depending on which count fluctuation pattern is used", the ease of appearance of the advance notice side timer effect is recognized. You will be able to expect.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the advance notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), the variable side timer effect (variable side) regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in). The mode of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display) may be different (or at least different from any one), or may be the same (or at least the same as any one). ..

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the timer effect on the advance notice side (count effect display on the advance notice side) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be produced. It is useful for making the player aware that the timer effect on the advance notice side, which is set to a high degree, is appearing, and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the advance notice side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). Regarding the above-mentioned common aspect as the advance notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of aspects (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) having different expectations are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do so.

Further, in order to make it possible to more preferably recognize that the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the count display when the advance notice side timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable side timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down) different. In such a configuration, even during the period in which the count display is in progress after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is closely watched, and it is relative to the variable side timer effect having a relatively low expectation. It becomes possible to make an interest in which of the timer effects on the advance notice side, which has a high degree of expectation, is being executed, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the timer digestion period.

At this time, in the variable side timer effect, the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed) as the count speed of the advance notice side timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count is displayed in a mode (conversation notice) in which the count is displayed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the timer effect on the notice side (cut-in), whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed. It will be possible to add fun by making the difficulty of judgment different. Further, in the variable side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and erasure of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. By displaying it, the count may be displayed.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is easy to grasp whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and the entertainment of the game will be improved.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a count is displayed for the fluctuation pattern (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the variable side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect is acquired, one of the above-mentioned plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for the effect, etc., and the count display of the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed is different. I try to give it fun

In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect effect target and reach) in which the start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) of the count display is different for one fluctuation pattern. Although it was decided to prepare the same production content), multiple production patterns (however, timer production production targets) with different start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) are used. The type of effect and the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern may be the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared so as to have a one-to-one correspondence.

In addition, the count display number (total number of counts) when appearing between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect can be made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice By making the selection rate of the specific count display number different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to give fun by making it difficult to judge whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. ..

Further, while the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed in the countdown display, if the timer effect on the variable side is executed in the countup display, it is deterministically grasped whether or not the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and that the game will be greatly improved. Further, while the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed in the countdown display, the timer effect on the variable side targeting the specific effect (for example, conversation advance notice) is executed in the countup display, and the effect different from the specific effect (for example, for example). If the variable side timer effect for cut-in) is executed in the countdown display, it will be interesting to make it difficult to judge whether the notice side timer effect is executed or not depending on the effect target. You will be able to grant it.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is set as the effect target for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are set as the effect target. To control. When the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, compared to the case where different effects are targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Even if the ratio of the jackpot expectation is set to be high and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display is displayed. I try to make the end timing different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, one of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect has a predetermined value first. At this point, it is as if a different effect is being produced (the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) because the count display of the other is continued while the process ends when It looks like it is. After that, the other count display that has been continued will reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of the effect. Even if it is clarified that the conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for the production by the timer production on the finished side, a different production that can appear after that is targeted for the production ( It is expected that the timer effect will be executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) to maintain the expectation and improve the game entertainment.

Further, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect in this way, the timing at which the variable side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the advance notice side timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to make a display corresponding to the end of counting (for example, "count successful!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear separately at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect for the effect of the "conversation notice" executed as the effect of the variable side or the advance notice side are made to appear in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but in the variable side timer effect, as the variable side effect in relation to the "conversation notice". While the count display is advanced according to the variable side specific effect that occurs ("count success!", Effect according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.), in the notice side timer effect, it is related to "conversation notice". The count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect that occurs as the effect on the notice side (such as "Chance UP!" Or the timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined few seconds before the start of the effect)). By advancing, different count end correspondence displays will appear at different timings.

By the way, each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is required to be executed without fail when it is targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect (when the count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notices and cut-ins are effects that can be executed in multiple modes with different expectations. Therefore, when the target is the effect target of the variable side timer effect, it is relative when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is required to appear in a mode with high expectation. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable side timer effect and the effect target are simply executed by the effect pattern. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with relatively high expectations) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable side timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the effect target is always selected in the advance notice lottery. ..

If each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is not targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect, it is determined whether or not to appear as the effect content of the notice side in the advance notice lottery described later, as well as the advance notice. It is determined in what mode (a mode having a relatively high expectation or a mode having a low expectation) as the effect content on the side, and the control related to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination. ..

The following is a summary of the effect pattern determination process using FIG. 118.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU1310a, first, the current game is based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation degree) to the probability change expectation degree when a specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the big hit game state. become.

Next, as the effect patterns associated with the variation numbers, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display appearing in the variable side timer effect) are prepared so as to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the winning of the jackpot determination. At this time, if the jackpot judgment is won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is delayed is high, and the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set accordingly. The later it is, the more likely it is that a jackpot symbol will appear.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in this case, among the plurality of effect patterns, the effect pattern set so that the variable side timer effect does not appear is selected.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change) that appears during the symbol change is selected in this way, what kind of advance notice effect is given within the execution period of the effect pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in any manner (notice lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) already described, a description of automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly explained.

In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game to realize a production that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach is supposed to improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds according to the type and some that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is a corresponding default sound. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize a variety of sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channels to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 (sound). While each channel is dynamically assigned and managed for each sound to be output from the output means) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), the number of combinations of sounds to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). .. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 119 (A) and 119 (B) show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison target with respect to the present embodiment, respectively. FIG. 119 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is an abbreviation for the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used, as shown in the figure. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a pair of a playback channel and a sound is assigned exclusively to prevent overwriting of the sound. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which the reproduction is started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and is muted. As a channel allocation method, the same channel is assigned so that the playback timing is not affected as much as possible.

In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that hinder overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap in playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by a fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it means that the output is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and indicates that the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

122 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122 (C) says that each sound cannot be reproduced when it is attempted to be reproduced. It shows an example of the problem. In FIGS. 122 (A) to 122 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 122 (A), the game states are “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop”, and “big hit” in order along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "medium".

In the "first half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in the problem 1 of FIG. If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A", so that the "first half notice A" The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold prize sound, and the output of the "first half notice A" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in the problem 2 of FIG. If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full-screen notice", so that the "full-screen notice" is given. The playback sound of "" will be overwritten by the hold prize sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound will stop (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 123 (A) and 123 (B) show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as the present embodiment, respectively.

FIG. 123 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the above-mentioned sound control by a fixed channel means that the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). The point is different. Here, the fact that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned according to a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is an abbreviation for the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 123 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this automatic channel method, priority is assigned to each sound individually as shown in the figure. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which the reproduction is started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and is muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce the sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for designating a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when playing a new sound, if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group, the sound is played immediately.

In the above case, if there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all the channels currently being played in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly played. If there is a channel having a lower priority than or the same as the sound being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than the sound being reproduced or is not the same, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound.

FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, the playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, such as the sound control by the fixed channel already explained, are used for each sound division and sound name. Instead of sound number, playback type setting and output type setting, identifier and priority for specifying AUTO group (also called "playback priority"), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seekpoints, playback type settings, and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents in which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which each sound is present. Further, the priority order is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced at the same time. As for this priority, the larger the numerical value is, the more preferentially the sound should be reproduced, while the smaller the numerical value is, the less preferentially the sound should be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority is, for example, a notification sound having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3"). , A sound effect having a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmation sound" and "button pressing sound"), a BGM having a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10". Sounds (such as "full-screen notice sound"), soundes with a priority of "05" ("first half notice sound" to "second half notice sound"), and pending winning sounds with a priority of "01" It is supposed to be. As a result, when an attempt is made to reproduce a notification sound in a state where there is no free channel, for example, it is not necessary to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having a lower priority (for example, a pending winning sound) is not required to be reproduced. ) Is being played back, and the notification sound is played with priority.

As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the initial sound image localization positions of the left and right speakers in combination with the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers in combination with the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

Further, as already explained, the upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, the upper and lower of a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It shows the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, there is a difference in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. This upper and lower bread initial value is managed as bread information. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

Similarly, the initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set in the setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example, and in addition, "1" (0x1FF for 0xFF) in the third byte. By setting), it will not be affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices installed in the gaming machine, and it will always be played at the volume set by the default value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds.

The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as this seek point, for example, "0" is set for each of the "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to the "first half notice A sound effect", while the "second half notice A sound effect" and the "second half notice B effect" are set. [1] is set for each of "sound". With such a seek point, it is possible to register sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered in the sound source when the maximum number of sounds that can be registered is exceeded.

The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and indicates that the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 126 (A) and 126 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop”, and “middle symbol stop” are sequentially obtained as game states along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "during a big hit".

In the "first half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on, for example, the reproduction channels 00 to 01 (as a part thereof). Corresponds to range A). Here, when an attempt is made to reproduce the hold prize sound as a new sound because there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure), the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be played back using the playback channels 12 to 13, any of the playing sounds is not overwritten by the holding winning sound (corresponding to the "holding sound reproduction" in the figure), and the others. The output of all kinds of sounds continues.

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 (reach BGM reproduction). Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, when an attempt is made to play a hold prize sound as a new sound because there is a start prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure), playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , All other types of sounds continue to be output without any of the playing sounds being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to the "holding sound playback" in the figure).

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), for example, since a notification (corresponding to the "notification 2 occurrence" in the figure) has occurred, the notification sound having the highest priority of "25" as a new sound (corresponding to the "notification 2 occurrence" in the figure). When an attempt is made to reproduce (corresponding to the illustrated "notification 2"), as a result of searching for a free channel, it is found that there is no free channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels for reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to the “notification sound 2” in the figure) to be reproduced next is set. Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced on the reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten by the notification sound.

FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is used as the work name for each channel, such as setting reservation flag, request sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority at the time of automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, and volume control. It includes a work for pan and a work for pan control, and has each information corresponding to these.

If the value of the setting reservation flag is other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The playing sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly assigned when it is "0", while the channel is automatically assigned when it is "1 to" ("Sound control by the automatic channel method" described later. Equivalent to). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, if it is "1", it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound as "0". The elapsed time from the registration is the elapsed time among the plurality of playing sounds when trying to play a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. Used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been played for a longer period of time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-mentioned left and right pan and upper and lower pan set values.

FIG. 128 shows an example of a search process for an empty channel when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. Also in FIG. 128, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

When there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1100A), the effect control program confirms the automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102A), and when this automatic allocation group is "0", the fixed allocation is performed. Is determined, and playback of a new sound is started on the specified channel.

On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than "0", the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation is automatic, and determines whether or not the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). ..

The effect control program determines whether or not a vacant (monaural) channel (1 channel) exists when the new sound is monaural (step S1108A), and if it exists, the vacant (monaural) channel. ) The reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel (step S1109A), and if it does not exist, the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority as the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether or not the channel exists (step S1110A).

The effect control program terminates the process if there is no channel of the reproduced sound having the same or lower priority than the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, while if it exists. Determines whether or not a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1112A).

If there are multiple applicable channels, the effect control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time from the registration among the applicable channels based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel of (step S1114A). On the other hand, when the corresponding channel does not exist and is one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel satisfying the desired condition (step S1116A).

On the other hand, in step S1106A described above, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120A). When the effect control program determines that an empty channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproducing the new sound (step S1122A).

On the other hand, when the effect control program determines that there is no free channel, it determines whether or not there is a new sound with the same or lower priority in the (stereo) channel of the sound being played (step). S1124A) Since the processing is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, if it exists, the effect control program determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

The effect control program starts the output of the above-mentioned new sound on the (stereo) channel satisfying the desired condition when there are not a plurality of applicable channels, while the above-mentioned is described when there are a plurality of applicable channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

As described above, the effect control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such a search process for free channels will be described in a more visual and easy-to-understand manner.

129 (A) and 129 (B) to 132 (A) and 132 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 129 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for a normal BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 129 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A having a priority of 05 occurs, and reproduce channels 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel in the wake of a request for reproduction of the hotan pressing sound having a priority of 20, and selects the reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the button pressing sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B having the priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 06 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these playback channels 06 to 07.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels in the wake of a request for reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound having a priority of 20, and selects the reproduction channels 08 to 09. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C having a priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 10 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 11, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is started to be played back in stereo using these playback channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels in the wake of a request for reproduction of the reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, and selects the reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and selects the reproduction channels 14 to 15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

133 (A) and 133 (B) to 136 (A) and 136 (B), respectively, show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 133 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for reach BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reach BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 133 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and the reproduction channels 02 to 03 have vacancy. Since it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

After repeating the above processing, the effect control program then, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), triggers the occurrence of a playback request for the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10, and the vacant channel. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a reproduction request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25, and is shown in FIG. 134 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (empty)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and reproduces channels 04 to 05 (reproduction channels 04 to 05). Since there is a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the accessory warning sound having a priority of 10 occurs, and the reproduction channels 12 to 13 are performed. Since there is a vacancy in the space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the reserved winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 (reproduction channels 14 to 15). Since there was a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), the effect control program searches for a vacant channel when a reproduction request for the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 occurs, but the vacant channel does not exist. Therefore, stop using the playback channels 14 to 15 that are playing the "holding winning sound" with the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being played, and use these playback channels 14 to 15 in stereo. Playback of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

By doing so, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is obtained. Each sound of will be played on the playback channel found by the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can the vacant channels be effectively utilized as described above, but also as many sounds as possible to be output can be produced by using each channel including the vacant channels. Since it can be played back, it is possible to realize a variety of sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

137 (A) and 137 (B) to 138 (A) and 138 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 137 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 137 (B), the effect control program searches for a free channel when a playback request for the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and reproduce channels 00 to 01. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (B), the effect control program searches for free channels when a playback request for the jackpot BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Because there is, the reproduction of the jackpot BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

In addition, when the replacement reproduction of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound which was reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the reproduction is completed. Needless to say, it is okay to do so.

[12-3. Variations on sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control by the automatic channel method has been described as an example by using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sound control by the fixed channel is used. Sound control may be performed as follows depending on the combination or the like.

FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (F) are diagrams showing variations of channel allocation in sound control by each of the above-mentioned two types of channel methods or a combination thereof, respectively.

FIG. 139 (A) shows an example of channel allocation in the sound control by the maximum number of channels (16 channels) fixed channel method described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 139 (B) shows this. Corresponding to the embodiment of the present invention described above, an example of channel allocation in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels is shown. Since the sound control by these two channel assignments has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 139 (C) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by an automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). .. FIG. 139 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed for some playback channels by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN3" in the figure).

FIG. 139 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for a maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for some playback channels by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 140 and later.

FIG. 139 (F) shows that while using one automatic channel group, channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels, sound control is performed by the automatic channel method, and sound by the fixed channel method described above is performed for some playback channels. Control is performed, but the difference from the above example is that the number of channels is secured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 139 (F) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 146 and later.

As shown in this embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped into one group, free channels are assigned or channels being output are replaced based on a predetermined standard, so that sound is produced. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority of. Therefore, unlike the conventional control method that outputs sound by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. It becomes.

Further, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels, for example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC having a small number of channels, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is reduced. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by the automatic channel method]
Subsequently, the details of another form of the above-mentioned sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as an automatic channel method, by dynamically changing the sound assignment to each channel, it was possible to effectively utilize the empty channels and reproduce many sounds, but the production of the game is In recent diversified gaming machines, hundreds or thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate the management of sound sources.

In addition, by outputting a plurality of sounds in an overlapping manner, it is possible to execute a preview effect in duplicate or to enable a variety of sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically assigning the plurality of sounds to the reproduction channel for each group, the sounds are surely duplicated and output. can do. It also has the advantage of facilitating management by dividing the sound into types.

Further, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the production sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start prize or the variable display is output. Output using the automatic channel method.

With the above configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the vacant channels by the automatic channel method and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Further, since it is possible to classify by the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, it becomes easy to manage the effect data.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 139 (C) and 139 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control in which fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel method are mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned example, the number of channels in the sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by the fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method. .. Further, the channels that reproduce the sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 140.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

The channel configuration table includes "automatic allocation" indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for the channel number, "classification" indicating the group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" of each channel. A "remark" is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG. 140.

As shown in FIG. 140, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is as follows: channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29 are. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

Further, the channel of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 is "AUTO group 1", and the channel of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 is "AUTO group 2".

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

The channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as "channel 0" and each channel is represented by "channel" + "channel number") is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting sound that is commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is started. Further, channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. be.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the stereo output is performed, but also a plurality of sounds are output at the same time to improve the sound quality of the BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (paired) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output at the same time. Furthermore, as will be described later, since it is possible to output BGM even on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to output four BGMs at the same time using a maximum of eight channels (4 pairs). It has become.

While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly played back. Therefore, the channel for playing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with the case of reproducing the sound only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of empty channels.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output when the advance notice effect is executed. In the advance notice effect, the sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. In this way, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition.

In the present embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned example, the channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound at the time of the advance notice production is AUTO group 1.

When outputting a sound at the time of executing the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is an empty channel, it is set to output the specified sound from the empty channel. On the other hand, if there is no free channel, the channel in use is opened to output a new sound or the output of the specified sound is stopped based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when the BGM is output by superimposing four sounds or when a specific effect sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notice effect output by the automatic channel method.

The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, similarly to the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the reserved sound is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, a sound output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound preferentially output at the time of confirming a big hit. The sound based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning is output from channels 24 to 29 as described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 reproduce a sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning prize and a sound output when the hold display changes at the start of the fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot confirmation even when there are no empty channels in channels 24 to 29, which attracts the attention of the player. Can be done.

Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, a fixed channel system in which an output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are surely transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel system channel is assigned when the output is constantly continued like BGM or when it is necessary to surely output like an abnormality notification sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, it is possible to prevent the sound from being output even though there are empty channels, and to create a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a free channel search process in the case of executing the control of outputting the sound of the present embodiment. FIG. 128 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 141 differs in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of common processing will be omitted.

In the free channel search process shown in FIG. 141, in the processes of steps S1108B and S1120B, when the new sound is an automatic channel method, it is determined whether or not a free channel exists in a channel of the same group. That is, even if the channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the result of step S1108B and step S1120B is "No".

Further, in the free channel search process shown in FIG. 141, when there is no free channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on a predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, the selection condition of the channel for stopping the sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. 142. It should be noted that the effect in which the sound output is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for replacing the sound output (stopping or opening the sound reproduction) when the channel is not available at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. .. As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being played and the new sound are compared, and the sound with higher importance is prioritized. As will be described later, the attributes include the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume size, the amount of change in the sound during playback, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection. Including the remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 128, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel having a long elapsed time from the start of reproduction in this way, the output of the sufficiently executed effect sound is ended, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the new effect has been executed.

Condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, an effect with a long reproduction time can be an effect with a high degree of expectation, so an effect with a short reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling the effect having a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total reproduction time regardless of the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of the effect having a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction, that is, the progress ratio of the effect, with respect to the time of the entire effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, an effect in which a loud sound is output can be a more important effect, so a channel having a low volume of output sound is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel having a large volume of output sound may be preferentially selected so that the player can recognize that a new effect is executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on the change in the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect of higher importance, and a channel having a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the channel with a large change in volume may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in the sound image localization position (panpot). For example, as a production that brings about a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the output of the left and right sounds of a stereo speaker can be a more important production, a channel with little change in the dynamic sound image localization position is used. Select with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on the note number (index). For example, select a number with a higher (smaller) note number. At this time, the priority may be associated with the sound number.

Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, it is assumed that the production that outputs the stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher expectation, and the channel that outputs the monaural sound is selected. On the other hand, since monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of free channels is not enough even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is opened, select the channel that outputs stereo sound in order to increase the free channels. You may do it.

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that the volume cannot be adjusted may be more important, or an effect set so as to be able to adjust the volume may be more important.

In addition to the conditions shown above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning a unique priority to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority.

In the table shown in FIG. 142, the conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied individually or may be applied in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example of controlling the channel allocation based on the priority assigned to the newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of the priority of sound effects in the production example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 143, the first half notice_A is generated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. At this time, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C is generated while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144, the priority of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set for the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the lower priority notice effects are duplicated in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppression volume value. It will be reduced.

Explaining the contents of each notice, the first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and the character appears on the display screen and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button press sound is played at the time of button operation (channels 18 and 19), the first half advance notice_B is started, and the effect is stereo from channels 10 and 11. Sound is output.

In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and the sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily The sound is muted (blackout production). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. The horizontal axis indicates the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) indicates the volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from the time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at the time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

After that, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the effect button is played back at the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output at the volume V_B. Further, since the priority of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

If the priority of the advance notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the advance notice effect being executed, the volume does not need to be lowered, and the sound effect output at the same time is also small. You do not have to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen goes dark until the time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output at the volume V_C.

Further, the output of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B mute from the time t3 is resumed at the time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until the time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at the time t3.

After that, the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B continue to be produced until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t8, the first half notice_C ends, and the first half of the fluctuation ends.

During the period when the effect sound effect is muted, the output of the effect sound effect may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound effect may be stopped. When setting the volume to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire staging sound effect is set to 0, and the output of the sound effect of the first half notice_C. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Further, even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, the sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds having higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is lowered. It may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being played on the same channel (fixed channel method, automatic channel method) may be lowered. Further, the volume of the sound being reproduced in the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1--4. effect]
With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the sound having a high priority can be preferentially output. High-priority sounds are, for example, sounds such as notification sounds and warning sounds that are surely transmitted to players and employees of the amusement park, and there is a high expectation that the result of variable display will be a big hit. It may be a sound effect to raise the expectation of the game, or it may be a sound effect that has a high directing effect and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, by classifying each channel used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups, it is possible to facilitate the management of the staging data related to the staging sound effect. This makes it possible to improve development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. In addition, by enabling stable games, it is possible to improve the interest of the games.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, it is a group that outputs a sound effect of a notice effect (AUTO group 1) and a group that outputs a hold-related sound effect (AUTO group 2). The number of sound effects for the preview effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of overlapping effect sound effects can be reproduced at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output a staging sound effect exceeding the number of allocated channels, such as executing a pre-reading notice of the pending fluctuation together with the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the interest of the game can be maximized by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while exchanging the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to AUTO group 1. ..

Further, the change of the hold display of the variable display and the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound effect along with the change can greatly increase the expectation of the player, and it is desirable that the effect is surely executed. .. In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect related to the hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the effect sound independently of the advance notice effect related to the variable display. can. In addition, unlike the case of the advance notice effect in the variable display, the number of effect sound effects output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to AUTO group 2, so the output of the effect sound effect is canceled. It is less likely to be done. Moreover, even if it is canceled, the output of the low-priority staging sound effect is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by surely performing a highly effective production that raises the expectation of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As mentioned above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are effectively utilized by searching for empty channels, and by setting priorities, directing effects and sounds of high importance are given priority and output. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when the sound is continuously output as in the case of BGM, or when the sound is preferentially output in order to notify the failure or fraudulent activity of the gaming machine. In this way, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and application of sound, each channel can be effectively used, and further, appropriate control can be performed according to the sound output status. For example, in the control to output the BGM, the sound may be output to the pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state, and in the control to output the alarm sound, the designated channel is not searched for an empty channel. The sound should be output directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel method, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of the vacant channels and to give priority to the output of the sound having a high effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute the effect having a high priority. In addition, the ongoing production can be continued without interruption while lowering the volume. At this time, it is also possible to return the volume to the original volume if the previously executed low-priority effect is still being performed even after the high-priority effect is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing the specific effect independently, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the production and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modification example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modified example in which the number of set channels and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set is variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Production example]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds of the same type than the number of channels that can be assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of performing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of screens (for example, divided into 9), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output the BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of the effect in the modified example of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 146 is a notice effect in the latter half change after the reach occurs.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect of displaying a different scene on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, any one of the scenes is selected, and the effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output at the same time. The scene may be selected by lottery or by the player.

The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Also, the default channel allocation is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 140. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (8 channels) of BGM at the maximum at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, the channels for outputting the BGM are reassigned, and the arrangement of the channels is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel layout]
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control in a modified example of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration at the time of executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration of FIG. 147 (A) is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 140, as described above.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 147 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 147 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 1 that adopt the automatic channel system is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the multi-screen effect.

After the start of the multi-screen effect, all the BGM corresponding to each scene is played while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGMs are output at a normal volume, the volume becomes too loud, so the volume is output in a state where the volume is lower than usual. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the volume of the BGM of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the playback of other BGMs is terminated. .. When the player selects a scene, for example, the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected, and the BGM of the selected scene is set to another BGM until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the volume of the BGM of other scenes may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 148 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement changes from the default state (FIG. 147 (A)) to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 147 (B). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the latter half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 146, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display area, and the BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change is output to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 147 (B)). At this time, the volume V_1, which is smaller than the normal volume V_1, is output.

After that, when the scene for which the production is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the latter half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

After the multi-screen effect is completed, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of the BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the latter half variation.

Further, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the content of the effect, the channel arrangement may be changed when the game state (for example, the effect mode such as the big hit state, the time saving state, the background change, etc.) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to "variable fixed channels" in FIG. 139 (F)) that perform sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. The number (corresponding to the "variable AUTOch" of 139 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to make more notification sounds, BGM or sound effects playable depending on the situation, for example, to output more types of notification sounds in a situation where the game is not played. It is possible to take flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects that should be reproduced in the production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

[16. Control for sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example of grouping channels and managing output sounds by associating them with each group has been described. Also, if the number of sounds that can be assigned at the same time in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being sounded is stopped and a new sound is output based on a predetermined condition, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group was explained. Here, when a sound is newly assigned to a channel and output, a case where control such as changing the volume of the sound being output by another channel is performed will be described.

After the start of the change of the special symbol, in the state before the reach occurs (during the first half change), the output of the sound by the BGM being reproduced and other effects is regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time together with the output of the predetermined sound effect. As a typical effect of performing such control, there is a blackout effect that regulates the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has passed after restricting the output of the sound effect, the darkening of the screen is canceled and the output of the sound by BGM or another effect is resumed, so that the newly output sound (the sound concerned). It is possible to draw the player's attention by highlighting the effect including the output of the above, and to increase the player's expectation for the fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is assigned to an empty channel and output instead of canceling the assignment of the channel on which the sound effect is output and assigning a new sound. In this case, in order to return the output of the BGM or the like to the state before the regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering the processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when different groups of sounds are being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and priorities are set for each group. Then, when the sound is output from the channel belonging to the low priority group, the case where the sound is newly output from the channel belonging to the high priority group will be described.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each channel group showing the priority of volume control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is divided into a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into 5 groups of 3.

Group volume priority and suppression volume value are set for each group. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In this embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and "1" has the highest priority.

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an mode in which the volume of other sounds being reproduced is changed when the sound is reproduced in a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when "-1" is set, the sound reproduction is continued as it is without changing other sounds being reproduced. When "0" is set, it is controlled to mute other sounds being played. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of other sounds being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. It should be noted that a numerical value of 100 or more may be set to control the volume to be larger than usual.

Further, when each set value is described with reference to FIG. 149, in the present embodiment as well, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed as in the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, a sound such as a notification sound or BGM that is preferentially output or is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of the effect are assigned.

In the fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to "1", which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced on the fixed ch1, all the other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the game hall as shown as a reference reproduction sound. It may be an alarm sound to notify that a failure has occurred in the game machine, or a notification sound such as a ball jam. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed ch1, the output of the staging sound effect or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output because the occurrence of fraudulent activity or failure is a factor. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

In the fixed ch2, the group volume priority is set to "4", which is the lowest in FIG. 149. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "-1", even if the sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch2, the other sounds being reproduced are not affected. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch2 is mainly the BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the effect sound effect that attracts the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol while the BGM is output, etc. Is output.

In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently.

Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound, as shown in the reference playback sound. The jackpot confirmation sound is a sound for notifying that the result of the variable display becomes a jackpot at a predetermined timing such as at the time of starting winning, and is a production sound effect that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, it has been confirmed that the game has transitioned to a high probability state. Can be made to.

The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that suppresses the output of other effect sound effects when the above-mentioned blackout effect is executed and is output in a silent state. At this time, the display on the effect screen is also dimmed. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot confirmation sound and V winning sound are suppressed in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is restarted. On the other hand, in the blackout sound effect, the player's attention is focused on the blackout effect by setting the state in which the sound effect due to other effects is not output for a predetermined time even after the blackout sound effect is output. Further, after the blackout effect is executed, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed in the fluctuation. For example, the blackout effect may be executed in the first half variation and the corresponding effect may be executed in the second half variation. You may do it.

In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when the sound is reproduced in AUTO group 2, all the sounds being reproduced in the group having the priority "4" or less are halved (50%). It is suppressed by the output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that attracts the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 2 include, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice sound effect.

In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50" as in the case of the AUTO group 2, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group having the priority of "3" or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the warning sound effect is output from AUTO group 2, the volume of the warning sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 is already halved, the volume may be continued without being changed, or the volume may be further halved (1/4 of the initial volume). You may.

Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the holding display has changed, and a button pressing sound indicating that the effect button has been pressed. be. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority is the same, the sound is output as it is at the normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of the BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when a game ball enters the starting winning opening, a holding winning sound is output even while the blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to a group to which the output sound of the present embodiment belongs. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1401). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1401 is "No"), the processes after step S1420 are executed.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1401 is "Yes"), and the volume control table for each channel group. From (FIG. 149), the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppressed volume value is “-1” (without suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "Yes"), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processes after step S1406 are executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, when control is performed for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have already been registered (the result of step S1404 is "Yes"), the processes after step S1406 are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a has the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the sound having the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

Explaining the control for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not the parameter of the sound that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced is registered in the work area (step S1410). If the parameter of the sound that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is "No"), the output of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set (step S1407).

Explaining the sound control executed in step S1410 or later, if a sound that suppresses the output of the sound being played is registered (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU1511a is a new playback request. The group volume priority of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority held in the work area (step S1411).

When the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the peripheral control MPU1511a performs a new reproduction request. The volume of the sound is reduced based on the suppressed volume value in the work area (step S1414).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is higher than the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU1511a newly reproduces. The work area is overwritten with the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound (step S1412), and the volume of the newly requested sound is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU1511a is set to the work area. While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). When the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppressed volume value (step S1416).

When the processing of step S1415 and step S1416 is executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU1511a has the suppression volume value and the group volume priority work. It is determined whether or not it has been registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is "No"), this process ends.

When the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process is completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1421 is "No"), this processing is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a determines the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority in the work area. (Step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1423, step S1424), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Next, the volume control of the sound will be described in chronological order. FIG. 151 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 151 describes an example of executing the advance notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed channel 2). As shown in FIG. 149, the fixed ch2 has a group volume priority of "4" and a suppressed volume value of "-1". Since the suppression volume value of the normal BGM is "-1", the sound is reproduced without recording the sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value of the normal BGM in the work area.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of holding winning is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The staging sound effect of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is "3", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1402 and step S1403 is "No"). .. Since the parameter was not recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half notice is recorded in the work area (step S1405).

At the start of the first half notice A, a normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is). "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is "="), the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set in advance. The determined volume value is set (step S1413).

At this time, since the normal BGM is being played and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half fluctuation (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the sound is based on the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A. Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of BGM is usually reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is blacked out. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

Further, since the group priority of the normal BGM and the effect sound effect of the first half notice A during playback is lower than that of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), these are The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, the sound is muted because the suppression volume value is 0.

Further, the second half notice B is started during the execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in a mute state, and the blackout effect is produced. Continue until is finished.

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, the hold winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority is the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameter recorded in the work area is maintained, and the volume is output at a predetermined volume. Therefore, the hold winning sound is output as usual even during the execution of the blackout effect.

Then, when the blackout effect is completed (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). .. Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the sound output of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the sound effect having a high group priority is output, the output of the sound effect having a low group priority can be suppressed to make a specific effect stand out. Furthermore, by volume control by the suppression volume value, the player can be made to recognize that multiple productions are in progress at the same time, and the production sound effects that greatly increase the player's expectation, such as the jackpot confirmation sound, are grouped. By setting a high priority, it is possible to execute without impairing the effect of the effect.

Further, when a new high-priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound effect during reproduction is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the effect sound effect being reproduced is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. Was controlled to decrease, but from the timing when the sound with high priority is output, the volume of other production sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out. May be good. In this case, the start value (volume currently being played), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified, or up to the target value based on the effect content such as the length of the reproduction time of the effect sound effect. The time to reach and the amount of change may be set. For example, if the output of the new production sound effect is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the production sound effect stand out, or if the output of the new production sound effect is relatively long, the target. It is also possible to set a long time to reach the value to reduce the discomfort that may occur when the effect sound is switched.

For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the production sound effect during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time. It is possible to make the newly output sound effects stand out without breaking the tempo of the game.

Furthermore, when the output of the new effect sound effect ends and the output of the other effect sound effect is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound effect is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume under regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% when the sound effect of the first half notice A is played, but when the output of the normal BGM is restarted, the normal volume is set as the target value and the start value (the volume currently being played here. Then, the volume is suppressed to 50%), and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort while making the switching of the staging sound effect stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the staging sound effect as an example, it can be similarly applied to the case of the alarm sound and the notification sound. As an example, when a notification sound with high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraudulent activity) is output, not only the effect sound effect but also the notification sound with relatively low importance (priority) (for example). For example, the output of the ball jam notification sound) may be restricted. On the other hand, if a fraudulent act is performed while the notification sound of low importance (priority) is being output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted and the notification sound (alarm) of high importance (priority) is interrupted. The sound) may be given priority for output.

As for the alarm sound and the notification sound, the sound output time is not set as in the staging sound effect, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the alarm or the notification is eliminated. Therefore, when multiple types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, other notification sounds are output. .. At this time, the sound having the next highest priority may be output to regulate the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output at the same time.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long and short)]
In the above, the control of the sound that is output in duplicate according to the priority between the groups has been explained. Subsequently, a control example for controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long or short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table by sound effect]
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each effect sound showing volume (volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of the sound in the present embodiment. The playback channel (ch) used, the total playback time, and the suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

Similar to the example shown in FIG. 149, the used reproduction channel is divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

The total playback time is the time from the start to the stop of the sound effect output. When -1 is set for the total playback time, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by other output sound effects. At this time, the volume of the sound effect is controlled so as not to be suppressed.

When 0 is set for the total playback time, the loop playback is repeatedly output, and the output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is a number other than this (positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. The unit of the total reproduction time is millisecond (ms).

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect of changing the volume of other sound effects output at the same time, as in the example shown in FIG. 149. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the sound being played is continued as it is without changing the sound being played, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being played (in the total playing time-). Suppress (silence) the output of (excluding the sound effect for which 1 is set). In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

Subsequently, when each sound effect is described with reference to FIG. 152, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed in the present embodiment as in the above-described embodiment, and the assigned sound effect is also the same. Is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but it may be set for each sound effect.

Since the total playback time is set to "-1" and the suppression volume value is set to "0" for the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch1, if these sound effects are played, the other sound effects being played are set. All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the game hall, and is a sound effect that is output because it is caused by a fraudulent act or a failure. The volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped or muted).

Since the total playback time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects are designed so that they do not affect other sounds being played. The sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2 is mainly BGM in the game.

Since the total playback time is set to the value (playback time) set for each sound effect and the suppression volume value is set to "0" for the sound effect assigned to AUTO group 1, the notification sound output from the fixed channel 1 is set. All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound, as shown in FIG. 149.

For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, the total playback time is set to the value (playback time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to "50", so that in AUTO group 2. When a sound is reproduced, the output of all other sounds being reproduced is halved (suppressed to 50% output). As a result, for example, the specific sounds output by AUTO Group 2, which can halve the output of the BGM and make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game, include, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect. Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and pressing the effect button. It is a button press sound to notify.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In the present embodiment, the output of the sound effects to be reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effects. FIGS. 153A and 153B are flowcharts showing a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the output of the sound effect in this embodiment will be described.

When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1501A is "No"), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1501A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made, and the volume for each sound effect. The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 152) (step S1502A).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppressed volume value is “-1” (without suppression control) (step S1503A). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "Yes"), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing after step S1506A is executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "No"), that is, when control is performed for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), the processes after step S1506A are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total reproduction time of the sound requested to be reproduced. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1506A). When there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1510A.

Explaining the sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is "-1". (Step S1510A). When the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new reproduction is performed. Suppression of the volume of the reproduced sound is prohibited, and the output of other sound effects during reproduction is forcibly suppressed.

Peripheral control MPU1511a sets a predetermined volume value for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Further, the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request has been made are overwritten in the work area (step S1512A).

Then, the peripheral control MPU1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513A). When the volume of all the sound effects during reproduction is suppressed, the processes after step S1530A are executed (step S1514A).

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is not "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1". It is determined whether or not "-1" or a sound number is set in the work area (step S1520A). If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is "-1" or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "Yes"), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1" and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a is set. It is determined whether or not the suppressed volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppressed volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

When the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU1511a is the sound for which the new reproduction request is made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request is made is shorter or the same as the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the volume of the sound for which the new playback request has been made is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "No"), the volume of the sound for which the new playback request has been made. Is set to a reduced volume value based on the suppressed volume value of the work area (step S1525A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). When the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is "No"), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

When the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the processes of steps S1526A and S1527A for all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the processes after step S1530A (step S1528A).

When the volume control for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU1511a has a sound number, a suppressed volume value, and a total reproduction time. Determines whether or not has been registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are not registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "No"), this process ends.

When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time are registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. Is determined (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1531A is "No"), this processing is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erase (step S1532A). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1533A, step S1534A), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effect in the present embodiment. Next, the volume control of the sound will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 154 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 154 describes an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming is started and the normal BGM is output. Normally, the BGM is output on the fixed ch2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. 152. Further, the normal BGM is a loop reproduction in which the reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "Yes"), normally the BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set, and a normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is "No").

Further, since the parameter is not registered in the work area at this point (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A are held in the work area (). Step S1505A).

Further, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the BGM is normally playing (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), the total playback time of the first half notice A is 15,000 ms (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the new The parameters of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which the reproduction request was made are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No", the result of step S1521A is "No", and the result of step S1523A is "Yes". ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

Subsequently, since the normal BGM is playing at this point and the volume has not been suppressed yet, the suppressed volume value is "100", which is larger than the suppressed volume value "50" of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), and the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

Subsequently, since the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "Yes"), the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is "No"). , This process ends.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound effect is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound effect is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is "8000", and the suppression volume value is "0" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output (step S1506A). The result is "Yes").

Further, the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "8000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is "15000" (the result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppressed volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is "50", and the suppressed volume value of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made is "0" (step). The result of S1521A is "Yes"), the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0", and the total reproduction time "8000" are overwritten in the work area (step S1522A).

Further, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the warning effect sound effect (step S1524A).

Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is usually "50" for BGM, "100" for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and the suppression volume value "0" for the blackout notice effect sound recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), so that the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is set to "0" (step S1527A).

After that, when the game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening during the execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 3, the total playback time is "2000", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "2000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "8000". (The result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "0" and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is "50" (the result of step S1521A is). Since "No"), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the reserved winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound effect (result of step S1523A). “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the reserved winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “Yes”). Then, even when the output of the hold winning sound is completed (time t34), since the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound effect is continued.

After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), so that the blackout stored in the work area ends. The parameter of the effect sound effect is erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the normal BGM whose sound reproduction was suppressed (the volume was reduced) and the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A are returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM was suppressed during the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of other sound effects being played is muted, and while it is possible to make a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) stand out, the effect sound effect is produced during the mute period. Even when the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed by executing a specific effect. While notifying the player, if the sound effect output is continued until after the mute period ends, the sound effect output of the effect during the mute period is suppressed to emphasize the execution of a specific effect. be able to.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, a new sound is produced when there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game interest may be reduced due to the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no vacant channel (the number of vacant channels is 0), it is set in advance. By controlling so that less important sound output is selectively discarded based on the priority, it is possible to avoid the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design and reduce the game interest. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to devise technical measures in terms of how difficult it is to appear in a situation where there are no vacant channels (a situation in which the number of vacant channels is 0).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various types that are not output as long as an appropriate game is performed in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to the effect sound effect (effect sound). As for the notification sound of, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormal contents etc. with only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel-saving control structure is adopted for the output of various notification sounds will be described.

FIG. 155 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control by a fixed channel method for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the production sound. An example of a sound definition table is shown when the process of outputting only in (say) is realized. In this sound definition table, the definition of priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting is managed for each sound name. is doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of other notification sounds, effect sounds, and the like are omitted. Regarding the effect sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 124 is defined for each channel excluding the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X for output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is a numerical value of the priority. The high notification sound is assigned and output to the channel X regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned to the channel X first is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output. Will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it means that the output is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 156 is a table showing the notification contents, the notification mode, the notification time, and the conditions (cancellation conditions) for ending the notification for each of the notification sounds exemplified in FIG. 155. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is to make effective use of a single channel X by using as many empty channels as possible. This is a measure to maintain the state and refrain from the subsequent notification sound output.

As shown in FIG. 156, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state where magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is performed). It informs that there is. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"". ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 repetitions of notification sound) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism was detected". On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are terminated so that the execution is continued until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied. It has become.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), there is a high possibility that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a fraudulent act due to a slapstick act is performed). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to notify that it is in the state), and count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor) even though it is not in the big hit game state (the state where the big winning opening is open). Notification sound for notifying that the detection by the winning opening sensor) has been performed (the state where there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the closed large winning opening to win the game ball) has been performed. 3 (abnormality of winning a prize) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are those. The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "boo-boo vibration has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example). , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and detected by the vibration sensor 2405 as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps are used. The lighting by is continued until the release condition "returning the power" is satisfied. Further, in the notification sound 3 (large prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo large prize abnormality has been detected" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "a large prize abnormality has been detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the notification time is set. The loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) from the time of detection by the count sensor 4005 is terminated, whereas in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition "returning power" is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). Further, the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing is a notification sound such as "boo-boo" that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed). A combination of an alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is is adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clearly distinguish it from other notification sounds. It is desirable to be done.

That is, when notifying an object belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed), the hall side response to the fraudulent activity rather than specifying which notification type it belongs to. It is important to speed up the initial action of. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of "boo-boo" and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent acts). Since it is possible to recognize that the situation has been performed), it is expected that the initial response to the fraudulent activity on the Hall side will be expedited. Furthermore, a message sound for notifying which notification type is to follow the notification sound of "boo-boo" is output, and display is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement for the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which it is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed by opening the door). However, there is a possibility that the door has been opened due to the abnormal response measures taken by the hall side). The notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "door is open ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open". ") And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (corresponding to 3 repetitions of notification sound) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Door is open ping pong ping pong". ), But the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release conditions of "door closure detection (door frame open switch 618 to the main body frame 4). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the "detection that the door frame 3 is closed)" is satisfied.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 (the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2). Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed by opening the main body frame, there is a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to an abnormality response measure by the hall side). , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed and this cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified. The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the main body frame opening switch is set as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time of detection by 619 is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, And the lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "frame closing detection (detection that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It will be.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the first notification group. In addition, as for the notification sound that is the target of loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (illegal act). (There is a moderate possibility that the There is.

In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility that cheating has been performed), while preventing the person playing the proper game from feeling disgusted. It is important to be able to take corrective action on the hall side to some extent quickly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who play proper games will not feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing proper games to feel disgust, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of belonging to the first notification group. It is output when it belongs to the third notification group although it has a different lighting mode from the case where it belongs to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust. By notifying by lighting various lamps that are not used, it is expected that the measures for dealing with abnormalities on the hall side will be expedited to some extent.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is provided by the game ball at the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though it is in a non-time saving state. It is in a state where the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is performed in a mode that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to the game in the proper mode (left-handed)). It informs that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed"). ") And are to be executed respectively. As for the notification time, both the loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is set to end in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the lower plate 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 to be full in the game ball (lower plate). A notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where it should be removed) is used to provide game guidance for properly advancing the game, although the possibility of fraud is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in a state of power, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation condition should be set to the same one. It is supposed to be.

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "please pull out the ball of the lower plate" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and the notification time is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" and the game board. Both of the displays in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. ..

However, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) are detected by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279 when they are completed in 20 seconds. When the 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly speaking, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds is output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to the channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silence output), and a loop process is performed in which the message sound and the silence data are set and the notification sound for 10 seconds is repeated. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are designed to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by checking the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed with this assigned to the channel X.

By the way, there may be a silent part in the notification sound used in the first notification group and the second notification group (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to have a "pause". It is clear that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion having a relatively long time (third notification group) having a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent time in between. It will be possible to notify the game guidance without causing disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the priority order is set to be the same for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, but the priority order is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Further, as the reproduction type setting, it is decided to adopt loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. .. In addition, the "boo-boo" commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and the "ping-pong ping-pong" commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or it may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and the sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined is created at the time of output. You may then assign it to a channel.

FIG. 157 (a) shows a process when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 157 (a), it is assumed that magnetic detection is performed by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 in which no notification sound is output. In the control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so that it is indicated that the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information that the magnetic detection has occurred is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the magnetic detection has occurred is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and the information is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the magnetic detection information. In the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X, and the notification mode thereof is determined. (Here, the loop of "Boo-boo magnetism detected") is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set.

When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c for peripheral control. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is repeatedly executed from the timing tα1 for 60 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism is detected"). ”) And lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), at the timing tα2 in which 60 seconds have not passed from the timing tα1 and the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 where the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information that the vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the vibration has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and the information is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of vibration detection is included, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I don't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not processed for progress in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (60 seconds) is not timed up when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is completed, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection is performed. The schedule data for generation is set, and the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is assigned to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boo-boo vibration detected"). It is supposed to perform playback.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, although the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the above from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting the schedule data in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp For lighting, these are executed.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority order is the same. The lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection that was already in the set state will be reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection will be various. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them is used. Even if it is reflected, there is no change in the lamp lighting.

After that, at the timing tα3, 60 seconds after the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism was detected” is repeated based on the time-up of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly). The loop processing to be executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is the time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced for 6 times.

At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not timed up, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest. By allocating the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boo-boo vibration”). The notification sound is played back in the loop of "Detected".

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, but is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tα3, the notification sound of "Boo-boo vibration detected" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is timed up, "Boo-boo vibration is detected". It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "boo-boo-shaking") among the notification sounds such as "was done".

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played (Fig.). 157 (a)), the 6th alarm sound (here, "boo-boo") and the 6th message sound (here, "magnetic detection") have finished playing, and the 7th alarm sound (here) Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "boo-boo") was played. As a result, "Boo Boo magnetism detected" and "Boo Boo vibration detected" are connected at strange points, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example). If the notification sound 1 ends with "boo-boo magnetism" and the notification sound 2 starts with "movement detected", it is a meaningless notification such as "boo-boo magnetism detected". It becomes a content, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of (which may confuse the site).

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, the notification sound 2 time-ups at the alarm sound of “boo-boo” and ends, and the message sound is emitted. Even if it is not played back, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality detection has occurred at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing and it is no longer played back (only magnetic anomalies). If it is a notification, the notification sound will end at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is cut off at a halfway timing, it is urged to check the display inside the liquid crystal display, and the display inside the liquid crystal shows "magnetism detected" and "vibration detected", respectively. By displaying the display, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

FIG. 157 (b) shows the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. An example is shown.

Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. 157 (a). ) And the above-mentioned processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. ) Is almost the same.

For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), at the timing tβ1 in which no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so that it is indicated that the frame opening detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection is detected. When it is grasped that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame opening) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X and the notification is made. A timer (30 seconds) is set to start the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, the loop of "the frame is open ping pong ping pong") and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 5 (frame open). ..

When allocating the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and is peripheral. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It will be like.

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection are obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the frame closing detection, which is the condition for canceling the frame opening detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly executed from the timing tβ1 for 30 seconds, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "the frame is open"). "It is open") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), in the timing tβ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tβ1 and the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is in the loop playback state, step S110. Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, the state of the notification flag is first updated so that it is indicated that the door opening detection has been performed, as in the case of the timing tβ1 in which the frame opening detection has been performed. Next, the information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and the information is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that the information of the door opening detection is included, the notification sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. 156 is transmitted to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame open) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side already assigned is preferentially reproduced and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door opening detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not processed for progress in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) that has not been set yet. ) Was set, and when the timer (30 seconds) was not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) was completed, the door open detection was responded. Schedule data for sound generation is set, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, the loop of "door is open ping pong ping pong") is used. The notification sound is played back.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection and the screen generation schedule data are set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the door open detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the inside of the liquid crystal described above These are executed for the display and the lighting of the lamp.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority order is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection that was already in the set state is reflected in each of the various lamp light emission, and the lighting mode data for light emission mode generation according to the door opening detection is lit. The mode is not reflected in each of the various lamp emissions. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the frame and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the door have the same data contents. No matter which one is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tβ3 where 30 seconds have passed from the timing tβ1, a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, and the time is set. By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door” is used. Is open Ping Pong Ping Pong "loop) will be used to play the notification sound.

That is, in the timing tβ2, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the door opening detection is not set and is set when the timing tβ3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound of "door is open ping pong ping pong" can be played from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up, "door is open". It will be possible to urge the loop processing to end and stop playing at halfway timing (for example, timing such as "door is open") among the notification sounds such as "ping pong ping pong".

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played (Fig.). 157 (b)) When the third message sound (here, "the frame is open") and the third alarm sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") have finished playing, the fourth message sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") Here, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open") was played. As a result, "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and "the door is open ping pong ping pong" are connected at strange points, and it becomes impossible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation. The outbreak can be suitably suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the door open detection is shortened, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it becomes possible to surely grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 157 (c) shows the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 157 (c), at the timing tγ1 in which no notification sound is output, the game is played even though it is in a non-time saving state in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). Assuming that the gate sensor 4003 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the region on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the region 5a (right-handed detection in a non-time saving state), it is mainly In the control MPU 1310a, the information that the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in a time-saving state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It will be like. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU1310a, and the information is not output to the whole computer to the outside.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the result is in a non-time saving state. When it is grasped that the right-handed detection information is included, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (set) for starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to left-handed") and measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). 20 seconds) is set.

Regarding the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state, in this embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the gate unit 2003 is played from the main control MPU 1310a. Only the information that the sphere has passed is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in a non-time saving state. , And processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

When assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied to various control data of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It will be like.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting it in the storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal is the end of notification, which is a condition for canceling the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) (the timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up). It will continue to run until. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid hindering the progress of the production, and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. Will not be done.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is repeatedly executed from the timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, "Please return to left-handed") will be executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (c), in the timing tγ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tγ1 and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is in the loop playback state, step S110 or It is assumed that the lower plate full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, information indicating that the lower plate full tank has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 in which the right-handed detection is performed in the non-time saving state. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of full tank of the lower plate) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) in which the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), a command is issued in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). Even if it is found that the information of the lower plate full tank detection is included as a result of the analysis, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is channeled in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). It is not assigned to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) should not be newly assigned to the channel X. By setting this to, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially played and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not processed for progress in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not been set yet. Set this for seconds), and when the timer (20 seconds) is not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, the lower plate is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time, and assign the notification mode (here, "Pull out the ball on the lower plate". The notification sound is reproduced in the loop).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set, the screen generation is performed according to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate. By extracting the schedule data from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display can be executed. There is.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

After that, at the timing tγ3, which is 20 seconds after the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as "Please return to the left-handed" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice.

At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not timed up, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the detection of the lower plate full tank. Then, by allocating the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here). Then, the notification sound is reproduced in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate").

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is set at the timing tγ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set and is set when the timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , The loop processing is terminated at halfway timing (for example, timing such as "Pull out the ball of the lower plate") among the notification sounds such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" so that it will not be played. You will be able to urge.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 157 (c)) When the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is heard. It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced. As a result, "Please return to left-handed" and "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange points, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to.

Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played, silence data for 5 seconds is inserted. Since the message sound of another notification sound is reproduced in, it is preferable to generate a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to avoid it.

FIG. 158 (a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 158 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, the said. Regarding the processing according to the magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), the same processing as in the case described with reference to FIG. 157 (a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is started, and the timing when the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. In t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced for 6 times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), the timing t-2 in which 60 seconds have not passed from the timing t-1 and the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is in the loop playback state. In step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) in response to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection (see FIG. 155). ), Even if the door open detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

And usually, for the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is similar to the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (c) is overlapped. Processing is performed so that only the timer is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after a magnetic anomaly occurs is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being carried out. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the "second notification group" with a medium possibility of fraud. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), at the timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data are set. , Only set the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at the timing t-3, based on the setting of the flag, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are set, respectively. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X to start the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "the door is open ping pong ping pong"). .. The execution of the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting according to the door open detection is started from the timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even though the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening while the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" was being played back in the loop, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected". From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as "Door is open", the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection is played in full for 30 seconds, and "Door is open ping pong ping pong". The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as is played three times. In this way, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode, which is different from the processing based on the normal priority, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group is reproduced. Although it is the content (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop), it is expected to raise awareness that the situation is highly likely to be fraudulent.

In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected", the notification content starts from the message sound (door is open), so that the first notification group is in the most tense situation. It will be possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs has been completed. On the other hand, by reproducing the alarm sound of "ping-pong ping-pong" after the message sound, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

FIG. 158 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 158 (b), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 in which no notification sound is output. Regarding the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the "frame opening detection processing (frame opening processing)" described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tδ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), at the timing tδ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, the step is taken. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed hit in a non-time saving state in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 155), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed even when the right-handed detection occurs in the non-time saving state.

That is, as described above, as for the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (c) is overlapped. The process is performed so that only the timer of is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set, while the sound is generated according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Schedule data is not set. Then, at the timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not timed up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X for the minute amount, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of "return to left-handed").

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, and the notification sound such as "Please return to left strike" is not included at the right timing. Will be reproduced, so that it will be possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while maintaining the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, even with such silent data, the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It will be like.

FIG. 158 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 158 (c), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 in which no notification sound is output. Regarding the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the "frame opening detection processing (frame opening processing)" described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tε1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tε2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tε1 and the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S112. It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of FIG. 94. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (See FIG. 155), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in both the sound and the lamp lighting. The output content will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. As for the display in the liquid crystal display, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal display on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in either the sound or the lamp lighting, the timing tε2 has been set until then. The process of canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the set state may be performed.

In this respect, in this embodiment, in the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection are obtained. Is kept in the set state, and the sound generation schedule data, screen generation schedule data, and light emission mode generation schedule data according to magnetic detection, which have higher priorities than the respective data, are set respectively. Put it in a state. Then, the allocation for the channel X and various lamp operations is determined from the content based on the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 can be output for any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), in the timing tε2, no operation is performed for the process on the lower priority side in the execution state (door open process). It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process, magnetic abnormality process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tδ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is started, and the timer for the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. When the time is up (60 seconds), the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been played for 6 times, and the loop processing is finished at a good timing. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the magnetic detection that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is processed in any of the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. The output content will be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has been changed to a tense situation is promptly transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

FIG. 158 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ1 in which no notification sound is output, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94) in a non-time saving state is detected. If so, the process corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state (left-handed guidance process) is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 157 (c). Therefore, at the timing tζ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is started, and the timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice. In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is set.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tζ1 and the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is in the loop playback state, step S110 or It is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 155), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection, and the output content of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) processing is reflected as the operation of the actuator. It will be prevented from being done. As for the display in the liquid crystal display, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal display on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, as a method for preventing the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, right-handed detection in the non-time saving state set up to that point at timing tζ2 is performed. It is also possible to perform a process of canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state.

In this respect, in this embodiment, in the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state. In addition to the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection, which has a higher priority than this, the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door open detection are also kept in the set state. Set each generation schedule data to the set state. Then, the allocation to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection. Therefore, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection is such that the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (d), in the timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the processing on the lower priority side (left-handed guidance processing) in the execution state. It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (left-handed guidance process and door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is started. When the time of the timer (30 seconds) is up, the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, and the loop processing is finished at a good timing. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing detection, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the door opening detection with a medium possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. In any case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first, so that the person who is playing the proper game does not feel disgusted, but after that. Notifications belonging to the second notification group are performed by the alarm sound of "Ping Pong Ping Pong", and it is expected that the hall side will be notified that the situation has been switched to the situation where there is a possibility of fraud. ..

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in the situation where such an abnormal notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value is used. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed brightness is reflected by some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of each notification sound shown in FIG. 155 should be output, various processes can be performed according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents and game guidance (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may be higher than the moderate possibility depending on other detection conditions. It is hard to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority of.

In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraudulent activity. be. That is, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state is continued. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained due to the convenience of the hall side (recovery of various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. 159 to 164, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priorities, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further change the state of the gaming machine. It is intended to realize notification in a manner that can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 159 to 164.

In the example shown in FIG. 159, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 in which no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also generated. It is put into a set state. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will play for a second.

On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection, the display is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 arrives.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 159, the magnetic detection in which the priority regarding the notification is relatively high at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection is completed and the channel X is in the vacant state. Magnetic detection by sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the door open detection started from the timing tα11, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but the allocation for various lamp operations is At the timing tα13, the mode of lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection is switched.

That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection are also set. They are put into a set state. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

On the other hand, as for the liquid crystal display and the lamp light emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 159, the magnetic detection sensor is in a situation where the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing. Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, a person who intends to perform some kind of illegal work opens the door frame 3 to open it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to be completed. It is assumed that the magnet may have entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 momentarily when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Since it is such an act, there is a concern that it is not sufficient as a countermeasure only by performing the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already turned off, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity to take some measures.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is terminated, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection" in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is set to channel X. Special processing will be performed to reassign to. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated will be reproduced in a form connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection", which causes a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and attract everyone's attention. In addition, even as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that "when the magnetic notification is finished, all the notification sound reproduction is finished, and it is finally possible to make the fraudulent act inconspicuous." Since the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that should have ended is played, the notification situation will be unexpected, so it is expected that further fraudulent activities will be recognized as being too risky. It will be like.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period during which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period during which the notification processing belonging to the second notification group is being performed, other channels are used. It is decided to perform a process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the assigned symbol change and other game sounds (process of reducing the volume to a specific value). The specific value may be a volume of 0. During the period during which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds assigned to the other channels is not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is suppressed) is whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). It is a period during which the condition of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 159, the symbol variation is based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed between the timing tα11 to tα13 period and the timing tα14 to tα16 period. Processing to suppress the volume of the production sound inside and other game sounds (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the period during which the processing is being performed, processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds (processing for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing during the period (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16) in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed. It was decided to reduce the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds to the same value during the period, but both the first notification group and the second notification group are performing notification processing. During the period, the process may be performed to reduce the value to a lower value than during the period during which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states just by checking the effect sounds other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be made faster.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, when the door opening detection is terminated at the timing tα16, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and other game sounds is terminated. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the terminated state is played in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection ends is reached, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the volume of other game sounds may be continued without being suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, as is clear from the processing corresponding to the door opening detection, the liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The period during which the lamp is emitted and the period during which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the detection of door opening are the same at the start time, but the end times are all different. In this way, by operating them so that they have different roles in the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. In spite of this, it will be possible to appropriately notify the contents of abnormalities and game guidance.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 160, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at the timing tα23 in a non-time saving state. I'm assuming a case. However, in this example, unlike the case shown in FIG. 159, it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, so that the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the mode of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely malicious. Since it is unlikely that such an action has been performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is terminated.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 161, magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, as shown in FIG. 159. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is completed at the timing tα34 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 161 at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the terminated state is referred to as “notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection”. It will not be played in a connected manner. That is, even in the example shown in FIG. 161 as in the case of the example shown in FIG. Waiting for the corresponding notification sound reproduction to end, the magnet momentarily falls within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 while the squirt is cold. It is assumed that you may be in a situation where you have entered. However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetic detection is not generated in a non-illegal state, the magnetic detection is performed even though the door frame 3 is in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing only by continuously playing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives, and the channel X is vacated in case further notification sound processing is required. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 161, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it becomes possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 162, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 159. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 162, after waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection to be completed, an attempt was made to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt was cooled. Occasionally, a magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and despite the fact that a magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced in response to this, the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not falter in such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is being repositioned, and more malicious fraud may have been committed. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, while the notification sound 1 The process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from the time when the first magnetic detection is made to the time when 60 seconds from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection is made elapses. Will be able to be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" will be continuously reproduced without interruption during the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. And finally, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism detected" does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected". It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a big sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). "Schedule data for sound generation according to detection" is set again, and special processing is performed in which the notification sound is reassigned to channel X. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is not only reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to magnetic detection", but also in the middle of "inspecting boo-boo magnetism". It will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetic detection" in which the loop processing is completed at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appears in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 163, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 159. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 163, it is assumed that the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at the timing tα54 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 163, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the magnet is secretly placed inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt is cold. Even though the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality was reproduced in response to this, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken greatly without being distracted by such a situation. It is assumed that more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is completed, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”, and then the notification sound is reproduced. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection". ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) without setting the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection. Seconds) are set, and at the timing tα55 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is completed, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. ..

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo vibration detected" does not end its loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop is performed at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo vibration detected". Since the processing will be completed, it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is completed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) for the “sound generation according to the door open detection”. "Schedule data" is set again, and special processing is performed to reassign the notification sound to channel X. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection" which is connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection". In addition to being reproduced in, it will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to vibration detection" in which the loop processing is completed at a halfway timing such as "inspecting boo-boo vibration". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appears in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 164, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the frame opening detection is completed instead of the door opening detection. I'm assuming.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 164, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection is further generated immediately after the frame opening detection is performed is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if the magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent activity, the door frame 3 should be in the open state, and even if the main body frame 4 is in the open state, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet. Therefore, it can be assumed that the hole side may have mistakenly detected the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when using a magnet to clear the ball clogging in the ball tank or the payout passage.

Therefore, even in the example shown in FIG. 164, at the timing tα64 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the end state is "notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection". By regenerating in a form connected to "regeneration" (timing tα64 to tα65), it causes a great sense of discomfort in the hall and is expected to attract everyone's attention. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection but also magnetic detection is supported. For each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), special processing for terminating them is performed.

According to such a configuration, while the function for fraudulent activity is appropriately performed, when the hall side is erroneously detected, the notification process corresponding to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection is performed only by closing the main body frame 4. Since it will be possible to terminate all notification sounds, LCD display, lamps), it is expected that the hall side will respond quickly to false positives and maintain the atmosphere inside the hall appropriately. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 164, even when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the frame opening detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) according to magnetic detection. You may want to perform a special process to terminate.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjusting function.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 128), it is monitored whether or not the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated, and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. When it is determined that the speaker volume is reduced, the player sets the speaker volume (player set value). When it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 is operated, the player sets the speaker volume. Performs processing to increase the value (player set value). In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pip!") Is output at the increased volume value. , It is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completed sound, the same sound may be output depending on whether the volume value is lowered or raised. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority as described above when there are no more empty channels (for example, "20" which is the same as the button pressing sound), and the output volume of the production sound (for example, the output volume of the effect sound (for example, "20"). It is possible to more reliably convey that the change in the volume of the audible sound).

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period (demo display, etc.) before the game is started because the symbol change according to the jackpot determination has not yet been performed. Not only during the period that can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the big hit judgment is executed, the reception by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. By making it possible to change the volume value flexibly at times, we are trying to maintain the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in a situation where channels of various production sounds are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine is concerned. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic anomaly or door opening, a process is performed in which a specific notification sound corresponding to the detection content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. Further, at this time, it is possible to execute the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value without stopping the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Therefore, as long as the channel allocation of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

However, in the above-mentioned effect progress notification process, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped, the normal time (normal time) is the amount that a specific notification sound is assigned to the channel. More channels will be used than in the non-notification state), and there will be no empty channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound. The risk tends to be high. Then, if there is a case where there is no empty channel to which sound data is not assigned before the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, one of the sound data is used at that time. Since one channel allocation has to be discarded, even if the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed after that, the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to the channel is reproduced. It is not possible, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

Regarding the concern about empty channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be decided from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production. Therefore, regardless of which channel method is adopted, the above-mentioned effect progress notification process is used. It is important to prepare a processing structure that can adopt a common processing program in order to secure the cost reduction and the improvement of reliability required for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“pi!” Or “pipi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is expected that the risk of running out of free channels will be reduced by giving more room to the channels.

However, despite the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the volume value when a more important effect appears, the output volume is set while the effect progress notification process is being executed. If the change is not possible, when the effect progress notification process is executed due to false detection or notification due to hall side circumstances (door opening, etc.), the appropriate volume value will be adjusted according to the content of the effect progress. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed to. In addition, as a result of the progress of the production during the period during which the notification processing under the production progress is performed, if a large deviation occurs between the appropriate volume value and the actual set value according to the production content, the output volume (possible). Since it became possible to change the setting of (listening sound volume), it is necessary to accept multiple operations in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. As a result, even though the notification processing under the progress of the production is finally completed, there is a concern that the entertainment of the game will be deteriorated due to the fact that the production sound cannot be output properly due to the lack of free channels.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value drops to a specific value. The output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed, and the above When the notification process (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume is changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point.

According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the set value (player set value) according to the progress of the production while the notification process under the progress of the production is being executed, a new operation is performed. It becomes possible to collectively change the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) to reflect all the operations up to that point when the effect progress notification process is completed without performing the above. In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It is expected that the decline in the entertainment interests of the game will be suppressed. In addition, the volume value (volume of audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and a situation occurs in which a shortage occurs in an empty channel due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Will also be suitably avoided.

According to the above configuration, when the batch change of the output volume to the player set value is executed when the effect progress notification process is completed, the game during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of times the user setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. It may be output with a sound of a special mode different from that (for example, "Bee!").

Furthermore, in order to more preferably solve the shortage of vacant channels when the effect progress notification process is completed, the number of changes in the player set value and the player during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed depends on the player. Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) all at once as the production progress notification process ends. .. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification process under the progress of production due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate production is performed due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

In the above explanatory example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection ends while the door open state is maintained, and then a magnetic abnormality occurs and the corresponding notification sound ends, the door open detection is performed. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 159). However, if a magnetic abnormality occurs while the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is in the output state and the notification sound corresponding to this occurs, the door open detection is performed even if the door open state is maintained. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the remaining time as the output time of the interrupted "notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection").

When the door is open, the lamp emits light according to the door open detection, but this lamp emission is continued even after the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection ends when the door is open. Is desirable. Further, it is desirable that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is terminated for a predetermined time.

If there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while the door open state is maintained, the specific error occurs. It is desirable to output the notification sound again according to the door open detection based on the occurrence of. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the door opening detection.

Or, if there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while the door open state is maintained, the specific error occurs. The notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection may not be output again based on the occurrence of a specific error, but the state in which re-notification is possible may be maintained.

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in the situation where such an abnormal notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value is used. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed brightness is reflected by some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of such an effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume) will be described.

FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating the content of the notification process under the progress of the effect separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

First, prior to explaining the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume), the content of the effect progress notification process is referred to with reference to FIG. 165. Will be briefly explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 exemplified in FIG. 155 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 165, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as volume suppression modes of the effect sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) regarding the volume, the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of "20" to "50" is changed. Among the possibilities, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanatory example, although the processing itself related to the output is performed, the production sound is silenced. It is exemplified as a thing to make.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud When the notification process relating to any of these is executed, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. Moreover, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, the abnormality detection is turned off. Until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. ) Is not terminated, but is continued.

In this explanatory example, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, large prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume (audible sound) of the effect sound is executed. The period during which the process of suppressing the volume) is continued is the same as the period from the reproduction of the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) corresponding to the abnormality detection to the end of this. Is set to.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is performed in the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower side of the sound. However, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, that time point. Therefore, the process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is terminated in the first volume suppression mode on the side where the degree of suppression is low.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the effectability is achieved. The emphasis is on maintaining the sound, and no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound).

In this explanatory example, the suppression mode is different depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is not always necessary to make the difference, and the output volume of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. A process of suppressing (volume of audible sound) may be performed. However, regarding the end condition of the process to be suppressed, the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is different from the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to be able to do it.

FIG. 166 shows the contents of the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this explanatory example, the player setting value is changed by "1" within the range of "1" to "5" by the operation by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The smaller the value, the smaller the volume of the effect sound. Further, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set by the player when the above-mentioned suppression mode (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanatory example, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the operation by the player.

Now, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the player setting value is "3" out of "1" to "5" with respect to the volume of the effect sound, and no notification flag is set. , It is assumed that the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "60", which is 20 times that. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination is not performed and the start winning prize is awaited, the effect selection left button 331 is imitated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed image 331a and the display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH to the effect that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize whether the current player setting value is "1" to "5" is also executed. To. The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect which is a reach effect executed in a state where the background image is changed. At least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when the player operates the image. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In such a situation shown in FIG. 166 (A), when an operation is performed by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, the player setting value is set to "1" each time the operation is performed. The output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" accordingly. In addition, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a gauge display indicates which of the current set values is within the range of the player set values "1" to "5". The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 166 (C)) will be executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player set value is "1", neither the player set value nor the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is lowered, and the game is played. The user setting value remains "1" (the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume is set to "1". It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". This also applies when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

On the other hand, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the decorative symbol SZ fluctuates in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of variation pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In this regard, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 166 (A) (the period during which the demo display or the like can be performed) but also the symbol change according to the jackpot determination after the game is started. It is designed to allow reception by the player even during the execution period, and the volume value is agile when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 166 (C) appears. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

That is, FIG. 166 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice due to the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 166 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is 20 times that of "60" →. Under the setting change to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at the changed volume "80", and in the second operation, the player setting is performed. The value has been changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) has been changed from "80" to "100", which is 20 times higher than that. At "100", which is the volume after the change, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played.

Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, it is within the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value. The second volume value display OH2, which indicates which is the current set value by the gauge display, is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This is to clarify which of the current setting values is for the range of the player setting values "1" to "5", even in a tense situation where a more important effect appears. The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased / decreased according to the change of the player set value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

The second volume value display OH2 is displayed from the time when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 166 (C) as shown in FIG. 166 (D). It is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and then the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is such that the player setting value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value "5"), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation is performed in such a manner that the player setting value does not change (operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value "5"). When is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is more preferably promoted to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 167, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection is generated during the execution period of the symbol change and the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the detection is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about the volume adjustment accompanying this.

The situation shown in FIG. 167 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (A). When a start prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol change, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed in response to the detection. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "" "The door is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed in response to the door opening detection during the fluctuation period of the symbol, the first volume suppression mode is used. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), although the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (A), the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such the effect progress notification process is being executed, the first specific is specified. The output volume (audible sound volume) of the production sound, which has been lowered to the value (here, "10"), is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) regarding the volume is this. It is permissible to accept changes to itself, and when the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point. As mentioned above, it is made to change all at once.

That is, FIG. 167 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice due to the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 167 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by the operation with the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the value set by the person (20 times), is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the first specific value.

At this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is first specified. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and since the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, the effect display on the game board side is received. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the numerical value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so that the second volume value has been received. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5", which is the range of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state of being executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the notification processing under the effect progress (output volume up to a specific value). When each of the lowering processes) is completed, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be "80" according to the first operation from the first specific value (here, "10"), and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, it will be changed collectively from the first specific value (here, "10") to "100" which reflects all the operations up to that point.

In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It is expected that the decline in the entertainment interests of the game will be suppressed. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the empty channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, when the output volume (volume of audible sound) is changed all at once (“10” → “100”) with the end of the effect progress notification process, the output volume changes. Nevertheless, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completed sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification process under the progress of production due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate production is performed due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic anomaly and the door opening are exemplified as specific states, but the effect progress notification process and the door opening occur in the state where the magnetic anomaly occurs. The end conditions may be different from those of the effect progress notification process in the state of being performed.

For example, first, regarding the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened, when the door is closed or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was opened (the door was continued to be opened). Even if), it will be terminated. However, in any case, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (for example, "10" → "100"), the volume adjustment completed sound channel is used even though the output volume changes. It is desirable not to do the allocation itself.

On the other hand, the effect progress notification process in the state where the magnetic anomaly has occurred should not be terminated only when the magnetic anomaly state ends, but should be continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (volume of audible sound) is changed all at once (for example, "10" → "100") when the RAM is cleared or the power is turned off. Even if there is, it is desirable not to assign the channel of the volume adjustment completed sound itself even though the output volume changes.

Further, in the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened, a display indicating that is displayed when the player set value is changed is displayed, whereas in the effect progress notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred. , When the player setting value is changed, the display indicating that fact may not be performed. According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that the end conditions are different between the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened and the effect progress notification process in the state where the magnetic anomaly occurs. become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob portion is mainly performed by the hall side, the output (channel allocation) of the volume adjustment completion sound triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob portion cannot be performed. It is more desirable to allow free channels to have room.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, various effects included in the pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Lamps for games (lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and used for production, etc., and game lamps such as special-figure LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting target. ) Is equipped with a brightness adjustment button (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the player determines the brightness applied to the various production lamps. It is possible to execute the process of changing the set value (player set value). In addition, when the player setting value related to brightness is lowered or raised, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value corresponding to the setting value applied to the volume at that time. I have to. Further, the brightness of the effect lamp can be changed by the operation by the player in both the state where the symbol does not change and the state where the symbol changes.

Further, it is desirable to assign channels to the brightness adjustment completion sound under the same conditions as the volume adjustment completion sound described above. In this case, even if the setting value related to the brightness is changed, the brightness adjustment confirmation is performed. There will be situations where the sound channel allocation itself is not performed, or where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output. According to such a configuration, it is necessary to grasp the current situation (whether or not the above-mentioned effect progress notification process is being executed, etc.) when the set value related to the brightness is changed instead of the volume. Will be possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a sound different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

The player setting value related to the volume is set to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed after being controlled by the demo screen) is satisfied. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player, a display indicating which is the current set value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume). To a third party that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is decreasing by preventing both the value display OH2) and the output (channel allocation) related to the volume adjustment completion sound. It is more desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

Also, if a new volume adjustment is made while the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment is in the output state, the volume adjustment sound in the output state even if there is a free channel Assigning a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel in the form of ending halfway and outputting (overwriting and outputting) is more effective in allowing a margin in the number of free channels. desirable.

Also, when an operation is further performed to the side where the volume is increased even though the player setting value is at the maximum value, or to the side where the volume is decreased even though the player setting value is at the minimum value. When the operation of is performed further, even if there is a free channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel and it is not output so that the number of free channels can be increased. More desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but the display indicating which is the current set value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH2) is displayed. May be good.

Volume adjustment The volume adjustment by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is permitted, but the volume adjustment performed by the operation by the player may be allowed to generate a period during which this is not permitted.

On the other hand, in FIG. 168, when the state detection generated in FIG. 167 is not the door opening but a magnetic anomaly, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection is performed while the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is being executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the right button 332.

The situation shown in FIG. 168 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (A). When a start prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the magnetic detection is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetic detection"). And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the fluctuation period of the symbol and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) corresponding to the magnetic detection is executed, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the sound output volume (audible sound volume) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), although the player setting value is maintained at "3" as in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (A), the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value (here, mute).

In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process corresponding to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, "0") is performed. The output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound (mute here)) that has been lowered to () is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself regarding the volume. The change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is displayed. As mentioned above, we are trying to change all at once.

That is, FIG. 168 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 168 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by the operation with the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the second specific value (here, "0 (silence)"), which is lower than the value set by the person (20 times), is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the second specific value.

At this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is specified second. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and since the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, the effect display on the game board side is received. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the numerical value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so that the second volume value has been received. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5", which is the range of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Incidentally, in this explanatory example, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection occurs. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the noise is continuously executed.

After that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the magnetic detection was performed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH was returned to the state of being executed again, and the effect progress notification process (output volume was specified). When the process of reducing the value to the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 168 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point in response to the completion of the process is completed. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be "80" according to the first operation from the second specific value (here, "0"), and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, it will be changed collectively from the second specific value (here, "0") to "100" which reflects all the operations up to that point.

In addition, when the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (D), the effect display device on the game board side. The display in the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. There is. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, and the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and corresponds to the player set value. On the other hand, in the notification processing according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the production sound remains the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

In this way, even if a magnetic anomaly occurs, the player is allowed to change the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is expected that the decline in the entertainment interest of the game will be suppressed until the notification processing under the progress of the production is completed. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the empty channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, the output volume (volume of audible sound) is also output when the output volume (volume of audible sound) is changed all at once (“0” → “100”) when the effect progress notification process due to the magnetic abnormality is completed. Even though the volume changes, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completed sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which proper production cannot be enjoyed due to a shortage of free channels even though the production progress notification processing due to notification due to erroneous detection is finally completed. Can be suitably suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 155, the initial volume of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected". Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the sound is always played at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification processing under the effect progress is not executed. Therefore, the player setting during the execution of these notifications. It is possible to appropriately change both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound). However, as shown in FIG. 155, “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the initial volume value for these notification sounds 6 and 7, regardless of the player setting value. It will always be played at the volume set by the default value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set in the third byte of the initial volume value, and "1" is not set. It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

Further, for each process described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, the state is detected not only during the execution period of the symbol change, but also in the state before the start of the symbol change and in the form of straddling the start and end timings of the symbol change. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

Further, in each of the processes described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation by 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

Further, the processing described with reference to FIG. 167 and the processing described with reference to FIG. 168 are made to have different suppression modes of the production sound during the period during which the production progress notification processing is being performed, but the suppression mode is not always the same. It is not necessary to make them different, and the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound) can be achieved in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the process of suppressing the volume) may be performed.

Further, in the effect progress notification process, the output volume (volume of audible sound) of various game sounds is suppressed, and among these game sounds, the game ball is placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as the sound played according to the winning (winning sound), may be played at the default volume without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued even though the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 has occurred. In this sense, some sounds (winning sounds), such as sounds played in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound be reproduced as a special sound that cannot be output when the effect progress notification process is not executed.

As described above, in FIGS. 155 to 168, there is no vacancy in the channel by adopting a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormal content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to make technical ingenuity in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the effect sound effect (effect sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), and the effect design is performed. Concerns remain about the emergence of the above unintended mode of sound output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical techniques are required for channel allocation of the effect sound at a stage before the situation where there is no vacancy in the channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to devise it. Hereinafter, various technical measures made regarding the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical ideas as the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents with only a single channel for various notification sounds is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. Further, in each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Further, when the automatic channel method is adopted, it is not always necessary to adopt the control based on the above-mentioned priority, and even if all channels are in use, a process of discarding a new sound may be performed. good. In addition, the examples described below can be combined and implemented as appropriate.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as "an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 to pray" or "a button operation" is performed. It can be detected by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, it does not show any expectation, for example, a sound corresponding to silent data composed only of silent sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of allocating a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by other sounds. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed in this way, even if special production conditions such as a jackpot confirmation effect and a look-ahead effect are satisfied as a result of the game ball being accepted in the specific winning opening, the effect is satisfied. At this point, the special sound corresponding to the effect is not assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to be completed, it is possible to execute an effect of assigning a special sound to a channel and playing it back (post-notification effect).

That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to the specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the lack of channels even though a special result is obtained by the judgment according to the winning.

Regarding the special sound, for example, in addition to the big hit confirmation sound that is executed only when the big hit is won by the big hit judgment according to the prize, the production mode based on the big hit judgment according to the prize is highly expected (for example). , High expectation notice effect performed during execution of reach effect) is selected, and pre-reading is performed when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by pre-reading judgment according to a prize. It is possible to exemplify a look-ahead notification sound that is executed as an effect, but the point is that it is assigned to a channel and output when a special judgment result is obtained by judgment by a predetermined judgment means according to a prize. Anything that can be done is sufficient.

FIG. 169 shows a special sound (for example, a cure) that matches a so-called look-ahead effect as a “special sound” when a game ball wins a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound has not been output (more accurately, a determination to output a special sound (a determination to perform a look-ahead effect) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process which is reserved in advance from time to time.

First, prior to explaining an example of the channel reservation process, first, a general pre-reading effect, which is a well-known technique, will be briefly described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the prize. , The first and second starting port winning processes (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 104 are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of reserved cards on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed.

Further, as described above, in the first and second start opening winning processes (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), a look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the winning start opening side is also executed (FIG. FIG. 105: Step S5245, FIG. 106: Step S5255).

Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. be. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, information on the symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on variation pattern numbers for pre-reading determination, etc.) are generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side suggests the judgment result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol, as described above. It is a production to do. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the information obtained from the read-ahead command when the determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot has been won and the symbol fluctuation thereof have not been digested and they are in the pending state ( Expectations as to whether the jackpot judgment that has been put on hold will obtain a special result based on the information related to the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side and the information related to the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side). It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, fluctuation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment time shown in FIG. 167 are performed. Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the look-ahead effect, for example, a new hold display according to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, blue with relatively low expectation and red with relatively high expectation). When it is determined whether or not to perform a specific look-ahead effect that suggests the expectation of look-ahead depending on whether it is displayed, and when it is determined that the mode (for example, blue, red, or not to perform the look-ahead effect) according to the result of the determination is performed. The process of performing the hold display is performed in the normal display mode). As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is digested, the look-ahead effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is previously suggested by the display mode is executed.

By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display for confirming a big hit) appears in a mode with high expectation, a special sound (for example, a cure) may be output in accordance with the look-ahead execution. many. However, since such a special sound (look-ahead effect) is played at the timing of winning the game ball that occurs irregularly, the game ball is won at the timing when there is no space in the channel, and the look-ahead judgment is made. If there is a chance of winning, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even though the look-ahead judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode with high expectation (blue or red). There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline without it.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 169, as described above, the special sound is output before the game ball is won by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the special sound (look-ahead effect) is output. The channel that can be assigned is in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more accurately, the judgment to output the special sound (the judgment to perform the look-ahead effect) has not been made yet). It is possible to execute the channel reservation process reserved in.

For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 169, the number of jackpot determinations (number of holds) currently in the hold state is 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Assuming that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the player usually wins a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. Play the game (handle operation) so that it is played. As a result, when the game balls are won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, up to four big hit judgments are put on hold according to those winnings, and the big hit judgments are made. Each time the game is put on hold, processing related to hold display and look-ahead effect according to the winning is performed.

Here, as a look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. Then, when the look-ahead determination is won and the look-ahead effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cure) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the prize is won and the look-ahead judgment is made), and a specific mode is used. The hold display with will appear.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed is also, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, when the look-ahead judgment is won and the look-ahead effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cure) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing when the prize is won), but this is maintained in the state of waiting for execution. Then, after waiting for the channel targeted for channel reservation processing to become free, a special sound (for example, a cure) is output. It should be noted that the hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing when a special sound (for example, a cure) is output, or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold won by the look-ahead determination occurs. good. However, when the hold display with a specific mode appears at the timing when the hold won in the look-ahead determination occurs, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed and the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed are executed. In any of the look-ahead effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can appear as a specific aspect.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) (not shown) is used. Is configured to detect this as an object and start the channel reservation process with this as an opportunity.

For example, at the timing tY11 shown in FIG. 169, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, and the "countdown" is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of assigning "voice" to a predetermined channel and playing it is performed. The countdown voice starts from "30", counts down every second, and ends when the countdown reaches "0". Further, even during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect in which the decorative design is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

However, for the "Torii of the shrine (background display in prayer mode)" in such a display area and the "countdown sound" in the predetermined channel, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. This can be generated by itself (triggered by detection by the sensor), and it is not related to the production content (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the ongoing symbol fluctuation. It does not depend on the result of the jackpot judgment. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be changed to different contents as appropriate, but by performing such processing, a predetermined time (30 seconds) is determined. It is now possible to keep the channel in use (here, the state of use by "countdown voice" that does not show any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends is assigned to a predetermined channel (channel reservation processing).

Then, until the predetermined time (30 seconds) in which the channel reservation process is executed elapses, the player can play a game so that the game ball is won in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 169, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occurred. Then, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, as described above, while the "countdown sound" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the judgment result (look-ahead winning) that the look-ahead effect is performed as a result of the judgment according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, a cure) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a waiting state for execution. The special sound (for example, Cuin) that has been put into the waiting state in this way is output as a post-notification sound that is output after the winning time at the timing tY12 in which a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tY11. Become.

On the other hand, a prize is generated between the time when the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no prize, or if a special judgment result is not obtained (the pre-reading effect was not won), even if the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown voice" ends is reached, it is special. No sound is played.

According to such a configuration, between the time when the player holds his / her hand and starts the reproduction of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his / her own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (look-ahead winning) may be obtained by the judgment according to the prize, the special sound (cuein) is not output at that time and the "countdown voice" is output. It will be executed as a post-notification effect to output at the timing when it is finished and a vacancy occurs in the channel. Therefore, even though a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the absence of a free channel. Further, even if a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 and tY12, a special sound (cuein) corresponding to the special determination result (pre-reading winning) is produced at one timing in which at least one channel has a vacancy. Since the playback is aimed at tY12, as long as it is confirmed whether or not a special sound (cuein) is generated at the timing tY12, the special judgment result (look-ahead) within a relatively long time of the timings tY11 to tY12. You will be able to easily recognize whether you have won).

When the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are vacant at the timing tY12 and played. However, if the special sound (cuein) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the "countdown voice" has been assigned, the channel reservation process and the corresponding post-notification effect can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it is useful in that it can be realized and the range of production can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

Further, in this embodiment, as for the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image, the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown voice" ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) are performed. It is designed to continue to be displayed even after the timing of termination has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request the execution of such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands to re-occur the channel reservation process each time the number of reservations decreases, and before holding their hands. It is considered that it seems that there is a benefit when you hold your hand over the "Torii of the shrine" as a background image (the probability that the special sound will be played at the timing of the later announcement is higher). Yes, the prayer mode background display is continued until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a button release operation). However, in reality, the player holds his hand over even if the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image or the "Torii of the shrine" is not displayed as the background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the assigned state for a predetermined time is only performed by the predetermined sound (countdown sound). Therefore, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown sound” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the post-notification sound is completed.

Further, when the player holds his / her hand again during the period from timing tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the playback time of the "countdown voice" is from the time when a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the re-detection. May be extended to output a special sound according to the pre-reading winning when the timing is reached.

In addition, such a prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol fluctuation is in the fluctuating state but also when the symbol fluctuation is not in the fluctuating state. You may try to do it. Further, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to the action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor.

However, when the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (second prize) are compared with the case where the special sound (cuein) is output at the time of winning. Since it is difficult to know which of the 2nd hold), the 3rd prize (3rd hold), and the 4th prize (4th hold) has obtained the special judgment result (look-ahead winning), the look-ahead winning There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline due to the hold being digested without recognizing that the hold has been made. On the other hand, the content reproduced as a special sound is not a uniform sound (here, "cuein"), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), and the third prize (first hold). It is also conceivable to make the difference depending on which hold of the 4th prize (4th hold) is pre-reading. However, with this, the content will change from the sound played in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed (here, "Kyuin"), so it is possible to grasp that the look-ahead was won. There is concern that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is obtained for any timing between the timings tY11 and tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). A process of varying the reproduction time of the special sound (here, "cuein") starting from the timing tY12 is performed according to whether or not (pre-reading winning) is obtained.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 169, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) of winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 and tY12. However, in this case, the special sound (here, "cuein") is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 170, a case where a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the second prize (second hold) in which the prize is won at a relatively early timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. Assuming, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, and if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 6 seconds, "Kyuin" is played twice. Then, a sound in the form of "cue in cue" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 171, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the third prize (third hold) in which the prize is won at a relatively late timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if the special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 9 seconds, "Kyuin" is 3 It is played back in batches and outputs a sound in the form of "cuein cuein cuein".

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 172, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the fourth prize (fourth hold) in which the prize is won at an extremely late timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced from the timing tY12 for 12 seconds. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if the special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 12 seconds, "Kyuin" is 4 It is played back in batches and outputs a sound such as "Kyuin Kyuin Kyuin Kyuin".

According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) has been obtained between the timings tY11 and tY12, as well as the timing. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by winning a prize. In this example, it is suggested that the shorter the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) is obtained by the winning that occurs at the earlier timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. Therefore, the longer the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more it is suggested that the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by the winning that occurred at the later timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. ..

In this example, it can be assumed that only the first prize is generated between the timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the prize. In this case as well, it depends on the timing when the prize is generated. Therefore, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is changed as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holds is limited to 4 at the maximum, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "cooked" 1 regardless of the prize timing. Set the playback time for the second prize, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the playback time for the second "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and make a special judgment in the third prize. If a result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the 4th winning, the special sound is obtained regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the playback time for four "cueins".

Further, in this embodiment, when the look-ahead winning is obtained, "Kyuin" is played as a special sound, but the first judgment result (for example, relatively expected degree) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won. Depending on whether a low look-ahead win) or a second determination result (for example, a look-ahead win with a relatively high expectation) is obtained, the reproduced content as a special sound may be changed. For example, if the first judgment result (for example, a look-ahead winning with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won, "Kyuin" is played as a special sound, whereas the look-ahead when a prize is won is played. When the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the judgment, if "Dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timing tY11 and tY12. In addition to the prediction of whether or not the pre-reading win was obtained by winning, the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) and the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) as the pre-reading winning It will also be possible to make predictions about which one was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173, the pre-reading determination in the first winning (first hold) in which the winning is performed at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 and tY12 is the first determination result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation). ) Has been obtained, and it is assumed that the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was won at an extremely late timing. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced in the "cure" mode for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the "dokan" mode for another 9 seconds.

According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the "cure" mode is 3 seconds, the first prize is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12 (1st prize). It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) is obtained by the look-ahead determination in the first hold). Also, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was possible to win the pre-reading in the pre-reading judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold) that won the prize at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Further, according to the fact that the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) in which the prize was won at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the mode of "dokan" after the one "cuein" that has been played back is completed, the second pre-reading judgment in the fourth prize (fourth hold) is the second. It will be possible to predict that a judgment result (a look-ahead winning with a relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

Alternatively, when the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the first start port 2002, "Kyuin" is played as a special sound. , When the second judgment result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the second start port 2004, "Dokan" may be reproduced as a special sound. .. In this case, even in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the look-ahead determination according to the winning of the first starting port 2002 or the look-ahead determination according to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is performed. Depending on the presence, it is desirable to play "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 173 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the mode of "cure" is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 can be set. The first prize (first hold) that won the prize at an extremely early timing is the prize to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first judgment result (the first special figure side) is the pre-reading judgment corresponding to this. It will be possible to predict that a look-ahead winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the look-ahead was also won in the look-ahead judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Further, according to the fact that the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment in the first prize (first hold) in which the prize is won at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 and tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the form of "Dokan" after the one "Kyuin" that has been played is completed, the fourth prize (fourth hold) is on the second starting port 2004 side. It becomes possible to predict that the second determination result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead determination corresponding to the winning prize.

As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening while the channel reservation process is being executed. , The case where the look-ahead winning in the look-ahead effect is obtained is illustrated. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173 is, in short, a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received in a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that makes it possible to avoid a channel shortage that occurs when a special sound is output when a judgment result is obtained and cannot be output. Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the look-ahead winning in the look-ahead effect.

[Channel usage restrictions]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment monitors the number of free channels as the game progresses, and when the number becomes less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds is recorded. The ratio of restricting the execution of output-related processing is increased (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, at least for some game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is restricted from the stage before the number of free channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of free channels approaches 0. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of free channels to zero.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested (every time the start condition is satisfied), the digested symbol variation is Determine the availability of channels during the execution period. As a result, when there is a margin in the availability of the channel, the ratio of channel use restriction (channel restriction level) is lowered at least until the symbol variation to be determined is completed, and the channel is vacant. When there is no room in the situation, increase the rate at which channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) at least until the symbol variation targeted for judgment is completed, and set the channel restriction with such symbol variation as one unit. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution period of the symbol change targeted for determination is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as the channel restriction level, and as the level value becomes higher, the ratio of restricting the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound increases.

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the process related to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

It is assumed that it is determined that the pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 174, the value of the channel restriction level set last time is reset as the process of step S3101. The reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol change is completed.

Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the effect pattern of the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the symbol variation to the start of the reach effect, or the symbol). Specify "X", which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) based on the timing when the channel has the least vacancy within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the symbol without starting the reach effect. do. Further, as the process of step S3103, the channel is channeled within the period of the latter half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol fluctuation) based on the type of the effect pattern of the latter half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern. Specify "Y", which is the number of free channels (minimum number of free channels) based on the timing when the most free channels are exhausted.

However, when the effect pattern in which the symbol is stopped without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol change is selected, the symbol change corresponding to the "second half of the change" is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process itself of step S3103, or the maximum value that can be set as the number of free channels "Y" in the process of step S3103 (a value that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

Next, as the process of step S3104, the "X" specified in the process of step S3102 is compared with the "Y" specified in the process of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y". Based on the value on the side where the minimum number of free channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of free channels), the channel restriction level is set at least until the symbol variation targeted for determination is completed. As a result, from the start to the end of the symbol variation targeted for determination, the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. , It is expected that the number of vacant channels will not be reduced to 0, and that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the appearance of unintended production modes will be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the "minimum number of free channels" used for the determination is specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This means that the production content of the first half of the fluctuation (the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the start of the reach production, etc.) is shared by multiple production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). Therefore, it is considered that the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation as a unit. ..

However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel restriction level setting does not necessarily have to be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. With the pattern as one unit, the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel has the least vacancy within the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

In addition, the "minimum number of free channels" here refers to sounds that are automatically generated when the effect pattern (effect content) to be determined progresses (BGM-related, symbol stop-related according to the jackpot determination, and jackpot determination). It shows how many channels are left as free state when they are assigned to each channel only for the corresponding sound effect related). Therefore, button press sounds (sounds associated with effects generated based on button operations, etc.), volume adjustment completion sounds, various notification sounds, block winning sounds (sounds associated with winning general winning openings), and pending winning sounds (first). The production patterns (production content) to be judged, such as the sound associated with winning the starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004) and the normal electric production sound (sound associated with the production according to the judgment of the normal symbol), have been developed. Various sounds that are not always executed by just playing are not included as the judgment target.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing the value of the channel restriction level separately set for the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3104, and showing an example of the restriction content separately determined for the channel restriction level. ..

As shown in FIG. 175, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, first, among various game sounds, the block winning sound (winning to the general winning opening) is used as the sound to be restricted from using the channel. (Sounds associated with), hold winning sounds (sounds associated with winning the first start port 2002 or second start port 2004), general electric production sounds (sounds associated with effects according to the judgment of ordinary symbols), volume adjustment completion sounds Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol change in which there is no room in the vacant channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds. Restrictions on channel usage can occur.

More specifically, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Set to "0". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a margin in the vacant channel and the symbol fluctuation is executed, and the sound that is subject to the restriction of channel use (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). None of these are restricted, and if there is a prize in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol change, the block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and the first start opening 2002 or during the execution of the symbol change is executed. If there is a prize in the second start port 2004, the hold prize sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and when the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol change, the normal symbol corresponding to the effect is performed. The electric effect sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and when the volume adjustment is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to the predetermined empty channel and played.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restriction is performed based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Set the level to "1". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a slight margin in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction. Of the sounds), the channel use limit (25% limit) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a prize in the general prize opening during the execution of the symbol change and this is detected, the prize balls for the quantity corresponding to the prize are paid out, but this is specified for the block prize sound. It will be processed so that it will not be assigned to a free channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the schedule data for sound generation according to the winning to the general winning opening and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Set to "2". That is, in this case, assuming that the vacant channel is in a situation where the symbol fluctuation is executed with a relatively small margin, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, and volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are applied. Of the completed sounds), the channel use limit (50% limit) is generated for the two sounds of the block winning sound and the holding winning sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned restriction on the block winning sound, when there is a winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the quantity corresponding to the winning. Although the prize balls for the minutes are paid out and the above-mentioned first and second start opening winning processes are performed, the reserved winning sounds are processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the reserved winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Is set to "3". That is, in this case, assuming that there is no room for symbol fluctuation in the vacant channel, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction. A channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound). That is, in this case, in addition to the restrictions on the block winning sound and the holding winning sound described above, even if the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the normal electric effect sound is not included. Will be processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined free channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the symbol change, the volume adjustment itself is performed according to the volume adjustment operation, but the volume adjustment completed sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, do not set the corresponding sound generation schedule data for the Fuden production sound and volume adjustment completion sound, and do not play the Fuden production sound or volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

According to such a configuration, when a symbol change is executed in which the number of vacant channels in a state where no sound is not assigned becomes less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation is not less than the number, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, some game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0. Since the execution of related processing is restricted and the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation will be suitably suppressed.

Further, in the above configuration, among various game sounds, the sound for which channel use is restricted is not the most important "directing sound related to big hit determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other "sounds associated with winning". , "Direction sound related to normal judgment", and "Sound related to volume adjustment". That is, even if the channel use is restricted during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect of whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is not restricted and is appropriately executed. Therefore, during the execution of the symbol variation. The decline in the entertainment interest when the channel usage is restricted will be suppressed.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of sound that are candidates for channel use restriction among various game sounds are prepared (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level becomes higher (the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation), the number of types of sounds to be restricted for channel use will be increased. However, a method that limits the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0, and increases the ratio of execution limitation as the number of free channels decreases. The method is not limited to this, and for example, the method described below with reference to FIG. 176 may be adopted.

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction content separately determined for each channel restriction level.

As shown in FIG. 176, in this alternative example, the channel is used according to the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. A restricted lottery will be held as to whether or not restrictions will be applied. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared and a determination result indicating that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, one game sound (for example, volume adjustment completion sound) is obtained. The restriction processing related to the channel use is performed only for (etc.).

For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is set to 0/100, and the channel is used. The channel use restriction process is not executed for the specific game sound to be restricted (for example, the volume adjustment completion sound).

However, when the channel restriction level becomes 1 or more, the probability that a judgment result indicating that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is obtained increases as the value increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum free channel). The same probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), and the same probability is 50/100 when the channel restriction level is 2 (minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel restriction level. When is 3 (minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), the same probability is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when the determination result that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, the restriction processing related to the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

Even with such a configuration, if the number of vacant channels in the state where no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is increased. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than a predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds among the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sounds), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0. Since the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, it is preferable to generate a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It will be expected to be suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completed sound) is played during the execution period of the symbol change, the minimum free channel during the execution period of the symbol change is confirmed. It will be possible to infer the possibility that the number will run out, and it will be possible to promote game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) commensurate with the inference.

In the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176, the minimum number of free channels is specified from the occurrence status of the notice effects after the determination processes related to the various notice effects are executed based on the effect patterns, and the specified minimum vacancy is specified. We decided to set the channel limit level based on the number of channels, but this is not always the case. For example, since it is possible to predict in advance how many sounds will be allocated to the channel at the same time during the symbol fluctuation period for each production pattern, the susceptibility to channel shortage is classified in advance according to the production pattern. I'll do it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the higher the likelihood of channel shortage in which the effect pattern is pre-classified, the higher the channel restriction ratio may be. That is, in this case, when a specific type of production pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, many channels are not used and empty channels are not actually used or various prizes are not generated. Even if there is a margin in the number of, there may be a situation where the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound may be restricted while the symbol variation is being executed. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid the number of beings becoming 0, and even when such a process is executed, "the number of free channels during the symbol change is relatively large. When the number is small, the rate at which the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high, and when the number of free channels during the symbol variation is relatively large, the rate at which the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately because it is a phenomenon that the player does not feel any discomfort even from the player side. Further, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound is restricted, it becomes possible to infer the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause channel shortage.

Further, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176 and other examples thereof, the channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit, but the channel is developed as the production content progresses within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied, and channel restriction may be executed according to the channel restriction level each time. Alternatively, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, the channel restriction level is set unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and the channel restriction level is reached. Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

By the way, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176 and other examples thereof, the sound to be restricted from using the channel is not the most important "directing sound related to the jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that. It was decided to use only "sounds associated with winning", "directing sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment". However, since some of these sounds occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize the restriction processing that makes it possible to secure an empty channel more effectively, "related to the jackpot determination". It is desirable to adopt "directed sound" as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is executed for the "directing sound related to the jackpot judgment", there is a concern that the directing sound will not be reproduced and the production will be lacking in excitement. If the jackpot symbol is stopped in a certain situation, the game entertainment may be reduced.

In this regard, in the configurations exemplified in FIGS. 175 and 176 and other examples thereof, among the "directing sounds related to the jackpot determination", only the "directing related to the pattern fluctuation that is in the pending state and will be digested in the future" is the production. If the use of the sound channel is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 176 or another example), the effect related to the result of the symbol change during execution can be obtained. Therefore, it will be possible to adopt the production sounds that occur frequently as the restriction target without any restrictions.

For example, if a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 during the period when the symbol change is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to the prize is put on hold, the hold is usually made. Performs a determination process as to whether to perform a look-ahead effect for the jackpot determination in the state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a look-ahead effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether the pending jackpot determination is a jackpot winner is performed. Become.

However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about vacancy (such as when the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1 and the symbol fluctuation is being executed), the channel usage is restricted to "pending state". If "the sound produced according to the effect related to the symbol change that will be digested in the future" is targeted, a prize will be generated for the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the corresponding jackpot judgment will be suspended. Even if the state is set, the determination process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed for the jackpot determination put in the hold state, and both the look-ahead effect and the effect sound corresponding to the pre-reading effect are not performed. In this case, the look-ahead effect is not only a hold change in the game board side effect display device 1600, but also a predetermined effect change (effect sound according to the look-ahead determination) in a different effect means (sub liquid crystal display, lamp, etc.). When it is executed as causing an effect change that is performed in accordance with a hold change, etc., not only the hold change in the game board side effect display device 1600 but also an effect means different from this (sub liquid crystal display, lamp, etc.) is used. It is more desirable to limit the change of a predetermined effect so that it is not performed, in order to suppress a sense of discomfort (difference in effect) when a specific effect sound is not assigned as a measure against channel shortage.

According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety arises in the vacancy, the channels that are assigned to the production related to the future symbol fluctuations that are not the running symbol fluctuations are being executed. Since it will be possible to supply the production sound related to the fluctuation of the sound, it will not have any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation during execution, and the production sound with high frequency of occurrence will be restricted. You will be able to. In addition, the effect to be restricted is only "the effect related to the symbol change for the future that is in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is restricted, it will be restricted when it is put on hold in the future. Since the effect during the pattern change (the content of the effect according to the effect pattern) that is not set is always executed, the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the restriction target of the effect can be suitably suppressed.

Further, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, processing is performed to limit the output of a specific sound when the "predetermined production condition" that causes concern about the number of free channels is satisfied. did. However, even if the "predetermined production conditions" are not satisfied and there is no concern about the number of free channels, the process of limiting the output of specific sounds under the specified conditions. May be executed. For example, when a specific condition different from the "predetermined effect condition" is satisfied, an effect state (effect period) in which the specific sound cannot be output over a plurality of symbol fluctuations is generated. According to such a configuration, a special effect state (effect period) in which the number of vacant channels has a margin over a plurality of symbol fluctuations appears, and in the special effect state (effect period), only that amount appears. You will be able to perform other productions more positively.

In addition, when "directing sound related to big hit judgment" is targeted for restriction, if only the directing sound of the directing (directing display, directing sound) is targeted for restriction (no sound output), the production lacks excitement. In the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about availability, a prize will be won and the jackpot judgment will be put on hold. Sometimes, the judgment process for the look-ahead effect itself is not executed, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed, so that a special result (pre-reading winning) cannot be obtained in the look-ahead judgment. Only the same effect situation as when the pre-reading effect is executed (holding display when the look-ahead effect is not executed) is obtained, and it becomes possible to suitably avoid a decrease in the game entertainment due to the effect execution lacking in excitement.

In addition, when the "effect sound related to the jackpot judgment" is restricted, the judgment process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed when the prize is won and the jackpot judgment is put on hold, and the effect display and effect related to the look-ahead effect are performed. I tried not to do both with sound, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the "directed sound related to the jackpot judgment" is restricted, the pre-reading effect is judged when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during the symbol change arrives. Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect, but limits them, and when a specific timing arrives during the symbol change, only the effect display and the effect sound are restricted. You may cancel and do this. That is, in this case, the effect display related to the look-ahead effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing), which is different from the case where the "effect sound related to the jackpot determination" is not restricted (normal time), and is special. Since the look-ahead effect is executed after making it appear as if the result (pre-reading winning) was not obtained, the look-ahead effect is suppressed while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to not outputting the effect sound corresponding to the look-ahead effect. You will be able to do it suitably.

In addition, as a process related to future production in a situation where channel use is restricted,
・ When a prize is won, the judgment process for the look-ahead effect is performed, but even if a special result is obtained, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not executed until a specific timing during the symbol change arrives. By limiting these, when a specific timing arrives during the symbol change, only the restriction on the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound is released and this is performed. age,
-The game progresses when the second restricted processing is such that the judgment process for the look-ahead effect itself is not executed when a prize is won, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed. Among them, when the symbol variation in which the number of empty channels in the state where no sound is not assigned is less than the predetermined number is executed, compared with the case where the symbol variation in which the number of the same empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is executed. Therefore, the ratio of execution of either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first restricted processing is performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is "A", and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restriction processing is performed is "B". When, it is more desirable to execute either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing so that the relationship becomes an "A <B" relationship. That is, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the vacancy causes greater anxiety, both the effect display and the effect sound are restricted instead of the first restricted processing that limits only the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second restriction pretreatment is increased, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more preferably suppressed.

Further, as described above, the sounds assigned to the finite channels are the first group sound whose production volume can be adjusted by the operation reception by the player, and the production volume cannot be adjusted by the operation reception by the player. It is at least distinguishable from the second group sound (error sound, etc.). In this regard, when the "predetermined production conditions" that raise concerns about the number of vacant channels are satisfied, limiting only the sounds that are distinguished by the first group sound is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1. It is desirable to appropriately execute the processing when it occurs.

Further, the finite channel is divided into a plurality of groups including at least a first channel group to which an effect sound can be assigned and a second channel group to which a notification sound (error sound) different from the effect sound can be assigned. If it is, "The execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels in the state where no sound is assigned in the first channel group is reduced to less than a predetermined number is empty in the first channel group. Compared to the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio of the specific sound to the channel of the first channel group is not newly assigned to the effect state. " As described above, it is desirable to execute the processing only for the first channel group in terms of both more reliable processing when an error occurs and reduction of the processing load.

Further, as described above, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, "the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels in the state where no sound is not assigned is reduced to less than a predetermined number is empty. Compared to the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of channels is not reduced to less than a predetermined number, the ratio of the specific effect sound to the effect state in which it is not newly assigned to the channel is high. " There is a feature. In this regard, if the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of vacant channels is reduced to less than a predetermined number is processed as "the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel", the relevant state is concerned. As soon as the execution period for displaying the symbol effect is completed, the "effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel" can be canceled (finished). On the other hand, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of vacant channels is not reduced to less than a predetermined number is processed as "the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel", the said. Make sure that the effect state (the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel) is continued over a plurality of symbol changes including the symbol effect display even after the symbol effect display is completed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of vacant channels is not reduced to less than a predetermined number is processed as "the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel". Although the ratio is low, once this is processed, the effect state is not easily terminated and is prolonged, and during that time, the specific effect sound cannot be output. That is, in this case, when a "effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel" appears, a special effect (the symbol effect display reduces the number of empty channels to less than a predetermined number). It will be possible to add a directing property (whether it is something to be made to do), and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel, the specific image that can be displayed only in the effect state may be displayed. According to such a configuration, by displaying the specific image, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect sound is in the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel.

In addition, it is possible to make a specific image appear at multiple timings in one symbol variation, and if it is displayed as an image with different contents (appearance, form, etc.) at each timing, any of the multiple timings. Even if there is an image of content (appearance, form, etc.) that the player does not understand, the image is displayed at other timings and other content (appearance, form, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to more reliably recognize that the "specific effect sound is in an effect state in which it is not newly assigned to the channel".

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in the output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is lowered. It is possible to perform a process of ending the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel in the state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is completed in this way, it is possible to execute the process of increasing the volume of the other game sounds for which the assignment to the channel is continued (channel special opening process).

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel allocation mode of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is lowered (suppressed state)). It will reduce the number of channels in (increase the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds, the number of channels in use is reduced. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is no longer output.

FIG. 177 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special opening process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 177, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "normal BGM reproduction" corresponding to the above is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and corresponds to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "effect A reproduction" is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction, effect A reproduction), the sound of "effect A reproduction" is in the stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of production. At the timing tk13 (during the execution of the symbol variation), the reproduction channels 08 and 09 are removed and the reproduction is terminated. In this way, even if the predetermined production pattern is in the middle of the production, the production content of the predetermined production pattern can be obtained by finishing the allocation of the production sound from the channel and promptly changing it to an empty channel. It will be possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a new sound cannot be assigned and played due to a shortage of empty channels as it progresses.

However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is in the middle of the effect (during the execution of the symbol change), the effect sound is not assigned from the channel and the channel is changed to an empty channel. The number of effect sounds in the reproduced state will decrease, and there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in the effect pattern has decreased by the decrease.

Therefore, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), first, before the timing tk13 for removing the sound of the “effect A reproduction” from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and ending the reproduction arrives. During the period from "timing tk12" to the arrival of "timing tk14" after the timing tk13, the sound of "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the effect B displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced. It is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 to be in the state of reproduction (here, stereo reproduction). Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of the “effect B reproduction” is put into the reproduction state, the timing tk13 at which the “effect A reproduction” is terminated. In line with the arrival of the sound, it is decided to perform a process (volume suppression process) of reducing the volume of each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" while keeping them assigned to the channels.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), the sound of "production B reproduction" in this explanatory example is output as a production sound corresponding to the step production in which the production content can be developed up to four times. After the production content has been developed three times (step 1, step 2, step 3) in sequence, the production is performed as to whether the production content is further developed according to step 4. Therefore, a process of lowering the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while keeping a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the step effect assigned to the channel. If a high-expected production mode that further develops into the production content according to step 4 appears when the volume suppression process is completed and the volume is returned to the normal volume (a production with a relatively high expectation). While a specific effect sound corresponding to the effect content of step 4 is output as the sound of "effect B reproduction", the effect content according to step 3 is used without developing into the effect content according to step 4. When a low-expected production mode in which the production is completed appears (a production with a relatively low expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of the “production B reproduction”.

According to such a configuration, the effect design is made so that the timing tk13 arrives aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed for a plurality of effect sounds, and the “effect A” is performed while the volume suppression process is performed. Since the sound of "playback" is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is terminated, the number of channels in use has decreased (the sound of "production A playback" is in the non-playback state. It will be possible to make it difficult to notice (what was done).

In particular, in the examples shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (c), the production content having a relatively high expectation (the production content developing to step 4) and the production content having a relatively low expectation (step). Within the period in which the production content (production of whether or not it develops to step 4) that leads to any of the production content (production content that does not develop to 4) appears (the period in which it is unclear whether or not it develops), the above-mentioned The volume suppression process is executed to remove the sound of "effect A reproduction" from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and end the reproduction. According to such a configuration, not only the volume of the production sound is lowered, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the production B (sound of "production B reproduction"). Since the production A (sound of "production A playback") is terminated at, the volume of the production sound that was the target of volume suppression including the sound of "production B playback" was returned. Occasionally, even if the sound of "Production A playback" is prevented from being reproduced, the production content with relatively high expectations (the production content that develops to step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectations (production content that develops to step 4). It becomes possible to attract attention to which of the effects (contents of the effect that does not develop to step 4) appears, and to make it difficult to notice that the sound of "production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

Moreover, in the volume suppression process according to this explanation example, although the volume is lowered while a plurality of production sounds including the sound of "Production B reproduction" are assigned to the channels, all the production sounds are reduced. The volume is not lowered, and the specific production sound (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is continuously reproduced at the normal volume. That is, in this case, the volume of a plurality of production sounds is lowered while the volume of some of the production sounds (the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is being reproduced normally without being suppressed, and thus the sounds are distinguished. Since the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated while the sound is made more difficult, it can be made more difficult to notice because the sound of "Production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced. It will be like.

Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the sound reproduction of the "effect A reproduction" is not terminated immediately after the volume suppression process is performed on the plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has passed since the volume suppression process was started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive, the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, the player may be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of "volume decrease" occurs, but the volume decreases to a specific value. When the state of not changing at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest is no longer diminished. Therefore, the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is aimed at such timing. By ending the reproduction of, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In particular, in this explanatory example, the volume of the effect sound targeted for the volume suppression process is gradually reduced, and the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound of "effect B reproduction" is started to be reproduced while the sound of "effect A reproduction" is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the sound of "Production B reproduction" is being reproduced, the sound of "Production A reproduction" is started to be reproduced, and while the sound of "Production B reproduction" is being reproduced in the suppressed state, "Production A reproduction" is performed. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be terminated.

Further, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be an effect accompanied by an effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as an effect of only sound, for example.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of "effect B reproduction" is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, the sound of "effect B reproduction" is started to be reproduced based on the operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.), and the sound of "effect A reproduction" is reproduced while the sound of the "effect B reproduction" is reproduced. The reproduction of the above-mentioned may be terminated in the above-described manner.

Further, it is not always necessary to gradually reduce the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression process. On the contrary, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned step by step. In addition, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a lower volume than usual, it is difficult to notice that the sound reproduction of "Direction A reproduction" has ended. Is possible.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the specific production sound according to the production pattern (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is excluded from the volume suppression processing, and the normal volume remains unchanged. Although it is designed to be continuously played, the volume of all the effect sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. On the contrary, with respect to the sound of "Production A reproduction", the volume may be maintained without necessarily lowering the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume may be lowered. While the player is attracting the interest of the player to the sound of "Production B playback" in the state of being played, the playback of the sound of "Production A playback" is terminated, and then the sound of "Production B playback" is included. Even if the sound of "Production A playback" is not played back when the volume of multiple production sounds that were targeted for volume suppression is returned, the production content with relatively high expectations (step 4). The sound of "Production A playback" is reproduced, attracting interest in which of the production content that develops into (the production content that develops into) and the production content that has relatively low expectations (the production content that does not develop into step 4) appears. You will be able to make it harder to notice that it is no longer being done.

Further, at least during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sounds of "effect A reproduction" and "effect B reproduction" is performed (after the volume of "effect B reproduction" is lowered from the normal value). Until it is returned to the normal value), even if a prize is awarded to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, in order to maintain the interest in the sound of "Direction B reproduction" more preferably. It is desirable not to play the corresponding hold winning sound. Further, even if a special result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the look-ahead determination when a prize is won in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the effect sound corresponding to the look-ahead effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound reproduction of "effect A reproduction" is terminated within the period when the volume of the effect sound is decreased, and when the period ends, the sound is assigned to the channel in the state of volume decrease until then. We decided to raise the volume of the production sound that had been used (return to the original volume value), but in addition to this, at the end of the period, a special production sound that was not previously assigned to the channel will be added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and played (played at the normal volume). With such a configuration, it became interesting to see if a special production sound was played when the volume was returned, and it was further noticed that the sound of "Production A playback" was no longer played. You will be able to make it difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels used after the volume is restored is reduced compared to before the volume is lowered, there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation may be lowered, but a special production sound. Is newly assigned to the channel and played (played at the normal volume), so that it is the same as or more than that before the volume is lowered and after the volume is restored (two or more directing sounds are sent to the channel). Since it will be possible to use the channel of (when newly assigned), it is also preferable that the player feels as if the expectation level has decreased. Will be avoided. In this case, the special production sound may or may not be played when the volume is returned, suggesting that the expectation is relatively high when the special production sound is played. It is desirable to do.

If you want to newly assign a special production sound that was not assigned to the channel when the volume is returned and play it, the channel that became vacant due to the sound assignment of "Production A playback" being removed. It is desirable to assign a special production sound to. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a wide range of production with a small amount of channel resources.

Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and is, for example, a restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. "Production A" is adopted as the above, and the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the more the channel is specially opened (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol fluctuation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to make people feel uneasy about running out of channels, "Direction A" can be continuously output without being terminated in the middle. become.

In the above explanatory example, in the "volume suppression effect" in which at least a part of the game sounds is output in a suppressed mode or silently, a specific type of effect pattern is executed (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination. ), And when the effect content reaches a specific timing, it is executed for a part of the period within the effect pattern. In this regard, the number of effect patterns prepared (memorized) as "specific type effect patterns" that can generate such volume suppression effect is prepared as "other effect patterns" that do not generate volume suppression effect (). It is desirable to set it so that it is less than the number of effect patterns that are stored (remembered) in order to improve the game entertainment when the volume suppression effect occurs.

Further, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as "effect patterns" capable of generating the volume suppression effect, the effect patterns are longer than the effect pattern for executing the volume suppression effect over the first set time and the first set time. It is desirable that the effect patterns for executing the volume suppression effect over the second set time are included, and the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is different in those effect patterns. According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game sounds is output in a suppressed mode or silently, the jackpot expectation is suggested depending on how long the state is continued. Will be able to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player changes the set value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol change is not executed (demo state, etc.), the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (Processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where the symbol change is executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even if the volume setting value is changed in the state where the symbol fluctuation is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the "effect pattern that can generate the volume suppression effect" can be selected, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the symbol change regardless of the effect pattern. Since the player who sees the sound not being output becomes aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 can display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed, so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable to make people aware (aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but it may be output at volume 0, or the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel. ..

The expectation (including 100%) that the jackpot symbol will appear is suggested during the period when the "volume suppression effect" that makes at least a part of the game sounds output in a suppressed mode or silently is executed. It is desirable to perform an expected display (such as an expected effect that causes any one of a plurality of effect modes having different expectations to appear). According to such a configuration, the player's interest is transferred to the expected display (expected effect), so that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is produced during the period when the "volume suppression effect" is being executed. It will be possible to make it even more difficult to notice that it will be terminated.

When the "volume suppression effect" is executed and at least a part of the game sound is output in the suppressed mode or silent, the sound of the "effect B reproduction" is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode. At a predetermined timing before the timing arrives, new production sound data different from any of the production sounds already in the output state (“normal BGM” or “production A reproduction”) is assigned to the channel, and the new production sound is assigned. The sound corresponding to the data may be output in an unsuppressed manner. That is, in this case, the sound corresponding to the new effect sound data is output in a non-suppressed mode while the "effect B reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or silent mode, and the "effect B reproduction" is performed. Since the sound of "effect B reproduction" is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode while being output in the non-suppressed mode, the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated. Can be made even more difficult to notice.

During the period in which the "volume suppression effect" is executed, it is desirable that the display image on the effect display device 1600 is also hidden or displayed in the suppression mode. However, in this case, it is desirable that the display image displayed by the effect display device 1600 includes an image that is not the target of the processing.

Within one effect pattern, the period during which the "volume suppression effect" is executed can appear multiple times, and in those periods, the length of "the time during which at least a part of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silently". It is desirable to make them different. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to put a specific production sound into a non-output state in a manner that is difficult for the player to notice in all production scenes, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment. ..

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs processing to advance the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns the sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel for reproduction. Perform the process of making it. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and output in a suppressed mode or silently ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is lowered to a specific value and output) and an operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is detected in this state, the jackpot symbol (corresponding to the corresponding symbol) is caused by the symbol fluctuation. A special effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is output in an unsuppressed manner (suppressed operation sound output processing). The degree of expectation suggested by the special production may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special effect sound corresponding to the operation detection is output, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed mode or silently. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage status of the channel seems to be affordable. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety such as "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". This will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

By the way, when it is attempted to output a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (sound of "BGM reproduction") to a channel in a suppression mode or silently, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that a process (process of reducing the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the existing sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a valid period for the effect reception), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern ("" It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate a valid period of the effect reception) after the sound of "BGM reproduction") is set to be output in a suppressed mode or silently.

However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the valid period of the production reception is generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (production reception) is performed at any timing within this valid period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume returned to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the sound corresponding to this is started to be reproduced at an indefinite timing.

In addition to the process of returning the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "BGM reproduction dedicated to special production sound reproduction". It is also conceivable to perform a process of regenerating. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the content of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and ended, the timing of the symbol stop, etc., it is within the valid period. While it is uncertain (depending on the player) at what timing the operation (production reception) will be performed, if the operation (production reception) is used as an opportunity to newly reproduce the sound of "BGM playback". However, there is a concern that so-called sound deviation will occur between the timing of various productions and the timing of stopping the design after that, and the interest in the game will be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern (a plurality of sound data ( For example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, sound data at the second half of the super reach effect, etc.) are predetermined according to the time series specified by the corresponding schedule data for sound generation. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. When the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel according to the time series, the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel and the playback is started from the timing before the valid period of the effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the valid period ends. The assigned state for a predetermined channel is maintained and played for a long period of time until the timing after that.

In this regard, in a part of the section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, the process is suppressed or silently applied to the sound output as compared with the other sections. When the data content that stipulates that is performed is preset and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data, a part of the section (special). It is designed to have a time-series relationship in which the valid period of the production reception occurs within the period). In addition to this, regardless of the timing of the operation by the player within the valid period of the above-mentioned effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The sound of "BGM playback" is a special production sound according to the production reception, straddling two sections in the specific sound data, the period after (partial section) is completed (other section). It is designed to be played back in an unsuppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, super). Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach effect) to the predetermined channels according to the time series specified by the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of silent output (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is received for production in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, it is special in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is set to start playing, the sound of "BGM playback" that is in the playback state on the predetermined channel is "output in a suppressed mode or silently" regardless of the production reception (special period). Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in the form of being mixed in with the special production sound being reproduced. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) will be reproduced, it will be possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppressed mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently, the special directed sound is not suppressed by the highly immediate processing triggered by this. It is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation between the timing of various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that, while the reproduction is started at.

FIG. 178 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example of executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described with reference to FIG. 178.

As shown in FIG. 178 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ts11, the specific effect is advanced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start to the end of the symbol variation when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. It may be reproduced as a sound material) based on the schedule data for sound generation, or the entire period of the symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is them. It may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 178, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in the playback state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state is special. Silence data content is set at timing ts12, before the arrival of timing ts13 when the operation valid period (valid period of effect reception) is given to give an operation opportunity that triggers the generation of the production sound. It is designed to be in the playback state in some sections. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content, and it seems that there is a margin in the usage status of the channel. While the atmosphere is provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This provides an operation opportunity for the player to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". It will be possible to do so, and this will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

Moreover, the operation validity period according to this explanatory example is the timing ts16 at which a part of the section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is terminated even if there is no operation by the player. At the timing ts15, which is before the arrival of, the period is terminated so that the operation by the player is not accepted for the production. Therefore, no matter which timing of the operation valid period the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM reproduction" will be in the reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content. While the atmosphere is provided that the usage of the cage channel seems to be affordable, it will be possible to generate a special production sound according to the operation by the player. The operation valid period ends not only when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when the operation by the player is accepted for production. When the timing ts15 arrives without the operation by the player, the special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation by the player is performed at that timing.

Then, in this explanatory example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned based on the reception of the effect. Special production sounds are assigned to channels 08 and 09, which are different from those of, 03, and played back.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, the maximum time (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) from the start to the end of the operation valid period is set to "SY", and the operation valid period is terminated at this maximum time. When the time (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) until the end of a part of the section where silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is set to "BF", it is within the operation valid period. Regardless of which timing the player operates, the special production sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time of "SY + α (> BF)" and played.

According to such a configuration, the timing ts16 always arrives when the special production sound is in the playback state, regardless of the timing during which the operation is valid. It becomes possible to output the sound of "BGM reproduction" as a non-suppressed mode so as to be mixed in with the special production sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special production sound to the output of the "BGM reproduction" sound as an unsuppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , The buffer period for restoring the output period of the special production sound in an unsuppressed manner (the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored in an unsuppressed manner by being mixed with the special production sound). By making it function as a period that makes it difficult to notice that, when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is not restored as a non-suppressed mode, and the discomfort caused by restoring it after a predetermined time is caused. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

Then, after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction in this way, when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the non-suppressed mode. Playback of the special production sound will be terminated while in the state.

In the above explanatory example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are operated by the player as shown in FIG. 178 (b). It will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow according to the accepted timing, but regardless of which timing they correspond to, the timing ts16 arrives when the special production sound is in the playback state. , It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, "a feeling of strangeness due to the sound of" BGM reproduction "not being restored as a non-suppressive mode when the operation by the player is accepted but being restored after a predetermined time" is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly transferred to the reproduction state in the normal section while the special production sound having a large initial volume value is attracting attention.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, when the operation by the player is received for the effect, the special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but the specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination. The special production sound may be generated based on the reception of the production only when the conditions are satisfied. Even if the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when the operation by the player is received within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is reproduced. Then, regardless of the timing of the operation within the operation valid period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly put into the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 178.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect) is reproduced. The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section in the state where the reproduction of (sound, etc.) is completed. In this case, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is reproduced at the timing when the BGM reproduction sound is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section. Will be set to arrive after the end. According to such a configuration, there is a silent period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) and the return of the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if a revival effect that raises the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during this silent period, it is expected that the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. May be good. In this case, at the timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated and this may be made an empty channel.

In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction by also performing a movable effect of operating a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to secretly shift the reproduced sound to the reproduced state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is silently output in a part of the section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound is suppressed more than the sound of "BGM reproduction" in other sections. It suffices if it is output by. Here, the suppressed mode can be exemplified as a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced, and the like.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel itself is set to the suppression mode or the time-series period in which the sound is silenced, so that the "BGM reproduction" can be performed. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently just by playing it without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, it is not always necessary to set a time-series period in which the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. For example, at timing ts12, the sound of "BGM reproduction" may be set. Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, the process of increasing the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (the process of returning to the initial volume value) is performed with the effect reception as an opportunity. Try not to. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. The process of increasing from the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without increasing the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from the specific value. good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, a restriction process for making it difficult for new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel is performed at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the arrival of the timing ts12 to the timing ts16. Is desirable. It should be noted that such restriction processing has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol change during execution, such as a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric effect sound, and an adjustment sound. It is desirable that a specific game sound is targeted for restriction, and that the specific game sound subject to this restriction is not newly assigned to a channel and its reproduction is not performed.

Further, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is used on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. It is desirable that it is not music but a production sound such as a sound effect or dialogue so that it does not overlap with the sound of It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed mode or silently. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed with the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of a specific effect sound should be terminated before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special production sound is not output.

Here, with respect to the above-mentioned specific effect sound reproduced on a channel different from channels 02 and 03, the reproduction does not necessarily have to be started at the timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and the reproduction does not necessarily start at the timing ts12 or later. It may be present and the reproduction may be started before the timing ts13. Even with such a configuration, if a specific effect sound is output in a non-suppressed mode (normal mode) when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or a silent state, once " Since the sound of BGM reproduction in the "suppressed mode or silent state" can be made to appear as if it has been returned to the reproduced state in the normal mode, the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or silent state. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that it is.

Further, "for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is terminated before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output". , "The output of a specific effect sound is terminated based on the fact that the operation by the player is received within the operation valid period, or is automatically terminated at a specific timing within the timings ts13 to t15 (operation valid period)." It means that. That is, if the operation by the player is not received by the player until the specific timing within the timings ts13 to t15 (operation valid period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically terminated.

Further, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM reproduction is emitted from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of being silenced ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of production sounds including special production sounds are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM reproduction into those production sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is usually used. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the embodiment.

Further, such a suppressed operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. "BGM playback sound" is adopted as the restriction target, and the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol variation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The ratio of the operation sound output processing under the suppression may be increased. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to cause anxiety that the special production sound is not output due to lack of channels. You will be able to.

Regarding the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, the effect reception is always generated (automatic reception) within the effective period even if there is no operation, and the post-operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do so.

Further, when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178 occurs, the effect reception is permitted while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. The "acceptable reception sound" suggesting that (or the reception of the production is permitted) may be output in a non-suppressed manner. The "acceptable sound" is configured as a part of the "specific sound data" for outputting the above "specific production sound", and the "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel before the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and the specific effect sound corresponding to the "specific sound data" is output in an unsuppressed manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the "acceptable sound" is output as the sound corresponding to the "specific sound data" assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound for acceptance" is output from before the timing ts13 to after the timing ts13 so as to straddle the timing ts13. It should be noted that the specific effect sound can be output as, for example, a precursor effect sound corresponding to a precursor effect (an effect suggesting that the valid period will occur soon) performed before the operation valid period occurs. In this case, a “precursor sound reproduction section” and a “reception allowable sound reproduction section” are provided in one sound data assigned to the channel so as to straddle before and after the timing ts13. The "acceptable sound" may be a non-output state in the middle of the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at the timing ts15. It is good, but it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to switch to the non-output state when the production reception is done while the output state is in effect.

That is, "the acceptance allowable sound is output" here means that "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at the timing ts13, and is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction section of the acceptable sound for reception" in the sound data in accordance with the timing ts13. In addition, the "non-output state" here also cancels the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the "reproduction section of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is terminated and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

Further, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, the elapsed time from the time when the production reception is performed, regardless of the timing of the production reception within the valid period. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special production sound is reproduced in an unsuppressed manner on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned.

In this regard, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception will appear as the display image on the effect display device 1600. However, regarding the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception, "the execution state (visible state) is continued until the elapsed time from the time when the effect reception is made reaches the predetermined time value". Instead, it is desirable to "hide the effect when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, regardless of when the effect is received within the valid period". As the "predetermined timing in the effect pattern", for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after the timing ts15 and before the timing ts17 can be adopted. However, even if the production reception is performed immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the timing must come before the timing when the output state of the special production sound ends. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, regarding the processing related to the special production sound, the output state must be continued until the timing when the sound of the "BGM reproduction" is restored in the non-suppressed manner and comes after the timing ts16. However, since it will be possible to end the special effect display before the special effect sound, it will be possible to advance the effect after the post-operation effect at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such an effect, the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored or the timing that arrives before the timing ts16. It can be said that it is important.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the elapsed time from the timing of the production reception is predetermined based on the fact that the production reception is performed. "Processing for special production sound that keeps the output state until the time value is reached" and "Processing for special production display that continues to be displayed until a predetermined timing in the production pattern arrives" are performed in parallel. Will start with each.

For example, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "process related to the special effect display" in the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively long period of time. Of the post-operation effects, the "process related to the special effect sound" ends at the timing when a predetermined time value elapses from the time when the effect reception is performed. On the other hand, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "process related to the special effect display" of the post-operation effect is executed only for a relatively short time. However, among the post-operation effects, the "process related to the special effect sound" is executed from the time when the effect is received until the timing when the predetermined time value has elapsed.

That is, in this case, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern becomes the specific timing. When the production is accepted within the special operation reception effect (valid period), "the output state is output until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It functions to execute "processing related to the special effect sound to be continued" and "processing related to the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives".

According to such an operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), if the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs, the execution state of the "process related to the special effect display" among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a compensation for this, the end timing of the "processing related to the special production sound" among the post-operation effects will arrive at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate for a while after the validity period occurs and operate it at a later time, the end timing of "processing related to special production sound" in the post-operation production will be relatively late. However, there is a demerit that it is not possible to maintain the execution state of the "process related to the special effect display" among the post-operation effects for a long time.

That is, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no most desirable operation timing for producing excitement.
-In exchange for accelerating the end timing of the "processing related to the special effect sound", do you enjoy this by lengthening the execution state of the "processing related to the special effect display" (operate at an early stage within the valid period? Do you do) or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of the "process related to the special effect display", do you enjoy this by extending the time until the "process related to the special effect sound" is completed (at a late stage within the valid period)? Do you operate it) or
-Slightly sacrifice the time for the "process related to the special effect display" to be maintained as an execution state and the time until the "process related to the special effect sound" is completed, and try to balance the whole. (Is it operated at a timing that is neither early nor late within the valid period?)
It is possible to have a strategic operation effect such as the above for the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception effect that does not cause tiredness and allows the player to select the operation timing according to the mood of the player. Will be able to.

Here, in the above explanatory example, as the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), "process related to the special effect sound" and "process related to the special effect display" are performed. Although the example described above has been described, the "process of operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be further executed, or the "process of operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be performed instead of the "process related to the special effect display". May be executed. However, regarding the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body", as in the case of the above-mentioned "process for displaying the special effect", "even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the valid period". , It is desirable to end the operation state when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. " Here, "terminating the operating state" means that, in the case of an effect of operating a predetermined effect movable body to a specific position, the predetermined effect movable body in the operating state at the specific position is moved to the original position. It means to start the process of operating to return.

In the above description example, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , Processing to operate a predetermined production movable body) ”and“ processing related to the special production sound ”that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the production is received reaches a predetermined time value, respectively. And said. However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, if the jackpot determination is lost or the predetermined effect determination is lost). In such cases), even if the production reception is performed within the operation reception production, the "processing related to the special production display (or the processing for operating the predetermined production movable body)" is not performed, and the predetermined production conditions are met. Is satisfied (FIG. 178), the "processing related to the special production sound" in which the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short can be performed as a different production sound. More desirable.

However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected well (detection error), and the production may not be accepted. As a result, the production is valid without being accepted. When the period ends, the player's interest in playing the game is to see how the "process related to the special effect display (or the process to operate the predetermined effect movable body)" is not performed even though the operation is performed. There is concern that it will decline. Therefore, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the production pattern is reached. (Or, the process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and the" process related to the special effect sound "that continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed respectively. It is desirable to be done. As a method for automatically generating (automatically receiving) an operation reception and an effect mode related to the method, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300, or an appropriate combination can be used.

As described above, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, the production reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state in an unsuppressed manner. Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the effect reception, and the output state of the reception allowable sound is canceled at this point. In this respect, even when the normal valid period that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed occurs, the acceptance allowable sound is put into the output state in an unsuppressed manner with the generation. However, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound is continued without canceling the output state even if the effect reception is performed while the output state is in the output state. Further, regarding the reception allowable sound output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the reception allowable sound output when the normal valid period occurs. It is desirable to use it as a game in order to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed.

In addition, in the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or a silent state, N reception allowable sounds suggesting that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred). There are types (modes), and one of those types must be output (output in a non-suppressed mode). On the other hand, it is suggested that the valid period occurs (or the valid period occurs) in the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output normally in a non-suppressed manner. Only M types (modes), which are less than N, are prepared as reception allowable sounds, and "when outputting in any of these types (output in a non-suppressed mode)" and "output by any of those types". It is desirable that there is a case where the sound data itself including the acceptable sound is not assigned to the channel and the valid period is generated. In addition, it is desirable to suggest that "the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears differs" depending on the type of acceptable sound.

Alternatively, either the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, or the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the state of being normally output in the non-suppressed mode. Also, although a plurality of types (modes) of the reception allowable sound are prepared, the ratio of the reception allowable sound having a high expectation of big hit occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It is desirable that the sound is relatively high during the valid period, and is relatively low during the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in a non-suppressed manner. .. And also in this case, in the valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, the acceptance allowable sound suggesting that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred) is While it is always output (output in the non-suppressed mode), the valid period occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the state of being output normally in the non-suppressed mode (output in the non-suppressed mode). Or, the reception allowable sound suggesting that the valid period has occurred) is "output in a non-suppressed manner" and "the sound data including the reception allowable sound itself is not channel-assigned and is not output". It is desirable to have it.

According to these configurations, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output normally in an unsuppressed manner, the degree of expectation suggested by the reception allowable sound is less detailed (M types less than N). You may not be able to recognize it, or you may not be able to expect much (relatively low). However, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode, there is a possibility that the acceptance allowable sound may be overlooked by the sound of the BGM reproduction. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the reception allowable sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output in a suppressed mode or a silent state, the reception allowable sound is set in a situation where it is possible to make the sound output in the non-suppressed mode stand out. Since the output is always performed in a non-suppressive manner, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes are adopted, among the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" occurs. , At least one of the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in a non-suppressed manner" occurs (for example, of the acceptable sound). Of these, the type with the lowest expectation of a big hit) may be included. However, the acceptance allowable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the non-suppressed mode and is in the state of being output normally" includes "the sound of BGM reproduction is the suppressed mode or silence". The types that cannot be output (for example, the types with the highest expectation of big hits among the acceptance allowable sounds) should be included as the reception allowable sounds that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when in the state of" occurs. Is desirable. In addition, the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects according to the effect reception in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in a non-suppressed manner" is "BGM reproduction". It is desirable that the number of production types be larger than the number of production types that can appear as post-operation effects according to the production reception in the "effective period that occurs when the sound of is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state". Among the production types that can appear as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in a non-suppressed manner", "the sound of BGM reproduction is At least one of the effect types that can appear as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception in the "valid period that occurs when the suppression mode or the silent state" is included may be included.

Further, in the normal gaming state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability fluctuation function is activated, the effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, and the sound of BGM reproduction are in the non-suppressed mode. When multiple types (modes) with different jackpot expectations are prepared as acceptance allowable sounds in any of the valid periods that occur when the output is in the normal state, the output is made in any of the valid periods. Then, it may be possible to output a special reception permissible sound that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". It should be noted that a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as special reception allowable sounds.

That is, in this case, when the special reception allowable sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the "valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" is generated, the effect is produced within the valid period. Even as a post-operation effect performed based on the reception, when it appears, it will be executed in a special mode that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". If the production reception is performed while the special reception permissible sound is being output, the output of the special reception permissible sound is interrupted, and when it is output, "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" special. It is desirable to output the production sound.

However, when the special reception allowable sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in the non-suppressed mode" occurs, the valid period As a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect reception has been made within, when it appears, it is executed in a special mode in which "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" and in the special mode. It is desirable that there are cases where it is not done. It should be noted that the special reception permissible sound output when the "valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" occurs and the "sound of BGM reproduction are output as usual in the non-suppressed mode". The special acceptance permissible sound output during the "valid period that occurs when the state is in the same state" may be different types of acceptance permissible sounds. In addition, there are multiple types of special reception permissible sounds that are output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed manner" occurs, and among those types. , The same type as the special reception allowable sound output when the "valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" occurs, and the type may be different from the type. .. If the production reception is performed while the reception permissible sound (including the special reception permissible sound) is output, the output of the reception permissible sound is interrupted, and the production sound according to the post-operation effect (the post-operation effect is special). When it is performed in a mode, it is desirable to output a special effect sound that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" when it is output.

According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or a silent state (when it is difficult to make a mistake in hearing), when the special reception allowable sound is output, it is within the valid period. Even as a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect reception has been made in, when it appears, it will always be executed in the mode that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". On the other hand, in a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in an unsuppressed manner (when there is a situation in which a hearing error is likely to occur due to a conflict with the sound of BGM reproduction), it is assumed that the special reception allowable sound is output. However, as a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect is accepted within the valid period, the effect is not necessarily performed in the manner of "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". Therefore, it is possible to have doubts (suspicions as to whether or not the sound was mistakenly heard) whether the reception allowable sound was output as "special reception allowable sound", so that the tension can be maintained appropriately. Become. As a result, while the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in a non-suppressed manner, "how to prevent the reception allowable sound from being overheard" is emphasized, and a feeling of tension until the reception allowable sound is output. It will be possible to maintain this as well. In order to increase such tension, in the operation reception effect, "the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in the mode that" when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% "". Compared to the case of the operation reception effect, "the special reception allowance sound is output and the post-operation effect is executed in a mode that" when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% "". It is desirable to execute the effect (display related to pre-allowed operation and sound related to pre-allowed operation) in a relatively short time so that the valid period is suddenly generated.

In addition, in a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation in which a hearing error is likely to occur due to a conflict with the sound of BGM reproduction), "a special reception allowable sound is output and an operation is performed. The post-effect is not executed in the mode that "when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%", and the operation reception effect (valid period) and "the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is" When it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%. In the operation reception effect (valid period), the special reception permissible sound is output as a different type of reception permissible sound. Alternatively, it may be output as a reception allowable sound of the same type. In addition, in a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation in which the reception allowable sound is likely to be misunderstood due to a conflict with the sound of BGM reproduction), "special reception allowable sound is output. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that "when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" may not necessarily occur. In addition, in the operation reception effect (valid period), "the special reception allowance sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in the mode that" when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% "", the acceptance is allowed. Regardless of which type of sound is output, the post-operation effect is not executed in the mode that "when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%", and that mode is prepared in the first place. It may not be.

In addition, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed or during the normal valid period, an image display that imitates the operation means used as the operation target and is effective. A gauge display indicating how much time is left is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate. In this regard, at least during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, when the production is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and the "production" is performed. "Processing related to the special effect display (or processing to operate a predetermined effect movable body)" in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives, and "elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted". It is desirable to start "processing related to the special production sound that is continued until the time value reaches a predetermined time value". According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the valid period is the timing when the production is received after the production is received based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display. As a result, it becomes possible to predict whether the processing related to the special effect display (or the process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) will be completed immediately. As a method for starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296, or an appropriate combination, and further, still It is possible to use the written contents.

In the above explanatory example, regarding the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as a "specific type of effect pattern" that outputs the sound of "BGM reproduction" in a suppressed mode or silently, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed. Alternatively, it is desirable to set the number to be less than the number of production patterns prepared (memorized) as "other production patterns" that do not output silently, in order to improve the game entertainment when the production occurs. ..

Further, when a plurality of production patterns are prepared as a suppression mode or a "effect pattern" for outputting the sound of "BGM reproduction" silently, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed in the production pattern for the first set time. Alternatively, an effect pattern for outputting silently and an effect pattern for suppressing the sound of "BGM reproduction" over a second set time longer than the first set time or an effect pattern for outputting silently are included, and the jackpot symbol is included in these effect patterns. It is desirable that the expectations that appear are different. According to such a configuration, when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, the jackpot expectation can be suggested depending on how long the state is continued. ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player changes the set value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol change is not executed (demo state, etc.), the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (Processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where the symbol change is executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even if the volume setting value is changed in the state where the symbol fluctuation is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the "effect pattern for outputting the sound of BGM reproduction in a suppressed mode or silently" can be selected, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the pattern change regardless of the effect pattern. In this case, the player who sees the volume adjustment confirmation sound not being output becomes aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed, so it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. become. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 can display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed, so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable to make people aware (aware of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but it may be output at volume 0, or the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel. ..

Regarding the special production sound output based on the fact that the production reception is performed when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state, the special production sound is output for a time more than twice the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15). It is desirable to configure it to maintain the output state. According to such a configuration, even if the effect reception is performed immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 has elapsed can be set. The output time up to the timing ts15 (special production sound) can be made longer.

[Channel allocation cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which sound data is not assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. It is made executable (channel allocation cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created by the operation by the player, the player operates the empty channel at the timing immediately before the player's favorite production sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite directing sound or special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

The operation (channel allocation cancellation operation) in this explanatory example is not limited to the "button operation", and an example of an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 to pray is exemplified with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. It may be a specific action that has been performed, and the point is that it is a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect some state change that occurs when such a specific action to be detected (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed. Any processing may be performed in which the sound assigned to the channel is removed from the channel and the reproduction is terminated when the detection is performed.

FIG. 179 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when the processing related to such a channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 179, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM1 reproduction" (for example, the effect sound effect reproduced during the execution of the super reach effect) corresponding to the above is assigned to the reproduction channels 00, 01 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the production mode (for example, one song that is continuously played over multiple fluctuations in a time-saving game state, etc.) is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback). ) Is in the situation.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), among the sounds (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction) in these reproduction states, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). Is targeted for forcibly terminating the channel allocation when is detected, and when the timing tw12 is reached during the period when the symbol change is being executed, the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed. The permissible reception period can occur up to the timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) to be detected such as "operate a button to secure an empty channel" in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An operation instruction image prompting you to perform is displayed.

Here, FIG. 179 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed. Shown.

As shown in FIG. 179 (a), if the detection is not performed by the predetermined detection means until the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. Further, at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button to secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden.

Further, at the timing tw13, a process of assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproducing the sound is performed. In this explanatory example, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to empty channels by the detection by the predetermined detection means, the vacancy is secured in advance in the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11). It is possible to assign a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) to a channel and play it. However, if a vacancy is not secured in advance for another channel, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be played back and output. Concerns will arise.

FIG. 179 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and detection is performed by a predetermined detection means during the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13. Shown.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), if detection is performed by a predetermined detection means before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channels 02, 03 are performed at the timing tw12a in which the detection is performed. The sound of "BGM2 playback" will be removed from. As a result, it becomes possible to secure in advance an empty channel (playback channel 02, 03) that can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmed sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. , The concern that a predetermined production sound (here, a big hit confirmed sound) cannot be reproduced and output will be resolved. Further, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated, and in this case, the music or dialogue as the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is completed (or). Since the playback will end at a halfway point without being played back (to a good point), I feel that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player. It becomes possible to make it easier, and it becomes possible to wait with confidence at the timing when a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced.

At the timing tw12a where the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. (Operate the button to secure a free channel) will be hidden, and the acceptance period for which production acceptance of a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted will end.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), in the timing tw13, not the playback channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as free channels, but other channels (playback channels 10, A predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is assigned to 11) and played back. However, if there is no vacancy in the other channels at the timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmed sound) is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

Alternatively, when the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the fact that the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in the other channel. However, a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) may be assigned to the specific channel for reproduction. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmed sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, an effect sound different from the predetermined effect sound (here, here) is assigned to the specific channel. , BGM2) is assigned, but since the allocation state will be canceled at that point triggered by the detection of a specific action such as a button operation (channel allocation cancellation operation), one channel (specific channel) can be assigned. Just by using it, it becomes possible to reproduce the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and the predetermined production sound (here, the jackpot confirmed sound), respectively, and it becomes possible to effectively use the reproduction channel which is a finite resource. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing is later than the timing tw13. It is also possible to reproduce a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound).

Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound, the effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears, or the effect sound suggesting that the jackpot has been lost may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that the jackpot has been lost, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound may be output and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

On the other hand, the sound for which channel allocation is terminated when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is detected is not output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute it as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is overlooked when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and there is no problem. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment when the state is forcibly terminated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), it was decided to generate a reception period in which the production reception of a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted when a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation arrives. Not limited to. For example, at least during the period when the specific sound to be excluded from the channel allocation is in the playback state, the acceptance of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel allocation of the specific sound is based on the acceptance. May be resolved. In this case, for example, a predetermined timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific sound was put into the playback state, and the state of the vacant channel secured in advance is maintained for a predetermined time, and then another sound is emitted to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played.

Further, as a method for canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forcibly terminated, in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned an empty channel at that time, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel allocation of a specific sound by allocating the channel by overwriting the channel with an extremely short allocation cancellation reception sound such as 1 second. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel allocation of the specific sound at an earlier stage when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the specific act is not forcibly terminated.

In addition, at least in the period from the time when the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted until the reproduction of the predetermined production sound using the vacant channel created by the production reception is completed, a new sound is produced. Specific game sounds (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound) that are not related to the effect of whether the jackpot symbol appears within the symbol fluctuation so that the channel is not wasted. , Look-ahead effect sound, etc.) should not be output.

In addition, the specific sound (sound of "BGM2 playback") that is the target of forced termination is played as a non-loop production sound such as a song or dialogue that is played only for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easier for the player to feel that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. ..

[Abnormal notification while the production is being performed according to the production pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not always assigned to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state is not always output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on condition that it occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not always output, so that a margin is given to the channel by that amount and the risk of running out of empty channels is promoted. Will be expected.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though the timing should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "a movable body abnormality has occurred") and a game It is possible to execute an abnormality display (for example, "an abnormality has occurred in the back-middle movable effect unit 3200") in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600. In addition, it is desirable to display an abnormality in the display area so that it is possible to identify which of the plurality of movable decorations the abnormality has occurred. However, the plurality of movable decorations are grouped and used. It may be an embodiment for specifying which of the groups the movable decorative body has an abnormality. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decorative unit 3100 and the like). , Back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back top movable production unit 3500, back bottom movable production unit 3700, etc.) An abnormality is displayed in the display area in a manner capable of identifying which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body the abnormality has occurred. It should be noted that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies having a relationship in which the drive sources are different from each other and are provided separately.

However, such an abnormality of the movable body is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and there is a high possibility that the player will not make any mistakes. Therefore, if various games (such as symbol fluctuations and big hit games) according to the jackpot judgment are being executed, the notification process may be executed openly during the execution period. On the other hand, it will have an adverse effect, which is a pleasure for the player. Not only that, there is no room for the number of free channels as much as the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is output, which may give the player anxiety that it will not be possible to output a new sound. , There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

However, on the other hand, the failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is also an aspect that it is difficult to assume a situation in which a sudden failure occurs when the movable decorative body does not operate at all. Then, when the movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decoration body is not operating at all, it is abnormal because the movable decoration body is removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent act such as a hobby act or a wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in a detected situation, and even under such a situation, if the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not output, it may promote cheating and is legitimate. From the perspective of a good player, there is concern that the interest in playing games will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, and this is detected. Even in such a case, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the notification process (output of the notification sound, display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.). However, during the period in which various games (design fluctuations, jackpot games, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern (effect pattern)). If an abnormality is detected in the movable body while the movable decorative body is being operated based on the effect pattern during the big hit game, the pachinko machine 1 will notify the user (output of the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. It should be noted that the external output (hall side notification) of the information that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body may be performed regardless of the situation because it is not performed openly and does not adversely affect the production.

According to such a configuration, even during the period in which various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, the movable decorative body is unlikely to fail (according to the peripheral control board 1510). Movable body abnormality in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control (the situation where the movable body drive process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variable pattern (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game) is not performed) In the event of an abnormality, the pachinko machine 1 can perform notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound, but at least in a situation where the movable decoration is prone to failure (during the production operation of the movable body), the movable body abnormality occurs. When it occurs, the pachinko machine 1 does not perform the notification processing such as the abnormal notification sound, so that the person who commits the fraudulent act is restrained from committing the fraudulent act, but is a legitimate game. It will be expected that the person will avoid having an adverse effect on the production being performed.

For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound allocation control to the channel, and the abnormality occurrence occur. Since the light emission control of the light emitting part including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected, it has an adverse effect on the effect during execution. It will be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing for operating the movable decorative body again comes after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body can be operated while the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. No production is performed.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not the pachinko machine 1 performs notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Regardless of this, it is possible to execute a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (an operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to restore the movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol change in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration is performed, the specific movable effect is started. If the specific movable decoration is recovered from the abnormal state in the previous stage, the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration can be executed.

It should be noted that the movable decorative body is specified within a predetermined time even though the restoration process for causing the corresponding movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (origin position)) is executed. If the player does not return to the position (origin position), it is assumed that the recovery has failed, and the game or production will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state.

FIG. 180 shows the allocation status of each channel when an abnormality in the movable body is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol is changed. It is a time chart showing an example of the situation on the movable decorative body side.

As shown in FIG. 180 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur over a period up to the timing ti14 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. It may be possible to do so, or the effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 180, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ti13. Therefore, in the timing ti13, based on the fact that the operation by the player is received, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect of producing the specific movable decorative body (FIG. 180 (b). (See), the effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and played back (see FIG. 180 (a)).

Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, it is first determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the restoration process has failed and the restoration cannot be expected. Therefore, the movable body drive process is terminated without performing any drive. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a specific movable decorative body is in a specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is in the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in the manner determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decoration is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when the driving for the specific movable decoration is completed, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired. When it is determined that the body has been returned to the specific position (original position) based on the information, the movable body driving process is terminated. However, if it is determined that the specific movable decoration is not in the specific position (original position) within the movable body drive process, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed. After that, the movable body drive process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

By such a movable body drive process, the specific movable decorative body performs the effect operation from the timing ti13, but in this explanatory example, the specific movable decorative body is set to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period in which the effect operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot be operated. In FIG. 180 (b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the driving for the specific movable decorative body (driving for the effect operation) is completed, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the state of being returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). Abnormality is determined), and based on the determination, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, as described above, the situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is movable. Since it can be said that the situation is likely to have been caused by the failure of the decorative body, in this explanatory example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, the movable body abnormality is caused in the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound assignment control to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the effect being executed. That is, when a situation appears in which the movable body cannot be returned to normal (moved to the original position) while executing the movable process based on the effect pattern during the symbol change, it is based on the appearance of the situation. Therefore, the execution trigger of the "restoration process targeting the movable body (movable body that is not in the original position) during the effect operation that has not been restored to normal" is established, but when the restoration process is performed (or the said It is not possible to assign an abnormality notification sound corresponding to a movable body abnormality to a channel and play it back (when the restoration process fails to restore the movable body to normal).

At the timing ti18, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is completed, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position). In that case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history is deleted, and after that, it becomes possible to execute the normal movable effect. On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 180 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), and the recovery fails. If this is the case, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the production will be advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, even if the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable decorative body based on the effect pattern arrives within the same symbol variation or within the symbol variation after the next time, the specific movable decorative body The effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played. Including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, various light emitting units are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, even if the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body itself is operated (light-emitting) in the mode of operation, so that the movable effect is not performed. It is expected that the game entertainment will be suppressed.

In this way, during the period in which the symbol changes, at least when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, the movable body By not allocating the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not playing it, it becomes possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect during execution.

On the other hand, even when an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same fluctuation pattern (specific effect pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. When a specific movable decorative body is operated at a timing different from that when the specific movable decorative body is operated by the effect control (effect pattern), the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

FIG. 181 shows a movable body abnormality not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol change is performed, but in a process different from this process. It is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel at the time of detection and the status on the movable decoration side.

As shown in FIG. 181 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, in the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being produced by the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

And, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), when the timing ti12 is reached, the operation valid period (effective period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity is the maximum timing ti14. Can occur over a period of time. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the specific movable decorative body moves by some external force at the timing ti11a before the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform the effecting operation (movement without being based on the effect pattern). Therefore, it is assumed that a specific movable decorative body is not detected at a specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at a specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 181 (b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti11b, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decoration body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred.

At the timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is completed, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history will be deleted, and after that, it will be possible to execute the normal movable effect without any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) occurs so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state, so that the effect operation of the specific movable decoration is performed. Instead, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played, and an abnormality occurs. Various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decoration is caused by the restoration process. If it is resolved, the usual effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) will be executed, including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. In this explanatory example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality occurs only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and the restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is executed. .. That is, when a plurality of movable decorations including a specific movable decoration are in a situation where the restoration process is being executed, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, it is specific. The effect of the movable decorative body is not always performed, but this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, it is assumed that the movable decorative body has not been detected to have returned to the specific position (origin position) at the timing ti13a (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery has failed. is doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

Further, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decoration body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decoration body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality has been detected because a specific movable decorative body has been removed from a specific position (origin position) due to an act of pounding or an illegal act such as wire entry. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body is not resolved by some external force even in the restoration process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

Therefore, at this timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, in addition to the various effect sounds corresponding to the specific effect pattern being assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect content, the abnormality notification sound is played over the predetermined time on the reproduction channels 00, 01. It will be assigned to and played. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being advanced and executed as it is, the abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "" "An abnormality has occurred in the movable production unit 3200 in the back") will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting parts, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, a part of the light emitting parts are made to emit light in an abnormal mode, and the other light emitting parts are made to emit light in a normal manner according to the progress of the production content. It will emit light.

According to the examples of FIGS. 180 and 181 even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol change, at least the period during which the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the change pattern is executed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the process, it is unlikely that fraudulent activity has been performed, and there is a possibility of failure during the production operation. Therefore, the production is given priority over the abnormality notification. .. On the other hand, if the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed and the abnormality is more than the effect. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that it may be more important to output a notification.

In the example shown in FIG. 181, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not performed in the timing ti11b, and the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed in the timing ti13a in which the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. I decided to do. However, in the timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected even though the specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the effect pattern, and even this alone causes a fraudulent act such as a rattling act or a wire entry. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the wire has been damaged, the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body may be started to be output at this timing ti11b. At this time, the notification by the display or the notification by the lamp may also be performed. That is, even if the movable process based on the effect pattern during the symbol change is not executed, if the movable body moves from the original position due to a rattling action or a wire approach, the symbol change starts or changes. Without waiting for the restoration processing timing at the end, the execution trigger of "restoration processing for movable bodies that have not been restored to normal (movable bodies that are not in the original position)" at that point (in the middle of the symbol change) However, when the restoration process is performed (or when the restoration process fails to restore the movable body to normal), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel and played. It is supposed to be done. Alternatively, when the movable body moves from the original position due to a throbbing action or wire approach, it is possible to execute a process of moving the movable body by a driving force from a drive source (motor, etc.) (movable process not based on an effect pattern). It may be moved to the in-situ position within this process. In this case, when the movable body cannot be moved to the in-situ position by such a movable process, even if the design is in the middle of change, "a movable body that is not in the in-situ position is targeted" at that time. The execution opportunity of "restoration process" will be established. Then, when the restoration process is performed (or when the restoration process fails to restore the movable body to the normal position (return to the original position)), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel. Will be played back.

In short, regarding the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period when the design is changed, "the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation based on the effect pattern, but the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation. "Abnormality has occurred in" and "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the production operation based on the effect pattern". It is important not to be executed as a sufficient condition, so that the person who commits the cheating is restrained from committing the cheating, but the legitimate player is being executed. It will be expected to avoid adverse effects on the production of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality within the period in which the symbol change is performed, "the specific movable decoration is not performing the effect operation based on the effect pattern, but the specific movable decoration is not performed. After adopting at least "the occurrence of an abnormality in the body", for example, "the restoration process performed in response to the occurrence of the abnormality fails" or "the occurrence of the abnormality occurs under specific circumstances". It is possible to adopt such as as a further condition.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration within the process of operating the specific movable decoration according to the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when operating a specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed as a trigger, so that the specific movable body is movable. It may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body in the process of operating the decorative body according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body is visited regularly.

Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 180, an overload is applied to the actuator such as the motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 181, an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti11b, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, a specific movable decorative body is exemplified as a production operation of a specific movable decorative body at a timing operated by a player, but a specific movable decorative body is produced at a specific timing determined by an effect pattern. It may be the one that produces the effect.

Further, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, and during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may try to reduce it.

If the abnormality notification is not executed under the sufficient condition that "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the production operation based on the effect pattern", the abnormality notification is not executed thereafter. However, even if the abnormal state is not resolved and remains, it is desirable that the abnormality notification is not performed at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the production proceed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

After the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 for a predetermined time and played by the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality, the playback channels 00 and 01 are empty channels even if the movable body abnormality remains. It is desirable that when the game is started in this state, the effect sound is output in an unsuppressed manner even if the movable body abnormality remains.

In the above explanatory example, even in a situation where the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect restore operation is performed on the effect movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred. In this regard, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, even if the effect movable body different from the effect movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred is to be moved properly to test whether it can be operated properly. good. In other words, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed when the restoration operation is performed on the production movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred and this fails. However, as a result of performing the restoration operation on the production movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred, if this is successful, it becomes difficult to understand whether or not there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed. It will be. Therefore, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, a fraudulent act is performed through the movement process to test whether the production movable body different from the production movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred can be operated properly. It is desirable to continue the determination of whether or not there is a high possibility. Even if the restoration fails in the restoration operation, such a movable process may be further performed.

The restoration operation performed when the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed and the restore operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the situation where the movable effect based on the effect pattern is executed are the processing contents related to the restore operation. It is desirable that (for example, the number of retries) be different from each other.

[Restoration processing of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated due to the inability to output this. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies having different drive sources and are provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality). By assigning (sound data) to channels and playing them, it is possible to prevent the number of channels used from becoming unnecessarily large even in a situation where movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously for multiple movable decorative bodies. rice field. It should be noted that the movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body cannot operate properly, and is the same as the one exemplified in "Abnormality notification while the production according to the production pattern is performed". be.

However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on a gaming machine has increased, and simply associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable decorative bodies is sufficient for the game. It is becoming difficult to properly notify the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and an abnormality notification sound different depending on which of those groups the movable decorative body belongs to has an abnormality is transmitted to the channel. By allocating and making it reproducible, even though the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified.

In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 180 and 181). Is processed. Therefore, also in this example, even if various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) occur and are detected during the period of execution, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (output of the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Similarly, during the period in which various games (design variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern). If an abnormality in the movable body is detected while the (effect pattern) or the movable body drive process for operating the movable decorative body based on the effect pattern during the big hit game is being performed, the pachinko machine 1 notifies the process (the effect pattern). The output of the notification sound, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, only one abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and set to the playback state corresponds to a specific group among the above groups. On the other hand, it is decided to execute a process of performing a restoration operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to promote a reduction in the risk of running out of empty channels by giving a margin to the channels. In addition to this, it will be possible to quickly recover from abnormalities for each movable decorative body, and it is expected that the channel usage time will be reduced through the efficiency of processing itself when an abnormality occurs. .. For the contents of the restoration process and each of the successful and unsuccessful processes, see the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 180 and 181). ) Is the same.

Here, as a mode for dividing a plurality of movable decorative bodies into two or more groups, it is required that the mode is suitable for notifying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided on the door frame 3 side, for example. A plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decorative unit 3100, a back middle movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, and a back). When divided into two groups (right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, back lower movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. Whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the board side, which is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened, can be transmitted to the hall side depending on the type of abnormality notification sound. become. In other words, if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body on the board side, it can be said that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than in the case where the movable decorative body on the frame side has an abnormality. Therefore, by outputting the notification sound based on such grouping, the notification sound corresponds to the abnormality of the movable body, but depending on the type, the player does not notice it (unpleasant feelings). It becomes possible to secretly inform the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the degree of possibility of fraud is high.

When the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment also has a movable body abnormality, the pachinko machine 1 also outputs the above-mentioned notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, and also displays the effect on the game board side. As described above, it is possible to execute the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600. In this regard, in this explanatory example, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processes according to the abnormality of the movable body, and any of those groups. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, while the above-mentioned "notification by display" is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality as in the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound", it is superior in the information transmission function for notifying the abnormality contents in more detail. It has the above-mentioned properties. Therefore, in the above-mentioned "notification by display", the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound" in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exerted, by utilizing the difference in its nature. Therefore, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the movable ornaments belonging to the independently divided groups has an abnormality.

That is, in this case, for example, the movable decorative body A and the movable decorative body A are grouped according to the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B. Depending on the presence, "Although the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is Is the first notification mode in which different displays are performed, and the second notification mode in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs. , And "a third notification mode in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are different from each other regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs". Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a more detailed notification mode by notification based on these two different contents of sound and display.

FIG. 182 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol changes. It is a time chart.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur over a period up to the timing tj15 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing tj15. It may be possible to do so, or the effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14. Therefore, at the timing tj14, originally, based on the operation received by the player, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect of producing the specific movable decorative body, and the channel is performed. A production sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and played back.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, at the timing tj11, a plurality of movable decorative bodies move (operate without being based on the effect pattern) due to some external force, and the above-mentioned specific movable ornaments move more than the timing tj13 in which the effect can be produced. It is assumed that those movable body abnormalities are detected at the previous timing tj12. In addition, in FIG. 182 (b) and FIG. 183 (b) described later, the dotted range indicates the period during which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, the above-mentioned restoration process for causing each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in relation to this restoration process, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. , The frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side have a movable body abnormality. Each situation is assumed.

More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 182, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different between D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and if they operate simultaneously, they may interfere with each other due to contact. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate by using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other due to their movements, including the relationship with the above, the restoration process is performed at the same time at the timing tj12 so that the movable decorative body can be quickly restored to an abnormal state.

In such a configuration, the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed for a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side is performed. In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in the above, the restoration process can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity ends. It is assumed that neither the restoration processing of A, B, C nor the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side is completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the above operation is effective. Regardless of the timing of the production reception within the period (valid period of the production reception), the production is processed so as not to perform the production operation triggered by the production reception.

That is, in this case, if the effect reception occurs within the period in which the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is executed, it is clear that the specific movable decoration cannot be operated by the effect. Even if the effect reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed, it is possible to interact with other board-side movable decorations that are still in the stage of executing the restoration process. There is a concern that it will interfere. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any of them within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and the movable effect is performed by various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. It will only emit light in the light emission mode when it is struck. In short, if a specific movable decoration falls under any of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C, the relevant restoration process is completed after all the restoration processes are completed (all restoration processes are completed successfully). Only when the timing at which the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed comes, the execution of the effect operation is permitted.

On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and the above. It is processed so that whether or not to perform the production operation triggered by the production reception is changed depending on the timing of the production reception within the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception). Will be.

That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, the timings tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation after the restoration process is completed (the restoration process is successful). Will definitely arrive, and even if other movable ornaments A to C, D, and F are in the process of being restored, there is no concern that they will interfere with each other. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if this is the case, the effect operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed by the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) when the operation is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. It will be emitted.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing at which the restoration process is completed. Therefore, during the operation valid period, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state, so that the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state. The body effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played. Therefore, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process) in the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C, F perform the restoration process. Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other even during the execution of, the normal effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) including the effect operation of a specific movable decorative body. Will be executed.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration process is completed (successful restoration process). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if this is done, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) of the time is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay at.

Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 182 will be described. In this example, when the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is notified, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are described. , C and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are divided into two groups, and the abnormally generated movable decorative body belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on the presence.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, since such a situation cannot normally occur while the proper game is in progress and cannot occur as a result of fraudulent activity, the hall side is responsible for checking the operation of the accessory and repairing it. It is likely that you are in a special situation, such as manually tampering with all movable ornaments. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state at an early stage.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it was detected that the movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. In the timing tj12, the restoration process on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration process on the frame side movable decoration body side are started at the same time as described above, whereas the notification sound output is frame side movable. The abnormal notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, and the abnormal notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the board side is assigned to the channel. I try to keep it output.

That is, the time during which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, the side that takes a long time to complete the restoration process, "board-side movable decoration A, By assigning only the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the B and C sides" to the channel, the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B and C sides on the board side" can be generated. It becomes possible to end the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F during playback, and "abnormality notification common to the board side corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C". Since it is avoided that the output request of the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side" is required after the output of the "sound" is completed. The notification process can be terminated in a simpler manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, while the restoration processing is performed on the board-side movable decorations A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F, the board-side movable decoration A, The "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative body A, B, C side" is assigned to the channel and played over the period until the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are completed. Therefore, the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the control of assigning the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processes according to the abnormality of the movable body, the above-mentioned "notification by sound" is performed by utilizing the difference in properties from the above-mentioned notification sound. The above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode different from that in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and different display is performed depending on which of the independently divided groups the movable decorative body belongs to. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, it corresponds to this. The "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly to this, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, this will be applied. The corresponding "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is completed. Therefore, even if the restoration process of the specific movable decoration is completed first, depending on the execution status of the restoration process of the movable decoration grouped with the specific movable decoration, the restoration process may be higher than that of the specific movable decoration. It is possible that the "notification by display" corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed will be terminated first.

According to the example of FIG. 182, as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of notification sounds according to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced, but the restoration process is in the reproduction state. The movable decoration body corresponding to the notification sound in the above is not limited to the movable decoration body corresponding to the notification sound, and the movable decoration body corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the playback state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduced state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process applied to these movable decorative bodies is simultaneously executed. As a result, for the movable decoration that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, the total time required for the restoration process can be shortened as compared with the movable decoration that corresponds to the notification sound in the reproduction state, and a plurality of movable decorations can be shortened. While one of the specific notification sounds is being played, all movable decorations can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is performed at the same time. Not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side) that can be operated without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. For a plurality of movable decorations (DF) belonging to at least one group (frame side in the above example), which can be classified into (frame side) and the restoration process can be executed independently for each group. If all of them can be restored and operated at the same time by selecting them as movable decorative bodies that can operate without being affected by each other's operating conditions, refer to FIGS. 182 and 183. It is possible to configure it to obtain the described effects.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time to visit regularly. Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the specific movable decorative body is produced as an effect at the timing when the player operates, but the specific movable decorative body is produced at the specific timing determined by the effect pattern. It may be something to make.

Further, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, and during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may try to reduce it.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, a movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol change was executed. Although the explanation is based on the assumption of a situation, the symbol change does not necessarily have to be executed. That is, during the execution period of the jackpot game or when the game of the special symbol is in the state of waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board side movable decoration bodies A, B, C and the frame side movable decoration body D, Even when a movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG. 182.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, all of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side are restored based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. And said. However, if a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other even if they operate simultaneously are included in the board-side movable decorative body, the board-side movable decorative body is provided in a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed at the same time only for some movable decorative objects that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the timing at which it is determined whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the timing at which the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F have a movable body abnormality. It is assumed that the timing at which the determination of occurrence is performed is the same, but these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 183, after it was determined that the movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the movable body abnormality occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. Even if it is determined to that effect, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F is completed at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorations A, B, C side" is completed, the "frame side movable decoration bodies D, E, F side" It can be avoided that the output request of "corresponding abnormal notification sound common to the frame side" is required.

On the contrary, in the example shown in FIG. 182, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. The processing structure may be such that it is determined that the processing has been performed. However, in this case, when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F are performed. After waiting for it to be determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are supported. It is desirable to perform the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, respectively, while the notification processing is performed. As a result of waiting for the process of determining whether or not the movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this case, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are restored while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

When a specific movable body among the board-side movable bodies is in a situation where it is treated as an "abnormal state that is not used for the production operation", the board-side movable body itself is normal but has become an abnormal state. It becomes possible to include a movable body that is not used for the production operation in relation to the "specific movable body". On the other hand, in the frame-side movable body, even if any of the board-side movable bodies is treated as an "abnormal state that is not subjected to the effect operation", it is regarded as a "specific movable body" that has become an abnormal state. There is nothing that cannot be used for the production operation due to the above, and if it is normal, all of them are used for the production operation. Further, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is processed as an "abnormal state that is not subjected to the effect operation", the other frame-side movable bodies are produced if they are normal. It is designed to be used for movement. In addition, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is treated as an "abnormal state that is not used for the production operation", all of them are normal in the board-side movable body. Is designed to be used for directing movements. That is, by adopting a configuration in which the movable effect is realized in a wider space as the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to increase the number of movable objects to be subjected to the effect operation regardless of the abnormal situation of other movable objects. It has become like.

For each of the movable bodies exemplified in FIGS. 182 and 183, if a movable abnormality occurs in the production operation according to the production request such as the production pattern or the jackpot effect, the restoration operation performed accordingly fails. Even in this case, the abnormality notification sound is not output. However, even if the symbol is changing, when a predetermined condition such as the detection of fraudulent activity is satisfied, the restoration operation is performed on the movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred, but the restoration operation is performed. It is desirable to output an abnormality notification sound based on the failure of the restoration even though the restoration operation is performed.

[Automatic multiple operation function (automatic repeated hit function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting an operation button 410) to a predetermined operating means may be urged to perform a plurality of operation effects corresponding to each of those operations. However, in recent years, during a predetermined validity period in which an operation opportunity for such a plurality of operations (such as repeated hits) is given, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) does not have to be operated a plurality of times. Automatic multiple operation function (auto) that allows the effect mode to appear when the operation is performed multiple times just by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) that maintains the operation state for a relatively long time. It is becoming more and more equipped with a continuous hit function).

In such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function), a single operation (one operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time when an operation in a long mode such as a so-called long press is performed. ) Is repeated (such as the feeling that fast repeated hits are being made) so that the player can remember the feeling that the player is not good at multiple operations (slow continuous hitting speed). It can be said that it is important to suppress the deterioration of the game interest of (players, etc.) and to encourage various players to use the function. However, if the effect is simply changed (for example, operation sound) when the effect is received every time a relatively short time elapses when the player is in the operation state, the player can do the same. Even if you intend to operate with a single push, the short operation time (the time when the operation state is slightly maintained by a single push) becomes slightly longer or shorter, so the production reception is multiple times. The number of production receptions for one single operation is stable, such as when it occurs (multiple operation sounds are generated) or when the production reception occurs only once (one operation sound is generated). There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the discomfort caused by not doing so.

In this respect, in the conventional automatic continuous striking function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case where an operation by a single press is performed, the effect changes due to the reception of the effect (for example, the operation sound). Etc.) only once. Then, after the first effect change (for example, operation sound) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses. After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, the effect change (operation sound) when the effect reception is made is repeatedly generated every time the predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since there is a time margin between the generation of the first production reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second production reception (operation sound), a single push is performed. While avoiding the feeling of strangeness caused by the unstable number of production receptions when the operation is performed by, is the operation repeated within a relatively short time just by performing the so-called long press operation? It will be possible to create a production that looks like this.

However, from the player's point of view, it is necessary to allow time between the first production reception (operation sound) and the second production reception (operation sound). It is wasteful in terms of operation production, and the number of production receptions (operation sounds) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when a so-called long press operation is performed). (I feel that the speed is slow), there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in the mode of one-shot operation, the operation for the operating means is long. Similar to the case where the operation (long press, etc.) is performed, the specific sound associated with the operation for the operation means can be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operating means, it feels as if a single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. It will be possible to make the player remember (such as the feeling as if a fast continuous hit is being performed). As a result, all operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the reactivity of the effect (whether it is a single effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single push. Even if there is, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (for example, operation sound) per unit time.

FIG. 184 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function). Here, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is adopted as the operation means. Further, in other drawings including FIG. 184, the white specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated based on the effect reception corresponding to the operation of the button 410. The black specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated following the white specific sound output in the figure while the production reception is not occurring when the operation button 410 is not operated. Is. It is desirable that the volume and timbre of these specific sounds are not different from each other and are the same.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 in the predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given (single operation). It is assumed that one operation is performed in. Therefore, at the timing tx11, the detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is the same. The process of starting the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) accompanying the operation is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx11, the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410. Even if no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is interrupted in the situation. It can be output as a target.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is now terminated at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if no operation by the player is detected until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is generated every time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses. ") Is output so that a specific sound (for example," picone ") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 can be output intermittently.

Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), 5 times (N times) between the start of the grace time TY1 and the lapse of the grace time TY1. It is set to have a time length that allows a specific minute sound (for example, "picone") to be output. As a result, even if the operation is performed in the form of a single operation within a predetermined valid period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) is given, a specific sound (sound according to the production reception) associated with the operation is performed. Is output for at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection, and 4 times (N-) that is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses even when there is no operation thereafter. It will be output intermittently over one time) and the total number of specific sounds).

In particular, in this embodiment, the grace time TY1 is terminated in the middle of the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the grace period is in the middle of the output of the fifth specific sound). Even when the timing tx13) at which the time TY1 ends arrives, a process (output interruption process, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound being output at that timing tx13 (for example, “pico”)). The process of overwriting with the sound of The output (sound type) in the same mode appears. In other words, if the specific sound that accompanies the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes ambiguous whether the operation has been accepted multiple times or not, and in the end, the operation feeling as if the operation was performed multiple times. There is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to remember (it will make you think that it is just a specific sound that is simulated in a non-operation state), but with such a configuration, such a concern is raised. It is expected that the problem will be solved suitably.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the predetermined valid period ends between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1, and a new operation is not accepted for production, the present invention is concerned. Until the grace time TY1 is completed, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output every time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined valid period has expired, it is necessary to avoid that the number of production receptions is not stable when the operation by a single push is performed. Not only that, it becomes possible for the player to remember the feeling as if the operation was performed within the period exceeding the predetermined valid period, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved. In this sense, display is performed so that the player can recognize whether the predetermined validity period is continued or terminated (such as the remaining time display in which the validity period is continued). It can be said that it is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) while it is recognizable that the state has been completed.

Regarding the "specific sound output associated with the operation" in the figure, the volume waveform of the specific sound (other sound output) that is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses, rather than the signal waveform associated with the specific sound output. The waveform excluding) is conceptually shown. As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the specific sound of the previous output to finish being output to the end elapses, and the specific sound of the previous output is converted to the specific sound of the previous output. On the other hand, the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed. It is expected that the player will be able to remember the feeling.

By the way, as the reproduction type of the specific sound, in addition to the mode in which 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 elapses, the target sound is used. It may be a loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that is repeatedly reproduced each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, a mode may be used in which a plurality of specific sounds that are continuously and intermittently output are reproduced as one sound data. In the mode of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, not all the specific sounds are necessarily output as the same single sound, but are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. There may be.

On the other hand, among the examples shown in FIG. 184 (a), regarding the display output in the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 is also displayed after the operation display pattern accompanying the operation for the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11. Even if the player's hand is separated from the player and no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display content of the operation display pattern is advanced multiple times in the situation. It has become something that can be made to do.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is now terminated at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state), as described above. Is. In this regard, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order from the timing tx11 until the grace time TY1 set above is timed up. It is said that the display contents of the display pattern at the time of operation can be advanced by executing.

The contents of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, as the mode shown in FIG. 185. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 185, the "display scene 1" is a moving image depicting a ally character holding a sword and trying to pull out the sword, and the "display scene 2" is a ally. It is a video that depicts how the character pulls out the sword and cuts off the sword, and "Display Scene 3" is a video that depicts the ally character having a sword fight with the enemy character in the first mode. , "Display scene 4" is a video depicting a ally character having a sword fight with an enemy character in the second mode, and "display scene 5" is a video in which the ally character has a third with the enemy character. This is a video that depicts a sword fighting in a mode.

After displaying the operation display pattern accompanying the operation for the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, while the specific sound is intermittently output, these display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed, so that the ally character becomes an enemy. It becomes possible for the player to remember the feeling that the production content of fighting the character is progressing according to multiple operations. Note that each display scene 1 to 5 does not necessarily have to be a moving image, but may be a still image. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying the display pattern at the time of operation, various effect displays (hold display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of those effect displays, an image that changes the effect (color change, etc.) each time the effect is received by the operation by the player may be included, but it recognizes whether or not the effect is received. To make it difficult, it is important to display the image as a smaller image than the display pattern at the time of operation.

Here, in the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1. It is set to have a time length so that at least 5 (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if the operation is performed in the mode of one-shot operation within a predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) is given, at least 5 display contents (M pieces) of the operation display pattern are displayed. ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (progressed) even when there is no operation thereafter. The displayed content will be advanced over the total number of.

In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the timing tx13 at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). When the above arrives, unlike the case of the specific sound, the display scene 5 is not displayed to the end but is interrupted in the form of being chopped at that point to end the operation display pattern. That is, unlike the case of a specific sound without progress, the display content at the time of operation has a progress in the effect content, and the display content is displayed if the operation is continued by intentionally interrupting the display scene. It gives the player the impression that it may have been able to make further progress, which is expected to encourage further operations by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed from the start to the end of the grace time TY1. It can be said that it is more desirable to set to to encourage the player to perform further operations. In order to encourage the player to perform further operations, only a part of all the display scenes 1 to 5 should be displayed between the start and the end of the grace time TY1. Is more desirable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined valid period ends between the start of the grace time TY1 and the lapse of the grace time TY1 and a new operation is not accepted for production, the predetermined valid period is reached. At the end of the period (the state where the remaining time of the grace time TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and the display showing the result as the operation display pattern is performed. , This will be described later.

It should be noted that the display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and progressed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation after the display scene 1 is displayed. May be set in advance according to the time from the output of the specific sound to the re-output (automation time TY2), or is set regardless of the time (automation time TY2). It may be a thing. In this sense, display changes such as switching to another display or the occurrence of a new display in the content of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 185, display scene 1 is "from the state where the sword is held". There is a display change due to "video depiction to the state where the sword is pulled out", and there is a display change due to "effect generation while the ally character fights the enemy character" in the display scene 3). It can be said that it is more desirable. By using a display scene having such a display change, it is possible to make it appear as if the display change in each display scene was caused by the production reception, so that the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene can be made. It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if the above is not strictly matched. Further, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in the predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of the operation (continuous hitting, etc.) is given a plurality of times. It is assumed that the operation is performed in a long mode to be maintained in. Therefore, also in the timing tx21, as in the case of the timing tx11, the detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. The process of starting the output of the specific sound and the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) associated with the same operation is performed.

Further, even in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses, as in the case of the above-mentioned non-operation period (the period from the timing tx12 to tx13). A sound (for example, "picone") can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in a predetermined time and order for operation. The display content of the time display pattern can be advanced in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 184 (a).

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, first, during the operation maintenance period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), it is determined whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). Periodically monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed (for example, falling edge detection in the detection signal)) is performed. Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and while regular monitoring is performed, "every time the automation time TY2 elapses". It is decided to perform "a process of outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ")" and "a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order". In other words, in the operation maintenance period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the operation detection state, and it is determined that the operation is in the operation detection state. Based on this, a process such as "outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ")" or "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and the operation is detected." No processing such as "advancing the display content based on the judgment" is performed, and "regular monitoring (judgment) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" is performed. And "a process to output a specific sound (for example," picone ") every time the automation time TY2 elapses" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order". "Processing to make" is performed respectively. The "periodic monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. Is to be done.

After that, as a result of "regular monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)", the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (the operation button 410). When the timing tx22 for determining that the operation state) has been completed arrives, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the result of the determination. Set the grace time TY1 you have. However, at this time, "a process of outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ") each time the automation time TY2 elapses" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are output according to a predetermined time and order". The "process of sequentially outputting" is continuously executed even after the arrival of the timing tx22 at which the operation state ends, until the timing tx23 until the end of the grace time TY1. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22) to the situation where the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) that straddles the timing of the transition, the specific sound can be output intermittently in one processing mode that is only output again every time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the operation display pattern can be continuously output in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

According to such a configuration, in producing the output mode of the specific sound at the time of the single-shot operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the specific sound at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 184 (b). , It becomes possible to standardize the processing mode (program) related to the output of a specific sound among them. Similarly to this, the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of single-shot operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of long press operation shown in FIG. 184 (b) are shown. In producing, it becomes possible to standardize the processing mode (program) related to the output of the display pattern at the time of operation among them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 184 (a), as a result of "periodic monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" at the timing tx12. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed. Further, the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) changes to the situation where the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) that straddles the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is only output again every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and multiple display scenes. The operation display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

As a result, even if the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing, the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as in the so-called long-pressing mode. The specific sound associated with the operation of the operation button 410 will be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, the single press (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press). It will be possible to make the player remember the feeling as if it is being performed (such as the feeling as if a fast continuous hit is being performed). This stabilizes the reactivity of the effect (whether it is a single effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single push, and which operation mode (single push, single push,) is performed. Even if long press) is adopted, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (specific sound) accompanying the operation per unit time.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 184, the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing (FIG. 184 (a)) and the case where the operation is performed in the so-called long pressing mode (FIG. 184). Although the same effect change is caused in (b)), in fact, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), one effect reception is performed at the timing tx11, and the white outline in the figure is specified accordingly. In contrast to the sound output for only one time, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), four times of production reception are performed according to each time the automation time TY2 elapses from the timing tx11, and the white in the figure corresponding to them is received. The specific sound output without extraction is made for 4 times. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, at least a specific number of production receptions are required, or a production lottery is performed each time the production reception is performed, and a specific production result is specified according to the result. When a type of effect that causes an effect result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), since only one effect reception is substantially generated, a specific effect result is made to appear. You can't expect much from that. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, even when the production reception is not generated, the specific sound output in black in the figure is intentionally performed, so that the production reception actually occurs so much. Even if it is a situation where you can not expect a specific production result to appear, you can operate it multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring. Even when a player who is not good at playing a game (such as a slow continuous hitting speed) performs a single operation, it becomes possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the game interest.

In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much the effect reception is generated only by checking the specific sound output once, but from the start of the operation to the end of the operation. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to give an eye on how many production receptions have occurred.

Further, in the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and after that, the grace time TY1 is timed up. By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined validity period ends or the production conditions are satisfied and the specific production result appears within the predetermined validity period, the ally character becomes the enemy character and the sword. I am trying to make a depiction of a single-minded meeting. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific effect result is to describe how the ally character wins over the enemy character as a result of such a sword-based meeting, and the specific effect result is within a predetermined valid period. When does not appear, it is desirable to display the effect result at the time of failure, which depicts how the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of having a meeting with such a sword at the end.

As described above, the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing (FIG. 184 (a)) and the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in the mode of long pressing (FIG. FIG. In any case of 184 (b)), the specific sound associated with the operation is intermittently output multiple times, and the operation display pattern associated with the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule for progress. By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating multiple times will be encouraged to perform the operation with peace of mind. However, in reality, during the above-mentioned predetermined validity period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of a single push, and when such a continuous striking operation is performed, 1 It is important for the player to remember the feeling of operation that each production reception is generated by each operation in order to improve the interest of the game. However, if the operation feeling that the production reception is generated by one operation is completely reflected as the production, the player who is good at multiple operations is more advantageous than the player who is not good at multiple operations. Since the color rendering is as if it were there, it is necessary to achieve both the production elements (operation feeling, production fairness) that have such a trade-off relationship.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure the operation feeling that the effect reception is generated by each operation, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an immediate effect for the operation. Focusing on the fact that "whether the sound is generated (or changed) when operated" is a more important parameter than "whether the display is generated (or changed)", the operation buttons are used for a predetermined validity period. Each time the operation on the 410 is performed in the mode of a single push, a specific sound corresponding to the effect reception is output according to the operation timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a continuous striking operation over a plurality of times in a single-shot pressing mode during the period from timing tx31 to tx32 within a predetermined valid period. Suppose. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, each time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, a new specific sound is generated with respect to the specific sound (specific sound in the output state) of the previous output. A new specific sound is output in such a way that the sound data is overwritten on the specific channel. In this way, even when the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing, such output is performed while making the specific sound intermittently output over a plurality of times. When the operation button 410 is operated again, a new specific sound is output in such a way that the specific sound in the output state is intentionally cut off (interrupted) in the middle of the operation, so that the operation by the player is performed. It becomes possible to explicitly suggest that a specific sound is newly output and the production is accepted at the timing when is performed.

In this embodiment, even if the operation button 410 is operated only once in the mode of one-shot pressing or the operation is performed by long pressing, the specific sound of the previous output is output to the end. The automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the above elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is overwritten on the specific channel for the specific sound of the previous output. That is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output with an accurate rhythm at regular time intervals (automation time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of a single press. In that case, every time the operation timing by the player arrives irregularly, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output, so one operation at a time is required. It becomes possible for the player to appropriately remember the operation feeling that the production reception is occurring.

By the way, also in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), each time the operation button 410 is operated for a predetermined valid period, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state). Monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this regard, in the period from timing tx31 to tx32 in which the operation button 410 is operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of one-shot pressing, the operation is continued each time the operation button 410 is operated. As a result of periodical monitoring of whether or not the operation state is in (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has been completed, and a predetermined time length is provided accordingly. The grace time TY1 will be set (not shown).

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is newly operated before the grace time TY1 ends (time up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Then, it is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is in the continuous state (operation state) is performed. Therefore, during the period from timing tx31 to tx32, every time the operation button 410 becomes an operation state or a non-operation state, a process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state is performed. , The state transition is performed rapidly with the state in which the grace time TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), after the continuous striking operation for 6 times is performed between the timings tx31 and tx32, the repeated striking operation becomes tired, and after that, the repeated striking operation is performed. It is assumed that the time required will be significantly longer. For a player who is not good at such multiple operations, after timing tx32, it is not possible to perform multiple repeated hit operations well, so the number of production receptions is larger than that of a player who is good at multiple operations. There is a concern that the number of games will be reduced and the interest in games will decline. However, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a specific sound is emitted every time the automation time TY2 elapses even though the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state is terminated. As described above, the process of outputting is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, at least the grace time TY1 after the previous operation state is completed. As long as the repeated operation can be performed within a shorter time than that, the player can be made to feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. It will be like.

For example, if it is determined at the timing tx33 that the continuation of the operation state has been completed as a result of periodic monitoring of whether or not the operation state from the timing tx32 is continued, it is based on the determination. , A grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, although the time required for repeated operations will be significantly longer, a specific sound will be output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the player is not operating. By performing the process of making the operation, the specific sound accompanying the operation is continuously and intermittently output. However, these specific sounds are output as specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in black in the figure under the condition that the production reception has not occurred.

In this regard, the blackened specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) in the figure can be generated only until the grace time TY1 has elapsed from the end of the previous operation state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), with respect to the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation to the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (the time does not increase) based on the operation. Along with this, at the timing tx34, the white specific sound (10th specific sound) in the figure is output due to the occurrence of the production reception in the form of cutting (interrupting) the specific sound that was in the output state. At the same time, it will be returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

However, such an operation state is also terminated when the timing tx35 is reached, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the above monitoring, and based on the determination, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is obtained. It will be set again. Then, every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the operation by the player is not performed, the black specific sound (11th to 14th specific sound) in the figure is output again, and the grace period. When the operation by the player is finally performed at the timing tx36 before the time TY1 is timed up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the figure in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In the form, the white specific sound (15th specific sound) in the figure is output.

In this way, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, the repeated operation can be performed at least within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 after the previous operation state is completed. As long as it can be done, the specific sound in the figure that is outlined in the figure at the timing when the operation by the player is performed, and the specific sound in the figure that is periodically outlined in the situation where the operation by the player is not performed. By outputting each of these, the player can be made to feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. Therefore, according to the mode related to the output of the specific sound, it is possible to secure the operation feeling that the effect reception is generated by one operation at a time, and the player who is not good at the multiple operations. Even if there is, the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state makes it possible to output the specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and intermittently, so there is a trade-off relationship (operation feeling). , Production fairness) will be expected to be compatible.

However, even when a specific sound is output in such a manner, it is performed multiple times in the operation display pattern that plays a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within a predetermined valid period. If the mode of progress of the displayed content is greatly different between the player who is good at the operation and the player who is not good at the multiple operation, in the end, it is better than the player who is not good at the multiple operation. It may be possible for a player who is good at multiple operations to have an advantage, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the display content of the operation display pattern is not gradually advanced according to the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is timed up. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, the display content can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32 within the predetermined valid period. However, until the set grace time TY1 is timed up, the operation button 410 is operated again to cancel the setting of the grace time TY1. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended within the predetermined valid period does not come.

When the operation is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 186 (a), the display of the operation display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. After that, the display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 185 are predetermined as the operation display pattern regardless of the operation status even though the speed of the continuous striking operation is significantly changed as described above. It is only displayed and progressed in sequence according to the schedule, which makes it appear that the fairness of production between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained. You will be able to.

However, even if the display content as the display pattern at the time of operation is developed in the same manner, the number of times that the effect reception is actually generated due to the operation is operated multiple times with the player who is not good at multiple operations. It is inevitable that there will be differences with the players who are good at. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, at least a specific number of production receptions are required, or a production lottery is performed each time the production reception is performed, and a specific production result is specified according to the result. When a type of production that causes the production result to appear is performed, it is easier for a player who is good at multiple operations to produce a specific production result, which is a production effect of performing the operation multiple times. Significance will be maintained. In other words, while maintaining such a production significance, the production fairness between a player who is not good at multiple operations and a player who is good at multiple operations is maintained in terms of production such as sound and display. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest of a player who is not good at multiple operations by making it look like it is being played.

Further, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous striking operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is received when the operation is performed by long pressing, the mode in which the display pattern at the time of operation progresses is Since it is the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the button deterioration is accelerated due to the repeated hitting operation being performed too quickly.

Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 186 (b) assumes a case where the operation button 410 is not operated in time until the grace time TY1 set in the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined valid period arrives, and the timing tx37 (specific end timing) starts from the timing tx31. Dynamic display output (process of sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that point.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, with respect to the output of a specific sound (for example, "picone"), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends when the output state is reached has arrived. Even if it is done, the processing that cuts off the specific sound in the output state at the timing tx37 (for example, "pico")) (output interruption processing, processing that interrupts by overwriting with another sound, etc.) is performed. As described above, the output (sound wave type) in the same mode as the specific sound that has been output up to that point is made to appear even after the timing tx37 arrives. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends has arrived, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is the output. If the operation button 410 is operated before the sound is muted, the player can feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. It is possible to let them do it.

In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), before the blackened specific sound (10th specific sound) in the figure output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the 10th specific sound output is interrupted and the white specific sound in the figure is generated twice, the black specific sound in the figure is intermittently output again, so that the specific sound associated with the operation is generated. It can be seen that is being output continuously and intermittently. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output in this way, whereas in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily terminated at the timing tx37. .. After that, it is clear that the progress of the display content is redone from the first display scene (display scene 1) at the timing tx38 when the white specific sound in the figure is output again.

FIG. 187 shows a predetermined valid period in which the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function) described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186 is provided with an operation opportunity of the multiple operation (continuous striking, etc.). It is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when an operation is performed within the predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48) when a specific effect pattern that generates the above-mentioned is executed.

As shown in FIG. 187, at the timing tx41, a predetermined valid period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given occurs, and the player determines the timing tx42 within the predetermined valid period. Assuming that the operation is started, also in this effect example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound associated with the operation for the operation button 410 and the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) associated with the operation are output, respectively. The process of starting is to be performed.

However, in this production example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, a specific sound output in white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is produced with a predetermined probability. It is possible to execute the process of outputting.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound output in black in the figure is generated even in a situation where the operation button 410 is not operated and the effect reception is not generated. The black specific sound output in this figure is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output in the figure that occurs at the timing when the production reception occurs (the same mode in this production example). ) Is output. Further, as described above, the display content at the time of operation that appears on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that the display content is advanced according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. Therefore, from the player's point of view, even if the operation is performed by long-pressing or multiple times within a predetermined valid period, it is recognized how many production receptions are generated by these operations. It can be said that it is in a difficult situation. Therefore, in this production example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, a specific sound output with a white outline in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing a process of outputting at 50% or the like), it is possible to predict to some extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of such special sounds.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 187, when the predetermined validity period is in a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45), the two consecutive hit operations at the timing tx42 and tx43 and the timing tx44 By performing each of the long press operations of, a total of 9 production receptions are generated, and the specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated 9 times (1st to 9th in the figure). (White specific sound), the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined valid period is started, the operation in the mode of one-shot operation requires a long time that cannot be said to be repeated hits, and the timing tx46 , Tx47 is performed twice, so that two production receptions are generated, and the specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is generated twice at intervals (10th in the figure). , 11th white specific sound), the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is relatively small.

However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the display pattern at the time of operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined valid period is started by the above-mentioned black-out specific sound output. It is continuously output in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined valid period is started. Since the display scenes are only switched according to a predetermined schedule in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), these progresses. It can be seen that it is difficult to determine whether the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is high or low just by checking the output status.

In this regard, if you check the output status of the special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when the white specific sound output in the figure occurs, it is a relatively early period (timing) after the predetermined valid period starts. In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined valid period is started, so that such a special sound is produced. It will be possible to predict to some extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to some extent whether the specific sound output shown in white in the figure or the specified sound output shown in black in the figure is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment of the player who is not good at multiple operations will be maintained appropriately. In this sense, although the special sound can be generated when the specific sound output is generated, it is output based on the condition that the output condition different from that of the specific sound output is satisfied. Even if the specific sound output is generated, it is required to output the special sound in such a manner that the special sound is not necessarily generated.

Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when the production reception occurs may be changed according to the number of production receptions that have occurred within the predetermined valid period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the white specific sound output in the figure and the black specific sound output in the figure is generated.

Further, considering that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, the time from the output of the specific sound to the mute and the time value longer than the automation time TY2 are obtained. It is desirable to set it as a thing. In this example, the time value is set to be twice the "automation time TY2". Further, when outputting a new special sound when the previous special sound is output, it is desirable to cut off (interrupt) the previous special sound and output the new special sound.

However, in such a pachinko machine 1, the number of players who perform the operation multiple times is reduced because the same effect as when the operation is performed multiple times can be enjoyed only by performing the operation by pressing and holding. There is a concern that the significance of the production as a production that requires multiple operations will be lost. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIG. 187, the operation by the player is a mode of long pressing in the period after the operation by the player is started at least in the timing tx42 in the predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48). A state in which the operation is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and a state in which the operation is performed as a single operation mode (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48). The display of a specific image (specific display) can be permitted only when there is and a specific display condition is satisfied.

That is, in this case, in order to confirm a specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a single-shot operation rather than at least a long-press operation. It will be possible to give meaning to the production by performing the round operation (repeated hitting, etc.), and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

Moreover, in this production example, in order to confirm the specific image, it is not a condition only to operate as a mode of one-shot operation, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself becomes high, each time a predetermined valid period occurs, the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple times operation) function is not used and the operation is performed multiple times (continuous hitting, etc.). ), It seems that you are trying to display a specific image that is difficult to appear, and you dare to operate it multiple times without using the automatic repeated hit (automatic multiple operation) function. It is expected to promote the understanding of others about what to do.

In the production example shown in FIG. 187, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the time of “automation time TY2”) has elapsed without a new production reception occurring from the timing when the previous production reception occurred. The display of a specific image within a predetermined validity period is defined as the above-mentioned "specific display condition" that a production hit is obtained in a predetermined production lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed. Specific display) will appear. In this regard, in the predetermined production lottery, when the jackpot is won by the jackpot judgment (or, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined validity period, the success display can be displayed (the jackpot expectation is high). In the case of (directing situation)), there is a 70% chance that a directing hit will be obtained, but when the jackpot is judged to be a big hit (or the operation is performed within a predetermined valid period). In the production situation (when the production situation where the big hit expectation is low) where the success display cannot appear no matter how much it is done), the production hit can be obtained only with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when the display (specific display) of the specific image appears within the predetermined valid period, it is suggested that the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, and the game entertainment can be preferably maintained. The above "specific display condition" is not limited to this, and "a specific non-operation time (here," automation time TY2 "" without a new production reception occurring from the timing when the previous production reception occurred. "Twice as long as the time has passed" and "a production hit was obtained in a predetermined production lottery" are adopted as "specific display conditions", and when this is satisfied. The display of a specific image (specific display) may be made to appear, or other conditions may be adopted as "specific display conditions".

In addition to the above-mentioned type, the predetermined production lottery mode is, for example, a production situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined validity period (a production situation in which the jackpot expectation is low). Occasionally, there is a 0% chance that a production hit will be obtained (or the production lottery itself will not be performed), but no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined valid period, a success display cannot be displayed. When there is a production situation in which the expectation of a big hit is low, there may be a mode in which a production hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, so that there is no need to perform a barren operation for making the specific display appear. Will be recognizable within a predetermined validity period. In this case, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined validity period ends without the success display appearing as the specific display.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 187, when a new effect reception occurs while the specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specific image is specified at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued on condition that the state in which the player is not operating (the state in which a new production reception is not generated) is maintained. There is.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 187, it is required that at least a specific number of times or more of the effect reception occurs in order to make a specific effect result (success display) appear within a predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48). The appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the 11th production reception (the 11th white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of making the success display appear as a display pattern at the time of operation is performed in the form of (interruption). The content of this success display is the production content of the part (display scenes 3 to 5) that is repeated in the operation display pattern, such as destroying the enemy character that was having a sword fight in the display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable that it is related. In addition, when a success indication appears, it is desirable to suggest that the expectation of winning a big hit is high in the big hit judgment.

Further, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the 11th production reception (the 11th white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined valid period is terminated at that time and a new production reception is performed. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at the timing after the timing tx47, the specific sound or the special sound shown in white in the figure does not newly occur, and the specific display does not newly appear.

FIG. 188 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 187, but the operation in the mode of one-shot operation by the player is shorter than the grace time TY1. It is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when it is repeated for a long time that cannot be said.

As shown in FIG. 188, even when the operation in the mode of the one-shot operation by the player is repeated over a long period of time, as long as the operation is repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1. After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within a predetermined valid period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output, and the operation display pattern is the display content according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such an effect mode, even if the operation is performed only four times within a predetermined valid period, it is possible to create an effect situation as if the continuous striking operation is performed about 20 times. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that the player who is seriously performing the continuous striking operation cannot understand the meaning of the continuous striking operation, and the interest in the game is reduced.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined valid period is "Tx1", the length of the grace time TY1 is "Tx2", and the specific effect result (success display) is displayed within the predetermined valid period. When the minimum number of production receptions required for appearance is "EU", each of these numerical values is set so that the relationship ["Tx1 / Tx2" <EU] is established. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeated at the last minute when the grace time TY1 elapses to create a production situation in which the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, the operation causes the operation. The number of production receptions that occur will be less than the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required for a specific production result (success display) to appear within a predetermined valid period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it becomes possible to prevent a specific effect result (success display) from appearing. It is expected that those who have a game will maintain their hobby. In order to obtain such effects more reliably, the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required to produce a specific production result (success display) within a predetermined valid period is set. Strictly speaking, it is required to set a numerical value larger than the integer value when the numerical value calculated by "Tx1 / Tx2" is rounded up to an integer.

In this regard, in this effect example, the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) required for a specific effect result (success display) to appear within a predetermined valid period is calculated by "Tx1 / Tx2". Since it is set to "11 times", which is more than twice the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, since the failure display appears due to the insufficient number of operations, the production situation is such that it is not possible to recognize whether the jackpot expectation is low or high.

Furthermore, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the display of a specific image can appear only when it is in a state of being performed as a mode of one-shot operation and a specific display condition is satisfied. Is. In this regard, in this production example, when the above-mentioned "specific non-operation time" required to display a specific image is "Tx3", the relationship ["Tx1 / Tx3" <EU] is established. Each of these numerical values is set so as to be performed. In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to make a specific display appear each time the operation is performed once within the predetermined valid period, the number of production receptions that occur within the predetermined valid period is within the predetermined valid period. In, the number of production receptions (EU) required to produce a specific production result (success display) will be less than the minimum. That is, in this case, a directing selection function of whether to make an attempt to make the specific display appear even at the risk that the specific production result (success display) does not appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. It is expected that the game will be improved because it will not be possible to casually make repeated attempts to make it appear, which will enhance the color rendering when the attempt is made. It will be like.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 188, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined valid period ends without the success display appearing arrives, the display scene 4 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of making a failure display appear as a display pattern during operation is performed in the form of (interruption). The content of this failure display is the production content of the part (display scenes 3 to 5) that is repeated in the operation display pattern, such as being defeated by the enemy character who had a sword fight in the display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable that it is related. In addition, when a failure display appears, it is desirable to suggest that the degree of expectation of winning a big hit is low in the big hit judgment.

On the other hand, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined valid period ends regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. It is designed not to be chopped (interrupted), but this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently after that, those specific sounds will be muted while the success display or failure display is being performed, and then the success display or failure display will be displayed. The relationship is set to be hidden.

In this embodiment, the grace time TY1 is set after the operation state by the player ends, and the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state is output until the grace time TY1 elapses. Although it was decided to perform it at least four times, the number of times of "specific sound output in black in the figure" that occurs in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time having at least twice the length of the automation time TY2, the specified sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state is at least twice or more. Since it will occur, it is possible to make people feel as if the continuous striking operation (multiple operations) was continued even in the non-operation state.

Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. So, the depiction of the ally character having a sword fight with the enemy character appears. Therefore, a specific display may be performed in which the jackpot expectation degree is shown in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2. According to such a configuration, if a specific display is overlooked, it cannot be reconfirmed unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace time TY1 elapses. Therefore, a predetermined validity period However, it becomes possible to provide a directing effect of which one to select between the demerit that the specific display is wasted and the demerit that the specific display cannot be confirmed.

Further, in this embodiment, it is allowed to perform a continuous striking operation in such a manner that the effect reception occurs at an interval shorter than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect reception occurs when the operation by pressing and holding is performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a highly flexible operation operation effect by the player (see FIG. 186). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous striking operation is performed, the progress mode of the display scene in the operation display pattern is the same as when the operation by long pressing is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform high-speed continuous hitting operation, which is expected to suppress excessive operation of the operation button 410 and reduce the risk of damage etc. Will be done.

In addition, in the case of a type of production that requires at least a specific number of production receptions in order to produce a specific production result within a predetermined valid period, only a long press operation is performed within the predetermined valid period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception is performed more than the specific number of times. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specified number of times so that the effect reception is performed more than the specified number of times only by performing the operation by long pressing for half of the predetermined valid period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, twice the time (specific non-operation time) of the "automation time TY2" has elapsed since the timing of the previous production reception without the occurrence of a new production reception. It was decided to make the display of a specific image (specific display) appear at that time, but the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value that is at least twice the "automation time TY2" and within the range in which the grace time TY1 is the upper limit value (grace time TY1 or less) is used. , While the specific sound in black in the figure is output more than once when in the non-operation state (as if the continuous striking operation is being performed when in the non-operation state), It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) appears based on the number of simulated operations (the number of times of output of a specific sound in black in the figure) in the non-operation state reaches a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Game machine equipped with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine provided with the effect operation unit 400 in the plate unit 320, which can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player, has been described. With reference to FIGS. 189 to 240, a gaming machine capable of further increasing the motivation of the player to operate will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 189 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 190 is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged in the door frame 3 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side of the front view. The sword effect operation unit 5000 houses a sword portion 5010 having a sword blade portion 5011, a handle portion 5012, a flange portion 5013 sandwiched between the sword blade portion 5011 and the handle portion 5012, and a sword portion 5011 of the sword portion 5010. It constitutes a sword decoration body 5001 composed of a sheath portion 5020 capable of being capable of being used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sheath portion 5020 movably provided on the door frame 3 in the left-right direction in the front view. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword pulling direction and the sword delivering direction. The sword portion 5010 is usually in a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and the sword-drawn portion 5011 becomes visible to the player by the sword-pulling operation in the sword-pulling effect. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword-drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the sword-delivering operation by the player and returning to the sword-delivering state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, an opportunity to execute a sword pulling effect accompanied by movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword extraction effect can be executed. (A) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of a sword removal preparation transition effect according to the type of variation pattern. The following is shown, and (B) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword-drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed without the sword-drawing preparation transition production being performed in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance. However, there are patterns in which the sword-drawing effect is not performed, patterns in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, and patterns in which the sword-drawing book effect is not performed. Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 191 (A), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is drawn according to the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for a big hit fluctuation at the time of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern for a small hit fluctuation at the time of a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for a missed fluctuation at the time of a miss, and the fluctuations that are advantageous for the player. The more the pattern is, the higher the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuations, with a probability of 30% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for small hits, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuations. It is executed with a 20% probability. It should be noted that the probability of the variation pattern at the time of the out-of-bounds fluctuation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when the reach effect is not performed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing main effect is drawn according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the type of variation pattern is the same, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the fluctuation pattern results in an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the fluctuation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for out-of-order fluctuation, there is a higher probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed than in the case where the sword preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for small hit variation. In the case of the fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the sword-drawing effect is executed, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern is advantageous for the player, the higher the probability that the sword-drawing effect with the aura member is executed. Is set to be. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect of the form with an aura member is not selected.

(State transition and aura member movement due to sword pulling movement of sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195, the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing effect (sword-drawing preparation transition effect and sword-drawing book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 192, FIG. 193) and the aura member 5035 are provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described with respect to the case of forming an integral decorative body (FIGS. 194 and 195).

FIG. 192 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself. The sword-drawn state and (C) the second sword-drawn state are shown. FIG. 193 is a vertical sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 193 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 192 (A), the sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is a sword-delivered state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 192 (B), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling preparation transition effect, only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the sword blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 and can be visually recognized by the player. It becomes the first sword withdrawal state. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling main production, the blade portion 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath portion 5020, and most of the second sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state can function as an operating means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the blade pulling operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword decoration body 5001 has a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 has a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword-delivered state (FIG. 192 (A)) to the first sword-drawn state (FIG. 192 (B)). The range of motion is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 193 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 193 (B)) inside the portion 5020 to deform the blade portion 5011. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the process of changing the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword-drawn state to the second sword-drawn state (FIG. 192 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates at the maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword-drawn state.

As shown in FIG. 193 (A), the aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011. The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033 and. In the aura member 5030, the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a, and FIG. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011, respectively.

Further, below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sword delivery state to the first sword withdrawal state, it changes from the closed state to the open state, and the operation of the aura member 5030 causes the blade portion 5011. Although the example in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state after being deformed is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means (not limited to the form in which the maximum operation is performed, but also the form in which the operation is stopped in the middle). ).

FIG. 194 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020, and is a state transition diagram of (A) sword delivery state, (B) first sword pulling state, and (C). Shows the second sword pulling state. FIG. 195 is a vertical sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 195 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in FIGS. 193 and 194 described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) is the above-mentioned sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself can move in the left-right direction, it can move in the up-down direction. Further, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form of having an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade portion 5011 (sword delivery state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword delivery state. ⇔ Operates according to the first sword withdrawal state ⇔ second sword withdrawal state). This makes it possible to combine the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to make it appear as an integral decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 195 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely housed state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011 and the enclosure aura member 5036. It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion of the above, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by a driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in the front view, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is rack right. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the enclosed aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the range of motion.

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion maintains a relative positional relationship according to the state change (sword delivery state ⇔ first sword extraction state ⇔ second sword extraction state) of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010). An example of merging with 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (coalescing) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means It is only necessary to be able to be in a state with an aura member). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state.

(Example of sword drawing using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 201, a sword-drawing effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decorative body 5001) will be described. In the following, the effect patterns ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure) but the sword-drawing main effect is not executed. The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described with respect to the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing effect is executed. FIGS. 196 to 200 are production transition diagrams of the sword-drawing effect. FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that were variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, "7"), and only the central decorative symbol is variablely displayed. It begins by forming a reach state (FIG. 196 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image suggesting the execution of the sword pulling effect (movable of the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. Specifically, after the image of two samurai facing each other and starting the Iai (Fig. 196 (X2)) is displayed, the image of one samurai holding the handle and holding the sword in the sheath (Fig.) 196 (X3)) is displayed. Here, the effect suggesting that the sword decoration body 5001 is movable is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this period, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword delivery state (FIG. 192 (A)).

Next, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed by a lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the sword preparation transition effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 197 (X4) and (X5). When started, the face of the samurai holding the sword with his eyes closed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed with the passage of time. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state, so that the sword-drawn preparation transition effect is performed. It should be noted that when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, it is easier to execute the sword-drawing book effect after that than when it is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword preparation transition effect is an expectation effect that indicates the expectation that the sword main effect is executed by the movement of the sword decoration body 5001. In the sword-drawing preparation transition production, by swinging the sword decoration 5001 in the first sword-drawing state up and down, even if the player is expected to further change the sword decoration 5001 to the second sword-drawing state. good. The vertical swing of the sword decoration body 5001 in the first sword withdrawal state is performed to the extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visible to the player in the form with the aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration body 5001 may maintain the sword-delivered state so that the image shown in FIG. 196 (X3) described above continues to be displayed.

Here, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent sword-drawing main effect is in the form of having an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect (FIG. 193 (A). )) The range of motion is moved (maximum movement) as much as possible from the open state (FIG. 193 (B)) to deform the blade portion 5011. At this time, in the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword withdrawal state, the part from the hand of the blade portion 5011 to the portion of the habaki 5011a can be visually recognized by the player, but as described above, the aura member 5030 is the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011. Since it is provided below, there is no possibility that the aura member 5030 will be visually recognized by the player even if the aura member 5030 operates at the maximum. Further, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at a timing substantially simultaneous with the timing at which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and at the same time, the degree of expectation is determined by the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

Then, if the sword-drawing effect is not executed by the lottery based on the type of variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 197 (X6)), and the central decorative design that was displayed in a variable manner is stopped. And the stop mode different from the right decorative symbol, that is, the stop mode (here, "6") is displayed as a stop (FIG. 197 (X7)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state from the first sword-drawn state at the time of FIG. 197 (X6), and maintains the sword-delivered state. That is, the reach effect is completed without the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as an operating means.

On the other hand, when the sword-drawing main effect is executed, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, an image in which the Iai slash is performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is the second sword-drawn sword. It becomes a state. Here, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state includes a form with an aura member that can be visually recognized in a form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 is invisible. A form without an aura member is provided so that the undeformed blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized.

First, with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state is in the form without an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the samurai opening his eyes and sharpening his eyes is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 198 (A1)), an image of slashing the opponent's samurai by pulling out the sword he was holding is displayed (Fig. 198 (A2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 198 (A1), and the sword blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

Next, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 in which the player protrudes from the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of grasping the sword and pushing the sword portion 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath portion 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same shape as the second sword withdrawn state of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 198 (FIG. 198). A3)). In the sword decoration body 5001, the LED of the internal LED board 5011c blinks and emits light to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of Iai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in the foreground on top of the immediately preceding Iai slashing scene image (FIG. 198 (A2)). It may be good (see FIG. 204 (G2) described later).

Then, during the effective operation period, the player grabs the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and performs a sword delivery operation in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. The post-operation effect is performed according to the degree of expectation that gives an advantageous result, and the effect is terminated with the notification of winning of the symbol type (FIG. 199). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, the cut effect image is displayed flashily in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 199 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. At the timing when the opponent's samurai is defeated and Iai is settled, the center decorative symbol stops in the same stop mode as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, that is, the jackpot mode (here, "7") in the center of the screen. It is displayed (FIG. 199 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of alignment, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of a big hit (FIG. 199 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is displayed. In the center of the screen, the central decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, that is, the off mode (here, "6"), along with the image that the opponent's samurai cannot be defeated at the timing when the stop is displayed. Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 199 (D2)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state is in the form of having an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the samurai opening his eyes and sharpening his eyes is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 200 (B1)), an image of pulling out the sword that was being held and slashing the opponent's samurai is displayed (Fig. 200 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 200 (B1), and the sword blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 (right aura member 5031 and left aura member 5032). Becomes visible to the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time when the state changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even if only the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player and then the aura member 5030 changes from the closed state to the open state and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It suffices that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form of having an aura member in the second sword-drawn state by the time the operation valid period is started. However, since the sword decoration body 5001 is already in the second sword extraction state in which the player can operate the sword, it is possible to surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation due to the appearance of the aura member 5030, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that the player may induce an erroneous operation. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while a series of movements from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state are performed as in this example, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword withdrawal state. It is preferable that the operation validity period is started promptly.

Further, the images of FIGS. 200 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images of FIGS. 198 (A1) and (A2) described above, and the player can see whether the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member just by looking at the images. It is not possible to judge whether or not it is. By actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001, the player can grasp whether it is a form with an aura member or a form without an aura member. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 can be attracted attention even before the sword decoration body 5001 is made to function as an operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without any confusion. Can be done. The image displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time does not have to be the same as described above, and may be an image similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword decoration body 5001. .. For example, there may be some differences in the samurai image (differences in eye color and effect effects).

Then, when the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form with an aura member as the sword decoration body 5001. It will be displayed (FIG. 200 (B3)). Subsequent production is the same as in FIG. 199 described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 199 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed more flashily than in the form without the aura member.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 201, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation valid period in the sword pulling effect in which the sword preparation transition effect and the sword drawing main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 201, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The state changes to the state of pulling out the sword (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern in which the aura member is attached is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state, but even if it is in the open state, the aura member 5030 is in the game in the first sword drawing state. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword withdrawal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword withdrawal state, and if so, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 has a form with an aura member. Can't. However, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword-drawing main effect is executed, and there is a high possibility that the form has an aura member, so that the player's expectation can be increased. Further, even if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 196 (X3)) is executed by the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, it is possible to capture the state change (movable) of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state.

Then, when the sword preparation transition effect is completed, the sword extraction main effect is subsequently started, and the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (time t2). Then, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation valid period is started, and the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of Iai effects is performed. Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), the post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 returns from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. Then, when the preset operation valid period ends, the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the series of Iai effects ends (the series of Iai effects). Time t5). The operation validity period may be terminated by the detection of the operation by the player, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure. If no operation is detected during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period.

Here, the predetermined period (time t3-t2) from the time when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword pulling state to the start of the operation valid period is the mode (aura member) in which the player is in the second sword pulling state of the sword decoration body 5001. A period longer than the operation valid period (time t4-t3) is secured as an aspect confirmation period during which it is possible to confirm whether or not the form is attached, a light emission mode, and the like. That is, even if the operation unit (sword unit 5010) that can be operated by the player reaches the operation position (second sword removal state) that functions as the operation means, the operation acceptance is started immediately (the operation validity period is generated). Instead, the player is allowed to operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. As a result, the player confirms the final aspect before operating the sword decoration body 5001, and raises expectations for the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with an aura member, the expectation increases), and prepares the mind. As soon as the second sword is pulled out, the operation validity period starts and there is a concern that the interest of the game will decline due to the hasty shift to the operation production without confirming the mode of the operation means. Can be wiped off.

Further, the sword pulling effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed in a series of Iai effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is a movable effect (time t0 to t3). The effect is related to the operation effect (time t3 to t4) as the operation means. As a result, the player can be impressed with the unexpectedness and variety of effects in switching the functions of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the deterioration of the game entertainment caused by the uniform effect by the conventional operation means can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself and the sword blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 has been described. However, the aura member 5035 is the sheath portion of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 provided in the 5020 is combined with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to form an integral decorative body.

As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the mode of the members (sword portion 5010 and aura member 5030) having the same system as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. is doing. The mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword delivery state, first sword withdrawal state, second sword withdrawal state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is the form of the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is determined based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 191). Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display will be an advantageous result for the player due to the change of its own mode, and raises the interest of the player's operation means (sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in playing games.

In addition, before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the second sword extraction state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation level is suggested by changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword delivery state to the first sword extraction state. is doing. In addition, the aura members 5030 and 5035 appear in the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation. In this way, the sword ornament 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (first sword withdrawal state and appearance of aura member) in the process of changing from the sword delivery state to the second sword withdrawal state (operation position). , The player becomes strongly interested in the operating means until the operating means becomes operable. Further, when the state change of the operating means and the expectation degree suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the operation to the operation position is performed after the expectation degree suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation degree is high. In the aspect, there is a concern that the player may operate the sword decoration body 5001 even though the operating means is not yet in the operable operation position at the time when the player grasps the sword decoration body 5001. Since the state change to the position and the expectation degree suggestion proceed at the same time, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned erroneous operation.

In the above-mentioned first sword extraction state, only the habaki 5011a portion of the sword blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5012 so that the aura member 5030 (5035) cannot be visually recognized. A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the state of one drawing. At this time, make sure that the amount of sword drawn in the first sword-drawn state is less than the maximum amount of sword-drawn in the second sword-drawn state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in a completely appearing state when the second sword is pulled out. Since a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the expectation is high from the first sword withdrawal state can be visually recognized by the player, the player can have a higher expectation at the time of the first sword withdrawal state. You can increase your interest in subsequent changes.

Further, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first sword withdrawal state, it is determined that the aura member is attached at the stage of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect (high expectation). Since the player can grasp it and have high expectations, the disappointment when the sword-drawing production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the player's emotions are greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword-drawing book effect, and it is possible to provide a highly playful effect.

(Transformation example 1-Sword drawing effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 202 to 205, when the sword pulling effect is executed in the reach effect, the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Will be described. FIGS. 202 to 204 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 1. FIG. 205 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 of the modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. The same description as the above-mentioned sword-drawing effect (FIGS. 196 to 201) will be omitted as appropriate.

Here, the effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which neither the sword preparation transition effect nor the sword main effect is performed, and after the sword preparation transition effect is executed. Screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the effect pattern ((Y1)-(Y3)-> (F1)-(F3)-> (G1)-(G4) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing effect is performed. The transition and the motion transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described.

When the reach effect is started, the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 202 (Y1)), and the effect suggests the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 202 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, an image of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation valid period are displayed, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate is performed (FIG. 202 (FIG. 202). Y3). At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is emitted, and the operation button of the image display is also displayed in the same light emitting mode. Therefore, the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. It is possible to detect that the operation button 410 is emitted, and the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when the operation by the player is detected.

If the sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect are not performed and the result is off, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the reach effect is completed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying the result of the loss (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 203 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is terminated. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation button 410.

Further, when the sword-drawing main effect is performed after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected. A sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 203 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white characters of "Tenki" are displayed on the blackout screen (Fig. 203 (F1)), and the image of the samurai on his side trying to touch the sword is displayed. (FIG. 203 (F2)). Next, the sword-drawing effect in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura member) is started (FIGS. 203 (F3), 204 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (a form with an aura member) due to the sword extraction main effect, FIG. 203 (F2) immediately before and immediately after. Unlike the image of the samurai's Iai in FIG. 204 (G1), the image of the lightning bolt running is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation to win (hit) Iai is shown by the strength of the lightning bolt.

Subsequent production is the same as in FIGS. 198 (A2), (A3) and 199 described above, and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state and a predetermined period elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is used by the player. In order to function as an operation means that can effectively accept the operation of the sword decoration body 5001, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is urged to perform the sword delivery operation within the operation valid period (FIG. 204 (G2)), and the symbol type (hit or miss) is notified by the player's sword delivery operation (FIG. 204 (G3) or (FIG. 204 (G3)). G4)).

Subsequently, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 205, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player initiates the state change of the sword decoration body 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is generated at an early stage, and the operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates the operation button 410 within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) (time ty), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to change the state, and the sword is first pulled out from the sword-delivered state. Here, in the first sword-drawn state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in order to make the sword decoration body 5001 function as an operation means. When a valid period occurs, an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 (time t3), and when the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation valid period (time t3 to t4) (time t3). At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). If the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) of the operation button 410 set in advance, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (the first form) when the operation valid period ends. (2) It may be deformed and changed at once to a form with an aura member in a sword-drawn state). Further, the timing of the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state is changed according to the operation of the player's operation button 410, that is, after the first sword withdrawal state has elapsed and a certain period of time has elapsed, the state changes to the second sword withdrawal state. You may do it. If the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player is not detected within the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 set in advance (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the second when the operation validity period ends. It is returned from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state.

In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. The timing for starting the sword withdrawal operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the timing for starting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (time tk). In this way, the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is reversed (sword pulling operation and sword delivery operation) depending on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operating means is operated during the operation valid period of one operating means, it becomes invalid.

As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, by operating the operation button 410 by the player, the form (final form) when the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operating means is determined (for example, the form with an aura member by deforming and changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001). It can be made to look like the second sword is pulled out. As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's motivation to operate can be increased.

Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect images corresponding to the deformation and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (FIGS. 203 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 204. Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, it is possible to further increase the operation value of the operation button 410 and enhance the interest of the game.

(Transformation example 2-Stage aura withdrawal effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210, the degree of appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 with the aura member, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011, based on the modification 1. A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of operations of the operation button 410 by the player will be described. FIGS. 206 to 210 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 2. The same effects as described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 stages. Aura level 0 indicates a completely contained state (FIG. 195 (A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visible to the player. The aura level 3 is a completely appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is fully visible to the player by being united with the blade portion 5011 in the second sword-drawn state while maintaining a relative positional relationship in the sword-delivered state (Fig.). 195 (B)) is shown. The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player by only 1/3 of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player for only two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

Here, there is no sword preparation transition effect with the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which neither the sword preparation transition effect nor the sword main effect is performed. Is the case where the sword-drawing effect is performed, and the effect pattern (in the figure) in which the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the final form (the form with the aura member in the completely appearing state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once. (Z1)-(Z3)-> (I1) and (I2)-> (G1)-(G4)), multiple operation of the operation button 410 is required, and the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001 changes stepwise. Regarding the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure), the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword decoration body. The operation transition of 5001 will be described.

In the above-mentioned modification 1, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration body 5001 is found by operating the operation button 410 once, but in the modification 2, the operation of the operation button 410 is performed step by step. It is characterized in that a step operation effect is performed in which the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to change the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001.

First, in the production pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword extraction main effect is not performed, that is, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 does not change even if the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. 202 of the above-mentioned modification 1. (Y1) to (Y3) → follow the same effect transition as in FIGS. 203 (E1) and (E2) (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 207 (H1) and (H2)).

In addition, there is no sword preparation transition effect, but in the case where the sword extraction main effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member) by operating the operation button 410 once. ), The operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effect as in FIGS. 202 (Y1) to (Y3) of the above-mentioned modification 1 (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)). Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration body 5001 is united with the sword blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the sword blade part 5011 in the sword delivery state, and completely appears when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword removal state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 207 (I1)). The above-mentioned form of the sword decoration body 5001 with the aura member of the modified example 1 is composed of the aura member 5030, and the modified example 2 is composed of the aura member 5035. FIG. 203 (F1) (F2) → follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 204 (FIGS. 207 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

Further, in the case where the sword preparation transition effect is not performed but the sword extraction main effect is performed, the operation of the operation button 410 is required multiple times, and the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001 is changed stepwise. The production transition is the same as before until the operation of the operation button 410 for the first time (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decoration body 5001 after the first operation is in the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely housed state (aura level 0) in which the player cannot see it. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as in FIG. 207 (I1) described above (FIG. 208 (J1)).

Then, the second operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect for which the operation target operation button 410 is light-emitting is decorated. Is performed (FIG. 208 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura levels 0 to 3.

First, when the set aura level is "0" (that is, in the case of the form without the aura member), the aura member 5035 maintains the completely housed state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is terminated (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and it is notified that the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state is returned. An image (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (FIG. 208 (J3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 has no aura member, and follows the same production transition as in FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. (FIG. 208 (J4) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

On the other hand, when the set aura level is any one of "1" to "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 appears from the completely housed state to 1/3. Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 208 (J5)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in green indicating aura level 1.

Then, the third operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect for which the operation target operation button 410 is light-emitting is decorated. Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 209 (K1)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be green, which indicates aura level 1. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "1", the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect is terminated in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the player returns to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen. White characters) are displayed, and an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 1/3 appears, and in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 209 (K3) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "2" or "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in red indicating aura level 2.

Then, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image showing the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect that is decorated with light emission is performed (FIG. 209 (K5)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red, which indicates aura level 2. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "2", the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (Since then, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the player will return to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state (here, "Iza" on the blackout screen. White letters) are displayed, and an image showing the aura level is displayed (FIG. 210 (M1)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 2/3 appears, and in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 210 (M1) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 210 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in a rainbow color indicating an aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state is performed. An image notifying the return (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 210 (L2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is the same as FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. Follow the production transition (FIG. 210 (L3) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In the above description, the degree of coalescence of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is changed each time at the operation timing when the aura level rises to widen the range visible to the player (increasing the degree of appearance). Not limited to. Even if the aura level rises, the aura that was confirmed when the aura level was confirmed (specifically, when the white letters "Iza" are displayed on the blackout screen) without increasing the appearance of the aura member 5035. A stock type combination may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 at once so that the appearance degree according to the level is obtained. Further, the target for increasing the appearance degree stepwise is not limited to the aura member 5035, and the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be targeted. For example, the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be changed in a stepwise state from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state.

As described above, in the second modification, the player is requested to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as the operating means is in the movable state, which is a surprising novelty. It is possible to provide various operation effects, and it is possible to further enhance the fun of the game as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the player is given multiple operation opportunities to develop the production step by step, it is possible to impress the player with a great deal of involvement in the production and prevent the interest in the production from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is recognizable even in the subsequent production, the player can feel the afterglow of the operation production.

(Other production patterns 1 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 211 to 213 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword-delivered state functions as an operating means, and operates and detects the sword pulling operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in the front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state is the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbol forms a reach state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state (FIG. 211 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 211 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, and a part of the bamboo blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to the player. There is. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-delivered state.

In the princess reach effect, an image of the princess heading to the back of the blind is displayed (FIG. 211 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggestion image suggesting the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 211 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is urged to the player to pull out the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 212 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small steps in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. May be good. Then, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword pulling operation by the player means an operation of pulling out the sword blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword-delivered state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword pulling state, the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, and the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection / notification operation may be an operation in which the sword portion 5010 (or the handle portion 5012) moves up and down, such as movement or vibration, and an operation different from the own sword pulling operation can be felt through the handle portion 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection / notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle portion 5012. For this reason, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) is reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body is prevented. Can be done.

In the sword pulling operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player pulls out the sword, depending on the degree of expectation. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is stationary above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (initial stage). The state) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 212 (C1)). Then, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the detached mode "767" (FIG. 212 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 212 (C2) is notified, but not limited to this, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the detection notification operation is terminated. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow) is placed in the center of the front surface (below the display area) overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600. Only the hold display area can be dropped and moved so that it can be visually recognized (total fall state) (FIG. 212 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body. The 5001 maintains the second sword-drawn state (FIG. 212 (D2)). At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, for example. By differentiating the color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed after that, the expected degree of the lottery result by the princess reach (the degree of expectation of winning, the game profit when it is a winning, etc.) may be suggested. ..

Then, after a predetermined period has passed since the sword decoration body 5001 was put into the second sword pulling state by the sword pulling operation by the player, that is, after the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword pulling state was reached. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 212 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed with the blinds removed (Fig. 213 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword pulling operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of this variation display is a hit, the hit is notified together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 213 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the detachment is displayed together with a sad princess in the case of the detachment (FIG. 213 (F1) (F2)).

When the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player cannot move due to being grasped when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration 5001, but the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player at the left-right movable production timing (FIG. 212 (D3)) of the sword decoration 5001. If it is held in the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the movable effect in the left-right direction of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) have progressed. Because it is configured to do so, the progress of the game will not be stagnant. The sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured not to perform a movable effect. You may.

In this way, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword pulling operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved in the forward direction (at the operation position) of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. On the other hand, it can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword pulling operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword pulling operation was performed, increasing the operation value of the player and motivating the player to operate. It is possible to suppress the decline of. In addition, since one operating means can be operated in a stepwise different manner (vertical direction during operation, left-right direction after operation) by the operation by the player, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. It is possible to increase the operating value of the operating means as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

The left-right movable effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is an effect display for the purpose of performing an integrated effect with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). The operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword withdrawal operation is performed with the sword decoration body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved so as to be located outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed so as to be displaced to the left direction (the left end of the frame). Further, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example is a vertical movement (a sword pulling operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. For the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a direction different from the operating direction (here, the vertical direction) at the time of operation by the player (horizontal direction as in this example).

Further, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player is performed, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm it for a certain period of time, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the subsequent movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001, or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, if the movable effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to let go, and the operation is required during the operation valid period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection / notification operation is completed, the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other production patterns 2 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 214 to 216 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which the expectation degree suggestion effect suggesting the expectation degree that the fluctuation during execution becomes a big hit and the operation of the operation button 410 are performed. As an effect, a pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 214 (A)), first, the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The operation promotion effect is started and the player is urged to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 214 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword delivery state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation suggestion effect is performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Later (FIG. 214 (N1)), an image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed (FIG. 215 (N2)). After that, the result of this variation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 215 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expected degree suggestion effect for the variable display during execution, and for example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expected degree (FIG. 215 (N2)). A character that changes the hold display that has been set may appear.

Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and expanded by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 214 (M1) shows an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, a message of the title "sword pulling chance" and the operation explanation "sword is delivered") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 216 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period has passed since the second sword was pulled out and the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 started, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) was moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state to produce an effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 216 (M3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the variation display this time is performed.

When the result of this variation display is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state ( FIG. 216 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a stop mode "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 216 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) only stops moving in small steps in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the disconnection (the stop mode “767” of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 216 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001) become possible, and the player can perform the operation button 410. It is not possible to specify the subsequent expansion at the time of manipulating. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation motivation and a decrease in the game interest, which is a concern due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach effects, the first operation (pressing operation and sword delivery operation) differs between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001). It will be requested to the player based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the player in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not look good.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. The operating means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. Is desirable.

(Other production patterns 3 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 221. 217 to 221 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410. Even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable based on the pressing operation of, and is displayed in the detached mode, it is re-variated from the symbol display of the detached mode and the player is given an operation opportunity again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given / R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be explained.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 217 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, the start image of the operation effect). , The message "You can move the movable body with a single button blow") is displayed (Fig. 217 (B)), then the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 217 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword delivery state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to a single blow (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) to be moved by the operation. You may do so. If the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is movable and becomes a big hit, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 218 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is released is an image (decorative pattern) for notifying the jackpot. The stop mode "777", the message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 218 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is only stopped to move in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 219 (P1). It is developed into a pattern (FIG. 219 (P2)) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in an detached mode (“767”), or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the resurrection start image (referred to as "yet") indicating that the variable display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative symbol in the detached mode of FIG. 219 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 219 (P3)), the decorative design is in the reach state again and is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the center of the screen. An operation valid suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a samurai ally) is displayed (FIG. 219 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 219 (P5)). As a result, the player raises the expectation that the production using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be light-lit and decorated in a high-speed blinking manner, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state and moved up and down. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means according to the set effect pattern, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (Katana) is performed. The pattern on which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set so that the degree of expectation is lower than the pattern on which the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat oozes on the samurai's forehead of the operation valid suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is luminescently decorated (FIG. 220 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is continuously moved in small steps and the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation for prompting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 220 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, the operation button 410 is not decorated with light emission when it is operated a necessary number of times.

Then, when the result of the variable display becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 220 (R3)). At this time, the decorative design displayed on the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible to the player at the lower right of the screen. As in the case of the above (FIG. 216 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the aspect of the decorative pattern at this point. Next, the screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again from the fully dropped state and the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image notifying the big hit (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed in the center (FIG. 220 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is out of alignment, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 220 (R5)).

When the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image in which the samurai who has closed his eyes in the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp (sword decoration body). (Confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state with an aura member (FIG. 221 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be light-emittingly decorated. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the sword decoration body 5001 is not the operation button 410 but the operation is effective, but at this point, the form such as whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is moved in small steps, the second sword is pulled out and a predetermined period of time elapses, and when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 221 (Q2)).

Then, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 220 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 221 (FIG. 221). Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of alignment, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 220 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 221 (Q5)).

In this way, since the expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the expectation is more powerful than the expectation suggested by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. Further, even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 again. Will be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest, which is a concern because the operation effect is monotonous and does not look good.

Although 3 examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword decoration body 5001 are given in FIGS. 211 to 221 described above, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of productions can be provided, and the entertainment of the game can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo-ream production using sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 222 to 236, a pseudo-continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001 that changes the form stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variable, and the temporary stop and the re-variation are repeated once or multiple times. Etc. are shown. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears to have stopped, but actually swings slightly and the fluctuation continues. In this example, when a variation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, the pseudo-continuous effect of the effect pattern that can be selected by the lottery of the effect content by the peripheral control board 1510 is as follows. Explain to.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 222. The above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 has two types, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, but here, a form in which the sword portion 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle portion 5012. Are provided in two types.

FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating a form of the sword decorative body 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous production. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deforming the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 so that the player can change the shape from the left and right sides of the sheath portion 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the above-mentioned aura member 5035, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the above-mentioned aura member 5030. FIGS. 222 (A) to 222 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the forms of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-delivered state, and show the step 0 form to the step 3 form in order. The sword decoration body 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the step 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to those in FIGS. 192 (A) and 194 (A) described above, and no operation is required for any of the initial components. Shows morphology. As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath portion 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 222 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle portion 5012 expands and moves so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from the inside. show. As shown in FIG. 222 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle portion 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. Shows morphology. Here, the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form enable the morphological change without putting the sword decorative body 5001 into the second sword pulling state. Further, since the sword portion 5010 capable of accepting operations by the player and the non-moving sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integral decorative body as the operation unit of the operation means, it is possible to provide a more powerful operation means. Can be done.

(Example of pseudo-continuous production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 to 236, an example of the effect transition will be described with respect to the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 231 (A), the main control board 1310 causes a sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, a sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, a sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, a sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, a sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and a sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern. When any of the six types of variation patterns of the pattern is selected, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The production patterns for performing pseudo-continuous production include basic production patterns (sword LV1 weak production pattern, sword LV1 strong production pattern, sword LV2 weak production pattern, sword LV2 strong production pattern, sword LV3 weak) corresponding to each of the six types of fluctuation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is selected. When the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). ), One of the sword LV3 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, and the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival LV1 effect pattern). Be selected.

In each of the effect patterns, the number of continuations (1 to 3 times) of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity according to the number of continuations, and when the operation opportunity is given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is set (see FIG. 231 (B)). The effect pattern names "LV1" to "LV3" correspond to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of 1 to 3 times. Further, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop positions (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In addition, the "pseudo-sword LV1" gives the sword decoration body 5001 a selection operation opportunity for the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), and the player makes a selection not to operate, so that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues. It is shown that it is a production that can acquire. Further, the "pseudo-resurrection sword LV1" follows the same production transition as the sword LV1 weak production pattern of the basic production pattern that gives the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 for the first pseudo-revolution fluctuation (re-variation). Fluctuation It is shown that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed again after the fall effect of the special decorative member SDY (sudare) based on the first operation opportunity. The details of the production contents of each production pattern will be described later.

Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the higher the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, the higher the expectation is as the morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 progresses, and further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare role) is set. The lower the drop position of the object), the higher the expectation. It is set so that the drop position of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is the same as the case where all the drops are made with the effect pattern that is less frequent. Specifically, the expectation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the half-fall sword LV1 weak effect pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continuation once and the full-fall sword. The expectation of the LV1 strong production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2 times, and the expectation of the half-falling sword LV2 weak production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2. The expectation of the sword LV2 strong production pattern of times and full fall is 50%, the expectation of the sword LV3 weak production pattern of half-fall is 50%, the number of continuations of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 50%, and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) The expected degree of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of 3 times of continuation (variation) and the total fall is set to 65%. Further, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the selected variation pattern even if the effect pattern is the same, and the higher the degree of expectation is, the higher the degree of expectation is set. The expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, respectively. Will be. Further, the expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and when the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is used. Further, the expectation level of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set to 100% regardless of the variation pattern.

Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 231 (B) will be described with reference to an effect transition example shown in FIGS. 223 to 230 and an effect execution timing chart shown in FIGS. 232 to 236. FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an effect transition example of a pseudo-continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIGS. 224 to 226 are diagrams showing a transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is being performed. Further, FIG. 227 is a diagram showing a transition example of the post-operation effect (fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) of the sword decoration body 5001 during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. be. Further, FIGS. 228 and 229 are diagrams showing examples of effect transitions that are characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. Further, FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Further, FIGS. 232 to 236 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sword accessory) in the pseudo-continuous production, and FIG. 232 is a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 233 is a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern), FIG. 234 is a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern), and FIG. 235 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 236 shows a pseudo-revival sword LV1 production pattern. In the following, an example of an effect transition in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the effect before the variable display is started and the reach state is reached will be described.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 223 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view, and a part of the bamboo blind can be visually recognized by the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the state of delivering the sword in the stage 0 form (initial form).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 223 (B) and 223 (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect content notification "great chance if 100 bodies can be defeated" message, samurai An image that accumulates the aura) is displayed, suggesting to the player that the pseudo-continuous production will start. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are re-variated to the player. Notify that. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous variation number) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the embodiment, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). ), A sword image showing the form of the sword decoration body 5001 (stage 1 form) in advance is displayed. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is notified at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts, so that the player Can grasp and face the stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of the above-mentioned FIG. 223 (D). The pseudo-sword symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 at this time is the timing when the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration body 5001 from the effect display which is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). The morphological change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). Pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in a magnified display. , The sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is it possible to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state in which the sword delivery operation by the player is possible as an operation means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating whether or not, that is, whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity, is displayed. Subsequent productions include a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective (a production pattern with "LV1" in the name) and a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is not operation-effective (name) according to the preset production pattern. Branches to the effect pattern) with "LV2" or "LV3" attached to. In the following, an example of the effect transition will be described in order for the nine types of effect patterns.

(Katana LV1 weak production pattern / Katana LV1 strong production pattern)
First, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 227, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration body 5001 as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is covered with the above-mentioned FIG. 223 (G). An operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) is displayed (FIG. 224 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation is displayed (FIG. 224 (T2)). .. Then, the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword removal state (stage 1 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (FIG. 224 (T3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern.

Here, when the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U1), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) ) Is moved from the initial state to the full fall state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 223 (B). An expectation notification image (“100 defeated!”) That notifies the expectation of the variation display result is displayed in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous production shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half-fall state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Here, the display of the expected degree notification image enables the player to grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Further, when the set effect pattern is a "weak" effect pattern, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a half-fall state. The semi-falling state means a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the fully falling state, and overlaps with the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. .. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned from the semi-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 223 (B). An expectation notification image (“50 defeated!”) That notifies the expectation of the variation display result is displayed in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous production shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Then, as in the "strong" effect pattern, the expected degree notification image at this time is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

If the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001, the set effect pattern is regardless of whether it is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("enemy, escape!") Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, as shown in FIG. 227 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. To. As for the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the "weak" effect pattern and the "strong" effect pattern. In this way, by operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword delivery operation is requested, the player can perform a reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the drop position of the specific decoration member SDY (sudare). I can meet you. Therefore, even if the later reach production is the same, it is possible to have different expectations each time, so that the decrease in the motivation of the player to operate is suppressed, and further, the deterioration of the game interest for the uniform production is suppressed. can do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 232, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 1 form is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. Enable as a means and give the player an opportunity to operate. When the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If there is no operation by the player, the fall effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 232, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword decoration body 5001 that has become operable (second sword withdrawal state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification corresponding to the full fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Katana LV2 weak production pattern / Katana LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration body 5001 as an operating means in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given at the operation opportunity grant timing of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). After following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to 223 (G), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not provided with an operation opportunity from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 223 (G). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 that was in the second sword withdrawal state is returned to the sword delivery state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 1 morphology (Fig.). 224 (S1)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 224 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous variation number) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the embodiment, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is displayed on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. Further, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, when the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 224 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the step 1 form to the step 2 form in which the handle portion 5012 is split left and right so that the first decorative portion 5012a can be visually recognized (FIG. 224 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (FIG. 224 (S4)). The morphological change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decoration body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once at the timing when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword drawing state (stage 2 form) in which the sword delivery operation by the player is possible as an operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 225 (V1)).

Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) is displayed (an image). FIG. 225 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation is displayed (FIG. 225 (V3)). .. Then, the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword removal state (stage 2 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (FIG. 225 (V4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can know that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the operation validity period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area, an escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed (Fig.). See 229 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 233, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. In the period T2 in which the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 2 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. When the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 233, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 223 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in an operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword decoration body 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 225 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 225 (V4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification corresponding to the full fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T2.

(Katana LV3 weak production pattern / Katana LV3 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration body 5001 as an operating means in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body is used at the timing of giving the operation opportunity of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) shown in FIG. 225 (V1) above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 224 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1), the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a continuous image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1), and the second sword is drawn. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 2 morphology (FIG. 225 (V5)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 225 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous variation number) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the embodiment, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is displayed on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. Further, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous variation) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are displayed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, when the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 225 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative portion 5012b protrudes above the first decorative portion 5012a so that both decorative portions can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body (the sword decorative body 5001). FIG. 225 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (FIG. 225 (V8)). The morphological change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword decoration body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword delivery state to the second sword withdrawal state may be set to be simultaneous. Further, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 does not have to be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and when the final stage is reached, the form may be changed collectively for a plurality of stages. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once at the timing when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword pulling state (stage 3 form) in which the sword delivery operation by the player is possible as an operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 226 (X1)).

Here, when the set effect patterns are the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1) is displayed (an image). FIG. 226 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation is displayed (FIG. 226 (X3)). .. Then, the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword removal state (stage 3 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (FIG. 226 (X4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can know that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the operation validity period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of, an escape image ("enemy, escape!") Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed ("Enemy, escape!") Is displayed (. See FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 234, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are In the period T2 in which the sword decoration is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the game is played. Give a person an operation opportunity. When the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 234, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 223 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in an operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 225 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in an operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword decoration 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification corresponding to the full fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229, the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), but the pseudo-continuous variation is selected by the player not to operate. An example of an effect transition when a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire continuation (level-up effect) of (re-variation) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given at the operation opportunity grant timing of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). .. However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to 224 (T1), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity of FIG. 224 (T1). An operation selection image (“may be an opportunity !?” message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity asking the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z1). )). Then, the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect for urging the selection of the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and operation validity period are shown together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword". An image is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z2)).

Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is a variation of either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern). Subsequent production transitions differ greatly depending on whether the production pattern is set based on the pattern.

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When it is detected, it follows the same effect transition (FIG. 227) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern.

On the other hand, if the sword-delivering operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) is shown regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the valid period of the operation is completed, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second sword drawing state of the stage 1 form to the sword delivery state of the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has this selection operation opportunity. An image (“Is it an opportunity ...”) indicating that it was an opportunity to operate is displayed (FIG. 229 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("enemy, escape!"" Showing that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) being performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal aspect, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 229 (W3)).

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When detected, FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 227 (U1) → After following the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (total period of the periods T2 and T3) is variablely displayed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode (not shown). Then, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the normal mode at the same timing as a predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 227 (U5)). reference).

On the other hand, if the sword-delivering operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) is shown regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation validity period in which the operation is performed ends, the operation pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-mentioned FIG. 228 (Z2) to a continuous image (FIG. 224 (S1)) showing that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. After that, in the same manner as the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, FIGS. 224 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1) → FIG. ) → FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 227 (U5).

As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) greatly differs in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 1310. If the selected fluctuation pattern is a sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when operating at the selection operation opportunity, the basic effect pattern Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and face the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to obtain the level-up effect described later, but you will also reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the degree of expectation that you could have known if you originally operated it. .. Further, when the selected fluctuation pattern is a sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If you do not operate at the selection operation opportunity, you can enjoy the production by continuing the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) as in the basic production pattern. On the other hand, if you operate it, you will miss the effect (change in the form of the sword decoration 5001 due to the level-up effect) due to the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) that you could have acquired if you did not operate it, and the form of the sword decoration 5001 will be initialized. It will be returned to the form. As for the operation in the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, which is unknown to the player, is exactly the opposite, and the operation in the operation valid period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that brings a disadvantageous operation result to the person. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game caused by a uniform operation effect.

In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) occurs. When the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the level of the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form at the time of the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decoration body 5001, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is raised to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, an operation is required a preset number of times in the effect pattern, but in this example, two operation opportunities (LV1 and L3) can be given in advance, but one operation is performed by the player. The grant will end at the opportunity, and it is possible to provide a novel production that more reflects the intention of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate due to an operation effect that does not look good, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In other words, even if the effect pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 can be changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set by the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, the initial form to the stage 1 form may be set depending on the operation of the player. Only the changes up to can be seen, leading to reach production. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected fluctuation pattern (set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, if the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). .. If you do not operate the sword decoration body 5001, you will not be able to grasp the degree of expectation and you will end up, and the form will change (level up) further, and you will operate it at the operation opportunity given after becoming the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the non-operation selection produces a lower effect than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set so that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 231 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation of the same production pattern may be constant regardless of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect more suitable for the player's own sense of selection, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 235, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing of is described.

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 of the stage 1 form is used in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. Is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is a sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or a sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, three pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are originally provided so that the specific decoration can be performed. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol variation in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern. Then, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, the second and third pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are continued, and the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation is continued. In the period T2 in which (re-variation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And give the player an opportunity to operate. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 235, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword decoration body 5001 that is in an operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → FIG. 228). (See (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 228 (Z2)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the full fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues (when the sword is set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation valid period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S1)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 225 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in an operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword decoration 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the full fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

In addition, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is not continued (when the sword is set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 230, the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern is followed, and after making it appear as if it is entering the reach production as it is, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is revived. An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern will be omitted as appropriate.

The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

When the set effect pattern is a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the above-mentioned FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → FIGS. Follow the production transition. When the operation by the player is detected in the first operation opportunity, the effect is the same as in FIGS. 227 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above, regardless of the type of variation pattern. After following the production transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo-sequential fluctuation by the pseudo-sword symbol is restarted again. If the operation by the player is not detected in the first operation opportunity, the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the initial form of the sword delivery state at the end of the operation valid period, as in the other effect patterns. Instead of the above-mentioned FIG. 230 (UA1) → (UA2), the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends without the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)).

The resumption of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 230 (UA3) described above. Temporary stop display with a pseudo-sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, a pseudo-sword pattern that indicates the form and effect level (number of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001. This will notify the player (FIG. 230 (UA4)). On the pseudo-sword pattern at this time, the sword image of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form and the effect level 3 are displayed. At this point, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001, and the initial form (sword delivery state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo-recovery sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of the temporary stop display (FIG. 230 (UA4)) immediately before the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form starts, the form and the effect level of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 230 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display acts on the sword decoration body 5001. It is moved and displayed toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decorative portion 5012a and the second decorative portion 5012b operate and both decorative portions can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body. (Fig. 230 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (FIG. 230 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form for a plurality of stages, it is possible to impress a powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword pulling state (stage 3 form), which enables the sword delivery operation by the player, is enabled as an operation means, and the above-mentioned FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X5) are provided with an operation opportunity. If an operation by the player is detected after following the effect transition of, although not shown, the specific decorative member SDY (not shown) depends on the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. The type of drop effect of the bamboo blind) is determined. If the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is once in a half-dropped state, so the level is raised to the above-mentioned FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2). → The same as (U5), the expectation level notification effect is performed by the total drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends. On the other hand, if the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the expectation level due to the half-drop effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (sudare) as in FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends.

If the operation by the player is not detected at the operation opportunity to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation valid period ends as in the other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the initial state of sword delivery, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is pseudo-continuously changed (re-changed) without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Showing that the process has ended is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

In this way, the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern follows the same effect transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, and when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored again, it jumps over the level of the stage 2 form and the stage 3 form. Since the same development as the production of the level of (the production of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the basic production pattern) is performed, the player is surprised and reaches with a stronger expectation than other production patterns. Can face. In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is half-fall, he / she will not be disappointed. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 236, the operation execution timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operating means in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. Give the player an operation opportunity. At this time, regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is half-dropped by the player's operation (expectation notification). (Direction) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed.

Then, after the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed and the display returns to the variation display of the decorative symbol in the normal mode, the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the form changes to the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped during the period T1, the specified decorative member SDY (sudare) is completely dropped by the player's operation (expectation notification). (Direction) is performed. Further, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped in the period T1 during the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped by the player's operation. A production (expectation notification production) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 236, when the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword decoration body 5001 that has become operable (second sword withdrawal state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 230 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 230 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative symbol in the normal mode (see FIG. 230 (UA3)), but the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored (FIG. 230 (UA4). )reference).

Then, at the same time as the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restarted, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 230 (UA5)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 230 (UA6)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword decoration 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is changed from the initial state to the total drop state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 227 (U1)). Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to the entire drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) starts from the initial state. The difference is that the blind state is changed to the half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)), and the expectation notification image of the expectation degree corresponding to the half-drop is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2). )), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous effect using the sword decoration body 5001, in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times, the number of pseudo-continuous changes is 2 and 3 times, respectively. If it is less than, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state for each pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) so that the player can operate it, but an operation validity period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the sword-delivered state without giving the player an operation opportunity. For this reason, the player is expected to see whether or not the operation is effective even if the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operable, so that the player is interested in the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in operation motivation and a decrease in amusement interest.

Further, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is characterized in that the sword ornament 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword ornament 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a useful effect for the player by the operation of the player. Make the player's operation selection careful. Therefore, it is possible to make the sword decoration body 5001 interested in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for the operation and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the sword decoration body 5001 can change its form step by step until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation validity period occurs), the expectation and interest of the player can be raised step by step, and the game can be played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. The period from when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operation state and in the second sword withdrawal state (operation position) until the operation effective period is generated is the operation time mode (form, light emission, movable) in the operation position by the player. Etc.) should be provided for a period in which it can be sufficiently confirmed. As a result, the player can confirm the operation mode before operating the sword decoration body 5001, so that the operation valid period is generated as soon as the second sword is pulled out, and the mode of the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to dispel the concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the hasty shift to the operation production.

The step change of the sword decoration body 5001 described above is shown in the form, but the present invention is not limited to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emitting mode or the operation mode of the sword decoration body 5001, may be changed stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

(Application to look-ahead production)
Although the sword-drawing effect in the pseudo-continuous reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a look-ahead effect. The case of applying to the look-ahead effect will be described below. In the following, a case where the third hold is the target of the look-ahead effect and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the look-ahead effect pattern will be described as an example.

When the hold to be read-ahead effect occurs as the third hold 3, the same effect as in FIGS. 223 (B) to 223 (F) described above is performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. The sword decoration body 5001 is different in that the second sword withdrawal state is limited to the time when the operation opportunity is given (the operation validity period is generated). Then, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIG. 223 (G) → FIGS. 224 (S1) to (S4) described above is performed. Further, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 2 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIGS. 225 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X3) is performed. Will be. As described above, in the look-ahead effect, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state only at the occurrence timing of the operation valid period. Here, the operation valid period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 which is the target of the look-ahead effect is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change (sword delivery state) of the operation promotion effect and the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 226 (X4) described above are started. The second sword is pulled out from). After that, the same effect transition as in FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the look-ahead effect is completed.

The state change of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword delivery state to the second sword withdrawal state is limited to the occurrence timing of the operation valid period, but the stepwise morphological change is performed at the end of the variation display, but the next variation display It may be done at the start. The look-ahead effect has the same effect as the pseudo-continuous reach effect.

(Pre-operation suggestion effect using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 240, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is operation-effective or the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). .. Specifically, as a suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory), the operation valid period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation valid period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position, and there is a sword decoration body 5001 (from the operation button 410). When the operation is valid, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) that generates the operation valid period with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) positioned at the initial position even during the operation valid period. When is performed, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with an operation of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed. Has a 70% probability (including a step-up pattern) that the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective, and a 30% probability that the operation button 410 is operation-effective. Hereinafter, an example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
FIGS. 237 and 238 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. Is a diagram showing a transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 237 (A)), the operation button is determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operating means of the 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 237 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001.

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) that is predetermined to be effective for operation is generated. Let me. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the initial position, the operation button 410 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the sword decoration body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 is operated and enabled, as shown in FIG. 237 (C), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Let me. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated effectively, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the ratio is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 237 (D), the operation valid period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible.

If an operation on an operation effective means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) is detected in FIG. 237 (C) or (D) described above, and the result of this variation display becomes a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved to drop from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a stop mode "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the out of order. An image (stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 239 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is valid during the reach effect, as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect to be executed. In FIG. 240, although the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword decoration body 5001 was not enabled for operation, the operation button 410 was once enabled for operation, and then the sword decoration was performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern which makes the body 5001 operation effective.

As shown in FIG. 239 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 whose operation is determined to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. It is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) that is predetermined to be effective for operation is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in the suggested position, the sword decoration body 5001 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

When the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position. To generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible. Further, even when the operation button 410 is operated effectively, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 is used. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved from the state of being operated at the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) may be moved from the state of operating to the suggested position to the fully dropped state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation on the operation-effective operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 239 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 237 (C) or (D) is used. Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved so as to be in a completely dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a stop mode "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the out of order. An image (stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

The operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggested position, but a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the ratio of the sword decoration body 5001 that is effective for operation is different, the player's interest in the motion can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern that follows the effect transition from FIG. 239 (AA1) to (AA3) described above before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational effective, the operation button 410 becomes operational once, and then the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 240 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 which is determined in advance to be operation-effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) described above is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) as in FIG. 239 (AA1) is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps (FIG. 240 (BB1)). ). Next, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (FIG. 240 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 238 is not performed, and the switching suggesting the switching of the operation effective operation means. Suggested images (most blackout images) are displayed (FIG. 240 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operation means for which the operation is effective is from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration body 5001. A switching notification image (message of "chance to pull out the sword" and "a message that the sword should be paid") is displayed (FIG. 240 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 238) in the above-mentioned second suggestion pattern.

Note that, in the case of FIG. 240 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the operation of the button operation 410 (without the operation promotion effect). It suffices if the player's interest can be directed to the button operation 410 and then the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is effective is generated. ) Can be changed, and the operation means that is effective depending on the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) in which the operation valid period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operation valid. In the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)), the sword decoration body 5001 is expected to be high, and the operation validity period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggestion position. Is highly expected to be effective for operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in order to grasp which operation means is effective for operation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 238) after the operation of the operation means, a series of drop effects are performed from the vertical wiggle movement of the pre-operation suggestion effect. It can be shown as a production of the game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body will be effective, is not limited to this, and the character is shown during the pre-operation suggestion effect. It may be displayed to suggest the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means for which the operation is effective is determined, not only the operation button 410 is lit or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second sword withdrawal state, but also the operation means for which the operation is effective is moved by vibration or the like. You may do it.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation (or pretended to be valid) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggested position. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation of the sword decoration body 5001. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to have the expectation that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that the motivation for operation is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is effective is displayed. At the same timing (FIG. 237 (B)), as in the case of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is viewed from the initial position in the front view of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It may operate in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper portion, and may be moved in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. After that, when the operation valid period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player is suggested to operate by the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the sword decoration body 5001 to be effective even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is executed. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation valid period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Perform the production with a pattern. In the effect period in which the specific effect pattern is executed, it is possible to generate a specific effect acceptance period (valid period) in which the specific effect execution condition is satisfied by the operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific effect acceptance period. And, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting a privilege) based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation for giving a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide another operating means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), this There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the pre-operation effect to which the operation opportunity is given occurs even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for granting the privilege is higher than the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for giving the privilege suggested when the operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when the production is in the pre-stage where it has not been performed yet and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired production result (such as the production result suggesting that the expectation for granting the privilege is high) does not appear in the operation-time production according to the operation for another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). Even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such operation-related production. Become.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) having such a directing property. If so, it is possible to execute a common operation-related effect when giving those operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, at least, as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) in which the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted), at least
-The operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) after the "specific operation-related effect" that can appear even when the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is enabled (the effect can be accepted). The first effect mode that generates the valid period (effect acceptance period), and the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) without starting the effect of "specific operation-related effect". A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) to be performed are prepared, and by executing one of the production modes, the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (effect). It is designed to generate a valid period (production reception period) that can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period in which the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be accepted. Regardless of whether there is a period during which an operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for production, it is common (specific) prior to the occurrence of those periods. ), Since the operation-related effects can be executed, it becomes possible to have an interest in which of the specific operation means and another operation means can accept the effects. By performing the operation while the above is performed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In such a common (specific) operation-related effect, one of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) corresponds to a predetermined time after the effect is started. The production reception period will be generated, but at least when the production is started, which of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) corresponds to the production reception period will occur. Should be kept secret.

Hereinafter, some effect modes that can be adopted when carrying out such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanatory examples and other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. The type of the operation means is not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be the target of the common (specific) operation-related effect. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show the production content when any of the production reception periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related production is executed, and the common (specific) production is shown. ) Operation-related effects may be omitted if any of the effect acceptance periods occurs without being executed. However, when the common (specific) operation-related effect is not executed and any of the effect acceptance periods occurs, the effect content is as follows: "The operation for the operation button 410 is performed without the specific operation-related effect being executed. A general effect such as "an operation instruction image for prompting appears or an operation instruction image for prompting an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 appears" can be mentioned. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach effect is performed. It is possible to generate a common (specific) operation-related effect as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period during which is being executed, or it is common during the execution period of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed with each of the effects of each of the other examples described later, and can also be appropriately combined and executed with each of the above-mentioned effects. It is possible. Each effect described below can be combined with another effect described later by substituting a part thereof, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. Therefore, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform the effect of each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for each of the different productions described later.

[First production mode]
In FIGS. 241 and 242, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the production example (the first production mode) to be performed.

In FIG. 241 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 241 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 241 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display is displayed to move within each. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword It is suggested that the operation for any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 241 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b) is advanced, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "Operate" and a production reception) prompting you to operate any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) while each is stopped and displayed in the area. A bar display) showing the remaining time of the possible period) shows the production status.

According to such an effect mode, although the operation for at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be received, the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to make it unclear which of the above is available for production. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 241 (c)) in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 can be received for the effect and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means are performed before the operation for at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) can be received. Common (specific) operation-related as shown in FIGS. I try to perform the production.

Therefore, in addition to this effect example, in each effect example described below and other examples thereof, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 241 (b) and 241 (c). do not have. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 and the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 is after that (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). It suffices if it occurs in (middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for production. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted. For example, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and sword decoration. An effect image different from any of the image SYGs may be made to appear as a specific operation-related effect without appearing.

However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can receive the effect, there is a case where the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs and the effect for the sword decoration body 5001. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution (start of production) of a specific operation-related effect to the occurrence of those effect reception periods, depending on the case where the reception period occurs.

In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation for any of the operation means ("Operate!" , Etc.), or always operate a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means, regardless of how the multiple operation means can receive the effect. May be displayed to prompt the user. In short, as an operation instruction, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is possible for the effect and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is possible for the effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production.

Further, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 241 (c), it is concealed as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated for the production reception. , Even when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting the effect, and when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not capable of accepting the effect (in any of the first to third situations described later). Even so), only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation of the operation button 410 is urged. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the sword decoration body 5001 side to provide the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect situation in which the image shown in FIG. 241 (c) appears is only the operation of the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where the production can be accepted, or in the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be accepted for the production, or the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for the sword decoration body 5001. Both of them are set to be in one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001) occurs among these a plurality of situations, the first situation (the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) is given. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate at which (the situation in which is granted) occurs.

Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed in any of the first situation (operation button 410) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). (Whether the progress of "FF" in the figure is made), or in either the second situation (sword decoration body 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). When the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed (when the progress of "GG" in the figure is made), the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect according to the operation (FIG. 242 (d), FIG. 242 (f)). Is supposed to be done.

In the operation-time effect, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and 242 (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 performs a predetermined display effect. ("Chance !!") is supposed to be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception. , The degree of expectation for granting benefits may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time production according to this production example (first production mode), the production is accepted by the operation by the player in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and 242 (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control to put the operating means into an operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (d), even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the operation is performed according to the effect reception. It is possible to execute control to reciprocate the sword decoration body 5001 on the side not performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which the effect reception is generated as a result of the player's operation on the operation button 410 and the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, the "operation" is performed. Even if the sword decoration body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated without operating the button 410, the production reception may have occurred and the production on the sword decoration body 5001 side may have been executed. It will be possible to appeal the possibility to the player.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword pulling operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in the sword delivery position according to the production reception. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the sword withdrawal position (sword withdrawal state) instead of returning to the sword withdrawal state. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword delivery position (sword delivery state) to the sword extraction position (sword extraction state) based on the operation by the player, and is in a state of being maintained in such a sword extraction state. Occasionally, a production will be performed during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed between the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation time effect on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body at that time. By confirming the operating state of the 5001, it becomes possible to remember the actual feeling that the operation-time effect caused by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 side is being executed.

Then, after the operation-time effect (FIGS. 242 (d) and (f)) is performed in this way, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 242 (e). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side is available. Even if it is executed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not operated (sword delivery position (sword delivery state)) when a predetermined time has elapsed (at a stage before the reach effect is started). It will be controlled to return to. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decorative member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than until the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 241 and 242, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001) is used. Regardless of whether 5001) is allowed to accept the effect or not, the common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) effect is started. While the operation-related effect is being executed, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect. Since the operation button 410 can receive the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can receive the effect respectively. It will be possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping it secret.

In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, whether a specific operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can accept the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is the effect. Regardless of whether the operation button 410 can be accepted or not, when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is allowed to receive the production, the sword decoration body 5001 is allowed to receive the production. You will be able to be confused as if it weren't there. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to urge the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the effect with a relatively high expectation is performed when the effect is received. It is expected that when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it will be interesting to know which operation means should be operated.

In addition, when the operation means of the side that cannot accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is exhausted by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the above operation is performed. Although the effect reception required for executing the effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection of the operation itself is to be performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection itself. Control may be performed to end the effect acceptance period for the means at that time. With such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), the same production (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display production, etc.) is performed between the operation operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although it is made to be executed, these operation-time effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation-time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect-time effect performed by the operation-time effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 may emit light. , A unique production sound is generated, etc.), it becomes possible to more appropriately improve the game entertainment when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received.

Further, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other effect mode. The production reception period is not set when the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) and the production reception period related to the occurrence of the other production mode is not set. The effect acceptance period for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001 is used, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration body 5001, the operation button 410) is set. In either case, when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (c), it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect. That is, in this case, when there is an operation for the first operation means while the effect acceptance period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, While another effect mode is executed as an operation-time effect, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed and the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (No. 1). When there is an operation for the first operation means (when the effect reception period for the operation means 2 is set), another effect mode is not executed as the effect at the time of operation, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be produced. In short, when the effect acceptance period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect acceptance period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. It will be set for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when another effect mode appears as the operation time effect, the second operation mode is not made to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation time effect on the second operation means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as an effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed is the situation where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used. The first situation where only the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted for the production, the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, and the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. It is set so that both the operation and the operation for the above correspond to one of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is displayed when the effect reception is performed, whereas in the third situation, the operation time is different from that of the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or the above-mentioned other effect mode (different from the operation-time effect of the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-mentioned production example, the above-mentioned third situation is not always necessary.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-mentioned effect example is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied by control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), the player does not perform the operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (d). It may be possible to execute the control to operate the operation button 410 on the other side. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, regarding the control to operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position) at an earlier stage. It is desirable to end the operating state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 243 to 246 are executed as an effect showing the process of the specific operation-related effect until either the first effect result or the second effect result appears. It is suggested that when the first effect result appears as a result of the above, an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the effect example (second effect mode) which suggests that the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs.

In FIG. 243 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 243 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 243 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is simultaneously displayed in the image, and the state in which the lightning bolt image IZ acts on those images BTG and SYG is depicted. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword It is suggested that the operation for any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 243 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b) is advanced, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed as effects. An effect is performed in which the other party is pushed out of the display area by pushing each other in the display area of the device 1600.

That is, in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode), "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG press each other, and these images are pressed. It is executed as an effect such as "Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area", and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in FIGS. 243 (b) and 243 (c) is either "the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001". Even if it occurs, it corresponds to a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 243 (c) depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains in the display area in a predominant situation, and the figure on the right side shows a sword decoration image SYG. It depicts how the situation is predominant to remain in the territory. In a specific operation-related production, the situation of such inferiority / superiority changes from moment to moment with the passage of time.

FIG. 244 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c). Is being performed (first production result). When the content of the effect is advanced, the period for accepting the effect for the sword decoration body 5001 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 244 (d)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the effect (the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays (character display such as "press" and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is in a state where the effect reception is possible (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, the operation of the operation button 410 is urged by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 to the light emitting state.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is advanced through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c), etc.). In some cases, the production progresses (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 243 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without undergoing a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the expectation for granting benefits is higher than that.

Further, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 244 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The rate at which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect (FIG. 244 (d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed without going through It is desirable to make it high. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the effectary delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

In FIG. 244 (e), as a result of performing an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operating means while the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. It depicts how the production is being performed during operation.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e) is the same as that of FIG. 242 (d). That is, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is placed in the first position and the second position according to the effect reception. The same applies to the fact that control for reciprocating operation between the position and the position (control for setting the operating state) can be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed is provided, and one of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception. Then, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Then, after such an operation-time effect (FIG. 244 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 244 (f). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, the reach effect is started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation time effect is executed. The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-operated state (sword delivery state)) at the stage prior to that. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decorative member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than until the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 245 (g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is in the display area. A production that depicts the remaining state is being performed (second production result). When the content of the effect is advanced, the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 245 (g)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be accepted for the production (the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs) among the plurality of operation means. ..

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display prompting the operation (a character display such as "sword pull out" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is possible to receive the effect (during the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001) among the plurality of operation means. In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit having the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be in the light emitting state) is in the light emitting state. By doing so, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is urged.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is advanced through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c), etc.). In some cases, the production progresses (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 243 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without undergoing a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than in the case, and the expectation for granting benefits is lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed after a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

In FIG. 245 (h), as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among a plurality of operating means while the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is being performed, an effect reception is performed and the operation is performed. It is a depiction of how the production is being performed during operation.

The operation-time effect shown in FIG. 245 (h) is basically the same as the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. In 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, a production mode such as "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation, is displayed according to the production reception, but it is suggested that the expectation is relatively low. "Chance !!" may be displayed. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception. By doing so, it may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), the effect mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes based on the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 (). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 222 to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form), and the degree of expectation for granting benefits such as a big hit depends on which of these modes appears. The height is suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 245 (i), even if the operation-time effect (FIG. 245 (h)) is terminated and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position). The sword ornament 5001 is not returned to the sword-delivered state, but is kept in the sword-drawn state. That is, in this production example, although the illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is kept in the sword-drawn state, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword delivery state (during the period when the reach production is performed, etc.). The operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and in that case, the operation time effect according to the operation to the sword delivery state can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is given an operation opportunity in two stages, and the first stage operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) and the second stage operation. Since the effect at the time of operation is performed according to each operation (operation to the sword delivery state), not only when the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is being operated, but also the first stage. It is expected that the game interest for the operation will be maintained favorably even during the non-operation period from the operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) to the second stage operation (operation to the sword delivery state). Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in opposite directions). Further, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation are different from each other.

Further, when the operation-time effect (FIG. 245 (h)) corresponding to the first stage operation is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the sword-drawn state, and is not maintained in the sword-drawn state. In that case, it is desirable not to give the operation opportunity of the second stage. Whether to maintain the sword decoration 5001 at the position (sword-drawn state) where the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state) can be given in the operation-time production according to the first-stage operation. It may be executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not. That is, when the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state and is returned to the sword-delivered state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state). It is clear that it will be. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

If the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-pulled state as a result of performing the operation-time effect (FIG. 245 (h)) according to the first stage operation, when a predetermined time has elapsed (reach effect). The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword delivery state)) before the start of the sword decoration body 5001. However, in this case, the operating state (reciprocating) of the sword decorative body 5001 is at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation (maintenance in the state of pulling out the sword). Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than until the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 246 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 244 (d). The effect of describing the state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) or the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g). Either the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) or the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears. It is said that which effect content appears is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), unlike the case of the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the effect performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c)). (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning bolt image IZ may cause some change in the button image BTG.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), the instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as "press" or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed, which is also shown in FIG. 244 (d). ) Is different from the case of the production shown in. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the effect acceptance period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes recognizable that there is.

In FIG. 246 (k), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in the mist MY, and even the outline description thereof is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), all the effect elements (button image BTG) suggesting that the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted are removed. Therefore, although it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) that the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted, such an effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) appears. As a result, it becomes possible to raise a suspicion as to whether or not the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

Even in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitely shown which of the plurality of operating means the production acceptance period will occur is reduced. It suggests that it is.

In FIG. 246 (i), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production that depicts the appearance of the sword is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, it is suggested that the outer shape of the mist MY may cause a production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410. You will be able to.

Further, also in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) from FIG. 246 (k), and until it is definitively shown which of the plurality of operating means the effect acceptance period occurs. It suggests that the remaining time of is even less.

Then, in this production example (second production mode), when the production shown in FIG. 246 (i) is further advanced and the mist MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 245 is displayed. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even in the case of this (FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 246 (j)), there is a possibility that the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, so that the game entertainment should be maintained. Will be able to.

In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 246 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning bolt image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 is achieved. It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and this will also enable the maintenance of the game entertainment.

In this effect example (second effect mode), the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears (FIG. 246 (k)), and further. When the production is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 245 (g) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that it is a production that suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is prevented from necessarily approaching the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 246 (j) and 246 (k) also hides which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, even in the effect situation shown in FIG. 245 (h) in the above-mentioned effect example (second effect mode) after providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, FIG. 244 (e) Similar to the effect situation shown in the above, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be enabled. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 247 to 250 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but are views showing an effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. Is.

In FIG. 247 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 247 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 247 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. This suggests that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be ready for production.

In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and these operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated respectively. As a result, it is easy to make it possible for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 to be able to receive the effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. I try to make it recognizable. Here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 from the initial position to the operation position, but compared to the case where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated to the operation positions when the operation opportunity is given. I try to operate each at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, it is an operation means in which time is still left until the effect reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the effect reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed. Regardless of this, each of these operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left before the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change ends, the game entertainment for those operations can be enjoyed. It will be possible to maintain it suitably.

Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is produced by each operation (FIG. 247 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the effect display in the effect display device 1600. After the start, basically the same production progress as the above-mentioned second production mode is made.

For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 247 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed except that the button image BTG corresponds to the “movable operation button 410”. , The production content is as described with reference to FIG. 243 (b).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated from the initial positions (positions when not driven), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are at positions different from the initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. In addition, it is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operating position when the operating opportunity is given.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is immediately given without the operation-related effect, but it is movable. When the operation means is adopted, even if such an operation-related effect is finally completed, it is necessary to operate the operation means on the side where the effect can be accepted to at least the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related production will be further delayed by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay will reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period has occurred is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operation means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the extension of the operation-related production. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operating state at a position different from the operation position, so that the production reception period is in the operating state. It will be possible to easily recognize that this itself has not occurred yet.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "movable operation button". Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to "410", the production content is as described with reference to FIG. 243 (c). However, even in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

In the effect shown in FIGS. 247 (b) and 247 (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 show an aspect when they are in the initial position (non-driven position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, by intentionally making the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, their matching will be achieved in the near future. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect to be performed (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed, or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

Further, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "at the operation position". Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 244 (d).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the operation button 410 is in the state of being operated at the operation position, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operating position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Become so.

As the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), first of all, "a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed". After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character display such as "press" or effect) for generating an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 to prompt the operation is performed. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 will be different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the deviation of those modes will soon be filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 244 (e) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state of being returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position). Moreover, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

After such an operation-time effect (FIG. 248 (f)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 248 (g). Also as described with reference to FIG. 244 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is performed, the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is an operation of the sword decoration body 5001. Except that the instruction content regarding the above is "pushed in" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", the production as explained with reference to FIG. 245 (g). It is the content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in an operating state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in an operating state. That is, in this case, since the sword decoration body 5001 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Will be done.

As the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), "a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode of moving to the operation position)". First, after performing the display effect, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character such as "push"" that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the sword at the time of display is displayed. The decorative image SYG will be different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes can be prevented. It will be possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be filled (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 245 (h) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. The sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of being returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an operation-time effect (FIG. 249 (i)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 249 (j). Is as described with reference to FIG. 244 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 246 (j).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are in the initial positions (respectively). It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operating position. It is suggested that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and the possibility that the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred still remains even by setting such an operation state. You will be able to do it.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k), the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (k) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operation at different positions.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (l) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operation at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the operating position, not to the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the initial position.

When the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that it is a production that suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is prevented from necessarily approaching the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 250 (k) and 250 (l) also hides which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In this effect example (third effect mode), the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

In each of the above-mentioned effect modes and other examples thereof, when "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, it is basic. Is given an operation opportunity only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the operation time effect on the button side is performed. Become. Further, when the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" appears as a production result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. Of the body 5001, the operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received, the operation operation effect on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the operation-time effect on the button side, success effect (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and failure effect (do not operate the specific decorative member SDY) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit judgment. While it is supposed to make either one appear, even in the operation time production on the sword character side, success production (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and failure production based on the result of the production lottery according to the big hit judgment. (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is to appear, and the contents of their production are the same. Therefore, when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the operation operation effect on the button side and the operation operation effect on the sword accessory side, in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates, the effect on the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600 is the same as each other. It may be the content.

Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to the specific operation-related effect, it is decided to perform an effect as to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the result is used. On the other hand, an operation opportunity is given. However, there are cases where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the effect content that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means regardless of which effect result appears, such as pushing each other with each other. It may be.

For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state is brought into the sword-drawn state, or a mode in which the sword-decorated body 5001 in the sword-drawn state is brought into the sword-delivered state) for one operating means. It is possible to give an effect as to whether or not the operation opportunity is given by (operation), and the operation opportunity may be given to the operation means in the mode according to the result. In this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in a state different from the sword-delivered state and the sword-drawn state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state or the sword-drawn state when the effect result of making the sword is shown.

In addition, when the symbol variation in the pending state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the symbol variation is in the pending state (digested before this). It is also possible to perform the effect suggested from (within the execution period of the symbol change). According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given only to one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is not given are provided. For both, it will be possible to sustain the game interest related to operation for a longer period of time. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol change in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in the pending state (within the execution period of the symbol change digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is used. It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

In the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as a specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button image BTG,) corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) are used. Although it was decided to display the sword decoration image SYG), these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 may occur after that. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the production reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001, those operations are performed until the production reception period occurs. It will be possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period will occur. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and sword decoration. An effect image different from any of the image SYGs may be made to appear as a specific operation-related effect without appearing.

However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed at the same time is adopted while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is completed. Either BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of those operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. By executing the specific image (for example, lightning bolt image IZ, etc.) as the effect content, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs for the specific operation-related effect. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect can be executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one of two rocks, and when a lightning bolt falls on one side of the rock, a button image BTG appears from inside the rock, and the other side. By making the sword decoration image SYG appear from the rock when a lightning bolt falls on the rock on the side, it is possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 245 (g). .. Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect can be executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one rock, and when the lightning bolt falls on the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Therefore, it is also possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 245 (g). In short, it is desirable to advance the production as the production content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned second and third production modes, and in another example thereof, there are specific cases where the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same time from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of the effects) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. Further, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, a plurality of production modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and the effect reception period during which the specific effect (operation-time effect) can be generated depends on which of these effect modes the effect is performed. The ratio set for the specific operating means among the plurality of operating means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in other examples thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation with respect to the operation means on the side shown in the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operating means on the side (such as FIG. 244), control is performed to return the operating means on the side that has not been operated to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the time when the operation was performed. You may do it. However, it is not based on the time when the operation is performed, and depending on which timing of the production reception period the operation is performed, from the operation of the operation means on the side not operated to the end of the operation. It is desirable to make the time lengths different.

That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated and the remaining time of the effect acceptance period is short, the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has a conflict as to whether to operate the operation means on the side not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation during the production reception period (depending on the high possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that did not operate is operated and then the operation is terminated. Time length up to ("Even if the operation means on the side shown in the specific operation-related effect is operated, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect may have been executed." By making the length of time that appeals to the player different), it becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

Further, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect acceptance period ends. May be made to work.

Further, between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.), the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. A predetermined effect suggesting the ratio at which the effect image (sword decorative image SYG) is displayed may be performed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body (here, a specific movable body) that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. , The specific movable body can be operated more reliably based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed by operating the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY). Desirable to enable.

In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect result between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.). An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is intentionally generated only on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means. As a result, it becomes possible to create a special effect mode as if the effect was shown and the effect was completed even though the effect was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect was performed. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby during the period. In addition, when an operation for one side of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with high expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the degree of expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game interest when the player understands that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. ..

Further, when the effect reception period is intentionally generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means while the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects related to the plurality of operation means are being performed, the effect acceptance period is within the effect acceptance period. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, for example). Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) appears as a result of the effect, the expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the effectability as the specific operation-related effect between the time when the effect is started and the time when the effect result is shown. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side with a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is granted more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, the production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation is performed before. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

However, even if it is set to the automatic button effect state described later, the effect acceptance period is only for the operation button 410 of those operation means while a specific operation-related effect is being performed. In the case of generating the above-mentioned special operation effect, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed (so that the automatic button function does not function) unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period. After that, even if the effect acceptance period for any of the above-mentioned plurality of operation means occurs as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect acceptance period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed (so that the automatic button function functions) without doing so. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function functions, and it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be expected to suppress the decrease in.

It should be noted that the setting change related to the on / off of the automatic button effect state can be changed not only during the period when the symbol change is not executed but also during the period when the symbol change is executed by operating the operation button 410, for example. It is desirable to be. For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated when the automatic button effect state is off, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the automatic button can be changed. When the effect state is on, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, the operation time effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the automatic button effect state is set. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it may be desirable to generate an operation effect by an operation by a player while maintaining the automatic button effect state on, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. During the effect reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, when the operation for the operation button 410 as well as the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled and the operation is performed for the other operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state to cause a change in the effect being executed. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may be different depending on whether the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as a result of the effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or a sword decoration body 5001 is imitated. It was decided to give an operation opportunity corresponding to the displayed sword decoration image SYG, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (first display mode and second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) is given to the operation button 410. If a period) is given and an operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword decoration body 5001 when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are used. Any display content may be adopted.

For example, in the above-mentioned second and third production modes, the production image CG (first) shown in FIG. 251 (a) is replaced with the production image shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 248 (e). Display mode) is displayed, and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b) is displayed instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 245 (g) and 249 (h). May be good. According to such a configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the background image other than that (the part displayed before the specific operation-related effect is started). Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (almost the entire effect in the display area). Since it can be replaced), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) in the display area shown in FIGS. 244 (d), 245 (g), 248 (e), and 249 (h). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the granting of operation opportunities is performed using almost the entire display area (until other effect images such as the background part where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). By doing so, it is expected that the game will be improved in terms of operation.

In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (a), the first display mode has a shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is possessed. The second character is displayed so as to implicitly suggest which operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 itself. , It is desirable to display as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape and a part of the design of the operation means.

Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area as described above, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG are used. It may also be performed with an effect suggesting a different degree of expectation depending on which of (second display modes) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Further, a plurality of effect modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), and it depends on which of these effect modes is displayed. It may suggest the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. You may do it.

Further, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (preferably, it is desirable that the effect is relatively high). When the operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect, is executed) (preferably, the effect situation has a relatively low expectation). It may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). If it is displayed, the effect acceptance period is applied not only to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, but also to another operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) that does not correspond to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. In the production situation where the expectation is relatively high, it becomes possible to give a different kind of fun to the operation than when the button image BTG appears, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment. Another operating means may be an operating means different from that of the sword decoration body 5001.

In addition, when a button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively It is desirable to suggest that the production situation has a higher degree of expectation than when the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, when the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. When 410) is operated, the effect acceptance period for another operation means that is occurring at the same time is also terminated so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation for the operation means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the effect acceptance period for the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means may be terminated so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated, and the operation is performed. Even though an operation means different from the means is operated, the operation time effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means (operation button 410) are operated may be executed.

If a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even if an effect reception period occurs for the operation means of, the same operation time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed within the effect reception period without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to make it work (make the automatic button function work). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing the specific operation-related effect when the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is used. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means different from the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is provided even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation effect as when the operation is performed is executed, and the special operation effect that may appear only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is executed is not executed.

However, during the effect reception period, another effect before the specific timing at which the operation-time effect (effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) will appear by the above-mentioned automatic button function is different. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and it is assumed that a specific timing has arrived. However, it is desirable that the effect during operation (the effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the effect acceptance period, but the automatic button effect state is continued in the on state even after the effect acceptance period ends. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then each of the above-described effects (operation-time effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later that is not the specific operation-related effect is executed). When the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed). In addition to the operation means corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (sword decoration body 5001), another operation means not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (for example, the operation button 410) is also used to generate the effect acceptance period. It becomes.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes, and in another example thereof, the "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" or the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is performed. When any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" is displayed, and when the effect is received by the operation means on the displayed side, it is relative. The first operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggesting that the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make one of the second operation-time effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate). That is, in this case, when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content suggesting the above, will be executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period generated after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (first). Display mode) is displayed, and when the effect is executed based on the effect reception for the operation button 410, and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the effect reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when it was executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side with a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the fact that the effect has been accepted, the effect image (sword decoration) on the side with relatively high expectations as a result of the effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. Compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, there is no demerit in the production result, so that the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned timer effect (FIG. 118), it is possible to set "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the effect target (one of the above-mentioned plurality of effect modes targeted by the timer). That is, in the timer effect for the effect of "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means", when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. This makes it possible to enjoy the production during operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operating means" prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when the operation for the operating means is performed, the effect result is advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. Allow any of the unfavorable production results to appear. However, when the "operation opportunity for the operating means" is given as the effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result advantageous to the player appears is higher than the case where the effect target of the timer effect is not set. It is more desirable to be. The ratio may be 100%.

In this regard, when an effect pattern for executing a timer effect for the effect of "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001)" appears, the "operation opportunity for the operation means" which is the effect target appears. A specific operation-related effect using "grant" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decorative image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears is executed.

According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when it is played.

However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously advanced to just before that for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001). However, it is difficult to understand which production should be watched, and there is a concern that the attention will be distracted and the game entertainment will be reduced.

Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. 252. , Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the "specific operation-related effect" is set to the unexecuted state, and the count value is set. It is desirable to start the production of the "specific operation-related effect" after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0").

FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001). The following timer effect corresponds to the above-mentioned notice side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processes according to the timer effect.

In FIG. 252 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 252 (b) shows an effect in which the timer effect is started (here, a countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 252 (a) is being executed. It shows the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 252 (b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. There is.

That is, in the timer effect related to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (1), while it remains unclear which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count "0") is reached so that it is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" as the count value is displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be produced. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode). A specific operation-related effect as to which of the above is displayed will be executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), those effects are sometimes performed. Since it is possible to avoid overlapping in a series, it becomes possible to enjoy each different production.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable because it cannot be recognized whether it was done as a game. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), between the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) and the time when a specific operation-related effect is started. An effect that suggests the effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) that the timer effect is intended for is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first displays “sword”. This suggests that the timer production was intended to "provide an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration body 5001".

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword delivery). In the production situation where the player recognizes that the operation opportunity is given by "", the production of "specific operation-related production" will be started, so that the game entertainment can be improved. become. When the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the count display (count "0") is displayed when the effect display device 1600 displays "sword". It may be displayed continuously.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the sword decoration body 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, the count is “0”). It is designed to perform reciprocating movements in the vertical direction), and this also means that "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration body 5001" is the target of the timer effect. I try to suggest it.

It should be noted that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is counted not only when the timer effect targets "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001" but also when another effect is the production target. It may be done when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 does not function as an effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is intended for, but functions as an effect suggesting that the count display has become 0. Will be. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the production to be the production target is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is said that the effect that suggests the type of effect is being executed at the same time as or before the start of the effect that suggests the type of effect, and that the effect that suggests the type of effect that the timer effect is targeting is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to be done.

FIG. 252 (d) shows an effect situation in which the “specific operation-related effect” is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type for which the timer effect is the effect target is hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is also in a finished state. However, it is important to execute the effect suggesting the type of effect that the timer effect is intended for, and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

Then, after the "specific operation-related production" is started in this way, the production progresses in the order of FIGS. 252 (e) to 252 (h), and the contents of these productions are described in FIG. 243 (c). ), FIGS. 245 (g) to (i), or FIGS. 247 (d) and 249 (h) to (j), which are substantially the same as those described above, and details thereof will be omitted.

As the timer effect performed in connection with the specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 252 or the timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made feasible. That is, in another timer effect, the point that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 252, but the specific operation-related effect is the effect. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, "0") according to the start timing (strictly, a little earlier than this), and the effect is continued even after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege is given (the second display mode). Expectations for (big hit) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but when the effect situation in which the effect is advanced at the same time appears, the specific operation-related effect is produced. Regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, the effect value is the same (the degree of expectation for the privilege grant (big hit) is the same. Same). That is, in this case, since the directability of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously advanced, any effect is produced. It will be possible to avoid the situation where the attention is distracted due to the inability to understand whether to pay attention to the timer. However, in order to improve the entertainment of the game, if a production pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect appear at the same time appears, a privilege will be granted as compared with the case where the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252 appears. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first suggests the type of the effect target (display (here, the count is “0”). Although "sword delivery") is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect object as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is targeted for the timer among a plurality of effects that can be targeted for the timer, the display suggesting which effect is the target of the timer effect may not be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, prior to giving an operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, the operation opportunity is given to any of the operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether or not it would be granted. However, the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production acceptance period). Does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 (prior to the production reception period). A production pattern such as a second precursor effect may appear. When performing these precursory effects (first precursory effect, second precursory effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the said. It is desirable to lower the expectation for granting benefits when a production appears, in order to enhance the game entertainment when a specific operation-related production is performed.

Here, as the precursor effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears, for example, fog is generated. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of being stuck. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer, behind the specific image) that is difficult to see due to overlapping with the specific image. After that, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (increasing the transmittance, reducing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.). It can be executed as an effect to be exposed to the sun. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursory effect will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations for granting a privilege (big hit), As the precursory effect that the button image BTG is gradually exposed progresses, it becomes possible to have an interest in which display mode the button image BTG appears.

It should be noted that the first precursor effect that appears when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration is given. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. It is important that each is executed as a different production content. Further, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect is different.

Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" in the sense that "when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, the effect is performed as an effect related to the addition of the operation opportunity". It can be said that it is a higher-level concept including. As for the precursory effect, including the "specific operation-related effect", as described below with reference to FIG. 253, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursory effect is performed in any of the effect modes. By suggesting how long the production reception period that occurs in response to the precursory effect is, depending on what was done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the precursory effect is performed. It is more desirable to try.

FIG. 253 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect content for each of the types of the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (precursor effect A), the precursor effect A is started when the first predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect When A is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T1 that you have will occur.

In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect A. ) Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T1, the above-mentioned operation-time effect (for example, FIGS. 242 (d), (f)) is performed based on the effect reception. , FIG. 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (b) (precursor effect B1), when the second predetermined time has elapsed, not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. Precursor production B1 is being started. This precursor effect B1 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) when an operation opportunity is given (specific operation). When the precursor effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is now occurring.

In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1. Will be done. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for a specific operating means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation time effect different from the above-mentioned operation time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process for terminating the period T2 at that time is performed.

In this respect, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is the effect acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect A, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and 253 (b). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having a time length different from that of T1 (here, a short time length). This suggests how long the effect reception period generated in response to the precursor effect is, depending on which mode (precursor effect A, precursor effect B1) the precursor effect is performed. It becomes possible to play a game, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste when the precursory effect is performed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (c) (precursor effect B2), the precursor effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation. Like the precursor effect B1, this precursor effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to the time when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410). (Those that are not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect acceptance period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 Production reception period) T3 is to be generated.

Even in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (a character display such as "press") for prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period are displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for a specific operating means within the effect reception period (valid period) T3, the operation time effect different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and a process of terminating the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this respect, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor effect B2 is the effect acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect A as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and 253 (c). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even though the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low expectation for granting a privilege (big hit) is executed, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. Since it is suggested that a long production reception period (valid period) T3 will occur, a production situation will be created as if a specific operation-related production was performed, and the precursor production B2 It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment when it is performed. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege differs between when the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the effect acceptance period (valid period) T3 occurs.

It should be noted that the precursory effects B1 and B2 are specified by making the same effect mode appear from the start of the effect until the timing in the middle of the effect, and making a different effect mode appear after the timing has elapsed. The operation means of the above may be provided with a color rendering property as to whether to generate the effect reception period (valid period) T2 or the effect acceptance period (valid period) T3. However, it is not always necessary to have such a directing property, and as the timing at which the precursory effects B1 and B2 are started, the effect is started when a different time elapses from the start of the symbol change. Alternatively, the precursor effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths from each other.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (precursor effect C), the precursor effect C is started when the third predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect is performed. When C is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (precursor effect C), when the precursor effect C is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T4 that you have will occur.

Even in the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (character display such as "press" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect C is displayed. ) Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T4, the above-mentioned operation-time effect (for example, FIGS. 242 (d), (f)) is performed based on the effect reception. , FIG. 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. It is supposed to be done.

In this respect, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor effect C is the effect acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect A, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and 253 (d). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect". Since it is suggested that a production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as that of the precursor production A will occur, the game entertainment interest when the precursor production C is performed is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 253, the effect acceptance period is associated with the types of precursor effects A, B1, B2, and C by associating the lengths of the effect acceptance period (valid period) with each other in a one-to-one relationship. I tried to suggest the length of (validity period). However, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2, etc.) having a predetermined time for each type of precursor production to be different, the production reception period (valid period) ) May be suggested.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes, and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is subjected to. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operating means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operating means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 is in the state of being operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as the state of being operated in the operation position in accordance with this, and FIG. 249. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operating position (sword withdrawal state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as the state in which the sword decoration image SYG is operated in the operation position (sword withdrawal state). Has been done.

However, a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) that imitates the appearance. If this happens, the range of the effect will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the effect even though a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is being performed, and the game interest will decline. I am concerned.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is described below with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255. Regarding BTG), it is desirable not to necessarily express the state of the specific operating means at that time as it is, but to display it as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 254 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the precursor effect that is not the specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect content when the precursor effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

First, FIGS. 254 (a) to 254 (c) show the contents of an effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal game state, the effect that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 254 (a), it corresponds only to the sword decoration body 5001 side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the "specific operation-related production". Assuming that the precursory effect is executed, it becomes recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity. In addition, in the precursor effect (the same applies to the precursor effect in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is to be given soon is made, an effect image imitating the operation means. Does not necessarily have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity from the time when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

In the precursory effect shown in FIG. 254 (a), the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation and the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content as to which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity, the sword decoration image SYG, which has a low expectation as the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image SYG of the degree of expectation. Which of the tall sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

FIG. 254 (b) shows the final production result of the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively high-expected production situation. It will be suggested that there will be a production reception period for the sword. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (b), the final effect suggesting that the sword decorative image SYGb wearing a red aura does not change to another effect image (sword decorative image SYGa, etc.) is displayed. ..

FIG. 254 (c) shows an example of an effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, an instruction display (“push-in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate is shown. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Further, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state. I try to change the state to the state. When the production reception is performed within the production reception period, the production at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the production reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword delivery state. Be maintained. In addition, a process is performed to end the effect reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when the precursory effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, here). , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (sword removal state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image imitating the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) and the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001) Are all in a state of being stopped at a predetermined position.

On the other hand, FIGS. 254 (d) to 254 (g) show the contents of the effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal game state, the effect that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 254 (d), assuming that the precursory production as the "specific operation-related production" is started, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is used. It will be recognizable that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the crab.

FIG. 254 (e) shows an effect situation in which the precursor effect as a “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 as a production result of the "specific operation-related production". Has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (e), the final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG does not change to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

FIG. 254 (f) shows an example of an effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, an instruction display (“push-in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate is shown. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Further, when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword removal state.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (f) and 254 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-drawn state during the effect reception period (sword decoration image SYG). The sword decoration body 5001 is designed to slowly and continuously perform upward displacement until the end of the production reception period, and is in a different state from each other. I am trying to do it.

In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration body 5001, the production reception will be performed when the operation to the operation target accessory 141 is performed to the sword delivery state. A predetermined operation-time effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-delivered state. In addition, a process is performed to end the effect reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when the production acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related production, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is used for the production. On the other hand, the other side does not work and can play the role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 254 (f) and 254 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period, but the sword is not limited to this. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated to stop the sword decoration body 5001.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are used in the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (c)) that occurs without going through a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stopped state, during the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. On the other side, this is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be expanded, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the operation is performed. While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is set to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

Either the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect of determining which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 appears, any one of them. When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode having a relatively high expectation or a display mode having a relatively low expectation. It will be possible to further provide the directing effect of. The method may be appropriately adopted in each of the above-mentioned production modes and other examples thereof, in addition to the production example of FIG. 254.

Then, in order to give such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is produced as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it can be recognized or appeared, and it is unknown whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is shown. Make the display state recognizable) appear as the production progresses. After that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side appearing as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white outline of the effect image imitating the operation means). It is desirable to release the state so that the color can be confirmed) in sequence as the production progresses. Further, when the button image BTG is displayed after such an effect progress, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation under predetermined conditions (for example, an operating means). After making the imitated effect image clear, etc.), the button image BTG is further hidden, and it is recognizable that the sword decoration image SYG appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Yes, and it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG has high expectations (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). It may be possible to generate an effect pattern that further advances the effect. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white state of the sword decorative image SYG). To make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), it is higher than the display mode on the low expectation side (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

FIGS. 255 (a) to 255 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 254 (d) to (g) as an effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 255 (a), the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started, but the precursor effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. The first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and the second character holding the sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001). It is depicted that they are facing each other, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am doing it.

FIG. 255 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this effect situation, the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (sword decoration) is not displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. The effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 255 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 251 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed), and is specific. While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (face-to-face between characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect started) are the relevant. It is suddenly replaced with an effect image (display image shown in FIG. 255 (b)) as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

FIGS. 255 (c) to 255 (e) show an example of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 255 (c). An instruction display (a character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the sword decoration body 5001 to operate.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 255 (c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts the operation from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 255 (d), the sword decoration body 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state only after a relatively short time has elapsed from the start of the effect reception period. It is designed to do. After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (e), the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in a sword-pulled state at least until the end of the production reception period, unless the player operates it. (Operation from the sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state) will be waited for.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 255 (c) to 255 (e), the movement (swing in the rotation direction) is completely different from the movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration body 5001. In the lowering motion), the second character is depicted as swinging down the sword decoration image SYG, and even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, the sword decoration image SYG continues. It is designed to operate. The sword decoration image SYG related to this production example loops a series of displays from the start (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) of the swing-down operation within the production reception period. It is designed to be repeated by processing.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the loop processing, and the display change progresses by the amount according to the passage of time. Further, the sword decoration body 5001 is also brought into a sword-pulled state while a series of displays from the start (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) of the swing-down operation is performed. However, even if the loop processing is performed, it will be maintained in the sword-drawn state without being affected by it. In addition, when the operation to the operation target accessory 141 is performed to the sword-delivered state within the production reception period, the production reception is performed, and the predetermined operation time production is performed based on the production reception, and the above-mentioned The loop processing is completed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-delivered state. In addition, a process is performed to end the effect reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursory effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect acceptance period. The movement modes (movements that play a role in accurately transmitting the current situation (movements until moving to the operation position), loop movements used for the production) are different from each other, and the movements of the sword decoration body 5001 are completed. Even after that, the sword decoration image SYG will continue its operation without ending. As a result, when the effect acceptance period (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) that occurs after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is continued until after the effect acceptance period occurs ( It will be possible to expand the range of the production, such as making it feasible by continuing the background), and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 255, the effect content (display in which the characters face each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 255 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is performed. The effect (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) is executed when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the background image and the background image. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) that imitate the operation means are specified differently from each other under the display of the dedicated background (full moon). Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image) and the effect, it is possible to improve the effectability during the effect reception period. In this sense, even in the precursory effect, it is possible to perform the effect using at least one of the effect image (sword decorative image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a dramatic connection between them to further improve the directing performance. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes having different expectations for granting benefits, and may be displayed by any of the display modes.

In addition, in the precursory production as a specific operation-related production or the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as those productions, and the production reception is performed according to which of the production modes appears. It is also possible to suggest whether or not a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time effect when the effect is received during the period. The background image that appears when the precursory effect is performed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 255, when a precursor production as a specific operation-related production is performed, the production reception is performed by changing both the production content and the background image appearing in the precursor production. It was decided to execute the production within the period, but when the above-mentioned precursor production that is not a specific operation-related production is performed, both the production content and the background image that appeared in the precursor production are changed. It is also possible to execute the production when the production reception period occurs in.

In the production example shown in FIG. 255, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decoration body 5001 started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately communicating the current situation). The performed action may be completed before the production reception period occurs), and then the stopped state may be maintained.

Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the background image may be changed depending on whether the background image is changed when the effect acceptance period occurs or the background image is changed. It may be possible that the display to be displayed may not be performed. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period occurs, the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period occurs. Is desirable.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes, and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the production reception is performed, it is decided to operate the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) as an operation operation based on the production reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 242 (d), 244 (e), and 245 (h), the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button) is used as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. By making 410) also operate, it is possible to improve the effectability of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed. In this way, in order to improve the effectability of the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed depends on the result of the effect. Then, the production situation at the time of success in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side is movable. While the effect situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the operation-time effect performed without going through a specific operation-related effect (for example, a specific operation-related effect). In the operation-time effect after the precursor effect that is not an operation-related effect), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side depends on the result of the effect. It is possible to show the production situation at the time of success when only operates, or to show the production situation at the time of failure when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and the specific operation-related effect according to another example thereof, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the button is added with the princess character (specific effect mode). The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. If the value is set to be high, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific production mode) may be applied to the sword decorative image SYG as shown in FIG. 256 (b). In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific production mode, it is desirable that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

Further, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (figure) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed). 256 (a)) and the second effect pattern (FIG. 256 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, the expectation for granting the privilege is set to be the same when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest in whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, as well as the button image BTG and the sword. Regardless of which of the decorative image SYG appears, it becomes possible to provide completely different fun such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 256 (c), when the specific effect mode is in the stage where the effect result (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) of the specific operation-related effect has not yet appeared. (For example, from the time when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG appears is in the stage of being performed, a specific effect mode (displayed by the princess character). The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (same degree of expectation). That is, in this case, since the color rendering of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it is said that "a precursory effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide a completely different color rendering.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001 according to each of the above-mentioned production modes and other examples thereof, the sword portion (handle portion 5012, sword blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the operation mode 1 (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 212, a second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated laterally. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode) together. Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit? The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of the above. Both the sword part (handle part 5012, sword blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are operably supported (operated) by one main body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3. Even if one side of the sword part (handle part 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in the state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). It is formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not possible. Since there is no change, there is a concern that there is a high possibility that an operation error will occur on the player side. In particular, regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image (and its effect) imitating the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001. When the instruction display prompting the operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side. Become. That is, in this case, as the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing moment by moment, let the player first perform the operation for correcting the operation error, and then let the player further perform the operation in the original correct mode. It is difficult to say that, even though a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectations has been performed, if the production reception period ends before the production reception is performed. , There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001, there are modes such as "movement in the vertical direction" by the sword part and "movement in the lateral direction" by the sheath part, and there are a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reversal relationship. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the proper side, and the production reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing the operation opportunity is increased.

Therefore, when performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit. , As will be described below with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed from the same state, it is desirable to ensure that the effect reception is performed properly and that the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

FIGS. 257 and 258 show an example of an effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure.

In FIG. 257 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 257 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 257 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b), the first effect imitating the first operation mode in which the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001 is operated from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state. The image OX and the second effect image TX that imitates the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so as to move laterally are included in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time to indicate that an operation opportunity by any of these operation modes will soon be available for production. In this respect, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX. In each of the second effect image TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

FIG. 257 (c) shows the development of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b), the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX and the effect image TX are pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect). When the result) appears, the effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

In the specific operation-related effect related to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 257 (c), when the first effect image OX is left in a predominant situation, a display such as "push" can be visually recognized. The display such as "slide" can be visually recognized when the second effect image TX is left in a predominant situation. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that they are erroneously recognized as prompting an operation at the timing at which the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

In FIG. 257 (d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 257 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. A production that depicts the state left in is performed (first production result). When the content of this effect is developed, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, the effect at the time of a specific operation (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the effect in the first operation mode is used. When the operation is performed, the effect reception is performed, and a specific operation time effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 257 (d), the effect acceptance period related to the specific operation-time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, in the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as "push" and the remaining time of the effect reception period are shown. Bar display) will be displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 operates from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

In FIG. 258 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. It shows the production situation when it is performed by the player.

That is, in this effect example, even if an effect reception period related to a specific operation-time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the first The operation detection of the operation mode 2 itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is assumed that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received in the effect is specified. (Here, "it is fine") is done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (f), the content of such a specific notification changes with the passage of time so that the player can regain his / her calmness (here, “calmly push in”). It has become like. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it becomes possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that even if the player side is in a panic state, this is preferable. It will be expected to be suppressed. As a result, even if the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of the second operation mode is operated by the first operation mode as it is, the player side is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize it.

In FIG. 258 (g), the operation on the proper side (first operation mode) is performed in the production status (effect reception period when the operation is in an erroneous operation state) of FIGS. 258 (e) and 258 (f). As a result, it is a depiction of how the effect reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is separated from the sword decoration body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration body 5001 is in a non-operated state (normal state) from the state of the second operation mode. ) Will be returned.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (state of operation error), since the production reception is properly performed, the deterioration of the game interest when the operation error occurs can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, it is decided to notify that the operation should be performed as it is without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation as it is without correcting the operation error) is performed. It is not always necessary to provide detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, since the player may be in a panic in a situation where an erroneous operation is performed, it may be counterproductive to notify a complicated content. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received, the notification is not displayed by a message but by an effect or only a sound. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed in which the specific notification is performed based on the operation and the effect during operation is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to fully expect that the operation will be switched to the proper operation.

On the other hand, depending on the player (particularly, an elderly player or the like), it is possible that a situation may occur in which the operation is mistakenly performed even before the production acceptance period occurs in the specific operation-related production. For example, when the operation instruction for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not given, but the operation for the second operation unit (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed, the first operation unit is performed. It is also assumed that a situation will occur in which a production acceptance period related to a specific operation production is generated only for the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side of the above, and in this case as well, how should the player operate it? There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize whether it is good or not.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation part (sheath part) is given the operation opportunity is performed, the first operation-related effect is performed. The second operation unit is in a situation where the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the operation unit side of 2 (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and 257 (c)). Even when the operation for is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received. The specific notification may be "a message display indicating that the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity is given soon while maintaining the operation state" may be displayed, or the display by a message may be used. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as a notification using only sound. In any case, by confirming the special situation that the specific notification is performed based on the operation and the effect at the time of operation is not performed even though the operation is performed, the operation is subsequently performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be a chance to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the left) while the operation for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being performed (for example, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the left). Even when the effect reception period related to the specific operation effect occurs only on the sword part) side, the operation for the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword decoration body). When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 is moved to the left), the effect reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Will be.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the same state, the production reception will be performed properly, so the operation error will occur before the production reception period occurs. Even when the problem occurs, the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed as to whether the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit or the second operation unit, the effect result is shown and the effect acceptance period. If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of the above-mentioned, the information will be mixed with the content to be notified (instruction display, etc.) within the production reception period, and the player will be more and more confused. There is a concern that it will end up. Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect in which the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, in the period until the effect result is displayed. , The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, the above-mentioned first period is performed. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operation unit of 1.

In the above-mentioned production example, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested when the specific notification is performed. Expectations may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the production mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 222). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in the above to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to one of the plurality of aspects described above, and the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may let it. Alternatively, when the effect acceptance period occurs after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of aspects described above.

In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display (character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration body 5001 The sword decoration image SYG imitating the above is displayed, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 222). It will be.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to give some fun to confirm the sword decoration image SYG. However, the production performance is poor during the production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance during the production reception period.

At this time, it is better to make the aspect expressed by the sword decoration image SYG have a higher expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 to improve the effectability during the production reception period. It is desirable to ensure that it is suitable. For example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. To display. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by confirming the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the production reception period will be suitably maintained.

In order to obtain such an effect, the number of production modes on the sword decoration image SYG side may be larger than the number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of production modes are prepared as the sword decoration body 5001, the plurality of production modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

However, if the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable as if they are falsely displayed. There is concern, which may reduce the interest in playing games. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the stage 0 to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 222). When the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, thereby displaying the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword. It is desirable to make the decorative image SYG different from each other. The special aspect may be an embodiment in which the outer shape of the sword decorative image SYG is further deformed and combined to change its outer shape, or the sword decorative image 5001 operates in a mode that does not appear in the sword decorative body 5001. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, the structurally difficult staging expression of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, so that the concern that the sword decoration is falsely displayed is suppressed. In addition to being able to do this, it is expected that the sword decoration body 5001 will be provided with an effect beyond the player's imagination when the structure is viewed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Even when the sword decorative image SYG is provided with a special aspect in this way, the sword decorative image SYG is shown in each aspect prepared as the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, FIG. 222). It is desirable to be able to display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. When the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to suggest that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in other modes. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Further, regarding the method of making the sword decoration image SYG displayable in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, for another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 223 to 230). It may be applied.

For example, assuming that the production situation is shown in FIG. 226 (X1), the next production progress destination is the production status shown in FIG. 226 (X2) and the production status shown in FIG. 259 (a). The production pattern will be prepared. Then, when the effect is developed into the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) showing that the opportunity is not given is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second sword withdrawal state is in the sword delivery state while maintaining the form in stage 3 form. Will be returned.

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 259 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous variation number) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the embodiment, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation).

However, here, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the pseudo-sword symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the fourth pseudo-sequential fluctuation (re-variation). A sword image showing (special aspect) is displayed, but this special aspect can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area, and the sword decoration Body 5001 itself is immutable. The special aspect of this production example is that the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to a special mode in the display area, the sword decoration body 5001 has a stage 3 form. It will change from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state while maintaining.

After that, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 which is a special aspect is displayed. An image (bar display) showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 259 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 259 (e), when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped according to the set effect pattern. As the expectation level notification effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and another example thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is subjected to the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration body 5001. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It makes it possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the symbol change is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. The effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursory effects are executed as different effect contents from each other, and as those effect contents, for example,
-The specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area.
-After that, an effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed at a position where it is difficult to see by the specific image.
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). It may be made to change. For example, in the first precursor effect, a display effect by a "cloud effect" is performed as a specific image (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see an effect image imitating an operation means), and in the second precursor effect, a "flame" is performed as a specific image. Display effect by "effect" (display effect that imitates the operation means gradually makes it easier to see, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by "water effect" as a specific image (effect image that imitates the operation means) It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by making the types of specific images different, such as by gradually making the display effects easier to see. In this case, the "cloud effect" is used. When the display effect is performed, it is recognizable that the first precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed. At that time, it is recognizable that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the display effect by the "water effect" is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect) is performed as to which of the button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity.

Then, when the precursory effect (at least one of the first precursory effect, the second precursory effect, and the third precursory effect) is to be performed with such an effect content, an effect image imitating the operation means by a specific image is used. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operating means during a period that is difficult to see. When such a configuration is applied to either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operating means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when it is not certain which of the display mode (for example, blue) is displayed, the effect is produced during the effect reception period. You will be able to improve your sex. Further, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), the conviction as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when the sword cannot be held, the effectability during the effect reception period can be improved.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 261 is an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart showing. Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the first precursor effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. However, this example of the effect is not the first precursor effect but the second precursor effect and the third. It can also be applied to precursory effects.

In FIG. 260 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 260 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first precursor effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 260 (a).

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (b), the display effect by the "cloud effect" is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a "cloud effect" gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 261 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased. Or, the area where a specific image is displayed is reduced, etc.).

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 261, at the timing t2 in which the display effect by the "cloud effect" is gradually changing to non-display, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set. At the same time, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and an instruction display (bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 are displayed (bar display). FIG. 260 (c)).

In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, red) is displayed. , Blue), the ratio of the operation-time effect is higher than that when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), there is no certainty as to whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect during operation is executed in such a way that the effect content is switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is the first display mode and the first. It becomes possible to advance the production without being sure of which of the two display modes is displayed.

Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), it is not certain whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. Nevertheless, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (c) at the timing t3, the effect acceptance period generated at the timing t2 continues, and the “cloud effect” Is completely hidden (FIG. 260 (d)). In such a situation, it is possible to perform an operation on the operation button 410 while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in such a way that the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (d).

According to such a configuration, during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period from the display of the button image BTG to the completely non-display of the "cloud effect" (timing t2 to t3). ) Makes it possible to provide a directing effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to see.

In addition, in order to enhance the effectability during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period during which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period of the timings t2 to t3. In this production example, a message such as "press" is displayed during the period (timing t3 to t4) in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. For example, at timings t2 to t3. If the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period is dynamically displayed in the period from timing t3 to t4, the effectability in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more preferably enhanced. Will be able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 260, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect acceptance period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the effect acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the "cloud effect" is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see first appears, and after a predetermined time from that situation, the effect situation is difficult to see. Until then, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in a production situation where it is difficult to visually recognize before the production reception period occurs, the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor). In the case of the production, the production pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide the fun that the value of paying attention to the button image BTG becomes higher when the button image BTG is in a production situation where it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 260, the button image BTG is made difficult to see by the "cloud effect", but the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is affected by the "cloud effect". It was decided to display it so that its visibility would be maintained without receiving it. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the change in the visibility of the button image BTG with peace of mind while grasping the remaining time of the production reception period.

However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be affected by the "cloud effect" so as to be difficult to see until the timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode while the remaining time of the production reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide a novel production that has never been seen before.

When such a directing property is applied to any of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the precursor effect is started. Even if the length of the time until the specific image is made visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the specific image becomes visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) at the same time. Further, when such an effect is applied to any of the precursor effects of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the precursor effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (time until the specific image is hidden), prepare multiple of these so that multiple effects with different expectations can be obtained. However, the time from the display of the effect image imitating the operation means until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set it to the time.

Further, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to see due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself imitating the operation means, and then relative. It may be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operating means appears in a display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance itself in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or while another display is performed as a precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see. May be good.

Further, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, the specific operation-related effect described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 261 will be described in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later. ) May occur only when it occurs. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and as a result of the progress of the effect, a plurality of operations are made available. Since the production reception period corresponding to only one of the operating means will occur, if there is a delay in deciding which of the plurality of operating means should be operated, it is better than being operated by the player. It is possible that the production reception period will end after all the remaining time has been exhausted. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is generated, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed. During the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect, the player can operate the operation means on the side to be operated and the automatic effect function. Since the effect reception is performed by any of the above and the post-operation effect is always executed, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

[Automatic button effect status]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is controlled to this automatic button effect state. When the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, the effect reception period is within the effect reception period. Even if the operation by the player is not accepted for the effect, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation by the player is accepted for the effect can be executed within the effect acceptance period. There is. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect after the operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, so that the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to operate is suppressed. You will be able to. As for the automatic effect function, by generating the same effect reception as when the operation was actually performed when this functioned, the process may be performed according to the effect reception, or the effect reception may be generated. The same processing as when there is a production reception may be performed without letting it.

In the embodiment relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, effects, settings, and the like may be appropriately combined or used in combination.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed. It is possible to set the production state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation for the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is made. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, and the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for a different operation means may be operated a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating the operation button 410 once. It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, some players want to positively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred, and for such a person, the operation button 410 is used. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state for the operation button 410 is set for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode maintained for 2 seconds (so-called "long press mode"). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the automatic button effect state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult for it to be set incorrectly. In addition, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is not set even if the operation is performed by pressing and holding at least when the effect reception period occurs in the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. ..

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set and the setting is canceled, the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change has not been executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). "Various settings" is selected and the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation for the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When "Release of automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol change is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled only by operating the operation button 410 once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, unlike the case of setting to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is positioned to the operation state even if the operation state for the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed). The automatic button effect state is canceled only when it is detected (just operated in a single operation mode). That is, it can be said that the fact that some operation is performed on the operation button 410 means that the desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the automatic button effect is produced. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal production state at an early stage, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operating means including an operation button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the jackpot determination when it is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation for the operation button 410. Production acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operating means (for example, sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (more accurately, a predetermined production pattern in which the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 or the like is set). Is generated, and even if the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration body 5001) is not received during the production reception period, the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration body 5001) is performed during the production reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the production is received. According to such a configuration, is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received, or another operation means (for example, for example). , When the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) as to whether or not the operation for the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted is executed, the effect result. Regardless of whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 can be used for production, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that such a specific operation-related production can be enjoyed with peace of mind. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target among a plurality of operation means occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). , When the operation for the first operation means is not performed within the first side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process that causes the same change for the effect as when the operation for the first operation means is performed. Yes (first automatic production means),
-When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second side effect acceptance period in which the second operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means is set. When it occurs, when the operation for the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change as when the operation for the second operation means is performed is executed. It is possible (second automatic production means)
Regardless of whether the first-side production reception period or the second-side production reception period occurs, when the same specific time elapses after the period occurs, the first (1) Automatic processing by the automatic effect means or automatic processing by the second automatic effect means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means are the operation target. Regardless of which of the second-side effect reception period set as is within the execution period of the symbol change, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time elapses from the occurrence of those periods. Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, when the first-side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time elapses after the first-side effect reception period occurs. The automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed and when a time different from the specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs. As there are cases, the production progress may be performed within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means would be executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, but the timing is different from this. Since the production is accepted and the production is automatically generated after the operation, it can function as a surprise production.

It should be noted that when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operating means within the symbol fluctuation period than when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The ratio of the production reception period to be performed may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, so that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, the automatic production is performed. Since the post-operation effect is executed by the functioning of the function, the effect reception period can be generated more frequently while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the frequent occurrence of forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of both the effect acceptance period for the first operation means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means is high. However, it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the occurrence rate different between the effect acceptance period for the first operating means and the effect acceptance period for the second operating means.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production reception conditions are met within the production reception period, the post-operation effect can be executed (post-operation effect execution means).
-It is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition based on the operation performed by the player within the production reception period (player operation reception means).
-When the operation by the player is not performed within the production reception period, it is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means). )
However, regarding the specific timing within the production reception period, it is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has elapsed from the start of the production reception period. I'm supposed to do it. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player to operate by himself / herself will be given before the automatic effect function is activated, and there will be an option to generate an effect reception by the operation by the player. , It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs. When the effect progress is performed within the symbol variation so that the automatic process by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from the above "specific time" or the above "specific time" is used. Any of the "time different from" will be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side effect reception period.

Here, if the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol change when controlled to the automatic button effect state, and the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect acceptance period. , The process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Similarly, during the execution period of the symbol change when controlled to the automatic button effect state, an effect reception period for an operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect reception is performed. Even if the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the period, the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception and the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are to be executed respectively. Is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception", the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the effect reception period. The operation on the body 5001 will be executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect executed when the effect is received.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (specific effect). The desire to end the state) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which a player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end a specific effect state and the operation to allow the operation reception to be performed, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the entertainment interests may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button is given an operation opportunity within the effect reception period. A process for terminating an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and a process that can cause a change in the effect by performing an operation on the 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 only once (only by operating in a single operation mode). Since (the process of executing the effect after the operation) is performed respectively, the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation is accepted. Even if it occurs within the period, it will be possible to smoothly switch the production state.

However, regarding the setting change related to the automatic button effect state (setting change to the automatic button effect state or cancellation of the setting of the automatic button effect state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (the state where the symbol change is not executed). , The setting can be changed without requiring an operation on the sword decoration body 5001. That is, the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol change, and when the operation opportunity is given by that amount, a big hit is expected than the operation button 410. The degree is high. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thereby the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling at the time and maintain the game entertainment. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed, the operation means (operation buttons) other than the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means are displayed. The automatic button effect state can be set or canceled by operating the 410 or another operating means) multiple times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the sword decoration body 5001 does not need to be operated to the automatic button effect state. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed for the purpose of.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. Only when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and the corresponding post-operation effect appears. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decoration body 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It will be like.

In addition, as a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button effect state is set, "automatic operation for generating an operation effect even if the pachinko machine 1 is not operated within the effect reception period". In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "effect function", special operation means that are not the target of the "automatic effect function that generates an operation effect without operating during the effect reception period" May further be included. That is, in this case, when the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs when the symbol variation is in the execution state, and the operation for the special operation means is received within the effect acceptance period, the effect is received. The post-operation production according to the production reception suggests the degree of expectation for the big hit. However, even if the situation is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect is accepted appears. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted does not appear, but if the effect is different from the effect when the effect is accepted, it may appear.

Further, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long press), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. Not only when, but also the effect acceptance period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect acceptance period where the expectation is suggested when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated, and the expectation is suggested when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable not to allow this even if there is a production reception period, etc.). That is, if the operation button 410 is operated (operation in a long-pressed manner) while the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 is within the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is generated. In the middle of the production reception period, the "automatic production function that generates the production during operation without operating during the production reception period" is enabled to operate the original production reception (operation means different from the operation button 410). The production reception when the operation button is performed) may occur without any operation, and for a player who is not familiar with such an automatic button production state, is the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurring, or is the operation button 410? This is because it may be confusing whether the production acceptance period for a different operation means has occurred, and there is a concern that this will reduce the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the precursor effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, but the pachinko machine 1 (automatic button effect state) is controlled. A precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is not performed, and a precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be possible to execute it as a display mode different from the above. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether or not the automatic production function can function within the specific production reception period, and it becomes possible to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed during the effect reception period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, the specific image is specified so as to go to the specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which a lightning bolt falls toward a specific area) may be displayed (precursor effect) outside the area. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, the "specific image suggesting the remaining time" in the hidden state is watched to the place where it will appear in the future. Since it becomes possible to prompt the player, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation by the player is not in time and the specific production reception period ends. Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game entertainment taste is appropriately maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player, but the result of the big hit determination including each of the following explanatory examples Based on the progress of the game or the effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which the state can be set or canceled according to the progress of the game or the effect, for example, "While it is controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but it is a big hit game state. The control mode such as "the automatic button effect state is canceled when the state shifts to the high probability time saving state" and "the automatic button effect state is generated within the execution period of the symbol change, and the symbol change in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generate an effect pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence" or "generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol fluctuations are executed". It is possible to adopt a control mode such as, etc. Further, the pachinko machine 1 may be constantly controlled to the automatic button effect state. In this case, the automatic button effect state is not canceled, and the setting / cancellation related to the "automatic button effect state" is applied. Processing itself will disappear.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions may be a predetermined timing when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted or after that, or the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation effect is performed as if the production reception was performed after the production reception period ended. It will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the middle timing (specific timing) when the remaining time of the effect reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions as in the case of actual operation. At that point (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the effect is executed after the operation.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation effect will occur even if the operation is not performed when the automatic button effect state is controlled, until the effect reception period ends (effect reception). It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period) so that the post-operation effect corresponding to the function is started. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function even though the specific timing within the effect reception period has arrived, the post-operation effect is generated by the player's own operation after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to make it feel uneasy when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, it is erroneous that it is controlled to the automatic button effect state even though it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is recognized and you may not be able to check the post-operation effect "," The automatic effect function may not work due to some trouble, and you may not be able to check the post-operation effect "). You will be able to.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in sequence, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-mentioned effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. It may be used in an appropriate combination.

In explaining each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not normally controlled. When the effect reception period that can occur is generated, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be executed only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared. When a specific valid period related to this is generated while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific valid period. You may do it. According to such a configuration, the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is enhanced (improvement of the effectability by allowing the generation of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, the automatic effect function may not work during another effect reception period that is set when a specific display effect is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific valid period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function functions to save the trouble of operation, which makes it possible to enjoy the VIP feeling. Therefore, it is expected that the hobby of the game will be enhanced. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and the automatic production is performed at least in a part of the production reception period. If the function cannot function, the above-mentioned effect will occur when a specific valid period occurs when a specific display effect is being performed (when an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always functions occurs). It is possible to expect. Further, even when such a specific valid period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production according to this.

Further, as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, at least the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect are prepared.
-If the first specific valid period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first specific valid period occurs. Whereas the function works to terminate the first specific validity period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect.
-If a second specific valid period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific valid period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when the above-mentioned is elapsed, the second specific valid period is terminated, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the end is generated.
-When the third specific valid period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific valid period is controlled even though it is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of, each process may be performed when a specific effect state is reached, such as preventing the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed. According to such a configuration, even if the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is from the time when the effect acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function may function when the predetermined time has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed. Even if the production acceptance period ends, the above-mentioned automatic production function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, the above-mentioned is described when the second predetermined time elapses. It will be possible to advance the production with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic production function of the above works or the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work in the first place. The first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called). When a single operation is performed), the effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

The first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled. There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. If this is the case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interest when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is provided. Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects generated when the effects are received in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different effect contents from each other.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, at what timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function functions (which is the effect acceptance period when the effect is accepted). The automatic production function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time) showing the remaining time of the production reception period so that it can be recognized (whether there was only time left). It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect with this displayed instead of being hidden at the time point. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period is the first specific valid period (. A relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs, the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses) and the second specific valid period (relatively after the production reception period occurs). It becomes possible to recognize which of the two (the period during which the automatic effect function operates) when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed.

In this sense, when the first specific validity period (the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs) and the second specific validity period (the second specific validity period () The jackpot expectation is different from when the second predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs (for example, the second specific valid period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degree is different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may be used. As in the case where is functioning, the "bar display" may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the "bar display" is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. May be good.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation means to be operated within the effect acceptance period (for example, an operation to be operated). In addition to displaying an image display that imitates the means), even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. It is desirable to. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which one was in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be performed. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. Whenever the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific valid period or when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden.

At this time, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect are both. Will be able to be confirmed at the same time, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

Further, when an effect that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is referred to as an "operation system effect", the operation system effect is related to this. It may be performed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.) without the above. However, in this case, if the "operation system effect" is executed but the "other specific effect not related to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and the "other specific effect not related to this" are not executed. It is desirable that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is higher than that in the case where the "specific effect" is performed in parallel. That is, when the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect not related to this" are in parallel, the effect is not accepted in the "operation system effect" and the post-operation effect is not executed. However, since "another specific effect that has nothing to do with this" is in the running state, the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed, while the "operation system effect" is executed but "another that has nothing to do with this". When the "specific effect" is not executed, if the "operation system effect" does not accept the effect and the post-operation effect is not executed, no effect will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "other specific effect not related to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect not related to this" are executed. By increasing the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning compared to the case where the "effect" is performed in parallel, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the operation system effect occurs. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, the precursory effects that are performed before the production reception period occurs, and the effects that the operation means to be operated operates are executed as "operation system effects" or related effects. It can be said that it is a thing. Further, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably a precursory effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function increases. You will be able to. In this case, it is desirable that the effect is executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably a precursor effect) and ends before the end of the effect acceptance period. It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function is in a high rate of functioning, and it becomes possible to provide the effect in a tense atmosphere. In this regard, if the "other specific effect" is to be generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the precursor effect), the "other specific effect" is performed multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is performed, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when "another specific effect" is executed is high. It will be possible to have a sense of tension as to whether the production reception period will occur.

In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is continuously executed 999 times. Until the 1000th loss change) is reached, an effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the big hit determination may occur with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the effect acceptance period occurs, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function when there is no operation by the player. On the other hand, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss variations are executed). And when the 1000th loss variation) is reached, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) that reaches the specific value, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player during the production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated and the player operates within the production reception period. It is also possible to execute a process that always generates the same post-operation effect as at the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the loss fluctuation reaches a specific value, "the player should be operated every time the production acceptance period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. Even though I was urged to do so, I couldn't get any results. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions the automatic production function. Since it is realized as a directing effect, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment. At this time, in the production acceptance period that occurs when the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss fluctuation), the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, "operate") that is different from the display image (for example, "operate") that appeared during the production reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, loss fluctuation up to 999 times). It is desirable to make "If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf" etc.). In addition, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied. In the (effect pattern), a special display image (for example, "for example," " If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf. " It is desirable to execute the process that always generates the effect after the operation.

In addition, when it is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times continuously. The number of remaining fluctuations until the 1000th loss fluctuation) may be displayed.

In addition, during the symbol change, the first operation is performed until the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches the specific value when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Both the effect acceptance period for the means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means can occur, but in the symbol variation when the loss variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. , Only one of the effect acceptance period for the first operation means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side may advance the effect so that it cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is preferably suppressed that the production reception period occurs and the expectation is given to itself. You will be able to get it. However, this production example "has achieved some results even though it has urged the player to operate each time the production reception period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. There was no such thing. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a production that always functions the automatic production function, so it is transient. In order not to have any more expectations, a production acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, for example) is generated. It is desirable not to generate the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur in both the case where it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means among the plurality of operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). The second effect reception period, in which an operation opportunity is given to a sword, cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when the effect state is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). You will be able to maintain the color rendering of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-Displays an image imitating an operation means (an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation target to be operated) (an image display means).
-If an operation is performed by the player while the image is displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means).
-After the production reception period occurs, if a specific timing arrives without the player performing the operation while the image is displayed, the post-operation production can be executed without receiving the operation by the player (). Automatic production reception means)
However, the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the post-operation effect is executed is different in the "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to do it. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. It will be possible to generate an effect after the operation.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is to be activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, a copy image (an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation target to be an operation target) is displayed during the effect reception period, and the operation target suggestion image is displayed. Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which one was in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be performed. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the image is displayed, or may be emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decorative body. It may be executed as an operation by.

At this time, if the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different expectations, the expectation (image) suggested within the effect reception period even when the effect is generated after the operation. Display mode) can be confirmed.

The image that is continuously displayed in this way will be hidden after the post-operation effect is generated. However, what is the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs? The time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden should be different from the case where the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed when different times elapse. Is desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when a specific time elapses, or whether the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic process when a time different from the specific time elapses. Even if it does not exist, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. ..

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time elapses, and when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time elapses, the big hit is determined. The degree of expectation obtained may be different.

In addition, if there is an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the player while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. One of the modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation, a high expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) can appear, and a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) can be displayed. ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the production reception period, the production reception (automatic production function always functions) is performed and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed, but the low expectation display is displayed. When an aspect (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. In some cases, the effect is not accepted (the automatic effect function is functioning) and the effect is not executed after the operation. That is, if a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears and an operation is forgotten, it is inevitable that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, which inevitably reduces the interest in the game, but low expectations. When the display mode (for example, the blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that the game interest does not deteriorate so much even if the operation is forgotten, so that the highly expected display mode (for example, the red operation image) appears. If you forget to operate it, the automatic production function must be activated within the production reception period to avoid the deterioration of the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate, but the low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation). If you forget to operate when the image) appears, make sure that the automatic production function does not always function within the production reception period to give you a sense of tension in playing so that you do not forget to operate it. It is expected to raise the awareness of player participation. When not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears. It may not be possible to appear. Further, during the production reception period, any one of three or more display modes may appear.

Then, in each characteristic technique described below, another example relating to these automatic button effect states may be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Suggestion of expectations by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not operate within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period), the said It may be possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not received during the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted. It is also possible to generate an effect pattern in which the process (automatic effect function) that causes the effect is not executed. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the automatic effect function does not function when the operation by the player is not received within the effect acceptance period, the symbol changes as compared with the case when the automatic effect function functions. In, it is possible to execute a process in which the effect is advanced within the symbol variation so that the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears is low. At this time, the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it works, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a directing demerit may occur, a novel directing property such as forcing the player to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period". It is expected that the game will be maintained in a suitable manner.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 241 to 261)) as to whether a period occurs or a period in which an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect occurs. )) Is feasible. In this respect, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related effect, those effects are compared with the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute the process of advancing the effect within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period. At this time, the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect acceptance period occurs also functions as an effect suggesting that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a high rate. Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to more preferably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

Further, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 more than when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 as the effect result. When it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the expectation that the big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state is higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period generated in response to a specific operation-related effect is set in the operation button 410. On the other hand, it is more desirable to set the ratio so that the ratio is the same when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given and when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001.

According to such a configuration, a production situation with a relatively low expectation (suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is not changed by this (effect result of a specific operation-related effect), this is the expectation that the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. It will be possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, by paralleling two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation level by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effect results, it becomes possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Hereinafter, specific examples of the effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264.

In FIG. 262 (a), the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the display area of the effect display device 1600 is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

FIG. 262 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 262 (a). As shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area during a specific effect reception period, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press"). , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. In addition to producing the effect (such as), there are multiple modes with different expectations even within the display area (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectations, "super heat!" With relatively high expectations, etc.). Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and the normal effect state is returned to, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%.

That is, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, the operation for the operation button 410 is not received within the specific effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 262 (c). However, the post-operation effect that should have occurred as long as the effect reception is performed is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific effect acceptance period. , The post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period and the effect reception is performed will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but post-operation production occurs depending on the operation within a specific production reception period. In both cases, the mode of being displayed in the display area is the same as that of the case where the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 262 (e), the production progresses in such a way that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific effect reception period is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", or "the above-mentioned automatic effect function". Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot judgment when executing the symbol change, and as a result, 60% in a specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 40%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Production acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60% and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40% during a specific effect reception period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, if a specific effect acceptance period is generated as the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", "the above-mentioned". Which of those periods should be generated so that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it is generated as the "effect reception period when the automatic effect function does not work". Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

According to such a configuration, the automatic production function functions when the production reception period occurs, in which it is determined that a mode with high expectation (such as "super heat!") Appears as a post-operation effect when the production is accepted. While the ratio of performing is relatively high, when the production acceptance period occurs, it is decided that a mode with low expectation (such as "chance!") Will appear as a post-operation effect. The percentage of functions that work will be relatively low. Therefore, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect reception period. By confirming it, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a directing demerit may occur, a novel directing property such as forcing the player to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period". It is expected that the game will be maintained in a suitable manner.

However, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), even if the automatic effect function is activated when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect acceptance period, it is expected as a post-operation effect. Since low-level aspects (such as "chance!") Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic effect function has a relatively high degree of expectation, this The continuous suggestion of expectations (suggestion by the function of the automatic production function, suggestion by the mode of post-operation production) will realize the color rendering that will not let you down, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately. You will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), even if the automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the production reception period, the production reception is performed. Since there is a possibility that a highly expected aspect has appeared in the post-operation production that should have appeared, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately. However, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 262 (c) (the situation in which the automatic effect function does not function and the effect does not appear after the operation) appears, the effect situation (automatic effect function) shown in FIG. 262 (d) appears. Worked, but it is desirable that the expectation is lower than when the post-operation effect shows a mode with low expectation).

FIGS. 263 and 264 show an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by the automatic effect function when an effect acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) occurs in the automatic button effect state. A concrete example is shown.

FIG. 263 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, the display indicates that the automatic button effect state is controlled). , "Auto button is being set") appears continuously.

FIG. 263 (b) shows the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 263 (a) (specific operation-related effects exemplified separately from this). (May be a production) indicates the production status at which the production has started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. A common display effect is performed in the above, and while the common display effect is being performed, it is concealed whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. .. However, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of a specific operation-related effect, a production situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a result of the first effect having a relatively low expectation. As a result of the second effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, an effect state indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated appears, so that the operation button 410 with a relatively low degree of expectation and the degree of expectation are relatively high. It will be shown which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given the operation opportunity.

FIG. 263 (c) shows that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b). It shows that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press" etc.) is displayed. Character display and bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c), the specific decorative member SDY (such as a bamboo blind) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. One of a plurality of modes (for example, "chance!" With a relatively low expectation or "super heat!" With a relatively high expectation) with different expectations even in the display area while operating the effect. It will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and the normal effect state is returned to, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic effect function of the above does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. A situation may occur in which the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 263 (c)), the effect occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)), the effect within the symbol variation is increased so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period is increased. Makes it possible to execute the process to be advanced. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as "the proper operation cannot be performed within the production reception period and the production corresponding to the operation may not appear". It becomes possible to provide an interest in which of the body 5001 is activated through the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect. In order to obtain such an action and effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic effect function has functioned.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display indicating that the production status is such that the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high (here, "auto button high accuracy") continues. It has come to appear as a target.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is not received within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 263 (d). As long as the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect that should have occurred will not be executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur). In that case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if not.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 263 (e), the effect is produced even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period. The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed within the reception period and the production reception was performed will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but post-operation production occurs depending on the operation within a specific production reception period. In both cases, the mode of being displayed in the display area is the same as that of the case where the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (f), the production progresses in such a way that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, FIG. 264 (g) shows a state in which the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b). It shows that the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred due to the appearance of the production status indicating that it is in. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, "" A character display such as "Pay the sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, which also prompts the operation for the operation button 410 and also causes the sword decoration body 5001 to move from the operating state to the original position. Operation becomes acceptable.

Here, assuming that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). The same post-operation effect as when it was done will be executed. However, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). Among multiple modes with different expectations (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectations, "super heat!" With relatively high expectations, etc.), the mode with high expectations is The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This ratio may be 100%. In addition, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the production reception period, the automatic button production state is canceled and the normal production state is restored, and the remaining time is exhausted during the specific production reception period. The point that the production is terminated when there is no production reception is the same as in the case of the production reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period in the production situation shown in FIG. 264 (g) (the production reception does not occur). In the case), although the production situation has a higher expectation than when the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c) occurs, the production reception occurs in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c). As in the case of not doing so, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result with a relatively low expectation (FIG. 263). Even when (c) appears), the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is not changed by this (effect result of a specific operation-related effect), so that the above-mentioned automatic effect is performed. It will be possible to suitably maintain the expectation that the function will function. In this way, two different productions that are not affected by each other's production results (specific operation-related production, suggestion of expectation level by the automatic production function) are paralleled, and a disadvantageous production result appears in one side of the production. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests of the time. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. Expectations will be lower than if it worked.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not received during the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 264 (h). As long as the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect that should have occurred will not be executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. Even if this is not the case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if it did not work.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 264 (i), even though the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 was not performed within the effect acceptance period. The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed and the production reception was performed within the production reception period will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but when the post-operation effect occurs according to the operation within the effect reception period. In both cases, when the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 264 (j), the effect is advanced in such a way that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time after the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated.

It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated as the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", or "the above-mentioned". As for whether or not it is generated as an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function of the above does not work, as in the case of the effect acceptance period (see FIG. 262 (b)) in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed, the symbol changes. At the time of execution, it is decided (selected) based on the result of the jackpot judgment, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. However, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Production acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, and 80%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at the ratio of.

Similarly, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) is also generated as the “effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions”. In that case, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it occurs as the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work". , Which of those periods should be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

It should be noted that the post-operation effect occurs in the case of the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) and in the case where the specific operation-related effect is not executed. It may be executed as a different effect from the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)). However, even when the effects are executed as different effects, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. Expectations may be 0% or 100%.

Further, the sword decoration body 5001 used in the production examples shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be the sword decoration body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 222. Further, in FIGS. 263 and 264, the description will be given as an example in which the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 243 to 246, but the "automatic effect" will be described. The “effect using function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect of FIGS. 241 to 261.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 263 and 264, when a specific operation-related effect is executed without being controlled by the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is performed. In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button effect state from being accepted, the state of "the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted" is before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to generate the effect from at least the effect situation shown in FIG. 263 (b) (the effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started) so that this can be continued until the effect reception period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to perform a setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has started, this will not be accepted, so that the automatic button effect state is not accepted. It is now possible to provide "production using the automatic production function" only to those who are continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button production state, and continue to play the game while maintaining the automatic button production state. You will be able to provide dramatic value for what you do.

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. 264 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect). ), The first display mode (for example, blue button image BTG and blue sword decoration image SYG) and the second display mode (for example, green button image BTG and green sword decoration). Image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the second display mode appears, the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" occurs as compared with the case when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to have a high percentage of.

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. 264 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect). )), The third display mode (for example, the red button image BTG and the red sword decorative image SYG) can appear, and when the third display mode appears, "the above-mentioned automatic effect". It is also possible to make sure that the "effect reception period" in which the function functions occurs.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period. While there is a risk that a directing demerit such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period", it is necessary to provide a judgment material as to whether or not to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410". It will be possible to do so, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, the effect acceptance period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" exemplified in FIGS. 241 to 261 and FIGS. 263 and 264. It is desirable to generate the above as a period having a longer time than the effect reception period (such as FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. There may be a situation where the operation cannot be performed, but by giving a long time to the production reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related production", it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. Will be expected.

In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 263 and 264, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic effect function to function is set to be relatively high during the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect". For example, whether or not the automatic effect function works by setting the effect acceptance period to have a longer time than the effect acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect". It can be said that it is desirable to maintain the directing performance of the game for a long time and to improve the game entertainment. In this case, the timing at which the automatic effect function functions is reached when the first hour has passed since the period occurred in the effect reception period in which the "specific operation-related effect" is not executed. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect", the automatic effect function is to arrive when the second time, which is longer than the first hour, elapses after the period occurs. It is important to maintain the effect of whether or not the function works for a long time.

In addition, the production acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect" and the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" are the time from the start to the end of those periods. Even if you try to make them different, the bar display that shows the remaining time of the production reception period will be displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the remaining gauge amount will decrease. It is desirable to just make the speeds different. That is, in this case, even if the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, it is continued for the same period as the effect acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect". Since it will be possible to make people think that it is, the effectability of whether or not the automatic effect function works is preferably maintained, coupled with the "frustration" caused by the fact that it is continued for a longer period than expected. You will be able to make it.

According to the example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264, the first effect acceptance period (effect acceptance period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Is generated, and even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it is not always executed, during the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect occurs without being executed. The first when the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period rather than the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410). The ratio of processing by the automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is increased.

In this regard, as for such an automatic button effect state, the ratio of the automatic effect function functioning (“60% -40%”, “20% -80%”) differs depending on the type of effect reception period as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is set to the "first automatic button effect state", the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions depends on the type of effect reception period is different distribution rate ("50% -50%", "10". % -90% "), which is set differently in the" second automatic button effect state ", and when the effect acceptance period occurs, the automatic effect function is set to always function regardless of the type of period. A third automatic button effect state to be generated may be further prepared so that it can be set to any of these effect states, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function is not prepared, and the game is always played in the automatic button effect state (first automatic button effect state, second automatic button effect state, third automatic button effect state). And the production may be executed.

Further, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be modified and implemented as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing (first) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect acceptance period occurred. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing within the effect reception period of the above, and the first effect reception period is terminated and the corresponding post-operation effect is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect acceptance period occurred (the first). The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing within the effect reception period of 1), and then the first effect acceptance period is terminated without the post-operation effect being executed (the post-operation effect is not executed after that). ). On the other hand, if the automatic effect function functions during the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated at the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses after the third effect acceptance period occurs, and the second effect acceptance period or the third effect is received. The production reception period is terminated and the post-operation effect is generated accordingly. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time elapses after the third effect reception period occurs, and then the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period or the third effect without the post-operation effect being executed. The production acceptance period of is terminated (after that, the post-operation effect is not executed).

According to such a configuration, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage in the first effect acceptance period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function functions is low, and the automatic effect function can be used. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time for the player to accept the production by his / her own operation until the first production reception period ends, so it is safe. You will be able to play games with your heart. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high, the automatic production function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function can be used. Since there is not much time left for the player to operate when it does not function, even though the ratio of the automatic production function is high, it is necessary to provide a game with a sense of tension. Will be able to.

Regarding the above modification, in the first effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the first effect acceptance period). However, in the second production reception period and the third production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second production reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic effect function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic effect function should not function (due to some trouble), it is time for the player to operate it. Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, it can be expected that the same action and effect will be achieved.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned effect examples with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, in other effect examples, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player. It may be controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination, or may be always controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the setting to the automatic button effect state itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine capable of functioning at a predetermined ratio.

[Unified operation control when in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player is performed within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if this is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (end the automatic button effect state). Wish) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which a player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button effect state and the operation to enable the operation reception, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the entertainment interests may decline.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception is received. After the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the operation according to the effect reception, only by performing the operation once for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given within the period. Each effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) is performed (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if there is a desire to end the automatic button effect state and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation within the effect acceptance period, the effect mode can be switched while avoiding the loss of operation opportunities. Will be able to be done smoothly.

As described above, when the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol change is in the execution state, the setting operation is permitted only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. ..

On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated in the state where the effect acceptance period has not occurred. The operation for canceling the setting is permitted only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state where the effect reception period has occurred, when the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given is operated within the effect reception period. , The process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) according to the effect reception are performed respectively (operation unified control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated while the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred, the operation is not accepted and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

However, some players play games with a selfish game technique such as "while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), operate by yourself only when you like to advance the effect". It can be assumed that some people want to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (button for continuing the automatic mode) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect is performed. The process of ending the state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in the effect are performed respectively (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state), but the control is performed in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If an operation for the above special operation means is performed within the effect reception period related to the specific effect, the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed and the effect changes according to the operation. The processing that can cause the above is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is terminated and it is desired to actively perform the operation game after that, the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period. If you want to rarely perform an operation while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), you can operate the special operation means within the effect reception period. It becomes possible to realize the game desired by the player only by properly using the operation means.

Hereinafter, the operation unified control in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 267.

In FIG. 265 (a), the number of holds is 1 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows a state in which an effect reception period for accepting a pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred while a reach state is formed in the effect situation being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the display area of the effect display device 1600 is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area even during this effect reception period, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, below). An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410. However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 in which no change has occurred is allowed to be operated.

In FIGS. 265 (b) to 265 (d), although the operation button 410 was not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions to enable the effect acceptance period. It shows how the post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed and the production was accepted is being executed. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is terminated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (described as "PUSH" in the figure) are described. Any operation opportunity for the button) 1410 will be lost.

That is, in the post-operation effect according to this effect example, a stepwise effect progress appears, and any of the effect results of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 265 (c) and FIG. 265 (d)) having different expectations can be obtained. Even if it is decided at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of the jackpot determination) that it will finally appear, first, as shown in FIG. 265 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion). Smoke image) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 265 (c), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 265 (b). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) that suggests that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 265 (b) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 265 (d). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) that suggests that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

Then, the flow of the effect shown in FIGS. 265 (a) to 265 (d) appears as a basic effect progress when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 265 (b) to 265 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs the operation. ..

However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (automatic button effect state). A desire to end) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which a player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button effect state and the operation to enable the operation reception, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the entertainment interests may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that (detection that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position) is performed, the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unified control in the button effect state). When the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a) ends, the above-mentioned automatic effect function cannot function, and the special operation means ( In the figure, the operation opportunity for the button (button) 1410 described as "PUSH" is also lost.

Even if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect is received as shown in FIG. 266 (e). As a post-operation effect according to the situation, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 266 (f), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 266 (e). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) that suggests that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 266 (e) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 266 (g). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) that suggests that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

However, if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is also performed based on the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 266 (e) to 266 (g), after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display shown (here, "auto button is being set") will be hidden. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. The suggestive display (here, "auto button release") is to appear (see FIG. 266 (e)).

Further, as described above, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure) in which no change has occurred is described. Button) The operation for 1410 is also allowed. Then, this special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 "operates by itself only when it is desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode switching). As mentioned above, it is prepared to enable a selfish game technique such as "progressing the production."

Therefore, even when the operation for the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), it is as shown in FIG. 267 (h). In addition, as a post-operation effect according to the operation performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception being performed, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 267 (h). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) that suggests that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 267 (h) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 267 (j). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) that suggests that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed. When the operation for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is received, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a) will be terminated, and the above-mentioned automatic effect will be terminated. The function cannot be functioned, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is lost.

However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the automatic button effect state is based on the operation. The process of terminating is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 267 (h) to (j), even after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display shown (here, "auto button is being set") will be continuously displayed.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operating means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is used within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a). A special case that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions (FIG. 265 (b)), or when an operation for the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 266 (e)). The production is made to appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 267 (j), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears in the case (FIG. 265 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 266 (e)), a glittering effect display is additionally displayed. I am trying to do it. Instead of the glittering effect display, an additional effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be performed.

According to such a configuration, the change content of the effect caused when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period related to the fortune telling effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). And, when controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation was performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 during the effect reception period related to the fortune telling effect. The changes in the effect that occur in some cases will be different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly) appears, "the operation for the operation means is performed and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is You will be able to enjoy the post-operation effect and recognize that the setting has not been canceled and this is still ongoing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), even when displaying a production image (here, “Kichi” fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low expectation, it is special. The production (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly) can appear.

Further, such a special effect (here, a glittering effect display) is made to appear additionally to the above-mentioned post-operation effect at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the special effect is made. When an additional effect appears, it is desirable that the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing due to the symbol variation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is useful for the player to operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 There is a concern that the operation for will not be performed. Therefore, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the special effect (here, glitteringly shines). If the effect display) does not appear, any effect result will appear by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), or by operating the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It is desirable that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing due to the symbol fluctuation is lower than in the case of.

According to such a configuration, "the operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (button described as" PUSH "in the figure) 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and is continued, there is a demerit such as "it can be suggested that the rate of big hit symbols appearing due to symbol fluctuations is extremely low". Since there is a risk of being vulnerable, it is expected that the player will be able to exercise such a dramatic choice in an appropriate manner to maintain the interest in the game.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), although the same effect mode as that in the example shown in FIG. 266 (f) appears, the above-mentioned effect demerit has occurred. Therefore, it is recognizable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than in the examples shown in FIGS. 265 (c) and 266 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), the effect mode is shown in FIGS. 265 (c) and 266 (f) while making it recognizable that the situation is low in expectation. By making it the same as the case, the third party who does not operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation where the production selection fails. It is difficult to grasp the above, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if any of the production selections is made within the production reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), FIGS. 265 (b) and 266 (FIG. 266). e), as shown in FIG. 267 (h), it was decided to display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion), but the specific effect image is relatively as a post-operation effect. It may be displayed in either a plurality of modes in which the rate at which a highly expected effect mode (here, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") appears or the rate at which a special effect appears is different.

Further, regardless of which effect selection is made within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), this is omitted without displaying a specific effect image, and the effect mode with different expectations is obtained. (Here, "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) may be made to appear directly as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is present when the production situation (FIG. 267 (i)) in which the production selection fails appears, the production mode with different expectations ( Here, when either "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) appears as a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion).

In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation even within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a), so that it can be used for determining whether or not to take the above-mentioned effect risk. You may.

Further, the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operating means for continuing the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, it may be carried by another operating means already prepared.

Further, during the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a), is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received for the effect? Or the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) as to whether or not an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect is executed. It may be the result of this.

In addition, during the effect reception period in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity, the first effect is also given an operation opportunity for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) and the second production reception period in which no operation opportunity is given to the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are included. good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 241 to 261) described above is higher than when the second effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to increase the rate at which (see) appears before the symbol change is stopped. According to such a configuration, the ratio of the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appears depending on whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period occurs. It will function as a suggested effect.

[Stable side automatic production processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player is performed within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if this is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means can be accepted for effect, and a different effect is executed depending on which operation means is operated". It is possible to generate the production reception period of. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and for any operation means within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, which of the multiple operating means should the automatic effect function be enabled (which of the multiple operating means causes the same change as when the effect was received)? Becomes a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means can be accepted for effect and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated". When the production acceptance period of is generated, "whether there is a possibility that a production result with a lower expectation will appear" instead of "whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher expectation will appear". Is the standard, and the process of enabling the automatic effect function for an operation method different from the "operation method on the side that can generate an effect that may produce an effect with a lower expectation" (automatic effect on the stable side). Processing) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, the production mode with the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period is Since it will not be possible to appear when the automatic production function functions, a situation such as "when the automatic production function forgets to operate, the production mode with the lowest expectation will appear" will occur. It becomes possible to avoid it suitably.

Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270.

First, an example of an effect when a special effect acceptance period occurs while the state is not controlled by the automatic button effect state and is in the normal effect state will be described. In FIG. 268 (a), in the normal effect state, the number of holdings is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation being performed, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 while the reach state is formed. It shows the production situation where the production display suggesting that the special production reception period is started. In this production situation, although neither the production reception for the operation button 410 nor the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword have been in this situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of being moved to the sword pulling position in order to prompt the determination of which of the decoration body 5001 should be operated. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

FIG. 268 (b) shows a player having either a special effect reception period (pressing operation of the operation button 410 or sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 268 (a). It shows the production status in which the production reception period) that can be selected by the side has occurred. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) in the effect display device 1600 that has appeared since the effect situation shown in FIG. 268 (a), and operation buttons. While the state of the 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is kept to be continued, the instruction display for prompting the operation to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG). Correspondingly, a downward arrow displayed for each, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special production reception period, etc.) will appear.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 268 (b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "disturbance" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operating means are capable of accepting the production.

That is, in this effect example, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b), as the effect after the button side operation, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed. After it is displayed that it has been done (Fig. 268 (c)), it is suggested that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. And the effect of making any one of "100 defeated" appear based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e)) is executed. For example, in the post-button operation effect when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a rate of "40%", and in FIG. 268 (e) at a rate of "60%". In the effect after the button side operation when the big hit is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a ratio of "60%", and the ratio of "40%". It is possible to make the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) appear.

On the other hand, when the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is made within the special production reception period, it is first displayed that the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been made as the effect after the sword side operation ( FIG. 269 (f)) shows that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. An effect (FIGS. 269 (g) to 269 (i)) in which any one of "777 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-operation effect on the sword side when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears at a rate of "10%", and is shown in FIG. 269 (h) at a rate of "50%". The effect mode shown appears, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (i) appears at a rate of "40%". The effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears, the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) appears at a rate of "50%", and the effect shown in FIG. 269 (i) appears at a rate of "0%". It is possible to make the aspect appear.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the number of defeats is small regardless of whether the effect after the button side operation or the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Has a lower expectation than the production mode with a large number of defeats. Further, when the number of defeats is the same (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h), and the effect mode shown in FIG. 270 (e) described later). , Expectations may be different, but it is desirable that they be the same.

In such a configuration, a special effect reception period is generated to allow the effect reception for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means), and the special effect is generated. Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (effects after button side operation, effects after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means on the operated side within the effect reception period, one operation means can be operated. The monotonous color rendering will be improved, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

In particular, the same expectation is not shown by operating either the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means), but the sword decoration body 5001 (first operation means). Only when the operation means (2) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, FIG. 269 (g)) is shown, which suggests that the jackpot symbol is unlikely to appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). Since we have made it possible for the production mode of "defeating one body" to appear, we would like to see the production (effect after operation of the sword side) on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operating means) side even if we take such a risk. It is expected that the game will be maintained by giving conflicts and stimuli to the sword.

In this case, the post-operation on the button side is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. (Here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 269 (g)) "is eliminated, and it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect. Further, the post-operation effect on the sword side is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here)" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period. Then, in the sense that there is a risk of appearance of "the effect mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 269 (g)", it functions as a post-operation effect relatively including turbulence.

Furthermore, in this production example, from the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 268 (a) to the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 268 (b) (here, within the special production reception period), The effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears, it is more than when the effect mode does not appear. , The rate of appearance of "the specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 269 (g))" is low when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. It is possible to carry out the production progress in the form of a sword. This ratio may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, even if there is a risk that "a specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, a production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 269 (g))" may appear. As a material for determining whether or not the operation should be performed on the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it becomes possible to use the effect result of whether or not the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (ab) appears. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably improved when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs.

In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs but no production reception is performed within the special production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production is performed. The function does not work, and the effect is advanced without executing both the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

On the other hand, FIGS. 270 (a) to 270 (e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect acceptance period occurs while the automatic button effect state is controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 270 (a), 270 (ab), and 270 (b), even when controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. Except for the fact that a display indicating that effect (here, "auto button is being set") appears continuously on the effect display device 1600, an effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period will start appears. From to the end of the special production reception period, the production is performed with the same contents as in the above-mentioned normal production state (FIGS. 268 (a), 268 (ab), and 268 (b)). Be progressed.

However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b), "the effect result with lower expectation (here, FIG. The automatic effect function is enabled for the operation button 410, which is different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate the effect that may cause the effect of "defeating one body" shown in 269 (g). It is possible to execute the process of making it (stable side automatic effect process).

That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 was operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. As a result, the same change as when the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the special effect reception period is caused for the effect. Therefore, as a post-operation effect on the button side, first, after it is displayed that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been made (FIG. 270 (c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation and the larger the number of defeats. As an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher, either "50 defeated" or "100 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot judgment (FIGS. 270 (d) and 270 (e)). ) Will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 within the special production reception period. Since the effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 269 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic effect function is activated, "when you forget to operate". It becomes possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as "the automatic effect function causes an effect mode with the lowest expectation to appear."

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, during the special effect acceptance period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 270 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears. , "The specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 269 (g))" appears at a low rate, and the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Since the opportunity to enjoy the sword is given, it is expected that the sword decoration body 5001 is preferably encouraged to operate.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, a special period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the production and the period for which the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received for the production are simultaneously generated and terminated at the same time. It was decided to control it as the production reception period, but it is not always necessary to generate those periods at the same time. For example, if the period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect and the period in which the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received for the effect overlap in a part of them, those periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and the effect differs depending on which operation means is operated. May be executed without fail. That is, in this case, "Which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and further, a special effect reception period occurs" at a relatively early stage from the time when the symbol variation is started with a specific effect pattern. You will be able to think about a directing strategy that assumes that a special directing reception period will occur, such as "Should you perform the setting operation to the automatic button directing state before doing?" .. For example, since it will be possible to confirm "how much notice production was performed in what production mode (expectation)" before the special production reception period occurs, these confirmations will be made. It has become possible to use the result as a judgment material for "which of the multiple operating means should be operated within the special production reception period", and the game until the special production reception period occurs. It will be possible to maintain this in a suitable manner for hobbies.

However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410, when there is an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 within the special effect reception period, and even when there is an operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the automatic effect function Which effect mode will appear when is functioning is determined by lottery (judgment) based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the start of the symbol change or when the effect reception occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

Further, even if the special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. When there is an effect display (FIGS. 268 (a), 270 (a)) that suggests that a special effect reception period will start, it is permissible to set the automatic button effect state. It is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so that it will not be done. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that a special effect acceptance period in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that the effect display has started, this will not be accepted, so you will continue to play the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. It has become possible to provide "stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state" only for those who are, and it is an effect for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. Will be able to provide value.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the button-side operation is performed with the "specific production mode (FIG. 269 (g)" having the lowest expectation" that may appear when the production after the sword-side operation is performed. It was decided to execute it as a unique effect mode that is different from any of the effect modes that may appear when the post-effect is performed, but for the "specific effect mode with the lowest expectation", the effect after the button side operation is performed. It may be executed in the same mode as the effect mode that may appear when it is performed (for example, (for example, "defeating 50 bodies" shown in FIG. 268 (d)). In this case, the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Even if "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation" appears as a result of the above, the same mode as the effect mode that can appear when the effect after the button side operation is performed appears for the purpose of seeing. Therefore, it may be difficult for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to recognize that the production situation is such that the degree of expectation is extremely low. It becomes possible to do so, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suppressed. That is, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, one such as "a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception". Even though the effect status only appears, the symbol changes depending on whether the effect situation is generated by the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword decoration body 5001. Since the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear differs depending on (the fluctuation of the symbol in the execution state), it becomes possible to further enhance the fun as an effect using a plurality of operating means.

However, this is a case where the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side is executed as the same mode as the production mode that can appear even when the post-operation on the button side is performed. However, the "special production mode with the highest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side is a unique production mode (for example, different from any of the production modes that may appear when the post-operation on the button side is performed. (It is desirable to execute as (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (i)). According to such a configuration, “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation” in the post-operation on the sword side. When appears, it is difficult to recognize that the production situation is such that the expectation is significantly low for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated. On the other hand, even if a third party does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated when the "special production mode with the highest expectation" appears in the production after the sword side operation. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the production situation has extremely high expectations. Therefore, as a player, he / she takes the above-mentioned risk without worrying about the eyes of a third party. You will be able to enjoy the production (effect after operation of the sword side) on the side of the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means). In addition, regarding the "special production mode with the highest expectation", a third party Anything that is recognizable may be used, and for example, uniqueness with other production modes may be ensured by performing a movable body operation or lamp emission.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)) (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269). i)) can appear, and when the effect mode (FIG. 269 (i)) of the "777 body defeat" appears, any other effect mode (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e)) appears. , FIG. 269 (g), FIG. 269 (h)) has a higher rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). This ratio may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary to make the effect mode (FIG. 269 (i)) of the "777 defeated body" appear, and in this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) is shown in FIG. 269. The appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) is higher than the appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) by the amount of lowering the expectation of the effect mode shown in (g). Will be.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the effect after the button side operation (FIGS. 268 (c) to 268 (e)) and the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)) are shown. ), A common production mode (here, the production mode of "100 defeated") can appear, but the common production mode does not appear. May be good. Further, in the post-operation effect on the button side, only the display change appears, whereas in the post-operation effect on the sword side, in addition to the display change, the movement of the movable body, the light emission of the lamp, and the like may be enabled. Further, the effect after the operation on the button side and the effect after the operation on the sword side do not have commonality as the effect contents regarding the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as different effects from each other.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, when the production reception occurs, including the time when the production reception is performed by the function of the automatic production function, first, for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. Although it was decided to make the display (FIG. 268 (c), FIG. 269 (f), FIG. 270 (c)) appear, which suggests whether the production was accepted, the degree of expectation is suggested without making the display appear. It is also possible to execute an effect that causes the effect result to appear.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)) (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269). When i)) appears, it is more related to the specific operation described above than when any other production mode (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e), FIG. 269 (g), FIG. 269 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appears until the symbol variation is stopped, and when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operating means (sword decoration) on the higher expected side. It is desirable to increase the ratio of operation opportunities given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, it is possible to suitably encourage the sword decoration body 5001 on the side having a high production risk to perform an operation.

[Production reception processing according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player is performed within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if this is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is displayed. And, the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) based on the effect received by the operation, and the effect reception that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when the operation button 410 is operated while the second display effect is displayed, the above-mentioned second display effect is received based on the operation. It is possible to execute a plurality of processes related to different operation effects, such as a process of generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) different from the expected effect of 1.

In such a configuration, the type of effect as the expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation differs depending on the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed during the effect reception period. Therefore, not only the game entertainment when operated is enhanced, but also the game entertainment from the occurrence of the production reception period to the operation can be suitably enhanced.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed within the effect reception period. When the effect status in which the first display effect is displayed or the effect status in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, the effect reception Even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period, the same expected effect as when the operation button 410 is operated (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) is generated. Is feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period. The first display effect will be executed regardless of whether or not it has been performed, and when the effect status in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period, whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated Regardless, the second display effect will be executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect reception period, there is a concern about forgetting to operate. You will be able to enjoy the production without having to.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when the effect acceptance period for generating the post-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect acceptance period for generating the post-operation effect does not occur. and,
-The production status in which the production reception period is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed, and the first display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the first expected effect (effect after operation) and the process of ending the automatic button effect state are performed, respectively (the effect shown in FIG. 271 described later). See progress),
-The production status in which the production reception period is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the second expected effect (effect after operation) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 272 described later). See production progress),
-An effect that is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), does not have an effect acceptance period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button is performed. The process of terminating the production state is also prevented (see the production progress shown in FIG. 273 described later).
-The effect reception period that is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the first display effect and the second display effect have not occurred. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in an effect situation in which none of the above is displayed, a process for generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect). Each process, such as the process of ending the automatic button effect state, is executed according to each effect status (effect reception process according to the display type).

According to such a configuration, when the operation for the operation button 410 is performed when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear, and when the first display effect appears. When the operation button 410 is operated when the second display effect is not performed and the second display effect is appearing, the type (first effect) as the expected effect (post-operation effect) according to the operation (effect reception). (1) expected effect, 2nd expected effect) are made different, and even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself does not appear. There is a possibility, and the process of ending the automatic button effect state will not be performed. Therefore, the variety of effects using the operation buttons 410 can be ensured, and the game entertainment when the effects using the operation buttons 410 are performed can be suitably improved.

Hereinafter, the effect reception process according to the display type in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 275.

In FIG. 271, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period from timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 271 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410). An example of the effect when the first effect pattern that can be set as "the effect acceptance period that allows the effect" is executed is shown.

In this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), in the effect display device 1600. , The button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appear to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. (First display effect).

Then, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect at the timing tb12 before the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), the symbol changes (in the execution state) based on the effect reception. The first post-operation effect (in the figure, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") that suggests the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol will appear is executed (the first expected effect). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state based on the effect reception, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 does not consume the remaining time. It will be terminated at that point. Therefore, at the timing tb12 where the effect is received, the display indicating that the effect is controlled to the "auto button effect state" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button is being set"). ) ”Will also be hidden.

However, in this case, regardless of whether the effect is received within the period from timing tb11 to tb13, in the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the first post-operation effect generated by the effect reception ( The first expected production) is not finished yet, and it is in the middle of execution so that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained for the period from timing tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the production is accepted. It is desirable to do.

In FIG. 272, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period from timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410). An example of the effect when the second effect pattern that can be set as "the effect acceptance period that allows the effect" is executed is shown.

In this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. 272 (b), in the effect display device 1600. , "Haunted OBK with a present box" will be introduced (second display production).

Here, when "Haunted OBK with a present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation is always generated when the operation button 410 is operated. Since it is not always the case, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 272, the ghost OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period from timing tb21 to tb23, and the ghost OBK is displayed before the timing tb23. When the operation button 410 is operated at the timing tb22, the effect is received, and as shown in FIG. 272 (c), the jackpot symbol is generated by the symbol change (the symbol change in the executing state) based on the effect reception. The second post-operation effect (the character display of "super heat" in the figure) that suggests the degree of expectation that appears is executed (second expected effect).

However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 ends at the time when the effect reception is performed without exhausting the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. I am trying to maintain this. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the "display indicating that the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here," auto button setting ")" that appears in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be done.

Regardless of which of the periods from timing tb21 to tb23, the effect reception is performed, in the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 272 (d), the second post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) generated by the effect reception is performed. The expected production) has not been completed yet, and it is necessary to keep the game in the middle of execution so that the game entertainment can be appropriately maintained for the period from timing tb21 to tb23 regardless of the timing when the production is accepted. Is desirable.

FIG. 273 is for generating a second post-operation effect during the period from timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 273 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. An example of the production when the third production pattern for displaying "Haunted OBK with a present box" is executed even though the production reception period of the above has not occurred is shown.

In this third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), in the effect display device 1600, a ghost OBK with a present box appears (second display effect).

However, as described above, in the production situation where the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, even if the operation button 410 is operated, the post-operation effect suggesting the degree of expectation is performed. Since it is not always generated, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 273, the ghost OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period from timing tb31 to tb33, but as shown in FIG. 273 (a), the ghost OBK is displayed. During this period, the "effect reception period for allowing the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 272 (a) and 272 (c), even if the operation button 410 is operated while the ghost OBK holding the present box is displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation. The effect (first post-operation effect, second post-operation effect) does not appear, and the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed during the period from timing tb31 to tb33.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect does not occur. In this case, basically, the process of ending (cancelling the setting) of the automatic button effect state is performed, but it is shown in FIG. 273 even when the effect acceptance period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred. If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while in such a production situation (a production situation in which a ghost OBK holding a present box is displayed), a process for generating a post-operation effect and an automatic button effect state are displayed. It is decided to advance the production so that neither the processing to end is performed.

Therefore, the second operation shown in FIG. 272 (c) is displayed when the embodiment (ghost OBK with a present box) shown in FIG. 273 (b), which is the same embodiment as that of FIG. 272 (b), is displayed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated in the expectation that a post-effect (second expected effect) will occur, the effect will not change, but the automatic button effect state will not be canceled. You will be able to continue this. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
-Even when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, only the detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is enabled, and when the effect acceptance period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, the effect If there is a detection, it is determined whether or not the timing of the detection is "within the period from timing tb31 to tb33 where the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed", and the "hold the present box". When the timing when the ghost OBK is displayed is within the period from tb31 to tb33, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the timing when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed. A method for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state when it is not "within the period of tb21 to tb23" (the period of timing tb31 to tb33 is set as a prohibited period for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state. Method)
-During the period from tb21 to tb23 when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, a method such as detecting whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated and not performing the operation itself should be adopted. Is possible, and any method may be used to realize it.

In FIG. 274, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period from timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 274 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol change is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. An example of an effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period from the timings tb11 to tb13 is shown, although the above-mentioned first effect pattern that can be set as the “allowable effect acceptance period” is executed.

As described above, in this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, the effect display is as shown in FIG. 274 (b). In the device 1600, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, an arrow display in the downward direction and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Display) appears (first display effect).

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 274, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period from timing tb11 to tb13, but when the timing tb12'before the timing tb13 arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function Is designed to function, thereby causing the same change in the effect as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274 (c), at the timing tb12', the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function. The suggested first post-operation effect (in the figure, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12', the "display indicating that the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here," auto button setting ")" that has appeared up to that point in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. It will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tb12', at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 274 (d), the first post-operation effect (first) generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed. It is desirable to ensure that the expected production) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest during the period from timing tb11 to tb13.

In FIG. 275, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period from timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 275 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol change is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. An example of an effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period from the timing tb21 to tb23 is shown, although the above-mentioned second effect pattern that can be set as the “allowable effect acceptance period” is executed.

As described above, in this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, the effect display is as shown in FIG. 275 (b). In the device 1600, "a ghost OBK with a present box" is introduced (second display effect).

Here, as described above, when "Haunted OBK with a present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Since it is not always possible to generate the effect, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) that prompts the operation of the operation button 410 appears. There is no.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 275, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period from the timing tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22'before the timing tb23 arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed. Is designed to function, thereby causing the same change in the effect as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 275 (c), at the timing tb22', the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function. The suggestion second post-operation effect (in the figure, the character display of "super heat") is executed (second expected effect). However, even in this case, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tb22', the "display indicating that the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here," auto button setting ")" that has appeared up to that point in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. It will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tb22', at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 275 (d), the second post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed. It is desirable that the expected production) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest during the period from timing tb21 to tb23.

By the way, although the illustration is omitted, although the above-mentioned third effect pattern (see FIG. 273) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is used within the period from the timing tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function cannot function and the automatic button effect state is canceled because the effect acceptance period for generating the second post-operation effect has not occurred in the first place. It goes without saying that it will continue (that is, no change will occur).

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the first display effect shown in FIG. 271 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 272 and 273 execute effects that are developed with different contents from each other. , The type as the post-operation effect when the operation is performed, depending on whether the operation button 410 is operated when either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed (first). The expected effect (the second expected effect) is made different, and even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself may not appear. It will be prevented from being processed to end the automatic button effect state. Therefore, the variety of effects using the operation buttons 410 can be ensured, and the game entertainment when the effects using the operation buttons 410 are performed can be suitably improved.

As for the first display effect, there are a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and it may be possible to execute in any of these effect modes. Further, as for the second display effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the second display effect may be executed in any of the effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect are executed as display contents having no relation to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, in the first display effect, an instruction display prompting an operation for the button image BTG or the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, the button is displayed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display prompting the operation for the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is being performed is displayed. It has become.

Further, regarding the first expected effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the first expected effect may be executed in any of the effect modes. Further, as for the second expected effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the second expected effect may be executed by any of the effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected production and the second expected production are executed as production contents having no relation to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the fortune-telling image is displayed in the first expected effect, whereas the fortune-telling image is not displayed in the second expected effect, and the degree of expectation by character display is displayed. Is being suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as a movable effect or an effect by a lamp display, the contents may not be related to each other.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, as an effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the second display effect appears, "the effect for the operation button 410". A second effect pattern and a second display effect appear in which it is determined in advance (for example, in the judgment process performed at the start of the symbol change) that a "effect reception period that allows reception (operation)" will occur. With the third effect pattern, it is determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol change) that the "effect acceptance period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. I decided to prepare. However, after preparing the second effect pattern in which it is predetermined that the "effect acceptance period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" occurs when the second display effect appears. Based on the fact that the production reception is performed within the production reception period that allows the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410, a determination (lottery) is made as to whether or not to generate the second expected production, and the result is determined. FIG. 271 by generating a second expected effect when a specific result is obtained in the determination and not generating a second expected effect when a specific result is not obtained in the determination. -The production example shown in FIG. 275 may be realized. Further, apart from the second effect pattern according to such another example, the "effect acceptance period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur when the second display effect appears. It is also possible to further prepare the above-mentioned third effect pattern that has been determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation).

If the second expected effect is generated as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. It is possible to make the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state) higher than when the first expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. desirable.

Further, when the second display effect is performed, the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) is stopped until the symbol variation is stopped, as compared with the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance between. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, a specific operation is performed. It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that the related production (see FIGS. 241 to 261) will be performed, and it will be possible to suitably suppress the game entertainment.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed and when the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b), FIG. 273) is displayed. (Refer to (b)) is displayed, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated. However, even if there is an operation, the second expected effect does not always occur. When the second display effect (see FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect is displayed. When the effect function is enabled, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is displayed, the operation is performed by leaving it to the above-mentioned automatic effect function. There is concern that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b) and FIG. 273 (b)) is displayed. (See) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is disabled, and when the second display effect is displayed, even if it is operated, the second expected effect will occur, but at least it must be operated. For example, the second expected effect may not occur.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the ghost OBK is displayed, a "effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operating means" is generated while the ghost OBK is displayed. You may do so. Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the ghost OBK is displayed, the automatic production function may function within the "effect reception period that allows the production reception (operation) for the operation means", or the player may use it. Even if the operation is performed, the ghost OBK may not be hidden, and the effect of displaying the ghost OBK may be continued even at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33.

[Auto repeated hit function in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player is performed within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if this is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 prompts a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) to a predetermined operation means, generates an effect reception every time there is such an operation, and performs a multiple operation effect corresponding to the operation. May be struck. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, the problem is how to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function when the specific effect reception period in which such a plurality of operation effects are performed occurs.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is provided during a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given. Even if you do not operate the above multiple times, just perform an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) that keeps the predetermined operating means in the operating state for a relatively long time, and the effect when the operation is performed multiple times. It is equipped with an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous striking function) that allows the mode to appear, and the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous striking function) functions when an operation is performed on a predetermined operating means in a long operation mode. When this happens, the effect reception is performed every time a predetermined time elapses while the operation state is maintained, and it is possible to execute a process of generating the post-operation effect a plurality of times according to these.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hitting, etc.) is given when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated within the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically operated in the long operation mode within the specific effect reception period. Similar to when the multiple operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) functions, the process of generating the effect according to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

According to such a configuration, there is a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic continuous striking function is enabled when a so-called long press operation is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous striking, etc.) is given. Therefore, at least when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous striking function is enabled appears even if the operation by long pressing is not performed within the specific effect reception period. Therefore, even if the automatic effect function is activated when the specific effect reception period that requires multiple operation receptions occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period. Players will not be dissatisfied with the frequency of occurrence of, and will be able to enjoy the production.

FIG. 276 (a) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timing ct11 to ct13 of the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. The specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period" is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated multiple times in the mode of one-shot operation in which the operation state is maintained only for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. It shows an example of the production when it was performed over.

As shown in FIG. 276 (a), in this effect example, every time the operation button 410 is operated in the mode of the single-shot operation within the specific effect reception period (timing ct11 to ct13) (the operation button 410 is the original). Every time it is detected that the position is changed from the position to the operation state (here, the rise is detected), the effect reception is performed according to the operation, and the specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the effect reception. .. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition appears, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without exhausting the remaining time. ..

Here, although omitted in the figure, within the specific effect reception period (timing ct11 to ct13), the specific time from the start to the end of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception. A new production reception (operation detection) may be made within. In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the process of being executed at the time when the effect is received is interrupted, and a new specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is generated. Therefore, it is desirable to suitably maintain the operation feeling (effect reactivity) when the player operates it. It should be noted that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is terminated when a specific time has elapsed from the start, unless a new effect reception is generated again during the execution of the specific effect. Become.

FIG. 276 (b) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410 during the timing tc11 to ct13 of the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation is performed in a long mode (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific effect reception period. An example of the effect when the operation for the button 410 is performed is shown.

As shown in FIG. 276 (b), the operation button 410 is in the operation state while the operation state for the operation button 410 is maintained in the mode of long pressing during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to ct13). A process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on the operation detection (effect reception) at the time. Auto repeated hit function) is to be executed. As this process (automatic continuous striking function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed on condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and the operation detection (effect reception) is performed. It is possible to execute it as a process such as "to generate a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on the reception). Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition appears, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without exhausting the remaining time. ..

FIG. 277 (a) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timing tc11 to ct13 of the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state. An example of an effect when a specific effect pattern that can be set as "a specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed and no operation is performed within the specific effect reception period is shown.

First, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing ct11 to ct13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed even once and the timing ct13 is reached. When it reaches, the specific production acceptance period will end.

On the other hand, assuming that no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to ct13) while the automatic button effect state is controlled, it is specified as shown in FIG. 277 (a). The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing ct12 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect acceptance period has occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function performs a new specific effect every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic continuous striking function functions. The process of generating the effect after the operation) will be executed.

As this process (automatic effect function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific effect (effect reception) is performed based on the operation detection (effect reception). It is possible to execute it as a process such as "to generate an effect after the operation". Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous striking function is activated so that "operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and these operation detections are performed. A process such as "generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) based on (effect reception)" may be performed. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition appears, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without exhausting the remaining time. ..

FIG. 277 (b) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timing tc11 to ct13 of the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state. The specific effect pattern that can be set as "the specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation for the operation button 410 is performed by pressing and holding the operation button 410 while the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning during the specific effect reception period. An example of the production when it is performed is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing ct12 as in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a), whereby the first specific effect is performed at the timing ct12. After generating The process of causing it to be executed will be executed.

However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in a long-pressed manner at the timing ct12a when the process by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, in the timing tc12a, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished) because the operation for the operation button 410 is detected while the automatic button effect state is in the state. However, in this production example, even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing ct12a, the production reception is not performed. Then, after preventing the specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception from occurring at the timing tc12a, the process (predetermined time t1) executed before the automatic button effect state is canceled is set. The process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) is continued without ending each time.

According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the operation by long pressing is performed at any timing in the state. Even if is started, there is no longer a delay in the progress of the production due to changes in the rhythm and tempo related to the generation of the specific production (effect after operation) triggered by the operation, and it is already in the execution state. The process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a form of being inherited until after the operation mode by long pressing is started. Therefore, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period in the automatic button effect state, the player can operate the operation without worrying about adverse effects on the effect in the execution state. It becomes possible to perform the operation by the player. That is, the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b) is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a. The same mode will appear as the mode of the specific effect that appears within the specific effect reception period.

It should be noted that the process already in the execution state (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is inherited until the operation mode by long pressing is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an auto continuous hit function that functions when an operation is performed by pressing and holding within the specific production reception period, and a function when the operation is not performed within the specific production reception period. Regardless of which of the automatic effect functions to be performed, the same process (process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed. It is nothing but from.

However, after the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 is digested, indicating that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. The process (process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued from the time when the automatic button effect state is established, on condition that the determination is made. It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operation state when the predetermined time t1 based on the previously executed specific effect is exhausted, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated at that time. Instead, the process that has been executed since the state of the automatic button effect (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is terminated.

In the production example using the automatic continuous striking function shown in FIG. 276 (b) and the automatic effect function shown in FIGS. 277 (a) and 277 (b), the predetermined time t1 is set based on the timing at which the specific effect is completed. After the lapse of time, a process (automatic continuous striking function, first aspect as an automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) was executed, but instead of this, the timing when the specific effect started was used as a reference. As a result, a process (automatic continuous striking function, second aspect as an automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) may be executed after the elapse of a predetermined time t2. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start to the end of the specific effect, but is preferably from the start to the end of the specific effect. Set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed in the form of interrupting the specific effect. It will be possible to make people feel as if they are repeatedly performing single-shot operations at high speed even though they have not performed any operations, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing ct12 at which the automatic effect function functions (within the period of timing ct11 to ct12), the operation button 410 is operated at that time. The setting of the automatic button effect state will be canceled (finished). At this time, the first specific effect is generated in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and thereafter, if the operation is a long press mode, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses. A process (automatic continuous striking function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single-shot push mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A new specific effect (post-operation effect) will be generated each time.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, when the effect is received while the specific effect is in the middle of execution, the effect is accepted by interrupting the specific effect in the state of execution. Although it was decided to generate a new specific effect, a new specific effect corresponding to the effect reception may be generated in parallel with the specific effect in the middle of execution without ending the specific effect.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, when a new single-shot operation is performed and the effect is accepted while the previous specific effect generated by the single-shot operation is in the middle of execution. When a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated according to the effect reception, while the previous specific effect generated by the automatic effect function (or auto continuous hit function) is in the middle of execution. Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has entered the operation state from the original position due to a single operation or a long press operation, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated at the time of the detection, and the operation button 410 is already in the execution state. It was decided to continue the process (process to generate a specific effect every time a predetermined time elapses). After that, if the operation state is maintained when the predetermined time based on the previous specific effect has elapsed (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is performed for the specified time). Since the process (process to be generated each time elapses) is further continued, the player can end the automatic button effect state while appropriately continuing the operation system effect that has been in the execution state from the time when the automatic button effect state is in the player. It will be possible to shift to a state where the operation system effect is performed by the operation by, and it is expected that the player's participation consciousness will be raised by this.

[Setting processing related to the automatic button effect state according to the type of effect pattern]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player is performed within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if this is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation with respect to a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. It is possible to set and cancel the automatic button effect state, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to set and cancel the automatic button effect state while maintaining attention to the progress of the effect while the symbol is changing. I am trying to do it.

However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the execution period of the symbol change, the processing load increases due to the setting change that was not expected at the start of the symbol change, and at the start of the symbol change. There is concern that it will adversely affect the decided production progress. In this regard, as the types of the "effect pattern executed based on the result of the jackpot determination", at least, "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" and "the operation are performed. Since a "second effect pattern" in which a specific effect reception period cannot be set in which a prompting instruction display appears is prepared, the setting or cancellation of the automatic button effect state is not always promptly executed depending on the type of effect pattern. In some cases, no problem will occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the symbol variation is in the execution period depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state. By making the setting and the processing mode for canceling the automatic button effect state different, the increase in the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation is suppressed.

FIG. 278 shows a symbol variation in the "first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set" when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three. Is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (cancellation operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. .. The first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

As shown in FIG. 278, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, "a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears" can be set. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in the "effect pattern". Then, although the symbol change is being executed, the effect progress as the first effect pattern is made while the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed). ..

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the cancellation of the setting of the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Will be done.

Further, in this effect example, after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way, the operation for the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state) is performed at the timing td12 within the specific effect reception period shown in the figure. ) Is detected. When the operation for the operation button 410 is detected within the specific production reception period, the production reception is performed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the production reception is executed, and the specific production reception period ends without exhausting the remaining time. Will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, the effect is received when the operation button 410 is operated. It will not be accepted as a setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect is received, the post-operation effect is executed, and the automatic button effect state is canceled. It is also accepted as an operation, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished).

Furthermore, in this effect example, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific effect acceptance period is ended, and the symbol is being changed. , The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) when the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It is supposed to be executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change may be executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state.

Then, in this effect example, when the symbol change is stopped after the setting to the automatic button effect state is made, the state is put on hold after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol change is stopped. The next symbol change is digested (change starts). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, the effect progress is made in the state set in the automatic button effect state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 278, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is executed, the specific effect is specified during the period in which the first effect pattern is executed. When the operation button 410 is operated when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the symbol change is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set while the automatic button effect state is controlled. However, by performing the release operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is possible to make the specific effect reception period occur with the automatic button effect state canceled, and the player himself operates it. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the amusement interest when the desired desire arises. In the effect example shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the release operation is accepted before the specific effect reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific effect reception period ends. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

Further, according to the above configuration, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed during the period in which the symbol change is executed in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set". Is now acceptable. In the effect example shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the specific effect reception period ends, but the setting operation by the player is performed within the period before the specific effect reception period starts. Is performed, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol change is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" is started without being controlled by the automatic button effect state, the specific effect acceptance period occurs. By performing an operation on the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in the period before, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. It is also possible, and the automatic effect function makes it possible to suitably maintain this for the game entertainment when one wants to enjoy the effect after the operation.

In order to obtain such an effect, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of the symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) relating to the effect content in the first effect pattern. Even if is obtained, it is desirable to make sure that this occurs for the specific production reception period. In addition, the specific effect display can appear within the period of the symbol change, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect acceptance period always occurs until the symbol change in the execution state is completed. It is desirable to make the production progress in this way. According to these configurations, by confirming the effect content that appears within the execution period of the symbol change, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. You will be able to select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

At this time, regarding the above-mentioned specific effect display, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a high possibility that the post-operation effect will be performed in a manner with high expectation when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. If it is performed by any of a plurality of embodiments, it is expected that the automatic button effect state will be used for a judgment regarding whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned specific effect display, at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display are provided, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. It may be permissible to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player between the time when the specific effect acceptance period occurs, but when the second specific effect display appears, the said. If it is not allowed to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player between the appearance of the second specific effect display and the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the specific effect can be set. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest from the appearance of the display to the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

FIG. 279 shows a second effect pattern (loss variation) in which "a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears" cannot be set when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three. ) ”, And a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (cancellation operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. It is a time chart showing.

As shown in FIG. 279, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three, "a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set." It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "2 production pattern". Then, also in this effect example, as in the case shown in FIG. 278, although the symbol change is being executed, the automatic button effect state can be canceled (the release operation is permitted). The production progress as the second production pattern will be made.

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the cancellation of the setting of the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Will be done.

That is, it seems that there is little merit in ending the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, it is usually more likely that the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set" will appear when the symbol variation in the pending state is exhausted. At this time, there may be a desire to return to the normal production mode (a desire to end a specific production state) in which the production can be advanced depending on the player's own operation.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set is executed, but also in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed. However, the automatic button effect state can be terminated by the operation by the player. Therefore, it is possible to pre-terminate the automatic button effect state when the "first effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is set" is still in the hold state, and thereby, in the "first effect pattern". It becomes possible to avoid a situation in which the automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect reception period is set and the operation of the operation means (operation button 410) must be performed without hesitation.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that the player performs the setting operation at the timing td23 shown in the figure after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern is being executed, which is not controlled by the automatic button effect state and the specific effect acceptance period is not set. Even if an operation is performed by the player (even if the operation button 410 is in the operation state from the original position and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)), at least the second effect pattern. The setting operation by the player is not accepted (the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed) within the period during which is being executed. Instead of this, even if the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, the relevant case is concerned. During the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted.

That is, even if "setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state" is performed immediately before the specific effect acceptance period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation within the specific effect acceptance period. However, even if the operation is performed, the production reception is performed and the post-operation production is executed. In view of these facts, it is necessary to promptly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed during the period when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is executed. However, it is considered that no problem will occur if the automatic button effect state is set before the start of the specific effect acceptance period that may occur after the next symbol change is digested.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed, the setting operation is performed by the player within the period. Even so, until the end of the period (while the symbol change is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol change according to the second effect pattern is completed and the symbol is stopped (loss). When it is in the state of (design stop) (timing td24 in the figure), the setting to the automatic button effect state is made based on the setting operation. In this way, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is executed, even if the player performs an operation, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not allowed, and the set timing is set as the symbol. Since it is carried over after it is stopped, the processing load increases because the setting change related to the effect state that was not determined at the start of the symbol change occurs during the execution of the symbol change (by the operation by the player). Such things can be suitably suppressed.

Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the stop of the symbol variation, the automatic button effect state is set and the hold state is set. The next symbol change that was there is being digested (change start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, the effect progress is made in the state set in the automatic button effect state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the second effect pattern is executed, the second effect pattern is in the execution state. Even when the operation button 410 is operated at any timing, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. It is possible to execute the control to the automatic button effect state after it is done. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress an increase in the processing load due to a setting change related to the effect state, which was not determined at the start of the symbol change, during the execution of the symbol change (by an operation by the player). Will be.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that the next symbol change in the pending state is started after the symbol change of the second effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is stopped. However, even if the next symbol change is not in the hold state at the time when the symbol change of the second effect pattern is stopped (lost symbol stop), the automatic button is in the state of the symbol stop (missing symbol stop). The setting to the production state will be made.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern is performed. The setting to the automatic button effect state is made when the symbol fluctuation of is stopped, but it is not always limited to this, and the point is that the automatic button is set during the period when the second effect pattern is executed. It suffices that the setting to the effect state is not allowed, and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable to set the automatic button effect state when the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stopped) or during the period when the next symbol change is executed. That is, if there is an effect situation such as "it is decided to change the setting related to the effect state within the symbol change" at the time when the next symbol change is started, the effect is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it is only necessary to advance the pattern, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to an unintended state change during the execution of the symbol change.

In this case, even if the next symbol change is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stop) or the next symbol change is executed. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set within the specified period. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol change is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined in which effect pattern the next symbol change is executed. It becomes possible to carry over the timing when the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed after the symbol is stopped without performing.

Further, when the operation button 410 is put into the operation state within the period in which the second effect pattern is executed in order to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the second effect pattern. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be made only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is terminated while the next symbol change is on hold, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol change, but the next symbol change is made. When the second effect pattern is terminated while is not in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stop).

In addition, apart from the "second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set", the "specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set". "3 effect pattern (hit variation)" is further prepared, and when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol is stopped or the execution period of the big hit game is executed. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be made within.

[Prohibited period for setting the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player is performed within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if this is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation with respect to a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. The setting related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and by simplifying such an operation, it is possible to set the automatic button effect state while maintaining the attention to the effect progress during the symbol change. ing.

However, if the specific processing related to the production such as the production setting is allowed at any time by the operation by the player during the execution period of the symbol change, including the setting processing to the automatic button effect state, the feeling of tension is felt. There is a possibility that the entertainment of the game will be reduced due to the lack of directing. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol change according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, at least when the specific effect reception period has not occurred, the specific processing related to the effect such as the effect setting is performed by the operation by the player. In a permissible gaming machine, it is desirable to be able to start a prohibited period in which the specific processing related to the above-mentioned effect is not allowed between the start of the symbol change and the occurrence of the specific effect acceptance period. That is, in this case, there is a concern that a prohibited period will occur, so that even in a state where a specific effect reception period has not occurred, an operating means (operation button 410, etc.) has not occurred while the prohibited period has not occurred. ) Will be required to be performed, and it will be possible to suitably maintain the player's participation consciousness for the game and the production.

Hereinafter, an example of an effect in which the "automatic button effect state setting process" is adopted as the "specific process related to the effect" will be described in detail, but the "specific process related to the effect" is not limited to this, and for example, the effect mode ( It may be applied as another process such as a process of changing the effect mode in which the first character plays a leading role to another effect mode (effect mode in which the second character plays a leading role).

In FIG. 280, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period (specific valid period) in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set, and the symbol is shown. FIG. 281 is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of the fluctuation, and FIG. 281 is an effect example when the effect is advanced in the third effect pattern. It is a figure which shows. The third effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation, and may be the same as the above-mentioned first effect pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 280 and 281 (a), a third effect in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set when the effect is not controlled by the automatic button effect state. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "Pattern". Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol change, the effect progress as the third effect pattern is made while the state can be set to the automatic button effect state (the state where the setting operation is allowed). ..

However, in this effect example, when the symbol is changed in the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set", the timing te11 (before the specific effect acceptance period occurs) (See FIG. 280), the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state, or the prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (b), in this prohibited period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed. In the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 281 (b), an image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is displayed, and a button lock effect such as "auto setting invalid" is displayed. Has been done.

The prohibition period generated in this way ends when the timing te12, in which the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11, arrives. However, no matter how much the operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed until the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 281 (c) and 281 (d), the above-mentioned specific effect (prohibited image) ) Is designed so that no change occurs.

Then, when the prohibition period ends at the timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is hidden, and the setting process for the automatic button effect state is returned to the allowable state. After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 281 (e)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears appears at the timing te13. (See FIG. 281 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 281 (f), the effect reception period is set as the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, but the effect reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 and 281 (f), since the specific effect acceptance period occurs in the state where the automatic button effect state is not set, the specific effect acceptance period is within the specific effect acceptance period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a specific timing. However, even when the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 280, it is before the prohibition period starts. If the automatic button effect state is set to, it is possible to allow the specific effect acceptance period to occur while the automatic button effect state is set. In this case, the specific effect can be set. The above-mentioned automatic effect function can be activated at a specific timing within the reception period.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is not the timing when the operation button 410 is in the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after becoming. However, in this case, if the operation button 410 is put into the operation state and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. 280 arrives, after the timing te11 occurs. It is possible to allow the setting to the automatic button effect state. Therefore, the above-mentioned specific effect (prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 when the prohibited period is started as in the effect example shown in FIG. 280, but is generated later than the timing te11. Is desirable.

FIGS. 282 and 283 are diagrams showing a modified example of the prohibited period (here, the prohibited period related to the setting of the automatic button effect state) related to the “specific process related to the effect such as the effect setting”.

That is, as described above, in the above-mentioned production example with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281, when the prohibition period occurs at the timing te11 (see FIG. 280), the first specific time (for example, 25) after the prohibition period occurs. No matter how many operations (operations for the operation button 410) are performed until the end of the second), the setting operation is not accepted and the above-mentioned specific effect (prohibited image) is used. Is designed so that no change occurs.

However, in the following modification detailed with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283, the prohibition period is "a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) is required from the occurrence to the end". Is the same, but when the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibited period occurs, the player operates (operation button) to end the prohibited period early. It differs from the above-mentioned production example described in detail with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281 in that a process that allows an operation on 410) can be performed.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 282 and 283 (a), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set when the effect state is not controlled by the automatic button effect state. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "3 production pattern". Then, even in this modified example, although it is during the execution period of the symbol change, the effect progresses as the third effect pattern while it is in a state where it can be set to the automatic button effect state (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). Will be made.

Further, at the timing te11 (see FIG. 282) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is permitted. In addition to starting to generate a prohibited period that is not prohibited, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed in FIGS. 280 and 2. It is the same as the above-mentioned production example with reference to 281.

However, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 282, among the prohibited periods, the period from the timing te11 to the arrival of the timing te11a in which the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (the period during which the release is not possible). Then, no matter how many operations (operations for the operation button 410) are performed within the period, no change is made in the specific effect (prohibited image) (FIG. 283 (c). (See), in the period from the timing te11a to the arrival of the timing te12 (the timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the prohibited period) (the period during which the release is permitted), the operation by the player is performed. When (operation for the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute a process in which the prohibited period can be terminated early.

More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibited period can be terminated early by an operation by the player (operation for the operation button 410), the timing te11a first arrives in the effect display device 1600. A special image that did not appear in the period up to (the period that cannot be canceled) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (d), the image NJG suggesting the remaining time as the prohibited period is displayed as the special image.

That is, in the prohibited period related to this modification, such an image NJG appears when the timing te11a arrives (see FIG. 283 (d)), so that the prohibited period cannot be canceled (see FIG. 283 (d)). It can be suggested that the timing te11 to te11a) has shifted to the period in which the prohibition period is allowed to be lifted (timing te11a to te12), and the prohibited period is shown while the remaining time is shown. Will be able to function as an effect on whether to end early.

Then, when the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the prohibition period is allowed to be canceled, the operation button 410 is put into the operation state. Based on the fact, the process of terminating the prohibited period early is executed. As a result, after the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not yet arrived.

Here, in this modification, when the prohibited period is terminated early by the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) by the player, the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. It is possible to execute the process that causes the above. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (e), the image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is destroyed and a character such as "successful release" is displayed to cause a change in the effect. As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

Then, in the state where the prohibition period is terminated early in this way, when the second operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. 282, the operation is performed. When the operation is performed for the second time (here, when the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting process for the automatic button effect state can be performed. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (here, "auto button setting in progress") is displayed according to the effect setting.

After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 283 (f)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears appears at the timing te13. (See FIG. 283 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 283 (g), the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 is set, but the operation reception is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 282 and 283 (g), since the specific effect acceptance period is generated in the state of being set to the automatic button effect state, the specific effect acceptance period is within the specific effect acceptance period. If no operation is performed by the player before the specific timing arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. However, even in the production example shown in FIGS. 282 and 283 (g), the invalid period is first set by performing the first operation within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the invalid period is allowed to be canceled. In the case of the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 and 281 (f), unless the setting process for the automatic button effect state is performed by performing the early end and performing the second operation in the early end state. Needless to say, the same production situation as above will appear.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, it was decided to generate the specific effect reception period after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the "prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is completed. A specific effect acceptance period may be generated immediately after the "prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is completed (in a form connected to the prohibition period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period will occur while the setting opportunity to the automatic button effect state is prohibited. It will be possible to raise the player's awareness of participation when the production reception period has not occurred.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, in the "prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed", when the effect is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period that occurs thereafter. As a post-operation effect, one of a plurality of effect modes having different ratios such as a rate at which a relatively high expectation effect mode appears and a rate at which a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol variation in an executed state may be made to appear.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-When the effect image of FIG. 283 (e) is in the third state, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, "padlock") in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state are different from each other. Appear one of "multiple production modes with different destruction conditions of the image with the chain attached to it").
When the effect image of FIG. 283 (d) is in the second state, when the third state is reached, the "specific third effect mode (plural third effect)" is selected from the plurality of third effect modes. Of the modes, a plurality of second effect modes (for example, "a plurality of effect modes having different colors of the image NJG") in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which "the third effect mode most advantageous to the player" appears is different. Make one appear,
When the effect images of FIGS. 283 (b) and 283 (c) are in the first state, when the second state is reached, "a specific second effect mode (plural)" is selected from the plurality of second effect modes. Of the second production modes of the above, a plurality of first production modes (for example, a plurality of production modes in which the color of the background image is different) in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which "the second production mode most advantageous to the player" appears is different. It is desirable to execute processing such as making one of) appear. According to such a configuration, while the production progresses within the prohibited period or the process of ending the prohibited period early is executed, the degree of expectation can be suggested step by step by the production related to each other. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment during the prohibited period can be appropriately maintained, and that the early termination of the prohibited period is promoted to raise the awareness of player participation. In this sense, regarding the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the movable decorative body is executed as an effect that cannot be operated, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibited period is movable. It is desirable to be able to perform it as an effect mode for operating the decoration. A predetermined movable decorative body is operated when a specific third effect mode appears among a plurality of third effect modes, and a predetermined movable decoration appears when a third effect mode different from the specific third effect mode appears. You may not move your body.

Further, regarding the effects illustrated in FIGS. 281 (e) and 281 (f) and FIGS. 283 (f) and 283 (g), the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) is used. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation) as to whether the operation can be accepted for the effect or the operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261).

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, it has been described that the specific effect acceptance period is always generated after the “prohibited period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is generated. However, it is not always necessary to generate the specific effect acceptance period, and after the "prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is generated, the symbol change stops without the specific effect acceptance period occurring. You may prepare a production pattern that can be used.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, regarding the “prohibited period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed”, the effect pattern in which the jackpot expectation is relatively low (for example, the super reach state). It is desirable that the appearance rate of the effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern in which the super reach state occurs) is higher than that of the effect pattern in which the jackpot expectation is relatively high. That is, in this case, even though the effect pattern with a relatively high expectation of big hit appears, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state for a predetermined period is forcibly lost. It will be possible to encourage players to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's awareness of getting a big hit will increase.

However, if the setting process for the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, it is inevitable that the player who desires the automatic button effect state will lose his or her interest. As shown, after a certain amount of time has passed, the player can cancel the prohibited period early, and when it is canceled, the player can return to the state where the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is allowed again. Is desirable.

Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target to be set by the operation by the player may be another operation means such as a touch panel, a sword decoration body 5001, and a cross key, in addition to the operation button 410. Further, the prohibited period may be terminated early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, or when setting the automatic button effect state. The prohibition period may be terminated early by manipulating the operation target used. However, if the prohibited period is to be terminated early by operating the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, the mode of operation (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

As described above, FIGS. 280 to 283 show an example of an effect in which the "setting process for the automatic button effect state" is adopted as the "specific process related to the effect", but this is the "specific process related to the effect". Not limited to. However, regarding the "specific processing related to the effect", regardless of the type of effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means may be changed within the execution period of the symbol change. It is desirable that it can be performed by the operation.

[Automatic production function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player is performed within the effect acceptance period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if this is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation with respect to a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. The setting related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and by simplifying such an operation, it is possible to set the automatic button effect state while maintaining the attention to the effect progress during the symbol change. ing.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as an operation means, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation provided so as to be operable between the original position and the operation position by a predetermined driving force. The means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is provided, and in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player performs the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed.

By the way, when the effect acceptance period for such a movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (G2), the movable operating means is placed in its original position by a predetermined driving force. The player may be given an operation opportunity to operate the movable operation means in the moved state by first moving from the to the operation position. In this operation opportunity, the effect reception may be performed not by the operation of returning from the operation position to the original position but by the operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position.

However, when such an effect acceptance period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), and thereby the movable operating means (here, here, the movable operating means). If the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) cannot be properly given, and the production reception is accepted. There is a concern that the production after the corresponding operation cannot occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), and this causes the movable operating means (here, here, the movable operating means). Even if the effect reception period as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) occurs without being able to drive the sword decoration body 5001) from the original position to the operation position, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. At that time, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected in the effect reception period. ..

According to such a configuration, even if some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and it becomes inoperable, it can be moved by using the automatic effect function. It will be possible to properly appear the post-operation effect using the operation means.

However, when the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state where it cannot operate due to some abnormality or failure, the operation itself for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) itself Since it is a difficult situation, if the operation for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is required in order to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button is used. It is not possible to set the effect state (specific effect state), and in the end, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot occur.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) are used. Regardless of which of the production acceptance periods occurs, the same production change as when the operation means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is operated is generated. Processing can be executed (automatic production function). On top of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed only by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). I am trying to be.

That is, in this case, not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the side where there is a concern that the operation cannot be performed when an abnormality or failure occurs, but only the operation with the general push-type operation button 410 is required. It becomes possible to generate an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, even if an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) during the execution period of the symbol change, the operation to the operation button 410 sets the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By performing the above, it becomes possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001).

In order to adequately ensure operability in the event of such an abnormality or failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) provided for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is used. It is important that it is provided as an operation means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration processing in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say.

However, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, as long as the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality / failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the state is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is set.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol change. , The restoration process for returning the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to the normal state (original position) is executed. The restoration process can be executed as the above-mentioned processing content. For example, a restoration operation (operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to the original position is performed. , It is repeated up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until it returns to the original position properly.

According to such a configuration, the movable operation is performed by confirming that the restoration process is started for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol change. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of being abnormal or malfunctioning. Furthermore, as a result of the restoration process being executed, the movable operating means (here, the sword) is confirmed by confirming whether or not the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position. The player side determines whether the restoration process for the decorative body 5001) has succeeded and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred has been resolved, or the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred continues. You will be able to recognize it. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred continues, the operation to the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By setting the above, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of being abnormal or malfunctioning, the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be used. It becomes possible to properly generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception.

However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) in the state where an abnormality or failure has occurred has failed, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if this is done, the effect acceptance period for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) will occur before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be properly generated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special production reception periods in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be generated. Regardless of which of the effect patterns is selected and executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the maximum time required for the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) (restoration operation (5). Addition time between the time when the operation per second) is repeated up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times) and the time required for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) (here, 2 seconds). It is possible to execute the process of advancing the production so that the special production reception period does not occur only after the lapse of time.

According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is started in the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the movable operation is performed. Even if the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality / failure has occurred before the special production reception period occurs. However, since it becomes possible to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is appropriate. Will be able to generate. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect acceptance period occurs in a state where an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the special effect is produced. The same change as when the operation for the movable operation means is performed within the reception period will occur for the production.

FIG. 284 is a time chart showing an example of such an effect process.

As shown in FIG. 284, in the example related to this effect processing, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the movable operating means (here) is performed at the start timing of the symbol change. Then, the restoration process for returning the sword decoration body 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. In addition, it takes 2 seconds to set the automatic button effect state. In addition, the special production reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the operation for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be used for the post-operation production according to the production reception. It takes 10 seconds.

In view of each time setting value, first, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, 15 seconds (restoration process), 2 seconds (setting operation), and 3 seconds (special effect reception). A time longer than "30 seconds", which is the sum of "period" and 10 seconds (post-operation effect), is allocated, and "17", which is the sum of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation). Unless the production is advanced so that the special production reception period is generated at a timing after "seconds", the design changes (in this case, the sword decoration body 5001) in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred. It is not possible to ensure the above-mentioned effectability when the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period) is started.

Therefore, in the figure, as a plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (symbol variation time of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are assigned are exemplified. However, in the production patterns A to C in which a time shorter than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is allocated, only the production progress in which the special production reception period cannot occur is executed. .. On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is assigned, a special effect acceptance period can be generated, but the symbol variation is started. By making it possible to execute only the production progress that the special production reception period cannot occur at the timing before "17 seconds (15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) addition time)". To ensure the above-mentioned effect when the symbol change (the effect pattern that can generate the special effect acceptance period) is started in the state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure. I have to.

In the example related to this effect processing, the special effect reception period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which the time longer than the above-mentioned addition time "30 seconds" is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in a part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than "30 seconds" is assigned.

However, in reality, the restoration process fails if the special production reception period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has elapsed since the symbol change started. If you do not perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) immediately after recognizing that you have done so, the special effect acceptance period will be generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It cannot be done and is not realistic. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually takes time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can be said that the above-mentioned effects are not effective unless the above-mentioned time setting values are designed on the assumption of such time values.

In this respect, what is designed to include such a time value is a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8) in which a post-operation effect is generated each time a plurality of operations are received and the effect is received. Seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) in which an effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated when the operation means to which an operation opportunity is given is maintained in an operating state for a predetermined time or longer. In the valid period (effect reception period), even if the operation is started later than the occurrence of the valid period, multiple operations or long presses are performed a proper number of times and a proper time until the valid period ends. It is possible to do it over.

In view of these facts, among the above time settings, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation), a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) should be used. Is desirable. That is, in this case, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect acceptance period, "15 seconds (restoration process)", "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)", A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds", which is the sum of "3 seconds (special production reception period)" and "10 seconds (post-operation effect)", is allocated, and "15 seconds". (Restore processing) ”and“ 8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period) ”are added to generate a special production reception period at a timing later than“ 23 seconds ”or“ 25 seconds ”. As a result, only the effect pattern E among the effect patterns A to E can be executed as the effect pattern satisfying the condition.

It should be noted that the multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) do not necessarily occur in the effect pattern (variable pattern) that can generate the special effect acceptance period. It may occur in a different production pattern. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation valid periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case. Will set the length of the valid period on the generating side instead of 2 seconds (setting operation). Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is capable of generating both a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds), those valid periods. It is desirable to set the long side instead of 2 seconds (setting operation).

Further, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, it is required to digest the symbol fluctuations one after another in a shorter time. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, each of the above-mentioned time settings is set. It is not always necessary to carry out the design related to the above. However, in this case, there is a concern that a special effect reception period will occur during the period in which the restoration process is being executed for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, even during the period in which the restoration process is being executed for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the player controls the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by the setting operation. It is desirable to be able to do it. According to such a configuration, even though the restoration process is being executed for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the post-operation effect as an effect using the movable operating means is performed. Will be feasible, and efficient processing will be realized in which both the restoration processing for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the post-operation effect are performed in parallel. Note that this process is not limited to the gaming state in which the time saving function is enabled, and may be applied to the gaming state in which the time saving function is not enabled. In this case, the design required for each time setting described above is applied. Will not be done.

Further, in the example relating to the effect processing described with reference to FIG. 284, the effect using the movable operating means may be executed as any of the effects shown in FIGS. 190 to 261. .. When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the "effect using movable operation means" shown in the figure is realized as an effect in which a specific operation-related effect, a special effect acceptance period, and a post-operation effect are sequentially performed. The Rukoto.

In addition, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is not generated only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if the operation is not performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means may be made without fail within the special effect reception period so that the post-operation effect appears. In addition, when it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), there is an operation opportunity for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at least during the symbol change in the normal game state. Although the special effect acceptance period to be granted does not occur, the effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is granted to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-mentioned restoration process in case of abnormality / failure is generated. Is possible. The effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration process in the case of an abnormality / failure is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can also occur when you are. When such a configuration is adopted, the design related to each time setting described above may be performed, but the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) may be used without the design related to each time setting described above. It becomes possible to secure the above-mentioned effectability when an effect pattern that can generate a special effect acceptance period is started in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred.

Further, in the example related to this effect processing, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player, but the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination, or the setting to the automatic button effect state itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function always functions. It may be provided as a possible gaming machine.

[Post-operation production that suggests an automatically accepted operation target]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the first reception effect (effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) is executed according to the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. Even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period, when the predetermined timing within the period in which the first reception effect is executed arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated and the operation button 410 is operated. The same post-operation effect as is executed. In addition, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed within the period in which the second reception effect (the effect in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the establishment of the production condition different from the predetermined production condition is executed. Similarly, when the predetermined timing within the period in which the second reception effect is executed arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed is performed. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, even if the operation means on the side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 to which the operation opportunity is not given is erroneously operated when the reception effect is generated, the operation opportunity is lost during the operation. It will be possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the post-production cannot be confirmed. It should be noted that the "predetermined effect condition" and the "effect condition different from the predetermined effect condition" can be separately satisfied as a result of the effect determination being performed based on the result of the jackpot determination.

However, if the effect reception is automatically generated in a place unknown to the player due to "looking away" or the like, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed, the post-operation effect becomes an operation target. It will occur without any involvement of the player with respect to the operating means (for example, the operation button 410). That is, in this case, since the player cannot recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is the post-operation effect, the first reception effect and the second reception effect If the degree of expectation is different, there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline because it cannot be recognized.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the ratio in which a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (ratio in which the first reception effect is executed) is set according to the different effect conditions. Judgments related to various effects (effect judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment) are made so as to be higher than the satisfied ratio (ratio at which the second reception effect is executed), and the symbol variation is based on the result of the judgment. I try to control the production. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it is possible to predict that there is a high possibility that the first reception effect has been executed. Become.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception is automatically generated, the “image suggesting the type of operation target” that appears during the period when the effect reception is permitted (No. 1). If it is the reception effect of 1, it corresponds to the button image BTG, and if it is the second reception effect, it corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG). The post-operation production based on the reception is started. According to such a configuration, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, the post-operation effect is executed while the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the inability to recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is the post-operation effect caused by the operation.

In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) and the display position of the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" may be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs. However, they may be different, and the point is that the type of the operation means to be operated is expressed as a display on the effect display device 1600 at the time when the effect is started after the operation. Just do it. Further, when the post-operation effect is generated based on the effect reception generated by the operation by the player, the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" may be hidden when the post-operation effect is generated. As in the case where the above-mentioned effect reception is automatically generated, the post-operation effect based on the operation by the player is started without hiding the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" and keeping it in the displayed state. You may do so. However, considering the simplification of the design and the processing load, regardless of whether or not the production reception is automatically generated, the "image suggesting the type of operation target" is not hidden and is maintained as the display state. Therefore, it is desirable to start the post-operation effect based on the operation by the player.

FIG. 285 shows an example of progress in the production when the effect reception is automatically generated and the post-operation effect is started without hiding the “image suggesting the type of the operation target” while maintaining the display state. It is a time chart showing. 286 and 287 are diagrams showing an effect display example that appears in the effect display device 1600 when the effect pattern to be produced is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 285. In the production example, it is assumed that the production reception is in a situation where it can be automatically generated.

That is, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the specific effect pattern in which the period of timings tf1 to tf3 in the execution period of the symbol change can be set as the "effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation)". Assuming that is started based on the result of the jackpot determination, as shown in FIG. 286 (a), the effect display device 1600 first performs variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol).

In this specific effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), the effect reception (operation) is allowed shortly before the arrival of the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) in the execution period of the symbol variation. As a suggestion precursor effect, the specific operation-related effect exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246 (may be a specific operation-related effect illustrated separately) is performed. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. A common display effect is performed in the above, and while the common display effect is being performed, it is concealed whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. .. However, when the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) arrives after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result with a relatively low expectation. Relatively expected by the appearance of a production situation indicating that the sword is in a state, or by the appearance of a production situation indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state to be operated as a second production result with a relatively high expectation. It will be shown which of the operation button 410 with a low degree and the sword decoration body 5001 with a relatively high expectation is given an operation opportunity.

FIG. 286 (c) is an operation as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b). An effect situation indicating that the button 410 is in a state to be operated appears, and an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The first reception effect is started. In the effect determination, the first effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 286 (d) described later appears) or the second effect condition (the effect result shown in FIG. 286 (e) described later) appears. The production status) when the pattern) is satisfied is shown.

In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and the operation of the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time when the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the effect reception is permitted, and the operation button 410 is not operated, and the predetermined timing within the valid period (here). Then, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled at the timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

That is, in this case, the same change as when the effect reception is made by the operation with respect to the operation button 410 within the period set so that the effect reception is allowed (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) is caused to the effect. Will be. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the low-expected mode effect (FIG. 286 (d)) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 286 (e)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

However, regardless of which mode the post-operation effect is executed, the model image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is not hidden and the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. Even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, the effect after the operation is performed according to the "effect reception for the operation button 410" (relatively expected degree). Is the effect after the operation on the lower side).

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 285, the period for which the effect reception is permitted is terminated early at the timing tf2 when the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled and the effect reception is automatically generated. It will be. After that, while the production reception is not allowed, the post-operation production is started with the model image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 in the display state, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing tf5 at which the effect is finished after the operation is reached.

According to such a configuration, a model image imitating the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that was the operation target is displayed within the period from the start to the end of the post-operation effect. The period (timing tf2 to tf4) and the period (timing tf4 to tf5) in which the same image is not displayed will appear. Therefore, even if the post-operation effect is started while the image imitating the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that has been the operation target is displayed, the image is not displayed. It is expected that the tension due to having to confirm the post-operation effect before the operation is performed is preferably maintained.

Further, in this effect example, the period of timing tf2 to tf3 and the period of timing tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length. According to such a configuration, when the time that doubles the "remaining time indicated by the bar display" has elapsed when the effect reception is automatically generated, the operation means (here, the operation button) that has been the operation target has elapsed. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the imitation image imitating 410) is hidden, it is possible to prevent the image from being overlooked (the image is hidden during the post-operation effect). It will be expected to suppress the decline in the game entertainment when it is played. In this case, the bar display may be continued without being hidden when the effect reception is automatically generated.

On the other hand, in this effect example, in the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed, the effect situation is not shown in FIG. 286 (c). The effect situation shown in 287 (f) (the third effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (g) described later appears in the effect determination performed based on the result of the jackpot determination), or the fourth effect pattern). The effect condition (the effect state when the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (h) described later) is satisfied) may appear.

Also in this effect situation (FIG. 287 (f)), as shown in the figure, the button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and at the same time, the button image BTG is displayed in the display area. An instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as "press", an arrow display in the downward direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the point that the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state is also the same as the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c).

However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), the button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in a specific mode (here, a mode of wearing a flame). The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation (relatively expected as a post-operation effect) than in the normal mode (here, the mode that does not wear a flame) that appeared in the effect situation shown in 286 (c). It has come to be suggested that a high production result (here, the rate at which "extreme heat !!") appears) is in a high situation.

Further, even in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the effect reception is permitted, and the operation button 410 is not operated, and the predetermined timing within the valid period (here). Then, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled at the timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

In this respect, even when the effect reception is automatically generated when the button image BTG is in the effect state displayed in the specific mode, the button image BTG is in the normal mode as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and 287. Similar to the above case (FIGS. 286 (d) and (e)) in which the effect reception is automatically generated when the displayed effect status is in effect, the "specific decorative member SDY (sudare) does not operate and the effect display device". A low-expected mode effect in which a chance !! is displayed in 1600 (see FIG. 287 (g)) "or" a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated, and the effect display device 1600 is extremely hot !! The displayed high-expected mode effect (see FIG. 287 (h)) ”is executed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410).

However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and 287 (h), the image imitating the operation button 410 is not hidden regardless of the mode in which the post-operation effect is executed. The post-operation effect is started while this is displayed in a specific mode (here, a flame-wearing mode). As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, the post-operation effect is not only performed in response to the "effect reception for the operation button 410", but also a specific mode with high expectation. It becomes possible to recognize that the button image BTG was displayed in (here, the mode of wearing a flame).

That is, in this effect example, even when the same effect mode (for example, chance !!) appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the model image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the specific mode. When the post-effect is started (for example, see FIG. 287 (g)), the post-operation effect is started while the image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode (for example,). Since the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than that in FIG. 286 (d), it is suitable for the game entertainment by making it possible to recognize such a difference in the effect even after the effect after the operation is started. Will be expected to be maintained.

Also in this production example, the timing at which the period for which the production reception is permitted ends, the timing at which the simulated image (specific mode) imitating the operation button 410 is hidden, and the period between timings tf2 and tf3. The point that the period of the timings tf3 to tf4 is set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 285, which is the same as the case of the above-mentioned example with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to 286 (e). be.

On the other hand, in this effect example, it is shown in FIGS. 286 (c) and 287 (f) at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed. The effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i) is not any of the effect situations, and the fifth effect condition (the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (j) described later appears in the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination. The effect pattern) or the sixth effect condition (the effect situation when the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (k) described later) is satisfied) may appear.

In this effect situation (FIG. 287 (i)), as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG (image imitating the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area. In addition, an instruction display prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, a character display such as "put the sword", an arrow display in the lower right direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time when the production reception is allowed). Is coming to appear. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 to which the operation opportunity is given moves to the operation position, which allows the player to operate the sword decoration body to the original position.

Further, also in this effect example, the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) that is the operation target within the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the effect reception is allowed is operated. However, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period (here, timing tf2 (see FIG. 285)).

In this regard, even when the production reception is automatically generated when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the production status in which the button image BTG is displayed as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and 287 (k). Similar to the above-mentioned case (FIG. 286 (d), (e) or FIG. 287 (g), (h)) in which the effect reception is automatically generated at the time of Instead, the low-expected mode effect in which the chance !! is displayed in the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 287 (j)) "or the" specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated, and the effect display device 1600 operates. The high-expected mode effect (see FIG. 287 (k)) in which the intense heat is displayed is executed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when the effect is accepted by the operation on the sword decoration body 5001). It has become.

However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and 287 (k), the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed regardless of which mode the post-operation effect is executed. The effect is started after the operation without setting it to the displayed state. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it can be recognized that the effect after the operation is performed in response to the "effect reception for the sword decoration body 5001". Become.

That is, in this production example, even when the same production mode (for example, chance !!) appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed. When the post-effect is started (for example, see FIG. 287 (j)), the post-operation effect is started while the image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode or a specific mode. (For example, see FIG. 286 (d) and FIG. 287 (g)), the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than that of (for example, see FIG. 286 (d) and FIG. 287 (g)). ..

Also in this production example, the timing at which the period for which the production reception is permitted ends, the timing at which the model image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is hidden, and the timings tf2 to tf3. The point that the period of and the period of timings tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 285, and in the case of the above-mentioned example with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to (e). Is similar to.

According to the above-mentioned effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the operation target suggestion is generated because the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations. It becomes possible to simultaneously confirm both the aspect of the image and the aspect of the post-operation effect, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the above-mentioned production examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the production situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) appears, the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) appears, and FIG. 287 (i). The same production content is made to appear as a post-operation effect when the effect situation shown in is displayed. However, instead of this, the production situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) and the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) (a situation in which a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 has occurred) are generated. Although the same post-operation effect is generated in the above, the operation is different from this in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i) (a situation in which a reception effect is given to the sword decoration body 5001). Post-effects (eg, post-operation effects shown in FIG. 269) may be generated. Further, the post-operation effect is different for each effect depending on the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), and the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i). It may be made to appear. In addition, when adopting these other examples, the precursory effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) may not necessarily be executed.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, after executing the "precursor effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) (here, a specific operation-related effect)" suggesting that the reception effect will occur soon. "Reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (effect situation shown in FIGS. 286 (c) and 287 (f))" and "an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001". The reception effect (the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i)) is generated, but the reception effect (in FIG. 287 (i)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It is not always necessary to generate the "shown production status)". That is, in this case, after the precursor effect suggesting that the reception effect will occur soon is executed, at the timing tf1, the reception effect is shown in FIG. 286 (c) as the reception effect in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity. Either the effect status is displayed or the effect status shown in FIG. 287 (f) is displayed. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 is pressed when the post-operation effect is started. The degree of expectation for the post-operation effect will differ depending on whether the imitated image is displayed in a normal mode or in a specific mode with high expectations (here, a mode wearing a flame). Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In this case, it is desirable that the content of the precursory effect is such that it cannot appear in the precursory effect when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Further, there is a common precursor between the case where the image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode and the case where the image is displayed in a specific mode with high expectation (here, a mode wearing a flame). It is desirable to execute the effect and, as a result, advance the effect so that a model image imitating the operation button 410 appears in a normal mode or a specific mode.

Further, the simulated image imitating the operation button 410 shall be displayed in any of three or more modes including a normal mode and a specific mode, and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of these modes is displayed. You may do so. However, in the above-mentioned production example, even if a model image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in any of these modes at timing tf1, the post-operation effect is started while the mode of the model image is displayed. It will be.

Further, after the appearance of a specific precursor effect, the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), and the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c). Similarly, in the effect display device 1600, an image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal manner, but when there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not enabled and the post-operation effect is produced. Is not executed (not shown) ”may appear. That is, in this case, when a reception effect in which an image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal manner occurs, it is grasped whether the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled when there is no operation by the player. Since it will be possible to make it difficult, it is expected that the tension when the reception effect occurs (the tension about whether the player himself should operate and start the effect after the operation) is preferably maintained. Become so. On the other hand, when the image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a specific manner, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled and the post-operation effect always occurs even if the player does not operate the image. This, coupled with the suggestion that the degree of expectation is high, makes it possible to suitably improve the game entertainment.

It should be noted that, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is imitated in the effect display device 1600, as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), instead of the “effect state shown in FIG. 286 (c)”. When the image is displayed in the normal mode, but the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not enabled and the post-operation effect is not executed when there is no operation by the player (not shown). If the operation button 410 is not operated before the end of the effect reception period, the post-operation effect will not be executed. However, in this case as well, when the production reception period ends and the production reception becomes unacceptable, the image imitating the operation button 410 should not be hidden and should be displayed in the normal mode. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, even though the reception effect in which the image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode has occurred, the effect is such that the post-operation effect is not executed without the player performing the operation. It becomes possible to recognize that it has become, and when the image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode in the next reception effect, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. In particular, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to operate it without excessive expectations.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when the production reception is generated by the automatic production function, the display mode of the image imitating the operation button 410 and the image imitating the sword decoration 5001 is changed. The post-operation effect was started with these simulated images displayed in the changed display mode, but the operation button 410 was imitated with the display mode and display position during the effect reception period. The post-operation effect may be started in a state where an image or an image imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed.

The post-operation effect that is started while displaying the image imitating the operation button 410 and the image imitating the sword decoration 5001 is the display effect on the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the lamp provided on the game board 5. It may be any one of an effect, an effect by sound, and a movable effect by a decorative accessory, or it may be an appropriate combination of each of these effects. Further, as will be described later, the first post-operation effect that is started while displaying the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001, and the image and the sword decoration that imitate the operation button 410. The second post-operation effect started after the timing tf4 at which the simulated image imitating the body 5001 is hidden may be executed respectively.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when the production reception is generated by the automatic production function, the operation is performed while displaying the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001. I tried to start the post-production. However, in terms of processing load, even if the production reception is generated by the operation by the player, the post-operation production is started with the image imitating the operation button 410 and the image imitating the sword decoration 5001 displayed. It is desirable that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process.

In the above-mentioned production examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, as in the case of the production example described later, a model image imitating the operation button 410 and a model image imitating the sword decoration body 5001 are dynamically displayed. , The effect may be started after the operation while maintaining the dynamic display.

Further, when the precursor effect showing that the reception effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is generated soon is generated and then the reception effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is executed, the operation button 410 is also pressed. The effect may be started after the operation while the imitated image is displayed.

[Post-operation production that makes it difficult to recognize the timing of automatic reception]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, if the player wants to generate a post-operation effect by his / her own operation while such an "automatic effect function" can be enabled, it is determined in advance within the period when the reception effect is performed. It must be operated before the timing (timing when the automatic effect function is activated) arrives, and if the player tries to operate it, the validity period of the reception effect will be increased accordingly. It will be substantially shortened. Therefore, in the situation where such a reception effect is being executed, it is not possible to recognize what kind of operation should be performed, or an image suggesting the elapsed time (remaining time) from the occurrence of the valid period is displayed. If the player confirms it one by one, the reception of the production may be automatically generated by the time the player tries to operate the game, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of images (for example, the operation button 410) that imitate a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the effect reception are displayed. About "how to move a specific operation means" by displaying it as a moving image by sequentially displaying (multiple images) in which the operation state (operation state) is depicted differently. The operation method of is suggested. Further, when displaying the image as a moving image in this way, a predetermined predetermined image among a plurality of images is displayed as the first image to be displayed, and a plurality of subsequent images are displayed in a predetermined order thereafter. By displaying the images in sequence, you can see the elapsed time since the specific reception effect (valid period) occurred, just by looking at how much the display as the moving image has progressed. It is also possible to recognize.

That is, in this case, the operation method of "how to move the specific operation means" and the specific reception effect are executed only by looking at the image imitating the specific operation means targeted for the production reception. It will be possible to simultaneously recognize the elapsed time since the period (valid period) has occurred. As a result, the time required for the player to grasp the operation method and the remaining time after thinking about the operation can be shortened, and by extension, the operation can be performed before the production reception is automatically generated. It will be expected to encourage.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process of automatically generating the above-mentioned effect reception can be executed at the timing after half of the period during which the specific reception effect is executed. This also encourages the operation before the production reception is automatically generated.

However, even if these processes are performed, it cannot be completely avoided that the production reception is automatically generated before the player operates the operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is more important to take measures to prevent the hobby of the game from deteriorating even if the situation occurs. When taking the measures, the above-mentioned process of "prompting the user to operate before the effect reception is automatically generated" may not always be performed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, even if the effect reception is automatically generated, the process of displaying the simulated image as a moving image is continued without being stopped. That is, a predetermined time (video) after the production reception is automatically generated by continuously displaying the progress image as a moving image even after the production reception is automatically generated and the production is started after the operation. While the image is being continued), it is difficult to recognize that the effect has been started after the operation, and the operation is performed by the player while the simulated image as the moving image is continuously displayed. For example, it is possible to give an impression as if the post-operation effect was started by the operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the player is performed later than the "automatic generation of the effect reception", it seems as if the effect change is caused by the operation. In order to give a nice impression, the post-operation production is performed as a stepwise production. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the change in the production from the second stage onward is caused by the operation by the player, and the "automatic generation of the production reception" deprives the player of the operation opportunity. It is expected that it will be difficult to give an impression.

FIG. 288 shows a plurality of images (sword decoration image SYG) imitating a specific operation means (here, sword decoration body 5001) that is the target of the production reception when a specific reception effect occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of displaying as a moving image by sequentially displaying an image (here, a plurality of images in which the operating state (operation state) of the sword decoration body 5001 is depicted differently). be.

Now, assuming that a specific reception effect is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and a period in which the effect reception is permitted occurs, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a specific operating means (here, here, the target of the effect reception). As a sword decoration image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001), first, the sword decoration image SYGa (predetermined model image) shown in FIG. 288 (a) is displayed as a "first displayed image". At this time, the bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed is also displayed in the state where the gauge is full.

Here, the sword decoration image SYGa shown in FIG. 288 (a) is a moving image of a "image imitating the sword decoration 5001" when a reception effect is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. When displaying it as an image, it is always selected as the "first image to be displayed". That is, the state in which the bar display of "gauge full" is displayed within the period in which the production reception is permitted can be said to be the state in which the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed, and these images correspond to each other. It can be said that it is a thing.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 288 (b) to (f), the bar display indicating the remaining time is depicted as a moving image in which the gauge amount decreases with the passage of time (multiple gauge remaining amounts are different). (Sequentially displayed by images), and for the sword decoration image SYG, multiple images (sword decoration in the figure) so that the movement amount (operation amount) is depicted as a moving image that increases with the passage of time. Images SYGb to SYGf) will be displayed in a predetermined order.

According to such a configuration, the operation method about "how to operate the sword decoration body 5001" and the operation method about "how to operate the sword decoration body 5001" just by looking at the movement of the sword decoration image SYG that appears when a specific reception effect occurs. It is possible to recognize both the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period for which the production reception is allowed (which can be grasped by the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). It will be like. Therefore, even though the player himself tried to operate it, it is expected that it will be difficult to cause the timing when the production reception is automatically generated before the operation by the player is performed. become.

Here, in the specific reception effect, the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) of the period in which the effect reception is permitted (the timing after half of the period in which the specific reception effect is executed has elapsed). ) Will automatically generate the production reception. Therefore, when the player himself intends to operate the sword decoration body 5001, it is required to operate the sword decoration body 5001 until the moving image as the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and advanced on the "sword decoration image SYGd". It becomes.

By the way, if it is decided to execute a specific reception effect so that the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) even if there is no operation by the player, the "sword decoration image SYGe" and The "sword decoration image SYGf" can be said to be an image that cannot be originally displayed regardless of whether or not the player has operated it. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d), the “sword decoration image SYGe” and the “sword decoration image SYGf” are used. Is intentionally displayed, which will be described later.

In FIGS. 289 to 291, although a specific reception effect is generated in which a model image imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is dynamically displayed, the operation by the player is performed until the timing when the effect reception is automatically generated arrives. It is a figure which shows an example about the production which appears when it is not in time. In the production example, it is assumed that the production reception is in a situation where it can be automatically generated.

In FIG. 289 (a), the number of reservations is 2, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the situation.

FIG. 289 (b) shows the specific moving image TDG based on the fact that a predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 289 (a). It shows the production status that has started to be displayed. In addition, as a "predetermined effect condition", for example, accumulating a certain value of the score accumulated in the effect may be mentioned.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" is set as a waiting state (up to 3 times). ) It is possible to execute the process of waiting. In this regard, in FIG. 289 (b), in the effect display device 1600, the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" is started to be displayed in the frame in which the first coin is shaped, and the "sword stock" is displayed. By displaying the count value to be changed from "0" to "1", the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is newly in the production status of waiting for execution. Has come to be suggested.

Here, regarding the specific moving image TDG related to this production example, it is assumed that each image shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to 255 (e) is sequentially displayed in a frame in the shape of a coin to be displayed as a moving image. It has become. Then, after the "image shown in FIG. 255 (b)" is displayed and the images shown in "FIG. 255 (e)" are sequentially displayed, a series of these displays (FIGS. 255 (b) to (). e)) is repeated by loop processing.

In FIG. 289 (c), after the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” shown in FIG. 289 (b) is started to be displayed, a predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied again. Based on this, a new "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)" different from the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" that has already started to be displayed is displayed. Is shown.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is set as a waiting state (maximum). It is possible to execute the process of waiting (up to 3 times). In this regard, in FIG. 289 (c), the second coin is displayed in the effect display device 1600 in which the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" is displayed in the frame in which the first coin is shaped. By newly starting the display of "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)" and changing the count value of "sword stock" from "1" to "2" even in the frame in the shape of It has been suggested that the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" for two times is in the state of waiting for execution.

Here, in this production example, when the "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)" is newly displayed in the frame in which the second coin is formed, the frame in which the first coin is formed is formed. A process of synchronizing with the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" which is already displayed in the display is performed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the timer value of the predetermined timer related to the specific moving image TDG is updated at predetermined time intervals, and the timer value is updated when the specific moving image TDG is newly displayed. The image corresponding to the timer value (any of the images shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to (e)) is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image" with reference to.

For example, assuming that the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated every predetermined time within the range of "1" to "4", if the timer value referred to above is "1", FIG. 255 (b). ) Is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image", and when the timer value referred to above is "2", the image shown in FIG. 255 (c) is "first displayed". When the timer value referred to above is "3", the image shown in FIG. 255 (d) is selectively displayed as "the first image to be displayed", and the above is performed. When the referenced timer value is "4", the image shown in FIG. 255 (e) is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image". Then, after the new display of the specific moving image TDG is started in this way, each time the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated, the image corresponding to the updated timer value is newly designated as the "specific moving image TDG". Display it so that the previously displayed image is hidden. By performing such processing on the specific moving image TDGa in the first coin and the specific moving image TDGb in the second coin, respectively, the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image are performed. The TDGb will be displayed as moving images synchronized with each other regardless of their display start timings (in FIG. 289 (c), both the specified moving image TDGa and the specified moving image TDGb are shown in FIG. 255 (d). Displayed as the image shown). The specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are not limited to this as a method for displaying them in synchronization, and other methods may be adopted.

However, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, no specific moving image TDG is displayed for the update process for the predetermined timer at predetermined time intervals (for example, the situation shown in FIG. 289 (a)). In addition, it is also executed in the situation where the symbol change is not performed), and by this, "Specific moving image TDGa (Specific moving image TDG)" is executed within the frame in which the first coin is shaped. Which of the images shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to 255 (e) is selected as the "first image to be displayed" is different each time, and this is undefined ( The "first displayed image" changes according to the timing when the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied). That is, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the “first displayed image” is predetermined as the “sword decorative image SYG moving image” within the period in which the specific reception effect is performed. (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f)) "and" moving image as a specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e)) "in which the" first displayed image "is indefinite. Are displayed respectively.

After the specified moving image TDGb is newly started to be displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), the specified moving image TDGa and the specified moving image TDGb are displayed and advanced as moving images synchronized with each other. ..

Then, while the specified moving image TDGa and the specified moving image TDGb are being displayed as moving images synchronized with each other in this way, the "sword decoration body 5001" which is in the state of waiting for execution is described as an effect mode for generating an operation opportunity. When the condition for executing "(second effect condition) is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment is displayed in the first coin as shown in FIG. 289 (e). It is suggested that the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" has been started by displaying a coin toss-like effect motion (predetermined motion) on the "specific motion image TDGa". I try to do it. At this time, the peripheral control MPU1511a performs a process of changing the previously displayed "sword stock 2" to "stock is being released", and at the same time, the background image is flipped to a "specific motion image TDGa" like a coin toss. The effect changes (effects) that accompany the appearance of the effect (predetermined movement).

In the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a coin toss-like effect motion (predetermined motion) appears in the “specific motion image TDGa”, the “specific motion image TDGa” is shown in FIG. 289 (f). The player is trying to execute the "directing mode that generates an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" while moving the "" without returning it to the original position, whereby the player to the specified motion image TDGa is executed. The toss is encouraged. Here, as an "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001," first, a display such as "a chance to pull out a sword" and "a sword to be paid" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , The process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 to the operation position is performed.

After that, the specified moving image TDGa that has performed a predetermined movement remains in the moved state, and the display progress from before the movement is continued. Therefore, even in the moved state, the specified moving image TDGa is displayed and advanced as a moving image displayed in synchronization with the specified moving image TDGb displayed in the second coin. The specific moving image TDGa according to this embodiment is displayed in a different mode from that before the movement (here, in a slightly laterally rotated state) in the moved state, and this also causes the "sword decoration body 5001". It is suggested that the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity" is in the started state.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" in this way, as shown in FIG. 290 (g), there is an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001. The specific reception effect to which is given is started. In the specific reception effect, the image imitating the sword decoration 5001 is dynamically displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 288, and the sword decoration image that appears when the specific reception effect occurs. Just by looking at the movement of SYG, the operation method about "how to operate the sword decoration body 5001" and the elapsed time after the period when the production reception is allowed (sword decoration image SYGa) As described above, it is possible to recognize both the sword decoration image SYG as a starting point and the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image (which can be grasped).

Therefore, even in this production example, assuming that the valid period corresponding to the specific reception production occurs at the timing shown in FIG. 290 (g), first, the "image imitating the sword decoration 5001" and the "production reception" Is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 288 (a), and then FIGS. 290 (h) and (i) (corresponding to FIGS. 288 (b) and (c)). The display will be advanced in each mode such as.

However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is not performed within the valid period corresponding to the specific reception effect, and is shown in FIG. 290 (j) (corresponding to FIG. 288 (d)). When the timing arrives, the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is started.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, even when the effect reception is automatically generated in the specific reception effect, the image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as a moving image. It is decided to continue the process as it is without stopping it. That is, as shown in FIGS. 290 (j) and 291 (k) and 291 (l), even after the effect reception is automatically generated and the post-operation effect is started, the image (sword decoration image) as a moving image is used. By displaying SYG) continuously and as it is, it is recognized that the post-operation effect is started for a predetermined time (while the moving image is continued) after the effect reception is automatically generated. If the operation by the player is performed while the sword decorative image SYG is continuously displayed (within the period shown in FIGS. 290 (j) and 291 (k) and (l)). It is possible to give the impression that the post-operation effect has been started by the operation.

Further, in this production example, after the operation, at least while the dynamic display as the sword decorative image SYG is continued (within the period shown in FIGS. 290 (j) and 291 (k) and (l)). Regardless of whether the first effect result (FIG. 290 (m)) or the second effect result (FIG. 290 (n)) having different expectations appear as the effect, the same (common) effect mode (expectation degree) is used. (Aspects not suggested) are made to appear (first stage production change). Here, as shown in FIGS. 290 (j) and 291 (k) and 291 (l), the sword decoration body 5001 is set as "a mode in which the aura member 5040 appears" as the "same production mode", and the production is performed. The effect corresponding to the aura member is also displayed on the sword decoration image SYG displayed on the display device 1600.

Then, after the dynamic display as the sword decorative image SYG is hidden, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the "specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the effect is produced. A low-expected mode effect in which a chance !! is displayed on the display device 1600 (see FIG. 291 (m)) "or" a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated, and the effect display device 1600 is extremely hot! The high-expected mode effect (see FIG. 291 (n)) in which! Is displayed is further executed as a post-operation effect (second stage effect change). Further, while the degree of expectation is suggested by the post-operation effect, the drive control for returning the sword decoration body 5001 and the aura member 5040 to the original positions is performed.

According to the configuration in which the post-operation effect is executed as a stepwise effect in this way, the operation by the player becomes "automatic generation of the effect reception (timing shown in FIG. 290 (j) (FIG. 288 (d))"). Even if it is not in time, if it is delayed while the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued (until the timing shown in FIG. 290 (l) (FIG. 288 (f))). If so, since the post-operation effect (second stage effect change) is performed in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation, it gives the impression that the effect change is caused by the operation. It will be possible to make it possible, and it is expected that it will be difficult to give the impression that the player has been deprived of the operation opportunity by the "automatic generation of the production reception".

In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, the valid period corresponding to the reception effect is set within the specific reception effect (FIGS. 290 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and 291 (l)). The image displayed at the time of starting (the image displayed first) is a predetermined "moving image as a sword decorative image SYG (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f))", and the image is indefinite. Each time, a different "moving image as a specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))" is displayed. That is, the progress status in the "moving image as the specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))" instead of the "moving image as the sword decorative image SYG (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f))". If the player confirms the above, a situation may occur in which the elapsed time from the start of the specific reception effect is erroneously recognized, but according to the above configuration, the specific reception effect As a result of erroneously recognizing the elapsed time since the start of the operation, a situation occurs in which the operation by the player is not in time for the "automatic occurrence of the production reception (timing shown in FIG. Even if this is the case, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Incidentally, the specific reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291 is basically advanced in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 290 (g) appears, and at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 290 (j) appears. It has become. However, at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, only the post-operation effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation is executed, and the timing tf4 shown in FIG. 285 that the moving image continued as the sword decoration image SYG is hidden. It can be said that it is different from the production example shown in FIG. 285 in that the post-operation effect suggesting the degree of expectation is newly started after the arrival of. In this production example, the above-mentioned alternative example relating to FIG. 285 may be applied.

Further, also in this production example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the production reception to the end of the period initially set as the production reception period (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time from the end of the period initially set as the production reception period until the moving image is hidden (timing tf3 to tf4) should be set as the same length of time. desirable.

It should be noted that a plurality of modes are prepared as the specific moving image TDG, and a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared as a simulated image (here, the sword decorative image SYG) imitating the operation means to be operated. Then, when the above-mentioned predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied, it is determined which of the plurality of modes is to be displayed as the specific moving image TDG, and the specific moving image TDG is displayed in which of those modes. Depending on whether or not the image is used, a mode with a high degree of expectation may be likely to appear as the above-mentioned image (here, the sword decorative image SYG).

In the above-mentioned production example, a case where the second production condition is satisfied and the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is executed after two specific moving images TDG are displayed is exemplified. However, the second effect condition may be satisfied in a state where only one specific moving image TDG is displayed. Further, even when the second effect condition is satisfied (when a predetermined movement appears in the specific moving image TDG), the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" is not always required. It may not be executed, and for example, any one of a plurality of production modes including "a production mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" may be selectively executed. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, such a specific moving image TDG may not always be displayed, and a specific reception production may be started when a predetermined timing arrives while the design production is being performed. You may do it.

Even though "the same image (here, sword decoration image SYG)" and "bar display with the same length" are displayed within the valid period when the production reception is allowed, the production reception is allowed. The first reception effect and the second reception effect having different lengths of valid periods may be executed. That is, in this case, for the "bar display", the speed at which the gauge amount decreases depends on the length of the valid period, but for the "sword image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)", Regardless of whether the first reception effect or the second reception effect is being executed, the operation method regarding "how to operate the operation target (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" , It is possible to recognize both the elapsed time since the period when the production reception is allowed occurs (which can be grasped by the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). As possible, it is desirable that the display progress as a moving image is performed in the same manner. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it is difficult to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, the "image (here, sword decoration)" As long as the image SYG) ”is confirmed, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time since the reception of the production was allowed. Then, based on the elapsed time grasped in this way, by checking whether the remaining gauge amount of the bar display is large or small, which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed? Will be able to be recognized. That is, since the production expectation is usually different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the post-operation effect based on the recognition of the type of the reception effect. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

When the above-mentioned first reception effect and second reception effect are prepared, it is desirable to set the time from the occurrence of the valid period to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception as different times from each other. When the different times are set in this way, the time until the effect reception is automatically generated may be misunderstood, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the operation is not in time even though the player himself tries to operate it. However, according to the production example in which the dynamic display by the "image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)" is continued or the post-operation effect is executed step by step, such a situation occurs. However, the decline in the enjoyment of games will be suitably suppressed.

In the above production example, in the case of displaying a model image (here, the sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means to be operated as a moving image in a specific reception production, as shown in FIG. 288, "operation start". The operation from the position to be performed (see FIG. 288 (a)) to the position where the operation is completed (see FIG. 288 (f)) is adjusted to the length of the valid period as the specific reception effect. We decided to advance the display. However, one operation from the "position where the operation is started (see FIG. 288 (a))" to the "position where the operation is finished (see FIG. 288 (f))" is not necessarily adjusted to the length of the valid period. It is not necessary to advance the display, for example, the “position where the operation is started (see FIG. 288 (a))” and the “position where the operation is completed (FIG. 288) over the time until the end of the valid period. (Refer to (f)) ”may be displayed as a moving image that repeats the reciprocating movement. The point is that the image displayed at the start of the valid period corresponding to the reception effect (the image displayed first) is predetermined, and after that, the moving images are displayed in the predetermined order and progress speed. If it is progressed (sequentially displayed by multiple images), the operation method about "how to operate the operation target (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" and the production reception are allowed. Both the elapsed time since the period occurred (which can be grasped by the amount of movement of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYG (here, the amount of movement including how many reciprocating movements)). It is possible to recognize.

In the above-mentioned production example, the "post-operation effect performed stepwise" performed based on the effect reception may be another aspect. For example, in a state where the moving image as a simulated image imitating the operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is continued, the "light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5" is set to 1. Start as a production after the operation of the stage. Then, after the moving image as a simulated image imitating the operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) to be operated is hidden, and "light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5". Is being executed as the post-operation effect of the first stage, and the "display effect in the effect display device 1600" or the "movable effect by the decorative accessory" (or at least one of them) is performed in two stages. It is started as a post-operation effect of the eyes (in the post-operation effect of the second stage, an effect target different from the effect target used in the post-operation effect of the first stage is used). According to such a configuration, the "light emission effect by the lamp provided in the game board 5" is the "display effect in the effect display device 1600" or the "movable effect by the decorative accessory" (or at least one of them). Since it is expected that it will function as a precursory effect, even if it is recognized that this is a post-operation effect of the first stage, it will be uncomfortable (a predetermined time has passed since the effect was accepted). Until this is done, it becomes possible to provide a post-operation effect without a feeling of strangeness that the post-operation effect using the effect display device 1600 and the post-operation effect using a decorative accessory are not executed.

Further, the same effect target (for example, the light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5) is used for the first stage post-operation effect and the second stage post-operation effect, and then the operation target is set. In the state where the moving image as a simulated image imitating the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is continued, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) is performed in a form in which the degree of expectation is not suggested. In this way, after the moving image as the simulated image is hidden, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) may be advanced as a mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested.

A plurality of modes having different expectations were prepared as modes of the moving image as a simulated image imitating the operating means to be operated (here, the sword decoration body 5001), and the moving image was displayed in any of these modes. Even in that case, the moving image may be continuously displayed even after the production reception occurs in both of the modes.

Even if a model image imitating the operation means to be operated (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed as a moving image, if the operation means is not operated within the valid period, the effect is produced. A special reception effect in which reception does not occur may be generated by the establishment of an effect condition different from the effect condition for generating the specific reception effect. That is, in this case, the production reception is automatically generated by displaying the "moving image by the same image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)" and the "bar display having the same length" respectively. It will be possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the "specific reception effect" or the "special reception effect" that does not automatically generate the effect reception is being executed, providing a tense reception effect. You will be able to do it. However, the production reception occurs by making different production contents appear as the post-operation effect between the "specific reception effect" in which the effect reception is automatically generated and the "special reception effect" in which the effect reception is not automatically generated. It is desirable to make people recognize which reception production was done when they did. In addition, there is a production pattern that allows only one of "specific reception production" that automatically generates production reception and "special reception production" that does not automatically generate production reception, and both of them occur at different timings. By preparing an effect pattern that enables it and executing one of a plurality of effect patterns including those effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the time of the symbol change, " A "specific reception effect" or a "special reception effect" may appear.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, a moving image as a simulated image imitating the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to be operated when the production reception is generated by the automatic production function. The post-operation effect was started while continuing the progress of the dynamic display, and the post-operation effect was executed step by step. However, in terms of processing load, even when the production reception is generated by the operation by the player, the moving image as a simulated image imitating the operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to be operated is used. It is desirable to start the post-operation effect while continuing the progress related to the target display, and to execute the post-operation effect step by step so that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process.

[Post-operation production that suggests the type of reception production that was automatically received]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with such an "automatic production function", even if the player forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1, the production reception is automatically generated, so that the player has an opportunity to operate. There is a concern that not only will the tension when given be eliminated, but the display effect will be reduced to a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image is played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a first reception effect and a second reception effect in which the time from the time when the effect reception is allowed to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception is different. In the above, the remaining time image (for example, bar display) and the pachinko image (for example, button image BTG) displayed at the effect reception desk are set to be the same image. That is, in this case, it is urged to be erroneously recognized that the second reception effect is occurring even though the first reception effect is occurring, and the player who has made such an erroneous recognition is encouraged to do so. , "Even though the timing when the production reception should occur automatically has arrived after the period when the production reception is allowed occurs, the production reception does not occur automatically (or the timing when the production reception should occur automatically has arrived yet. An unexpected situation such as "The production reception was automatically generated even though it was not in the stage where it was not done)", so it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension until the production reception is automatically generated. It will be expected.

However, if it is mistakenly recognized that a second reception effect different from this is occurring in the time until the effect reception is automatically generated even though the first reception effect has occurred, what kind of effect will be produced? It is not possible to understand whether progress is being made, and there is concern that the entertainment interests will decline. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the bar display indicating the remaining time as the valid period is continuously displayed even after the effect reception is automatically generated. That is, in this case, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the first reception effect or the second reception effect is being executed when the valid period for which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the effect reception is automatically generated (the post-operation effect starts). ) By checking how much gauge is left as a bar display, it is possible to recognize whether the first reception effect or the second reception effect was being executed. You will be able to start the production after the operation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the same precursor effect is generated and the same image and the same bar display are displayed even when the valid period occurs, the same image is displayed. It is possible to execute the production progress in some cases where the production reception is automatically generated and in some cases where the production reception is not automatically generated within the valid period. With such a configuration, even if a precursor effect or reception effect occurs, it is not possible to distinguish whether or not it will be automatically accepted within the valid period, so it is possible to perform the reception effect with a sense of tension. become able to.

FIGS. 292 and 293 are diagrams showing examples of a first reception effect and a second reception effect in which the time from the occurrence of the period (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception is different. be. In the production example, it is assumed that the production reception is in a situation where it can be automatically generated.

In FIG. 292 (a), the number of reservations is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and is in the reach state. It shows the production situation that formed.

FIG. 292 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 292 (a) (here, it may be in the reach state but may be in the non-reach state). It shows the production situation in which a precursory effect is being executed, which suggests that it will soon be tolerated.

FIG. 292 (c) shows an effect situation (result of big hit determination) in which the first reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) is performed. In the effect determination performed based on the above, the first effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 292 (e) described later appears) or the second effect condition (the effect result shown in FIG. 292 (f) described later) is The effect status) when the effect pattern) that appears is satisfied.

In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and the operation of the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time when the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that the effect reception is permitted, and the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period. It is assumed that it has been done. FIG. 292 (d) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated during the execution period (valid period) of the first reception effect, and the automatic effect function is enabled. Then, the same change as when the effect reception is performed by the operation with respect to the operation button 410 within the valid period set so that the effect reception is allowed will occur for the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the low-expected mode effect (FIG. 292 (e) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates, and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 292 (f)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this regard, in this effect example, regardless of which mode (FIGS. 292 (e) and 292 (f)) the post-operation effect is executed, "the remaining time as a period in which the effect reception is allowed is shown. "Bar display" is not hidden and the effect is started after the operation while it is maintained. As a result, by confirming how much gauge remaining remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the reception effect is received after the period (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect, which has a different time until is automatically generated. That is, since the production expectations are usually different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the post-operation effect based on the recognition of the type of the reception effect. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

On the other hand, in this production example, after the effect situation shown in FIG. 292 (a) appears, the effect situation in which the precursor effect shown in FIG. 293 (g) appears instead of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b). (In the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the third effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 293 (j) described later appears) or the fourth effect condition (the effect pattern shown in FIG. 293 (k) described later). When the effect pattern in which the indicated effect result appears) or the fifth effect condition (the effect state in which the effect situation shown in FIGS. 293 (l) and (m) described later) is satisfied) appears. There is.

Then, after the precursor effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (g), the second reception effect in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity is started as shown in FIG. 293 (h). Will be done.

However, in this second reception effect, although the time from the time when the effect reception is allowed to the activation of the automatic effect function is shorter than that of the first reception effect, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown together with 293 (c) and FIG. 293 (h), the button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) and the bar display suggesting the remaining time of the valid period (the gauge length is also the same). ) And are the same images as in the case of the above first reception production.

That is, in this case, the first reception is performed in both the production situation shown in FIG. 293 (c) and the production situation shown in FIG. 293 (h). It becomes difficult to recognize whether the production or the second reception production is occurring, and it becomes possible to give a sense of tension as to when the production reception will occur.

Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that the effect reception is permitted, and the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period. It is assumed that it has been done. FIG. 293 (i) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated during the execution period (valid period) of the second reception effect, and the effective period occurs. When the automatic effect function is enabled at a timing earlier than that of the second reception effect, the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 is caused for the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the low-expected mode effect (FIG. 293 (j)) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 293 (k)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this regard, in this effect example, regardless of which mode (FIGS. 293 (j), (k)) the post-operation effect is executed, "the remaining time as a period in which the effect reception is allowed is shown. "Bar display" is not hidden and the effect is started after the operation while it is maintained. As a result, by confirming how much gauge remaining remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the reception effect is received after the period (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect, which has a different time until is automatically generated. That is, since the production expectations are usually different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the post-operation effect based on the recognition of the type of the reception effect. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

However, in this effect example, even when the precursor effect in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (h) are sequentially displayed, FIG. 293 ( As shown in l), the production situation (fifth production condition) in which the valid period of the reception production ends without the automatic production function being activated unless the player operates it can also appear. ing.

That is, in this case, the same precursor effect (see FIG. 293 (g)) occurs, and the same bar display (including the gauge length and how to reduce the gauge) occurs even when the valid period occurs. When the effect reception is executed as the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (i) to (k)) in which the effect reception is automatically generated within the valid period, the effect reception is displayed. Is executed as a third reception effect that does not automatically occur (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)), and it is possible to execute a certain effect progress. In such a configuration, even if a precursor effect in which a specific mode appears or a reception effect in which a specific mode appears is displayed, it becomes impossible to distinguish whether or not the reception is automatically received within the valid period, so that there is a sense of tension. You will be able to perform reception production with.

Moreover, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 293 (m), even when the valid period as the reception effect is terminated without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is terminated and the effect reception is received. Is not allowed, but the "bar display showing the remaining time as the period for which the production reception is allowed" is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not enabled by confirming that the effect situation occurred in which the effect was not generated after the operation even though the gauge remaining amount was "0". It will be possible to recognize, and it will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games. Although "?" Appears in the figure shown in FIG. 293 (m), it may not cause any change in the effect.

Further, in this effect example, although the types of precursory effects (see FIGS. 292 (b) and 293 (m)) are different, the same image and the same bar display are displayed when the effect reception occurs. However, since the time until the automatic effect function is enabled is different (see FIGS. 292 (c) and 293 (h)), when the precursor effect is overlooked, it is relatively relatively. To be able to provide a directing effect as to whether the automatic directing function is enabled at an early timing, whether the automatic directing function is enabled at a relatively late stage, or whether the automatic directing function is not enabled in the first place. It will be possible to give a feeling of tension and perform reception production. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the precursory effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 292 (b), it is possible to recognize in advance that the reception effect for which the automatic effect function is always enabled will occur. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In this production example, the display mode is different between the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) and the precursor effect shown in FIG. 293 (g), but these are executed in the same display mode. You may do it. That is, in this case, even if both the precursor effect and the reception effect are confirmed, the operation opportunity is kept secret at which timing the automatic effect function is activated and whether the automatic effect function is activated in the first place. It will be possible to grant.

Incidentally, each reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293 is basically advanced in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 292 (c) or FIG. 293 (h) appears, and at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, FIGS. 292 (e) and (f). ) Or the production situation shown in FIGS. 293 (j) and (k). However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, the automatic effect function may not be enabled, and the timing tf2 at which the automatic effect function is enabled may be delayed depending on the established effect conditions (effect pattern). It can be said that it is different from the production example shown in FIG. 285 in that the effect may be accelerated and the effect is started after the operation with the bar display left. In addition, in this production example, the above-mentioned alternative example relating to FIG. 285 may be applied. Further, also in this effect example, in addition to the bar display, the post-operation effect may be started while leaving the image imitating the operation means. Further, when the post-operation effect is started while the image imitating the operation means is left, the image may be continued as a moving image as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289.

Further, also in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the effect reception to the end of the period initially set as the effect reception period (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time from the end of the period initially set as the production reception period until the bar display is hidden (timing tf3 to tf4) can be set as the same length of time. desirable.

Further, also in this effect example, when the post-operation effect is started while the bar display is left, a stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

In addition, the time from the occurrence of the second reception effect to the time when the effect reception is automatically generated and the bar display is hidden is from the time from the occurrence of the first reception effect to the time when the effect reception is automatically generated. It is desirable to set it as a short time. According to such a configuration, it is clarified that it is not the second reception effect in which the effect reception is automatically generated at a relatively early timing when the bar display is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 292 (d). (If it is the second reception production, it should have already been hidden), so you can enjoy the remaining valid period while being aware of the possibility of the first reception production.

In this effect example, when the reception effect for which the automatic effect function is not enabled is set as the third reception effect, the effect pattern (FIGS. 293 (l), (m)) for generating the third reception effect is not necessarily prepared. You may.

The first reception effect and the second reception effect may be made to be able to occur sequentially within one symbol variation. However, when the above-mentioned second reception effect is executed in which the time until the automatic effect function is activated is relatively short, the first reception effect may occur until the symbol is stopped. When the above-mentioned first reception effect is executed, which takes a relatively long time until the automatic effect function is enabled, the second reception effect cannot occur until the symbol is stopped. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who recognizes that it takes a relatively long time to receive the production by executing the first reception production, at a relatively early timing when the second reception production occurs. It is expected that the situation in which the operation opportunity is lost due to the automatic generation of the production reception is preferably suppressed.

Also in the above-mentioned production example, the simulated image imitating the operation means may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes (first mode, second mode) having different expectations. Then, the automatic effect function is not always enabled when the first aspect with low expectation appears (third reception effect), but the automatic effect function is always enabled when the second aspect with high expectation appears. (First reception production or second reception production).

In the above production example, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs and when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs. , When the third reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) occurs, and when the effect reception is performed, the same post-operation effect (operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) Is supposed to be done. However, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs, when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs, and when the third reception effect occurs. It is also possible to perform different post-operation effects when the reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) occurs and when the effect reception is performed.

In the above-mentioned effect example shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, when the effect reception occurs by the automatic effect function or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being activated, after the operation with the bar display left. The production situation where the production is started or the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even if the effect reception occurs due to the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display left, so that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process. Is desirable.

[Omen production that also functions as a production that suggests whether it will be automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with such an "automatic production means", even if the player forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1, the production reception is automatically generated, so that the player is given an operation opportunity. Not only does it eliminate the tension at that time, but there is also concern that it will become a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image is played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function" and an automatic reception effect that is the target of the "automatic effect function". That is, in this case, since the effect reception is not always automatically generated, it is expected that the tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function" has occurred, it may not be operated as a result of erroneous recognition that the effect reception will occur without the operation by the player. There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline due to the loss of opportunities for production reception. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a special mode, the automatic reception effect is always generated as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in pachinko due to the loss of opportunities for production receptions due to the inability to understand whether or not is enabled.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period when the precursor effect is executed in a special mode, the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect is the target of the "automatic effect function". When the precursor effect is finished and the reception effect (automatic reception effect) actually occurs (valid period), the reception effect is "automatically produced". It is difficult to recognize whether the automatic reception effect is the target of the "function" or the non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function". For example, in both the non-automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect, by displaying a model image imitating the same operation means as an operation target, a bar display having a gauge amount of the same length, and the like. , It will be difficult to recognize which reception effect is occurring.

According to such a configuration, if it is overlooked in which mode the precursor effect is executed, whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled after the reception effect is started once. Difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is appropriately maintained while performing the effect suggesting whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled. ..

FIGS. 294 to 296 are diagrams showing an example of an effect suggesting whether or not a reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs depending on the mode of the precursor effect. Here, the example of the effect when the automatic effect function can be enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state where the automatic effect can always be produced, etc.) will be described. Since reception effects that are not targeted for activation can occur, the display such as "Auto button is being set" is not displayed.

In FIG. 294 (a), the number of reservations is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and is in the reach state. It shows the production situation that formed.

FIG. 294 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294 (a) (here, it may be in the reach state but may be in the non-reach state). It shows the production situation in which a precursory effect is being executed, which suggests that it will soon be tolerated.

Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) occurs when the timing tg1 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives, and a simulated image imitating the operation button 410 which is the operation target is displayed. It is displayed as an effect image (special mode) that moves in a swirling manner toward a part that appears later. Then, when the precursor effect is executed in such a special mode, the automatic reception effect targeted by the "automatic effect function" is always generated as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. During the period when the precursory effect is performed, it is possible to know in advance that the "automatic effect function" will be enabled in the subsequent reception effect. In the precursory effect of this effect example, a display such as "auto button!" Appears, but this does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 294 (c) shows an effect situation (an effect performed based on the result of the jackpot determination) when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) is performed and the timing tg2 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives. In the determination, the first determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294 (e) described later appears) or the second determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294 (f) described later appears) is shown. It is depicted that the reception effect, which gives an operation opportunity to the operation button 410, has just started.

In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and the operation of the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time when the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

As described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 294 (c), the effect reception is automatically generated (the "automatic effect function" is enabled) when a predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player. The same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed by the player appears. However, as will be described later, in the production situation shown in FIG. 294 (c), is there an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled, or is it non-automatic in which the "automatic effect function" is not enabled? It is difficult to recognize whether the reception production is occurring. That is, in this case, if it is overlooked in which mode the precursor effect is executed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled once the reception effect is started. Have difficulty. Therefore, while performing an effect (a precursory effect of a special mode) that suggests whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled, the tension until the effect reception is automatically generated should be appropriately maintained. Will be expected.

Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that the effect reception is permitted, and the operation button 410 is not operated at the predetermined timing tg3 (see FIG. 296) within the valid period. It is assumed that the automatic effect function for is enabled. FIG. 294 (d) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be enabled at the timing tg3, and when the automatic effect function is enabled, the effect reception is permitted. Within the valid period set to be such, the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 is caused to the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the low-expected mode effect (FIG. 294 (e)) ”or“ the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates, and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 294 (f)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this regard, in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), even when the post-operation effect is executed in any mode (FIGS. 294 (e) and (f)). , "Bar display indicating the remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is allowed" is not hidden, and the effect is started after the operation while this is maintained. That is, although details are omitted, even in this production example (including the production portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), the production reception is automatically performed after the period (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted occurs. The first reception effect and the second reception effect with different times until they occur are prepared, and by checking how much gauge remaining is left when the effect after operation starts. It is possible to recognize whether the reception effect is "the first reception effect or the second reception effect in which the time from the occurrence of the period (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception is different". I am trying to be. That is, since the production expectations are usually different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the post-operation effect based on the recognition of the type of the reception effect. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. Also in this effect example, the above configuration ("bar display" is not hidden and is maintained) described in the item of "post-operation effect suggesting the type of automatically accepted reception effect". Each configuration other than (starting the effect after the operation) may be appropriately adopted.

Further, also in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), the image display described in the item of "post-operation effect suggesting an automatically accepted operation target" is left. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the production is started after the operation as it is. Further, in this case, each configuration other than the above configuration described in the same item (starting the post-operation effect while leaving the image display) may be appropriately adopted. Further, in this case, the configuration in which the post-operation effect is generated without hiding the bar display is not always adopted, and this may be omitted.

On the other hand, in this effect example, FIG. 294 (b) is during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294 (a) (here, it is in the reach state but may be in the non-reach state). The production situation in which the precursory effect of the specific aspect shown in FIG. 295 (g) appears instead of the precursory effect of the special aspect shown in FIG. An effect pattern in which the effect result shown in 295 (j) appears), a fourth determination condition (an effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 295 (k) described later appears), or a fifth determination condition (FIG. 295 described later). l) The production status) when the production pattern) in which the production status shown in (m) appears may appear.

Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) occurs when the timing tg1 (see FIGS. 296 (a) and 296 (b)) arrives, and imitates the operation button 410 which is the operation target. The two imitation images are displayed as an effect (specific mode) until they approach each other and overlap each other. However, in the precursory effect, the imitation image imitating the operation button 410, which is the operation target, is not always used. May be good. Then, when the precursor effect is executed in such a specific mode, the automatic reception effect targeted by the "automatic effect function" may occur as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect, or the "automatic effect function". A non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted may occur as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect, and as a result, during the period when the precursor effect is performed, the subsequent reception effect will have an "automatic effect function". It is not possible to know in advance whether "" will be enabled. In the precursory effect of this effect example, a display such as "auto button?" Appears, but this does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 295 (h) shows the effect status when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) is performed and the timing tg2 shown in FIG. 296 (a) arrives, and the operation button 410 is operated. It is depicted that the reception production, which gives an opportunity, has just started.

In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and the operation of the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time when the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

As described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h), the effect reception is automatically generated within the valid period even if there is no operation by the player (the "automatic effect function" is enabled). If there is no operation by the player, the production reception may not occur within the valid period (the "automatic production function" may not be enabled). And, as described above, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 295 (h), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (the image imitating the operation button 410) and the remaining time for which the effect reception is allowed are allowed. Only the bar display indicating the above is displayed, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the effect situation shown in FIG. 294 (c). As a result, while performing an effect (a precursory effect of a special aspect) that suggests that the "automatic effect function" is enabled, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated. You will be expected.

In this regard, when the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs and the timing tg3 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives without being operated by the player, the figure shows. As shown in 295 (i), there will be an effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be enabled. After that, when the automatic effect function is enabled, the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 within the valid period set so that the effect reception is allowed occurs for the effect. Will be made to. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the low-expected mode effect (FIG. 295 (j)) ”or“ the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates, and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 295 (k)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

As described above, in this effect example as well, regardless of which mode (FIGS. 295 (j), (k)) the post-operation effect is executed, the "remaining time as a period in which the effect reception is allowed" "Bar display indicating" is not hidden, and the effect is started after the operation while this is maintained. As a result, by confirming how much gauge remaining remains at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the reception effect is received after the period (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect, which has a different time until is automatically generated. That is, since the production expectations are usually different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, it is possible to start the post-operation effect based on the recognition of the type of the reception effect. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

However, as described above, in this production example, the precursor effect in the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 295 (h) are sequentially displayed. Even if there is no operation by the player, the effect reception may not be generated within the valid period (the "automatic effect function" may not be enabled). In this case, when the timing tg4 arrives without being operated by the player, the reception is performed without the automatic effect function being enabled, as shown in FIGS. 295 (l) and 296 (b). The production situation (when the production pattern is selected according to the establishment of the fifth determination condition) at which the valid period as the production ends appears.

That is, in this case, when the precursor effect of a specific mode (see FIG. 295 (g)) is performed, the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect displays the same image and the same bar display, respectively. Instead, there will be cases where the production reception is automatically generated within the valid period (see FIGS. 295 (i) to (k)) and cases where it is not automatically generated (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)). Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the reception production with a sense of tension.

Moreover, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 295 (m), even when the valid period as the reception effect is terminated without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is terminated and the effect reception is received. Is not allowed, but the "bar display showing the remaining time as the period for which the production reception is allowed" is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not enabled by confirming that the effect situation occurred in which the effect was not generated after the operation even though the gauge remaining amount was "0". It will be possible to recognize, and it will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games. Although "?" Appears in the figure shown in FIG. 295 (m), it may not cause any change in the effect.

Also in this production example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the production reception to the end of the period initially set as the production reception period (in FIG. 296 (a)). The timings tg3 to tg4) shown, and the time from the end of the period initially set as the production reception period until the bar display is hidden (timings tg4 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)). Should be set as the same length of time.

Further, also in this effect example, when the post-operation effect is started while the bar display is left, a stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

Further, the time when the bar display is left when the automatic effect function is enabled (timing tg3 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)) and the time when the bar display is left when the automatic effect function is not enabled (time when the automatic effect function is not enabled). It is desirable that the time is the same as the timing tg4 to tg5a) shown in FIG. 296 (b).

The non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 295 (g), (h), (l), (m)) and the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 294 (b) to (f)) are sequentially performed within one symbol variation. It may be possible to occur in. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect may occur thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot occur thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception effect loses the opportunity to generate the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that such a situation will be appropriately suppressed.

Also in the above-mentioned production example, the simulated image imitating the operation means may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes (first mode, second mode) having different expectations. The first aspect with low expectation can be displayed in both the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled and the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled, but the second aspect with high expectation May appear only when a reception effect is occurring in which the automatic effect function is enabled.

In the above-mentioned production example, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated through a special mode precursor effect and an automatic reception effect generated after a specific mode precursor effect (FIG. 295 (i)). ~ (K)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) that occurs after the precursor effect of a specific mode. The operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) is being performed. However, the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated after the precursor effect of the special mode and the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (i) to (k)) generated after the precursor effect of the specific mode. ) And the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) that occurs after the precursor effect of a specific mode, so that different post-operation effects are performed when the effect reception is performed. You may do it.

In the above-mentioned production example, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated through a special mode precursor effect and an automatic reception effect generated after a specific mode precursor effect (FIG. 295 (i)). ~ (K)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) that occurs after the precursor effect of a specific mode, at the same timing tg1 after the symbol change is started. The effect is started, and the reception effect is started at the same timing tg2, but each of these start timings does not necessarily have to be the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed in a different effect pattern.

The effect time may be different between the precursor effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 294 (b) and the precursor effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g). For example, the precursory effect of the special aspect shown in FIG. 294 (b) has a relatively long effect time so as not to be overlooked, and the precursory effect of the specific aspect shown in FIG. 295 (c) is overlooked. If the production time is set to be relatively short so as to be easy, it is easy to overlook only when a precursory production that is inconvenient for the player appears, and the game entertainment hobby is before the reception production is started. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the automatic reception effect generated through the precursor effect of a special mode (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)), the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target, and the automatic reception effect generated after the precursor effect of a specific mode (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)). (See FIGS. 295 (i) to 295 (k)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated after the precursor effect of a specific mode, the operation button 410 is the operation target. You may do so. Furthermore, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated after the precursor effect of the special aspect, the reception effect for the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation target occurs, and the operation button 410 There may be a case where a reception effect is generated for the operation target. Needless to say, when the reception effect for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

In the above-mentioned production example, a part of the period in which the precursor effect (special mode, specific mode) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, if at least a part of the precursor effect (for example, a part of the spiral effect) is left only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started and this is gradually disappeared, the reception effect can be produced. Even after the validity period has started, it will be possible to grasp that the automatic production function will be enabled in the early stages. Of the precursory effect of the special aspect and the precursory effect of the specific aspect, only the precursory effect of the special aspect may be left after the reception effect is started.

In this effect example, when a precursor effect of a specific mode (FIG. 295 (g)) appears, a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function" always occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. By doing so, it may be possible to know in advance that the "automatic effect function" will not be enabled in the subsequent reception effect during the period in which the precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, if the player does not perform the operation after the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h) is generated, FIGS. 295 (l) and (m) will appear in sequence, and FIG. 295 (i). ~ (K) will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned effect example shown in FIGS. 294 to 296, when the effect reception occurs by the automatic effect function or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being activated, after the operation with the bar display left. The production situation where the production is started or the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even if the effect reception occurs due to the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display left, so that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process. Is desirable.

[Reception production that also functions as a production that suggests whether it will be automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with such an "automatic production means", even if the player forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1, the production reception is automatically generated, so that the player is given an operation opportunity. Not only does it eliminate the tension at that time, but there is also concern that it will become a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image is played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a specific mode, a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function" is generated as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. In some cases, the automatic reception effect that is the target of the "automatic effect function" may occur. That is, in this case, since the effect reception is not always automatically generated, it is expected that the tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is suitably maintained.

However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function" has occurred, it may not be operated as a result of erroneous recognition that the effect reception will occur without the operation by the player. There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline due to the loss of opportunities for production reception. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect is generated in either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect during the period in which the precursor effect is executed in a specific mode. Although it is difficult to recognize whether or not to do so, within the valid period after the reception effect is started, a display that makes it possible to recognize that the reception effect is occurring in the automatic reception effect can appear. , It is possible to prevent the loss of the opportunity to receive the production due to the inability to understand whether the automatic production function is enabled.

FIGS. 297 to 299 are diagrams showing an example of an effect that makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is enabled only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. Here, the example of the effect when the automatic effect function can be enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state where the automatic effect can always be produced, etc.) will be described. Since reception effects that are not targeted for activation can occur, the display such as "Auto button is being set" is not displayed.

In FIG. 297 (a), the number of reservations is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and is in the reach state. It shows the production situation that formed.

FIG. 297 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 297 (a) (here, it may be in the reach state but may be in the non-reach state). It shows the production situation in which a precursory effect is being executed, which suggests that it will soon be tolerated.

Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) occurs when the timing th1 (see FIG. 299 (a)) arrives, and two imitations imitating the operation button 410 which is the operation target. The images are displayed as an effect (specific mode) until they approach each other and overlap each other. In particular, in this production example, the first imitation image with a display such as "safety" suggesting that the "automatic production function" is enabled, and whether the "automatic production function" is enabled or concealed. It is displayed as an effect (specific mode) until the second imitation image, which is displayed as "pounding", approaches each other and overlaps with each other. When the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) appears, the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs and the "automatic effect function" is used as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. Since there are both cases where a non-automatic reception effect that is not activated occurs, either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect is performed after the precursor effect is performed while the precursor effect is being performed. It is difficult to recognize if it will occur. In this precursory effect, it is not always necessary to display a simulated image imitating the operation button 410 that is the operation target, and whether the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect occurs after the precursory effect is performed. Anything that makes it difficult to recognize.

FIG. 297 (c) is a first imitation image in which a display such as “safety” is made, which suggests that the “automatic effect function” is enabled as a result of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b). , Of the second imitation images that are displayed as "pounding" that the "automatic production function" is enabled or concealed, the first imitation image that is displayed as "safe" is left, and " The effect situation in which the second imitation image that is displayed as "pounding" is hidden (the effect result shown in FIG. 297 (e) described later in the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination is The effect pattern that appears) or the second determination result (when the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 297 (f) described later appears) is obtained). Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a)) arrives, and at the timing th2, the reception effect in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity starts. Will be done.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first imitation image in which "safety" is displayed as the button image BTG (imitation image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is in the display area. In addition to being displayed with, an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. It has become like. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

In this regard, when the first imitation image (safety) is displayed in the reception production, "the production reception is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player (" automatic production function "is It is limited to the situation where "automatic reception effect" is being executed, in which the same post-operation effect as when the player has performed the operation is performed. Therefore, by confirming that the first imitation image (safety) is displayed when the reception effect occurs, it is in the state of being executed as the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled. It will be possible to recognize.

According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, the “automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled” is the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. While keeping the occurrence after this secret, when the reception effect is started, it is possible to grasp that the "automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled" is being executed. Become so. That is, in this case, until just before the reception production is started, it is possible to increase the tension appropriately by concealing whether or not the "automatic production function" is enabled, but after the reception production is started. By making it possible to grasp this, it becomes possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity of the production reception due to the inability to understand whether the "automatic production function" is enabled.

Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that the effect reception is permitted, and the operation button 410 is not operated at the predetermined timing th3 (see FIG. 299 (a)) within the valid period. It is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. FIG. 297 (d) depicts a place where the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be enabled at the timing th3, and when the automatic effect function is enabled, the effect reception is permitted. Within the valid period set to be such, the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 is caused to the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the low-expected mode effect (FIG. 297 (e) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 297 (f)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this regard, in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 298), even when the post-operation effect is executed in any mode (FIGS. 297 (e) and (f)). The image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is not hidden, and the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it is possible to recognize that the post-operation effect is performed in response to the "effect reception for the operation button 410". , "Relief" makes it possible to recognize that "the situation where the post-operation effect is automatically generated due to the activation of the automatic effect function".

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), the period during which the production reception is permitted is early at the timing th3 when the automatic production function for the operation button 410 is enabled and the production reception is automatically generated. It will be terminated. After that, while the production reception is not allowed, the post-operation production is started with the model image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 in the display state, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing th6, when the effect is finished after the operation, arrives.

According to such a configuration, a model image imitating the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that was the operation target is displayed within the period from the start to the end of the post-operation effect. The period during which the image is displayed (timing th3 to th5) and the period during which the same image is not displayed (timing th5 to th6) will appear. Therefore, even if the post-operation effect is started while the image imitating the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that has been the operation target is displayed, the image is not displayed. It is expected that the tension due to having to confirm the post-operation effect before the operation is performed is preferably maintained.

On the other hand, in this production example, after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) is performed, the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) occurs instead of the reception effect shown in FIG. 297 (c). In some cases, it is possible.

That is, in FIG. 298 (g), as a result of performing the precursory effect shown in FIG. 297 (b), a display such as “safety” suggesting that the “automatic effect function” is enabled is made. Of the image and the second imitation image that is displayed as "Dokidoki" that is either enabled or concealed by the "automatic production function", the second imitation image that is displayed as "Dokidoki" is left. , The effect situation in which the first imitation image displayed as "safety" is hidden (the effect shown in FIG. 298 (i) described later in the effect determination performed based on the result of the jackpot determination). The effect pattern in which the result appears), the fourth determination result (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 298 (j) described later appears), or the fifth determination result (shown in FIGS. 298 (k) and (l) described later). When the production pattern) in which the production status is obtained is obtained) is shown. Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a) or (b)) arrives, and at the timing th2, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The reception production will be started.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, a second imitation image having a display such as "pounding" as a button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is in the display area. In addition to being displayed with, an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. It has become like. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

In this regard, when the second imitation image (pounding) is displayed in the reception production, "the production reception is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player (" automatic production function "is When the "automatic reception effect" that the same post-operation effect appears when the player operates the image is being executed, and when the "automatic reception effect does not occur without the player's operation", the effect reception does not occur. , The non-automatic reception effect that the effect is not executed after the operation is being executed. Therefore, by confirming that the second imitation image (pounding) is displayed when the reception effect occurs, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled. You will be able to understand, which will help you maintain a sense of tension.

According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed and while the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect (see FIG. 298 (g)) is being performed. In either case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled, and this makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

Then, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as "automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled", the timing th3 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299)) is performed without any operation by the player. When (a) and) arrive, as shown in FIG. 298 (h), an effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be enabled appears. After that, when the automatic effect function is enabled, the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 within the valid period set so that the effect reception is allowed occurs for the effect. Will be made to. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the low-expected mode effect (FIG. 298 (i)) ”or“ the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates, and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 298 (j)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

As described above, in this effect example as well, regardless of whether the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 298 (i) and (j)), the image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is used. ) Is not hidden and the effect is started after the operation while it is maintained. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it is possible to recognize that the post-operation effect is performed in response to the "effect reception for the operation button 410". , "Dokidoki" is written, so it is concealed that "the state where the automatic reception effect is activated" is concealed, but the effect reception is automatically generated as a result of the post-operation effect. You will be able to recognize that you are in a situation where

On the other hand, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as "non-automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled", the timing th4 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299)) is performed without any operation by the player. When b) arrives), as shown in FIGS. 298 (k) and 299 (b), the effect period as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being enabled. (At the time of selecting the effect pattern according to the fact that the fifth judgment result is obtained) will appear.

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 298 (l), even when the valid period as the reception effect is terminated without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is terminated and the effect reception is received. Is not allowed, but the "image imitating the operation button 410 (button image BTG)" is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, the post-operation effect is not performed as a result of the effect reception not being automatically generated while it was kept secret that the "automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled is occurring". You will be able to recognize that you are in a situation. Although "?" Appears in the figure shown in FIG. 298 (l), it may not cause any change in the effect.

Also in this production example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the production reception to the end of the period initially set as the production reception period (at FIG. 299 (a)). The timings th3 to th4) shown and the time from the end of the period initially set as the production reception period until the image is hidden (timings th4 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)). It is desirable to set the time as the same length as.

Further, the time when the image is left when the automatic effect function is enabled (timings th3 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)) and the time when the image is left when the automatic effect function is not enabled (timing th3 to th5). It is desirable that the time is the same as the timings th4 to th5a) shown in FIG. 299 (b).

The non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 298 (g), (k), (l)) and the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 297 (b) to (f)) can occur sequentially within one symbol variation. You may do so. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect may occur thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot occur thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception effect loses the opportunity to generate the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that such a situation will be appropriately suppressed.

Also in the above-mentioned production example, the simulated image imitating the operation means may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes (first mode, second mode) having different expectations. The first aspect with low expectation can be displayed in both the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled and the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled, but the second aspect with high expectation May appear only when a reception effect is occurring in which the automatic effect function is enabled.

In the above production example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first imitation image such as "safety" is displayed and a second imitation image in which "pounding" is displayed are displayed. Automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (h)) and non-automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (k)) in which a second imitation image with a display such as "sudare" is displayed. When it is done, the same post-operation effect (operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) is performed. However, the automatic reception effect (see Fig. 297 (c)) in which the first imitation image such as "safety" is displayed and the automatic reception in which the second imitation image such as "pounding" is displayed are displayed. When the production is accepted by the production (see FIG. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception production (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the second imitation image such as "pounding" is displayed. It is also possible to perform different post-operation effects.

In the above production example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first imitation image such as "safety" is displayed and a second imitation image in which "pounding" is displayed are displayed. There are changes in the design of the automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (k)) in which the second imitation image such as "Dokidoki" is displayed. The precursor effect is started at the same timing th1 after the start, and the reception effect is started at the same timing th2, but each of these start timings does not necessarily have to be the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed in a different effect pattern.

A reception effect (see Fig. 297 (c)) in which the first imitation image such as "safety" is displayed, and a reception effect (Fig. 298) in which the second imitation image such as "pounding" is displayed. (H), (k) may be different from each other in the length of the valid period in the reception effect. In particular, in the reception effect (see FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)) in which the second imitation image displaying "pounding" is displayed, the first imitation image displaying "safety" is displayed. By setting an effective time shorter than that of the reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)), it becomes possible to more preferably maintain a feeling of tension during the effective period.

In addition, there is an automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (h)) in which a second imitation image such as "Dokidoki" is displayed, and a non-automatic reception effect in which a second imitation image such as "Dokidoki" is displayed. The length of the valid period in the reception effect may be different from that of the reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)). In particular, in the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the "automatic effect function" is not enabled, the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled is higher. By setting a short effective time, it becomes possible to more preferably maintain a feeling of tension during the effective period.

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first imitation image displaying "safety" is displayed, the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target, and the display such as "pounding" is made. An automatic reception effect in which a simulated image is displayed (see FIG. 298 (h)) and a non-automatic reception effect in which a second simulated image such as "pounding" is displayed (see FIG. 298 (k)). Then, the operation button 410 may be the operation target. Needless to say, when the reception effect for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

In the above-mentioned production example, a part of the period in which the precursor effect (special mode, specific mode) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, at least a part of the precursory effect (for example, a predetermined effect) is left in a form of completely or partially overlapping with the above-mentioned image only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started, and this gradually overlaps. If it disappears to, it will be difficult to grasp that the automatic effect function will be enabled in the early stage even after the valid period of the reception effect has started. It should be noted that the reception effect in which the first imitation image such as "safety" is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)) and the reception effect in which the second imitation image such as "pounding" is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)). Only in any of the reception effects (see FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)), at least a part of the precursory effect (for example, a predetermined effect) overlaps with the above-mentioned image in whole or in part. It may be left in the form.

In this effect example, the reception effect in which the second imitation image such as "pounding" is displayed may be generated only as a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function". That is, in this case, if the player does not perform the operation after the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) is generated, FIGS. 298 (k) and 298 (l) will appear in sequence, and FIG. 298 (h). ~ (J) will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when the production reception occurs by the automatic production function or when the valid period ends without the automatic production function being activated, after the operation with the image left. The production situation where the production is started or the production is not started after the operation is made to appear. However, in terms of processing load, even if the effect reception occurs due to the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started while leaving the image, so that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process. Is desirable.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, a precursor effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first imitation image displayed as "safety" is displayed, and the second imitation image displayed as "pounding". Is the same as the precursor effect corresponding to the reception effect displayed. However, as a precursory effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first imitation image such as "safety" is displayed on condition that the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the normal time (FIG. 297 (b)) is used. The production content different from (see) may appear. For example, if a flame effect suggesting a high degree of expectation is added to the precursory effect, "high expectation" and "the automatic effect function is enabled" are predetermined. Since it is suggested in advance only when the production conditions are satisfied, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment while maintaining the tension when the valid period occurs.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, the operation means to be operated is imitated when the production reception occurs or the valid period ends without the automatic production function being activated. The display mode of the image was changed, and the post-operation effect was started (or the post-operation effect was not started) while the simulated image was displayed in the changed display mode, but the validity period (effect reception). The post-operation effect may be started (or the post-operation effect is not started) in a state where the image is displayed with the display mode and the display position at the time of the period).

The post-operation effect that is started while displaying the image imitating the operation means to be operated includes the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5, the effect by sound, and the effect. It may be any one of the movable effects by the decorative accessory, or it may be an appropriate combination of these effects. In addition, the first post-operation effect that starts while displaying the image imitating the operation means to be operated, and the timing th5 in which the image imitating the operation means to be operated is hidden. The second post-operation effect that is started thereafter may be executed respectively.

In the above-mentioned production examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, as in the case of the above-mentioned production example, a simulated image imitating the operation means to be operated is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display is maintained. You may start the production after the operation in this state.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when a reception effect is performed by adding a notation such as "safety" or "pounding" to the image and making the mode as the image different. It was decided to suggest whether the "automatic production function" would be enabled. However, the special image that is displayed only when the "automatic effect function" is enabled should be displayed within the period (valid period) when the reception effect is performed, and this is not necessarily displayed as the mode of the image. You don't have to. In this case, it is desirable not to hide the special image displayed separately from the image, and to start the post-operation effect while leaving this as it is. Similarly, the notation such as "dokidoki" may be displayed separately from the image and the post-operation effect may be started (or the post-operation effect may not be started) while leaving the image.

In the above production example, by making the display such as "safety" and "pounding" different during the period when the reception production is performed, it is suggested whether the automatic reception production in which the "automatic production function" is enabled is generated. I decided to do it. However, instead of this, by changing the mode of the operating means to be operated (light emission mode, operating state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.), an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs. You may try to suggest what you are doing. Alternatively, during the period when the reception production is performed, both the display such as "safety" and "pounding" and the mode of the operating means to be operated (light emitting mode, operating state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.) are different. However, in this case, either the display such as "safety" or "pounding" or the mode of the operating means to be operated (light emitting mode, operating state (whether or not there is vibration), etc.) is used. It is desirable to continue the state only and to end the state and start the post-operation effect in order to shift the gaze to the newly generated post-operation effect.

In the above production example, when an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs, a display such as "safety" is displayed within a period before the precursor effect for the automatic reception effect occurs. A specific display mode suggesting that a reception effect in which the first simulated image is displayed may occur may appear. In this case, it is desirable that the specific display mode is hidden at least before the reception effect is started, such as within the period from the start to the end of the precursor effect.

In the above production example, after displaying a specific image (pounding) that suggests that the "automatic effect function" may not be enabled within the period during which the precursory effect is being performed, the specific image (pounding) is displayed. The reception effect may be started in the form of changing to a special image (safety) that has been hidden until. Even with such a configuration, it is not possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is enabled within the period in which the precursor effect is performed, and the tension when the effect period occurs is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

[Improved color rendering using the automatic production function]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment should be devised to increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 by creating a novel color rendering using such an "automatic production function". I have to.

FIG. 300 is a diagram for explaining a novel effectability using the automatic effect function. More specifically, the reception effect is generated based on the number of holds (0 to 3) that keeps the unexecuted state when the symbol change is newly digested, or the automatic effect function is enabled. It is a distribution table of random numbers used for the production judgment of. The total number of random numbers is "100", and by acquiring any one of these random numbers and referring to which of the above distribution tables the acquired random numbers are distributed, a reception effect is generated. In addition, an effect determination is made as to whether to enable the automatic effect function. Here, the example of the effect when the automatic effect function can be enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state where the automatic effect can always be produced, etc.) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 300, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the number of holdings (which has just started the game) is still small (for example, specific). Percentage of "non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the automatic effect function" when reception effects occur within the symbol fluctuations (effect patterns) that have been digested when the number is less than "2") However, when the player is in a second production situation (for example, a situation where the number is larger than the specific number "2") where the number of holdings is large (the game is continued to some extent), the reception production is performed within the symbol variation (production pattern) digested. When this occurs, the effect is controlled so that it becomes higher than the ratio of "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function".

Here, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is still small, the ratio of generating "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" is relatively high. On the other hand, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the ratio of generating "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" is relatively low. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic reception effect, which is the target of the "automatic effect function", is also the same as the symbol change (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is small. The rate of occurrence is relatively high, and the rate of occurrence is relatively low for symbol fluctuations (effect patterns) that are started when the number of holdings is large. However, the degree of change in the rate of occurrence is said to be milder than in the case of non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the "automatic effect function", and this is "automatic" when reception effects occur. The ratio of "non-automatic reception effects that are not targeted by the effect function" is set to decrease as the number of reservations increases.

According to such a configuration, when the number of reservations is small, the ratio of the non-automatic reception effect to the reception effect when the reception effect occurs is higher than when the number is large. Therefore, when the game has just started and the number of reservations is small, it is possible to raise the player's awareness of participation in the game and encourage enthusiasm. In addition, if the game is continued to some extent and the number of reservations is large, the ratio of non-automatic reception production will decrease, so another production will be performed before the production that raises the awareness of participation in the game gets tired. It will be possible to provide a calm and directing effect). In this way, by changing the color rendering related to the operation while the game is continued, it is expected that the game will be less likely to get bored and the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

Further, according to the above configuration, if the above-mentioned other color rendering (calm color rendering) becomes tired and the player tries to quit the game, the number of reservations is reduced and the consciousness of participation in the game is enhanced. Since it will reappear, it is expected that such a change in color rendering will discourage the interruption of the game.

An important point as an invention relating to this effect example is to change the ratio of activation of the "automatic effect function" by increasing or decreasing the number of reservations, thereby changing the color rendering of the "automatic effect function". To produce. Therefore, the rate of occurrence of the reception effect may or may not be different between the symbol variation that is digested when the number of reservations is small and the symbol variation that is digested when the number of reservations is large. It can be said that there is a technical feature in how the ratio of the "automatic effect function" enabled to the reception effect changes when the reception effect occurs within the symbol variation.

For example, of "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" and "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function", only "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" By making the occurrence rate different depending on whether the number of holds is small or large, the number of holds is small for the "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function". The rate of occurrence may be the same between a certain time and a situation where the number of holds is large. That is, in this case, for the "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function", for example, the random number distribution shown in FIG. In the pattern), the occurrence rate is relatively high, and in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the occurrence rate is relatively low. However, for the automatic reception effect that is the target of the "automatic effect function", the same occurrence rate (for example, the value of "automatic reception function" shown in FIG. 300 is reserved, regardless of the number of hold numbers. Regardless of the number, it will be set to "20", etc.).

According to such a configuration, the level that guarantees that the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed without the operation by the player is performed (the rate of occurrence of the "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function"). As for itself, this will be uniform regardless of the number of holds. Therefore, even if the rate of occurrence of "non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the automatic effect function" is changed according to the number of holds, the player may forget to operate the game uniformly regardless of the game situation. It will be possible to provide the guarantee of the above, and a sense of security will be created.

Regarding "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function", there are multiple effect modes (such as those with different display contents during reception effect, those with different post-operation effects, and those with different operation targets). Is prepared, and in addition to the case where the non-automatic reception effect occurs in only one of the effect modes based on the result of the effect determination at the time of the symbol change, the non-automatic reception effect is sequentially performed multiple times in two or more effect modes. It may occur. That is, in this case, the occurrence rate of the "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function" means the rate at which at least one of those effect modes occurs within the execution period of the symbol variation.

In addition, regarding the "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function", there are multiple effect modes (such as those with different display contents during reception effect, those with different post-operation effects, and those with different operation targets). Is prepared, and in addition to the case where the automatic reception effect is generated in only one of the effect modes based on the result of the effect determination at the time of the symbol change, the automatic reception effect is sequentially generated multiple times in two or more effect modes. In some cases, it may be possible. That is, in this case, the occurrence rate of the "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function" means the rate at which at least one of those effect modes occurs within the execution period of the symbol variation.

However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect may occur thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot occur thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who misunderstands that the effect reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception effect loses the opportunity to generate the effect in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that such a situation will be appropriately suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, only one of "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" and "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function" is used within the period in which the symbol is changed. Although described as an example of occurrence, "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" and "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function" may be sequentially generated. In this case, in the table shown in FIG. 300, the total number of random numbers obtained by adding the distribution value of "without reception effect" and the distribution value of "with reception effect" exceeds "100".

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in at least one of the "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" and the "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function", the operating means targeted for operation is 2 There may be more than one. For example, when the number of hold is "0", the random value of "20" assigned to "automatic reception function" is given to the first operation means as an operation opportunity, and to the second operation means. On the other hand, it may be further divided depending on the case where the operation opportunity is given.

It should be noted that the determination of whether to generate the "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function" and the determination of whether to generate the "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function" are performed when the symbol changes. It is desirable to execute it as one of the effect determinations according to the result of the jackpot determination.

As described above, in the above-mentioned production example, "non-automatic reception production that is not the target of the automatic production function" is less likely to occur when the number of reservations is large. In this respect, when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs despite the situation where the number of holds is large, compared to the case where the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs when the number of holds is small. If the ratio of "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function" is further increased within one symbol change in which the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, only when the number of reservations is large. "Non-automatic reception effect" can now function as an effect that suggests that "automatic reception effect" will occur (effect that suggests before the precursor effect for automatic reception effect is performed). It will be possible to make the effect of the automatic effect function different. In addition, as a method to further increase the rate of occurrence of "automatic reception effect" within one symbol change in which "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, instead of increasing the rate of occurrence of "automatic reception effect" itself, It is desirable to make it easier for the effect condition to generate the "automatic reception effect" to be satisfied in accordance with the effect condition for generating the "non-automatic reception effect".

In addition, when the number of pending numbers is the largest (the situation where the "non-automatic reception effect" is most difficult to appear), when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, one symbol change in which the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs. You may make sure that "automatic reception effect" also occurs within. With such a configuration, the "non-automatic reception effect" can be made to function as a precursor effect for the "automatic reception effect", and this also makes it possible to make the effect related to the automatic effect function different. become.

Depending on the situation (valid period) when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs and the situation (valid period) when the "automatic reception effect" occurs, a copy image or background image that imitates the operation means, etc. It is desirable to make the displayed contents different. In this case, of the displayed images displayed in the situation (valid period) in which the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs and in the situation (valid period) in which the "automatic reception effect" occurs. At least for the different parts, it is desirable to generate the effect reception and perform the post-operation effect while leaving it without hiding it. This is as explained in the production example of "Post-production". If you want to generate an effect reception and perform a post-operation effect while leaving the different parts (such as an image that imitates the operation means) without hiding them, select "Automatically accepted operation target. The configuration and other examples described in "Post-operation effect suggesting" may be appropriately adopted.

Regarding the above-mentioned configurations and variations thereof related to the effect example (improvement of effect by using the automatic effect function), the non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function and the automatic reception that is the target of the automatic effect function. It may be applied to each of the above-mentioned production examples that can generate the production.

[Prevention of wasted channels by automatic production function]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite (for example, 32 channels), even if a special result is obtained in the jackpot judgment according to the winning, the channel to which the sound data is assigned is selected. In the situation where there is no vacancy (the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result cannot be assigned to the channel, and this cannot be output (or the sound that is already in the playback state). There is a concern that the game interest will decline due to the forced suspension of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to a specific effect pattern, and also assigns a "BGM reproduction" sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel and reproduces the sound. conduct. Then, when the display effect on the effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently, and this state is achieved. Generates a reception effect for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.). As a result, when the effect reception occurs, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is maintained in the suppressed mode or the state of being output silently, while the jackpot symbol (a special display mode in the effect pattern) is generated due to the symbol variation. The special production sound that suggests the degree of expectation that appears is output in an unsuppressed manner (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested by the special production may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special production sound corresponding to the production reception is output, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed mode or silently. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage status of the channel seems to be affordable. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety such as "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". This will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

Data related to various production sounds such as a plurality of BGM data are stored in a predetermined storage means, and various production sounds are reproduced by being read from the storage means and assigned to a channel. Become.

By the way, when specific BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to a specific effect pattern is left assigned to a channel and it is to be output in a suppression mode or silently, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") (a process of changing the initial volume value defined in the sound data to reduce the volume) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a valid period for the effect reception), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern ("" It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate a valid period of the effect reception) after the sound of "BGM reproduction") is set to be output in a suppressed mode or silently.

However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the valid period of the production reception is generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (production reception) is performed at any timing within this valid period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume returned to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the specific music is cueed at an indefinite timing.

In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "BGM reproduction dedicated to special production sound reproduction". It is also conceivable to perform a process of regenerating. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the content of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and ended, the timing of the symbol stop, etc., it is within the valid period. While it is uncertain (depending on the player) at what timing the operation (production reception) will be performed, if the operation (production reception) is used as an opportunity to newly reproduce the sound of "BGM playback". However, there is a concern that so-called sound deviation will occur between the timing of various productions and the timing of stopping the design after that, and the interest in the game will be reduced. In short, considering that "the remaining time from the occurrence of the production reception to the end of the symbol change is also indefinite", the length commensurate with the indefinite remaining time at the timing when the production reception occurs. It can be said that it is also difficult to newly assign the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") to the channel.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern (a plurality of sound data ( For example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, sound data at the second half of the super reach effect, etc.) are predetermined according to the time series specified by the corresponding schedule data for sound generation. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. When the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel according to the time series, the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel and the playback is started from the timing before the valid period of the effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the valid period ends. It is designed to maintain the assigned state for a predetermined channel and play it for a long period of time until the timing after it is performed.

In this regard, in a part of the section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, the process is suppressed or silently applied to the sound output as compared with the other sections. When the data content that specifies that the above-mentioned is performed is preset (stored as silent data) and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data, It is designed to have a time-series relationship in which the valid period of the production reception occurs within a part of the section (special period). In addition to this, regardless of the timing of the operation by the player within the valid period of the above-mentioned effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The sound of "BGM playback" is a special production sound according to the production reception, straddling two sections in the specific sound data, the period after (partial section) is completed (other section). It is designed to be played back in an unsuppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, super). Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach effect) to the predetermined channels according to the time series specified by the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of silent output (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is received for production in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, it is special in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is set to start playing, the sound of "BGM playback" that is in the playback state on the predetermined channel is "output in a suppressed mode or silently" regardless of the production reception (special period). Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in the form of being mixed in with the special production sound being reproduced. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) will be reproduced, it will be possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppressed mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently, the special directed sound is not suppressed by the highly immediate processing triggered by this. It is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation between the timing of various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that, while the reproduction is started at.

As described above, for "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific production pattern, in a part of the section (special period) when viewed in chronological order, the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently compared to the other sections. The data content (silent data, etc.) that specifies that the processing related to is performed will be set in advance, but in the "suppression mode or silent output state (special period)", the volume from the initial value The volume may be lowered by adjustment. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress adverse effects due to noise or the like from the channel to which the BGM data is assigned.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern is being reproduced, in a section (normal section) different from the above-mentioned special section. Also, the reception effect for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) is generated.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, the reception effect is generated in the situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). When the operation by the player is accepted for production, the production sound corresponding to the production reception is output by canceling the output of any of the production sounds in the playback state, or the production reception is received. There is no choice but to stop the output of the production sound itself. And in this case, there will be a production situation that lacks excitement like when the jackpot judgment is rejected, such as "The production sound is forcibly terminated in the middle, or no production sound is played even though the production is accepted". Therefore, even on the player side, the consciousness that the player does not want to generate such an unlucky production situation (the consciousness that the production reception should not be generated by the operation) works.

In that case, there is a concern that the operation by the player will not be performed easily even though the reception effect is generated, and it will not be possible to improve the game entertainment. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned "technology for automatically generating reception effects" is simply applied contrary to the player's intention of "not wanting to generate production reception", the game interest will decline. You could end up doing it.

On the other hand, on the developer side, in the reception production with confidence or feelings, regardless of the state of channel usage, "the production reception is generated by the active operation by the player and the post-operation production is performed. It can be assumed that there is a speculation such as "I want you to enjoy it."

Therefore, as described above, in the above configuration, first, in the section from the allocation of the specific BGM data to the channel to the end of the allocation, the specific BGM effect sound can be output in a suppressed mode or silently. , There is a normal section different from the special section. Then, in the normal section, "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function" can be generated as the above reception effect, and in the special section, "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function" is received. It can be generated as a production.

That is, in this case, whether or not to generate the production reception (predicting the availability of the channel) in the "normal section in which the specific BGM production sound is not suppressed or silenced and can be output in the normal mode". Since the selection right is entrusted only to the player, the reception effect is automatically generated contrary to the player's intention such as "Because there may not be enough free channels, let's not generate the effect reception". Will be suitably avoided (prevention of wasteful use of channels by the automatic production function).

On the other hand, in the "special section where the specific BGM production sound can be output in a suppressed mode or silently", the impression is that the specific BGM production sound is out of the channel allocation and a margin is created in the empty channel (from the player's side). But it feels like there is space in the channel). Therefore, it will be possible to actively encourage the player to operate while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". Of course, even if the operation by the player is not performed, by automatically generating the reception effect, "If the effect reception occurs anyway, let's generate the effect reception by the player's own operation next time". You will be able to encourage them to become.

FIG. 301 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such processing is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when such a process is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 301. In this production example, the above-mentioned special section is described as a silent section in which silent data is set, but it may be a suppressed section in which data in a suppressed mode is set.

As shown in FIG. 301 (a), during the period in which the specific effect pattern according to the result of the effect determination is being executed, the timing tm11 corresponds to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is progressing. The sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start to the end of the symbol variation when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. It may be reproduced as a sound material) based on the schedule data for sound generation, or the entire period of the symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is them. It may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In any case, in the example shown in FIG. 301, one sound data (one sound) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing tm11. Material) is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in the state of reproduction.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in the reproduction state is the timing. At tm14, the reproduction state is set in the silent section in which the silent data content (silent data) is set. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel. ..

According to such a configuration, in the silent section after the timing tm14 is generated, the atmosphere that the channel usage condition seems to have a margin is provided because the sound of "BGM reproduction" seems to be removed from the channel. On the other hand, in the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, the atmosphere that the usage status of the channel seems to be tight is provided because the sound of "BGM playback" occupies the channel. Will be done.

That is, although the illustration is omitted, the timing tm14 is generated for various sounds different from the sound of "BGM reproduction" (for example, a warning effect sound, an effect sound accompanying the occurrence of a valid period, a winning sound, etc.). Both the subsequent silent section and the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs are assigned to appropriate channels and are put into the reproduction state. In particular, in the normal section, how many channels are used because multiple sounds are often output at the same time in order to liven up the production and suggest that the game situation such as winning or paying out has changed. It is difficult to know whether you are using it (whether there is room in the free channel), and it seems that there is not enough room in the channel usage due to the fact that the sound of "BGM playback" is always in the playback state. Atmosphere will be provided. Further, the reproduction channels "00" and "01" are dedicated channels for assigning the various error sounds described above, and the number of channels that can be used as the effect sound is also reduced by this.

Then, in this production example, when the timing tm12 arrives in a normal section where there seems to be no margin in the usage status of the channel, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.). Generate a reception effect. When the effect reception is performed by the player performing the operation within the operation valid period A (timing tm12 to tm13) for the normal reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), the effect is received. As one of the post-operation effects according to the effect reception, the "special effect sound A" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "08" and "09" in the figure) and played. On the other hand, if all of the channels to which "special production sound A" can be assigned are in use at the time when the production is accepted within the operation validity period A, one of the sounds in the playback state is forced in the middle. It is possible to reproduce the channel by assigning the "special effect sound A" to the channel in the form of ending, or to perform a process of not reproducing the "special effect sound A" without assigning it to the channel.

However, as mentioned above, there are some players who are aware that the production reception should not be generated in the normal section where the usage status of the channel seems to be tight. Therefore, in this production example, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) that occurs in the normal section where there seems to be no margin in the usage status of the channel is referred to as "non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the automatic effect function". Is to be generated. As a result, the right to select whether or not to generate the production reception within the operation validity period A is left to only the player. Therefore, "Since there may not be enough free channels, the production reception is not generated. It will be preferable to avoid the automatic generation of the reception effect against the player's intention such as "Let's do it" (prevention of wasteful use of the channel by the automatic effect function).

That is, if the player does not operate the operation means to be operated in the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) is performed without the effect reception occurring. ) Will be terminated, and none of the post-operation effects including the "special effect sound A" will be executed, and the subsequent effect progress will be performed.

On the other hand, in this production example, as described above, when the timing tm14 arrives, a silent section appears in which it seems that there is a margin in the usage status of the channel. Then, when the timing tm15 arrives in such a silent section, an in-silence reception effect (operation valid period B) that gives an operation opportunity to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) is generated. With the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound" is removed, we are actively encouraging the production to be accepted by the operation by the player. That is also as described above. When the effect reception occurs within the operation valid period B (timing tm15 to tm16) for the silent reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is performed. As one, the "special production sound B" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "10" and "11" in the figure) and played.

In this regard, with regard to the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) related to this effect example, the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" has been removed. Considering that it is in a state, it is decided to generate this as "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function". That is, in this case, the player will no longer have the intention of "not generating the production reception because there may not be enough free channels", so that the reception production is automatically generated contrary to the player's intention. It becomes possible to reliably execute the post-operation effect according to the effect reception within the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) while preferably avoiding this.

Further, in the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation by the player, until the predetermined timing tm15a within the operation valid period B arrives (operation). When the timing tm15a arrives at the latest (when the automatic effect function is enabled), the effect reception will always occur. Then, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), while the "special effect sound B" is in the reproduction state as one of the post-operation effects corresponding to the effect reception, the above "BGM reproduction" is performed. It is said that the relationship is such that the timing tm17 when the sound of "" changes from the silent section to the normal section arrives.

According to such a configuration, the silent section of the specific sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") ends in the form of being mixed in with the "special production sound B" being reproduced. Since the data content of the section (unsuppressed sound output) will be reproduced, it will be possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when an effect reception occurs in a state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output as silent data, the "special effect sound B" is started to be reproduced in an unsuppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. It is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation in the BGM between various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that. In this way, in order to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in a non-suppressed manner, the above-mentioned silent reception effect (operation valid period B) is targeted by the "automatic effect function". It can be said that it is important to generate it as an "automatic reception effect".

During the operation validity period B (timing tm15 to tm16) related to this effect example, the symbol is being changed so that all the channels to which the "special effect sound B" can be assigned are not in use. Execution periods for various notice effects are set.

FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the normal reception effect (operation validity period A) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the normal reception effect (operation validity period A) will be described in more detail.

As described above, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this effect example is usually during the period in which specific sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm12 in the section, it is generated as "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function". Although not shown in the illustration, a precursory effect (for example, FIG. 293 (g)) suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player when the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) occurs is shown. (See), but it is desirable that the precursor effect be executed as a display content different from the precursor effect performed when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs.

When the operation validity period A corresponding to the normal reception effect occurs, the operation validity period A is terminated by the occurrence of the effect reception associated with the operation within the operation validity period A, or within the operation validity period A. The embodiment (or another example thereof) described with reference to FIGS. 293 (h) and (l), for example, until the operation valid period A ends without the operation being performed and the effect reception not occurring. For example, an image prompting the operation or an image showing the remaining time is displayed. Then, when the operation is performed within the operation valid period A and the effect reception occurs, in addition to outputting the "special effect sound A" as one of the post-operation effects, FIGS. 293 (j), (k). ) And the like described with reference to (or another example thereof), another post-operation effect is further executed. When performing the post-operation effect step by step, it is desirable to first output the "special effect sound A" in advance. On the other hand, when the operation valid period A is terminated without the operation being performed within the operation valid period A and the effect reception not occurring, for example, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 293 (m) (or the embodiment thereof). In another example), the production status will appear after the operation validity period A is completed.

Here, the normal internal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this effect example is set as a period from the timing tm12 to the timing tm13 when the “time Ta” has elapsed, and the normal internal reception effect (operation valid period) is set. When the production reception occurs in A), the "special production sound A" is output over a "time Tc" longer than the "time Ta".

That is, in this case, even if the player operates immediately after the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) occurs at the timing tm12 and the effect reception occurs, the "special effect sound A" is produced. , As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the timing tm13 and the timing tm13a are assigned to the channel and output. On the other hand, when the player performs an operation immediately before the timing tm13 at which the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) ends and the effect reception occurs, the “special effect sound A” is shown in FIG. 302 (b). ), It will be assigned to the channel and output up to the more delayed timing tm13b.

According to such a configuration, the "special effect sound A" corresponding to the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) covers a wide range of channels such as timing tm12 to tm13b, which is more than twice as wide as the operation valid period A. Understand that it can be used. This means that at least four channels (stereo BGM, stereo special production sound A) can be used at the timings tm12 to tm13b, and there is no room for free channels by that amount.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 302 and 303, in the normal reception effect according to this effect example, the "time Ta" as the operation valid period A is set to the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) described later. ) Is set to a shorter time than the "time Tb". As a result, the time (timing tm12 to tm13b) until the output of the "special production sound A" is completed can be relatively shortened, and by extension, the production sound accompanying the normal reception production can be generated. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where the channels are insufficient. In addition, by making the time as the operation valid period A relatively short in this way, it seems that there is not much room in the vacant channel, and the automatic production function cannot be enabled for the player. It is also possible to create a directing effect that forces you to choose whether or not to operate it.

In this production example, the output of the "special production sound A" is set to end before the timing tm14 for switching to the silent section arrives at the latest (FIGS. 302 (a), (FIG. 302 (a),). b)). In this respect, according to the above-mentioned configuration in which the timings tm12 to tm13b are relatively shortened, there is no sound at a relatively early stage after the normal in-house reception effect is generated while maintaining the relationship between the timings tm13b and tm14. It will be possible to make the section appear, and it will be possible to suitably eliminate the dramatic extension.

FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the silent reception effect (operation validity period B) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) will be described in more detail.

As described above, the normal reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example is silent during the period in which specific sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm15 in the section, it is generated as an "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function".

As described above, although the illustration is omitted, a precursory effect suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs (for example, FIG. 292 (for example, FIG. 292). b)) will be performed.

In this respect, the illustration is also omitted, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, even if the symbol is changed in a predetermined effect pattern different from the specific effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination, the predetermined timing is used. When it arrives, the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern can be output in a suppressed mode or silently. However, when a "suppression mode or a period of silent output" occurs within a predetermined effect pattern, no reception effect is generated after a predetermined time (certain period) has elapsed from the occurrence of the period. Therefore, the effect progress is made to return the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") to the effect state of being output in a non-suppressed manner.

In view of the pachinko machine 1 in which such an effect progress (predetermined effect pattern) can appear, the above-mentioned precursor effect (for example, FIG. Regarding (see 292 (b)), by starting after the timing tm14 when the silent section appears, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the reception effect will occur when the silent section appears, and the tension is reached. It is desirable to maintain the feeling. At this time, it is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher for the production progress in which the reception effect occurs in the silent section than in the production progress in which the reception effect does not occur in the silent section.

By the way, in the above-mentioned predetermined effect pattern, the method of outputting the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") in the suppressed mode or silently is limited to the method of setting the data content (initial value of volume) itself in the suppressed mode or silent mode. Instead, this may be achieved by adjusting the volume from the initial value. That is, in the predetermined effect pattern, the reception effect cannot occur while the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is output in the suppressed mode or silently, and the BGM data ("BGM reproduction") Since the timing to return to the production state in which the sound) is output in a non-suppressed manner is not indefinite and is predetermined, even if the volume is adjusted from the initial value, the above-mentioned sound deviation etc. may occur. No inconvenience occurs.

Then, as shown in FIG. 303 (a), if the operation valid period B corresponding to the silent reception effect occurs, the effect reception associated with the operation within the operation valid period B occurs. Until the operation valid period B ends, or the operation valid period B ends due to the fact that the operation is not performed within the operation valid period B and the effect reception is automatically generated, for example, FIG. 292 (c). , (D), and the like (or another example thereof), an image prompting the operation, an image showing the remaining time, and the like are displayed.

Here, the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example is set as a period from the timing tm15 to the timing tm16 when the “time Tb” has elapsed, and the silent reception effect (operation valid period). When the production reception occurs in B), the "special production sound B" is output over a "time Td" longer than the "time Tb".

That is, in this case, even if the player operates immediately after the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs at the timing tm15 and the effect reception occurs, the "special effect sound B" is , As shown in FIG. 303A, the sound is assigned to the channel and output up to the timing tm17a after the timing tm17 returned to the normal section. On the other hand, within the silent reception effect (operation valid period B), at the timing tm15a (the timing when a specific time (<time Tb) has elapsed since the operation valid period B occurred) when the automatic effect function is activated). When the effect reception is automatically generated, the "special effect sound B" is assigned to the channel and output up to the more delayed timing tm17b, as shown in FIG. 303 (b).

By the way, the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example is not equipped with the setting process by the player related to the "automatic effect mode", and is operated by the player when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs. If there is no such function, the "automatic effect function" is always enabled at the timing tm15a to automatically generate the effect reception. Therefore, although the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) itself occurs as a period that can be continued from the timing tm15 to the timing tm16, it is substantially continued only from the timing tm15 to the timing tm15a. It can be said that it is a period that cannot be obtained. That is, in this case, it is unlikely that the production reception will occur within the period from the timing tm15a to the timing tm16, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, such a camouflage period (timing tm15a to tm16). The silent reception effect (operation valid period B) is intentionally generated as a longer period (timing tm15 to tm16) including the above.

According to such a configuration, unlike the case of the above-mentioned normal reception effect (operation valid period A), there is a margin in both the number of free channels and the remaining time as the operation valid time B. In an atmosphere with a sense of security that looks like this, it becomes possible to give the player an operation opportunity, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In order to make it appear that there is a margin in the remaining time as the operation valid time B, the gauge amount required for the bar display indicating the remaining time of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) is full at the timing tm15. After displaying as a tongue state, it is desirable to display so as to decrease in a mode (speed) in which the timing tm16 becomes 0 as the timing tm16 arrives. Further, in this case, since the timing tm15a arrives and the effect reception is automatically generated with the gauge amount required for the bar display remaining, the mode (or the mode shown in FIGS. 292 (e) and (f)) is shown. As in the other example), the bar display is not hidden and the output of the "special effect sound B" is started while the bar display is continuously displayed, thereby within the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). It is desirable to be able to recognize that the "automatic effect function" has been enabled. The bar display left in this way is hidden while the "special effect sound B" is in the output state.

Further, according to such a configuration, the operation effective time B can be substantially shortened from the time recognized by the player (the remaining time indicated by the bar display). For example, if there is a case where an operation by a player is performed immediately before the timing tm16 at which the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) ends and the effect reception may occur, the “special effect sound B” may occur. Is assigned to the channel and output up to the further delayed timing tm17c, as shown in FIG. 303 (c). Then, there is a possibility that the "special production sound B" corresponding to the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) can use the channel over an extremely wide range such as timing tm15 to tm17c. It can be understood that only the free channel is lost.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as described above, the operation effective time B is substantially shortened (timing tm15 to tm15a) with respect to the time recognized by the player (timing tm15 to tm16). By doing so, the period during which the "special effect sound B" corresponding to the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) can use the channel is shown from the range (timing tm15 to tm17c) shown in FIG. 303 (c). It becomes possible to narrow down to the range (timing tm15 to tm17b) shown in 303 (b), and it becomes possible to give a margin to the free channel by that amount.

However, in the above-mentioned production example, even when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) is regarded as a substantially shortened period (specific time from timing tm15 to timing tm15a), it is usually normal. This is set as a longer time than the time Ta set as the internal reception effect (operation valid period A). Adopting such a configuration is important for creating a secure atmosphere that seems to have a margin in both the number of free channels and the remaining time as the operation effective time B. You can say that.

Further, in the production example related to the silent section, "a feeling of strangeness due to the sound of" BGM reproduction "not being restored as a non-suppressive mode when the operation by the player is accepted but being restored after a predetermined time" is further enhanced. In order to make it difficult to remember, it is desirable to set the initial volume value of the special effect sound B to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, while the special effect sound B having a large initial volume value is attracting attention, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly transferred to the reproduction state in the normal section.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example related to the silent section, the special production sound B is generated based on the production reception, but only when the specific production conditions according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination are satisfied. The special production sound B may be generated based on the reception of the production. Even if a specific effect condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing tm15, and when the effect is received within the operation valid period, it is determined based on the fact that the effect is received. Play the production sound (failure production sound, etc.). Then, regardless of the timing of the operation within the operation valid period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly put into the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable that the point of shifting to is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned production example.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect) is reproduced. The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section in the state where the reproduction of (sound, etc.) is completed. In this case, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is reproduced at the timing when the BGM reproduction sound is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section. Will be set to arrive after the end.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. May be good. In this case, at the timing tm14, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated and this may be made an empty channel.

Further, when the special effect sound B is generated, the display change and the movable effect of operating a predetermined movable body are performed together based on the effect reception so as to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction. It is desirable to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section. In this case, when the special effect sound A is generated, it is desirable that the display change is only generated based on the effect reception, and the movable effect for operating the predetermined movable body is not executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently in a part of the section, but the sound is not limited to this, and is output in a more suppressed manner than the sound of "BGM reproduction" in other sections. Anything is fine. Here, the suppressed mode can be exemplified as a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced, and the like.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is set by setting a time-series period in which the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently by simply playing it back without making any adjustments. However, it is not always necessary to set a time-series period in which the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. For example, at timing tm14, the sound of "BGM reproduction" may be set. Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the effect reception occurs at the timing tm15a, the process of raising the volume of the sound of the "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (the process of returning to the initial volume value) is not performed. .. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing tm17 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. The process of increasing from the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without increasing the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from the specific value. good.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, a restriction process for making it difficult for a new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel is performed at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the arrival of the timing tm14 to the timing tm17. Is desirable. In addition, as such a restriction process, for example, a specific game such as a hold winning sound, a general electric effect sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc., which has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol fluctuation during execution. It is desirable to limit the sound and prevent the reproduction of the specific game sound to be restricted without newly assigning it to the channel.

Further, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is used on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing tm14 arrives. It is desirable that it is not music but a production sound such as a sound effect or dialogue so that it does not overlap with the sound of It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed mode or silently. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed with the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of the specific effect sound is terminated before the timing tm15 (timing tm15 or before the timing tm15) when the special effect sound B (or a predetermined effect sound) can be output. It is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special production sound B is not output.

Further, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the BGM reproduction sound is emitted from the timing when the special effect sound B (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound on a plurality of channels until the timing tm17 when the suppression mode or the state of being silenced ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of production sounds including the special production sound B are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM reproduction into those production sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction can be produced. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the normal mode.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example may also be equipped with a setting process by the player related to the “automatic production mode”. That is, in this case, when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated and the effect reception occurs even within the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) when the predetermined timing arrives. .. On the other hand, if the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs while the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated when a predetermined timing before the above timing tm15a arrives. It is desirable that it be activated so that the production reception occurs.

In the above effect example, execution periods such as various advance notice effects during symbol fluctuation are set so that the number of vacant channels does not become 0 even during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). You may do so. In short, by making the sound of "BGM reproduction" continuously output in an unsuppressed manner, it suffices to provide an atmosphere in which it seems that there is no room in the free channels. On the contrary, the number of free channels may become 0 even during the execution period of the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). In short, it is sufficient that the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed manner or silently to provide an atmosphere in which the free channels seem to have a margin.

In the above production example, "special production sound A" is assigned to the channels "08" and "09", whereas "special production sound B" is assigned to the channels "10" and "11". , These "special production sound A" and "special production sound B" may be assigned to the same channel.

In the above production example, it is decided to start the precursory effect for the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) after the timing tm14 when the silent section appears. However, the precursory effect may be started before the timing tm14 in which the silent section appears, and the timing tm14 in which the silent section appears while the precursory effect is being executed may arrive. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide a color rendering property such as whether or not a silent section appears while the precursory effect is being performed.

In the above effect example, the same operation means (for example, operation button 410) is set as the operation target for the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) and the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). In the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the operation button 410 is executed as an operation target, whereas in the silent reception effect (operation valid period B), the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target. It may be executed as a reception effect. In this case, different images (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) are displayed between the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) and the execution period of the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). Since it will be displayed, when the post-operation effect is started in those reception effects, the image is hidden as in the embodiment (or another example thereof) described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 287. Instead of setting this, the effect may be started after the operation while the display is continuously displayed.

In the above-mentioned production example, in the specific production pattern, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) is generated only once when the normal section is in the normal section, but the non-automatic reception is performed when the normal section is in the normal section. The normal reception effect (operation valid period A) as an effect may be generated a plurality of times. However, it is desirable that the post-operation effects that are different from each other are executed in those normal reception effects. On the other hand, in the silent section in a specific production pattern, in order to secretly output the "BGM reproduction sound" in a non-suppressed manner while the "special production sound B" is being reproduced, the reception is performed in silence. It is desirable to generate the effect (operation valid period B) only once. It is desirable that the post-operation effect by the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) and the post-operation effect by the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) are different from each other.

[Movable production triggered by the establishment of conditions other than the conditions for design games]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU1310a), when a game ball is accepted in the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when a big hit is won, a big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be acquired is executed after executing a symbol change in which the big hit symbol is displayed, and after the big hit game, it is advantageous to the player. It is possible to control the game state (time saving state, probability change state). Further, while such a symbol game is performed, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, various notice effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, etc., in addition to the effect pattern, are produced according to the result of the determination regarding the hit. Etc.) are made feasible, and as mentioned above, the game is maintained in the interest of the game until the big hit game is played.

However, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific) only by performing the effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a. There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (sudare) and the like will become monotonous, and it will be difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operating rate for a long period of time.

Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the display contents and movement on the effect display device 1600 are satisfied even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol fluctuation (the start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied. It is possible to execute a process that can change the behavior of the decoration. That is, in this case, display changes and movable body movements appear in a mode beyond the scope of the symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period of time. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol change (the start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. As a method for causing the above, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. In addition, in order to change the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted, but a situation in which the symbol variation is not executed temporarily (the processing flag shown in FIG. 167 is "0" and the number of pending numbers is set. The above-mentioned other condition must be satisfied even if the condition is "0"), and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the like. It must be capable of causing changes in the behavior of the movable ornament.
-A method in which a production lottery unrelated to the symbol fluctuation is periodically executed, and the fact that a specific result is obtained by this production lottery is regarded as "the establishment of another condition" described above.-The cumulative number of operations for a specific operation means. The time is measured by the arithmetic processing in the RTC (real-time clock) function or the peripheral control MPU1511a (or the main control MPU1310a) (for example, the power is turned on). (Measure the time from), and the above-mentioned "satisfaction of another condition" is that the measured time reaches a predetermined time.

Generally, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured by using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition is satisfied, and the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, until the change timing arrives. Since it is common to take a relatively long time (at least several hours, etc.), it is possible to change the display content or the behavior of the movable ornament despite such a long time. If something that cannot be done occurs, there is a concern that the interest in playing games will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set in advance is set as a start condition of the symbol game. Can occur based on the fact that another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time) is satisfied. Then, in a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, a situation in which the movable decorative body should be in the in-situ position but is not in the in-situ position) and a specific state has not occurred, the symbol changes. When the corresponding restoration operation time arrives, it is possible to start the process of causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, it is possible to start a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state without starting a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation even when a predetermined restoration operation time arrives. ..

That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the satisfaction of a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol change side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state, a movable body abnormality can be detected by a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution status of the symbol change. It is expected that the movable decorative body will be restored and the operation in a specific mode (the operation when another condition is satisfied) will be executed more reliably.

Hereinafter, an example of the processing content when the movable decorative body is operated when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIG. 304. In the example shown in FIG. 304, for convenience of explanation, "RTC state in which a display content different from the previous one appears when it is determined that the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time by using the RTC function (RTC state). It is described as "a process that can execute a process of generating a specific state) and sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C according to the occurrence timing of the RTC state (specific state)". As described above, the method of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the start condition of the game is satisfied is not limited to this. As is the case, it is possible to appropriately adopt each of the techniques described below even when other methods are adopted.

Assuming that the state is before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the remaining time until the elapsed time from the power-on reaches the predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs). The remaining time) will be updated regularly. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt2, the elapsed time from the power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) is generated. Based on the above, it is possible to execute the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the establishment of a condition unrelated to the situation of the symbol change (the establishment of the second condition), so that the flow of the game so far can be changed. You will be able to have a sense of expectation as if it will change. At this time, the display content of the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

In order to more preferably increase the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the effect is produced. If you win a big hit between the time when the period (RTC state) occurs and the time when it ends, the production progress by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) (normal state) It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even at the timing Rt1 slightly before the timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before), the condition unrelated to the state of the symbol fluctuation is satisfied. Based on the condition satisfaction (the first condition is satisfied), the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is satisfied) can be executed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this example, it is determined whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the passage of time since the power is turned on. When it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the pre-display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the process (behavior of the movable decoration) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. .. The "pre-display" can be executed, for example, as a display such as "soon RTC state" or a countdown display toward the timing Rt2.

According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body movements are the result of the jackpot determination. Since it is suggested in advance to the player that it is not based on (it does not have any jackpot expectation), it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the game interest due to a recognition error by the player. You will be able to.

In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at least during the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. The decorative pattern (effect pattern) itself is hidden so that it is not displayed. That is, in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any degree of expectation appears as the display content in the effect display device 1600. Since the process of causing the game to be started is started, it is expected that it is more preferable to avoid the deterioration of the game interest due to the recognition error by the player.

Here, the "pre-display that appears at timing Rt1" and the "moving body movement that appears at timing Rt2" correspond to "display that does not conform to the symbol variation" and correspond to "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation", respectively. It is something to do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body occur regardless of the execution status (including the execution status) of the symbol change at those timings. However, depending on the execution status of the symbol change, the preparations for operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are not ready (the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in the original position even though the timing Rt2 has arrived). There is a concern that the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be sequentially operated even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

For example, when any one of several fluctuation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the movable decorative body A or the movable decorative body B, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, A movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, but it seems that the movable body operation time (here, when the RTC state occurs) in the above-mentioned RTC state arrives during the execution of such a movable effect. In some cases, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the process of being executed cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, not only the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C but also various movable pachinko machines 1 are provided. It is possible to perform a movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined (abnormality determination) that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state in this movable abnormality determination, a predetermined movable decorative object is determined for the movable decorative body that is the determination target, following the processing of the abnormality determination. By executing the restoration process of performing the restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.), it is possible to quickly restore the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. Therefore, it is possible that the movable body operation time in the above-mentioned RTC state arrives while the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.) is being performed on the movable decorative body. If there is, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of the restoration operation cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

The "restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change" includes, for example, the start time of the symbol change (the time when the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side is acquired when the symbol change starts) and the symbol change. It is possible to execute (execute the restoration process based on the acquisition of the command) as at least one of the stop timings (the timing to acquire the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped). Is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU1511a), first, at least "after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives, the movable decorative body is specified according to the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in the embodiment, the movable decorative body (movable decorative body A, movable decorative body B) used within the period is reached. , Movable decoration C) is prohibited so that it is not used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol change side, so that the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration that does not conform to the symbol change) It is possible to suppress the situation where the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol change side.

However, at this time, even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, if the movable effect is not executed within the effect pattern, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be deteriorated. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU1511a), only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content in the effect display device 1600 appears at the timing Rt1. That is mentioned above.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when there is a symbol change (B change (loss) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, "what kind of expectation" was displayed until then. "Display not shown (display from timing Rt1)" is not hidden at this point, and it is displayed over the period until the timing Rt2a when the symbol change (B change (loss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to maintain it.

According to such a configuration, in the timing Rt2 to Rt2a, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol change is actually performed, the effect display device 1600 is decorated. The effect pattern by the pattern is hidden, and only the display that does not show any expectation will appear. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable decorative body (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is advanced. It is expected that the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the movable effect according to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is preferably suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 304, when the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a arrives). , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display that does not show any expectation (display from timing Rt1)" that was displayed until then is hidden at this point. Then, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, it responds to the symbol change. The display showing the degree of expectation such as the production pattern and the advance notice production is started as usual.

However, even if a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed in this way, "timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived. At least as long as it is within the period from then until the movable decoration finishes operating in a specific mode (here, sequential operation by the three movable decorations A, B, and C) depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol change side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol changing side is prohibited, but since the movable body movement corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol changing side. The decline in interest will be suppressed.

As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether or not the situation should be prohibited at the start of the symbol change (C change in the figure), and when it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol change (figure). Among them, C variation) itself may be set as a prohibited target of the movable effect (at least the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs occurs in the middle of the corresponding symbol change (C change in the figure), the movable decorative body changes depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. Even if the "period until the operation in a specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C) is completed" is completed, the movable effect (in this case, the movable effect (in this case, the period until the symbol change is completed) is completed. At least, the execution of the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C) becomes unacceptable.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is set to the timing Rt2a later than the original timing Rt2. There is concern that the number will decline. However, the RTC state itself occurs at timing Rt2, but if the jackpot is won between the time when the RTC state occurs and the time when the RTC state ends, it is controlled to the special effect mode. Etc.) does not occur at timing Rt2, and only the symbol fluctuations (C and D fluctuations in the figure) after the first digested symbol fluctuation after the RTC state occurs are targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

By the way, until the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is completed (stopped) (until the timing Rt2a arrives). ), "After the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It is also possible that the period until the end of the sequential operation by C) elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display without any expectation (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. In the example shown in FIG. 304, the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after the timing Rt2) is subject to the RTC effect privilege. This is because it is not.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU1511a), at least after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed, even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives, the restoration process is triggered by this. By prohibiting this so that (a process of causing a movable decorative body in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation) is prohibited, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not according to the symbol variation). The behavior of the movable decorative body) can be prevented from occurring due to the restoration process on the symbol change side.

According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the satisfaction of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol change side is performed. The process of making a device is prohibited, and the process of performing a predetermined restore operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. Therefore, the influence of the execution status of the symbol change. It is expected that the movable body abnormality will be restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without receiving the response, and the movement of the movable decorative body in the above specific mode will be executed more reliably. ..

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state and the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) according to the jackpot determination is in the middle of the process. It is assumed that the above timing Rt1 arrives. As described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation, for example, a display such as "RTC state" appears in the background display on the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) is completed between the display such as "RTC state soon" and the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is created. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 arrives when the symbol change is in the middle of the process, and at the timing Rt2, three movable ornaments behave as a movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol change. The process of sequentially operating the decorations A, B, and C is executed. The "display not conforming to the symbol variation" from the timing Rt1 is continued for a period until the new symbol variation (variation B (loss) in the figure) is stopped.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, "three movable decorative bodies A, depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, among various movable decorative bodies, It is prohibited to perform both the movable effect on the symbol change side using C and the restoration process on the symbol change side. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even though the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is executed during the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a, the effect display on the symbol variation side (the effect display on the symbol variation side (loss)). It will be controlled as a period during which neither the display showing the degree of expectation), the movable effect on the symbol change side (moving body movement showing the degree of expectation), or the restoration process on the symbol change side is executed (No. 1). One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 304, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expected). The movement of the movable body whose degree is indicated) and the restoration process on the symbol change side will be controlled as a period during which neither is executed (second limitation).

It should be noted that such control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (neither the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the degree of expectation) nor the movable effect (movement of the movable body showing the degree of expectation) is executed) is the said. It is executed even if the symbol change in the period is not a loss change but is performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit change). That is, in this case, when the expected effect is not executed and the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C reaches the timing Rt2a in the middle of execution, the jackpot symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, as a player who was expecting to be in the RTC state, he / she will be able to enjoy the fun as a surprise production that exceeds the expectation. After the jackpot symbol appears in this way, the jackpot gaming state occurs while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operating.

Further, as described above, as for the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display in which the decorative symbol is not changed and no expectation is shown), the symbol change that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrived is present. It will be hidden at the stop timing Rt2a, and instead, a specific background (such as "in RTC state") after the RTC state has occurred will be displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started while a specific background (such as "in RTC state") is displayed, an effect display (expectation degree is shown) according to the variation pattern. Will be displayed) will be executed normally. However, regarding the movable effect on the symbol change side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, after the timing Rt2a arrives. Will be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, even if an effect pattern for performing a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, the movable effect is performed. Although the liquid crystal display, sound, lamp lighting, etc. are performed as usual, the movable decorative body is prevented from operating.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives, the three movable decorative bodies A and B depend on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. , In the period until the sequential operation by C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation (here, the start of the symbol variation). Even if the time (time, stop time) arrives, it is prohibited to perform the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform the predetermined restoration operation). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) and the symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) )) The start time (restoration operation time) has come, but in these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decoration in an abnormal state, it is restored to the movable decoration. No processing is performed.

However, during the period of timing Rt2 to Rt5 (when abnormal, timing Rt2 to Rt5'), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol change side in this way, first, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state at timing Rt2. Determine if it is. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body A in the original position to a predetermined effect position (first position), the movable decorative body A is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

Next, at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B is, for example, that the movable decorative body B in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

Then, at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body C in the original position to a predetermined effect position (third position), the movable decorative body C is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (e), when the timing Rt5 after each operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. The "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" is terminated, and the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, when it is determined in any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, a process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation. Is made feasible. However, while executing a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs, the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is predetermined. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, it will be a sensation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed, and a series of movable body operations (here, three movable bodies) when the RTC state occurs. It is not executed independently as an operation separate from the sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C), but is executed as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. .. That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation itself for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated as a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. , The deterioration of the game interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state can be preferably avoided.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, it is not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but an abnormal time including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B. It is possible to execute the process of operating (special operation) in the operation mode of. After that, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not re-operated (normally operated) in the normal operating mode, and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. 304 (e) is not performed. Similar to the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body C is movable. The process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation by the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state occurs (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the abnormal movable decorative body B occurs. Until the timing to operate is reached, it will be left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol change side. Then, when the timing for operating the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operation mode. Therefore, "three It becomes possible to restore the abnormally generated movable decorative body B while suitably maintaining the effect mode when the RTC state is generated, such as "sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C". That is, in this case, since it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as the operation when the RTC state is generated is executed, a predetermined restoration operation is performed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. The deterioration of the game entertainment when performing the game will be preferably avoided.

The symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially executed by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. It starts when it is in the middle stage and continues until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Therefore, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) and the start time (restoration operation time) of the next symbol change (D change (loss) in the figure) have arrived. At that time, the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol change side has already been released. Therefore, when a movable decorative object in an abnormal state exists at that time, the restoration process is executed for the movable decorative object. The Rukoto.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), the "special mode including the restoration operation" when the movable decorative body B is operated in the "special mode including the restoration operation" is described in "normal operation". The movable decorative body B may be restored (returned to the original position) by an operation mode different from the "mode", and may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt1, only the display (for example, "soon RTC state" or the like) that does not show any expectation level is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display content is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, "RTC preparation state"). You may switch to. However, even when the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, the display content on the effect display device 1600 does not show any expectation during the period from the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation). It is important to make the display that does not conform to) appear.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B has been described. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restoration operation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the operation time of the movable body for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set as the occurrence time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation time may be set at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the RTC state (specific state) occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, "not conforming to the symbol variation" based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 in which the condition is satisfied based on the function (RTC function) not conforming to the symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU1511a side. It was decided to start "display" and "behavior of movable decorative objects that do not conform to pattern fluctuations". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function that does not conform to the symbol variation on the main control MPU1310a side, "display that does not conform to the symbol variation" and "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". May be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, "after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, 3). This is prohibited so that the restoration process on the symbol change side is not performed when it is in the period until the end of the sequential operation by the two movable ornaments A, B, and C. The movement of the movable body in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the (specific state) is less likely to occur due to a conflict with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may be started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is set to the execution state. In this situation, the RTC state (specific state) may occur, and eventually the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) causes the movable body to move in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the RTC state (specific state). There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even during the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is desirable to prohibit this so that it will not be executed.

FIG. 305 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 304, in which "in the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 are It is different from the example shown in FIG. 304 in that the restoration process is not executed.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 305, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), an abnormality determination (or an abnormality determination) is made for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. , Restoration process) I am trying not to execute this itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while the display does not conform to the symbol change (such as "RTC state soon"), this is restored. There is no such thing, and it will be left in an abnormal state.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 305, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs arrives, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to the processing related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state. It is decided to perform an abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

As a result of the above abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived, and FIG. The above-mentioned processing (processing related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state) will be performed with reference to. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is executed again individually, indicating that there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 304 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 304 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed prior to the start of the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state, and the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. Even after that, the second abnormality determination is executed prior to operating the movable decorative body B.

On the other hand, as a result of performing the above abnormality determination prior to executing the process related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state, it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. At that time, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a form of delaying the arrival of the movable body operation time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is "a situation in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movement of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet started". By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode can be performed in the "normal mode" instead of the above-mentioned "special mode". Become so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 305 (f), at the timing Rt2 where the RTC state occurs, "the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movement in a specific mode by the movable decoration body". It is assumed that it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of performing the abnormality determination when "is not yet started". Then, while maintaining the "situation in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the movement of the movable decoration in a specific mode has not yet started", the movable decoration determined to be abnormal is determined. Will be restored.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 305 (e) and 305 (f), in the RTC state, as compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. The arrival of the movable body operation time is delayed (delay from timing Rt2 to timing Rt2b in the figure), and the period created by such a delay (timing Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) should be used. Then, it becomes possible to restore the movable decorative body that has been determined to be abnormal and then to arrive at the movable body operation time in the RTC state. After that, when the movable body operation time in the RTC state arrives, the processing as described above is performed with reference to FIG. 304.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. is doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (e). Then, when the timing Rt5b arrives after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in the normal mode, the "movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is reached. Behavior ”is terminated, and the prohibited state (prohibited state over timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol change side is released.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), a new abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have sequentially operated in the mode corresponding to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are the normal mode and the movable decorative body B is the special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibited state (prohibited state over the timing Rt1 to Rt5b) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is terminated. ) Will be canceled. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. The operation in the special mode will be executed respectively.

According to such a configuration, even if a movement abnormality occurs during the movement of the movable body immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movements of the movable body at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (here, three). (Sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 305, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration process for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is reached. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs are due to the increase in the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored. ) Will be delayed over a longer period of time, but it will be possible to perform a series of moving body movements in the normal mode when an RTC state occurs. The restoration operation for a plurality of movable ornaments may be executed in parallel, and in this case, the delay time until the series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs can be suppressed. become.

However, even in the example shown in FIG. 305, it is annoying that the player may feel that the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performing a predetermined restoration operation. There is concern that the number will decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and 305 (g), when the "restoration operation" is completed, the "sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C" is executed (sequential execution). ), So that the series of movable body movements up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as "a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs". It is made difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, it is possible to display (error code, etc.) indicating that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body. In the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and 305 (g) as well as the example shown in 304 (f), during the period during which the restoration operation (restoration process) is executed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decoration during (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality judgment) or during the period during which the movable decoration B is operated in the special mode (during the operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality judgment). There is no indication (error code, etc.) that indicates that the game is being played. Further, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is completed, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is completed, and further, FIG. 305 ( f) At the timing when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started after the restoration operation shown in (g) is completed, the display content on the effect display device 1600 is triggered by the occurrence of these timings. Does not cause any change. These things also make it appear that "a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs" is performed, and that the predetermined restoration operation is performed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

In addition, in FIG. 304 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 305 and its alternative example, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, it is decided to sequentially perform the operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Not limited to the above, the movable decorative body (one, two, or three or more, etc.) used in the movable effect on the symbol change side is based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (start condition). It suffices as long as it operates in a specific mode at the time of operation of the movable body within the specific state in which it occurs.

Further, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, provided so as to be movable). Operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc., and board side movable decoration body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) ) Etc.) and may be used respectively.

However, for example, in FIG. 304 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 305 and another example thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state), as an operating means. When the frame-side movable decoration body (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decoration body that is also used as such an operation means even after the timing Rt2a arrives. There may be a situation where "operations that do not conform to symbol fluctuations" are being performed.

That is, as described above, in the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display that does not show any expectation (from the timing Rt1)" that has been displayed until then is displayed. Display) ”is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, it responds to the symbol change. It was also mentioned above that the display showing the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the advance notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, during the period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative body (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001, etc.) that is also used as an operating means is used. Depending on the effect pattern, the frame-side movable decorative body, which is also used as an operation means, may be given an operation opportunity even though it is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state. A situation that causes confusion in terms of production can occur. In the period of timing Rt2 to Rt2a (further, the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (the display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if the symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is performed, the operation opportunity is not given within the period.

Therefore, even though the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operating means is subject to the result of the jackpot determination. When it is time to give an operation opportunity, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific display (operation instruction image) for prompting the specific operation means to perform an operation. Even if a specific operating means in a state where a specific operation is performed is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed, the game is that the operation opportunity was originally given to the specific operation means. It is possible to appropriately suggest to a person. In addition, by not accepting the effect of the operation for the specific operating means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of failure or abnormality due to the operation being performed for the specific operating means in the operating state. It will be expected.

However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display prompting the operation for the specific operation means is performed. If such a thing happens frequently, the game entertainment may be reduced due to the lack of progress in the production. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be operable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the operation effect is performed within the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination. An operation means (for example, an operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in which the generation rate of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively high. When it is given, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the effect reception (predetermined effect according to the effect reception) when the operation is performed are executed as usual.

That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable (for example, vibration), the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the design changes according to the jackpot determination. A movable decorative body capable of operating a specific operating means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low rate of occurrence of an operation effect in the RTC state (specific state) at the movable body operating time. By using it as one, the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, but the movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body (for example)). For example, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the jackpot determination is reached for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably a specific operating means in which the rate of occurrence of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low) is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When it is used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable to perform the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 304) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 305) is executed for any one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. However, it becomes possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected by the performance (delay or the like). In this case, it is desirable that all of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C be used as board-side movable decorative bodies. As a result, even if any of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the restoration operation, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the door frame 3 is provided. The operation by the frame-side movable decoration can be executed in parallel.

Then, after the RTC state (specific state) is generated, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operating means (for example, a sword decorative body) in which the rate of occurrence of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low is relatively low. When the time required to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation according to 5001)) (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) is set as the "specific time", any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot judgment is executed. Even in this case, as long as at least a "specific time" does not elapse after the symbol variation starts (the effect pattern starts), the predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration). It is desirable to set each effect pattern (timing for giving an operation opportunity) so that the body (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive.

According to such a configuration, in FIG. 304 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 305 and its alternative example, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, the symbol variation is within the symbol variation. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decoration body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state). Since the operation) has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, it is possible to enhance the effect when the RTC state occurs without sacrificing the effect on the symbol change side.

Further, as described above, in view of the fact that the normal effect control is allowed only for the symbol variation after the symbol variation that is first digested after the RTC state occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example). , The operation that does not conform to the symbol variation due to the sword decoration body 5001) (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation that is first digested after that is forced to start later than this, the frame-side movable ornament (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is equal to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ) Allows a margin to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol change in advance.

Further, when the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In the execution thereof, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to execute the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the operation of the above, or to perform the operation in the normal state after performing the restoration operation. In this case, the "special mode including the restoration operation" also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) by an operation mode different from the "normal operation mode". It may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001).

Then, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is the "normal mode", the "special mode including the restoration operation", and the "restoration operation". Regardless of which aspect of "the mode of performing the operation of the normal mode in the subsequent manner" is executed, as long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is used. It is more desirable to make settings for each effect pattern so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) regardless of which of the effect patterns corresponding to the jackpot determination is executed at the timing Rt2a. Regardless of whether the operation is executed in the normal mode or the mode when an abnormality is determined, only after the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is used. On the other hand, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity.

Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received, at least one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. It may be possible to execute a specific movable effect. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decoration body (RTC). Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may still be in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It will not be possible to accept productions, and there is concern that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required for the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C to be completed when the sequential operation is performed in the normal mode is set as the "special time", the jackpot determination is made. Regardless of which of the effect patterns according to the above is executed, as long as neither the above "specific time" nor the "special time" elapses after the symbol variation starts (the effect pattern starts). , Each effect pattern (inside operation opportunity grant timing) so that a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive) It is desirable to make the settings related to.

When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is restored. It is desirable to prohibit the timing Rt2 so that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

On the other hand, among the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is a specific movable decorative body (for example, a movable decorative body A having a fast operation order, a movable decorative body that takes a long time to perform a restoration operation, and the like). When an abnormal state occurs within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is prohibited, but the movable decoration different from the specific movable decoration (for example, the operation order is slow). For the movable decoration B (or the movable decoration C) or the movable decoration that takes a short time to restore, if this is in an abnormal state within the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decoration is restored. The process (restoration operation) may be performed without prohibition. For example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration body B (or the movable decoration body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decoration body A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed during the period, the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed in the normal mode.

Further, the timing at which the series of operations of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the RTC state is generated, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities that have less effect on movable effects]
As described above, this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) responds to symbol fluctuations when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately and in a situation where no specific state has occurred). When the restoration operation time (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol change) arrives, it is possible to execute a process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the situation of the production, it will be a pleasure and there is a concern that the game interest will be deteriorated.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol change" is set as "restoration operation time corresponding to symbol change". Then, as shown in FIG. 306, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol change is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state has arrived, at least the following processes are performed in the peripheral control MPU1511a. Will be executed.
-The effect pattern corresponding to the symbol change is set based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol change is started, and the set effect pattern is changed. Processing to advance the production ・ Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol change is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change), it is specified. Processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on a movable ornament

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, it is assumed that "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect progress related to the "specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation will appear in which the processes to be performed are parallel to each other.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, an effect pattern (relatively expected degree) that has an effect paired relationship with the specific effect pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in the effect pattern having a paired relationship (effect pattern with relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but the specific timing tm2 is reached. It is made so that the same mode of production as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (an effect pattern with a relatively high expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is performed. To. In this way, by preparing two effect patterns (an effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and an effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are in a paired relationship in a directing manner, the specific timing tm2 is reached. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having a directing effect of whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the specific movable decoration body operates). Will become feasible, and the game entertainment will be suitably maintained by such a directing property.

However, if there is a case that the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol change is started, the specific timing is specified. Despite the arrival of tm2, it becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where the effect cannot be produced. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the color rendering of games will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 306, among the effect patterns, the effect progress related to "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2" and a predetermined effect for the specific movable decorative body. When a situation appears in which the process of performing the restore operation (restoration process based on the restore operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) is performed in parallel, "specific timing tm2" is reached before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restore status. The process of causing the movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation "is completed. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as the "process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body", but in the following explanation, "whether the abnormal state is resolved or not" It is assumed that the process of repeatedly performing the restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body until a predetermined upper limit is reached is executed.

More specifically, with regard to the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation", the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decoration is abnormal. The time required for this to be done will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decoration, "a predetermined restoration for a specific movable decoration" is performed. The timing tx at which the "processing to perform the operation" is completed also arrives at a relatively early time, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration fails and is restored (restored). As the number increases, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is postponed in a delayed manner. And at the latest, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and has not been restored (restored) yet, but the timing tx is exceeded when the restoration operation is executed again, the specific movable decoration By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration status is terminated. Will be.

It should be noted that when it is assumed that x time is required to perform the restoration operation once for a specific movable decorative body, one symbol is established so that the relationship "x time x n times <timing tm1 to tm2 time" is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed at the stage when the upper limit number n is reached. By this method, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be completed by the time the specific timing tm2 arrives, regardless of the restoration status.

According to such a configuration, the effect progress related to the specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When a certain situation appears, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed by the time the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration status. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decoration is restored before the arrival of the specific timing tm2, but also when the specific movable decoration is not restored, the specific timing tm2 is specific. Since the movable decoration is put into a stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decoration operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decoration is stopped at a position different from the original position, some behavior may occur when the specific timing tm2 arrives, or the movable decoration does not operate. Even so, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (when the effect operation by the movable decoration is performed, the lamp of the movable decoration emits light). ..

However, in reality, if a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoration operation while the above-mentioned predetermined effect is being performed, it has a color rendering property as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the game entertainment.

As a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result hit by an attack) appears in the super reach effect, and operates if the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as "not something", it is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a way that incites whether or not a specific display result appears", and a specific movable decorative body is "a thing that does not appear". When it is provided as "thing that operates based on the fact that the production is accepted by the operation by the player (or that the production is accepted but does not operate)", "the production that makes a specific display that encourages the operation by the player appear". Can be exemplified.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It is assumed that it will be in a normal state. In this way, even if the abnormal state is reached at the start of the fluctuation (or the "restoration operation time" such as when the symbol was stopped last time), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation arrives under the restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to produce and operate a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration cannot recover (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more accurately, the timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation time arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

However, in recent years, pachinko machines are becoming equipped with movable ornaments that have a more complicated structure and perform multi-step movements, and in such movable ornaments, it takes longer to complete the restoration process. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or an effect pattern that is paired with the effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, it is within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol change to the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decorative body becomes an abnormal state, it can be restored only in a simple manner as a first aid measure, which accelerates the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. It can also be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol change is started, the main control MPU1310a side When the special effect pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, a specific movable state is performed while the special effect pattern is produced (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is performed). It is controlled so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the decoration is operated) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 307 (a) and 307 (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation is started in the situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the effect progress related to the special effect pattern. And when a situation appears in which the process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is performed in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (the period until the symbol is stopped). Allows this to continue without terminating the restore process.

More specifically, in the restoration process started from the timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoration process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is executed for the entire period thereof.

According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration is performed, aiming at the time when the above-mentioned special effect pattern is performed. Since it will be possible to perform additional operations, etc.), this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and will be carefully restored as a player. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent production with peace of mind by watching the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern so that it can be selected only when the player loses the prize in the big hit judgment. In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as "This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while" appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307 (a) and 307 (d), the timing tm11 arrives when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and is continued even after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is terminated. With such a configuration, the restriction that "even though an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends, if the hold digestion is not interrupted and the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol change is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, the next time). The time to start the symbol change) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still being continued, it is determined that the specific movable ornament is still in an abnormal state (for example, it is not located in the original position). Will be done. Then, if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body may be newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only the restoration process can be performed, the content of the process is naturally limited, and the inability to adequately deal with the abnormality may accelerate the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. ..

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307 (b) and 307 (d), a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. Sometimes, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) arrives, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated and this is continued in a form that straddles the next restoration operation time. .. According to such a configuration, "despite the fact that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration", regardless of the situation in which the hold is performed while executing the restoration process for the specific movable decoration. Since the restriction that "the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes are performed" is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 307 (c) and 307 (d), the new symbol variation is started as a result of the start of the new symbol variation while the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. As such, "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 307 (a) to 307 (c), it is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the game and the production status (further, the restoration status, etc.) after the special production pattern is completed. With respect to the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably). It is desirable to finish within a shorter time than the time until the predetermined production is performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digesting the special effect pattern), the specific movable time is relatively long until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the ornament.

If a situation appears in which the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is completed, the effect is described. Do not end the restoration process within the new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and straddle the symbol variation (effect pattern) three or more times (after the restoration process is started, the one The restoration process may be continued in the form of (the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods).

In the example shown in FIG. 307, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It is assumed that it will be in a state. In this way, by continuing one restoration process in a way that straddles the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made recoverable, and it becomes possible to produce a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, although one restoration process is continued in a way that straddles the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time), a specific movable decoration is abnormal at timing tx. When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained until the symbol change is completed from the timing tx and the next restoration operation time is further reached. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific movable decorative body is specified each time the restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives. If the restoration process for the movable decoration is started many times, if the specific movable decoration is irreparably damaged, the specific movable decoration cannot be restored, but the specific movable decoration cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the repeated restoration process for the body. Therefore, even though the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit after the specific movable decoration is put into an abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decoration) reaches the predetermined upper limit). However, when it has not been restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to start a new restoration process for a specific movable decoration even if a new restoration operation time has come.

However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit number of times. , When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, the special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the effect pattern thereof One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next effect pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit number, but the restoration operation time has not been restored from the abnormal state. Even when the +1 "th restoration operation time arrives, the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is continued without being terminated. In this way, with respect to the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation period, the predetermined upper limit number may be reached no matter how many times the restoration operation period arrives while the one restoration operation is continued. It is desirable that the count is treated as one restoration process so that it is not terminated so that the restoration process in a more full-scale manner is not hindered.

By the way, regarding such a restoration process (a restoration process performed based on a restoration operation time corresponding to a symbol change), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100 or a back front decoration unit 3100) provided on the game board 5 side is provided. In addition to the medium movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the same manner as described above. The door. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be operable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like) that are also used as the operating means are used. , The above-mentioned specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) may be restored (restored) in a manner different from that of the case.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation for giving an operation opportunity to give an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol change is performed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity granting effect, "a process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 252 (f))". "Process to generate the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))", and "display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period". ) (See FIG. 252 (f)) ”is performed respectively. As a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (here, the operation of pushing it in) and the production is received, the "specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory)" is received based on the production reception. ) And the process of producing a movable decorative body on the board side (see FIG. 252 (g)) "and" the process of causing a change in the display content (see FIG. 252 (g)) ". Become. The board-side movable decorative body to be produced by this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307.

However, among such operation opportunity granting effects, the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" is not executed normally when the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state for the "process to generate the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001" and the "process to display the operation prompting". It is feasible regardless of whether it is in a certain state or in an abnormal state. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player who sees the "display prompting the operation" operates the sword decoration body 5001 and receives the effect. "Processing for producing a movable decorative body on the board side such as a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)" and "processing for causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. Not only that, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 receives an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation part operates, so that the abnormal state is obtained. Can occur in some cases.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 provided so as to be operable, a sword decorative body 5001, etc.) that is also used as an operating means is used. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307, a return process for applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position when an abnormal state occurs. The restoration process) is performed at each timing of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)" and "after the production is accepted by the player in the production pattern of the movable operation system". It is made feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body can be moved by aiming at the timing such as when the symbol change starts or stops (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing at the start and stop of the symbol change, but also a different unique timing (during the change period). Of these, the frame-side movable decoration (operation) is aimed at the timing when an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal state may be resolved). Since the process of restoring (restoring) the means) will be performed, it is expected that the return to the original position of the frame-side movable decoration (operating means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. ..

FIG. 308 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration body (operation means). be.

As shown in FIG. 308, the effect pattern of the movable operation system (the effect pattern in which the operation opportunity granting effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol change is performed) is executed. It is assumed that the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operation position, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001", "a display prompting the operation (character display such as" push ", and an effect reception period". If the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player and the production is accepted (timing tm22) while the bar display indicating the remaining time of the sword is being executed, "specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc." The process of causing the effect operation of the movable decorative body on the board side and the process of causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600 are to be performed, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 308, the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307 is operated as a board-side movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 at the timing tm22 when the production reception is received, and the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (movable decorative body on the board side) and this cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration body, but an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration body. Regarding the determination to that effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the specific notification sound and display are accompanied by the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications be performed. This is a sword decoration 5001 "placed within reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if it is notified that it has become an abnormal state, repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be done by the player's hands, the specific movable decorative body is "placed out of reach of the player (game board 5)", and this has become an abnormal state. This is because, even if the notification is given, nothing can be helped as a player, and simply emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed may promote a decline in the interest of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality is found in the specific movable decorative body while performing the "process for producing and operating the specific movable decorative body" based on the fact that the effect is received at the timing tm22. Although it will occur, by allowing this to be executed as usual for the "process that causes a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600", it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 308, at the timing tm23, the symbol fluctuation already in the pending state is immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is started. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 306 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is produced and operated at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol change, but the restoration operation time (here, at the start of the symbol change). ), The timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status). As described above, it is finished by (until the predetermined production is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the sword decoration body 5001 is also "specifically movable decoration" based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, when the symbol change starts). It is possible to execute a process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoration operation and at least a part of the operations in parallel so as to return the operation to the original position (giving a driving force). Moreover, the timing at which such a "process for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is also the same, regardless of the restoration situation, within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, a predetermined effect). It is made to end by (until it starts).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is resolved and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of excitement when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 308, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is started / ended is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is started / ended. However, only one of those timings may be the same, or any of those timings may be different.

Further, regarding the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", as described with reference to FIG. 307, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. Not only can it be continued even after the special effect pattern ends, but also the symbol fluctuations that are on hold after the special effect pattern ends are immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds). In such a situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) can be continued without being completed. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation can be performed in the same manner as this (the mode described with reference to FIG. 307). That is, in this case, also for the "process of causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation", when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it will be terminated regardless of the restoration situation between the start of the next symbol change and the time required for the timing tm2 to arrive. Become.

Also, for the sword decoration body 5001, after this is made into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times, and then a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed. When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed, the special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. Form The restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 may be continued.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 are completed at the timing tx, but the restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in an abnormal state, and the specific production pattern is produced and advanced without performing the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body. Therefore, the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm24.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (returned to the normal state) by the above, the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that the fact that an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2 is itself an abnormal situation. In such an unreliable situation, even if a specific movable decorative body is used for the effect, there is a high possibility that it will fail. It can be said that it is desirable to do so.

Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and the abnormal state is restored again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed. That is, if the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and a notification is given each time the abnormal state is restored, it gives a misunderstanding as if the player is responsible for not eliminating the abnormal state. Since there is a possibility, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) should be performed only when the first abnormality that changes from the normal state to the abnormal state occurs to encourage the player to perform the repair work. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are subjected to the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) that arrives after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body recovers from the abnormal state. Now, while only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 308, the sword decoration body 5001 that was in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is Assuming that the production is accepted by the operation by the player, it can be expected that the abnormality generated in the sword decoration body 5001 may have been eliminated by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration body 5001 that was in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received for production by the operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is subsequently used. It is possible to apply a driving force to return it to the position (retain it in the original position). At this time, considering that the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed based on the effect reception, the period (once) in which the driving force is applied so as to return the sword ornament 5001 to the original position. (Period when the return operation is successful) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is finished (the specific movable ornament is returned to the original position). It is desirable to terminate the process before it is executed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, considering that there is a rare chance that the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by such an external force (operation by the player) has a high possibility of recovery, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to the sword decoration body (returning operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is used until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is completed. By continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (the return operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is executed again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this return processing fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decoration body 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and after that, it is assumed. , The sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both kept in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is produced and advanced, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 308, the frame-side movable decoration body (sword decoration body 5001) also used as the operating means is set for the board-side movable decoration body (specific movable decoration body). In addition to the restoration operation time (at the start of the symbol change), the restoration operation time (timing after the production is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as an operating means, is likely to be in an abnormal state due to direct contact by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, it is the original. Since a large number of opportunities for returning to the position are given and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning by using at least an external force) are used as the returning method, the abnormal state is eliminated. There is a high possibility that the game will be less enjoyable.

It should be noted that, after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received for production by the operation by the player, the design change starts for the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position. A driving force may be applied to the sword decoration body 5001 with a content (different operation mode) different from that of the restoration process performed when the time (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the processing is to restore the sword decoration body 5001 by using an external force (operation by the player), it is necessary to perform the processing differently from the processing when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing will be executed in a simple manner so that the restoration processing is completed within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the restoration status, and if the restoration fails, it will be more serious at the next restoration operation time. It is desirable to ensure that the return processing is performed properly.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol fluctuation start time) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 is executed for that number of times. Nevertheless, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 is not newly started. Even when the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the effect of the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received by the operation by the player, after the effect is received, the sword decoration body 5001 is used. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the in-situ position (retain in the in-situ position). That is, as described above, the return process after the production is accepted is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by an external force (operation by the player) is increasing. Therefore, even in the above-mentioned situation where recovery without external force is given up, it is desirable to execute the process without giving up. Therefore, "a process for generating an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))" and "a display prompting an operation (a character display such as" push "and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period". It is important that the process of performing the display) (see FIG. 252 (f)) ”is performed as usual even in the above-mentioned situation where the recovery without an external force is given up.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is given a first operation opportunity to be pushed in while being positioned at the operation position (operate to a specific detection position), and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the original position, it is pushed (to a specific detection position). When the operation means is provided so as to give a second operation opportunity so as to operate), even if a production reception occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state. The driving force to return to the original position is not given, but the driving force to return to the original position is given only when the production reception occurs at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation portion is relatively small, so it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been resolved is naturally low.

Further, regarding the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received for the production by the operation by the player, the production reception is not necessarily performed. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been performed, and for example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 304 to 308, the symbol change start time (further, the timing after the reception of the production) is exemplified as the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change, but the restoration operation time is described. , It suffices as long as it is a predetermined timing that arrives on condition that the symbol change is executed at least, and may be used as at least one of the symbol change start time and the symbol change stop time, for example. When the symbol variation stop time is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is stopped, and this start. The restored process may be terminated before the timing tm2 in the specific effect pattern that has been reserved and digested arrives, or it may be executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved and digested. Each of the above-mentioned processes will be performed.

Further, the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the movement frequency of the movable decorative body becomes high occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as the movement frequency increases. Therefore, in the special effect state, the normal effect state is generated. It is desirable to enable the game so that the frequency of appearance of a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) or a specific movable decorative body which is also used as an operating means is in an abnormal state. Occasionally, when the above-mentioned special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 307, the abnormal state is reached for a period from the start of the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol change. It is possible to continue to perform one restoration process for the movable ornaments in. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a symbol change start time) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is again performed. Since it is not started and the restoration process that is already in the execution state is continued without being terminated, it is movable different from the movable decoration that is the target of the restoration process. The problem is when to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307, the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is a new restoration operation time (next) after the arrival of the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends. Even when straddling (the start time of the symbol change), it is continuously executed without ending. In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body other than the specific movable decorative body between the time when the timing tm11 elapses and the time when a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives. In the case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, "both methods 1 and 2", or "both methods 1 and 3" is adopted to restore the other movable ornament. It is desirable to execute.

Method 1: Specify at least when there is a relationship such as "a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body". When a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoration process for the movable ornament is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) ) Has arrived, and the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is newly started.

According to such method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) whose restoration process has not yet been executed, and the other movable decoration will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation time). It becomes possible to newly start the restoration process for the body (frame side movable decorative body). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are executed at the same time. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of the movable ornaments is expected.

Method 2: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as a board-side movable decoration", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is not started at that time, and a specific restoration process is performed. After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decoration to be completed, another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

According to such method 2, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration body (frame side movable decoration body) whose restoration process has not yet been executed. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decoration body (frame side movable decoration body), we waited for one restoration process for a specific movable decoration body to be completed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of those movable ornaments is expected.

Method 3: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as a board-side movable decoration", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for a specific movable decoration is not executed, but another movable decoration (frame side movable) is triggered by the restoration operation time that arrives after waiting for the restoration processing for a specific movable decoration to be completed. The restoration process for the decoration) is newly started.

According to such method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration that is not in the execution state yet. It will be treated as invalid for any of the restoration processing for, and unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration, the said No processing will be executed for the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes an abnormal state while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is in the execution state, those movable decorations can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to sufficiently deal with abnormalities, and it is expected that the rate of deterioration of these movable decorative bodies will be suppressed.

[Penalty when operating the operation unit that can emit light]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player changes the set value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume set value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the number of operation units to be operated by a player tends to increase, but these operation units may be handled roughly, and as a result, one of those operation units is used. If any failure occurs, the operability and color rendering will be significantly reduced, so it is inevitable that the game will be less enjoyable.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation button 410,
-A sword decoration body in which the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, collar portion 5013) is movable (variable) between the sword delivery position and the sword extraction position by a predetermined operation (sword extraction operation, sword delivery operation). 5001 (see FIGS. 192, 222, etc.)
"Operation to pull out the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011, handle part 5012, collar part 5013) from the sheath part 5020 (sword pulling operation)" and "sword delivery" even though the operation opportunity is not given. If the "operation" is repeated, it may cause a failure.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an effect light emitting portion (not shown) is arranged for each of the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the collar portion 5013, and the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion) is provided. It has a special detection unit (not shown) capable of detecting whether or not the handle portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the flange portion 5013) are in a specific position (original position) in which the sword is delivered with respect to the sheath portion 5020. Then, at least when "during the period when the demo screen is displayed (a non-gaming state in which the game effect or the symbol change according to the big hit judgment is not executed)", the sword part 5010 is specified as a result of the detection by the special detection part. When it is determined that the position (original position) is not present, the peripheral control MPU1511a is set to generate a production restriction period as a penalty.

According to such a configuration, at least in a non-gaming state in which the symbol is not changed, the sword portion 5010 is subjected to a predetermined operation together with the effect light emitting portion (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013). As a result of being displaced to, when it is detected that the operation unit is not located at a specific position, an effect limiting period can occur, so that the operation unit can be suitably suppressed from being roughly handled.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "change of the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound" and the above-mentioned "setting value related to the emission brightness (brightness setting value)". All of "changes" are kept in a state where they can be accepted by the operation by the player, and the above-mentioned production restriction period is generated. However, as will be described later, during this production restriction period,
-Regarding the production sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume is changed, the production sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume is adjusted. While the confirmation sound is not output,
-As for the effect lamp, when the set value (brightness set value) related to the emission brightness is changed, the effect light emitting unit included in the sword portion 5010 as the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1. (Sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and flange portion 5013) are not emitted with a brightness corresponding to the brightness set value, but are provided in a portion different from the sword portion 5010 targeted for detection. For the effect lamps (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), processing such as making it possible to execute the effect emission with the brightness according to the set value, etc. It can be done.

According to such a configuration, when the above-mentioned effect restriction period occurs, it is possible to accept both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the brightness, but it is related to the volume setting. The degree of restriction will differ between the processing and the processing related to the brightness setting.

That is, although the volume setting value is secretly variable for the production sound, the production sound is not output in a form that reflects the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. By preventing it from being output, it gives the player a sense of tension (maybe he has done something he shouldn't do).

On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness set value is changed for the effect light emitting portion (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) provided in the "sword portion 5010" operated by the player. Although the effect light is not emitted in a form that reflects the changed brightness setting value, the effect lamp provided in a part different from the "sword part 5010" operated by the player has been changed. By making it possible to emit light in a form that reflects the brightness setting value (for example, light emission that matches the timing when a specific advance notice effect is performed), due to the rough handling of the "sword part 5010". While recognizing that the production restriction is imposed and warning this, it becomes possible to preferably appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production. In this sense, as for the effect lamp in the game board 5 in which the game ball flows down or wins a prize, the effect emission is executed in a form that reflects the changed brightness set value as usual. Is desirable. As a result, it is possible to give a warning to handle the operation unit roughly while appropriately avoiding "the player is discouraged from starting the game or urges the end of the game". become.

Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release conditions for the respective restrictions are different depending on the restrictions on the processing related to the volume setting and the restrictions on the processing related to the brightness setting. .. In particular, the "processing related to volume setting" on the side that initially imposed relatively strict restrictions should be greatly improved to the normal state relatively early to strongly encourage the continuation of the game. On the other hand, while showing an improvement trend in the "processing related to brightness setting" on the side that initially imposed relatively sweet restrictions, the overall improvement speed was slowed down, and some They try to keep the restrictions, which is expected to maintain a moderate tension over a long period of time and prevent re-treatment.

FIG. 309 is a time chart showing an example of restrictions on the volume setting and the brightness setting when a penalty is generated for the operation on the sword portion 5010.

Assuming that the player is in a non-gaming state in which the game is not executed, such as during a demo screen, and is in a normal state in which no error state or penalty has occurred, in that state, as shown in FIG. 309. It is permissible for the player to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) regarding the volume. When the volume setting value is changed, a process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) is executed, and the adjusted volume is executed. The volume adjustment confirmation sound will be output with.

Further, in the same state, it is also permitted to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player regarding the brightness. When the brightness set value is changed, the process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (process of reflecting the brightness set value as the amount of light) is executed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. It will be.

Further, in the same state, the handle LED (directing light emitting portion in the handle portion 5012), the collar LED (directing light emitting portion in the collar portion 5013), the blade LED (directing light emitting portion in the blade portion 5011), and the operation unit outside LED (game). The effect lamps on the board 5) are all in the "normal light emission" state. It should be noted that the "normal light emission" state corresponds to the "state in which light emission is maintained" as long as it is provided as a production lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the production situation. However, if it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on the condition that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, "a light emission waiting state that is allowed to be in a light emission state when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied". (Turn off state) ”is a concept that does not necessarily have to be in a light emitting state. Further, it is desirable that the sheath portion 5020 is provided so as to have translucency so that the light emitting mode of the blade LED can be confirmed even in the sword-delivered state.

However, as shown in FIG. 309, as a result of performing a predetermined operation at the timing to 1, the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion) is in a non-gaming state in which the operation effect cannot occur. If it is detected that the sheath portion 5020) is not in the sword-delivered state (detection that it is not in the specific position (original position)), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is assumed. Then, first, it is decided to generate the first effect suppression state.

In this first effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, it is permitted to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is not executed, and the volume adjustment is performed. No confirmation sound is output.

Further, in the same state, it is also permitted to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player regarding the brightness. In this regard, when the brightness set value is changed, among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1, the handle LED (effect light emitting unit in the handle 5012) in the sword portion 5010 that has been moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation. , The flange LED (effect light emitting unit in the flange portion 5013) and the blade LED (effect light emitting unit in the blade portion 5011) are processed to adjust the emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (the brightness setting value is the amount of light). However, for the operation outside LED (effect lamp in the game board 5) that has not been moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, it is based on the changed brightness setting value. The process of adjusting the emission brightness (the process of reflecting the brightness set value as the amount of light) is executed. Further, in the same state, although it is possible to adjust the emission brightness of some of the plurality of effect lamps (LED outside the operation unit), even if the adjustment is made, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. I am doing it.

According to such a configuration, in the first effect suppression state, although it is possible to accept both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the brightness, it is related to the volume setting. The degree of restriction will differ between the processing and the processing related to the brightness setting.

That is, although the volume setting value is secretly variable for the production sound, the production sound is not output in a form that reflects the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. By preventing it from being output, it gives the player a sense of tension (maybe he has done something he shouldn't do).

On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness set value is changed for the effect light emitting portion (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) provided in the "sword portion 5010" operated by the player. Although the effect light is not emitted in a form that reflects the changed brightness set value, the effect lamp (operation) provided on the game board 5 that is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation and in which the game is performed is performed. The external LED) emits an effect light in a form that reflects the changed brightness setting value (for example, if the game is started in this state and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a specific advance notice effect is performed. It will be possible to perform light emission according to the timing. Therefore, while warning the rough handling of the "sword portion 5010", it is possible to preferably appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production.

More specifically, in the first effect suppression state, the handle LED (effect light emitting unit in the handle 5012) continues the light emission state (penalty light emission) in the predetermined emission brightness and light emission mode. It is controlled, for example, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness setting value is not reflected, and the symbol variation is started according to the result of the jackpot determination. Even if a light emission request occurs, the light emission mode corresponding to the request does not appear.

Further, the collar LED (effect light emitting portion in the collar portion 5013) is capable of emitting light as usual even in the first effect suppression state, and is a production lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the production situation. If it is provided as an effect lamp, it is considered to be "a state in which light emission is maintained", and if it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, "a predetermined effect" is provided. When the condition is satisfied, the light emitting state is allowed to be in the light emitting state. " However, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the brim LED is designed so that the effect light is not emitted in a form that reflects the changed brightness setting value. Even within the section 5010, it is possible to warn about the rough handling of the "sword section 5010" while allowing the light emission effect to encourage the continuation of the game.

Further, the blade LED (effect light emitting unit in the blade unit 5011) is controlled so as to continue the extinguished state in the first effect suppression state. Even if it occurs, it does not respond to it. Therefore, in the blade LED, even if the brightness set value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the effect emission cannot be performed in a form that reflects the changed brightness set value.

On the other hand, no restriction is imposed on the operation outside LED provided outside the sword part 5010 that has been moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, and the above-mentioned "normal light emission" state is continued. It will be. Therefore, when the brightness set value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness set value can be reflected (if it is in the light emitting state), and the symbol variation is started to emit light according to the result of the jackpot determination. When a request arises, a light emitting mode corresponding to the request will appear.

In such a configuration, since the restriction is imposed only on the effect lamp included in the "sword portion 5010" that has been moved by a predetermined operation, the game board 5 on which the game is played is restricted. When the gaze is focused only, it seems that the emission brightness can be adjusted normally when the brightness setting value is changed, so that the first effect suppression state is occurring. There is a concern that it will not be recognized. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the brightness set value is changed by the operation by the player in the first effect suppression state, and the emission brightness of a part (LED outside the operation unit) of the plurality of effect lamps is emitted. Even if the adjustment is made, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. As a result, even when the "sword part 5010" is not visually recognized, the player can be made to recognize that the production is in the restricted state, and the "sword part 5010" is returned to the original position. You will be able to urge them to do so.

Then, after the first effect suppression state is generated, the operation of positioning the sword portion 5010 to the sword delivery state is performed at the timing to 2, and it is detected (specification) that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword delivery state. Assuming that the position (original position) is detected), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment performs a process of shifting from the first effect suppression state to the second effect suppression state.

In this second effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, with respect to the volume, all the restriction contents when the first effect suppression state is released are released and the sound is processed normally. Not only is it permissible to execute the process of changing the volume setting value, but it is also permissible to execute the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume and the process of outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound. It has become.

On the other hand, regarding the brightness, although the "restriction on the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" is canceled among the restrictions when the first effect is suppressed, the "partial restriction on the brightness adjustment" is not canceled and continues. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, in the second effect suppression state, the process of changing the brightness set value, the process of adjusting the emission brightness of the LED outside the operation unit among the plurality of effect lamps, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output. Execution of the process is permitted, but the process of adjusting the emission brightness of the effect lamp provided by the sword portion 5010 among the plurality of effect lamps is not permitted (restricted state). It will be maintained until then.

That is, the second effect suppression state is a state that occurs based on "the sword portion 5010 is detected to be in the sword delivery state" in the first effect suppression state, and the sword portion 5010 is already in a specific position (original position). It can be said that it is located in the position) and the rough handling has been resolved. In response to this, we strongly encourage the continuation of the game by promptly and greatly improving the "processing related to volume setting" on the side that initially imposed relatively strict restrictions to the normal state. Is the main purpose.

However, if all the restrictions are immediately lifted by simply returning the sword portion 5010 to a specific position (original position) after the first effect suppression state occurs, the function as a penalty is insufficient. Yes, the rough treatment of "Sword 5010" may reoccur. In this respect, according to the above configuration, when "it is detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword delivery state" in the first effect suppression state, the process shifts to the second effect suppression state. As for the brightness, although the "limitation on the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" is canceled among the restrictions when the first effect is suppressed, the "partial limitation on the brightness adjustment" is continued without being released. I am doing it.

That is, in this case, since the production restriction is left on the "sword part 5010" itself, which is the target of rough treatment, the atmosphere that makes it difficult to perform further rough treatment on the "sword part 5010" ("" It will be possible to provide "maybe it will break", etc., and by extension, it will be possible to expect prevention of recurrence.

On the other hand, in the second production suppression state, since the rough handling of the "sword part 5010" has already been resolved, the player is paying close attention to the game board 5 where the game is performed ( It can be said that the situation where the game is concentrated) is already in a desirable situation. In this respect, in the second effect suppression state, the brightness set value is changed when the player is watching the game board 5 where the game is performed (the situation where the sword portion 5010 is not visually recognized). Sometimes, in order to make it look like the light emission brightness can be adjusted as usual (make it look like it is in a normal state), the brightness setting value is changed by the operation by the player, and a part of the multiple production lamps (operation) When the emission brightness of the external LED) is adjusted, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. As a result, the player is concentrated on the game, and the rough handling of the sword portion 5010 is prevented from recurring.

According to such a second production suppression state, the "processing related to the brightness setting" on the side that initially imposed a relatively sweet restriction shows an improvement tendency, but is subject to rough treatment. By intentionally leaving the limit only for the "sword part 5010" that has become, the player can play the game while maintaining a moderate sense of tension for a long period of time and preventing the rough handling from being repeated. It will be expected to concentrate on.

Further, in the second effect suppression state, some of the effect lamps (handle LED, collar LED, blade LED) among the plurality of effect lamps are excluded from the adjustment target of the emission brightness, but other than that. When the emission brightness of the effect lamp (LED outside the operation unit) is adjusted, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output in the same manner as when the emission brightness is adjusted in the normal state. That is, in this case, even if the second effect suppression state occurs, it is not a situation in which the operation by the player is not accepted, but a situation in which the operation by the player can react as in the normal state. It becomes possible to appeal, and it becomes possible to suitably encourage the player to continue the game.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the emission brightness is adjusted only for a part of the effect lamps (LEDs outside the operation unit) in the second effect suppression state, the normal state is achieved. The same brightness adjustment confirmation sound as at one time is assigned to the channel and output. As a result, even if the situation can be adjusted only partially, it is expected to give a sense of security as if it has already returned to the normal state and to encourage the motivation to continue the game. However, when the second effect suppression state is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state, the brightness of the pattern LED is adjusted so that the brightness setting value at that time is collectively reflected. In this case, the brightness is adjusted. It is important not to output the adjustment confirmation sound in order to make it look as if it had already returned to normal.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the second effect suppression state occurred. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (timing to 3), it is possible to execute a process of terminating the second effect suppression state and shifting to the normal state.

That is, the transition condition from the "first effect suppression state in which the degree of production restriction is relatively strict" to the "second effect suppression state in which the degree of production restriction is relatively loose" is "triggered by the operation by the player". This makes it possible to establish this at an early stage, which keeps the motivation to continue the game. However, regarding the transition condition from the "second production suppression state with a relatively loose degree of production restriction" to the "normal state", "a predetermined time has elapsed after the second production suppression state has occurred". It is not allowed to establish this early. By adopting these transition conditions, it becomes possible to effectively warn against rough handling while maintaining the motivation to continue the game, and it can be expected to prevent recurrence. It will be like.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, a plurality of production lamps provided in the "sword portion 5010" which has been subject to rough handling. For some of the production lamps (here, the collar LED and the blade LED) among the (handle LED, collar LED, blade LED), the second effect suppression state is terminated and the normal state is restored. Also, only "limited" light emission is allowed.

More specifically, for the brim LED and the blade LED, although it is possible to emit light as usual, even if the brightness setting value is changed, the changed brightness setting value is reflected. It is designed so that the effect light emission can be performed only with a predetermined brightness set value. That is, in this case, especially for the brim LED, after the first effect suppression state occurs, only the effect emission under the same restriction is continuously performed, which may cause a partial failure. It is expected to raise awareness and prevent the recurrence of rough treatment of the "sword portion 5010". Alternatively, even after the effect suppression state ends and becomes a normal state, it can be made to function as a history of occurrence of the effect suppression state before that, and stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 is expected. You will be able to. It should be noted that the effect restriction left for the brim LED and the blade LED may be maintained in an unremovable state, but for example, due to the establishment of different conditions such as RAM clearing and power cutoff. It is desirable to be able to release it.

According to such a configuration, even after the first effect suppression state is terminated and the processing related to the volume adjustment is returned to normal, the processing related to the brightness adjustment is required to be further improved step by step. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension for a longer period of time while maintaining the motivation to play.

Regarding the first effect suppression state (furthermore, the second effect suppression state), in addition to the non-game state (during the demo screen, etc.), the game execution state in which the game is being executed (design according to the result of the jackpot determination). Even when it is in a variable state or in a jackpot game state, it can be generated based on the detection that the sword part 5010 is not in the sword delivery state (detection that it is not in the specific position (original position)). It is desirable to do. That is, even in the game state (such as when the design is changing according to the result of the big hit judgment), the sword portion 5010 should not be treated roughly in a state where no operation opportunity is given, and it is necessary to proceed with the game and the production. This is because it is desired that they be treated properly.

However, even if the situation is controlled to the "second effect suppression state" shown in FIG. 309, the change of the brightness set value is accepted when the game is in the game execution state (the symbol change is in the execution state). When the brightness is adjusted accordingly, it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound. That is, when the transition from the "first effect suppression state" to the "second effect suppression state" is performed, at least all the restrictions related to the volume adjustment are released, so that the tension is maintained well. There is a concern that you will not be able to do it. On the other hand, in order to strongly encourage the continuation of the game, it is important to greatly improve the restrictions on "processing related to volume adjustment" on the side that was strict until then.

In this respect, "when the tension cannot be maintained well" means that the game is restarted with a lightness of the situation where the second production suppression state has occurred (the situation where the first production suppression state where the production restriction is strict has ended). It is assumed that this is the case, and conversely, it is assumed that the tension can be maintained well in the situation where the game is not restarted. Therefore, even in the second effect suppression state, when the game is in the execution state (game restart) where it is assumed that the tension cannot be maintained well, the brightness adjustment confirmation is intentionally not output to "brightness". Looking only at "processing related to adjustment", it can be expected that an appropriate sense of tension will be given by making it appear that the first effect suppression state has not been improved.

In this sense, in the situation controlled to the "second effect suppression state" shown in FIG. 309, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the change of the volume setting value is accepted and the volume is adjusted accordingly. It may be possible not to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even when the above is performed. In addition, for such special processing (processing that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound, processing that does not output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound) when the symbol fluctuation is in the execution state, the second effect suppression state ends and the limitation is one. It may be applied even when the situation is returned to the normal state in the form of being left behind. That is, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output while the game is being executed, the meaning cannot be understood and the game is started. This is because there is a risk that you will not be able to concentrate.

In the above description example, the handle LED, the collar LED, and the blade LED are provided, but the sword portion 5010 may be provided with at least a handle LED as a directing lamp. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the motivation to play by showing a gradual improvement while warning the rough handling of the "sword part 5010" in the first effect suppression state and the second effect suppression state. It is possible.

Further, in the above explanatory example, as soon as "detection that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword delivery state" is detected in the first effect suppression state, the transition from the "first effect suppression state" to the "second effect suppression state" is performed. Although it was decided to perform the processing, the processing is not necessarily limited to this, and is based on, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since "detection that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword delivery state" in the first effect suppression state. The process of shifting from the "first effect suppression state" to the "second effect suppression state" may be performed. According to such a configuration, while allowing a relatively early transition from the "first effect suppression state" to the "second effect suppression state", the effect is restricted for at least a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It will be possible to maintain the strict first effect suppression state. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set to be shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) required from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end of the second effect suppression state. Desirable, but not necessarily limited to this.

Further, in the above explanatory example, the cause of the effect limitation is a predetermined operation for the operating means (sword portion 5010), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if it is a specific object that is not an operation target by the player (for example, an object that can move between the first state and the second state, such as a decorative movable body or a door frame 3), this is treated roughly. If it is forcibly displaced, it may cause a malfunction. Therefore, it is based on the fact that the specific object is detected that the specific object is not in the original position after at least providing "a lamp subject to the effect restriction such as the above-mentioned pattern LED" as an effect lamp for the specific object. Therefore, it is desirable to generate the effect suppression state as described above. That is, in this case, regardless of whether it is in the non-gaming state or the gaming state, the first effect suppression state as described above is performed based on the detection that the specific object is not in the first state (original position). After the generation, the second effect suppression state as described above is generated based on the detection that the specific object has been returned to the first state (original position), and a predetermined time elapses from the generation. Based on this, it will be returned to the normal state (or the normal state with restrictions).

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

Further, in the above explanatory example, when the change to the volume setting value is received a plurality of times in the "first effect suppression state" and then the transition to the "second effect suppression state" is performed, the "second effect suppression state" is performed. At the time of transition to the "state", the volume will be adjusted in such a way that the changes made multiple times to the volume setting values up to that point are reflected in a batch. Further, when the change to the brightness set value is received a plurality of times in the "first effect suppression state" or the "second effect suppression state" and then returned to the normal state in the timing to 3, the "normal state" is restored. At the time of the transition to, the brightness of the pattern LED is adjusted so that the contents of the changes made multiple times with respect to the brightness setting values up to that point are collectively reflected. The method of collectively adjusting such multiple setting value changes at "a certain timing" (including the presence / absence of output of the adjustment confirmation sound at that time) is described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. Can be realized by appropriately adopting. Further, in this case, since the timing to 2 in which the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing to 3 in which the brightness setting value can be collectively reflected are different, it is possible to gradually show the way to return to the normal state. It will be possible to motivate the player to continue the game by making it appear as if he / she has already returned to normal, or as if he / she is recovering. Further, the predetermined time from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end may be about 10 seconds.

In addition, it is decided that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there may be a situation in which the person may be aware of the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Because.

[Brightness adjustment at the time of abnormality notification]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, various types of pachinko machine 1 are provided in addition to the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for the effect lamp (a lamp subject to effect control by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, a game regarding the brightness applied to the various effect lamps. It is possible to execute a process of changing a set value (luminance set value) by a person (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, if there is an effect lamp that is in a light emitting state when the brightness set value is changed in this way, a process of adjusting the emission brightness of the effect lamp based on the changed brightness set value ( The process of reflecting the brightness set value as the amount of light) will be executed. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

For the effect lamps that are not in the light emitting state when the brightness setting value is changed, the brightness corresponding to the changed brightness setting value is used when there is a light emission request based on the result of the big hit determination. It will be in a light emitting state. More specifically, if it is provided as a production lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the production situation, light emission according to the changed brightness setting value is received as soon as a change in the brightness setting value is received. It will be changed to the light emitting mode at the brightness, but if it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition (the effect request according to the big hit determination), the predetermined effect. At the timing when the effect condition of the above is satisfied, the effect emission is performed as the emission brightness according to the changed brightness set value. That is, until the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect is maintained in a state (light emission waiting state) in which the effect emission with the emission brightness corresponding to the changed luminance set value is possible.

In addition, regarding the change acceptance related to the brightness set value and the adjustment process according to the changed brightness set value, the player can be used in both the state where the symbol is not changed and the state where the symbol is changed. It is made possible to execute each by the operation by.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the specific abnormality detection as illustrated in FIG. 156 occurs, the abnormality notification is performed according to the abnormality type, but the hall side is cheating. If it is a type of anomaly detection that is unlikely to occur, there may be cases where the player wants the player to continue the game as it is. That is, if the gaming interest is reduced as a result of notifying the abnormality even though it is a minor abnormality that is not serious, and the player ends the game, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. There may be a disadvantage due to the decline.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is in a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state). Of the plurality of production lamps, some of the production lamps (for example, the production lamp provided on the game board 5) are in a state where light emission by the production is possible (during the production light emission or the condition of the production light emission is satisfied. It is possible to execute the abnormality notification light emission by using at least the specific effect lamp (for example, the effect lamp provided in the door frame 3) included in the other effect lamps while keeping the waiting state (off state) until. It is supposed to be.

Even during the execution period of such anomaly notification light emission, it is possible to accept the change of the brightness set value each time the operation is accepted by the player, and the light emission by the effect is left as it is possible. In some of the above-mentioned effect lamps, the emission brightness can be adjusted based on the changed brightness setting value, whereas in the above-mentioned specific effect lamp, the changed brightness can be obtained. Regardless of the set value, the abnormality notification light emission is executed only at the predetermined brightness set value.

According to such a configuration, even if it is during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission, the brightness setting value is changed every time the operation is accepted by the player, although it is a part of the plurality of effect lamps. Will be reflected, and the effect emission with the reflected brightness set value will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably encourage the player to continue the game while notifying the hall side of the abnormality.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the target of the brightness adjustment is during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission, the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. Even in this case, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not always output, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again when the remaining time until the end of the period is limited to a part of the brightness adjustment target. It is possible to suggest to the player that the abnormal notification light emission has ended and the normal light emission will be allowed soon after the situation is reached. I have to.

FIG. 310 is a time chart showing an example of the light emitting mode of the effect lamp during the abnormality notification period corresponding to the specific abnormality detection.

As shown in FIG. 310, in the timing tp1 when the game is not being executed, such as during the demo screen, the right gate is passed in a specific state (for example, a non-time saving state (abnormal game)). If it is detected that the state has occurred), the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment generates a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the detection.

During this lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), some of the production lamps (corresponding to "LED-A group" in the figure) among the plurality of production lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 emit light. While still possible, the abnormality notification light emission will be performed using other production lamps (corresponding to "LED-B group" in the figure). It should be noted that the abnormality notification light emission does not necessarily have to be executed by using all the other effect lamps, and a part of the other effect lamps (for example, the specific effect lamp provided on the door frame 3). It may be executed using only.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state) occurs, a part of the effect is used. The lamp (corresponding to "LED-A group" in the figure) is designed to emit light in the same manner as when the specific state does not occur, which causes an abnormality on the hall side. While notifying the player, the player is preferably encouraged to continue the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated, the change acceptance regarding the luminance set value is permitted. Then, in some of the production lamps (corresponding to "LED-A group" in the figure) that are set to "do not emit abnormal notification light", the light emission brightness is the same as when the lamp warning period is not in progress. , It can be adjusted based on the changed brightness setting value (immediate change if it always emits light, waiting state at the changed brightness setting value if it emits light according to the production request). (Adjustment can be reflected).

On the other hand, for the other production lamps (corresponding to "LED-B group" in the figure), even if the brightness setting value is changed during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the change is made. The brightness setting value is not reflected, and the abnormality notification light is emitted only at the predetermined brightness setting value (adjustment cannot be reflected). That is, in this case, it is possible to emit light at the same time in a form in which different brightness setting values are reflected between some of the production lamps and the other production lamps. It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the abnormal notification light emission that has nothing to do with is being performed. In this sense, it is desirable that the luminance setting value can be changed only in the range of the luminance setting value or less adopted by the abnormality notification emission for the effect emission.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the abnormality notification light emission is being executed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not always heard even if the change in the brightness setting value is accepted. I try not to output it. That is, until the timing tp2, in which the remaining time until the end of the period in which the target of the brightness adjustment is limited is less than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), arrives (timing tp1 to tp2), Even if the brightness setting value is changed and the emission brightness of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is controlled so as not to be output. Then, based on the arrival of the timing tp2, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again when the change of the brightness set value is accepted (when the emission brightness of some of the production lamps is actually adjusted). I am trying to generate a situation where it is done.

According to such a configuration, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even though the brightness setting value is changed during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission, the remaining time until the end of the period is completed. It is recognizable that the situation is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output when the brightness setting value is changed, the period is terminated. It becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until is shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Therefore, it is suggested to the player that even if there is no change in the mode of the abnormal notification light emission itself and this is continued, the state is internally heading toward the normal state (improvement). This makes it possible, and it is expected that the motivation to continue the game will be suitably promoted even when the abnormal notification light is emitted for a relatively long time.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, all the effects are produced even during the execution period (timing tp2 to tp3) of the abnormality notification light emission in which the brightness set value is only partially reflected (LED-A group). The same sound as in the normal state where the brightness setting value can be reflected is output as the above brightness adjustment confirmation sound, which gives a sense of security as if it has already returned to the normal state. It is designed to suppress the deterioration of the game interest during the period when the abnormality notification light is emitted. However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310, at the timing tp3 at which the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission ends, the brightness set value at that time is set even if the brightness set value has been changed a plurality of times until then. Will be reflected collectively to the other production lamps (“LED-B group” that used to emit abnormal notification light), but at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound will be emitted. It is important not to output to make it look as if it has already returned to the normal state.

In the above explanation example, when the game is not executed, such as during a demo screen, a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state) is set. This has been described as an example of generating a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the fact that it has been detected. However, it is detected that a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate has passed (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time saving state) has been reached while the game is in a game state (such as a symbol fluctuation state) in which the game is being executed. Even if this is done, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) will be generated based on the detection.

When the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated when the game is being executed in the game execution state (design fluctuation state, jackpot game state, etc.), it is basically the same as in the above explanation example. Is. However, in this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to In tp3), it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound. That is, since the case of being in the game execution state means that the game is being continued by the player, it is assumed that the game is unlikely to be terminated. Therefore, even if it becomes a situation (timing tp2 to tp3) that can be returned to the normal state soon, by maintaining the control that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, "the abnormality notification light emission is still being executed. It can be said that it is more desirable to make the player recognize accurate information such as ". Further, in this case, even after the execution period (timing tp1 to tp3) of the abnormality notification light emission ends and the normal state is reached, the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained as long as the game execution state continues. You may do so. This is because if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the game execution state, the meaning cannot be understood and it may not be possible to concentrate on the game.

In the above description example, when the game is changed from the non-game state to the game execution state during the period of the timings tp2 to tp3 in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output (the symbol change starts). In this case, etc.), the "control not to output the luminance adjustment confirmation sound (non-audible control at timings tp1 to tp2)" will be re-executed based on the game execution state. Then, the "control that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output" is maintained until the timing tp3 arrives, or until the game execution state ends.

Further, in the above explanatory example, for example, even when the period (timing tp2 to tp3) after the arrival of the timing tp2 in which the remaining time becomes shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is reached, the said If it is re-detected that a specific state (for example, a state where the right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time saving state) has occurred within the period, the above-mentioned description is made from the time of the detection. It is desirable to redo the process related to the abnormal notification light emission (process after timing tp1). That is, in this case, even if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is in a state where it can be output, it is returned to the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output again.

Further, in the above explanatory example, when the timing tp3 arrives, all the effect lamps are shifted to the normal state in which the adjustment based on the luminance set value can be received. However, during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), a plurality of production lamps are prepared as production lamps that cannot be adjusted based on the brightness set value, and when the timing tp3 arrives, those production lamps are used. Only a part of the lamps can be adjusted based on the brightness setting value, but at least for a specific effect lamp, the adjustment based on the brightness setting value cannot be received even in the normal state after the timing tp3 arrives. You may do so. According to such a configuration, the limitation regarding the brightness adjustment is left for a specific effect lamp. Therefore, even after the lamp warning period ends and the normal state is reached, the lamp warning is performed before that. It will be possible to function as a history of occurrence of a period, and stable operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be expected. The restriction left for a specific effect lamp may be maintained in a state where it cannot be canceled, but it should be made possible to be lifted by, for example, clearing the RAM or shutting off the power supply. Is desirable.

As for the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, it is output as the same sound as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some kind of "confirmation sound" was output. It is desirable to make something recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there may be a situation in which the person may be aware of the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Because.

Further, during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission according to the above-mentioned explanatory example, it is desirable to allow the player to accept the change of the set value related to the volume of the effect sound based on the operation acceptance by the player. In this case, the "process related to the notification sound and the volume adjustment" during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission can be realized by appropriately adopting the contents described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. In this case, the "process related to the notification sound and the volume adjustment" described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168 may be terminated (collectively reflecting the volume) when the timing tp3 arrives, but the timing may be used. It may be terminated (collective reflection of volume) when tp2 arrives. In such a configuration, the timing tp2 at which the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing tp3 at which the brightness setting value can be collectively reflected are different, so that the path to return to the normal state is shown step by step. It will be possible to motivate the player to continue the game by making it appear as if he / she has already returned to normal or is in a recovery tendency.

Further, in the above explanatory example, the specific state is illustrated as "a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 166 to 168 are referred to. It may be the same as the case of the example described above (a state in which a door opening abnormality or a magnetic detection abnormality has occurred, etc.).

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

[14. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by sound output, lighting / blinking of lamps, display of images, and the like, and various elaborate productions are attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control device, based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes the effect according to the game state of the game. do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313649 discloses a control technique for realizing various effects displays by using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which the symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially defined in chronological order. By preparing a control process that realizes a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying specified symbols according to this scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. It is also possible to include the BGM designation in the scenario data. In this case, by outputting the designated BGM by the sound source IC, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to the display screen.

However, in gaming machines, more elaborate production is required. With the above-mentioned conventional technique, it has been difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as audio output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, it was not possible to change the BGM while executing the image display according to the scenario data. Further, when the sound effect was output in response to the user's operation in the middle of the image display, the image display and the BGM output were stopped and the sound effect was output. When the output of the sound effect was completed, the BGM and the image display were restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM was played, which gave a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamp is controlled by an individual program according to the game state, regardless of the content of the image display, and it is difficult to realize a wide variety of lighting and blinking linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes the production of the game. In the present embodiment, each configuration for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but it may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment will be described, and then the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and outline of each function]
FIG. 311 is a functional block diagram illustrating a configuration and an outline of a function for executing the effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. It is equipped with 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives the input of the main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines the block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, layers are set for each effect category such as a background and a character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are superimposed and displayed to display an image on a liquid crystal display device. Is output. As a result, for example, if only the background is different and the display (operation) of the character is the same, it is possible to standardize the layers for displaying the character. As a result, the capacity of the production data (scheduler data) can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying the effect for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires the effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions in the order in which they should be executed, out of a plurality of processes requested according to the effect device, in order to control the effect in each effect device. It is data. The effect block data includes "liquid crystal display block data" for executing the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal symbol block data" for variable display of the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, and sound (sound). There are three types, "sub-effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes the scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each effect device is called, and the effect device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

The output module unit 5080 receives the effect device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits the effect device drive data to each effect device based on the effect device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on the effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the effect control unit 5020 is configured by software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by. In addition, it may be configured by the effect control unit 5020 and another arithmetic circuit, and may be configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Subsequently, the details of the configuration of the module or the like that realizes each of the above-mentioned functions will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a module or the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all of the configuration may be configured as hardware.

In the present embodiment, the system module 5100 for driving each effect device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules related to the effect. Further, the effect control unit 5020 for creating the effect device control information for driving each effect device based on the main command is included.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is information in one set of 3 bytes, and is a command status value, a command mode value, a command status and a checksum value of the mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times of 8 bits each. This signal is received by the main command buffer 5110 that is output, the checksum value is evaluated, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, the received command is discarded and the command is correct. If it is determined, it is handed over to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information indicating the content related to the production among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the main command can include whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting winning opening, the result of the special figure lottery, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the like. Further, when the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the sensor output such as opening the door, the operation of the start lever and the stop button, the rotation and stop of the reel, the success or failure of the combination at the time of stop, and the like can be mentioned. The commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the content of the production.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is related to the effect. If it is determined to be a command related to the production, it is handed over to the production control unit 5020.

The effect control unit 5020 specifies a layer to be controlled by the effect from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 determines the control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub-effect block control unit 5320 determines the control information for executing the sound output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, the operation of the accessory, and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal display block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal display block data is block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as a background and a character, and a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. included.

The liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds), which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and generate a liquid crystal display list command by the liquid crystal module 5400. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the effect display device (the liquid crystal display device 1600 on the game board side, the liquid crystal display device 460 on the door frame side) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

The sound source built-in VDP1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (the liquid crystal display device 1600 on the game board side, the liquid crystal display device 460 on the door frame side). The display data is generated, for example, by expanding the character data specified by the liquid crystal display list command to the specified position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes the sub-effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub-effect block data is block data for executing each effect of the lamp, sound, and motor, and includes one or a plurality of sub-effect scheduler data. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs the operation defined in advance in the sub-effect scheduler data.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of the various effect devices, and executes the sub-effect scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices includes a sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at 1 frame intervals and a sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect devices at 1 millisecond intervals. included. In this way, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the operation of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it is possible to quickly respond to a problem in the operation of the accessory.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, as an example, three types of effect control such as sound output, lamp lighting / blinking, and accessory operation are performed. explain. The effect control by the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described as being the same except for the execution cycle without any particular distinction. Hereinafter, the outline of the control according to the type of the effect device will be described.

First, a case of executing an effect by sound output will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for sound output (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameters. It is possible to start multiple schedulers. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and the effect sound effect with different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel and sound can be output at the same time. .. The sound source built-in VDP1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and outputs the sound source data from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

Next, a case of executing the effect by the lamp will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit starts the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of lamps and layers in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data every cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp drive data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5130 to the serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output lamp data in a single cycle. With this configuration, the output of the lamp data is the next operation of creating the lamp data in response to the increase in the lamp system and the increase in the processing time of the lamp control due to the overlapping of the lamp layers. By setting the cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the lamp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously created lamp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output, the previously created lamp drive data is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA, and each lamp is turned on and blinked. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling the lighting / blinking of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case of controlling a drive device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating an accessory will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for driving device control, the scheduler execution unit activates the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the function for controlling the drive device (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of drive devices in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the motor drive data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs the motor drive data to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU1511a regardless of DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the timing of output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, and the total processing time for each frame cycle becomes longer. This is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission is set to 0 by shifting the timing of the motor data serial transmission and the corresponding latch signal output, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU to be used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed can be set to 0 in the same manner. Further, at the same time as the output of the motor drive data, the effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU1511a). Each effect-driven photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In the present embodiment, the scheduler data can adopt various structures. For example, a call function for fetching other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, once executes other scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. Will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to utilize general-purpose production contents in various situations in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect peculiar to a gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various situations by the call function, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function that switches the effect content according to the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, determines the game state based on the main command when executing the conditional branch function, and executes the effect content according to the game state. .. By doing so, it becomes possible to deal with a wide variety of game states with one scheduler data. Examples of the gaming state used for the conditional branch include the result of a lottery performed during the game, the presence or absence of an operation of a button or the like by the player, and the like. In the rotating drum type gaming machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel may be used, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state of the starting winning opening may be used. In addition, conditional branching may be made depending on whether or not an error has occurred during the game.

Various configurations are possible for the content of the effect after the conditional branch. For example, after the conditional branching, the configuration may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by conditional branching, the process may be configured to return to the process before branching. According to the latter aspect, for example, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

As described above, the gaming machine can include various effect devices, and as an example, a display device for displaying an image can be included. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops a bitmap of an image according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, it can be configured by a combination of VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like prepared as a bitmap for characters or the like to be displayed on the screen.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 313 is an explanatory diagram showing a basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, the case where the main effect control is executed by executing the scheduler data including the function will be described, and in particular, the sound output will be described as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub-effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device when the effect is executed. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub-effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

The sound functions executed at the time of sound output include "SPLAY" for playing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being played, and "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level at the time of playing a phrase. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and the control specified by the parameters and the like is executed. Upon receiving the execution of the sound function, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data and outputs the sound source drive data to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the specified channel. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels will be described as 4 for easy understanding. Further, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. The speakers [1] to [4] shown here schematically represent the outputs of each channel Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that you are doing it.

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by the channel management works 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being played. The stereo playback flag indicates whether or not to output in stereo. The output volume is the volume for each channel. The loop attribute specifies whether or not to play repeatedly. This information is specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

As described above, FIG. 313 shows the basic concept of the effect control in the present embodiment by taking the sound output control as an example. The sub-effect scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub-effect block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function that controls each effect device is called and processed by a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the production control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from receiving the main command to acquiring the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data required for production control]
FIG. 314A is a diagram illustrating a configuration up to acquisition of data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. When the effect control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 as described with reference to FIG. 312, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the effect control unit 5020 provides each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the hold effect), and a game instruction layer (a game instruction). Layer to perform), communication error layer (layer to notify communication error), notification layer (layer to notify various notifications), and abnormality notification layer (layer to notify abnormality) based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200. , Acquires and updates the corresponding effect block data numbers for each layer. Further, the acquired effect block data number is handed over to the effect block control unit 5040. For example, in the case of a variation pattern layer, the effect block number is a liquid crystal display block data combination number table for each variation pattern, a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table for each variation pattern, and sub-effect block data for each variation pattern based on the variation pattern number. Determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the effect block is divided into a predetermined unit (block) which is a common effect in a series of effects (for example, an effect executed from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol). In addition, block data including control information such as effect content and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect in units of the effect block based on the effect block number, it is possible to synchronize the effect by each effect device. Further, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display, and in the present embodiment, the variation pattern layer is the rearmost layer and the abnormality notification layer is the frontmost layer, and the more important information is displayed on the front surface. It is a configuration for.

When the effect block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, the effect block control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub-effect block) corresponding to each layer. The control unit 5320) acquires the corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub-effect block data 5053). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect.

For example, when the main command is a start winning command, the hold layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for displaying the hold on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of the start prize are output. 5053 is acquired. Further, when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted to specify the fluctuation pattern layer. Furthermore, a command is also sent to notify the occurrence of an error or a warning, and the abnormality detection layer is specified. Further, by performing the effect for each layer, it is possible to perform a plurality of effects at the same time.

When the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal display block data 5051 from the liquid crystal display block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal display block data number, the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 displays the liquid crystal display. Production 1f Start the scheduler. The liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal display schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal display effect schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal display effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal display module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal display effect schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates the display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the display list command to the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal display 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

Further, when the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 Activates the LCD symbol 1f scheduler by. The liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates the display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the display list command to the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

When the sub-effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub-effect block data 5053, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub-effect block data 5053. Then, when the execution cycle is one frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 activates the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 activates the sub-effect 1ms. Start the scheduler.

Further, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub-effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub-effect schedule data 5073 does not differ depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the effect device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share the scheduler data, prevent the same type of problems from occurring in multiple places, and reduce the data capacity. can.

Here, a specific example of executing the same schedule data simultaneously by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 314B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. Four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed for the step-up notice, and the player is expected to see the variation display result of the symbol by executing the effect in which the effect content is gradually developed. Suggest a degree.

In the step-up notice 1, the notice effect ends when the step-up 1 effect is executed. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the end of the step-up 2 effect. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and the notice effects are completed after the step-up 3 effects and the step-up 4 effects are completed, respectively.

In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also perform the step-up notice in accordance with the liquid crystal display. Since different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up effect in the sound effect, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each stage of the effect. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

When the liquid crystal display of the step-up notice develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage, so that a plurality of step-up notices are temporarily performed at the same time. There is a period of time. As described above, in the lamp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up effect, but in the present embodiment, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously by a plurality of schedulers. It has become. Therefore, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effect overlap.

Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 effect is started just before the end of the step-up 1 effect. The warning lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data is executed at the same time (duplicate) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate, so that the same pattern of effects can be produced in parallel in a series of effects. Realized to do.

The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the control target effect device, and defines them in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. Instructs the processing of the function. Each module processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates the data necessary for driving the effect device, and outputs the drive data to the effect device.

[18-4-2. Outline of execution of scheduler data]
FIG. 315 is a diagram illustrating a flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of the present embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect content based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and uses the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700 to control various effect devices. Control. FIG. 315 shows the structure of the scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number designated by the effect block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect number is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the number of effect management pointers corresponding to the effect number is prepared, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 315, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, and the like represent storage addresses of the effect management pointers [1], [2], and the like, respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured so that the effect number and the effect management pointer are associated with each other, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then obtains the scheduler data. The processing may be performed. Further, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced, and the above-mentioned search becomes unnecessary, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 315, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is composed of a function and a parameter in principle. As described above, the function is an instruction for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the effect device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided.

Functions are grouped into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (driving devices) and users. The sequence control is a basic function for performing the effect control, and the lamp, the sound, and the motor are functions for controlling each effect device. The user is a function that does not belong to these groups. A specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 318 to 320.

In the example shown in FIG. 315, a "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and then sets the address specified by the parameter to the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily move to the address specified by the parameter to process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-mentioned saved pointer value.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function after the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at the address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and a return is performed at A3n. When the effect command finishes these processes, the "call" returns to the designated address A2 and proceeds to the process of the next address A3.

In this way, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to incorporate the contents of the series of blocks BL3 specified by the addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced and the creation load can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are held during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present invention, since general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various situations by calling, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. , It is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as "feature operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "ramp operation number set". This is because it merely specifically indicates a very limited function that can be realized by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

In the example shown in FIG. 315, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. In the "NOP" function, the process of the scheduler data is continued after waiting for the specified number of frames. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] elapses. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing of the scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing if the value of the parameter Prm [031] is not 0, and if this value is 0, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing. , Performs the process of moving to the function of the next address.

In this embodiment, a work having the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 314A is used to specify a voice operation number or the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores voice operation numbers and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. Further, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 314A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from these layers.

Similarly, the scheduler data is defined by the function and the parameter after the conditional branch address A11. In the example shown in FIG. 315, the conditional branch is not provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, it is possible to specify the accessory command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), etc. without considering the conflict with the block BL1. .. Instead of these settings, the block BL3 and the like may be captured by the "call" function.

In the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect content may be generated, and different addresses may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 315, if the condition "random value value ≤ Th1?" Is added to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. Further, if the address A41 (not shown) is called with the condition "Th1 <random number value ≤ Th2?" Next to the address A2 (address A2 + 1), the address A31 or later is assigned according to the random number value. Will perform different productions. In this way, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to a random number, the production content can be randomly switched by the random number, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching the production contents in this way is referred to as "production lottery" in the present specification.

In the production lottery, the display, sound, lamp, and drive device may all be switched, or only a part of them may be switched. To switch all, specify all the display, sound, and lamp contents in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Further, in the scheduler data, it may be specified that different scheduler data is called according to the random number for the effect lottery by using the conditional branch and the "call" function. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device independently performing the effect lottery, the effect mode realized by the combination becomes very diverse, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

However, regardless of the results of the display, sound, lamp, and drive device effect lottery, it is preferable that these effects are completed at the same time in order to realize a natural effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected in the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends at the same time. It should be noted that it is not an indispensable requirement that the production is completed at the same time, and these production times do not have to be the same.

In addition to the variety of effects, the effect lottery using scheduler data has the advantage that the lottery mode can be switched according to the display, sound, lamp, and output status of the drive device. For example, when the drive unit is executing the figure-eight distribution operation at the time when the effect lottery is instructed and other operations are restricted, the drive unit module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery related to the drive device. You may. Similarly, with respect to the display, sound, and lamp, the production lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the production lottery is instructed. Further, in the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting the selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, the effect lottery only switches the effect content by the control process of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the sound output will be described. FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and outputs voice. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice. Further, each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with a voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the voice operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice operation number table and reduce the processing load when referencing the table. Has the advantage of enabling.

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320.

In the example shown in FIG. 316, a "call" function is defined at address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter, and reproduces the phrase data 5508.

Further, a structural example of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. 316. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In the present embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is the output channel specified when the phrase is played. The left / right panpot and the top / bottom panpot are the left / right / top / bottom output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be played. When the song number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the sound source built-in VDP1540a reads the sound source data corresponding to the song number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces the sound. The loop is a specification of whether or not to repeatedly play the sound. Stereo is a specification of whether or not to output in stereo.

A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5507. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5505 being executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 316, as the processing progresses, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops multiplely specified by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, in the processing after the address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of the address SA2, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call), the call nesting is performed. The number will be 2. After finishing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to 1. The same is true for loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 317 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting / blinking control. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for a lamp. Further, each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with a lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referring to the table. It has the advantage of being possible.

The lamp pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

Like the effect data (FIG. 315), the scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 319.

In the example shown in FIG. 317, a "call" function is defined at address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown), and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

The address LA3 defines the gradation pattern setting. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored in the address LA11 specified by the parameter. The lamp scheduler 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 in association with each other. The lamp is turned on with the designated gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value elapses, the lamp with the gradation data 2 is used. Turn on. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings for the address LA12 and later, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between the gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes of the addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lighting of the lamp is terminated. The lamp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the processing of the next address until the processing is stopped (address LAn).

A work 5603 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5602. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5603. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running or not. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The ramp executes the next function when this value reaches zero. The gradation data timer represents the waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 317, when the gradation data specified in the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 shifts to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is terminated and the process proceeds to the processing of the address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 being executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 317, as the processing progresses, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is the address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the figure, as the processing progresses, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The number of loops is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, you may allow nesting in loops.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Subsequently, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. The drive device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive device. The drive unit module 5700 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

The control items of the drive device include, for example, the amount of movement (rotational step angle of the stepping motor), the movement time, the movement speed (rotational speed of the motor), the excitation method, the trapezoidal drive, and the rotation direction. In addition, there is an instruction to execute a return operation to return to the origin position and an instruction to stop the mechanical end (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop it while being urged to the limit position of the movable range). included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed by a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function at the start and stop of rotation.

The scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drive device will be described later with reference to FIG. 320.

[18-5. function]
The example of using the function in the module used for the effect control has been described above. Here, other functions will be described. FIGS. 318 to 320 are diagrams showing an example of a function in the effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, functions are divided into groups of sequence control, ramps, sounds, motors and users. Hereinafter, the functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
Functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of production. FIG. 318 gives an example of a sequence control function. The outline of each function will be described below.

"STOP" is a function representing the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by designating the number of executions as a parameter. The time according to the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle in which the "NOP" function is executed. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed in a 1 ms cycle, if the number of executions is also specified as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" has the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value as parameters, and when the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value are satisfied, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function is terminated and the condition is changed. If it is not satisfied, it is a conditional weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

"MEMW" is a function that writes a specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area with the target scheduler work number and value as parameters. "LOOPST" is a function for performing iterative processing (loop), specifies the beginning of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. If "0" is set for the number of loops, an infinite loop will occur. "LOOP" is a function for designating the end of the iterative process (loop).

"RET" is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the effect management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, and processes are executed from a designated address (block), and information for specifying a call destination such as an address value or a label is set as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the callee's address is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the process of the called destination, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

The "SUBC" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the branch table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, it executes the "call" function based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBC" will be described later with reference to FIG. 323. When the process of the callee is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the process of the caller (the next process of the "SUBC" function).

The "SUBJ" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, the "JUMP" function described later is executed based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. 324. The process of the caller who executed the "SUBJ" function is not returned, and the process of the callee is continued as it is. "JUMP" sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

"REF" is a function for invoking another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using "REF" will be described later with reference to FIG. 325. Like "REF", "REF" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start. In "REF", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REFF" can be executed independently for a specified period for the processing of the scheduler data to be executed. For example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, other scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It is possible to prevent it from becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
Functions belonging to the group of lamps are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 319 gives an example of a function related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"HPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on the gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp is reset and the reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

Similar to "HPLAY", "KPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "KPLAY", when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the running lamp is continued without resetting.

"HPLAY2" is a function that executes lamp gradation data reproduction processing by designating a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter. The processing is the same as that of "HPLAY". Similar to "HPLAY2", "KPLAY2" is a function that specifies a layer in addition to the gradation data by a parameter and executes a lamp gradation data reproduction process. The processing is the same as that of "KPLAY".

“HPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute a designated lamp gradation data reproduction process for reproducing the lamp gradation data specified in the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning at the time of reproduction by "HPLAY", and the lamp gradation data is reproduced at the time of reproduction by "KPLAY". Continue playing without interruption. That is, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed by using "KPLAY" while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

In addition to the above-mentioned "HPLAY" function, "HPLAY2" is the same as "HPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

In addition to the above-mentioned "KPLAY" function, "KPLAY2" is the same as "KPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (sound)]
Functions belonging to the group of sounds (sounds) are functions for controlling the sound output. An example of a function related to sound control is given in FIGS. 319 and 320, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound having the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound is reset and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. Similar to "SPLAY", "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing a phrase stop process for stopping the reproduction of the sound based on the phrase number specified by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" uses the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of execution of the "PAN_PH" function for the playing phrase specified by the parameter, and ends the panpot. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the specified transition time. In addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can also specify the panpot start coordinate position with a parameter, and like the "PAN_PH" function, the audio output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the specified transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" is specified from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value at the transition time. In addition to the function of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" can also specify the fade start volume value with a parameter, and like the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is a parameter at the start of function execution. This is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value at the specified transition time from the fade start volume value specified in.

"VOL_PH" is a function that increases / decreases the volume value of the phrase being played, which is specified by the parameter, with the volume value specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" is a function that mutes the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" is a function for canceling mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute a designated channel song reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. If the same phrase has already been played, the playback of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is played from the beginning during playback by "SCPLAY", and the phrase playback is continued without interruption during playback by "SXCPLAY". That is, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being played, no particular process is executed.

In "PAN_CH", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for a ch (channel) is performed. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". Regarding "PAN_CH2", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH2" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for ch is performed. "PAN_PH2" is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change.

"VOL_FADE_CH" is "VOL_FADE_PH" except that the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH" fades for a phrase, whereas ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change. Regarding "VOL_FADE_CH2", the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH2" fades for a phrase, whereas it fades for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change.

In "VOL_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_PH" increases / decreases the volume value for a phrase, whereas the volume value increases / decreases for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mute the phrase, whereas the mute the ch is specified by the parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" cancels the mute for the phrase, whereas the mute for the ch is canceled, and ch is a phrase specified by a parameter. The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
Functions belonging to the group of motors are functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids. FIG. 320 shows an example of a function related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor specified in the parameter to reproduce the operation based on the motor data number. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. "SOL_OFF" executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user's group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described above. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 320, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MBUF_SET" executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value set process that sets a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. “COMMAND” and “COMMAND0” are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command for starting drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. The "MEMC" executes a scheduler memory copy process for copying the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string that defines the functions required to execute a series of processes in the order of execution. There is one or more schedulers for each purpose for management purposes, but all functions can be executed by all schedulers, functions related to lamps can be executed by the sound scheduler, and the scheduler for accessories can be used. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the schedulers provided for each purpose, which can execute the functions for sound, and it is also possible to execute all the functions in a mixed manner. In addition, there is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed at the same time.

FIG. 321 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler definition of the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. The following is an overview of typical types of schedulers.

First, to explain an example of a scheduler related to state transitions, there is a special figure state scheduler (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data that controls the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the gaming state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions to another state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when a player operates an effect button, wins an effect execution lottery, or when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation. do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for sound includes a background that controls the output of the sound that is output along with the background display and the variable display of the symbol, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) for executing the symbol sound scheduler data, and is output when the advance notice effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the related scheduler for the lamp includes the background that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp due to the background display and the fluctuation display of the symbol, and the scheduler for executing the symbol lamp scheduler data (LMP_SCH01). ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the lamp is 1f (frame).

In addition, a scheduler that controls sounds and lamps in conjunction with each other is also defined. Such a scheduler has a sound / lamp notification layer that outputs sound and lights / blinks lamps in order to notify the outside of notifications such as out of balls and jams, and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01-03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that is generally used to execute an effect in which sound output and lamp lighting / blinking are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing the motor system scheduler data for executing the system operation, and a scheduler for executing the motorram clear scheduler data for setting the RAM clear time (MOTSYS_SCH). MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler for executing motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of accessories (MOTINI_SCH), and for executing motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of accessories. There is a scheduler (MOTO_SCH) of the above, and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the operation of the accessory by the production and the like.

The scheduler for executing the operation of the accessory by the production etc. is a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH01-05) for controlling the operation of a specific accessory and a general-purpose scheduler used regardless of the type of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

The processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the motor is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the management of the game state and the sound and the lamp (1f = about 33.334 ms of the present embodiment). It has become.

Although the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to dynamically increase or decrease according to the gaming state or the advance notice. As a result, it is possible to activate each scheduler independently of the number of characters and the like provided in the gaming machine and the number of effects, and it is possible to reduce the restrictions for executing the effects.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (Production 1)]
The outline of the functions used in the effect control and the types and functions of the scheduler that performs a series of control by combining these functions has been described above. However, the specific application examples of the scheduler data and the functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 322A is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322A, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a logo character 5001, a star character 5002 (left star character 5002a, a middle star character 5002b, a right star character 5002c), and a hatchet character 5003. Is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged on the upper left side of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper stage position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the production is completed. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can not only move in the vertical direction but also vibrate up, down, left and right before and after the movement.

The star character 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star character 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star character 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star character 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star accessory 5002 can operate independently, and one or a plurality of star accessories 5002 operate at predetermined timings depending on the content of the effect.

The left star accessory 5002a moves to the lower left and can move to a position slightly lower to the left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle star accessory 5002b moves downward and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right and can move to a position slightly lower to the center of the game area. In addition, each star accessory 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final arrival position, or may be returned to an intermediate position and stopped after reaching the final arrival position.

The hatchet 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hatchet 5003 can be dropped (moved) from the initial position (upper stage position) to the intermediate position and the lower stage position. Depending on the operation of the effect button by the player and the lottery result of the hatchet notice effect, it moves from the initial position to the middle position and stops temporarily, then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. The operation mode is set. Similar to the logo accessory 5001, the hatchet accessory 5003 can also be produced to vibrate up, down, left and right before and after movement.

Next, the flow of the advance notice effect executed by one symbol change will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 322B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice will be described. The flow of the advance notice effect including the hatchet advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 332.

FIG. 322B is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the advance notice effect executed in a series of fluctuation displays from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and explains the scheduler and the scheduler data used at this time. be. In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 322B, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice are executed. In each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, sound output, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each advance notice effect will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (Fig. 323) that controls the lamp in the step-up notice, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (Fig. 324) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star character in the star character notice. The motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" (FIGS. 325 to 327) that controls the operation of the 5002, and the motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 328) that controls the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory fall notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled to change stepwise according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) "LMP_SCH02".

FIG. 323 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP" is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP". The step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP".

The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are the addresses of scheduler data for executing the step-up notice corresponding to the number of step-ups (1 to 4).

In the present embodiment, the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice having the number of step-ups of 4 is stored in the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP", and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, executes lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH01".

After that, when the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", the process returns to the processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice having the number of step-ups of 4 is stored in the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP", and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies the lamp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up, executes the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and performs 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Wait processing is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the advance notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH02".

After that, when the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", the process returns to the next processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is terminated.

The step-up notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory content (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). be. Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundred, and in the case of two branches such as the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for the judgment becomes too complicated and it becomes difficult to manage corrections and the like. On the other hand, in "SUBC", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the working memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the call address table for branching is one to each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by using a plurality of both. Secondly, since it is in the form of "CALL", it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and it is not necessary to describe the scheduler data after branching for the number of branches. By describing one scheduler data, the same process can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process may not be performed and the "SUBC" function may be terminated.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set the scheduler data of the branch destination, but in the function "SUBC", it is possible to easily add or delete branch destinations. , It is possible to easily add / change the production contents and improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the fluctuation, and the notice is executed until the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, as in the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 322B. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

FIG. 324 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, first, the function "KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights (blinks) for 1 second based on the gradation pattern data "PTA_CUT_STA". At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop number of 90 times. Since one frame corresponds to one loop, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to the function "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". Button ON_OFF The operation state of the effect button is stored in the work area "YKK_BTN", "0: button OFF" when the effect button is not operated, and "1: button ON" when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the content of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" is rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

While "0: button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is selected when the button cut-in notice button is OFF in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". To. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" of the calling scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notice button is turned ON in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is the function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", and the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" has the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP". Is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores the address of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area "YKK_CUT" stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. In the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4", first, the lamp is turned on in red (gradation data pattern "PTA_CUT_RED") by the lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the wait processing of 150 frames is executed to continue for 5 seconds. Let me. At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is not CALL but JUMP, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP" and returns to the calling scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT". do not do. Therefore, the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed and when the "STOP" function included in "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed from the scheduler "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1". There is.

The button cut-in notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory content (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as IF statements, the number of scheduler data for judgment becomes too complicated and it becomes impossible to manage corrections. .. In "SUBJ", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the working memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the call address table for branching is one to each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by using a plurality of both. Secondly, since it takes the form of "JUMP", it is possible to execute different processes for each branched scheduler data after executing the "SUBJ" function. Further, as in the case of "SUBC", in order to deal with a program defect, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process is not performed and the "SUBC" function is terminated. You may do so.

That is, the function "SUBJ" selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, like the function "SUBJ", and the selected scheduler data. It is possible to transition the process to, and the same effect as the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Further, unlike the function "SUBJ", the function "SUBJ" continuously executes the processing of the schedule data of the callee and does not return to the processing of the caller, so that it is suitable for selectively executing the processing. ing. For example, when the effect content to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress duplication of effect execution by using the function "SUBJ". On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing by the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the processing of the callee is executed, and the processing can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and to flexibly support the processing branch. Furthermore, since it becomes easy to respond to additions and changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, it becomes easy to improve the development efficiency and to respond to the specification change of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star character notice]
Subsequently, the control of the star character advance notice executed in the latter half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. When a reach occurs in the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the transition to the latter half of the fluctuation occurs, a group notice is generated, and the star character notice is executed independently of the group notice. The notice of the star character is that a plurality of types of star character 5002 (in this embodiment, the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c) that can be operated by the drive body (motor) are used. By operating, the degree of expectation of symbol fluctuation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of star characters 5002 appearing, the higher the expectation.

As shown in FIG. 322B, the star character advance notice of the present embodiment is executed by driving the star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (scheduler for left star character scheduler data). Will be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star accessory 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) can also be used. ..

FIGS. 325 to 327 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the scheduler data for controlling the motor in the star accessory advance notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 325 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” that controls the overall flow and the left star accessory 5002a, FIG. 326 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” that controls the right star accessory 5002c, and FIG. 327 is the scheduler that controls the middle star accessory 5002b. It is a figure explaining the data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star accessory advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated star character advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star character advance notice work area "YKK_HYA". .. The lottery result value of the star character notice branch is stored in the star character notice work area "YKK_HYA", and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star character notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

The address of the star character appearance scheduler data is stored in the star character advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to make the accessory non-operation when the notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the star character advance notice. SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star characters 5002.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result value indicating that the star character advance notice that causes the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c to appear in the star character notice work area "YKK_HYA" is executed. "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star character 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star character notice is "1", and when the left star character 5002a and the right star character 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star character notice is drawn. "2" is set in the result value.

The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor regeneration process by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the pattern of the appearance operation of the left star accessory 5002a. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" in which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" by the function "REF". The function "REF" is a function for executing the scheduler data specified by the parameter by the scheduler also specified by the parameter. Here, the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "RQ" executes the middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04". In this embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function "MPLAY") for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the middle star accessory 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star accessory 5002a. ing. As described above, by executing the scheduler data for operating each star accessory 5002 with different schedulers, each star accessory 5002 can be controlled in parallel.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the weight processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this weight time, the left star accessory 5002a operates in the specified mode. After the weight processing is completed, the function "RET" is executed, the caller's star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is returned, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is completed by the function "stop".

Next, the control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. 326. The right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in FIG. 326, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star accessory 5002c. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the right star accessory 5002c. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

Finally, the control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. 327. The middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 327, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star accessory 5002b. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the middle star accessory 5002b. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star accessory 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star accessory 5002b are combined with the function "RQ". By executing using, it is possible to operate each accessory in parallel. That is, the operation of each accessory can be executed in parallel without any special control by executing the scheduler data defined individually as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing multiple operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated, and the number of data becomes enormous. Therefore, the function "REF" is used. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called for easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of accessories are operated in parallel has been described, but more accessories can be executed in parallel as long as the operation of the accessories is not hindered. From the above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the logo accessory fall notice]
Subsequently, the control of the logo accessory fall notice executed in the latter half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo character fall notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star character notice. The logo accessory fall notice is a notice effect in which the logo character 5001 imitating the logo of the gaming machine operates so as to fall vertically in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is higher than usual. Shows that is high.

As shown in FIG. 322B, the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment is obtained by driving the logo character fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (logo character scheduler data scheduler). Will be executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 with a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09).

FIG. 328 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that controls the motor in the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, first, the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop number of 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. The logo.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", and based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", sets the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify. The button logo character fall notice execution lottery result is stored in the button logo character fall notice work area "YKK_LGO", and if the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is missed, "0: Not executed", button. Execution of logo fall notice If the lottery is won, "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the button logo character fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo character fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO".

While "0: Not executed" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo character fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the logo character fall notice unexecuted motor scheduler The data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" of the calling scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory fall notice is missed, the loop processing is executed 90 times, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. ..

On the other hand, when "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is won, the button logo character falls. In the notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of executing the logo accessory fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" has the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo accessory fall notice button branch address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and if the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF" and the effect button are operated. If so, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO".

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" when the logo character fall notice button is OFF. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory fall notice is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is released from the loop processing. It is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor scheduler when the logo character fall notice button is ON in the button logo character fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO". The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. For the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON" is executed. The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command "COM_LGO_ON" is a command for starting the effect of dropping the logo accessory 5001 on the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_LGO_ON". The parameter "PTA_LGO_DOWN" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds). At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a falling operation over 3 seconds, and stops at the falling position for the remaining 1 second.

Further, by executing the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI", the logo accessory 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), during which the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the weight processing is completed, the execution of the logo character drop operation is completed, so the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed, the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the caller's scheduler It returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but since the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo character is executed. However, the remaining loop count processing is performed, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is terminated by the function "STOP".

As described above, by issuing a command internally when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, the effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal display only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function "COMMAND", it is possible to link a plurality of types of production devices and execute them as needed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to execute a more interesting production. ..

In this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal on the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. However, by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side, the control can be changed from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result to the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, it is possible to perform processing that cannot be controlled by the function command. In addition, the merit of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuance timing is used as the processing timing as it is, so there is no need for time management or execution judgment by the program. In addition, it is possible to interactively process external inputs (buttons, jog dials, touchpads) by the user that are not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue commands using the function "COMMAND", and perform processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the function "COMMAND" has a function of transmitting a fixed value command, but a work area is specified instead of a fixed value, and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. You may.

[18-8. Application example of scheduler data (when the power is turned on)]
Subsequently, the scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variation display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 329 is a drawing illustrating scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the power-on command, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" drives the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON".

When the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed, the sub-internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub-game state (sub-internal state) is started. With the progress of the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the LCD display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub-internal state, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc., as shown in FIG. 329. Will be done. At this time, the main game state is the standby state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 330 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or when a predetermined event occurs in the gaming control on the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. To. As described with reference to FIG. 312, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 and analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, starts the corresponding scheduler, and executes the scheduler data.

Further, when the function "COMMAND0" (FIG. 319) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process in the same manner as the main command. Will be done.

When the main command or the command output by the function "COMMAND0" is received, the command for executing the control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis process. The generated commands include commands for starting the scheduler and commands for controlling various production devices (commands for sub-internal output).

In the command to start the scheduler, for example, the scheduler data for controlling the change of the gaming state in the main control board 1310 and the change of the sub-internal state due to the progress of the control in the peripheral control board 1510, the start prize, etc. The scheduler data for executing the effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, the scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, in addition to starting the scheduler directly from a command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function "RQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the effect device (sub-internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command to control the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The commands that control the effect device are temporarily stored in the sub-internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order in which they are stored from the beginning of the buffer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by further invoking another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to execute a plurality of schedulers in a hierarchical combination by receiving one main command. This makes it possible to make various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 into parts for each scheduler data, and by combining the schedulers, it is possible to implement multiple types of effects in parallel while realizing various effect controls. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines, such as streamlining debugging work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the command analysis process can be standardized by the command output by the function "COMMAND0". This makes it possible to standardize the scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which causes problems such as the need to manage a huge number of scheduler data combinations in a table. It can be suppressed.

Subsequently, the activation of the scheduler and the execution of the scheduler data when a command at power-on is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 331 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when the power of the present embodiment is turned on.

As described with reference to FIG. 330, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process and the scheduler. The sub-state scheduler is started by the start process, and the corresponding scheduler data is executed sequentially. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed to issue a command to create a sub-internal state, and if necessary, output lamps and sounds corresponding to the sub-internal state. ..

To specifically explain the scheduler to be executed, first, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" is used to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_MDEMO" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the manufacturer demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 300", the standby state is set for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting starts based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. Further, by executing the function "SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO", sound reproduction is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the goto prevention state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 450", the standby state is set for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed. The gaming machine is in a playable state at this stage, and loops in this standby state until the game is started and the gaming ball wins a prize.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (effect 2)]
Next, an example of executing the hatchet accessory fall notice instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice will be described. The hatchet fall notice is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control such as inheriting the parameters used in the first half notice to the second half notice is performed.

[18-9-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of variation display from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and (A) is an effect executed from the start to the end of the variation and the said. The scheduler data for executing the effect and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a figure explaining the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice.

In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 332 (A), the step-up notice and the button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet fall notice, are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, a group notice is executed in the latter half of the fluctuation, and a hatchet character second half fall notice is executed following the button hatchet character first half fall notice that has been continued from the first half. In each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, sound output, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, the contents of the hatchet fall notice will be described with reference to FIG. 332 (B). As described above, the hatchet fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice and a hatchet second half fall notice.

In the first half of the button hatchet, which is the first half of the fall notice, the notice effect progresses by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won, the drop effect of the hatchet accessory 5003 is not executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the second half of the hatchet character fall notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the hatchet character second half fall notice regardless of the operation of the effect button.

When the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won and the effect button is operated at a predetermined timing, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position. Further, if the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the middle position and the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory second half fall notice is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the lower position. That is, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the upper part (upper stage position, initial position) to the center (middle stage position) in the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, and falls to the lower part (lower stage position) in the latter half. In addition, when the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half fall notice is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is designed to fall to the lower part regardless of the position. Further, when the hatchet accessory fall notice is completed, the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 332 (B), the hatchet accessory fall notice is produced in six different patterns. Specifically, when the result of the execution lottery of the button hatchet first half fall notice is not won, it does not depend on the operation of the effect button, so when the hatchet second half fall notice is not won (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of pattern 1, since the button hatchet first half fall notice and the hatchet second half fall notice are not won, the hatchet 5003 does not fall and is maintained without moving from the upper part. In the case of pattern 2, the hatchet 5003 does not fall and is located at the top in the hatchet fall notice, while the hatchet 5003 wins the execution lottery in the hatchet second half fall notice, so the hatchet 5003 is from the top to the bottom. It falls at once.

Execution of the button hatchet first half fall notice When the lottery is won, the effect mode of the button hatchet first half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, the hatchet accessory fall notice can be executed in four patterns depending on whether or not the effect button is operated and the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory fall notice.

If the result of the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet is not won and the effect button is not operated, and the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet is not won, the hatchet 5003 will not fall. It remains located at the top (Pattern 3). If the result of the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet character fall notice is won and the effect button is operated, and the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet character object fall notice is not won, the hatchet character 5003 Will fall from the top to the middle and remain in the middle until the hatchet fall notice is completed (Pattern 4).

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet, and do not operate the production button, and if you win the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet, the effect button is not operated, so the hatchet role. The hatchet accessory 5003 is located at the upper part without falling until the second half fall notice of the object is started, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory (Pattern 5). If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet, operate the production button, and win the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet, the hatchet 5003 will be displayed from the top when you operate the production button. It falls to the middle, and further falls from the top to the bottom in the notice of the fall of the hatchet in the second half (Pattern 6).

As described above, the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment can have six patterns of effect, and the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice will be described below. Specifically, the button hatchet first half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the button hatchet first half fall notice shown in FIG. 332 (A), and the hatchet role second half. The latter half of the hatchet accessory fall announcement motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the drop notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls for hatchet fall notice]
FIG. 333 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that controls the motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. .. As described above, when the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatchet is won, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function "LOOP", and the hatchet 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Perform the production to make it. Execution of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet If the lottery is not won, if the effect button is not operated even if the lottery is won, the hatchet 5003 ends without operating. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA" is executed, and the drawing of the effect when the hatchet 5003 is rattled on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT". Specifically, the hatchet 5003 rattles.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop number of 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. Will be executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", and based on the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address of. The result of the execution lottery of the button hatchet first half fall notice is stored in the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", and if the execution lottery of the button hatchet first half fall notice is not won, "0:: "Non-winning", "1: Hatchet first half fall notice execution" is set when the lottery is won. The result of the execution lottery of the button hatchet first half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

Button hatchet first half fall notice When "0: non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected when the first half fall notice is not executed. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery is "non-winning", so the scheduler data without executing the button hatchet first half fall notice. End the execution of.

On the other hand, when "1: Hatchet first half fall notice execution" is set in the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button hatchet first half fall notice execution lottery is won. , Button hatchet first half fall notice In the lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the time of executing the hatchet fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button hatchet first half drop notice button branch address. It is executed with the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatchet first half fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". .. As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and when the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF". , "1: Button ON" is set when the effect button is operated. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice button OFF motor scheduler The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet fall notice is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is exited from the loop processing. Is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button is turned on in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". The hour motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the hatchet is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to an intermediate position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 drops to an intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1", "1" is written in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, and it is recorded that the hatchet 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. After that, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is terminated by the function "STOP".

Button, which is the first half of the hatchet fall notice, when the hatchet first half fall notice is completed, the hatchet second half fall notice, which is the second half, is started. FIGS. 334 and 335 are diagrams illustrating the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the motor in the hatchet second half fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet fall notice of the present embodiment. be. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used in the same manner as the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" to execute the hatchet character second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed, and drawing of an effect suggesting whether or not the hatchet 5003 is dropped on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. .. After that, the weight processing "NOP: 90" for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of a big hit increases when the hatchet 5003 falls, the player's expectation is raised by drawing an effect for 3 seconds.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters. ..

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", and based on the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address. The result of the execution lottery of the hatchet second half fall notice is stored in the work area "YKK_NTA2", and if the execution lottery of the hatchet second half fall notice is not won, "0: non-winning" If the lottery for executing the second half fall notice of the hatchet character is won, "1: Execution of the second half fall notice of the hatchet character" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the hatchet second half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2".

Hatchet second half fall notice 2 If "0: non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" will drop the hatchet second half. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" is selected when the advance notice has not been executed. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result Branch based on.

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice is not announced in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The run-time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" when the hatchet second half fall notice is not executed is selected in the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". To. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". After that, the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is overwritten with "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" shows the hatchet first half fall. Notice execution / second half fall notice When non-winning Motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is selected.

In the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" when the hatchet first half fall notice is executed and the second half fall notice is not won, the weight process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is first executed. In the weight process executed here, as will be described later, when the hatchet 5003 is in the lower position, it becomes a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the hatchet 5003 is originally in the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After the weight processing is completed, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operation time of the hatchet 5003, the weight process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is restored by the function "RET".

In addition, when "1: hatchet second half fall notice" is set in the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" Motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of winning the second half fall notice of the hatchet. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the hatchet fall notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_ ..

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" has not yet announced the hatchet first half fall notice. Execution / second half drop notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 335), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 240" executes a weight process of 240 frames (about 8 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Subsequently, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the above-mentioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" shows the hatchet first half fall. Notice execution / second half fall notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 335), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position and the timing to start the operation of returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (about) are used by the function "NOP: 120". Weight processing for 4 seconds) is executed. This time is the time until the hatchet 5003 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed in the same manner as in the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" to return the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the hatchet 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is set to "0: initial position". And terminate the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In the hatchet fall notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hatchet 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 by writing the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 using the function "MEMW" in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. .. As a result, it is possible to determine the amount of movement of the motor for each position of the hatchet 5003, and it is possible to execute the effect according to the operation result of the effect button by calling each corresponding scheduler data.

Further, even in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the hatchet 5003, the common scheduler data is called by moving from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function "MEMW" can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing the scheduler data and referencing it when executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify a value indicating a state that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data at the time of executing each scheduler data. The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data. This makes it possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, streamline the creation and debugging of scheduler data, and facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, the function is to write a fixed value, but by specifying the work name as a function parameter instead of the fixed value, data can be passed from the program side and processing based on command information can be performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. A peculiar feature of the function "MEMW" is that even information that has not been determined at the start of execution of scheduler data including the function "MEMW" can be processed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables control of effective time and interactive control.

[18-10. Scheduler data configuration example (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of advance notice effects has been described above. The execution content of such a series of advance notice effects is drawn by lottery based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each notice production.

Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of advance notice effects based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the basic effects related to these series of advance notice effects and variation patterns (regardless of the lottery other than the advance notice effects). The structure of the scheduler data for executing the background effect and the effect related to the pattern effect, which are produced and are one-to-one with the fluctuation pattern, will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (effect sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. The block is, for example, from the start of the symbol change to the occurrence of reach, or to the time when the symbol stops when no reach occurs (first half change), and from the occurrence of reach to the time when the symbol stops (second half change). ), From the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. Further, a time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each block, and the execution timing and execution time of the advance notice effect within the allotted time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and the data related to the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

In addition, the rule of block division is that when comparing basic effects related to fluctuations in multiple fluctuation patterns, the same basic effect part is used as common block data, and the part with a difference in the basic effect of the liquid crystal display is divided as block data. do. Referring to FIG. 336A, in the liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variable pattern that stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” is normally varied for 6 seconds. It is a loss, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of the loss is produced. Since the 6-second effect of normal fluctuation and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into the 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) of normal fluctuation and the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) of stop loss.

The fluctuation pattern "10H02H" is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the pattern of the loss is produced. Since the 12-second effect of normal fluctuation is also used for other variation patterns, it is divided as the 12-second LCD effect block data (LCD03_BLK) of normal variation, and the pattern effect of loss is exactly the same as the variation pattern "10H01H". As the liquid crystal display block data for stopping the loss, the liquid crystal display block data (LCD02_BLK) for stopping the loss, which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks according to the fluctuation pattern “10H01H”, is commonly used. Similarly, for other fluctuation patterns, the parts that have already been converted into block data for the basic effect are used in common, and the parts that are different are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by making blocks, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and for all fluctuation patterns and basic effects such as jackpots other than fluctuations, by combining unique LCD effect block data. , It is possible to realize basic effects such as all fluctuation patterns and jackpots other than fluctuations. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the main purpose of blocking is a liquid crystal display that includes a specific basic effect when there is a change in a specific basic effect. The change is reflected in all fluctuation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, since the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data of sound, lamp, and accessory in this embodiment, but the format and function are basically different for each block data. The configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect are combined is the same as the sub-effect block data that controls the sound, the lamp, the accessory, and the like. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and video material IDs, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, and colors related to pictures and movies displayed in the background and effects related to patterns. It is composed of functions that can specify control information for generating display list commands for VDP1540a with built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information, and also indicates the type and execution timing of the effect related to the advance notice effect that occurs in the block data. The information to be shown is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for variablely displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as the liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variable display of the identification symbol independent of the control of other liquid crystal displays. For example, even when the shape of the identification symbol is changed and variable display is performed, a common notice effect can be obtained. It can be executed on a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for displaying the symbol has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display. Further, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect related to the design are combined for each block data has the same configuration as the sub-effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for the symbol display has the same structure and function as the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the mode of variable display of the identification symbol is embedded.

FIG. 336A is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal display effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, which stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 336B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variable pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variable pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 337 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment.

The liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each fluctuation pattern is a table that holds information indicating the combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. For example, for the variable pattern number, a unique number for specifying the constituent liquid crystal display block data is held in chronological order. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H", it is composed of "LCD03_BLK" indicating a normal fluctuation for 12 seconds in the first half fluctuation, "LCD04_BLK" indicating a normal short reach in the second half fluctuation, and "LCD02_BLK" indicating a stoppage. Will be done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. In this way, the configurations of the basic effect and the advance notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal display block data for each fluctuation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 435, the same liquid crystal display block data is used in the same effect section. For example, when the first half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the advance notice effect actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal display block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal display block data can be uniquely specified for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 336B, the LCD symbol block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the LCD effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. .. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal display block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337, the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern contains information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal display block data combination number table for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to one-to-one with the liquid crystal display block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data having the same variation pattern number.

Next, the procedure for executing the advance notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, the outline of the procedure for executing the effect control based on the liquid crystal effect block data, the effect control based on the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the effect control based on the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 338 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the fluctuation pattern command (main fluctuation-related command) "10H03H" is received from the main control board 1310, the fluctuation pattern number "10H03H" is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 is notified. Notice.

As described with reference to FIG. 314A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. The corresponding block data number is acquired from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, and the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern. do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to each effect device to the same number, it is possible to execute all the effects of each effect device in synchronization.

Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits the block data numbers for the total number of layers to the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub effect block control unit 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit. By 5333 (5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal symbol block data "ZUG03_BLK". , Sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normally variable 12-second sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK".

When the processing of the liquid crystal display block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal display 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal display block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the content of the effect is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the content of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, transmits a DISPLAY list to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, and draws on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, when processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data according to the variation display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as that for processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub-effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub-effect 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub-effect block data are started, and the scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data designation function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp (“KPLAY”), a speaker (“SPLAY”), and an accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specification functions in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to modules (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and each module executes effects by various effect devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "RQ, EQUF". It is possible to control various effect devices by executing the effect data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time. Further, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", it is possible to control by a command instead of a function. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designation function that controls the operation of the character, the operation of the character and the drawing are linked as in the above-mentioned hatchet fall notice effect. It is possible to carry out the production that was done.

Here, a procedure for executing the effect control using the sub-effect block data will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing for each variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

In the effect block control unit 5040, the variation pattern layer is selected by the effect control unit 5020 based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and the control of the block data number for each variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is varied. Control is started using the sub-effect block data combination number table for each pattern (FIG. 337). The row position of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 337) is set in the row index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 337, if the variation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern, and the variation pattern number is "10H03H". Since it is the third row, “2” (row-1) is set in the row index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub-effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is started, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern based on the row and column indexes (step S7011). Further, the sub-effect block data number table row index is initialized with "0" (step S7012). As a result, processing is started from the first record of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern specified from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 342 (B)). Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) is obtained from the sub-effect block data number table. get. One or more scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice), and the scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data are associated with each other based on the lottery result of the advance notice.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index when all the scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data has been started, and the sub-effect block data number table row index has a fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the separate sub-effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub-effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of sub-effect block data number table row elements for each variation pattern is not exceeded (the result of step S7014 is "NO"), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern This is the process for executing the next sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern when the execution of all the scheduler data in is completed. The sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is executed periodically, and the execution status of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is monitored.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern by using the row and column index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. (Step S7021). As a result, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is specified and defined in the sub-effect block data. It is determined whether or not the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub-effect block data control update process is terminated.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the advance notice) defined by the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. When is completed (the result of step S7022 is "NO"), the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each fluctuation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is the end data ("DATA_END"). Is determined (step S7023). If it is end data (the result of step S7023 is "YES"), since a series of effects have been completed, the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is terminated.

On the other hand, if the next column data is not end data (the result of step S7023 is "NO"), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. , The sub-effect data block control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern is executed (step S7024).

As described with reference to FIGS. 336A, 336B, and 337, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, by blocking, if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the number of activations of the effect block and the scheduler defined in the effect block will always be the same regardless of the combination of effects and the appearance of the effect, and the program The complexity can be reduced and, as a result, the quality can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or more drawing schedulers and sub-effect schedulers, it is possible to link the operations of various effect devices, and various effects without discomfort are executed. can do. In addition, since scheduler data with the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data that controls various production devices should be independently developed and operation confirmed for each production device and block data. Is possible, and development efficiency can be improved.

FIG. 342 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect of the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and FIG. 342 is a diagram showing the timing of executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect and the said. The execution time of the advance notice effect, (B) shows the structure of the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. The sub-effect block data for each variation pattern includes the background sub-effect block data and the preview sub-effect block data for executing the background effect and the preview effect. In FIG. 342 (B), two types of sub-effect block data, background block data and advance notice block data, are combined, but the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 342, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern constituting the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), and “SCH02_BLK” (. Loss stop). The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the left symbol and the right symbol. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the result of the variation display is confirmed as a loss, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 342 (A), the sub-effect block data related to the step-up notice, the BTN logo accessory fall notice, and the symbol stop notice notice, and the sub-effect related to the background. Block data is defined. Further, in the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK", the sub-effect block data of the cut-in notice and the group notice and the sub-effect block data related to the background are defined. Further, in the sub-effect block "SCH02_BLK", the advance notice effect sub-effect block data is not defined, but the sub-effect block data related to the background is defined. In the figure, the execution of the advance notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of advance notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of advance notice effects are duplicated. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 342 are as described above.

Hereinafter, the effect control by each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 342 (B), two types of sub-effect block data in the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern will be described.

In the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background, normally variable 12-second background sub-effect block data is defined. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal variation 12-second background are defined in the normal variation 12-second background sub-effect block data. Since the background sub-effect block data having a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds is the scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is completed.

The sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice defines the function "NOP", the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data, and the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal display effect scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub effect according to the liquid crystal effect. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo character fall notice are defined in the BTN logo character fall notice sub-effect block data. The BTN logo character fall notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the BTN logo character fall notice liquid crystal display block data. As the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice are defined. The symbol stop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice LCD effect block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

At this time, from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect. Function until the start of, and from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal notice effect (design stop notice) to the end of the execution of the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern. "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the scheduler block for each fluctuation pattern by the function "NOP", the sequential scheduler is executed at the execution timing of each advance notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern does not have to be.

The execution time of the advance notice effect set by the scheduler data that controls the effect device such as the lamp, the sound, and the accessory is defined as a common time for each advance notice effect. As a result, since the time from the start of the control by the sub-effect block data to the execution of each advance notice effect is uniquely determined, the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Further, the time information at the time of executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is managed not after the start of the fluctuation but as a relative value from the start of the execution of the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. As a result, when the same sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern has an effect start time from the start of the variation for each variation pattern. Although it will be different, since the time value is relatively managed in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, it can be processed without any problem. Similarly, in the case of the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, it is managed by the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, and in the case of the liquid crystal symbol block data for each fluctuation pattern, the liquid crystal symbol block for each fluctuation pattern is also similarly managed. It is managed by the relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub-effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined in the normal short reach background sub-effect block data. Since the normal short reach background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is completed.

The function "NOP", the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and the group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the advance notice. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal display effect scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice LCD effect block data. In the group notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the group notice are defined. The group notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the group notification liquid crystal display block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

Further, the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern has the same number of sub-effect block data columns as the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern, but the number of sub-effect block data columns may increase or decrease. no problem.

Finally, in the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern, since the effect related to the advance notice is not performed, only the loss stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normally variable 12-second background are defined in the loss stop background sub-effect block data. Since the loss stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 343 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the liquid crystal display effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern differ only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub-effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common to each other, the description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described with reference to FIG. 314B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 344 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file in a step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) using a video composition / motion creation graphic tool for a step-up notice for the liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. be.

The drawing data file is created for each step-up effect, and is composed of a series of effects that combine still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 344, the drawing data file is converted into the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data in the present embodiment by the tool in step-up effect units.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notices as in the present embodiment are used. If it is feasible, it is necessary to change the drawing data files for 4 lines, and considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data files are created in a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice in combination.

FIG. 345 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data, and (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, four types of step-up notices can be executed in the present embodiment, but step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In the step-up notices 3 and 4, the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

Explaining the step-up notice LCD effect block data, first, it is decided whether to execute any of the step-up notices 1 to 4 based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of the fluctuation. To. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is not won, the step-up notice liquid crystal display effect block data is not executed, so that the step-up notice is not executed and drawing is not performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 1, the step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice LCD effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 2. Step-up notice The step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is terminated because the data to be executed next is "DATA_END".

Further, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, the weight is waited for the time specified by the parameter, and then the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2 Since the data to be executed next is "DATA_END" after the execution of the liquid crystal display scheduler data is completed, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is terminated.

As described above, by combining the effect scheduler data of the advance notice in the minimum configuration unit, it is possible to realize a plurality of variations of a single advance notice.

Subsequently, the step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 345 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured such that the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data and the block configuration and the execution time all have a one-to-one correspondence. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the production devices with respect to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result of the advance notice, and it is possible to realize a production with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub-effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub-effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub-effect block data stored in the order of data access is acquired from the sub-effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO" for each fluctuation pattern. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it is possible to execute the basic effect and the advance notice effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. ..

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time, whereby the various effect devices can be used. The production can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is subsequently performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, just by executing the corresponding block data based on the information that identifies the effect content such as the fluctuation pattern, the hierarchically defined scheduler data is automatically acquired and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, which greatly improves development efficiency. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler is configured to analyze the scheduler data described in a predetermined format and control the effect device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included in the peripheral control board 1510) is updated, a common schedule can be obtained by installing a scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it becomes possible to utilize software assets related to production control of gaming machines for a long period of time.

The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler started when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use to free up the used area of the memory. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the schedule data is completed, or it may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state.

[19. LCD effect scheduler data effect control]
Subsequently, the details of the liquid crystal display scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal display block data will be described. Like the sub-effect block data, the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is composed of a combination of functions that control the effect target. In the sub-effect block data, sound output, lamp lighting, operation of the drive device, etc. were controlled targets, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
First, the functions constituting the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data (liquid crystal display scheduler function) will be described. The liquid crystal display scheduler function is a command (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal display scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal display block data described above, and a command is given to the sound source built-in VDP1540a by the liquid crystal display scheduler function. Send and perform the production. In addition, when executing the liquid crystal display scheduler function, the attributes of the displayed object (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) can be changed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
FIG. 346 is a diagram showing an example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function of the present embodiment. The outline of each liquid crystal display scheduler function will be described below.

Each liquid crystal display scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and subscheduler setting.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is for setting the liquid crystal display object by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, for example. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ" specify the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target object.

Next, the group to which the function for scaling (scale setting) the display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling is, for example, setting the center of a designated display area to be enlarged or reduced when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on the CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to do. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing the drawing process, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, the group to which the function for setting the angle when rotating and displaying the liquid crystal display object belongs will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by specifying the angle, it is not necessary to store a plurality of rotated liquid crystal display objects, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. can.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. Further, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" specifies an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object.

Next, other functions will be described. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA" is an α setting process, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not pass the background color at all.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and specifically, a frame value which is a drawing update interval of a liquid crystal display object is set. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval for redrawing the liquid crystal display object during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z-index is a hierarchy for displaying the liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed on the front side or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn on the backmost surface.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information about the effect SW. Although the details will be described later, the effect SW is information incorporated in the control information for drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back and the effect content is switched. , Perform another production. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information in the still image index number on the CGROM and the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets the frame effect SW information to the entire LCD effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets the SW information that defines the special control information described later in the liquid crystal display scheduler data.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling the subscheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a subscheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the processing and improve the development efficiency.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD production]
The example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, the parameters specified when the scheduler function for liquid crystal display is executed will be described with an example. 347 and 348 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the liquid crystal display scheduler function in the present embodiment.

The parameters of the liquid crystal display scheduler function are managed for each group in the same manner as the liquid crystal display scheduler function. The group of the scheduler function for liquid crystal display and the group of parameters are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub-effect scheduler function, and the like.

The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE", and "AAD_SCALE2". ] Etc. are included. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for specifying a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS" is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS3" is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_ALPHA" is a parameter for designating the α value which is the transparency of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. "AAD_ANGLE" is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY_B" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SKIP" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SKIP_B" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during the liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SCALE" is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE2" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE3" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SIZE" is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters of the effect SW includes "AAD_LCDSWENTRY", "AAD_LCDSW", "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM", "AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY", "AAD_KICKLCDSW", "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY", "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" and the like.

"AAD_LCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered production SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_LCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_KICKLCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of footage setting parameters includes "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY", "AAD_SEQFOOT" and the like. "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SEQFOOT" is a parameter that specifies the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter for designating the symbol index number and has a length of 16 bits.

The parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function includes "AAD_SUBENTRY", "AAD_SUB", and the like. "AAD_SUBENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of subscheduler function parameters and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SUB" is a parameter that specifies the subscheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Conventionally, the effect control in the gaming machine has been realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various effect devices and a program for linking a plurality of effect devices. These programs were described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the effect device for each content of the notice in addition to the commands related to the fluctuation pattern, and were created by a programmer having a high level of skill. In the liquid crystal drawing, each effect drawing data is called in the frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the gaming machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of productions, and it is necessary to realize complicated production control. As a result, advanced technology is required for individual programmers, development man-hours increase, and it becomes difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the man-hours required for the test for the purpose of confirming the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality also increase.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it may be possible to realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by the program code. Instead, the program data for the game machine is output by the tool that creates the liquid crystal drawing effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality.

Specifically, by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in chronological order, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal drawing effect is used. In this tool, a single production drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one production block, and the production blocks are grouped together for each state such as fluctuation pattern and big hit to create a production common block. By combining multiple production common blocks, a series of production drawing such as fluctuation patterns and big hits is realized.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of the effects related to the lottery, replacement of the effects and symbols, and interactive effects for the external input by the player occur, so the combined effects common block is simply executed as it is. Then, it is impossible to realize all the productions.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect common block is created by the above-mentioned tool, the effect switch (effect switch) for calling a program for executing the effect at a predetermined timing or executing a predetermined control is performed. ) Can be set (embedded). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, a callback always occurs regardless of whether the effect SW is "ON" or "OFF". Further, when the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect block included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing and detects the incorporated effect SW, it dynamically calls the program function based on the detected effect SW (callback). do). Then, a display list command can be created based on the information processed by the called back program function, and ON / OFF of the effect display and replacement of the effect can be realized. In addition, in the program function called by the callback, it is also possible to execute an effect other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of an accessory, etc.). In addition, it is possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting a flag and updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to display or hide the drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, replace the effect and the design, and realize an interactive effect for the external input by the player. ..

The program functions for turning on / off the liquid crystal display and replacing the liquid crystal display called by the callback are built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and do not need to be newly created. Therefore, designers and planners who do not have advanced program knowledge can set the production SW so that they call the predefined program functions while setting the production elements such as images and videos at the time of production design. It is possible to realize complicated production specifications. Furthermore, by creating a production block (LCD production scheduler data) for each production configuration unit using the production creation tool, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period, and in addition, the production content is based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be significantly reduced.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Subsequently, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an effect switch in the present embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

The effect SW number is associated with an effect SW group ID, an effect SW reset group ID, an effect SW attribute, an effect SW activation command address, an effect replacement information table address, and the like.

The effect SW group is a set of effect SWs grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group and defines which effect SW group belongs to. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group, and by specifying the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF, and the effects belonging to the effect SW group are collectively set to OFF. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

FIG. 350 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of the present embodiment. Further, as described above, there are active and passive effect SWs, and the effect SW group is composed of one or a plurality of active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, the head group number of the active effect SW and the number of active effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group, and the head group number of the passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SWs are included.

The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal display effect SW full reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive / active information, and the like. The liquid crystal display SW full reset information is information that specifies whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information that specifies whether or not to call the callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call the default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. The passive / active information indicates an evaluation method of the effect SW. When passive, the effect SW is statically evaluated, and when active, the effect SW is dynamically evaluated.

The effect SW start command address is the address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW start command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW start command table. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 351 illustrates the effect SW start command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and the effect SW start command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of the number of commands and the data for the number of judgment commands.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) shows a stage in which a step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) is a screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 352 (A), the step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the next stage is executed. .. If the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and if it does not develop, the step-up notice ends as it is.

Here, variations of the step-up notice production at each stage will be described. In the step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of the step-up notice effect, the effect that the display screen is filled with black ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of the black ink and the pattern of filling. For example, when the color of black ink is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation is high in the order of white, red, and rainbow color. Further, as the filling pattern, the higher the position where the filling is started, the higher the expectation degree, and the expectation degree may be changed depending on the position itself where the filling is started. For example, if the fill is started from only one place on the lower left, the expectation is low, if the fill is started from two places on the lower left and upper left, or if the fill is started from three places on the lower left, upper left and upper right. Expectations are higher in order, and highest when filling is started from the four corners.

Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage is executed. In the development production, the production is performed in a common manner halfway in order to raise the player's expectation regardless of whether or not the development actually develops to the next stage. Explaining the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with the combination of the black color and the fill pattern determined by the lottery. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (becomes lighter), and the characters to be displayed in the step-up notice 2 emerge. When the step-up notice 2 is developed, the ink is applied as it is and the characters are displayed darker, and the production is continued. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed darkly and are inked and hidden.

In the step-up notice 2, characters according to the degree of expectation are displayed. Expectations for the character pattern increase in the order of "change," "ossu," "spirit," "continuation," and "one-shot deadly." In the effect mode of the step-up notice 2, first, the screen is filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the ink color and the fill variation in the step-up notice 1 in the state where the characters are displayed. After that, when the screen is completely filled with ink, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the ink is gradually removed before the screen is completely filled with ink, and finally the ink is completely removed and the displayed characters disappear. It will end up.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black ink by the step-up notice 2, and the effect of gradually removing the black ink is executed from this state. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern of ink sticking. For example, if the ink is applied from only one place on the lower left, the expectation is low, and if the ink is applied from two places on the lower left and upper left, the ink is applied from three places on the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The degree of expectation is higher in the order of going, and the degree of expectation is the highest when the ink sticks from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of brushing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the characters are brushed, the development effect is successful and the process shifts to the step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if the characters are not displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, it means that the development effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final stage of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has higher expectations in the order of "game", "opportunity", "development", "enthusiastic fight", "fierce heat", and "happiness". In addition, the character color is expected to be higher in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

Subsequently, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the effect SW will be described. FIGS. 353 to 355 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 353 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the effect contents and the effect SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 354 (A) is a step-up notice 1 for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled with black ink from four directions of the screen. Step-up notice 1 for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled with. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image are shown. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

FIG. 353 shows all the effects produced in the step-up notice 1, and is divided into each drawing (lower left of ink drawing, upper left of ink drawing, lower right of ink drawing, upper right of ink drawing, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the content of the effect are described in correspondence with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is a total of 16 effects for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and a total of 10 effects for each of the character failure and character success drawing categories, for a total of 26 effects. It has become. In addition, the effects that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing category are always one, and only one of the drawing categories "character failure" and "character success" is executed, so the maximum effect that can be executed simultaneously in step-up notice 1. The number is 5 effects in total of the drawing category "lower left", the drawing category "upper left", the drawing category "lower right", the drawing category "upper right" and the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success".

Further, the method of determining the effect of each drawing category will be specifically described according to the advance notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1. First, a lottery for step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the content of the production related to ink drawing. Specifically, the production contents related to ink drawing are the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing divisions "lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right", and the color of the ink that appears from the selected place where the ink appears. Become. In addition, it is either the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success" and the content of the character displayed at this time.

Next, the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 drawing image when the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described with reference to FIG. 354 (A). .. As mentioned above, the total number of effects of step-up notice 1 is 26, but the step-up notice 1 LCD effect scheduler data includes one for each drawing category of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only the production data of is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the figure of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. Black ink spreads from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen at the same time, and the characters of "change" are dimmed in the drawing category "character failure" and the drawing category "character success", and then the drawing category "character". "Failure" erases the "change" character, and at the same time, the "change" character is clearly displayed in the drawing category "character success".

Further, in FIG. 354 (B), the drawing category "lower left" is "red", the drawing category "upper left" is "none", the drawing category "lower right" is "none", and drawing is performed according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1. Issue a command with the category "upper right" being "red", the drawing category "character failure" being "spirit", and the drawing category "character success" being "none". As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left", red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right", and the characters "spirit" are displayed faintly in the drawing category "character failure". , The character of "Ki" is deleted in the drawing category "Character failure".

At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the corresponding effect is set to ON according to the content of each issued lottery command. Specifically, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left" is set to "red", "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper right" is set to "red". Then, "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "Character failure is enthusiastic". On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper left" is "none", the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower right" is "none", and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "character success" is "none". Since no effect is performed on the command, none of the effect switches is set to ON and is set to OFF.

As a result, red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left" and red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right" from all the effects of step-up notice 1, and the drawing category "character failure" is "spirit". It is realized that the effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON according to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 355, the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data of FIG. 354 (A) is used to perform an effect according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. 355 (B). The mechanism for replacing the production will be explained.

FIG. 355 is a diagram illustrating a master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing category in the present embodiment and an effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. More specifically with reference to the lower left ink effect replacement group in FIG. 355, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. It becomes the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to. On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which the white ink spreads from the lower left, the corresponding effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI", and the index number on the CGROM of the video in which the red ink spreads from the lower left. The effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left ink effect replacement table. Further, the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command for drawing the effect, and is defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Using the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" as a trigger (when detected), a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left ink effect replacement table is referred to, all the effect SWs registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. do. In this embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left" is "red", and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, so that the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" corresponds to "from the lower left". The moving image number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

The replacement program function called by the callback delivers the moving image number on the red ink CGROM from the specified lower left to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 corresponds to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above video number, use the video number on the CGROM corresponding to the video in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function to create the display list command. create.

The features of the replacement of the effect by the callback of the present embodiment are the low-level control structure (in this embodiment, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the data structure that is easy to change and suitable for tooling) to the high-level control structure (the present embodiment). By calling a program function for replacement (a program function that is unsuitable for change but enables complicated processing) by calling back, it is possible to separate the detection of the timing of replacement and the replacement control, which is simple. It is possible to perform complicated processing using the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is a data structure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for calling back (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of this embodiment by calling back, a structure for performing complicated control on the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side has a complicated liquid crystal display effect scheduler. When the effect control is realized by analyzing and executing the data, the complexity of the program code processed on the LCD 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side increases, and when adding a new function or changing the function, be sure to do so. It is necessary to change the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the problem occurs due to the control change, but also the function that was operating normally before the change is affected and a new problem occurs. There is a risk that it will end up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the callback is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for calling back (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW), and the plurality of executions by the callback are executed. Judgment whether execution is possible or processing content in the callback function of. By creating the corresponding callback function to realize a single function, it is not necessary to change the LCD effect scheduler data structure even when adding a new function or changing the function, and the call corresponding to the new function This can be achieved by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. Therefore, the range of influence due to the change or addition of the function is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting other callback functions and causing a malfunction is reduced. Also, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is centrally executed by a single large program, the person who performs the execution analysis by using multiple callback functions and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to realize each function. However, the structure and structure of the program can be simplified.

In this embodiment, the description is made specifically for the replacement of the effect, but the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not only the replacement of the effect, but also the replacement of the symbol, the control of the display or non-display of the effect, and the drawing target. It can also be applied to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

Here, about the purpose of defining the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in both the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table. explain. If the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is always the LCD effect scheduler. It exists only on the data, and the replacement effect SW corresponding to the master and the index number on the corresponding CGROM exist only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined to be several thousand. Consistency between the index number of the video (image) on the CGROM and the production SW under the circumstances where the game specifications are frequently changed or the game specifications are added between the planning and development of the game machine and the introduction to the market. Is extremely difficult to maintain.

Regarding the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be erroneously defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement may be erroneously defined. It is possible that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, there is a difference between the command value of the effect lottery, the effect SW on the replacement table, and the number of data of the index number on the corresponding CGROM, and the effect is replaced with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. .. Since expectations are set for each of the productions, it is possible that a production dedicated to big hits that does not appear due to fluctuations in the deviation may appear, which is a fatal problem for a gaming machine. By defining the effect replacement table including the master effect SW and the index number on the corresponding CGROM as in the present embodiment, it is possible to confirm the consistency by comparing the total number of effects and the replacement table. Become. Further, in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, any data in the replacement table can be defined without any problem, so that the control method is extremely unlikely to cause a problem. In the present embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and is always replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and the effect is drawn.

In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the black ink is gradually erased from a part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed and the ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends as it is. In both success and failure, the effect of gradually erasing the ink from the vertices of the display area is executed, so the effect SW flags for four types of drawing patterns that gradually erase the ink for each vertex. (Layer) is defined. In addition, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

The composition and control method of the upper left ink replacement group, the lower right ink replacement group, the upper right ink replacement group, the character failure effect replacement group, and the character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group shown in FIG. 355 are the same as those of the lower left ink replacement group. Is.

In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter, the effect SW flag (layer) may be defined according to the mode in the animation of the displayed characters, or one type of effect SW flag (layer) may be defined. Only the layer) may be defined, and the type of character animation may be set by the parameter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are produced by individually defining the drawing effect pattern for each ink appearance position or character content and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. It can be executed or a combination of effects can be executed. Since switching and combining the effects can only be done by individually switching the settings of the effect SW flag, the planner who configures the effect can simply set the parameters with the tool without the need for technology such as creating a new program. It is possible to realize various variations of production. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize dozens of types of drawing patterns only by combining four types of drawing patterns depending on the appearance position of black ink and two types of result display patterns of development effects. As a result, the types of programs to be developed can be minimized, the development efficiency of the effect control program of the gaming machine can be improved, and the inspection of the developed effect control program can be made more efficient to improve the quality. Can be done.

[20-3. Overview of control based on production switch]
Next, the outline of the control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 356 is a diagram illustrating a control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and in particular, shows an evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In the present embodiment, first, when the main command (main control command) that triggers the start of the effect is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues the peripheral control inside to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. The issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issuance command is a command for executing a notice lottery or executing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internally issued command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether or not the data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command string of the effect SW determination data, and if the matching data exists, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command string. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

The effect SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command sequence for turning on the effect SW. The effect SW judgment command sequence is not a fixed length, but it is possible to combine multiple command values, main control command values and sub-internal command values, and peripheral control internal issuance command values and peripheral control internal command values. .. For example, the fluctuation start specification command value and the probability state specification command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background specification command of the peripheral control internal issuance command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

By defining multiple commands side by side, for example, if the mini characters that are produced and displayed for each background are different even for the same mini character notice, the background command value is determined, and after the background is specified, the mini character command value is determined. For the first time, it will be possible to identify the production of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it will be necessary to make multiple judgments for the number of commands. On the other hand, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice side by side as in the present embodiment, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. It is not necessary to make a judgment multiple times, and even for an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, the corresponding effect can be specified in the same manner as the effect defined by a single command. Further, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, it is possible to simultaneously activate a plurality of effect SWs with a single command value.

The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, which is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs by the combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 356, when the command "0x103001" is received, the effect SW number 100 "LCDSW_LEFDW_S1" is registered in the effect SW determination data, so that the effect SW flag stored in the RAM is stored. Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 353 to 355, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding advance notice effect is executed. Is done.

Further, in the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. An example of these functions will be described below. FIG. 357 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function takes an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

LEDSW_TST is a function for determining whether or not the effect SW number is ON from a steady-state program or a called back program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a steady program or a called back program, instead of activating the effect SW by a command.

LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the effect SW from the steady-state program or the called back program. If the attribute of "all reset" is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW is based on the "reset target effect SW group ID" of the "effect SW information table" corresponding to the effect SW number. Set all effect SWs belonging to the group to OFF.

LEDSW_GET is a function that acquires the attribute information of the target effect SW from the steady-state program or the called back program. LCDSW_ATOR is a function to acquire the frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from the steady-state program or the called back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of production switch]
Next, an implementation example of control using the effect switch will be described. FIGS. 358 to 363 are diagrams showing a part of the program code for executing the control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each figure is written in C language.

As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set for all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, the callback is executed, the decision not to perform the specific process is made in the callback function, and the callback function is terminated.

FIG. 358 is a diagram illustrating details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code for defining the effect SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of effect SW control information. , (C) is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group.

The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A), and has an effect SW group ID, a reset target effect SW group ID, an effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), and an effect SW. Includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped by functions such as an effect SW for performing the same (similar) notice effect, an effect SW for hold display, and an effect SW for notification. ing. The effect SW group ID is represented by a bit, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for designating the effect SW group for setting the effect SW to OFF when "reset all effect SW" is specified in the "attrib bit assignment" described later. This makes it possible to collectively specify the effect SWs that cancel (reset) the processing at the same time when the effect SWs are switched. The reset target effect SW group ID is represented by bits like the effect SW group ID, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal display effect SW full reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive / active information. Further, the effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 358 (B), and the contents will be described below.

The passive (PASSIVE) / active (ACTIVE) information indicates an evaluation method of the effect SW, and is "PASSIVE" when the bit is "0" and "ACTIVE" when the bit is "1". In the passive mode, even if the command to activate the effect switch is received multiple times during the period in which the effect switch is defined, the drawing effect corresponding to the effect switch is performed only once, and in the active mode, the effect is produced in the period in which the effect switch is defined. If the command to activate the SW is received multiple times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect is received. Active is used when the drawing effect corresponding to the button press is displayed when the button is pressed multiple times within the button validity period.

The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call the default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. When "1" is set in the bit, the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

The replacement information is information that calls a callback function for effect replacement when the effect SW is evaluated. When the bit is set to "1", the predefined replacement callback function is called at the time of the effect SW evaluation defined for each display target, still image, and moving image in the LCD effect scheduler data. Is done.

The liquid crystal display SW full reset information is information that specifies whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to "1", the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the "reset target effect SW group ID" is set to OFF at the time of the effect SW evaluation.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 358 (A). As the effect SW command information address, the defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of the effect SW evaluation. The output command is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and the output command is used to control or execute a new effect SW.

The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which the data to be replaced is defined when "1" is set in the replacement information bit of the effect SW control information (when "with replacement" is specified). Address is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG. 361.

Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, it is managed as an effect group, such as when a plurality of related effect SWs are set. The effect group includes an effect SW group ID, an active effect SW head ID, an active effect SW number, a passive effect SW head ID, and a passive effect SW number.

The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effect SWs is the number of active effect SWs arranged from the effect SWs corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head of the passive effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SWs corresponding to the passive effect SW head IDs. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the effect SW group ID to be reset, when "effect SW full reset" is specified in "attrib bit assignment", the continuous effect belonging to the effect SW group ID. It is possible to set a plurality of passive effect SWs and a plurality of continuous active effect SWs to OFF at the same time.

FIG. 359 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 359, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number by using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to by using the effect SW number as an index.

By defining the effect SW number in an enumerated type in this way, it is not necessary to directly handle the effect SW number as a numerical value when setting or referring to the effect SW number in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the effect SW flag, and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON / OFF) the processing based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. “1” (ON) is set when the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, and “0” (OFF) is set when the effect SW is not executed.

The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 358 (A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read at the time of program execution and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. Further, the effect SW information table is stored in an array indexed by the effect SW number as in the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all the effect SWs is stored.

Subsequently, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for performing the effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. 358 (A). FIG. 361 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW replacement table information included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment and the program data defining the effect SW replacement table, and FIG. 361 shows the effect SW replacement table information, (B). ) Indicates an effect SW replacement table.

FIG. 361 (A) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. The effect SW replacement table information stores the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

The effect SW master data is the effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and in the case of "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1", the case where the black color is black corresponds to this (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, there is a case where the color of black ink is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

FIG. 361 (B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of the material number defined in the replacement table are defined, and in the present embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After defining the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In the present embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

As a specific replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement table information is referred to, and all the effect SW effect switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of rows of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to the line of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number that identifies a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer composition]
Next, the layer for displaying images and moving images will be described. The layer can be used for general purposes by dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of areas (layers, layers) and drawing the layer. For example, by separating the background layer, it is possible to draw in a common method even if the displayed character is changed.

In the present embodiment, by individually storing and managing a table (layer information table) for storing layer information, it is configured so that even if a part of the layer is changed, the other layers are not affected. Can be done.

FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background). For). The above-mentioned effect SW is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function is determined. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. Further, FIG. 363 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, in which (A) is the content of the layer information table (first half of the notice 1), and (B) is the layer information table (notice). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. Both the layer information tables 1 and 2 in the first half of the notice determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, like the layer information table for the background.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 362 (A), a layer information table for a background, a symbol display, a first half notice, a big hit effect, an accessory operation, a hold display, and the like is defined.

Further, FIG. 362 (B) shows a layer information table for the background, and in the production in the present embodiment, the sea background, the mountain background, and the river background are defined, and further, the background according to the game state (time reduction). Medium background, high accuracy medium background) are also defined. Furthermore, variations such as changing a part of the background color can be added by the effect SW.

FIG. 363 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice 1, in which a roulette notice, a blackout notice, and a window notice are defined, and a command for clearing the notice is also defined. FIG. 363 (B) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice 1, and a step-up notice, a button mini character notice, and a conversation notice are defined, and as in the case of the first half of the notice 1, the layer table for clearing the notice is defined. Is also defined. The layer table for clearing the notice is used to end the drawing of the notice executed in the layer table of each notice defined in the layer information table of each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined in the effect SW group ID for resetting the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and the “effect SW full reset” is defined in the “attrib bit assignment”. When the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the advance notice effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the reset target effect SW group ID are set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the effect SW is set. Is closed and hidden. The layer table for clearing the notice is empty data because it does not produce anything.

A record for terminating determination is stored at the end of the area allocated to the list for storing the layer table and the table for storing layer information, and when the record for terminating determination is detected, it is determined that the data reading is completed. It becomes possible to do. This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (number of records) without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the advance notice effect using the liquid crystal display effect block data (common block) will be described by taking a step-up advance notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Production layer table / LCD production block data]
FIG. 364 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table and a liquid crystal display common block in the present embodiment, (A) is a liquid crystal layer table for step-up notice effect, and (B) is a liquid crystal display common block. The configuration of is shown.

As shown in FIG. 364 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the number of liquid crystal display common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal display common blocks are the liquid crystal display common blocks. It is defined as a pair with the total number of drawing frames and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (580) frames, the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. It is determined whether or not to execute the callback based on the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" and execute the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" based on the information of the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" in the callback function.

The liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is defined in the order of the effect switch, the total number of drawing frames, the loop start frame position, the playback time, and the liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 364 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal display blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set so that the number of steps can be increased or decreased by adding or deleting the liquid crystal display block. For example, when the step-up notice 5 is added, the data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the terminal.

The effect SW controls whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal effect block can be executed based on the set value, similarly to the effect SW defined in the layer table. The total number of drawing frames defines the total number of production frames of the liquid crystal display block. Explaining using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal display block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced in (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the reproduction of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" on the first line is completed.

The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position, and the playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the LCD effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". When loop reproduction is performed from the beginning or the middle of, the number of frames to be looped is added to the reproduction time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total reproduction time. Step-up notice 1 Since the playback time of the LCD production block of "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is (150) frames, if the latter 50 frames are looped twice after the playback of the LCD production block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, the playback time is the total playback time. This can be achieved by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50 × 2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. By using the loop playback function, it is possible to create an effect in which the symbol is not fixed and fluctuates during a pseudo-continuous effect.

Further, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of playback even though the total playback time and the playback time of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" of the present embodiment are the same is due to some problem. If the next effect common block is not executed, the drawing will not be updated, and in order to prevent the LCD screen from stopping, drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total playback time is exceeded.

In the present embodiment, when the effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 are executed, the control by the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is performed after the notice lottery related to the effects is executed on the peripheral control board 1530. Peripheral control internal commands related to the notice effect, step-up notice 1 command, step-up notice 2 command, and step-up notice 3 command are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

After setting the effect SW, the callback is executed based on all the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", and the callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and the liquid crystal display block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2", and "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON, so the LCD effect blocks "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" and "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU1" and "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU1" are executed, respectively. On the other hand, since "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" is set to OFF, "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4" is not executed. As described above, since it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal display blocks in the common block for liquid crystal display and control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal display block by using the effect SW, it is possible to execute a combination of a plurality of notices. In addition, it is possible to switch the display / non-display of each effect.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal display block of each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 365 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the liquid crystal display block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

As for the contents of the liquid crystal display block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal display block is defined. There are two types of functions, "LCD_NOP" and "LCD_NULL", and the liquid crystal display scheduler data, which are the number of execution frames, the function, or the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data. "LCD_NOP" is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and "LCD_NULL" is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal effect block.

Subsequently, a specific explanation will be given about the liquid crystal display block. Explaining with reference to the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", the leading (3) indicates that "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is three). In the next line, since the number of execution frames (120) is specified as "LCD_NOP", the weight is waited from the start of execution of the liquid crystal display block to the (120) frames. (120) After waiting between frames, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). After that, "LCD_NULL" in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is terminated.

As explained in FIG. 352, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage of the step-up notice, it is realized by using the weight of "LCD_NOP" to realize the execution of the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage. is doing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" does not perform weighting, and starts executing the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The liquid crystal display block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the weight by "LCD_NOP", waits for (120) frames, and then starts the execution of the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" to generate the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts execution when (120) frames have elapsed from the start of execution. As a result, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next stage.

Further, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal display effect scheduler data in the liquid crystal display effect block in chronological order, and when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is continuously defined, the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames. Is executed, and the LCD effect scheduler data in the next line is executed.

In the effect scheduler data of the step-up notice effect 2, after the total number of functions is defined, the function NOP for waiting while executing the step-up advance notice effect 1, the function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing the step-up advance notice effect 2, Finally, the function LCD_NULL that indicates the end of the scheduler data is defined. The step-up notice 3 and the step-up notice 4 are also described in the same manner.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal display scheduler data for the step-up notice effect has been explained above. Subsequently, an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting the operation of the effect button during the fluctuation of the design and operating the effect button within a predetermined period will be described.

[23-1. Button mini character production mode]
FIG. 366 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the button mini character effect of the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is executed when an execution lottery is performed when the main command is received or when the fluctuation starts, and when the winner is won. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated during the reception period of the button operation input, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half valid period and the second half valid period are set for the acceptance period of the button operation input, and the mini character is displayed in different modes.

Further explaining, when the execution lottery for the button mini character production is won and 90 frames (f) have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the first half of the button mini character is valid. The valid period of the first half of the button mini character is 90 frames, and an image (movie) prompting the button to be pressed is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the valid period of the first half of the button mini character. Button mini character If you operate the button during the first half of the valid period, the mini character will be displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, when the button is operated during the valid period of the first half of the button mini character, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as the first half of the second half of the button mini character. In FIG. 308, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character, but the character may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character. The character may be displayed in a different manner as long as possible.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as the first half of the button mini character. In FIG. 366, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character, but the character may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character. The character may be displayed in a different manner as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 367 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 367, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character effect has the number of LCD effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of LCD effect common blocks is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined as a pair with the number and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (180) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawing frames (150) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT", and the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002", first, the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" is executed during the (180) frame. After that, during the (150) frame, the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" is completed.

Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal display common block for the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines individual common blocks of the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal display common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” of FIG. 368 are the same as those of the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 364. The effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call the callback function to determine whether to execute the LCD effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effects that define the active attribute in the effect SW control information. It becomes SW. Therefore, the drawing effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the number of times the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines liquid crystal display effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal display effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 369 are the same as the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 307. Explaining the processing by each liquid crystal display block data, first, in the first half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is executed, and the weight is waited for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation. .. Subsequently, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the valid period of the first half of the button mini character is executed in (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is completed. In the latter half of the production, the "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the latter half of the button mini character is executed, and the weight is waited for (30) frames from the start of the fluctuation. After that, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the latter half valid period of the button mini character is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is terminated.

As described above, since the effect SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effect SWs, the effect SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are set to ON while the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" are being executed. If the command to be issued is issued multiple times, the drawing effects corresponding to the effect SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are executed as many times as they are issued. In addition, a callback is always generated every frame by the effect SW, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control when the button is pressed is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame even after the button press control is completed until the liquid crystal display scheduler data execution is completed. Control to set the period during which the callback is executed as the button validity period without separately determining the button validity period by creating the LCD effect scheduler data that draws the effect during the button validity period and controlling it with the active effect SW. Is possible. For example, by repeatedly hitting a button, the number of times of repeated hits can be counted, and an effect corresponding to the number of times can be executed. Further, the lamp can be turned on according to the button operation by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function that controls the lamp in the callback function. Further, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the accessory, it is possible to execute the operation according to the number of button operations and execute the scheduler data to return to the initial position after the button operation valid period ends. The procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position is, for example, to wait by "LCD_NOP" until the button operation valid period ends, and then execute an effect block including a function to return the accessory to the initial position.

[24. LCD effect scheduler for designs]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing contents according to the game state and the expected degree of the variable display game to be the notice target. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbol to be variablely displayed in the variable display game when a predetermined condition such as a gaming state is satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and reels in which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are assigned to each column. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a mode corresponding to the gaming state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

The display of the identification symbol is updated every frame, and the effect SW is assigned, as in the case of the advance notice effect. In the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image for displaying the identification symbol is defined as master data. .. A reel number is defined in the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game status and effect. For example, if the identification symbols displayed in the mountain background, river background, and sea background are different, the left symbol of the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, and the left symbol of the river background is R3, the middle symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol of the mountain background is R6, the middle symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each number of reel arrangements of the identification symbol. What is the reel arrangement? The design of the identification symbol and the identification symbol when the identification symbols are displayed in the order of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 and then returned to 1 to be displayed. The reel index defines the total number and the display order of the identification symbols. It is possible to define multiple reel indexes.

Further, the table for replacing the identification symbol includes a replacement table for the identification symbol corresponding to the reel number and the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the replacement table of the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement is defined for each reel index.

The identification symbol is replaced by using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. In the reel index replacement work number table, the work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index are defined. It is displayed on the reel replacement work when it can be recognized that the identification symbol is stopped or stopped by the player, such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the confirmed symbol number value of the identification symbol. The identification symbol number value is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of fluctuation according to the effect content.

Explaining the specification of the data for replacing the identification symbol, when the callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number in the callback function for replacing the identification symbol is used. Based on this, the target reel index replacement work number is specified from the reel index replacement work number table. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the display number of the identification symbols produced in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is specified in the replacement table of the identification symbol, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. Specify using the index replacement work number.

Further, in the replacement of the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal display scheduler data is not used even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is selected in the same way as the effect replacement. , The display list command is always created using the index number on the CGROM of the master defined in the replacement table, and the effect content is drawn.

Further, by replacing the identification symbol every frame, it is possible to immediately return to the normal display even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the generation of noise or the like. In addition, by setting the reel according to the game state, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the content of the identification symbol even if a problem occurs in the replacement of the identification symbol due to an error. , It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

[25. Callback Timing]
Subsequently, the timing of occurrence of the callback at the time of detecting the effect SW will be described. In the present embodiment, the drawing classification can be determined by the parameters passed to the function in the callback function to be called back.

FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of a drawing division that can be determined in the callback function at the time of executing the callback by the effect SW of the present embodiment.

Callback occurs before the start of LCD A drawing for "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A" and after the start of LCD A drawing for "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A". Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B" causes a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B" causes a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. Liquid crystal A and liquid crystal B are separate liquid crystals, and by making it possible to determine the completion of drawing before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, drawing is performed on the liquid crystal B when the drawing of the liquid crystal A is completed, or the drawing of the liquid crystal B is completed. It becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A as an opportunity.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before all drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after all drawing is completed. By making a judgment before the start of drawing, the frame buffer can be initialized with the required background color before drawing, and by making a judgment at the end of drawing, it is possible to instruct other production devices to execute the effect when the drawing is completed. It will be possible.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before the drawing of the corresponding layer starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after the drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. A predetermined process can be executed before or after the drawing of a specific layer is started or completed. For example, if a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing the notification layer by making a determination before the start of layer drawing, it is possible to enlarge and draw the display of the notification having a high priority. In addition, by making a judgment after the start of layer drawing, the effect is drawn around the symbol drawn at the timing when the symbol with high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, so that the symbol with high expectation is drawn. It is possible to display the effect around the symbol only when is stopped.

As described above, it is possible to specify the drawing division and execute a predetermined process before or after the start or completion of drawing. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 370, "LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK" can generate a callback before the start of common block drawing, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK" can generate a callback after the common block drawing is completed. By making a judgment before the start of drawing the common block, the execution of a specific liquid crystal display block corresponding to a single effect constituting the liquid crystal display common block can be stopped to stop drawing the effect, or the liquid crystal display common block can be stopped. By making a determination after the drawing is completed, it is possible to execute a liquid crystal display common block different from the liquid crystal display common block scheduled to be executed in advance at the start of the fluctuation.

Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR" generates a callback before the start of drawing the liquid crystal effect block in the liquid crystal display common block, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR" generates a callback after the drawing of the liquid crystal effect block is completed. Liquid crystal display block By making a determination before the start of drawing, it is possible to change the liquid crystal display block to be executed based on the result of external input by the player. Further, by making a determination after the start of drawing the liquid crystal display block, it is possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal display block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal display block that draws a single effect. Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST" can generate a callback before the start of drawing the still image and the moving image in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST" can generate the callback after the drawing of the still image and the moving image is completed. It is possible to replace various effects by making a judgment before the start of drawing a still image or moving image. Further, by making a determination after the drawing of the still image or the moving image is completed, it is possible to add the drawing of the effect according to the replacement contents of the various effects.

As described above, the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing division, so it is very important to determine the drawing division in the various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal display schedule data for each liquid crystal display block, and an image or a moving image is drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the classification of the effect. Will be done. Further, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer.

When the effect is executed, an image or the like is drawn in parallel on a plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal display scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background of the background layer is drawn, and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Further, drawing is performed by the step-up notice 1 on the notice layer (notice_first half 1 layer). FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers at the time of executing the advance notice effect of the present embodiment.

At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer, but if it is attempted to manage these effect SWs individually, the processing may become complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SWs are grouped and managed for each layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the division of the effect.

For example, the effect SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 371, the effect SW group background, the effect SW group symbol, and the effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and the division of the effect.

In this way, by grouping and managing the effect SW, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, when changing the currently displayed background and the pattern display and hold display that match the background to another background when a new fluctuation starts, the background layer, pattern layer, and hold layer are divided according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to hide the symbol display and hold display that match the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and hold display that match the new background on the corresponding layer, multiple layers can be displayed. It is possible to switch the drawing only for the necessary effect display from the plurality of effect displays displayed by superimposing the layers.

In addition, in the effect that spans the game state, for example, in the big hit effect from the start of the change to the end of the change, the design is hidden and the background is changed to the big hit effect. It is also possible to display continuously. In such control, the effect group to be hidden is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which all the effect SW resets are specified is set to the liquid crystal display common block at the start of fluctuation. It can be realized by defining it as a block common to the liquid crystal display at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, in order to streamline the control of the complicated game production, all the productions are managed as common blocks in block units of a certain length. As a result, the effect block is selected according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the advance notice lottery, and by drawing based on the selected effect block, a series of effects such as a variable display of the symbol and a big hit are realized, and complicated control is performed. It realized the control to synchronize the drawing contents with the sub-effects such as the accessory, the lamp, and the sound output without doing it. In the common block, a period divided at a predetermined timing is set from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to the finalization of the symbol, and these periods are assigned to the fluctuation pattern, for example, corresponding to the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation. It was set according to the fluctuation time of the symbol.

With this configuration, the common block can be used universally with a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Furthermore, by ensuring the independence between the advance notice effect executed in the first half variation and the advance notice effect executed in the second half variation, the degree of freedom in combining the common blocks can be increased.

However, as described above, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize an effect that continues from the start of the change to the end of the change only by combining the effect blocks of a certain length. When executing such an effect that spans a plurality of periods, in addition to the fact that the preceding common block and the succeeding common block are associated with each other and the versatility is reduced, each common block is executed independently. Therefore, there is a possibility that the control becomes complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the production. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to individually create and control the program code instead of setting the program data.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the present embodiment, not only the variable display of the symbol and the series of big hit effects are performed by combining the effect blocks of a certain length in all the effects, but also the length of the effect blocks. Is exceptionally configured to allow the production block length according to the production period, not a fixed length. Further, by making it possible to draw by combining effect blocks having different effect times and drawing an effect block that straddles the combined effect blocks at the same time, it is possible to realize a drawing effect that continues from the start of the change to the end of the change.

An effect that spans a plurality of periods includes, for example, a countdown effect that counts down a number when the symbol starts to change and continues the countdown display from the first half change to the second half change. FIG. 372 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block spanning a plurality of periods of the present embodiment, where (A) is a symbol display and advance notice effect execution timing, and (B) is a liquid crystal display notice effect block using the common block. , The configuration of the liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block spanning a plurality of periods is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 372, the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” corresponds to the first half fluctuation being “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the second half fluctuation being “normal short reach”. As shown in FIG. 372 (A), in the first half variation, the step-up notice and the BTN logo accessory fall notice are executed, and in the second half variation, the cut-in notice and the group notice are executed. The contents of each notice production are as described above. In addition, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

In FIG. 372 (B), the liquid crystal display block data of the notice effect (step-up notice, BTN logo character fall notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block, and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice. The composition of the effect block of the countdown notice to be executed until the end time is shown. The block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

The effect block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data is started, the liquid crystal effect notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the latter half fluctuation is completed after the end of the liquid crystal effect notice block data. .. The function NOP that waits until the LCD effect notice block data starts is the NOP that is executed before the step-up notice starts, and the function NOP that waits until the second half fluctuation ends is the NOP that is executed after the group notice ends. The same waiting time is set.

As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the effect block, it is possible to operate the common block more flexibly. Further, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of the execution timing of other effect blocks being shifted due to the exception setting. It should be noted that the control of the exception common block is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW in the same manner as the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
For the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing, the drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is taken out from the frame buffer and stored in the storage area for capture of the built-in sound source VDP1540a separately from the frame buffer. So, I was doing processing such as reuse of images and transformation / additional drawing. In this way, by temporarily storing the drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various production expressions have been efficiently realized.

FIG. 373 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which an image is written in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 373, conventionally, the image drawn on each layer is superimposed on the frame buffer and written, and then output to the display device.

Specifically, first, the moving image or still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed on the preview layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Finally, the moving image or still image related to the reserved layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command, and drawing data for one frame is created.

After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to the capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a. After adding a new effect around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, it is written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

By doing so, it is possible to easily create the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame simply by adding an effect to the created drawing data. However, in such image conversion by the conventional technique, only image conversion for one frame of drawing data can be realized, and in addition to the addition of new drawing elements for one frame of the liquid crystal drawing screen, one frame of drawing data can be realized. It is limited to enlarging or reducing the entire LCD drawing screen. It is not possible to perform image conversion on the drawing elements drawn on each layer on the capture buffer or on each drawing element in the layer.

The reason why the image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each effect, such as the background, the pattern, and the notice, are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order. It will be overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since the drawing element is a set of colored dots (points) when it is drawn on the frame buffer, even if you try to extract the drawing element with a rectangle, it will be overwritten by another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element of the overwritten part is lost.

Nowadays, due to the improvement of VDP processing capacity, it is less necessary to reuse the image data for one screen of the drawn liquid crystal display, but the expression of the production is diversified for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. Therefore, it was expected that the load would increase to execute the complicated drawing process.

In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and perform a more diverse effect, the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. When newly drawing the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display instead of adding, the image can be dynamically changed during drawing in each effect display unit that constitutes the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display. A complicated production expression is realized by adding a new drawing.

Specifically, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is included in the LCD effect scheduler data for displaying by the effect block. Incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When changing the image, instead of drawing the corresponding effect block in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the recalled program function on the frame buffer, it was assigned to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a separately from the frame buffer. Draws on the off-screen buffer (temporary storage of image display information). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image only for a specific notice, adding a new image, and replacing the effect only for the background, the image can be changed for the image in which multiple effects are superimposed, and the new image can be changed. Additions can be realized.

Hereinafter, a configuration in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the image is written in the frame buffer will be specifically described. FIG. 374 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer and then writing it to the frame buffer in the present embodiment.

As described above, one or a plurality of image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers, which are different from the frame buffer, are allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a. Then, image conversion is performed with the image conversion buffer, and complicated image conversion is possible by combining the image converted on one or a plurality of off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

Further explaining, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data constituting each layer corresponding to the effect and each liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data, and is embedded when creating the display list command at the time of liquid crystal drawing. The callback function is called by the callback based on the effect SW, and the image conversion is performed in the callback function.

In FIG. 374, first, before starting drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. By doing so, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

Subsequently, before starting drawing of the symbol layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the symbol layer, an effect is added to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be added to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Subsequently, before starting drawing of the advance notice layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when the drawing of all the effect elements related to the advance notice layer is completed, the display list command for rotating the advance notice drawing of each effect element of the advance notice layer is executed in the function called back based on the effect SW. create. By transmitting this display list command, each notice rotated in the off-screen buffer B is drawn, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Finally, all the effect elements of the reserved layer are written in the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed on the entire screen, but on each layer drawing unit, the drawing element unit constituting the layer, and the image conversion regardless of the order of drawing in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

The present embodiment is characterized in that a callback based on the same effect SW is performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within the period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timing are as described with reference to FIG. 370 described above.

Further, by performing image conversion by a callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is the target of image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of fluctuation-related drawing, the image is based on the lottery result value of the advance notice lottery and the result of interactive operation by the user's external input at the timing of creating the display list command that draws the image to be converted. It becomes possible to determine the conversion method.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on the animation data stored in the CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source to perform drawing at the time of executing the game effect. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in the buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command creation for one screen is completed, the external request DMA (transfer means). Was used to send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

However, at present, as the production specifications become complicated and the processing load increases, the processing time such as the advance notice lottery processing at the start of fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer synthesis processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems and the motor system The processing time of the motor data creation process due to the increase in the number is also increasing. Since the processing time of peripheral control such as production is executed in a fixed cycle, if the above-mentioned high-load processing is executed in duplicate, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle. ..

Exceptionally, if the processing cannot be completed within the cycle, if the processing cannot be completed within the cycle steadily, the game control by the main control device and the effect control by the peripheral control device should be synchronized based on the processing cycle. There was a risk that the progress of the game and the production of the game by each production device would be separated from each other, and the interest of the game would be significantly reduced.

Therefore, it is necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by reducing the time required for the processing with a high load in the peripheral control processing such as the effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drawing process having a relatively high load in the peripheral control process, particularly the above-mentioned processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating a native display list command that can be processed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, is set. A means for reducing the processing time and shortening the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device to a VDP1540a with a built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 375 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 375, first, various liquid crystal display scheduler data are acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information (parameter values corresponding to the VDP register number and register number) related to the display list command to be transmitted to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that can be executed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. The converted VDP native display list commands are temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Further, when the callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c as needed.

Then, in the process of processing the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the display list transfer to the external request DMA. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

When the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source receives the transferred VDP native display list command, it temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is changed from the buffer to VDP1540a by using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle in which the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting the enormous amount of liquid crystal display scheduler data for one screen into the VDP native display list command group is a heavy processing load. If a single gaming machine is configured to have multiple VDPs from different manufacturers, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is an intermediate data format, is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each manufacturer. It becomes possible.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is applied in which a part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 376 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring the display list command group in the present embodiment to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 376, first, the display list transfer setting is set to the external request DMA by the liquid crystal display effect scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the same manner as when the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the converted VDP native display list command group. And, it is composed of the interrupt display list command.

The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal display scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP1540a based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal display effect scheduler display list selection management module. The sound source built-in VDP1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

The built-in sound source VDP1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image in the frame buffer. Further, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, and a transfer interruption request is generated for the external request DMA. After that, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU1511a.

When the peripheral control MPU1511a detects an interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the interrupt processing module determines that the interrupt factor is an interrupt by an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. In the callback function, the display is replaced and the design is replaced by referring to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal display scheduler data. The method of replacing the effect is the same as the description using FIG. 361 and the like described above, and the method of replacing the symbol is also the same as the description using the above-mentioned FIG. 361 and the like. In the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the corresponding effect SW are defined. The replacement information is confirmed by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the confirmed replacement information, and the command is transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP1540a. After that, the peripheral control MPU1511a transmits a display list command for resuming display list analysis to the sound source built-in VDP1540a. The sound source built-in VDP1540a analyzes the display list command for restarting the display list analysis, generates a transfer restart request for the external request DMA, and restarts the analysis of the display list command.

By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without any conversion of the VDP native display list related to all the effects other than the replacement. Instead, it is possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP1540a using an external request DMA (transfer means).

With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU1511a associated with the display of the image, and it is possible to speed up the image processing. Further, since the used area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list command group, and the infrequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed by the conventional procedure. As a result, the processing of the frequently used display list command can be shortened, so that the processing speed can be increased as a whole and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. In addition, display list commands corresponding to highly versatile images (moving images) are stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and different image processing depending on the model and version is performed by the conventional procedure to improve development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
The processors (CPU, MPU) used in the game control and peripheral control (effect control) of the gaming machine can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used in a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, each of which has a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. .. The floating-point type is a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and has sizes of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

Whether the processor used for peripheral control of the game machine is a CISC processor or a RISC processor, the data in the memory (ROM, RAM) is stored in 1-byte units at all addresses, and the data stored in all the addresses can be read and written. It is a machine. The address for reading and writing a plurality of bytes of data is not limited to this. When the processor reads multiple bytes of data, it always reads from the byte boundary, and an alignment violation occurs when the access crosses the byte boundary. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor, but for example, the execution of the program is delayed due to multiple memory accesses instead of being able to continue the processing, or the processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of a run-time exception. Relax.

However, in the current development of a game machine, when a program for controlling a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being conscious of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur during program execution, and the program execution speed may decrease. In peripheral control of a gaming machine, it is necessary to complete all the processes within a predetermined processing cycle, so that the decrease in the execution speed of the program may become a big problem. In particular, since the production of a gaming machine is composed of a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and various information is stored in different types of data types. The data structure is adopted.

In order to solve the above problems, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure composed of a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored in the memory when the data corresponding to the data structure is stored. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area that stores. This adjusts the access start position of the data by the processor and arranges the information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address to prevent the occurrence of alignment violation and prevent the program execution speed from slowing down. Can be done. Adjusting the alignment for the data structures on all ROMs and RAMs is a huge task, so the load on the processor is heavy and the processing time is long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and RAM related to the conversion process, the control process related to the drawing of the liquid crystal, the lamp control process, and the like. In addition, there is no problem in adjusting the alignment other than the above-mentioned processing.

[Help image to promote understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the multiple expected effects (such as the notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect pattern determination or a notice effect determination is performed, the effect content according to the result of the determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the variation due to the decorative pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is performed. The effect will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

However, when such an expected effect is realized as a background depiction (background notice), it basically has a degree of effect such as "what numerical value should be set to the ratio of appearing an image with a high degree of expectation". You can only do it. Therefore, the fundamental problem such as "it will be difficult to have a sense of expectation for a big hit unless an image with a high degree of expectation (expected production) appears" has not been solved yet.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined to perform a special effect as a result of the advance notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background is depicted. It is possible to execute a process of displaying the background image used in the above in a special mode different from the original image data, and when the background image is displayed in the special mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the background image is not displayed in the special mode ( It is possible to suggest that the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) is high.

Here, as the "process to display in a special mode", for example,
-Processing to display the original image data as rotation processing data rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation around any (or an appropriate combination) of the x, y, z axes in the display area, etc.)
-It is possible to exemplify processing such as displaying the original image data as mosaic processing data with a predetermined degree of "blurring".

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the original image data is slightly processed (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.) and then performed. It is decided to dare to perform a special effect to display this (displayed in a special mode). With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to definitely detect and recognize the fact even if a special effect is performed in which the original image data is slightly processed. However, in exchange for this, even if the special production is not performed, it is possible to remember the feeling and illusion that "maybe the special production is being executed". Therefore, even if the state in which the image with high expectation (special effect) does not appear is continued, it is expected that the expectation for the big hit is appropriately maintained.

However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status of such "processing to be displayed in a special mode", it will be difficult to recognize even the possibility of a high expectation situation. In the end, the meaning of performing a special production may be lost.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment displays a help image as to whether or not the "process for displaying in a special mode" is being executed in response to an operation by the player. It is possible to execute the process of making it. According to such a configuration, since the help image can be displayed according to the operation by the player, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed. It is expected that the decrease in the amount of the image will be suppressed, and that the expectation will be maintained favorably.

However, the "help image" according to this explanatory example does not clearly indicate whether or not the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is being executed, but intentionally includes recognition difficulty. ing. Even if it does not seem that the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed, it is not possible to be sure because it is intentionally made to have such recognition difficulty. Will be able to be left behind, and it will be possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

FIG. 377 shows a display example in the effect display device 1600 when the state is changed between the non-game state in which the game is not executed (during the demo screen, etc.) and the game execution state in which the game is executed. ..

FIG. 377 (a) shows a display example in the effect display device 1600 when the game is not executed and is in a non-game state (during a demo screen, etc.). As shown in FIG. 377 (a), in the effect display device 1600 when in a non-gaming state, a character image PG (here, in this case, which is useful for checking "whether a special effect is being executed" is used. A guide image AG suggesting that a character imitating a penguins) can be made to appear by operating a predetermined operating means (operation button 410 or the like) is displayed. In this explanatory example, the explanatory text and the character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG, respectively.

When a start prize is generated and a game (change of a special symbol according to a big hit determination) is started in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a), the effect display device 1600 first obtains FIG. 377 (b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in. At the same time, the variable effect by the decorative pattern SZ is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). In this way, by automatically hiding the guide image AG when the game is started, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the performance when the game is in the execution state. The existence of the character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguins) can be suitably appealed.

FIG. 377 (c) shows a display example in the effect display device 1600 when the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is completed (stop display).

If the hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the guide image AG is hidden by digesting the hold information and newly starting the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ. The production situation shown in FIG. 377 (b) will reappear in the same state. On the other hand, if the hold information does not remain in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the state is again shifted to the non-gaming state (during the demo screen, etc.). That is, in this case, the guide image AG is based on the fact that the game is not newly started for a predetermined time after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is finished (stop display). The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a)) will reappear. In the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be left stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

The "process of displaying in a special mode" according to this effect example is a state in which the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern" (when a predetermined determination result is obtained in the effect determination). It can be executed when the specific effect image appears (predetermined timing in the specific effect pattern).

FIG. 378 shows an expected effect in which the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern", and the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image. A display example in the effect display device 1600 in the state of being is shown.

That is, in this effect example, at least when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed, the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It has become possible to execute a process of slightly rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) and then displaying them (processing of displaying them in a special mode). There is. When the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "process to be displayed in a special mode" has been executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "process to be displayed in a special mode" has not been executed is displayed. The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when it is displayed.

More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the "process of displaying in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) are the original image data. It is displayed up to. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (b), each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) is rotated to the left three times and then displayed. The process (process to display in a special mode) is executed, and in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c), the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) are 6 degrees to the left of each original image data. The process of displaying these after performing the rotation processing (processing of displaying them in a special mode) is being executed.

As is clear from FIGS. 378 (a) to (c), each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) even when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is performed. Only a small amount of rotation is applied to the image. In particular, in the same figure, it is possible to compare and see between FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (c), but in the actual production, FIG. 378 (a) according to the result of the production determination. )-(C) are displayed and cannot be compared between them. Therefore, even when FIGS. 378 (b) and 378 (c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that the state is displayed in the special mode, but the state is displayed in the special mode. It is expected that the player will be aware of a certain possibility (possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 378 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special manner. It is difficult to be sure of this, and it is expected that there will be a degree of hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) such as "may be in a state of being displayed in a special manner".

It should be noted that the process of rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displaying them (process of displaying them in a special mode). ) May be executed as a process of separately performing rotation processing on each original image data and then displaying the original image data, or after converting each original image data into one image. It may be executed as a process of rotating and displaying the image of.

Further, regarding FIGS. 378 (b) and 378 (c), when the image shown in FIG. 378 (c) is displayed, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears more than when the image shown in FIG. 378 (b) is displayed. It may be possible to have a relationship that increases. Alternatively, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed, FIG. 378 (a) is displayed once and then displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes momentarily in the order of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c). You may let it. Alternatively, both FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) do not necessarily have to be prepared, and only one of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) may be displayed.

However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to judge the implementation status regarding such "processing to be displayed in a special mode", the meaning of performing such a special effect is lost. It could be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, at least when the "expected effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed, the operation button 410 is performed. It is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether or not a "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed by an operation for a predetermined operating means such as.

In FIG. 379, the help image is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted in the state where the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image” is performed. A display example of the time effect display device 1600 is shown.

That is, in this effect example, an operation (operation button) by the player is performed at least when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed (see FIG. 378). When 410 etc. are performed, a character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguin) that is useful for checking "whether a special effect (here, tilt effect) is being executed" is used as a help image. It is designed to be displayed.

More specifically, when an operation (operation button 410 or the like) by the player is performed in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (a) appears, and FIG. 378 ( If an operation (operation button 410, etc.) is performed by the player while in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (b) will appear, and the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c) will appear. When an operation by the player (operation button 410 or the like) is performed, the situation shown in FIG. 379 (c) appears.

However, as is clear from FIGS. 379 (a) to 379, when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be useful whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed. , It is not specified whether or not the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed. Because it is intentionally made to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems that the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed, it becomes possible to be strongly aware of the possibility. Even if it seems that the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is not being executed, it cannot be assured that hope for the feasibility of the process can be left and the expectation can be maintained. It will be possible.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 379 (a) to 379, whether or not the character image PG (help image) according to this effect example is in a state in which the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed. Regardless of the mode of execution, it is possible to display only one mode in which the position is predetermined and the ruler is held so as to hold the ruler in the horizontal direction. In this way, an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" and is displayed so as to extend in the horizontal direction is made to appear by an operation by the player. (Here, a ruler) can be made to function as a guide image (help image) as to whether or not a "special effect (here, tilt effect) is being executed".

In particular, in this production example, the position overlapping with the image (princess character) to be executed in the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is not affected by the "process to be displayed in a special mode" and is in the horizontal direction. A guideline image (here, a ruler) that is displayed so as to extend to is made to appear. Therefore, by checking the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) to which the special processing is executed, it can be further useful for determining whether the special processing is being executed. become.

That is, in such an effect example, the special effect to which the "process of displaying in a special mode" is applied is a slightly tilted effect, and when the tilted effect is performed, the tilted effect is performed. Expectations are higher than if not done. Therefore, the player operates a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) in order to determine whether or not the tilting effect is being performed, but even if the operation is performed, " It is intentionally made to have a recognition difficulty that does not definitely notify whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. As a result, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility of high expectations when the tilting effect appears to be executed, and even if the tilting effect does not appear to be executed. It is expected to leave hope (maintain a sense of expectation) such as "may be in a state where a tilting effect is being executed".

Furthermore, the guideline image (here, a ruler) as to whether or not the "special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed" is subject to the "process of displaying in a special mode". One effect is to display at least a part of the image (decorative pattern SZ, background image) in a form that overlaps it. ), And it becomes possible to provide the fun of exhibiting the function for the first time by comparing it with the effect image (here, the princess character) that is already in the display state.

In addition, according to such a configuration, it becomes possible to advance the production without displaying the guideline image (here, the ruler) depending on the player's selection (depending on the operation). When you are not confident that you are in a state where the production (here, tilting production) is being executed, you can enjoy various ways of playing, such as not intentionally performing operations by the player. Become.

In this production example, the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed as the "process of rotating the original image data and then displaying it", but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the original image data, the image data created based on the original image data may be rotated and then displayed. Further, the image data may not be subjected to rotation processing, but may be subjected to other processing or conversion. In short, it is possible to execute a special process that converts an image into an image having a mode different from the normal mode and displays it, and when the special process can be executed, the player operates the target of the special process. As long as it is possible to display a guideline image that does not become, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned action and effect.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example, the "process of displaying in a special mode" can be executed when the "expected production in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed. However, depending on the result of the effect determination, it may be possible to execute the decorative symbol SZ a plurality of times within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation. At this time, when the number of times the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is executed is large, it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbol appears is higher than when the number of times is small.

Also, regarding the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here), not only when the "expected effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed, but also the decorative pattern SZ It may be possible to make it displayable by an operation by the player over the entire period from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in the stopped state, it may be possible to display it by an operation by the player.

That is, in this case, no matter what background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) to appear is executed. It becomes. However, considering that the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is a "comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image", the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image each time. It is clear that it depends on the type of. On the other hand, if the display position and display form of the character image PG (especially the ruler in this case) are changed according to the type of the background image each time, the character image PG will be used as a comparison reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the suspicion of lack of reliability may reduce the interest in the game. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be immutable and displayed as an absolute image regardless of the effect situation.

Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed between a plurality of predetermined display positions according to the operation by the player (operation button 410, etc.). .. However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

FIG. 380 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

FIG. 380 (a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this production situation, the player is suspicious that "the process of displaying in a special mode has been executed", and performs an operation to display the comparison reference image (reference image). If so, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at any of a plurality of predetermined display positions (see FIGS. 380 (b) to (d)) according to the mode of operation. Processing is performed.

For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is placed at the left side position (FIG. 380 (b)) in the display area. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) is placed at the center position (FIG. 380 (c)) in the display area. When the process of displaying the PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is placed at the right position (FIG. 380 (d)) in the display area. ) To display the character image PG.

As is clear from FIGS. 380 (b) to (d), the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) itself has the same form regardless of the display position. , Since the positional relationship between the background image (or decorative pattern) that can be the target of "processing to be displayed in a special mode" and the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is different, "display in a special mode". The ease of determining whether or not the "processing to cause" is being executed will naturally differ.

For example, when the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is displayed at the position (center position in the display area) shown in FIG. 380 (c), the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) is a comparison target. It will be displayed so as not to overlap with the background image, and when the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 380 (d) (the right position in the display area). Since the character image PG (particularly, the ruler in this case) is displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (standing bill) although it overlaps with the background image to be compared, it is displayed in a special manner. It can be said that it is relatively difficult to judge whether or not the process of making the image is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is placed in a "display position suitable for comparison" that differs depending on the type of background image each time. Since it becomes possible to display the image by an operation by a person, it becomes possible to suitably provide a material for determining whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed.

In this production example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is changed according to the number of operations for the operation button 410 within the predetermined time. However, this is not always the case. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time with respect to the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 may be provided, and any of these operation means is operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. When the character image PG is displayed by an operation for an operation means different from that of the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation (reception period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. Will be possible.

Further, since the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) cannot function as an effect (expectation degree) by itself, it is necessary to compare and judge with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the image becomes worthless enough to make the expected effect (background image) difficult to see. Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the display is performed by the player, it is desirable that the display is automatically hidden without any operation.

However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (especially the ruler here) is displayed as the comparison reference image (reference image) and the type of the background image, "processing to display in a special mode" is executed. In some cases, the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is not enough to compare and judge whether the state is in the state of being in the state. Therefore, in the above-mentioned production example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operating means operated to make the character image PG appear is re-operated. If so, the time for which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, each time a predetermined operating means is re-operated, it is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) based on the operated timing, so that the display is intermittent until the player is satisfied. It becomes possible to maintain the display state of the character image PG by performing various operations, and it becomes possible to make a careful comparison / judgment.

However, if such endless continuous display as a comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may be extremely easy to determine whether or not special processing is being executed. .. That is, the player may always get a convincing conclusion that "the special process is being executed" or "the special process is not being executed", which is a "special aspect". It does not clearly indicate whether or not the process to be displayed in is being executed, and the above-mentioned purpose of making it difficult to recognize is obliterated.

Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler held by the character image PG is shortened by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm), and the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced. It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden each time the predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed. , The comparison reference image (character image PG) Since the display area as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler gradually becomes shorter), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) While making it possible to extend the image, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed.

However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), it cannot be used for comparison with the background image, and the game interest is reduced. It can be connected. Therefore, regarding the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, the minimum size (here, the length of the shortest ruler) is set in advance, and the minimum size is set. When the size is reduced to the size of, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden is not extended even if the predetermined operating means is re-operated in the state. It is desirable that the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is not further reduced.

Further, it is desirable that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. .. That is, in this case, each time a predetermined operation means is operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear (or extend the display time), the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole. Is getting smaller (here, the ruler is getting shorter), and finally it doesn't even appear, so when you really want to know if the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed. It will be possible to encourage only the operation, and other than that, it will be expected to concentrate on the original production content.

The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over even after the variation effect is completed and the next variation effect is started. With such a configuration, a comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable production opportunity, and basically, just by looking at the background image or the decorative pattern SZ, a "special mode" can be given. It becomes possible to provide a directing property (see FIG. 378) for predicting whether or not the "process to be displayed by" is being executed.

Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 379 and 380 is a state when the power is turned on (or the RAM is cleared) and then the image is displayed for the first time by an operation with respect to a predetermined operating means. After that, each time an operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler gradually becomes shorter), and finally it does not even appear. .. However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is satisfied, the comparison reference image (if it appears at multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of those positions). It is also possible to prepare a process for displaying the display area as a whole by increasing the display area (here, the ruler is lengthened). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by operating the predetermined operating means.

Further, as described above, when a plurality of operating means for which the display positions of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are set to be different are prepared, the operation is performed according to which of the operating means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated means. In this case, the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set for each operation means (display position), and the specific operation means. It is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operating means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short) when the operation is performed.

For example, in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIG. 380, when the first operating means is operated in the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (a), the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (b) appears. Will be. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (b), when the first operation means is re-operated, this is in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state. As mentioned above, it is displayed in a small size (the ruler is short). However, after that, even when the second operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (c) appears, and the comparison standard accompanying the re-operation of the first operating means The reduced display as an image (character image PG) is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation for the second operating means. Similarly, when the third operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (d) appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) associated with the re-operation of the first operating means. The reduced display as is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right side position by the operation with respect to the third operating means.

In this respect, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the center position shown in FIG. 380 (c)) (within 3 seconds), it corresponds to the specific position (center position). When another operating means (for example, the first operating means) is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already displayed at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the displayed state. Therefore, it is desirable to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position where it is difficult to compare with the background image by the operation with the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means. By operating the operation means of the above, it becomes possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another display position. This makes it possible to add the fun of searching for the position where the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the ease of comparison.

Moreover, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed is not displayed. It is not displayed, but the display state is maintained. With such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character image PG) can be displayed at the same time, and the comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are lined up). As a result, the horizontal length can be substantially increased), so a background image that is difficult to compare appears, but the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed. It will be possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at the timing when you really want to know if there is one. However, this consumes two "remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear (number of operations until the minimum unit)" set for each of the plurality of operation means at the same time. Since it can be generated in exchange for the fact, it can be said that the cost of greatly improving the ease of comparison is high.

Further, as described above, since the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the operation by the player, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images) are hidden. In order to lengthen the time during which PG) is simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, whether or not it is judged whether or not the "special processing is being executed" is determined only by the comparison reference image (character image PG) that appears by the operation for the first operation means, or the price is increased. Even so, it is necessary to make a quick decision as to whether the second operation means should be further operated to greatly improve the ease of comparison, and the delay in the decision causes a disadvantage on the player side. Since it will be expanded, it will be possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension.

Further, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character image PG) are displayed at the same time, the timing at which the comparison reference images (character image PG) are hidden is different. The size (length of the ruler) of each comparison reference image (character image PG) also becomes different from each other depending on the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) in each operation means, "the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even if a specific operation means is operated, but the comparison reference image is operated when another operation means is operated. (Character image PG) is displayed ”, so which operation means should be operated when the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears. It becomes possible to provide further fun by adding a judgment element other than the type of the background image to be compared to the judgment.

As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the operation by the player, but the predetermined time elapses. When the symbol change (decorative symbol SZ) is stopped due to a loss before that, it is desirable to hide it as a trigger. That is, as shown in FIGS. 379 and 380, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect content in the display area, and by comparison with the background image or the like, it becomes difficult to see. It will be difficult to concentrate on the content of the production. And as a result, if you do not notice that it has been stopped due to loss, the purpose as a character image PG to be useful for production will be lost, so it will be stopped due to loss. In such a case, it is desirable to hide the character image PG with this as an opportunity.

However, when the character image PG is stopped due to a big hit, the character image PG may not be hidden and may be continued in the displayed state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the character image PG is stopped due to a big hit, the big hit game is started even if it is not noticed, so that it is a surprise when the character image PG is hidden after a predetermined time has passed. It is expected to function as a production.

Further, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that the specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. Even in the situation of gazing, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. However, in the case of outputting such a specific sound, the following It is more desirable to adopt such a method in order to maintain the interest of the game.

That is, although the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set for each operating means (display position), the remaining number of times is set. If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect content in the display area, and the original effect is concentrated. Will be difficult. Therefore, while making it possible to output a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) when the character image PG is displayed, this specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is "processed to be displayed in a special mode". Allow the sound output to be acceptable only when is not being executed. In this way, regarding the execution of the "process to be displayed in a special mode", the specific sound (for example, the bark of a penguin) is not used as a definite suggestion on the affirmative side, but only as a definite suggestion on the negative side (for example). , Penguins bark), so that players who dislike such specific sounds can concentrate on the original production and the possibility of "displaying in a special mode" is high. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will appear only at a certain time.

However, for a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark), a comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by an operation by the player when the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed. Even if it becomes, it is desirable that the sound output is not always acceptable. That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image already displayed is changed (the length of the ruler is short)) by the operation by the player. When a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is output, it is definitely recognized that the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed, but the specific sound (for example, the bark of a penguin) For example, when the sound of the penguins) is not output, there are cases where the "process to display in a special mode" is executed and the "process to display in a special mode" is not executed. Since it becomes fluent, it becomes possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is not output.

It should be noted that the specific sound (for example, the bark of a penguins) may be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions regardless of which of the plurality of operating means having different display positions is operated. However, if a specific sound can be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions only when a specific operation means is operated among a plurality of operation means, the specific sound may be output. A comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed is displayed, or a specific sound is not likely to be output. It becomes possible for the player to select whether to display a comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the process of displaying in is being executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed in a small size (the ruler is short) in a special manner. The difficulty of recognizing whether or not the process is being executed is preferably maintained. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, penguin bark) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (for example, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large) is output. For example, if the volume is made lower than when the penguin bark) is output, the recognition difficulty when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended is to some extent. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position so that the comparison reference images (character image PG) do not overlap each other when the comparison reference images (character image PG) are simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 380). It is desirable to set each of. It becomes possible to increase the comparison material with the background image by the amount that each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as a transparent image. According to such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap, the comparison is made between the background image and the background image that can be seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG). You will be able to do it favorably.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed in a small size (shortening the ruler) each time a predetermined operation means is operated, but this is not always the case, and the point is that it is special. Any aspect may be used as long as it enhances the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in the aspect is being executed. For example, each time a predetermined operating means is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same, but the portion where the transparency is relatively high is gradually enlarged. You may do it. That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is "displayed with a specific transmittance", the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed with the specific transparency is made small (specified among the rulers). It is important to shorten the part displayed by transparency), and the part that is not displayed by specific transparency may be hidden, or the part that is not displayed by specific transparency may be hidden, or the part that is not displayed by specific transparency may be hidden. It may be displayed to increase the difficulty in visibility.

Further, as described above, the "process of displaying in a special mode" is shown in FIG. 378 (c), for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a) to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b). It may be a dynamic depiction process that changes the display state. When the "process of displaying in a special mode" is realized as such a dynamic depiction process, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is terminated, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c), the figure is shown. After the display state shown in 378 (b), the display state is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a).

In this respect, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but as a dynamic depiction process. It is desirable that the "process of displaying in a special mode" is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player while the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is being executed, the said. While the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), "from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c) to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b), the figure is shown. Since the movement such as "returning to the display state shown in 378 (a)" will always appear, it is possible to facilitate comparison / judgment as to whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. become able to.

However, the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player while the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintaining the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c). After that, the movement such as "returning to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a)" does not always appear, so it is difficult to compare / determine whether the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. It will be possible to make it. In addition, strategicity can be added by making it possible to extend the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG).

Further, the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) or from a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the effect determination. May be done in a long time. Further, "a process of displaying in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) within the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol SZ to the stop of the fluctuation. The "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at predetermined timings different from each other.

Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For a specific sound that can be output (for example, a penguin's bark), the sound output should be interrupted for a time significantly shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the "processing to display in a special mode" is executed, the specific sound is recorded until after the "processing to display in a special mode" is executed. Since the output of (for example, the bark of a penguin) is suppressed from being maintained, a specific sound (for example, a specific sound (for example) is being executed even though the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. , Penguins bark) makes it difficult to generate a production situation as if it were denied.

In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) from before the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is executed to after the execution. Become. Therefore, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is executed, for example, the display shown in FIG. 378 (a) is displayed while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. The state changes from the state to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c) through the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b).

Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of a character imitating a penguins and a ruler, only one of the character imitating a penguins and the ruler may be displayed. In short, it is sufficient that the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is not the target of the "process to be displayed in a special mode" can be made to appear by the operation by the player. However, if a guideline image (ruler) showing the unit of length in the horizontal direction is displayed, it is possible to facilitate the judgment as to whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed. It is possible.

The guide image AG in the demo screen shown in FIG. 377 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

In addition, it is decided that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there may be a situation in which the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Because.

[Prevention of mischief against multiple operating means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern. It is possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the multiple expected effects (such as the notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect by the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume set value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operating means (operation button 410, sword portion 5010, effect selection left button 331) are targeted for operation by the player. , The effect selection right button 332, the brightness adjustment button omitted from the illustration, etc.) are provided. Then, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variable effect is performed by the decorative pattern, and the game entertainment hobby is given through such an operation effect. I try to maintain.

However, if a large number of operating means are provided in this way, the existence of these operating means becomes conspicuous, so that the player is likely to be the target of mischief. Then, as a result of being treated roughly, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly deteriorated, and it is inevitable that the game entertainment will be deteriorated.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is in a non-gaming state (a state in which the above-mentioned operation effect cannot occur) in which the game effect according to the jackpot determination is not executed. When there is a high possibility that the operation is detected by multiple operation means and mischievous, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, which suppresses the operation means from being handled roughly. I am trying to do it.

More specifically, among the plurality of operating means included in the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the game has not been started (non-gaming state), some predetermined operating means (which should not need to be operated) ( Here, when the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as an opportunity.
-In the production display device 1600, a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear when the game production according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (played).
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. The control is performed to generate the period) over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). When a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and the operation reception regarding the volume is permitted and the volume is increased. The adjustment confirmation sound will also be output, and the operation reception regarding the brightness will be allowed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound will also be output, and the normal state as a non-gaming state will be returned.

In the production restriction period (function restriction period) according to this embodiment, "even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume is not accepted. "The set value is not displayed" and "Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted and the current brightness setting value is not displayed". However, only one of the process related to volume adjustment and the process related to brightness adjustment may be restricted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that trigger such an effect restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the conditions for generating the production restriction period will be complicated and a sense of tension will be given, such as "Isn't the mischief act actually monitored by the hall side?"

FIG. 381 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a production restriction period is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined effect restriction condition in a non-gaming state (during a demo screen, etc.). be.

Now, the game is controlled to the state where the game has not started (non-game state), and the standby display is being performed on the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decorative symbol is displayed in the stopped state, or the demo screen. Is displayed, etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output at the time of the operation. If it is in the state, the process of adjusting the volume (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if the predetermined effect lamp is in the light emitting state at the time of the operation, the brightness is adjusted (the brightness setting value is used as the amount of light). Processing to reflect) will be executed. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

In this way, in the non-gaming state, when the player starts the game, the operation on the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button so that the volume and brightness can be set to suit his / her taste. Reception is allowed. Then, when the operation is accepted, it is expected that the player is urged to start the game by changing the volume setting value or the brightness setting value according to the operation reception.

However, as described above, in the non-gaming state, an operation for mischief may be performed on a plurality of operation means including such a volume adjustment button and a brightness adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly deteriorated, and it is inevitable that the game entertainment will be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, some operation patterns (detection patterns) to be certified as mischief detection are prepared, and in the non-gaming state, any of these operation patterns can be used. Based on the detection that an operation has been performed, it is possible to execute a process of generating a production restriction period (function restriction period) in which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is determined that the condition related to the effect restriction is satisfied when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state. It is supposed to be.
a. The first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be timed with the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 as a trigger, and the operation detection for the operation button 410 is newly generated until the first timer time is timed. Further, the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is performed from the start of timing the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) triggered by the operation detection for the newly generated operation button 410 until the timing of the second timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as occurrence again are set
b. The operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is newly generated until the third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be timed with the operation detection for the operation button 410 and the time is finished for the third timer time. Further, the operation detection for the operation button 410 is performed from the start of timing the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) triggered by the operation detection for the newly generated sword portion 5010 until the operation detection for the fourth timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as occurrence again are set

It should be noted that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and the effect restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when the detection conditions related to the other operation patterns are satisfied, or the detection may be performed. It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. Further, the first to fourth timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the same timer may be used for timing, or different timers may be used for timing.

Here, "long press on the operation button 410" and "continuous hitting operation on the operation button 410 (multiple operations)" are not required in the state where the game is not started (non-game state). It can be said. However, since these modes can be instructed to be operated in the operation effect in the game execution state, the player has some purpose (for example, wishing or rehearsal) when starting the game even in the non-game state. It is assumed that these operations can be performed in, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, for "operation combinations for a plurality of operating means (for example, operations in the order of" sword part 5010-> operation button 410-> sword part 5010 ")" to be detected for mischief purposes, the game execution state is set. It can be said that it is important to avoid erroneous detection by setting it so that the operation is not instructed as an operation effect at a certain time. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the effect restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is significantly reduced.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation for another operating means (for example, the sword portion 5010) is performed before and after the operation for the specific operating means (for example, the operation button 410). As a condition, only when the operations for a plurality of operating means are mixed within a relatively short time, the detection condition related to the above operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the effect restriction period (function restriction period) is generated. I have to. Therefore, players and the like who have only touched once due to their rarity, not the intention of mischief, can be excluded from the penalty, and the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more preferably avoid a large decrease in the operating rate of the slingshot.

The stricter detection conditions in this way are to prevent the production restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 to drop significantly, and to make it confusing due to mischief. This is because it is expected that various combinations will be used when the machine is operated, so even if the detection conditions are tightened, there is a high possibility that the detection conditions will be satisfied in the future.

In the example shown in FIG. 381, first, the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected at the timing tq1 in the non-gaming state. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is generated based on the detection, and whether or not the second stage detection condition is satisfied until the first timer time is completely consumed. It will be in the state of determining whether or not (the state of the first stage).

That is, as described above, in the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", three conditions (sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the effect restriction period, and these conditions are imposed. Each time is filled one by one, the stairs for generating the production restriction period are to be climbed one step at a time.

At the timing tq1, the first staircase of the three stairs until the effect restriction period is generated is climbed. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is exhausted, and the detection condition of the second stage (here, the operation for the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has been exhausted, it is returned to the original state (the state of the 0th stage after going down one staircase) in which all of the above three conditions are not satisfied.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation for the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time is in the state where the digestion is not completed (the state of the first stage), and the operation pattern. (Detection pattern) Of the three conditions of a, the "second stage detection condition" is satisfied. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is generated based on the detection, and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the last) until the second timer time is completely consumed. It will be in a state (second stage state) for determining whether or not the detection condition) is satisfied.

That is, at the timing tq2, the second staircase of the three stairs until the effect restriction period is generated is climbed. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is completely digested, and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the operation for the sword portion 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time has been exhausted, it is returned to the original state (the state of the 0th stage after going down two stairs) in which all of the above three conditions are not satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation for the operation button 410 is detected again at the timing tq3 when the second timer time is in the state where the digestion is not completed (the second stage state), and the operation pattern (detection) is detected. Of the three conditions of the pattern) a, the "third-stage detection condition (final detection condition)" is satisfied. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the detection, the display (playback) of the specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state where the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is executed in the effect display device 1600 is displayed (reproduced). Let's get started. At the same time, even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and of course the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Furthermore, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and of course the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. , Generates production restrictions. Then, the effect restriction period (function restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued from the timing tq3 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of operations are operated in a mixed manner, an effect restriction period is generated, so that the operation by mischief can be suppressed.

Also, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (go up the stairs), but when the time runs out in the middle of the road, until then I am trying to cancel all the state levels and return to the original state. As a result, even if the game is ended with the state level raised, it is also preferable that the production restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game. Can be avoided.

In addition, in the process of raising the state level (up the stairs) in this way, the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness" which are the operation means to be restricted when the production restriction period occurs. It can be assumed that the "adjustment button" is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated so that the player can set the volume and brightness to suit his / her taste when starting the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how much these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated in the process of raising the state level (up the stairs), the state is triggered by this. It is desirable not to cause a change in the level or affect the first timer time, the second timer time, or the like.

That is, in this case, no matter how much the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are targeted for the operation by mischief, it is not possible to generate the production restriction period with this as an opportunity. However, at least the already raised state level does not decrease due to these operations, and once the production restriction period occurs, the target of the production restriction is the "volume adjustment button" or "brightness adjustment button". Since the operation for these will be invalidated at all, the mischief for the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness adjustment button" that are not the target of detection of the operation by mischief will be appropriately suppressed. Will be expected to do.

Further, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used for mischief detection, it is sandwiched between "two operations (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 381) for another operation means (for example, sword portion 5010)". Regarding the "operation (timing tq2 in FIG. 381)" in the form of "specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)", it is a condition that the operation is performed not once but a predetermined number of times. Is more desirable.

That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. The operation for the button 410 is detected, the operation for the operation button 410 is detected again within the 6th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection is detected again. When the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the detection condition related to the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" is satisfied and the effect restriction period is generated. Further, the 5th to 7th timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the same timer may be used for timing, or different timers may be used for timing.

When the operation for the operation button 410 is not detected again within the 6th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation for the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the 6th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection conditions related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) are not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. Further, within the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds), the operation for the operation button 410, not the operation for the sword portion 5010, is detected again (here, 2 times), which is a specific number of times (here). Then, even when the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset), the detection condition related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. Is more desirable.

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is continuously operated n times (here, twice) at the timing between the operations of the sword portion 5010 twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied. The detection condition is satisfied and the production restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) during the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the effect restriction period is set. Since it will not occur, it is expected that the conditions for the production restriction period will be complicated and that the hall side will actually monitor the mischief. Become.

In order to make such a complexity, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation for the sword portion 5010 is performed again within the timer time, or when the operation button 410 is operated l. When operating within each timer time over times (> n times), it is desirable to control each state to a state different from the original state (the state may be different between m times and l times). .. Therefore, even if the operation is performed according to the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" in the state controlled by these different states, the effect restriction period does not occur.

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) during the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the effect restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times). If it is possible to generate a production restriction period (similar to when it is operated n times), the conditions for generating the production restriction period will be made more complicated, and "the mischief act is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that a feeling of tension such as "is it more suitable?" In this case as well, it goes without saying that each time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time is generated and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" that trigger the generation of the effect restriction period will be prepared.

However, such mischievous acts are very different from cheating acts such as magnet goto, and taking too strict measures may lead to disadvantages on the hall side. Therefore, for the specific video that appears during the production restriction period, rather than displaying a strong warning content, the content should be such that it explains the proper handling method related to the game and the production, and the deterioration of the game interest is suppressed. Is desirable.

As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific video is hidden, and "operation reception regarding volume is permitted. Then, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation reception regarding the brightness is allowed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. ”It will be returned to the normal state as a non-gaming state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 382, the player starts the game at the timing tq4 before the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs. It is conceivable that the game execution state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shifted to by generating the start winning prize. In such a case, since the above-mentioned intended purpose of quitting the mischievous act and starting the game has been achieved, the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet passed. End the production restriction period (function restriction period) of something.

However, if the game is started without waiting for the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility of insufficient reflection, so at least the change in the decorative pattern that triggered the end of the production restriction period. Until the display is finished, each reception of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is allowed, but "Even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output and the brightness. Even if it is adjusted, it is desirable to control it as a partial restriction period such as "The current brightness setting value is displayed but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output."

As shown in FIG. 382, when the game execution state is entered in this way, the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated regardless of whether or not the game is controlled during the partial time limit. Become so. Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the sword portion 5010 or an operation on the operation button 410, the first timer time and the second timer time are not timed by these as triggers, and the effect restriction period may occur. do not have.

According to such a configuration, when the game is transferred to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration as the production restriction period, the game is played in such a form that a part of the restriction contents when the production restriction period is reached remains. Since it will be shifted to the execution state, it will be possible to encourage reflection on the mischievous act without hindering the progress of the game production.

Regarding the partial restriction period, not only until the variable display of the decorative symbol that triggered the end of the production restriction period is completed, but also the decorative symbol is stopped when the number of reservations is 0. It may be continued at least until (until it becomes a non-gaming state).

Further, at the timing when the game execution state ends and the game shifts to the non-game state (for example, the timing tq5 shown in FIG. 382), a predetermined safe time is set and until the predetermined safe time elapses. Is desirable to continue the state in which the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated even though it is in the non-gaming state. That is, it is assumed that the excitement of the player has not cooled down in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, and the operation for a plurality of operation means is excessively performed. This is because imposing a penalty may lead to immediate cancellation of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state ends and the game transitions to the non-game state.

In addition, when the game is shifted to the non-gaming state while being controlled as the above-mentioned partial restriction period, there is a possibility that the reflection on the mischief act is still insufficient, so the partial restriction is until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is allowed again when the safe time has elapsed.

In addition, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol variation time from the start to the stop of the variation display of the decorative symbol. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated immediately, the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" can be detected at least until the safe time is terminated. It will be possible to continue the invalidated state or to continue the partial time limit.

Further, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the form of ending the effect restriction period (function restriction period), the symbol variation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned partial restriction period can be continued for a relatively long time.

Further, in the above-mentioned explanatory example, even if the detection near the occurrence of the effect restriction period is performed within the detection period for the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (the portion where fine dots are applied in FIG. 381), no matter what. The behavior of is also not appearing. However, instead of this, by outputting a specific sound every time the timer time is set in the above operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time going up the stairs where the penalty is generated), it is urged to stop the operation by mischief. You may do so. This specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of the operating means to be detected. Similarly to this, every time the timer time is set in the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the penalty generation stairs are climbed), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is changed. May be good.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

In addition, it is decided that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there may be a situation in which the possibility of being an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Because.

[Noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the multiple expected effects (such as the notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect by the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume set value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

By the way, since there are only new customers who are trying to start the game for a while after the hall opens, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment may be frequently performed so that the game can be started with a set value that suits one's taste. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output each time the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is made, the adjustment confirmation sound will reverberate in the hall and the atmosphere will be ruined. It's a pleasure.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to perform an operation related to volume adjustment or an operation reception related to brightness adjustment from the time the power is turned on until the predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", and the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value can be accepted. It is supposed to be.

According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the set value (volume setting value) and the brightness set value related to the output volume of the effect sound are changed to the respective "predetermined specific values". It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, by adopting the automatically set "specific value" as the setting value of the volume that many players tend to like, many games are played in the time zone when the hall has just opened. It can be expected that it will be difficult for a person to adjust to a volume setting value or a brightness setting value that suits his / her taste. It should be noted that the establishment of the predetermined condition may mean that a certain time has elapsed since the power was turned on, a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a may be received, or the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The specific process may be completed.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value and the volume setting value are set based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied or the predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Accepts changes to the brightness setting values, but does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if those setting values are accepted. A special period (opening-only period) is set for a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour). First, generate it. Then, after the end of such a special period (opening-only period), when the change of those set values is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. There is. As a result, for a while after the hall opens (until the time required for new customers to complete various adjustments has elapsed), the state in which various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output remains maintained. Then, you will be able to give an opportunity to adjust the volume and brightness to start the game with the set value that suits your taste.

FIG. 383 is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the special period (opening-only period).

Now, as shown in FIG. 383, assuming that the power is turned on at the timing tr0, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume by the player until the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is controlled as a state in which the operation related to the adjustment and the operation reception related to the brightness adjustment are not allowed. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to the game such as a start prize is not allowed, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power restoration appears, or no display output is performed, and the standby screen (design stop display, demo screen, etc.) is still displayed. Do not show.

After that, when the timing tr1 at which the predetermined condition (for example, the predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU1310a) is satisfied, the detection related to the game such as the start winning is allowed, and the game start waiting state (for example, the game start waiting state). It will be controlled as a state of waiting for a start prize). Also in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize that the symbol is in the change waiting state.

At this time, under the condition that the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", "the acceptance of changes in the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is permitted, but they are allowed. Even if the change of the set value is accepted, a special period (opening-only period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such a store opening-only period can be continued until the arrival of the timing tr2 when a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed from the occurrence of the period, and when the period ends at the timing tr2, the volume is increased. When a change in the set value or the brightness set value is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. In the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (the state of waiting for the change of the symbol) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and its back are maintained. Various background images (images whose priority in the layer is lower than the decorative design) displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) are displayed when the store opening period is changed to the normal business period. It won't change.

According to such a configuration, even after the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) appears and the game start waiting state is reached, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the opening period ends). During the period), the adjustment confirmation sound is maintained in a state in which the adjustment confirmation sound is not output, so that it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound reverberating immediately after the store opens. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by new customers has elapsed), the adjustment confirmation sound is automatically shifted to a state where it can be output. By the time various adjustments by new customers have settled down, finer adjustments will be allowed while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. Moreover, since the state where the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) is maintained and the adjustment confirmation sound is automatically shifted to the normal business period, a predetermined time has passed since the store opened. It will be possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to notice that the adjustment sound is controlled during the opening-only period when the adjustment sound is not output.

After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game is in the waiting state (timing tr1 or later), when the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, the changed setting value is corresponding to the effect display device 1600. Parameter display (parameter display on the volume side, parameter display on the brightness side) is performed. Therefore, by checking such a parameter display, it is possible to adjust the set value according to one's preference.

However, even if the output related to the adjustment confirmation sound is not output in this way during the period immediately after the store opens (the store opening period), changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value will be reflected as the volume and light intensity. In the end, the atmosphere in the hall may be dyed in one color, and there is a concern that the atmosphere will be ruined and it will be a sensation. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the volume setting value is changed until the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound. It is desirable not to. Similarly, regarding the brightness, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change in the brightness setting value is accepted until the timing tr2 arrives, the changed brightness setting value is used as the amount of light. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (the period dedicated to the opening of the store), each player adjusts to the set value according to his / her preference while checking the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. That is, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust the set value according to one's taste, the surroundings of the pachinko machine 1 are not affected by sound or light, so that the atmosphere in the hall is changed. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

It should be noted that only the brightness of the volume and the brightness may be maintained in a state in which the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the amount of light even after the timing tr2 arrives. That is, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption increases due to the operation by mischief until the game is started, and the brightness whose power consumption is large compared to the volume is that while the game is not started. It is desirable that the adjustment is not reflected. Further, unlike the volume adjustment sound, the brightness adjustment sound cannot always be output because the degree of adjustment cannot be confirmed.

However, even when the timing tr2 has not arrived yet (the time for the opening period has not been exhausted), the symbol variation (variation display by decorative symbol) starts based on the start prize. After that, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment by the player have been completed, and it is expected that the frequency of these adjustments will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, if the start prize is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period ends early based on the detection. It is possible to execute the process of shifting to the normal business period.

However, during the change display period of the decorative design due to the start prize that ended the store opening period early, changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value are accepted, and the adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change is output. If this happens, it is expected that many players will adjust the volume and brightness after the opening-only period ends early, which may lead to a fall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start prize is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is terminated early and the normal business period is reached. However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed at least until the fluctuation state of the decorative pattern generated by this is completed (suppression processing during fluctuation).

FIG. 384 is a time chart showing an example of the processing when the game is started while the store opening exclusive period (special period) is set.

For example, as shown in FIG. 384, it is assumed that the start winning prize is detected at the timing tr3 in which the time as a special period has not been exhausted yet. Then, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment ends the processing related to the opening-only period and shifts to the normal business period, and starts the variable suppression process in the normal business period. This fluctuation suppression process allows the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to be accepted while the fluctuation display related to the decorative pattern is performed, and the change of these setting values is the effect sound in the output state. It is possible to execute the process of reflecting the volume and the amount of light of the effect lamp in the light emitting state, but the process of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed. " The difference from the "processing required for the store opening period" is whether or not the variable display related to the decorative design is being performed, and the change in the set value is reflected as the volume and light intensity. Whether or not it is done, the suppression content for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, such a variable suppression process is performed in a non-gaming state (a state in which the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). Unless it is migrated to, it will continue to run.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation with a short variation time is executed only once), and the non-game state is set at the timing tr4. If it is immediately returned to (the number of holds is 0 and the decorative design is stopped and displayed) (for example, one hour has not passed since the early termination of the store opening period). Even in the state immediately after the store opens), the special period (the period dedicated to the opening of the store) will not occur again.

That is, in this case, in the non-gaming state after the timing tr4, as a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted. It will be controlled. During the normal business period when the fluctuation suppression process is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed brightness setting value is also the light intensity of the effect lamp that is in the light emitting state. It is supposed to be reflected as. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize that the symbol is in the change waiting state.

A player who creates a situation such as "the opening-only period (special period) is terminated early and then the game execution state is also terminated immediately" is not convinced by the adjustment contents made while the adjustment sound is not output, so it starts once. Since it is assumed that the person has a desire to make finer adjustments until the game is interrupted, a special period (opening-only period) even if the store has just opened less than an hour after the power is turned on. ) Is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

In the above description example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) for the opening-only period (special period) to continue may be a fixed time after the opening-only period (special period) occurs. , It may be the time until the specific processing in the peripheral control MPU1511a is completed.

Further, the timing for setting the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to the respective "predetermined specific values" may be the timing tr1 or may be a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned explanatory example, there is a technical feature in the configuration regarding the opening-only period (special period) that occurs after the timing tr1, and the processing in the period before the timing tr1 is the above-mentioned content. It may be realized as a different process.

Further, in the above explanatory example, in the timing tr2, the decorative design and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed, but the display change is such that an image different from the decorative design and the background image is additionally displayed. If so, you may do it.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

In addition, it is decided that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there may be a situation in which the person may be aware of the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Because.

Further, in the above description example, only one of the set values of the volume and the brightness may be changed.

[Control of volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the importance of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the multiple expected effects (such as the notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect by the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume set value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the first hit determination is made according to the acceptance of the game ball in the first starting port 2002 and the case where the second starting port 2004 is performed. Regardless of whether the second hit determination is performed according to the acceptance of the game ball, the symbol variation (first symbol variation, second symbol variation) is performed according to the hit determination. After that, a privilege (big hit game) advantageous to the player may be given. However, the expected value for those benefits is set so that the second hit determination (second symbol variation) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol variation).

In the above example, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. On the other hand, in the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating the opening and closing pattern that opens the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times. ing.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value is "a game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed", ". The first-side execution state in which the first symbol change is executed and the second symbol change is not executed, and the second symbol change is not executed and the second symbol change is executed. It is possible to allow it in any of the "second-side execution states", and the numerical range in which the change of the volume setting value is allowed is the same in any of these states.

According to such a configuration, the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like regardless of which state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state). Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment through sound adjustment according to each state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "game start waiting state" and "first side execution state" are present, the set value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound is changed. When this is done, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-mentioned "second side execution state", it is controlled so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

That is, in the "game start waiting state", the effect sound is not output because the game is not being executed, and if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, the change is made. It is not possible to confirm the volume of the later volume as an audible sound. Therefore, it is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound is changed when the game is in the “waiting for game start state”.

Further, in the "first side execution state", although there is a situation in which the effect sound corresponding to the first hit determination is output, the situation is a low probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low. It is often controlled to a state (low probability non-time saving game state), so there is not much expectation for the production. In recent years, it has been confirmed that a player plays a game while paying close attention to a mobile device such as a smartphone when the game is in such a low-expectation state. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the "first side execution state", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is used to surely notify the player of the change and the volume level after the change. It is desirable to output.

On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", the effect sound corresponding to the second hit determination is output, and the high probability game state (high probability short game state) in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively high. ) Is often controlled. In such a situation, since the expectation for the production is high, the volume adjustment tends to be performed to enjoy the production. Therefore, it is recommended to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed. It may be difficult to hear the production sound and BGM according to the two-hit judgment, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the "second side execution state", it is controlled so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed, thereby clearing the production sound and BGM according to the second hit judgment. It is desirable to give an opportunity to adjust the volume in an environment where the music can be heard so that the game entertainment can be maintained appropriately.

However, in the "second side execution state", the degree of expectation for the production is increasing, and even after the second symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode, it may change again and change to the jackpot mode. It can be said that it is important to secure the time (afterglow) to make people aware of the game in order to maintain the interest of the game. In this regard, if the normal processing when the game is in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after the transition to the "game start waiting state", the processing related to the "second side execution state" will be performed. It becomes possible for the player to easily detect that the game has been terminated in a lost manner and the state has been shifted to the "waiting for the start of the game", and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, when the process related to the "second side execution state" is completed and the state is shifted to the "game start waiting state", a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition to the "game start waiting state" is performed. Controls so that normal processing (processing that allows a change in the volume setting value and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) when the game is in the "game start waiting state" is not performed. It is desirable to do. For example, during a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after shifting from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state", "the volume setting value is allowed to be changed, but the volume setting value is changed. Even so, it is desirable to perform processing such as "processing that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound" and "processing that does not allow the change of the volume setting value itself". However, it is more positive that the "second side execution state" may still be continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state". As in the case of "second side execution state", "processing that allows change of volume setting value, but does not output volume adjustment confirmation sound even if volume setting value is changed" It is more desirable to do so.

On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", the degree of expectation for the effect is not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. Therefore, when the process related to the "first side execution state" is completed and the state shifts to the "game start waiting state", the "first side execution state" is different from the case of the above-mentioned "second side execution state". The above-mentioned normal processing (processing that allows the volume setting value to be changed and outputs the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed), which is also performed even when in the "state", should be continued as it is. Is desirable.

By the way, in the situation controlled to the "first side execution state", the mischievous operation is performed so that the operations for a plurality of operation means are mixed and performed within a relatively short time due to the stress that the big hit is hard to win. Is a concern. That is, as a result of being treated roughly, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly deteriorated, and further deterioration of the game entertainment will be unavoidable.

Therefore, there is a possibility that operation detection has occurred by multiple operating means and mischief has occurred not only when the game is controlled to the "game start waiting state" but also when the game is controlled to the "first side execution state". When the situation becomes high, the effect restriction period (function restriction period) in the above-mentioned explanatory example of "prevention of mischief against a plurality of operating means (see FIGS. 381 and 382)" may be generated.

That is, in this case, some predetermined operations among the plurality of operating means included in the pachinko machine 1 in any of the "game start waiting state (non-gaming state)" and "first side execution state". When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as an opportunity.
-In the production display device 1600, a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear when the game production according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (played).
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. Control is performed to generate the period) over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image in the effect display device 1600 will be displayed even if the image related to the "first side execution state" has appeared before that. When a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and the operation reception regarding the volume is permitted and the volume is increased. The normal state as "game start waiting state" or "first side execution state" such that the adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation reception related to the brightness is allowed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. Will be returned to.

As for the detailed contents and other examples regarding such an effect restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt each content in the explanation example of "prevention of mischief for a plurality of operating means". However, in this case, even if the "game start waiting state" is changed to the "first side execution state" while the production restriction period (function restriction period) is in effect, the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early. Various processes related to the production restriction period will be continued as they are under the same conditions as when the game is in the "waiting for game start state". As a result, it is expected to suppress mischief operations when controlled to the "first-side execution state" with a low degree of expectation.

On the other hand, when the state is changed from the "game start waiting state" to the "second side execution state" while in the effect restriction period (function restriction period), the above-mentioned "effect restriction period (effect restriction period) is referred to with reference to FIG. 382. "Processing related to early termination of the function restriction period)" and its modified examples will be appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere when the highly expected "second-side execution state" is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

In addition, it is decided that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as confirmation sounds, there may be a situation in which the person may be aware of the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound that suggests the degree of expectation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Because.

Further, in the above description example, only one of the set values of the volume and the brightness may be changed.

[Period of permissible operation reception (valid period) its own color rendering]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can execute the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (s) are selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the multiple expected effects (such as the notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the big hit determination is obtained. The variable effect by the corresponding decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected effect is provided as an effect having "a function suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the first variation pattern is applied regardless of the result of the advance notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“intrinsic reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is permitted when the design effect based on the pattern progresses to a specific timing. Further, even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the advance notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the first variation pattern is determined. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“additional reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is permitted when the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern of 2 has progressed to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result cannot be obtained in the advance notice effect determination, the operation reception effect (effective) in which the effect reception is permitted even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern is advanced to a predetermined timing. Period) does not occur. A plurality of first variation patterns that generate an "intrinsic reception effect" and a second variation pattern that can generate an "additional reception effect" may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that the "intrinsic reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" can be sequentially generated.

However, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined change (effect) for the effect member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the valid period. Since the post-operation effect that generates the display change in the display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is only executed, the operation reception effect (effective). (Period) The effect of the game itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable until the effect is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
-When an operation by the player is detected, the first operation effect means capable of executing the post-operation effect in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern arrives, and
-When an operation by a player is detected, a second operation effect means capable of performing a post-operation effect in such a way that the elapsed time from the timing at which the detection is made reaches a predetermined time value. I will prepare.

According to such a configuration, there are cases where the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is executed and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is executed, and the operation reception effect (valid period) itself. Since different color renderings will be provided to the game, it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable until the post-operation effect is executed.

That is, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the post-operation effect is executed up to a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed at an early stage or a late time within the valid period. Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous to operate immediately after the valid period occurs in order to maintain the execution state as the post-operation effect for a long time and enjoy the effect.

On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, regardless of the timing of the operation within the valid period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until a predetermined time value is reached. After the operation, the effect is executed. Therefore, by operating at a later time without operating for a while after the valid period occurs, the overall production time from the start of the valid period to the end of the post-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. It can be said that it is advantageous for enjoying the production.

In this case, the conditions for generating the operation are different between the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means. For example, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the advance notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. A special result can be obtained in the above, and it can be realized as what occurs when the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the second fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern is different from the specific timing. It may be realized as it occurs when the timing is reached.

FIG. 385 shows the first operation, in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a way that it is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives regardless of the length of the time required from the occurrence of the valid period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows an example about the operation reception production.

Now, assuming that the design effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has progressed to the timing tr1 while the first effect condition required for the generation of the "first operation reception effect for which the effect reception is allowed" is satisfied. The first operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. This first operation reception effect (valid period) ends without executing the post-operation effect when the timing tr3 for which a predetermined set time has elapsed has arrived without the effect reception being performed. First operation reception that allows production reception During the execution period of the production, an image that imitates the operation means to be operated and a gauge display that shows how much effective time remains are displayed to encourage the player to operate. Operation promotion effect is performed.

When the first operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowance sound indicating that the effect reception is allowed (or the effect reception is allowed) is output. .. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the reception allowable sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a certain timing tr2, it is set to a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

In addition, "the reception allowable sound is output" here means that "sound data including the reception allowable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr1, and is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr1. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound" may be output from before the timing tr1 to after the timing tr1 so as to straddle the timing tr1. Further, "to make it a non-output state" here means to cancel the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" to the channel, and to maintain the allocation state of the sound data to the channel. However, it is a concept including the transition to the period in which the "reproduction period of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is terminated and the subsequent sounds (including silent data) are reproduced.

As described above, in such a first operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" as a post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is performed. Although it is started, the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) started in this way is based on the fluctuation pattern regardless of when the effect is accepted within the valid period. It is designed to end when the predetermined timing tr4 in the design effect (effect pattern) arrives. It should be noted that the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process for operating the first decorative movable body based on the reception of the effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 385, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr1a within the valid period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is performed. It is executed over a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 385, assuming that the effect reception is performed at the relatively late timing tr2a within the valid period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member). Will only be executed for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

According to such a first operation reception effect, it is an execution state as a post-operation effect (execution state of operation-induced processing using the first effect member) that the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs. Will be maintained for a long time and will be advantageous in enjoying the production.

As will be described later, in the first operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect reception. Even if this is done, the output state of the reception allowable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until the predetermined timing tr2.

FIG. 386 is a time chart showing an example of a second operation reception effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a way that the elapsed time from the timing at which the detection is made is continued until a predetermined time value is reached.

Now, assuming that the design effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has progressed to the timing tr11 while the second effect condition required for the generation of the "second operation reception effect for which the effect reception is allowed" is satisfied. The second operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. As in the case of the first operation reception effect, this second operation reception effect (valid period) does not execute the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 arrives when the predetermined set time has elapsed without the effect reception being performed. It is supposed to end. A time value different from the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Second operation reception that allows production reception Even during the execution period of the production, an image display that imitates the operation means to be operated and a gauge display that shows how much effective time remains is displayed to encourage the player to operate. Operation promotion effect is performed.

Even when the second operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is allowed (or the effect reception is allowed) is output. To. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the reception allowable sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At the timing tr12, which is the timing tr12, it is set to a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

As for "the acceptance allowable sound is output" here, in addition to newly assigning the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" to the channel at the timing tr11, it is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr11. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound" may be output from before the timing tr11 to after the timing tr11 so as to straddle the timing tr11. In addition, the "non-output state" here also cancels the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the "reproduction period of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is terminated and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

As described above, in such a second operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" as a post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is performed. However, with regard to the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) started in this way, the effect reception is performed regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period. It is made to continue until the elapsed time from the time when it is made reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined set time as a valid period). The "operation-induced process using the second effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process for operating the second decorative movable body based on the reception of the effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr11a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is performed. It is executed from the timing tr11a to the timing tr14 when a predetermined time value has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that the effect reception is performed at the relatively late timing tr12a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member). Is executed from the timing tr12a to the timing tr15 (the timing that arrives after the timing tr14) when the predetermined time value has elapsed.

According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a later time without operating for a while after the valid period occurs, from the start of the valid period to the end of the post-operation effect. It becomes possible to provide a directing property such that the overall directing time is maintained for a long time and it is advantageous for enjoying the directing.

As will be described later, also in the second operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even if it is executed, the output state of the reception allowable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until the predetermined timing tr12.

As described with reference to FIGS. 385 and 386, the first and second operation reception effects (valid period) are given different effects to each other, and the operation reception effects (valid period) are different from each other. By generating it based on the establishment of the condition, it is expected that the game entertainment from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (valid period) to the post-operation effect is suitably maintained.

However, the following problems remain only by adopting the configuration related to the first and second operation reception effects (valid period). That is, in these operation reception effects (valid period), it is advantageous to operate at an early stage within the valid period to enjoy the effect, and it is advantageous to operate at a late stage within the valid period to enjoy the effect. Since the preferred operation timing for enjoying the production is decided, such as when there is something, there is still a poor aspect of the production performance within the valid period, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, it is more desirable that the operation reception effect is executed as a special operation reception effect having the aspects described below.

FIG. 387 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, if the design effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern progresses to the timing tr21 while the special effect condition required for the generation of the special operation reception effect is satisfied, it is special based on the progress to the timing tr21. Generates an operation reception effect (valid period). As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (valid period) is different from the case of the first and second operation reception effects, and the timing tr23 arrives after a predetermined set time elapses without the effect reception being performed. Even if there is no operation, the production reception is always generated within the valid period and the post-operation production described later is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect is set to be longer than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect.

In addition, even when the special operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowance sound indicating that the effect reception is permitted (or the effect reception is permitted) is output. Will be done. However, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the reception allowable sound (FIG. 387) is generated in response to the first and second operation reception effects (FIGS. 385 and 386). I try to keep the output state for a longer time than. In this explanatory example, the reception allowable sound shown in FIG. 387 is also set to a non-output state at the timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage in which the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed, so that it cannot be heard. However, the reception allowable sound shown in FIG. 387 may be such that the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 arrives.

As for "the acceptance allowable sound is output" here, in addition to newly assigning the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" to the channel at the timing tr21, it is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr21. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound" may be output from before the timing tr21 to after the timing tr21 so as to straddle the timing tr21. In addition, the "non-output state" here also cancels the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the "reproduction period of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is terminated and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

In this respect, in the special operation reception effect, when the operation by the player is detected within the valid period and the effect reception is performed, the "first movable" shown in FIG. 385 is based on the fact that the effect reception is performed. "Operation-induced processing using a decorative body (first effect member)" and "operation-induced processing using a second movable decorative body (second effect member)" shown in FIG. 386 are started in parallel. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is started, but the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" started in this way is performed at any timing within the valid period. Even if the production is accepted, it will be terminated when the predetermined timing tr24 in the design production (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern arrives, and the "operation using the second production member" will be terminated. The "caused processing" is started, but for the "operation-caused processing using the second effect member" started in this way, the effect reception is performed regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period. It will be continued until the elapsed time from the time when the above is made reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined set time as a valid period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 387, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr21a within the valid period (timing tr21 to tr23), among the post-operation effects, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member". Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but in the post-operation effect, the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" has a predetermined time value from the timing tr21a. It ends at the elapsed timing tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 387, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr22a within the valid period (timing tr21 to tr23), the post-operation effect "caused by the operation using the first effect member". The "process" is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" among the post-operation effects is predetermined from the timing tr22a. It will be executed until the timing tr26 (the timing that arrives after the timing tr25) when the time value has elapsed.

As described above, the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment occurs when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When the effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), "the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives is used. "Operation-induced processing" and "operation-induced processing using a second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed, respectively.

According to such a special operation reception effect, if the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs, the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a compensation for this, the end timing of the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" among the post-operation effects will arrive at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate for a while after the valid period occurs and operate it at a later time, this will be the end timing of "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect. Although it can be made to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a demerit that it is not possible to maintain the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" among the post-operation effects for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation reception production, there is no most desirable operation timing for the production to be lively.
-In exchange for shortening the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is completed, the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is lengthened and enjoyed. (Is it operated at an early stage within the valid period) or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of "operation-induced processing using the first effect member", do you enjoy extending the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is completed? (Is it operated at a later stage within the valid period?) Or
-The time it takes for the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" to be maintained as an execution state and the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is completed are sacrificed little by little, as a whole. (Is it operated at a timing that is neither early nor late within the valid period?)
It is now possible to give the special operation reception effect itself a strategic operation effect such as, which provides an operation reception effect that does not cause tiredness and allows the player to select the operation timing according to the mood of the player. You will be able to.

As will be described later, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. The operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the reception allowable sound is released at this point.

Here, in the above explanatory example, when the effect reception is performed in the special operation reception effect (FIG. 387), "the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives is provided. It was decided to execute "operation-induced processing using" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect was received reaches a predetermined time value". .. However, even when the special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, when the jackpot judgment is lost or the predetermined effect judgment is lost). In the case where the effect reception is performed in the special operation reception effect, the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 387). It is more desirable that the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in which the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short is performed in a different effect mode.

According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. "Operation-induced processing using the first effect member to be performed" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value". Since the production content is the same as the operation reception effect (1st and 2nd operation reception effects) that is executed only by one of them, the tension when the special operation reception effect occurs by giving such an effect risk. The feeling can be maintained favorably. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "from the timing when the effect is received". When the post-operation effect is executed in parallel with the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" that is continued until the elapsed time of is reached a predetermined time value, the first operation reception effect or the second operation It is desirable that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than when the post-operation effect appears in the reception effect.

However, this may not be detected well (detection error) even though it is operated in the special operation reception effect, and the effect may not be accepted. As a result, the validity period ends without the effect being accepted. When such a situation occurs, the player who sees the operation but the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is not performed is misunderstood as if the operation reception effect is executed only by one side. Therefore, there is a concern that the entertainment interests will decline. Therefore, as for the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the valid period, and "predetermined in the effect pattern". The first operation-induced processing using the first effect member, in which the execution state is continued until the set timing arrives, and the second, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable that "2 operation-induced processing using the effect member" is executed respectively. As a method for automatically generating (automatically accepting) an operation reception and an effect mode related to the method, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300, an appropriate combination, and further written contents. Can be used.

In the above explanatory example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect occur, it is decided to output a reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is in the permitted state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 385 to 387, the reception allowable sound output when the special operation reception effect is generated is the reception allowable sound of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect. It is intended to be used as a production sound whose reproduction state can be continued for a longer period of time than the reception allowable sound output when the production is generated.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is permitted (when an image display imitating the operation means to be operated or a gauge display indicating how much effective time remains is displayed). By confirming how long the reception allowable sound, which is the output state from, is continued, the operation reception effect is "the first execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern is reached. "Operation-induced processing using the effect member" and "operation-induced process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed respectively. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation reception effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time (delaying the timing at which the production reception is performed) that can maintain the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" in the execution state. Therefore, by the time the player recognizes whether or not the operation reception effect is a "special operation reception effect", there is a demerit that the effectary strategy that the player can select is narrowed.

However, even when it is recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception effect, it is important to leave some degree of operational strategy. Therefore, regarding the output time (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) of the reception allowable sound output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated, the predetermined operation reception effect (valid period) is set. It is desirable to execute the operation assuming that the output is set to a non-output state when a specific time, which is less than half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of the above, has elapsed. According to such a configuration, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state when a specific time less than half of the "predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation reception effect (valid period)" has elapsed. As long as the output state is maintained, it will be possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed. Therefore, the predetermined set time as the "special operation reception effect (valid period)" ( It becomes possible to provide a dramatic strategy in a state where more than half of the time of "timing tr21 to tr23)" is left.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception allowable sound output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated is received when the output state is reached. Even if it is, the output state is maintained, but for the reception allowable sound that is output when the special operation reception effect is generated, the output state is forcibly terminated when the effect reception is made while the output state is in effect. I have to. That is, in this case, when the production reception is performed in a situation where it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception production (a situation in which the above-mentioned specific time has not elapsed since the reception allowable sound is output), the operation reception production is performed. It is an important concern whether was the "special operation reception effect" and whether a more promising aspect appeared as a post-operation effect, but one of them (the operation reception effect is the "special operation reception effect"). (Is it there?) Can be easily recognized only by confirming whether or not the output state of the reception allowable sound has been completed with the reception of the production as an opportunity. For example, even if it is recognized that the output state of the reception allowable sound is not terminated and the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated as a result, the feeling is changed and "more expected as a post-operation effect". It will be expected to concentrate on "whether a high degree of aspect has appeared". In this case, "when a mode with a higher degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect, the effect is designed so that the rate of new special operation reception effect increases until the symbol is stopped. Is desirable.

Further, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, an image display imitating the operation means used as an operation target in each operation reception effect and how long the effective time is. An operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to operate by displaying the gauge display as to whether or not the remaining gauge is displayed. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is received, the gauge display remains (displayed), and the "execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. "Operation-induced processing using the effect member" and "operation-induced process using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are started respectively. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the valid period is the timing when the production is received after the production is received based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display. As a result, it becomes possible to predict whether or not the execution state related to the operation-induced processing using the first effect member will end immediately. As a method for starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, it is possible to use any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296, or an appropriate combination. It is possible.

In the special operation reception effect, if it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception effect occurs by executing the operation-related display (precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect reception before the effect reception is allowed. It is desirable to close it. With such a configuration, it is expected that the player will suitably enjoy the dramatic strategy over the entire period within the special operation reception effect (valid period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute the operation-related display (precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect reception before the effect reception is allowed. For the operation-related display, it is expected to be executed as "a short-time precursor effect inferior to the timing suggestion function" as compared with the case where a special operation reception effect with high expectation occurs. It is desirable not to have it.

Here, as an operation-related display (a short-time precursor effect lacking a timing suggestion function) performed by the effect display device 1600 prior to the validity period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect. For example, it is possible to realize an image displayed in a fade-in state (white image or the like) when an "image display imitating an operating means" appears in a fade-in manner.

FIG. 388 is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the operation-related display when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are performed, and the process related to the channel allocation of the sound data including the reception allowable sound. be.

That is, from an ergonomic point of view, when the validity period occurs, the suggestion image (operation-related display) is displayed from several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the validity period occurs. It is known that it is possible to operate so that the production reception is performed at an unprecedented timing. However, even if it is for several frames, if the "image display imitating the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode even though the validity period has not occurred, the "operation means" There may be a situation where the production is not accepted even though the operation is performed while the "image display imitating" is displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 388, the timing trA arrives several frames before the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. The operation-related display is started based on the above, but the "image display imitating the operation means" is not displayed in the normal mode in the situation where the valid period has not occurred.

More specifically, in the timing trA, "allowable" that can be realized as a fade-in image in which "an image display imitating an operating means" is displayed in a fade-in manner, a predetermined effect image, or the like. Start "Previous operation related display". Then, when the timing tr1 (or timing tr11) arrives while the "pre-allowable operation-related display" is displayed, the "image imitating the operating means" is displayed from the "pre-allowable operation-related display". "Display" will be shifted to the state of being displayed in the normal mode.

In this respect, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment outputs a reception allowable sound suggesting that the production reception is permitted when the valid period occurs. As shown in FIG. 388, the output of this permissible reception sound is not started at the timing trA, but is started at the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11).

In other words, in order to make it possible to operate so that the production reception is performed at the timing when the validity period has just occurred, the reception allowable sound is also output from several frames before the validity period occurs. I think it is desirable to let them do it. However, if the reception allowable sound is output several frames before the valid period occurs, the output timing will be different from the appearance timing of the "image display imitating the operation means". As a result, it may give a sense of incongruity as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, during the period of timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11), it is also possible to output a pre-allowance operation-related sound different from the acceptable pre-acceptance sound. However, if the permissible pre-operation related sound is output in such a short period of time, the permissible pre-operation related sound may be heard integrally with the reception permissible sound instead of an independent production sound. In the end, there is a concern that it may cause a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift had occurred.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (pre-allowable operation-related display) is displayed for several frames prior to the occurrence of the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect. While trying to start from the front, this is not intentionally executed for operation-related sounds (permissible pre-operation related sounds), and only the reception permissible sound is output when the valid period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 388, the reception allowable sound is output by allocating the "sound data including the reception allowable sound" to the channel based on the arrival of the timing tr1.

In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the assigned state of the “sound data including the accepted acceptable sound” to the channel is terminated so that the accepted allowable sound is set to the non-output state. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" itself may be made to continue the assigned state to the channel even after the timing tr2, for example, the assigned state to the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. You may do it. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 388, when the effect reception is performed between timing tr1 to tr2 (timing tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect reception is permitted is terminated and "an image display imitating the operation means" is displayed. Is hidden. On the other hand, as for the "sound data including the reception allowable sound", the assigned state to the channel is maintained, and the reception allowable sound is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the process, as described above.

FIG. 389 is a time chart showing an example of a process related to an operation-related display when a special operation reception effect is performed and a process related to channel allocation of sound data including a reception allowable sound.

As shown in FIG. 389, even in the special operation reception effect, the operation-related display (permissible pre-operation-related display) is performed from the time when the timing trB before the timing tr21 at which the valid period occurs occurs. However, the "period of timing trB to tr21" has a length more than twice (more preferably 10 times) with respect to the "period of timing trA to tr1" shown in FIG. 388, whereby the period is concerned. In the display related to the permissible pre-operation displayed in, "the degree of expectation as to whether the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted is performed in a manner with high expectation" or "the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear" is displayed. As suggested, any one of a plurality of production modes can be selectively appeared. It should be noted that the "image display imitating the operating means" is not displayed in the normal mode in the situation where the valid period has not occurred, which is the same as the case of the example shown in FIG. 388.

For example, the "pre-allowable operation-related display" started at the timing trB is different from the "pre-allowable operation-related display" shown in FIG. 388, and the "image display imitating the operation means" is later ( Explained with reference to FIGS. 241 to 259, which is a slightly story-like precursor effect such as repeatedly moving and displaying a plurality of effect images toward a portion displayed at timing tr21) and hiding the effect image at that location. Any aspect of the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" may be applied). At this time, any one of a plurality of modes can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested by which of these modes is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives in the state where the "pre-allowable operation-related display" is displayed in this way, the "image display imitating the operation means" is in the normal mode from the state where the "pre-allowable operation-related display" is displayed. It will be shifted to the displayed state.

In this respect, as described above, the special operation reception effect also outputs a reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is permitted when the valid period occurs. As shown in FIG. 389, the sound is output from the timing tr21 as a production sound to be reproduced in a part of the sound data assigned to the channel by the timing trB.

That is, as described above, in the special operation reception effect, it is significantly larger than the "minimum time required for ergonomics to enable the operation immediately after the valid period occurs" before the valid period occurs. A long time (timing trB to tr21) is used to perform "permissible pre-operation display" with high color rendering. Therefore, in order to further enhance the effectability in such an effect period (timing trB to tr21), an effect sound (permissible pre-operation related sound) corresponding to the "permissible pre-operation related display" displayed during the same period is output. It is desirable to let them do it. Further, since the production period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for performing the production, even if the production sound (sound related to the pre-allowable operation) is output within the period, the reception is permitted. There can be no inconvenience that can be heard as a sound integrated with the sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the permissible pre-operation related display is displayed by the effect display device 1600 and the permissible pre-operation related sound is output, and these output states are set to the timing tr21. I try to continue until. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives, the state in which the "permissible pre-operation related display" is displayed is changed to the state in which the "image display imitating the operating means" is displayed in the normal mode, and the "permissible pre-operation related display" is displayed. The state in which "sound" is output is changed to the state in which "acceptable sound" is output.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 389, one sound data including the reproduction section of the "acceptable pre-operation related sound" and the reproduction section of the "acceptance allowable sound" is set to the channel based on the arrival of the timing trB. By allocating to the above-mentioned effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized.

According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, the acceptance allowable sound output when the valid period occurs is a part of the sound data assigned to the channel in the form of straddling the precursor effect to the special operation reception effect. It will be output as a production sound that is reproduced during the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (when the precursor effect occurs, etc.), and the first half part is the effect according to the precursor effect (permissible pre-operation related display). By playing sounds (sounds related to pre-allowable operation), it is possible to suggest the timing when the special operation reception effect occurs, and after the valid period occurs, the channel allocation is based on the effect reception. Since it can be canceled as appropriate, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception has been performed. As an output method for "one sound data" including a reproduction section of "pre-allowable operation-related sound" and a reproduction section of "acceptance allowable sound", first, the degree of expectation (when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) After preparing multiple sound data with different jackpot symbols (ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols), any one of those sound data (one sound data) can be used as the result of jackpot determination (or effect determination (notice determination, etc.)). It is desirable to realize the above-mentioned effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively allocating to the channel based on the above. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the reproduction section of the "allowable pre-operation related sound (precursor effect)", but different in the reproduction section of the "acceptance allowance sound (operation acceptance effect)". It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

That is, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is performed between the timings tr21 and tr22, the state in which the effect reception is permitted is terminated and the "image display imitating the operation means" is hidden. In addition to this, the allocation state for the channel is also terminated for "sound data including acceptable acceptable sound", and the output related to the acceptable acceptable sound is forcibly terminated in the middle of the process. As described above. Therefore, by confirming whether the reception allowable sound is forcibly turned off when the production reception is performed, the player can confirm that the special operation reception production was executed even after the production reception was performed. Will be able to recognize.

Even if it is one sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half part) of the effect sound (permissible pre-operation related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (permissible pre-operation related display) is in the playback state. In the situation (timing trB to tr21), even if the operation by the player is performed, it is not forcibly terminated. Only in the situation (timing tr21 to tr22) in which the section (second half) of the effect sound (acceptable acceptance sound) corresponding to the valid period is in the playback state, the allocation state to the channel is canceled based on the operation by the player. It becomes.

The one sound data (sound data including the pre-allowable operation-related sound and the acceptable pre-allowance sound) is assigned before the timing trB, and is already in the assigned state in the timing trB. May be good. Further, as described above, the allocation state for the channel may be continued after the timing tr22, and for example, the allocation state for the channel may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data ends at the timing tr22.

In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the assigned state of the “sound data including the accepted acceptable sound” to the channel is terminated so that the accepted allowable sound is set to the non-output state. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" itself may be made to continue the assigned state to the channel even after the timing tr2, for example, the assigned state to the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. You may do it. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable accepted sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

In the configurations shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, "a plurality of acceptable reception sounds having different lengths for maintaining the output state" are prepared as reception allowable sounds accompanying the occurrence of the operation reception effect, and the effect reception is performed. The special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect), which have different effects after the operation, generate different reception allowable sounds. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the reception allowable sound is continued, there is a demerit that the above-mentioned dramatic strategy is narrowed, but the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect). It becomes possible to recognize which of the two operation reception effects) is occurring.

Moreover, for the plurality of reception allowable sounds, the first reception allowable sound (special operation reception production) whose output state is terminated when the operation by the player is received and the output state continues. The second reception permissible sound (first and second operation reception production) is included. Therefore, when the operation is performed so that the production reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, the special operation reception is performed by confirming whether the reception permissible sound output state is terminated when the production reception is performed. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

However, the reception allowable sound should be in a non-output state when the valid period ends, and the output state is maintained when the post-operation effect is started. If there is, it may interfere with the production. In this regard, in the above description example, the reception effect sound whose output state is terminated when the effect reception is performed is the first reception allowable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( It is used as a special operation reception production).

That is, in this case, when the production reception is performed in the output state of the "second reception allowable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively short", the output state is maintained. However, since the time setting value for maintaining the output state of the second reception allowable sound is short in the first place, it will soon be in the non-output state, and it can be said that it does not interfere with the production. On the other hand, when the production reception is performed in the output state of "the first reception allowable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long", the original time setting for maintaining the output state is performed. Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so it does not interfere with the production.

Moreover, by confirming how long the output state of the reception allowable sound is continued, it is recognized whether the special operation reception effect or the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is occurring. Even if there is a player who wants to use it, if the output state of the reception allowable sound is maintained at the stage when the time setting value for the second reception allowable sound has elapsed, it is not the second reception allowable sound but the first reception allowable sound. It is possible to predict that is in the output situation. In this regard, by confirming that the first reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state when the production reception is generated, without confirming that the output state of the first reception allowable sound is terminated. It will be possible to confirm at an early stage whether the prediction that the special operation reception effect is occurring is correct.

Further, in the configurations shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, the pre-allowable operation-related display suggesting that the valid period will soon occur is performed, but the pre-allowed operation-related display is performed. The operation-related display includes a first permissible pre-operation-related display (see FIG. 388) having a short display time and a second pre-allowable operation-related display (see FIG. 389) having a long display time. In this regard, when the first permissible pre-operation related display with a short display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptable permissible sound" is not assigned to the channel, and " By assigning "sound data including acceptable sound" to the channel, the acceptable sound is output. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first permissible pre-operation related display is not output, but the operation from the time when the valid period occurs can be promoted without causing a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred. become able to.

On the other hand, when the second permissible pre-operation related display having a long display time is performed, "sound data including the accepted permissible sound" is transmitted to the channel from the time when the second permissible pre-operation related display is performed. The reception allowable sound is set to the output state by setting the allocation state and setting the reproduction section of the reception allowable sound to arrive at the timing when the valid period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (when the precursor effect occurs, etc.), and the first half part is the precursor effect (permissible pre-operation related display). It is possible to suggest the timing of the special operation reception effect by playing the effect sound (sound related to the pre-allowable operation) according to the above, and after the valid period occurs, it is based on the effect reception. Since the channel allocation can be appropriately canceled, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception has been performed.

That is, in the permissible pre-operation related display shown in FIG. 389, the permissible pre-operation related sound corresponding to the output is output, and the acceptance permissible sound is further output when the valid period occurs, but the permissible pre-operation related sound shown in FIG. 388 is output. In the display, the corresponding pre-allowed operation-related sound is not output, and the acceptance allowable sound is output when the valid period occurs.

In the above-mentioned explanatory examples shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, the movable decorative body, and the like can be used as the "effect member". Further, as the "first effect member", any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted, and as the "second effect member", any one of them can be adopted. It is possible to adopt any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, which is different from the "first effect member".

Further, in the above explanatory example, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same or may be different between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). When the operating means to be operated is different, the images displayed within each valid period will be different.

In the first operation reception effect, it was decided to execute "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" as a post-operation effect. "Operation-induced processing using the first effect member that continues the execution state until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "The execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" The operation-induced processing using the second effect member to be performed ”may be executed as the post-operation effect, respectively. Further, the operation-induced processing using an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, but in the post-operation effect according to the first operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The cause processing is also executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

In the second operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" is executed as the post-operation effect. However, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" and "predetermined timing in the effect pattern has arrived". The operation-induced processing using the second effect member, in which the execution state is continued until the operation is performed, may be executed as the post-operation effect. Further, the operation-induced processing using an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, but in the post-operation effect according to the second operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The causal process is also executed assuming that the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received is continued until a predetermined time value is reached.

In the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received" in advance. It was decided to execute "operation-induced processing using the second effect member, which is continued until the specified time value is reached" as a post-operation effect, but an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is used. The operation-induced processing used may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, the operation-induced processing that is executed assuming that the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received are predetermined. It may be a mixture of operation-based processing that is executed as being continued until the value is reached.

Further, in the above explanatory examples shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, the valid period of the special operation reception effect is set as a longer time value than the valid period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I am trying to do it. By setting such a long time, it becomes possible to enjoy the above-mentioned effective period with a dramatic strategy.

In the first permissible pre-operation related display (see FIG. 388), which has a short display time, "expectation degree as to whether the post-operation effect performed when the effect reception is performed is performed in a highly expected manner" or "big hit". Although "expectation for the appearance of the symbol" is not suggested, in the second permissible pre-operation related display (see FIG. 389), which has a long display time, "expectation for the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted" is expected. It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation that the game will be performed in a high manner" or "the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear".

In the "valid period of the special operation reception effect" set as a relatively long time value, by making one of multiple display modes with different expectations appear, "after the operation performed when the effect reception is performed" It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation that the production will be performed in a highly expected manner" or "the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear".

Further, in the special operation reception production, regardless of the timing of the production reception within the valid period, the "production by the first production member generated by the production reception" is caused by the "production reception". In order to make the player recognize that the content of the effect is the same as the effect after the operation, that the relationship is such that the execution state is terminated earlier than "the effect by the second effect member generated". desirable.

In the above explanatory examples shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, as the pachinko machine 1, the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect can be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. However, this does not occur because the first operation reception effect is not installed, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be allowed to occur based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not occur because it is not installed, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be allowed to occur based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect may not be generated as they are not installed, and the special operation reception effect may be allowed to occur based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. ..

The special operation reception effect shown in the above explanatory example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389 outputs specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to the channel in a suppressed mode or silently. Among them, it may generate a state in which production reception is permitted.

[More detailed color rendering of acceptable sound]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can execute the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (notice effect, etc.) is selectively to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected effects (such as notice effects) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect by the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative pattern being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement of the movable body are performed. The expected effect is provided as an effect having "a function suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by a background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the fluctuation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the design production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production reception is accepted. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (valid period) that allows. However, as will be described later, the mode of the reception allowable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated is set to be different depending on the result of the effect determination, whereby the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is intended to suggest the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, the operation acceptance is permitted. It is possible to generate a reception effect (valid period). However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the operation reception effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. ..

In addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern", the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. You may also prepare. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable not to do so or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is predetermined for the effect member to be the effect as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since only the post-operation effect that causes the change (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one of the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the operation is performed. Reception effect (valid period) The effect of the effect itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline until the effect is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the design effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" corresponding to the variation pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of the low-expected non-suppressed reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expected variation pattern (specific variation pattern), the variation pattern (effect pattern) is used. Whether the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, or channel assignment It is possible to at least generate a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while it is set to (such as being completed).

In such a configuration, when the output in the non-suppressed mode of "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is maintained when the operation opportunity is given (low expectation non-suppression reception effect), "BGM reproduction" (Specific type of production sound) ”may be output in a suppressed mode or silently, or may be in a non-output state (suppressed operation reception effect), and the mode related to those operation reception effects (low expectation non-suppressive reception). Since the ratio of winning big hits (expectation level) will differ depending on the production and high expectation suppression reception production), the performance when the operation opportunity is given (when the operation opportunity is given, " BGM reproduction (directing sound of a specific type) "can be suppressed or not, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

However, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in the suppression mode or silently when the operation opportunity is given, so that it is compared with the low expectation non-suppression reception effect. There is concern that the production will be poor.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a specific sound that is not output when a low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated is a reception allowable sound. It is possible to output as. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the poor performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the reception permissible sound output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated is larger than the reception permissible sound output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. It is used as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long period of time, and this also preferably suppresses the poor performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

On the other hand, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, the "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in the suppression mode or silently, or is put into a non-output state. There is also an aspect that when a post-production occurs, it becomes possible to make the production sound corresponding to it stand out, and in this respect, it can be said that it is useful for improving the game entertainment. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the reception allowable sound output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated is received when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. And, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the production reception has been made. As a result, it becomes possible to make the effect sound according to the effect after the operation stand out without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect is set to "If the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed, the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends. Not only can it be generated by the "non-automatic reception mode", but also "an automatic reception mode that can generate the post-operation effect even if the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception". It can also be generated by.

That is, when the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed even if the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not perform the operation, and as a result, the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation. However, as will be described later, more strictly speaking, the output time required for the effect sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time required for the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect is detected by the operation. It is designed to be shorter than when it was done.

Further, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the operation is not detected, the effect reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within the set time (automatic button function is enabled). Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically generated effect reception. That is, in this case, since the production reception will always occur by the time the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, the production reception may be performed within the time after the specific timing within the set time. It will disappear, and the length of the valid period for which the production reception is allowed will be substantially shortened. As a result, unlike the case where the effect is started after the operation after the set time is over, the automatic button function is enabled by accelerating the effect tempo instead of causing an effect delay. It will be possible to realize it.

In addition, if the automatic button function is enabled within the set time in this way, the operation opportunity will be substantially lost even though the set time has not expired. It is expected that the player will be afraid of this and will actively operate at an earlier stage within the set time, or will play with a sense of tension in the production.

In order to obtain such effects, the "gauge display of how much effective time remains" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is until the specific timing when the automatic button function is enabled. It is desirable to display it as suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses, not suggesting the remaining time. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, the effect reception is always performed before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes "0".

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, not only the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode but also the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated. It is possible to output a reception permissible sound that suggests that the production reception is in an acceptable state or that the production reception is in an acceptable state. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably suppress a situation in which an effect reception is automatically generated due to forgetting to operate and the effect reception cannot be generated by one's own operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated, it is specified that the operation reception effect is not output when the operation reception effect is generated in the non-automatic reception mode. Since the sound can be output as the reception allowable sound, by confirming the type of the reception allowable sound, an operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode instead of the non-automatic reception mode is generated. You will be able to recognize that you are.

On the other hand, in the post-operation effect, there is usually a risk of the effect being executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, it is not always good to operate the post-operation effect so as to improve the game entertainment. There is also an aspect that it is not always. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the reception allowable sound is output for a sufficient time to indicate that the production reception is permitted, the reception allowable sound in the output state is output. By ending it relatively early, we are trying to create "a time when we can think about whether or not to generate a production reception" while the reception allowable sound is not output.

However, even in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, if the reception allowable sound is terminated early, there is a concern that it may lead to a misunderstanding that "the effect reception is no longer permitted due to the function of the automatic button". Occurs. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, the output state of the reception allowable sound is maintained for a relatively long time, whereby the automatic button is not yet functioning and the production reception is permitted. It is designed to suggest that it is in a state, and by extension, it becomes possible to encourage the player to operate it with a sense of security that "the automatic button is not yet functioning".

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect, the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is set to a non-output state. The operation opportunity is given while the suppression reception effect (here, high expectation suppression reception effect) that gives the operation opportunity and the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" are output in the non-suppression mode. While the non-suppressed reception effect (here, low-expected non-suppressed reception effect) can be generated in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, the effect reception is permitted, or the effect reception. There is a technical feature in that the reception permissible sounds, which suggest that the sounds are in an acceptable state, are generated in a way that enhances their unique directing performance.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In explaining the technical features, if the "acceptable sound for reception" is explained again, the "allowable sound for reception" means that the production reception is permitted. It suggests that the output is started within the set time and the production reception is allowed, or the output is started before the set time when the production reception is allowed to start and the production reception is allowed. It suggests that the sound will be in a certain state, and is output as a directing sound such as "Pickin". However, if the output state is set before the set time that allows the production reception occurs, the output state of the "acceptable sound" must be maintained so as to straddle the timing when the set time occurs ( It is required to be in the output state even within the set time (within the period when the production reception is allowed), and it is more than the time from when the "reception allowable sound" is put into the output state until the set time occurs. It is desirable to set so that the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the "acceptable sound" is longer. In this sense, the "acceptable sound" is one that can be output only when the set time (valid period) occurs, and is in the output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that it is an output sound within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) according to an operation by a player or with the passage of an output time.

Further, the "acceptable sound" may be assigned to a channel and output as a single production sound data (see FIG. 388), or another production sound (for example, a set time (valid period)). ) Is assigned to the channel and output as one effect sound data combined with the precursor effect that is executed before the occurrence of) and the effect sound that is output in accordance with the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect". (See FIG. 389), and the implementation method may be appropriately adopted.

FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the low expectation non-suppressed reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

Now, as a result of the start condition being established (pending digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the change pattern determination being performed, the "predetermined change" among the "low expected change patterns in which even the reach state is not formed" Assuming that "Pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect description according to the predetermined variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the predetermined variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the advance notice effect is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (notice effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) related to the above-selected "predetermined variation pattern". Including each effect example described below, the effect pattern determination (sub control side) is performed based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination (main control side), and the advance notice determination (sub) is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination. When performing the control side), regarding the processing related to the advance notice effect, the "variation pattern determination" may be replaced with the "effect pattern determination" and the "variation pattern" may be replaced with the "effect pattern".

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as shown in FIG. 390 (b), the variation effect of the decorative pattern is performed. When the timing tr32, which has passed a predetermined time from the start, arrives, an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated during the execution period of the effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is
-"Non-suppressed reception effect (Fig.)" That sets the set time at which the effect reception is allowed while the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. 390 (a), (b)) ”, and ・ If the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) where the effect reception is allowed, the post-operation effect does not occur and the effect is concerned. "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 390 (j))" at which the set time ends
It is designed to be generated as a "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), the operation reception effect is generated by the "BGM reproduction sound" being suppressed. Since the set time (valid period) that allows the reception of the production is suddenly set without any effect such as suggesting (unsuppressed reception production), the player is surprised. It becomes a form of sagging, and delays are likely to occur at the beginning of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time is terminated without the post-operation effect (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making people aware of the risk of missing the opportunity to generate the post-operation effect, it is preferable to feel the tension when the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) is being executed. You will be able to maintain it.

However, although it is executed as such "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect", the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is terminated without the post-operation effect occurring, contrary to the player's intention. If such things occur frequently, there is a concern that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 390 (b), (c), and (g), a set time (timing tr32 to tr33) at which the effect reception is permitted occurs. When the timing tr31 arrives a little earlier, the output of the "acceptable sound" is started, and the output state is maintained so as to straddle the timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the production reception is permitted at the timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, and "after the operation against the player's intention". It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently indicate that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is terminated without producing an effect. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, and is, for example, matched to the generation timing of the set time generation timing tr32. May be generated.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!" As the "acceptable sound" and "press!" A second permissible sound that is output as a message sound such as is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 390 (d) and 390 (h), in the operation reception effect (valid period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern). The second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. The delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when a person tries to operate.

By the way, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against the sudden setting of the set time (valid period) or the execution as a non-automatic reception mode. It is thought that some players may try not to miss the opportunity of post-operation production by repeatedly hitting the operation means (here, operation button 410) from the time when the production reception is not allowed. Be done. However, in this case, since the effect reception is permitted and the post-operation effect is started immediately, the started effect is "the one performed according to the effect reception (post-operation effect)". It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere notice production that has nothing to do with the production reception", and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 390 (particularly, FIG. 390 (c)), in the low expectation non-suppressive reception effect, the “acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the production reception is performed at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (valid period) itself is terminated, while the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the first 1 The output state is maintained until the timing when the output as the allowable sound ends (the same timing as when there is no operation (FIG. 390 (g)). As a result, the started production is "according to the production reception". It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "what is being performed (post-operation production)" or "what is automatically generated as a mere advance notice production that has nothing to do with the production reception". become able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (No. 1) is used as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the 1 effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in the state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the timing tr32 for which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 uses the operation means targeted for operation in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect. A model image is displayed, and a gauge display that suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is displayed. As a display method for the image and gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) can be adopted, and the display images (image, gauge display) have been accepted for production. Based on this, it will be hidden (both will be hidden at the same timing).

However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a "special effect mode (automatic button effect state)" that enables the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. , It may be possible to set and cancel the setting to the "special effect mode" by the operation by the player. That is, in this case, even if the operation reception effect occurs during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the operation reception effect is set to the "special effect mode". , "Non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and will be executed in the above-mentioned "automatic reception mode", and only when it is not set to "special effect mode" Will occur as. However, in the specification (particularly, "more detailed color rendering of acceptable sound reception" and related descriptions), unless otherwise specified, the "special production mode" is not set. Occasionally, it is described as an example of production when the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with a "special production mode".

FIGS. 391 and 392 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

Now, the start condition is established (pending digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, "SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) is highly expected. Assuming that the "specific fluctuation pattern" is selected from the "variation pattern", the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect description according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the effect determination is made within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of is additionally executed for the effect (effect pattern) related to the above-selected "specific fluctuation pattern".

However, as described above, in the effect (effect pattern) related to the "specific fluctuation pattern", as shown in FIG. 391 (b), regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). In addition, when the timing tr42 (timing within the SP reach state) in which a specific time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol arrives, the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr42 within the specific fluctuation pattern is described.
-A "suppression reception effect" (FIG. 391 (a)) for setting a set time during which the effect reception is permitted while the "BGM reproduction sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is output in a suppression mode or silently. , (B)) ”, and ・ Even if the operation for the operating means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) where the effect reception is allowed. When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and the post-operation effect is started based on the effect reception being performed. Aspect (see FIG. 391 (j)) "
It is designed to be generated as a "suppression / automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in a suppressed mode or silently, a method of setting a silent section (suppression section) in advance in the data of the "BGM reproduction sound" itself or the "BGM reproduction sound" itself. It is possible to adopt a method of changing the setting of the volume value for the channel to which "BGM reproduction sound" is assigned to a suppression value (for example, "0"), a combination thereof, or the like. As will be described later, this "suppression / automatic reception effect" is also referred to as a "second suppression operation reception effect", and the suppression mode here is also referred to as a "strong suppression mode".

According to such a configuration, "BGM reproduction sound" is suppressed during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) related to the specific fluctuation pattern). Since the set time (valid period) at which the effect reception is allowed is set with the effect such as suggesting the occurrence of the operation reception effect by outputting the mode or silence (suppression reception). (Direction), from the player's point of view, it becomes easier to perform the operation immediately after the operation reception effect is generated. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives at the latest. Therefore (automatic reception mode), it becomes possible to enjoy the operation in a sense of security that the post-operation effect generated in the operation reception effect at the time of high expectation is not overlooked.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as in the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", FIGS. 391 (b), (c), (g) As shown in the above, when the timing tr41 arrives shortly before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) at which the production reception is allowed occurs, the "acceptance allowable sound" is started to be output and straddles the timing tr42. I try to maintain the output state. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM reproduction sound" is being output in a suppressed mode or silently, a state in which the effect reception is permitted at the timing tr41 will soon occur. It is expected that it will be possible to recognize what to do, and it will be difficult to frequently say that "contrary to the player's intention, the production reception is done by enabling the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation". Become so. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) is generated, and is generated, for example, in accordance with the generation timing tr42 of the set time. You may do so.

However, with respect to the timing tr40 at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is shifted from the non-suppressed mode output state to the suppressed mode or the silent output state (or the non-output state), the above-mentioned operation is performed. In order to appropriately obtain the effect (suppression reception effect), as shown in FIGS. 391 (a) to (c), a relationship such as "length of timing tr40 to tr41> length of timing tr41 to tr42". It can be said that it is important to set the sound to arrive well before the "output start timing tr41 of the above-mentioned reception allowable sound that occurs in advance of the set time" so as to have the property.

Further, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (c), (d), (g), and (h), the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" is performed. As a "reception permissible sound", not only the first permissible sound output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!", But also the second permissible sound output as a message sound such as "press!" Also, when the timing tr41 arrives, the output is started at the same time, and the output state is maintained in the form of straddling the timing tr42.

According to such a configuration, the effect display device 1600 determines which of the plurality of operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) included in the pachinko machine 1 should be operated. Since there is a possibility that the image of the operation means to be operated can be recognized from the time when the image is not yet displayed (timing tr41 to tr42), the operation reception effect is immediately generated. It becomes easier to operate. That is, as will be described later, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. When there is a "selection" and the operation button 410 is the operation target, a message sound such as "press!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Deliver the sword!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

In the production example shown in FIG. 391, the output of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is started at the same time, but the timing at which the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are started to be output is different from each other. The output state may be sequentially set. In this case, the output of only one of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound may be started from a state in which the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and 391 (h), the "first permissible sound" is adopted as the effect sound to be output for a relatively short time, and the "second permissible sound" is adopted. Is adopted as a production sound that is output over a relatively long time, but the long-short relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, with respect to the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound", as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and 391 (h), the output states shall be maintained for different times from each other, and their outputs shall be maintained. It is desirable that the time when the state ends (the time when the state is made inaudible) arrives at different timings before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable sound" is in. It will be possible to do so, and it is expected that it will be difficult for the player to frequently say that "the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation, contrary to the player's intention".
-The first situation where both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" maintain the output state.-The output state of one of the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" is maintained. However, the other is the output state is terminated (inaudible state). Second situation-Both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" are terminated in the output state. Third situation (made inaudible)

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 and the "suppression / automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. The same production sound (for example, "Pickin!") Is output as the "first allowable sound". That is, in this case, the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is output as a production sound that is not output by the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", but the effect sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds. Regarding the first permissible sound), since it can be output as a production sound that is also output in the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception production", when the "BGM reproduction sound" is suppressed. While maintaining the effectability appropriately (second permissible sound), it becomes possible to more easily recognize that the effect reception is in an acceptable state (first permissible sound).

The timing tr41 to tr42 (or the timing tr31 to tr32) when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is output in advance of the set time (valid period) or the image display. The time may be the minimum time (for example, 1 frame) in the control (processing) unit, or may be 2 frames or more. That is, if it is possible to output the set time (valid period) and the image display in advance as much as possible, the player is in a state where the production reception is permitted and the operation means targeted for operation. Since there is a possibility that it will be possible to recognize which is earlier by the preceding time, the period until the set time ends and the timing when the automatic button function is enabled are It will be expected to prevent people from forgetting to operate within the period until they arrive.

By the way, as described above, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode, the operation opportunity may be lost by enabling the automatic button function (timing tr42A) even within the set time (valid period). Is. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIGS. 391 (c) and 391 (d), unlike the case of the production example shown in FIG. 390 (c), the reception allowable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is used. If the effect reception is made while the effect is in the output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the effect reception is made. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is performed, the output of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is interrupted at that time, and the effect reception is permitted by this (the production reception is permitted). Since it becomes possible to recognize that the validity period) has expired, "a state in which the production reception has not yet occurred and the automatic button function can be activated (a state in which the operation opportunity can be lost)". It becomes possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is in. If the operation is performed and the production is accepted before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period), the production is performed when the production is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not enabled even if the timing tr42A arrives because the state in which the reception is permitted is terminated.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, if the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr42a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (in the figure, the effect display device 1600 (timing tr42a)) is used as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception. The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are at least generated. More specifically, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period) at a specific timing that arrives after the timing tr43. While it is hidden (invisible), the output of the effect sound after operation (effect sound) is maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is received. ing.

However, as shown in FIG. 391, regardless of when the effect is received within the set time (valid period), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is the "BGM reproduction sound". It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained at the time when the timing tr44 for returning the output from the suppressed state (silent state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode arrives. On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the output state is terminated at the timing tr44 when the "BGM reproduction sound" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both the "sound of BGM reproduction" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode and the content related to the display effect is switched, so that the effectability is improved. It is expected that it will be significantly changed to improve the color rendering of the game. The "sound of BGM reproduction" may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. Further, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be terminated at a specific timing after the timing tr44 instead of the timing tr44.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, when the timing tr42 for which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays the operation means that is the operation target in the high expectation suppression reception effect. A model image is displayed, and a gauge display that suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is displayed. In this respect, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in view of the fact that a message sound (for example, "press!") As the second allowable sound is output, the effect display device 1600 also has a non-automatic reception mode. A message display (for example, "press!") That does not appear in the operation reception effect executed in is displayed. As the display method of the image, the gauge display, and the message display, for example, the methods shown in FIGS. 206 (Z3) and 220 (R2) can be adopted, and these display images (images, etc.) can be adopted. The gauge display and message display) will be hidden (both are hidden at the same timing) when the set time has not yet elapsed based on the occurrence of the production reception. The message display does not necessarily have to completely match the content of the message sound, and may be any one that prompts the operation.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to 391 (i), before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function within the set time (valid period) is enabled. While the output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible state), the message display is designed to maintain the display state even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled, and further. After the automatic button function is enabled, it is not hidden (invisible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends arrives. The display state may be maintained even after that. Since the set time (valid period) is terminated when the effect reception is performed, it is actually terminated at the latest when the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated arrives. Therefore, "timing tr43 at which the set time ends" means, strictly speaking, the timing at which the set time ends when the set time is supposed to continue, and the time set by the timing tr42 is set. It is the timing that arrives when the timing tr42 has elapsed.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or the operation detection for the operation target prompted by the message display. You will be able to suggest to the player that you are not in the situation. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in both the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) that is not executed in the automatic button mode and the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) that is executed in the automatic button mode. Within the set time (valid period), the remaining time display (gauge display) that suggests the remaining time until the end of the state in which the production reception is permitted ends can be performed. Then, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time elapses. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when this time becomes "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without the operation being detected, the automatic button function is enabled and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, the production reception is not allowed even if the set time has not yet elapsed since the specific timing tr42A has arrived. Therefore, if the "remaining time display (gauge display) suggesting the remaining time until the end of the state in which the effect reception is permitted ends" is performed within the set time of the operation reception effect (FIG. 391), it is normal. It is conceivable to dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, the effect reception is permitted after the specific timing tr42A arrives. Even though it disappears, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically changed based on the time until the set time elapses, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. I am trying to display it. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time becomes "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0". However, here, since the stage is always shifted to the state where the production reception is not allowed before the set time becomes "0", the production reception is not allowed when the gauge amount is left. It will be transferred to the state.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is performed by enabling the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is intentionally left, so that the player's intention On the contrary, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "loss of operation opportunity", which makes it possible to operate at an early stage regardless of the remaining gauge amount in the set time (valid period) after the next time. You will be able to encourage them to do.

Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed by the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the effect reception is generated by the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the set time elapses (FIG. 391). Gauge display) can be hidden (invisible). On the other hand, when the effect reception occurs by enabling the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in the state where the set time has not elapsed, and at least the setting is made. Until the end of the lapse of time, "a mode of dynamic display in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) will continue to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest to the player that the production reception is not performed by the operation detection for the operation target for which the operation is urged by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

As described above, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. There is a case. That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr32 in FIG. 390, there is no "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target", and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, it is possible to set the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred, which is against the intention of the player. It is desirable to prevent the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means of the above is operated, it is desirable that the effect reception is performed and the effect is executed after the operation. That is, there is a possibility that the player may be confused if a situation appears in which the production reception is not performed even though the operation means is operated, and it is appropriate to interrupt the erroneous operation state in such a situation. Since it is harsh to further request an operation for the operation means on the side, even if an erroneous operation state is maintained, the production reception is performed when the operation means on the side to be operated is operated. It is desirable to do.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 391, the matters described in the above-mentioned "suppressed operation sound output processing (FIG. 178)" and the description thereof can be appropriately adopted. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, and tr44 in the production example shown in FIG. 391 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, and ts16 in the production example shown in FIG. 178, respectively. Become.

However, as described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode or silence, so that the effectability is poor compared to the non-suppression operation reception effect. Is a concern. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the reception permissible sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is larger than the reception permissible sound output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are provided. It is prepared, and any one of the plurality of embodiments is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. Here, the "first aspect" as the first allowable sound is the aspect shown in FIGS. 390 (c) and (g) and FIGS. 391 (c) and 391 (g), and is the "time maintained as an output state". Is set as the shortest aspect among the above-mentioned plurality of aspects. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped differs depending on which of the above-mentioned plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

It should be noted that "which of the plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound" and "which of the plurality of operating means is used as the operation target" are obtained as separate determination results within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination as one determination result. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permissible case is either the case where the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the case where the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable to be able to select it as a sound. Further, also in the second aspect and the third aspect, it is possible to select either the case where the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the case where the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. You may do so.

FIG. 392 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the second mode is used as the first reception allowable sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

As shown in FIG. 392, this effect example is basically the same as the case of the above effect example described with reference to FIG. 391, including the generation conditions and the effect contents (further, description of another example thereof, etc.). Is the same. However, in this effect example, as a result of the advance notice effect determination, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, which is longer than the first mode, in the timing tr41, instead of the first mode. The difference is that the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained for a longer time than that of the second permissible sound.

According to such a configuration, the reception allowable sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output in a longer time than the reception allowable sound (first mode) output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. Since it is possible to output as a sound that is maintained, the performance is suitably maintained even in a situation where "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently when an operation opportunity is given. You will be able to.

Further, in order to improve the effectability in the suppression operation reception effect, for the first allowable sound output in the second aspect, a sound that is not output as the reception allowable sound in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 should be used. It is desirable to do.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 391 and 392, there are "a case where the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "a case where the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. It is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is targeted for operation. Therefore, also in this effect example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 391 (for example, "press!"). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 392 (c) and 392 (g), the first permissible sound is output in the second mode. However, by ending the output state of the first allowable sound (inaudible state) before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled, the automatic button function can be used in this production example as well. It is possible to estimate how much time is left until the activation timing tr42A arrives from the output status of the reception allowable sound.

In particular, in this effect example, the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained even after the output state of the "second permissible sound" output in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 is completed. By confirming this, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled arrives, as compared with the case of the production example of FIG. 391. become. Further, by outputting only the first permissible sound out of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound in a longer alternative mode (second mode), the player side is first commonly used. 2 Based on the timing at which the output state of the permissible sound ends, the "remaining time until the timing tr42A arrives" is estimated, and the first permissible sound is selected with a sense of security that the estimation is performed as usual. Since it becomes possible to make more detailed guesses in a challenging manner by using it, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In the production example shown in FIG. 392, other matters are the same as in the production example shown in FIG. 391. For example, when the production reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the output is output. The point that the state is terminated halfway is the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 391.

In addition, when the high expectation suppression reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) occurs in the state set to the above-mentioned "special effect mode", the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled is set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be enabled by the player's will, the message is displayed even if the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function. It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until the timing tr43, and is hidden before the timing tr43 (the timing when the effect reception is made or the timing delayed by the above-mentioned time). At this time, regarding the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled, when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, it does not arrive in the output state, but the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. When it is done, it is desirable that it arrives in the output state and functions so as to terminate the first allowable sound output in the second aspect in the middle.

Further, there is a case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) is output in the first mode and a case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) is output in the second mode. , Not only the time that the output state is maintained is different from each other, but also different production sounds may be used. For example, when the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) is output in the first mode, a production sound such as "pickin" is output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) is the second. When outputting in a mode, it is possible to output a sound effect such as "gaogao".

In the above explanatory example, the low expected fluctuation pattern is defined as "a fluctuation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed", but it is defined as "a fluctuation pattern in which the symbol is stopped without reaching the SP reach state", and the low expectation is defined. When a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation patterns, the effect example shown in FIG. 390 may be performed.

Further, it is desirable that the "suppression / automatic reception effect" exemplified in the above explanation example cannot appear in the low expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) in the normal gaming state. The "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in the explanatory example may also appear in the highly expected variation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern) including the above "specific variation pattern" in the normal gaming state. .. That is, even if it is a high-expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the production pattern), it basically corresponds to a low-expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the low-expected fluctuation pattern) within the period before the production progresses to the SP reach state such as the non-reach state. Since the effect that appears in the effect pattern) is also executed, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in FIG. 390 can also appear within the period. Even with such a configuration, when "suppression / automatic reception effect" appears (high expectation fluctuation pattern), when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" appears (low expectation fluctuation pattern or high expectation fluctuation). It can be said that the rate (expectation) at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that of the pattern).

In the low expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern) that occurs in the normal gaming state, "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently when giving an operation opportunity. It is desirable that the low expectation non-suppressive reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. It should be noted that this is a case where the "special effect mode" is not set, or the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the "special effect mode".

Further, regarding the length of time from "timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled" to "timing tr43 at which the set time elapses after the production reception is permitted", the minimum time in the control (processing) unit ( For example, it may be 1 frame), or it may be 2 frames or more. For example, the message display can be visually recognized at "timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled", and such a visible state is at least "timing tr43 where the set time elapses after the production reception is permitted". If it continues until it arrives, it will be possible to suggest the original length as the set time (valid period), and there is a possibility that it can be recognized that the operation by the player was not performed. You will be able to do it. In the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, a message sound (second allowable sound) or a message display is output for the "timing when the automatic button function is activated" within the set time in any operation reception effect. It is desirable to output in the above-mentioned relationship (see FIGS. 391 (h), (i) and 392 (h), (i)).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIGS. 391 (i) and 392 (i), "the time for which the message display is left after the production reception is made (in the example in the figure, the timing tr42A to tr43). (Time minutes) ”is also appearing when the production reception occurs at other timings (Fig. 390 (e), Fig. 391 (e), etc.) due to the standardization of the program, but they are separate. By using the program of, it may occur only when the automatic button function is enabled. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 390 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 391 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr42a. Become.

Further, in the above explanatory examples (FIGS. 390 to 392), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect) by the speaker (second effect member). Although the sound) is started at the same time, the post-operation effect may be performed so as to shift the start time of those effects. For example, in a situation where the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is started at the timing tr42, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) displays the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display). The display effect (liquid crystal display) after the operation is displayed according to the timing when the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 390 to 392 is hidden (or the timing when the fade-out process is started), which has not been displayed yet. If you start it, you will be able to smoothly switch the display effect.

As described in the above-mentioned "Suppressed operation sound output processing (FIG. 178)", even in the production examples shown in FIGS. The effect (for example, the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect") may be performed. In this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes having different expectations for the appearance of the jackpot symbol as the precursory effect, and to perform the precursory effect in any of these modes. Further, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the precursor sound produced during the period in which the precursor sound is performed, and which of the plurality of modes is output as the precursor sound depends on the execution mode of the precursor sound. It is desirable to make a selection. On the other hand, regarding the first permissible sound, the first mode and the second mode are displayed in the image to be operated, the gauge display suggesting the remaining time, and the message display of "press!". It is output in any of a plurality of modes including the mode.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 is generated, the specific sound (second) that is not output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is generated. Since the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound of the embodiment can be output as the reception permissible sound, it is possible to preferably suppress the poor performance when the suppression operation reception effect occurs. Will be able to. Further, by confirming the type of the reception allowable sound, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is occurring in the automatic reception mode instead of the non-automatic reception mode.

Further, regarding the reception allowable sound of the non-suppressed operation reception effect (FIG. 390), the first allowable sound that outputs the reception allowable sound as a sound effect and the second allowable sound that outputs the reception allowable sound as a message sound are used. Of these, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output, whereas the reception permissible sound of the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) is the first permissible sound and the first permissible sound. 2 Both allowable sounds are output. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the effectability when the suppression operation reception effect is being performed.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppressed operation reception effect (FIG. 390) and the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) (FIGS. 390 and 391). ) And a case where a different production sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIG. 390, FIG. 392).

That is, if the reception allowable sound different from the normal time is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the production reception is permitted, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, the second permissible sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not normally output, while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is also output during normal times. Is desirable. Then, while the reception allowable sound is output in such a mode, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is also output as a staging sound (second mode) that is not normally output with a predetermined probability. If the rate (expectation) at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when it is output in the first aspect, "BGM reproduction (specification)" is made to recognize that the production reception is permitted. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the effectability when the "type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. In order to obtain such an effect, when the suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific fluctuation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first reception allowable sound in the effect determination such as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable that the ratio for determining the effect is higher than the ratio for determining that the second aspect is to be output.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, not only the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also the operation reception effect (FIG. 391, 392) executed in the automatic reception mode. , When it occurs, the production reception is automatically accepted if you forget to operate it because the reception allowable sound suggesting that the production reception is in the allowable state or the production reception is in the allowable state can be output. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the occurrence occurs and, as a result, one's own operation opportunity is lost.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within this set time (valid period). It is determined whether or not the effect is received, and the effect reception is automatically generated when the specific timing tr42A arrives without the effect reception being performed in response to the operation detection. According to such a configuration, it is possible to start the post-operation effect within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not the operation has been performed. It will be possible to make it an automatic button without making the flow of the subsequent production different from the case without it, or causing a delay in the production.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, a "message sound (second permissible sound) prompting to be operated" may be output as a reception permissible sound, and the message sound (second permissible sound) must be operated. It is not output in the "operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode" that is not accepted, and can be output only in the "operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode" that is received without any operation. There is.

That is, only in the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second permissible sound) that directly expresses that the operation should be performed can be output, and many types of reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, first permissible sound) can be output. It is considered that the second permissible sound) should be output, but in the post-operation effect, there is usually a risk of the effect being executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so that the post-operation effect is performed. It is not always good to operate it in order to improve the entertainment of the game. In this respect, the "operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode" is an effect in which it is permissible to make a selection such as "do not intentionally generate the post-operation effect", and therefore the operation should be performed in such an effect. Avoiding direct expression as a message (second permissible sound), do not output the message sound (second permissible sound), and do not have the right to choose whether or not to generate a post-operation effect. It is desirable to output a message sound (second permissible sound) only in the "operation reception effect executed in the embodiment", or to output more types of reception permissible sounds. In addition, in the "operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode", if the set time ends without the effect reception being performed, the post-operation effect and the related effect will not be performed, so it is expected. The production will progress without suggesting the degree. In addition, in the non-moving reception effect, the message sound is not output in any of the operation reception effects, but in the "operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode", the message sound is not output. The operation reception effect may be included.

Further, as described above, in this pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes (“press!” And “sword deliver!”) Are prepared as message sounds (second permissible sounds), and the effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 are shown. In the example, one of the plurality of modes is selectively selected depending on whether the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 (based on the result of the advance notice effect determination). I am trying to output. In this case, when the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 and the message sound (“press!”) Corresponding to the operation button 410 is output, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the sword decoration body 5001. Compared to the time when the message sound corresponding to ("Deliver the sword!") Is output, it suggests that "the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped" in the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. The ratio (expectation level) at which the production mode appears is low. The ratio (expectation degree) at which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 390, the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the operation target. Is not the sword decoration body 5001, but the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Moreover, at least in the normal game state, it is suggested that "a big hit symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped" in the post-operation effect executed when the effect reception is performed in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is not output. The ratio (expectation degree) at which the effect mode is displayed is the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect reception is performed in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is output. It is set to be lower than the rate (expectation level) at which the production mode suggesting that "is appearing." The ratio (expectation degree) at which the above-mentioned effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated, first, "whether the message sound (second allowable sound) is output" becomes a turning point for knowing the high or low degree of expectation, and the message sound (the message sound (2nd permissible sound) is output). When the second permissible sound) is output, it becomes possible to know the high and low of the degree of expectation depending on the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, the post-operation effect can be enjoyed with relatively high expectations. become. Therefore, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable to prevent the post-operation effect from being overlooked by executing the post-operation effect in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the expectation is relatively low, and the "sword decoration 5001" which is used only when the expectation is high is the operation target. Will disappear. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the option of whether to generate the post-operation effect by executing the post-operation effect in the non-automatic reception mode.

Further, in the operation reception effect executed in FIGS. 391 and 392, when the set time (valid period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i) and FIGS. 392 (g) to (i), for the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled within the set time (valid period). While the output state is terminated (in an inaudible state) before tr42A, the message display is maintained in the display state even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled. Furthermore, after the automatic button function is enabled, it is not hidden (invisible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends arrives. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is performed by the operation by the player within the set time, the message display may be hidden at the stage where the set time has not elapsed according to the effect reception, but within the set time. When the automatic button function is enabled, the message display ("press!" Or "sword!") Will continue to be displayed at least until the set time ends.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or the operation detection for the operation target prompted by the message display. You will be able to suggest to the player that you are not in the situation. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) in which the automatic button function is enabled, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display) when the effect reception is performed by enabling the automatic button function in the timing tr42A. Since the gauge amount in the above is intentionally left, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" against the intention of the player, and this makes it possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" from the next time onward. In the set time (valid period), it will be possible to encourage the operation to be performed at an early stage regardless of the remaining gauge.

Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) in which the automatic button function is enabled, when the effect reception is performed by enabling the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is at least set. The dynamic display is continued until the time has passed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest to the player that the production reception is not performed by the operation detection for the operation target for which the operation is urged by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, since the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391 are designed to output the same effect sound (the first allowable sound of the first aspect) as the reception allowable sound, eventually. Even when the operation reception effect of is generated, it becomes possible to appropriately convey to the player that the operation opportunity is given. Moreover, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, the second allowable sound, which is not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, is also output. Therefore, which of these operation reception effects is generated? Will also be possible to recognize. Furthermore, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode in a specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern), the ratio of execution in the mode shown in FIG. 391 is relatively high, and FIG. 392 shows. The rate of execution in the mode shown is relatively low, and the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is relatively high when executed in the mode shown in FIG. 392. That is, in this case, the first allowable sound is not the "first mode" but the "second mode" which is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, while it is avoided to overlook the post-operation effect. Since it will be output at, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the effect sound (the first permissible sound) whose output state is maintained for a long time is maintained as compared with the case of the effect example shown in FIG. Since it is sometimes used as FIG. 392), it is possible to suitably maintain the renditionability when the "BGM reproduction (specific type of rendition sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. become able to.

Further, in the production example (suppression operation reception production) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is not necessarily used as the production sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. , The same reception permissible sound (first permissible sound of the first aspect) as when the non-suppressed operation reception effect (FIG. 390) is generated can also be generated. On top of this, when the first allowable sound is output as the effect sound (second aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the effect sound (first) in which the output state is maintained only for a short time. A new effect is added by setting the ratio of the symbol to be stopped by the jackpot symbol to be higher than that when the first permissible sound is output in (aspect) (FIG. 391). This makes it possible to recognize that the production reception is permitted, and at the same time, the effectability when "BGM reproduction (specific type production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the first allowable sound is output as the effect sound (second aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the first permissible sound is obtained. If the production is accepted during the period when the sound is being output, it is set to a non-output (non-audible) state even in the middle of the output (see FIG. 392 (c)). .. On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (first aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 390 and 391), the first permissible sound is the "suppression operation reception effect". Only when it is output in "Operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode" (Fig. 391), if the effect reception is done in the middle of the output, it is in a non-output (non-audible) state at that point. (See FIG. 390 (c) and FIG. 391 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, even if the effect reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Although the first permissible sound is in the output state even during the period from timing tr41 to tr42, the production reception is not performed even if the operation is detected within the period, so that the first permissible sound is of the first permissible sound. It goes without saying that the output state is not interrupted.

That is, as described above, in the non-suppressed operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect is generated without suppressing the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)", so that the post-operation effect is overlooked. The possibility is relatively high, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that the post-operation effect cannot be generated unlike the case where the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, when these operation reception effects occur, it is assumed that some players repeatedly hit the sounds before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hits, it may be difficult to understand whether the effect is a post-operation effect or a notice effect that is not related to the operation. It is desirable to eliminate such concerns by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduced data (Fig. 390). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, there is no need to repeatedly hit, so in order to suppress the game due to such repeated hits, the first allowable sound is the first mode and the second mode. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize which of the above was output (output is stopped in the middle).

Even if the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display is within the set time only when the operation detection is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. It may be displayed continuously until the end timing of, or the remaining time display (gauge display) may be continuously displayed until the end timing within the set time (described above). Commonization of programs, etc.).

Further, as described above, in the post-operation effect, there is usually a risk of the effect being executed in a mode with a low expectation, so that the operation so that the post-operation effect is performed is to improve the game entertainment. Not always good. In this regard, in the production example (non-automatic reception production) shown in FIG. 390, it is relatively early if the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output for a sufficient time to indicate that the production reception is permitted. By using the mode (first mode) that is terminated in the above, "time for determining whether or not to generate the production reception" is created while the reception permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), since it is not necessary to create such a time, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition to the case, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) may be output in a longer mode (second mode), suggesting that the degree of expectation differs depending on the mode. .. In addition, by maintaining the output state of the reception allowable sound for a comparatively long time, it becomes possible to suggest that the automatic button function is not yet enabled, which in turn gives a sense of security. Among them, it becomes possible to encourage the operation by the player.

Further, in the automatic reception effect (FIG. 391 and 392), the automatic button function is enabled even when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the long mode (second mode) (FIG. 392). The reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is made inaudible before the arrival of the timing tr42A, and the two reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are set at different timings. I'm trying to finish it.

As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is enabled does not arrive until the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) becomes inaudible. When it becomes inaudible, it can be suggested that the automatic button function can be activated soon if it is not operated quickly. At this time, in at least the longer side mode (second mode) and the second permissible sound in which the output state is maintained longer than the first permissible sound of the first mode, the loudness and pitch of the sound correspond to the passage of time. It is desirable to change at least one of them in order to make it easier to recognize how much time has passed.

Further, in the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, when the operation opportunity is given, the "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, whereby the post-operation effect is generated. When this happens, we will devise a production method so that the production sound corresponding to this can be heard conspicuously. In this regard, regarding the reception allowable sound that is output when such a suppression operation reception effect is generated, if the effect reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the effect reception is performed. Since the output state is terminated, it is possible to make the effect sound according to the effect after the operation stand out without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

In the above production example, when "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception production" occurs, even if the production reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the production reception is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. And said. However, instead of this, the expectation is relatively high, for example, when the "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception effect" occurs in the SP reach state within the high expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to). Only when there is a situation, when the reception allowable sound (even if the same production sound (first mode) is output as the first allowable sound) is in the output state in order to encourage concentration on the production. This may be interrupted when the reception is made.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the case where "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs has been described, but "non-suppression / automatic reception effect" and "suppression / non-automatic reception effect" also occur. It may be possible to make the production progress in the same manner when the "non-suppressive / automatic reception effect" or the "suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs.

Further, when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, it is possible to output the third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 391) and the second mode (FIG. 392) as the first allowable sound. When the third aspect is output, it is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than when the first aspect or the second aspect is output. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the degree of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, and the set time (effective) in which the production reception is permitted. It will be possible to more favorably maintain the game entertainment within the period).

At this time, as for the third aspect, it is desirable to maintain the output state until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled arrives. That is, in this case, in paying attention to how long the output time of the first allowable sound continues, it is necessary to confirm that the output time is not the first mode or the second mode but the third mode. The longer the time required, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension within the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed. It will be like. Other matters when the third aspect is output, such as the point that the effect reception is interrupted when the third aspect is in the output state, are the same as those described in FIGS. 391 and 392. be.

The automatic button function may be enabled whenever the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern) arrives, or the specific fluctuation may be obtained when a big hit is obtained. It is activated when the timing tr42A in the pattern (corresponding effect pattern) arrives, but when the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) arrives when the big hit is not obtained. It may not be activated.

Multiple types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (valid period), and in some of these effects, the reception allowable sound (first) when the set time (valid period) occurs. The permissible sound, the second permissible sound) may not be output. That is, in this case, when the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted occurs, the number of allowable reception sounds is "0" and the number of allowable reception sounds is "1" (first allowable sound). ) And the case where the number of acceptable reception sounds is "2" (first allowable sound, second allowable sound), suggesting to what extent the pachinko machine 1 is "promoting operation". You will be able to.

As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting the fade-out when the timing of hiding may come may be adopted.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently during the period from timing tr40 to tr44, but instead of this, non-production is performed. It may be set to the output state (the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, the channel allocation has ended, etc.). That is, in this case, "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" as new data is assigned to the channel at the timing tr44 and is put into the output state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, as described above, the highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach production accompanied by background change) as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination is performed. When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the production of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production reception is accepted. The operation reception effect (valid period) that is allowed
-A "suppression reception effect" (FIGS. 391 (a) and 391 (b)) for setting a set time during which the effect reception is permitted while the "BGM reproduction sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in a suppression mode or silently. (See FIGS. 392 (a) and 392 (b)) ”, and ・ No operation is detected for the operating means targeted for operation within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) where the effect reception is allowed. Even in such a case, when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and the post-operation effect is produced based on the effect reception. "Automatic reception mode (see FIG. 391 (j) and FIG. 392 (j))"
It is designed to be generated as a "suppression / automatic reception effect" executed by.

At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (notice effect determination), which of the plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode is to output the sound effect (first permissible sound) among the reception allowable sounds. , It is determined whether the message sound (second permissible sound) is output by "press!" Or "deliver the sword!" As described above, the permissible sound and the second permissible sound are output respectively (FIGS. 391 and 392). And, as described above, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output, and the second permissible sound is "Deliver the sword!". Is output, the expectation is higher than when "Press!" Is output. At this time, the order of high expectations is "2nd mode & sword delivery!", "2nd mode & push!", "1st mode & sword delivery!", "1st mode & push!". It is desirable to maintain the game entertainment when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

And, as described above, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to the above-mentioned effect example, the first permissible sound is in the output state regardless of which of the plurality of modes is output as the first permissible sound. Occasionally, when a production reception is made, this is interrupted (see FIGS. 391 and 392). Also, regarding the second permissible sound, regardless of whether it is output by "press!" Or "deliver the sword!", If the production is accepted when the second permissible sound is in the output state. Was decided to be interrupted.

However, instead of this, if the production reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode among the plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the fact that the production reception is performed. Although it is terminated, when the effect reception is performed while the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first aspect, the output state may be maintained without being terminated. That is, in this case, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted in the middle, and even if the expectation cannot be recognized, the first aspect having the lowest expectation among the plurality of aspects. Since it is possible to recognize that this is not the case, it is expected that the decline in the interest in games will be suppressed. Further, even if a mode with a low expectation appears in the post-operation effect, if the output state of the first permissible sound having the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes is maintained, the post-operation effect can be used. By re-recognizing that the production state was difficult to expect in the first place, it becomes easier to accept the result that appears as the production after the operation, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suppressed from being significantly reduced.

Even when such a modification is adopted, if the above-mentioned "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception effect" occurs within the above-mentioned predetermined fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 390. When the first permissible sound of the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is output in the second mode within a specific fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 392. That is, among the above-mentioned production examples, the “effect mode shown in FIG. 391” when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” that appears within a specific fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. It will be executed in place of the "effect mode shown in 393".

As shown in FIG. 393, the "effect mode shown in FIG. 393" is basically the same as the content described in "the effect mode shown in FIG. 391" and the content described in another example thereof. be. However, in the "effect mode shown in FIG. 393", even if the effect reception is performed at the timing tr42a in which the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted by the effect reception. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduced data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific fluctuation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode, which has the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes (for example,). (For example, FIG. 392 (c)), when the effect reception is performed at the timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the effect reception.

According to such a configuration, when "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific fluctuation pattern, the effect reception is performed at an early timing so that it is difficult to confirm which mode is the first allowable sound. Even if it is done, the degree of expectation can be recognized by confirming whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is terminated with this as an opportunity. In particular, in this effect example (FIG. 391, FIG. 393, etc.), the first allowable sound is output from the timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (valid period) to the timing tr42 in which the set time is set. Since the first permissible sound is not interrupted regardless of the mode from the output state at the timing tr41 to the arrival of the timing tr42, the first permissible sound is set as the first permissible sound. It becomes possible to function as a time for "distinguishing" which aspect is.

In this regard, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first aspect in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared so that the output state is maintained for a shorter period of time than any other aspect in which the output state is interrupted. It is supposed to be. As a result, even if the post-operation effect is started when the first permissible sound is being output in the first aspect, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound are combined. It becomes possible to shorten the time when each output state overlaps, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in the modified example shown in FIG. 393, the first allowable sound output in the first aspect can also be output in the production example shown in FIG. 390 (see FIG. 390 (c)). Even in the production example, the production reception is not interrupted, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first permissible sound. Therefore, the first permissible sound is produced. Even if a situation that is not interrupted by the production reception appears, it will be possible to provide it as a production without a sense of discomfort.

However, regarding the second permissible sound, if the production reception is performed while the output state is in the output state, the production reception is based on the fact that the production reception is performed regardless of which mode is output as the first permissible sound. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 392 (d) and 393 (d)). That is, in this case, the first permissible sound has a function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the production reception is performed at an early stage, while the second permissible sound is in a situation where the production reception is performed by operation detection ( It will play a function to suggest whether or not it is in a situation where the operation opportunity can be lost due to the automatic button function), and by giving these different functions to the reception allowable sound, when the operation reception effect occurs. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment of.

On the other hand, the reception allowable sound output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 may be output without fail in the first aspect, or may be output in a special mode. However, it is desirable to maintain the output state without ending it even if the effect reception is performed when the output is performed in a special mode. When the output is performed in the special mode, it is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol is stopped is higher than that in the case where the output is performed in the first aspect. This ratio may be 100%. It may be output in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, the "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" maintains the output state in an unsuppressed manner, and there is a problem that the effectability is poor. Therefore, it is more desirable to be able to confirm the mode as the first permissible sound even in the situation where the post-operation effect is started, and to be able to recognize the degree of expectation thereof.

In addition, in the "suppression operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type of production sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state", the specific type of production sound is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in a non-suppressed manner even in a non-audible state.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, "suppression that gives an operation opportunity while the production sound of a specific type is output in a suppression mode or silently or is in a non-output state". In the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 to 393), the reception allowable sound output when the set time (valid period) occurs is one of "a plurality of modes in which the length of time maintained as an output state is different". It is possible to output according to the non-suppressed mode, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) differs depending on the output mode. In this regard, the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is also used in the "non-suppressive operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode". In addition to the case where the output is performed by the non-suppressed mode in the first aspect (FIG. 390), the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is different from the first aspect (the length is different, the effect sound itself is different, etc.). ) May be output depending on the non-suppressed mode, and the degree of expectation (ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) may be different depending on the output mode. According to such a configuration, both the reception allowable sound output when the "unsuppressed operation reception effect" is generated and the reception allowable sound output when the "suppression operation reception effect" is generated are "output states". Since it is possible to output in any of the "plurality modes in which the length of time maintained is different", and the degree of expectation differs depending on the output mode, "non-suppressive operation reception effect". In both the "suppression operation reception effect" and the "suppression operation reception effect", it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the effect reception is performed.

FIG. 394 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the first permissible sound is output in a specific mode when the “non-suppressed operation reception effect (here, non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect)” is generated.

As shown in FIG. 394, even in this production example, the parts not otherwise noted are basically the same as in the production example shown in FIG. 390. However, in the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, when the effect is generated, the effect determination as to which of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is to be output (for example, at the start of the symbol change) is made. (Preliminary effect determination) is performed, and as a result of the effect determination, as shown in FIGS. 394 (c) and 394 (g), a "specific mode" is performed instead of the "first mode". It is assumed that the sound is output in the above mode, and the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that in the case of the output in the "first mode". The specific aspect is output for a longer time than the first aspect.

Here, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", the first permissible sound can be output by the first aspect when the operation reception effect is generated. That is mentioned above (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)). That is, in this case, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time when the operation reception effect is generated. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output in a specific mode when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is generated (FIG. 394), the first permissible sound is the first when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is generated. In the case where the two modes are output (FIG. 392), different production sounds are output as the first allowable sound over different times. In this production example, when the first permissible sound is output by the second aspect, it is output for a longer time than when the first permissible sound is output by the specific aspect.

However, on the other hand, the degree of expectation (ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) in the first aspect (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)) when the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time. Is the "first aspect" output when the "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)" occurs, or the "suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)"". It depends on whether it is output when the above is generated. Here, when the "first mode" appears when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" occurs, the effect reception As for the degree of expectation (ratio) suggesting that the jackpot symbol appears in the post-operation effect according to the above, the "first mode" appeared when the "suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393))" occurred. In some cases, it is lower than the expectation (ratio) that the jackpot symbol appears in the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. The expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%. ..

On the other hand, the degree of expectation (when "second aspect (FIG. 392)" or "specific aspect (FIG. 394)" appears) when different production sounds are output as the first allowable sound for different times. The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) is set to be the same as the predetermined value regardless of which of the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is output. The degree of expectation (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time, either "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" or "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs. Expectations will not always be the same depending on whether or not they are. Further, even when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first allowable sound, the "suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is output when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound. The same degree of expectation as "automatic reception production" will be suggested.

That is, in this case, with respect to the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppression / automatic reception effect", even if the first allowable sound is output in the same mode (first mode), the expectations are different from each other. In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it is possible to make it appear that there is no directing relationship with each other. .. However, in reality, when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode or a specific mode, the expected degrees are the same even though the sound is different from each other and the output time is different. You will be able to have a secret relationship. For example, when the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted occurs, the case where the "BGM reproduction" is suppressed and the case where the "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed are usually (the reception allowable sound is the first aspect). When the effect is received, different post-operation effects (different expectations) are started to make the effects appear to be unrelated to each other. However, when the reception allowable sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation when the production reception is performed while making it appear as if a different production is performed depending on whether or not "BGM reproduction" is suppressed. As a post-production, it will be possible to make the same content (same degree of expectation) appear, and it will be expected to provide a surprise-like production by secretly having a production relationship.

In this case, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", a plurality of modes are prepared as the first allowable sound, but the "first mode" used in common is used. It is desirable that the output time is set as the shortest mode among the plurality of modes regardless of the operation reception effect. Further, the "second mode" as the first allowable sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among the plurality of modes that can be output when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is generated. The "specific mode" as the first permissible sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among the plurality of modes that can be output when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs, but each other. It is desirable that the output times of the above are different (for example, "output time of a specific aspect" <"output time of the second aspect") in order to make it appear that there is no directing relationship with each other.

Further, in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", even if the first allowable sound is output in either the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not terminated in the middle stage regardless of whether or not the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first allowable sound can be left even after the post-operation effect is started, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" with a relatively low expectation is executed. Even though the first permissible sound is output in the "specific mode" that pushes up to the same expected level as the "suppression / automatic reception effect", which has a relatively high expectation, it is overlooked. It will be possible to eliminate the possibility of losing. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted when the effect reception is performed by the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393.

In the above-mentioned production example, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" (FIG. 392), it is used as the first allowable sound in the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect". When a specific mode was output (Fig. 394), their expectations were the same. However, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as the first allowable sound, the output time is maintained for a longer time than in the "first aspect (FIG. 391)" and "second aspect (FIG. 392)". When the "third aspect" of the above can be output, the "third aspect" is output instead of the above "second aspect" as the first allowable sound in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", and the "third aspect" is output. It is set so that the expected degree is the same as the case where the "specific mode" is output as the first allowable sound in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect". The "third aspect" is as described above.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 394, when the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (No. 1) is used as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the 1 effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in the state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the length of the "time for which the acceptable sound for acceptance is output" is not the length of the "time for which the sound data of the acceptable sound for acceptance is assigned to the channel", but ". It means the length of time it takes to output as audible sound.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in order to make it appear that there is no directing relationship between the "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception production" and the "suppression / automatic reception production", the "second mode" and the "third". Regarding "aspect", it is assumed that output is possible only by "suppression / automatic reception effect" out of "suppression / automatic reception effect" and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", and "specific mode" is "suppression". -It is desirable that output is possible only with "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" out of "automatic reception effect" and "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect". If "second mode" and "third mode" are prepared as output candidates in "suppression / automatic reception effect", the "suppression / automatic reception effect" has its own unique reception allowable sound (second mode). Even if the mode (third mode) is output, the expected degree is not necessarily the same as when the reception permissible sound (specific mode) peculiar to the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is output. It becomes possible to more preferably improve the performance as a reception allowable sound output when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs.

Further, the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) does not have to occur as an effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern), and for example, the high development into the SP reach state. As described above, among the effects related to the expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern), the effects may occur within the effect period before the SP reach state is developed.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example, the "suppression operation reception effect" in which a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) can be suppressed is a "weak suppression mode (first)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low. A plurality of modes including at least a "suppression operation reception effect)" and a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or are in a non-output state are prepared. May be good. When a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to "0".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a color rendering property as to how much the specific type of effect sound is suppressed when the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned action and effect, the degree of expectation depends on which of the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. It is desirable that the (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) be different. Here, the degree of expectation (ratio) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear in the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception" when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is ". It is lower than the expectation (ratio) that it is suggested that the jackpot symbol appears in the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception" when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)", the effect corresponding to the highly expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) and the reach state are not formed (or even the reach state is not formed). A reach state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach.) While it is possible to appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" ) ”Does not occur in the low expectation effect pattern, but may occur as an effect corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is the expectation when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned action and effect more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special effect state" that can be transferred based on the satisfaction of the special effect condition, and in the "special effect state", the player. Each time the production is accepted during the set time (valid period) when the operation promotion image (image, gauge display, etc.) is displayed, a specific type of production sound (for example, BGM playback production sound) is displayed. ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed each time a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs. It has become possible to provide a directing effect on the sound, and apart from the expectation level suggested by the post-operation effect, such a directing property (how much it is suppressed) also suggests the expectation level. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be further improved when the reception of the production is permitted.

In addition, an effect pattern (for example, high expected variation) in which the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can be sequentially executed within the symbol variation. An effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern among the patterns) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" on the side with relatively low expectation occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation)" on the side with relatively high expectation occurs. Since there is a possibility that "reception effect)" will occur, it is necessary to suppress the deterioration of the game interest in the case where the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for the specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). Will be able to.

In addition, in order to more preferably suppress the decline in the game interest when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" is used.
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the effect determination is made. Regardless of which result is obtained as (notice judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, whereas "weak suppression mode (first suppression)" is assumed. Operation reception production) ”
-Even if the above specific fluctuation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), the production of the specific fluctuation pattern does not occur even if it progresses to a predetermined timing. , When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), it shall occur when the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" is produced according to the specific variation pattern. Is not generated, but when the production is accepted in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)", the ratio of the post-operation effect being executed in the highly expected mode is higher. Is desirable.

In such a configuration, in the production according to a specific fluctuation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" is generated. "Is not always generated, and when the" weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect) "occurs, the" strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) "has a high expectation for post-operation production. Since the rate at which is executed becomes high, it becomes possible to attract attention as to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (weak suppression mode)" It will be possible to improve the interest in the game when "1st suppression operation reception production)" occurs.

FIGS. 395 to 397 show "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" in the production according to the high expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern). ) ”Is shown in a time chart showing an example of production when sequentially occurs. FIG. 395 shows an example of the effect when the operation is detected at a relatively early stage after the set time (valid period) occurs, and FIG. 396 shows the comparison after the set time (valid period) occurs. An example of the effect when the operation is detected at a late stage is shown, and FIG. 397 shows an example of the effect when the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period).

Now, as a result of the start condition being established (pending digestion) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, the "specific fluctuation pattern" among the "highly expected fluctuation patterns that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)" If is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect description according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the effect determination is made within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect, etc.) according to the result of (notice determination, etc.) is additionally executed for the effect (effect pattern) of the selected "specific fluctuation pattern" itself.

However, regarding the content of the effect that appears after the timing tr40 (timing within the SP reach state) in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern in the "specific variation pattern" has arrived. Is the same as the case of the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. That is, first, when the timing tr40 arrives, "a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a suppressed mode or silently" regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. (Or, it is set to a non-output state). Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as a "strong suppression mode", and the timing tr42 (decorative symbol) is displayed while the "strong suppression mode" appears. When a specific time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, the operation reception is permitted regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. A production (valid period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect generated while the "strong suppression mode" appears is referred to as a "second suppression operation reception effect".

On the other hand, in the "specific variation pattern", when the timing tr51 (timing before the development of the SP reach state) arrives when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the advance notice effect determination is made. On condition that a special result is obtained, an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is additionally generated for the design effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr51 is different from the case of the operation reception effect (non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of the "effect (strong suppression mode)", a process of suppressing the volume of the "specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound)" can be performed under predetermined conditions.

According to such a configuration, even if the effect corresponding to the "specific fluctuation pattern" is executed, when the special result is not obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), FIG. 391 or the like. The effect example shown in FIG. 392 will appear, that is, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" does not occur in the effect according to the fluctuation pattern, and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression)" does not occur. Operation reception production) ”will only occur. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), as shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation)" is performed in the effect according to the fluctuation pattern. "Reception effect)" first occurs, and then the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 is further generated.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the production content after the arrival of the timing tr40 is as described with reference to FIG. 391, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here. In this case, regarding the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first permissible sound is not the first mode shown in FIGS. 391 and 395 to 397 depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). , The related effects of the effect contents shown in FIG. 391, such as the case where the output may be performed in the second aspect shown in FIG. 392, and the above-mentioned contents of other examples and modifications are shown in FIGS. Needless to say, it is appropriately applied to the effect content (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)) after the timing tr40 among the effect examples.

Then, as described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the timing tr51 (developed into the SP reach state) in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect according to the specific variation pattern). When the timing before this is reached), the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated as the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" generated at the timing tr51 in the variation effect according to the specific variation pattern is described.
-While the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner, the set time (valid period) at which the production reception is allowed is set, but within the set time (valid period). When the production reception is performed, the "conditional suppression reception production" (FIG. 395) that changes the "BGM reproduction sound" from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) triggered by the production reception. (A), (b)) ”, and ・ If the operation for the operating means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) where the effect reception is allowed, the operation is not detected. The effect reception is not performed, and as a result, each process (“BGM reproduction sound” is changed from the non-suppressed mode to the weakly suppressed mode, and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect) are triggered by the effect reception. "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIGS. 397 (a), (b), (f))" in which the set time (valid period) ends without the sound being executed.
It is designed to be generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in the weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the "BGM reproduction sound" is assigned is set in the case of the strong suppression mode (for example, the volume value (audible volume)). ) Can be changed to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) having a lower suppression degree than “0”).

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (first suppression operation reception production)", unless the production reception is performed by the operation by the player, the "specific type of production sound (1st suppression operation reception production)" Since the sound of BGM reproduction) is not output in the suppressed mode, it can be seen that the “unsuppressed reception effect” shown in FIGS. 390 and 394 is occurring. It will be like. That is, in this case, it is recognized for the first time that it is not a "suppression reception effect" by changing to a "state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a suppression mode" when the player operates it. Since it will be possible to get rid of it, it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game by creating a surprise effect.

In order to obtain such an action effect, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)" can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). The fluctuation pattern should be selectable only when it is in a special effect state (for example, look-ahead effect zone), and when it is in the special effect state, it is "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (for example, non-automatic reception effect). FIG. 390, FIG. 394) ”can be selected depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). The jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped than in the normal effect state. It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390, FIG. 394)" appears. In combination with the above-mentioned surprise-like production elements, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned action and effect more preferably, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can occur in both the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state". In the "normal production state", "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception production" (figure) "390, Fig. 394)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (Fig. 391, Fig. 392)" can occur in sequence, and in the "special effect state", one fluctuation pattern (winning) "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception" in the production according to the paired fluctuation pattern) It is desirable that "effects (FIGS. 391 and 392)" can occur in sequence.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production", when the set time (valid period) has elapsed without the production reception being performed, the "specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound)" is completed. ) Is output in a weakly suppressed mode ”, and the production progresses to the subsequent stage (Fig. 397). That is, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurred, and by extension, the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state". It is difficult to recognize which situation it is in, and since the subsequent production will be progressed, it is said that the expectation is relatively low. Even when the operation reception effect (valid period) in the game occurs, it becomes possible to more positively encourage the player to operate the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are cases where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)" occurs and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 395 to FIG. 397)". In the case where "FIG. 390)" occurs, the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) for the same time, and this also causes "conditional suppression (weak)". Suppression mode) ・ It is difficult to recognize which of the non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397) and the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390) is occurring.

Further, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)", the same as in the case where the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)" occurs.
-When the timing tr50 arrives shortly before the set time occurs, the output of the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained in a form straddling the timing tr51. point,
-The second permissible sound (for example, message sound) is not output, only the first permissible sound (for example, sound effect) is output.-The set time (valid period) is set. When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a simulated image imitating the operation means targeted by the operation reception effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time elapses. Each configuration, such as the point where gauge display is performed, is also adopted, and even with this, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode), non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "non-suppression," are adopted. It is made difficult to recognize which of the non-automatic reception effects (Fig. 390) is occurring. Therefore, as the display method of the image and the gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) is adopted as in the case where the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs. It is desirable, and the same mode as that of the production example shown in FIG. 390 may be adopted for the timing at which the displayed images (images, gauge display) are hidden based on the occurrence of the production reception. desirable.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)" according to this embodiment, the set time (effective) is also the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390. When the production reception is performed at the timing tr51a, tr52a (FIG. 395 (c), FIG. 396 (c)) in which the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is in the output state after the occurrence of the period), the setting is made. The time (valid period) itself is terminated, but the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the timing at which the output is completed as the first allowable sound (same as when there was no operation). The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 397 (c)).

According to such a configuration, even after the production reception is performed by the operation by the player, simply listening to the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception". It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the "effect (FIG. 395 to 397)" and the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)" is occurring. That is, while the output state (non-suppressed mode) of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the state becomes "a state in which a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode". Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably each time the production is accepted.

Further, even in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)", if the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr51a, 51b). ), Post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) as post-operation effect according to the effect reception. And at least are supposed to occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr52, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in the state where the timing tr52 has not elapsed. It is required to set to maintain the output state.

In addition, for the reception permissible sound and operation-related display that appear in the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)", other examples or modifications to the effect example shown in FIG. 390 should be appropriately adopted. It is possible, and it is desirable to use the same method for each other.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)" generated at the timing tr51 in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern is produced. The process of outputting the "sound of BGM reproduction" in a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) is performed for a predetermined fixed time from the timing when the reception is made.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 395), the "sound of BGM reproduction" is weakly suppressed (the degree of suppression is). The timing tr53a for returning from the relatively low mode to the non-suppressed mode also arrives relatively early, and as a result, the period during which the "BGM reproduction sound" is changed to the weak suppression mode and the "BGM reproduction sound". There will be a relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) between the period in which the sound is set to the strong suppression mode. On the other hand, when the production is accepted at a relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 396), the timing at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. tr53b also arrives relatively late, and as a result, a comparison is made between the period in which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is in the weak suppression mode and the period in which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is in the strong suppression mode. Only short intervals (timing tr53b to tr40) will be provided.

That is, in this case, as the timing at which the operation by the player is performed in the first suppression operation reception effect is later (closer to the timing tr52), the period in which the "BGM reproduction sound" is set to the weak suppression mode ends, and then " The time until the period for making the "sound of BGM reproduction" into the strongly suppressed mode is started is shortened. As a result, depending on whether the timing of the operation by the player in the first suppression operation reception effect is early or late, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode is completed arrives relatively early and is continuous. It is possible to make it appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being executed, or the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode is completed arrives relatively late, and the “strong suppression mode” You will be able to feel anxiety such as "may not appear", so you will be able to improve your hobby of playing games.

In this production example, the length of time (predetermined fixed time) at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the weak suppression mode is set as the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is set to be the same as the execution time, but it is not always limited to this. However, the length of time that the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the weak suppression mode is set to be the same as or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is desirable to make the post-operation production stand out when the production reception is done. Furthermore, even if the production reception is performed at the latest timing tr52 of the set time (valid period) of the "first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)", the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time that the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the weak suppression mode so that the timing of ending arrives before the timing tr40 for starting the strong suppression mode. In this production example, the time of timing tr51a to 53a and the time of timing tr51b to 53b are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the effect corresponding to one fluctuation pattern,
-The period from the timing tr50 to the end of the post-operation effect, which suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode). ), And ・ The second suppression operation reception effect (timing tr40 ends the post-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode). Period until)
Can be generated sequentially. As described above, the second suppression operation reception effect is a variation pattern in which the effect mode (type of acceptable sound for reception, operation target, etc.) may change depending on the result of the effect determination, but it is not executed. While it is executed as "design effect based on", the first suppression operation reception effect can occur on condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). ing.

Further, as described above, the first suppression operation reception effect is based on the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) even in the effect according to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) that does not generate the second suppression operation reception effect. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during the symbol change, only one of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect occurs, and the first suppression operation reception effect and the first. 2 Suppression operation The reception effect may occur in sequence.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed by the first suppression operation reception effect during the period from the "timing at which the weak suppression mode ends" to the "timing at which the strong suppression mode starts". Since it is set as a variable period that is variable according to the timing performed, after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is completed, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is further performed. It will be possible to give a directing effect as to whether or not it will occur, and this will make it possible to improve the taste of pachinko. When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur in sequence, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (ratio of stopping at the jackpot symbol) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. Further, in the variation pattern that generates the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) precedes the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher expectation than the case where the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second aspect). The rate of execution is high.

By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) is generated, the degree of suppression is high (second suppression operation reception effect in the strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression). As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the mode is the first suppression operation reception effect). However, even if an attempt is made to infer whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode) when a specific type of production sound (for example, a production sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed. In fact, it is difficult to infer whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode) without comparison. In particular, it is even more so when the volume value when suppressed is not so different between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this causes a feeling of tension when the operation reception effect is generated. Can be suitably maintained and the player can be attracted to the effect.

In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are output when the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs. The first permissible sound is output as the same effect sound for the same time (in the figure, it is output in the "first mode"). That is, in this case, even if the first permissible sound is confirmed, it becomes possible to make it difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode). As a result, the tension for the production can be maintained more favorably, and the player can be more and more attracted to the production.

However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be adversely affected. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect elements useful for guessing whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode are provided within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. It is prepared as follows in the form of being scattered in chronological order.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the above-mentioned situation appears in which the first allowable sound can be output as the same production sound for the same time (in the figure, it is output in the "first aspect"). Even if there is, it is possible to infer whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode based on the first allowable sound.

That is, the first permissible sound output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is output for a predetermined time without ending the output in the middle even if the effect reception is performed while the output state is in effect. On the other hand, the first permissible sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated is based on the effect reception when the effect reception is performed while the output state is in effect. The output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 395 and 396). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, and it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. While making it difficult to guess, the first permissible sound itself has a function useful for guessing whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. By making it possible, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to make such a guess.

In addition to the first aspect, the first allowable sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (second aspect, third aspect, etc.). ) Is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode in which the first permissible sound is output, it may be a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode even if the effect reception is not performed when the first permissible sound is in the output state. It becomes possible to easily guess whether or not the game is, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. However, in order to maintain a sense of tension in the production, the output in the mode (second mode, third mode, etc.) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs is higher than the output in the first mode. It is desirable that the execution rate is low.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, the second permissible sound is output in addition to the first permissible sound. Therefore, the second permissible sound is output. By confirming whether or not the permissible sound is output, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed is also the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression. Since the operation reception effect is different from that of the operation reception effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to appearing later than the reception allowable sound, there is only a partial difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension in the production by leaving some difficulty in guessing whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that it is not possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode when the output of the reception allowable sound and the operation-related display is completed. However, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the first suppression operation reception effect, both the "effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are "performed over a certain period of time from the time when the effect is received". On the other hand, in the post-operation effect according to the second suppression operation reception effect, the "effect by the effect sound" is "the one that is performed for a certain period of time from the time when the effect is received", but the "liquid crystal display". "Direction by" is "the one that ends when the predetermined timing tr44 arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the second suppression operation reception effect, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" depending on the timing when the effect is received. Will be variable, and a large deviation will occur. Therefore, by confirming such a deviation, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. ..

However, even if the effect elements useful for guessing are prepared in such a form that they are scattered in chronological order, some players do not notice them, and as a result, it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that cannot be guessed, the entertainment interest may decline in the end.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM reproduction is produced based on the fact that the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period). To a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is adopted. A set time (valid period) is generated while the sound is being played, so that the production can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound). Since the timing of causing the sound is different, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming the timing.

Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), there is no operation detection within the set time (valid period). At that time, the set time does not automatically occur and the set time has elapsed (see FIG. 397). That is, in this case, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the reception of the effect for the specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is also performed. Although there is a price that the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

Further, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the “BGM reproduction effect sound” to the strong suppression mode is terminated is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. Or, it is set as the timing before that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the weak suppression mode is ended should be set after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned to the non-suppressed mode, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppressed mode or a weak suppressed mode.

Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above effect example, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is used regardless of the timing at which the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period). The length of the period during which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is invariant (see FIGS. 395 and 396). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on when the effect is received within the set time (valid period). The length of the period during which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel changes (see FIGS. 395 and 396).

According to such a configuration, the "when to perform the production reception (operation)" has a color rendering property, and the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed can be suitably maintained. Become.

Further, in the above configuration, the first permissibility is made so that it is difficult to distinguish which of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, in which the execution mode of the post-operation effect is different, is occurring. The sounds are output as the same production sound for the same time, and the production elements that are useful for distinguishing them are prepared to be scattered in chronological order. As a result, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed while maintaining a sense of tension in the production.

Further, in the above configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, which have different execution modes of the post-operation effect, can be intentionally mixed in the effect according to one variation pattern. Therefore, every time the operation reception effect is generated, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension about "when to perform the effect reception (operation)". In order to obtain such an action effect, in addition to the mode in which the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are mixed in the effect according to one variation pattern, the effect according to one variation pattern is obtained. It is desirable that the mode in which only the second suppression operation reception effect (or the first suppression operation reception effect) appears a plurality of times is feasible.

If the purpose is to obtain only the effect of the effect of "when to perform the effect reception (operation)", a specific type of effect is produced in the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. The sound (the production sound of BGM reproduction) may not be suppressed, and the output in the non-suppressed mode may be maintained.

Further, regardless of when the effect is received within the set time (valid period), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the speaker (second effect member) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) are displayed. ) Is performed in parallel with the effect sound output (effect sound). For the operation reception effect, the condition is that a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.). It is desirable that it can be generated in the above and that it cannot appear as a pattern effect (effect pattern) based on a fluctuation pattern.

That is, in this case, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it can be inferred that the special result is obtained in the advance notice effect determination (the expectation is relatively high). Unlike the fluctuation pattern itself (design effect), which always occurs regardless of the result of the advance notice effect judgment, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when it is recognized that it has been additionally performed. Will be. It should be noted that the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) depend on the timing at which the effect is received within the set time (valid period). The second suppression operation reception effect, in which the length of the period during which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel, changes, may occur only as the effect (design effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself. Alternatively, there may be a case where the fluctuation pattern itself occurs as an effect (design effect) and a case where it occurs under the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination or the like).

It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output at a lower suppression degree than the strong suppression mode can appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur). You may do it. That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the weakly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the weakly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. Then, as the number of times the weak suppression mode appears in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern, including the first suppression operation reception effect, the degree of suppression is further increased until the symbol variation is stopped (the rate). If the ratio of the second suppression operation reception effect to be further executed) is increased, the effectability can be further improved through the suppression state for the "effect sound of BGM reproduction". Further, when the production is accepted within the set time (valid period) generated while the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is not set to the suppression mode, "whether or not the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases or not (Fig.). Whether it is the aspect shown in 390 or the aspect shown in FIG. 395) ”can be added with further fun.

Further, the strong suppression mode for the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may also be made to appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation reception effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the strongly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the strongly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to provide a directing property as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is generated based on the fact that the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period). The suppression mode (weak suppression mode) was set. However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is performed before the set time occurs, as in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect occurs. May be set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed may be generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is produced when a predetermined timing is reached, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set or the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of effectability can be expanded. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as or after the timing at which the post-operation effect ends. It is desirable to make it arrive.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and 395 to 397, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is strongly suppressed (suppression mode or The process of making the output silent or non-output) was made to end at the same timing as or earlier than the end timing of the post-operation effect, but the end timing of the post-operation effect has arrived. It may be terminated later. Further, in this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing (unless the symbol fluctuation is stopped), even if the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is not returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. good.

As described above, the reception allowable sound does not have to be generated shortly before the set time (valid period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and FIGS. 395 to 397, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is displayed. ) Is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the effect according to the fluctuation pattern, while the effect sound output (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is received. It was decided to end when a certain amount of time had passed. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are varied. Each of them may be terminated at a predetermined timing in the effect according to the pattern, or the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the speaker (second effect member) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). Both the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation by the above may be terminated when a certain time has elapsed from the time when the effect reception is performed.

For the specific type of effect sound to be suppressed (BGM reproduction effect sound), the effect is switched at the start of the symbol variation or within the effect according to the variation pattern (for example, the SP reach effect is started). It is output when the timing etc. arrives. On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started from an indefinite timing (ming to be operated) within the set time.

The specific variation pattern described in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 and the specific variation pattern described in the effect example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397 may be different or the same. It may be a variation pattern. Further, the special effect state may not be a look-ahead effect zone, but may be an effect state when the jackpot probability for the jackpot determination is relatively high.

Further, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of production sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number larger than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and the sound is output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to make the "specific type of production sound" in an inaudible state (output in silence (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end channel allocation)). good.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "first suppression operation reception effect", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "second suppression operation reception effect", see FIGS. 391 and 392. However, as described above, based on the result of the advance notice effect determination, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". ) ”. Therefore, when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is not a weak suppression mode but a strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the production reception was performed in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". The corresponding post-operation effects have the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operating means to be operated is
-The first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part touched by the player when operating) is not moved when the set time (valid period) occurs, and-the operation receiving part is operated by the driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. An operation opportunity can be given by any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes that the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity, and the "second operation mode" gives the sword decoration body 5001 an operation opportunity. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 is "a thing that can give an operation opportunity to a player while moving to a specific position", see FIG. 198 (A3) and the like. However, it is as described above. However, one operating means (one operating receiving unit) may be provided with a "first operating mode" and a "second operating mode", respectively, and an operating opportunity may be provided by either of these modes.

And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-While outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) in a non-suppressed mode, the non-suppressed operation reception effect that performs from the generation of the set time (valid period) to the execution of the post-operation effect, and -We have prepared a suppression operation reception effect that outputs a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, or in a non-output state.
-The first suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode) "), And-A second suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned" suppression / automatic reception "that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode). Direction ")
Is prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception production, further
-While the production sound of a specific type is suppressed in a strongly suppressed mode (while it is output in a suppressed mode, silent, or in a non-output state), the first operation mode described above with respect to the operating means. (Here, the operation button 410) is given an operation opportunity under suppression, and while the production sound of a specific type is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (output in the suppression mode or silence). (While it is in a non-output state), the operation means is given an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the sword decoration body 5001 is pulled out). By preparing it, the effectability when the operation opportunity is given is further improved.

FIG. 398 shows an example of the effect (movement under restraint reception effect) that appears in the “when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)” in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect). It is a time chart showing. In addition, about the effect example (non-moving reception effect under suppression) that appears in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect). As described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 395 (the period from the timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation effect).

As shown in FIG. 398, the second suppression operation reception is also performed in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode). In the production (suppression / automatic reception production), the parts that are not specifically stated as "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" are basically the same (FIGS. 391, 392, FIGS. 395 to 397), the above-mentioned related effects, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a process of moving the operation receiving unit to a specific position by a driving force when a set time (valid period) occurs is performed. Although it is required to be performed, there is a problem as to when the process is performed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state or probabilistic time-shortening gaming state), as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and 398 (h), first, Unless the timing tr40 at which the effect sound of a specific type (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode arrives, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppressed mode or the weakly suppressed mode, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode occurs even if the set time for which the effect reception is allowed occurs. Is not given, and only the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is given. That is, in this case, unless the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, this is not the second operation mode even if the operation opportunity is given, so that the player However, it becomes possible to suppress that the operation is performed in the operation mode on the wrong side.

On the other hand, when the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility of both the case where the operation is performed and the case where the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player is given an operation opportunity in "the first operation mode or the second operation mode" when the specific type of production sound (the production sound of BGM reproduction) becomes a strong suppression mode. Since it becomes possible to concentrate on ", it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of an operation error between them.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by concealing which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given until just before the operation opportunity is given, from the timing tr40. The tension and the entertainment of the game are maintained appropriately from the reception of the production to the start of the production after the operation. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and 398 (h), when the timing tr42 at which the set time (valid period) occurs arrives, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. I'm going to let you. Here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. The advance notice production judgment is performed so as to be.

However, in this case, the production reception itself is in an allowable state for a short time after the set time (valid period) occurs (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed). Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving portion, the length of the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and 398 (d), the reception allowable sound is obtained for the time required to move the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position. The first aspect, which has the shortest output time among (first permissible sounds), is set as a time shorter than the time until the output is completed. As a result, even if any mode (in addition to the first mode, the above-mentioned second mode, the third mode, etc.) is output as the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound), the effect reception is performed in the middle of the output state. (It is possible to end the output in the middle), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is less likely that a directing inconvenience will occur.

Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force is such that there is no operation on the operation receiving portion and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force. It is moved at a faster speed so that it takes a shorter time than the time required to move from the to the original position (see FIG. 398 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it becomes possible to appeal that the time that is substantially reduced as the set time (valid period) is reduced, and the game by reducing the time. It will be expected to suppress the dissatisfaction of the person.

Further, in order to more preferably suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the non-suppression shown in FIG. 390 is set as the set time (valid period). "Operation reception" for the set time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect) of the mode and the operation reception effect (from timing tr50 to post-operation effect) of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 395. It is desirable to set a time value having a length longer than the sum of "the time required to move the part from the original position to a specific position". According to such a configuration, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that more than substantially compensates for the time to be cut is obtained. Since the set time (valid period) is generated, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment. In this case, in order to standardize the program, it is possible to set a set time having the same length even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

However, as described above, the time from the timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated is not substantially accepted for production, and the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced. In view of this, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to the post-operation effect) of the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 390 is set as the set time (valid period). ) And the set time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from the timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. It can be said that it is more desirable to set a time value having a length equal to or longer than the sum of "time" and "time from timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated". Also in this case, in order to standardize the program, the set time having the same length should be set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

Further, as described above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode and there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 398 (a), (h) to (l), the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing tr42A, and the post-operation display effect on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is based on the effect reception. (Liquid crystal display) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are executed at least as post-operation effect. However, in this case, as is clear from the comparison in FIGS. 398 (g) and 398 (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is shortened. Therefore, there is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 398 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving part within the set time, the "speed when the operation receiving part is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is changed to "the original position to the specific position". It is intentionally slower than the speed of time, which allows it to remain in motion for a relatively long period of time. According to such a configuration, in exchange for shortening the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), the operation receiving unit has a movable effect (post-operation effect). Since it can be expected to function as a part of), the game entertainment can be preferably maintained.

In the production example shown in FIG. 398 (h), the "movement effect from a specific position to the original position" by the operation receiving unit is performed after the operation corresponding to the automatic generation of the effect reception (automatic button function). Although it is set to start when a predetermined timing in the middle of executing the effect arrives, it may be started at the timing tr42A at which the effect reception is automatically generated, as in the post-operation effect.

However, no matter how slow the "movement from a specific position to the original position" is performed, it is not possible to earn enough time as a movable effect by this alone, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the game entertainment. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIG. 398 (h), after moving the operation receiving unit from a specific position to the original position (or a position in the vicinity thereof), a vibration effect is performed in which the operation receiving unit is vibrated. The period from the start of movement from the specific position to the original position (or a position in the vicinity thereof) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving unit is determined by the "operation receiving unit not operated by the player". It is designed to function as a movable production period. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably realize a movable effect using the "operation receiving unit not operated by the player", and as a result of the automatic generation of the effect reception, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). It is expected that the effectability when the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the above operation is shortened is preferably maintained. In this case, it is more preferable that the operation receiving portion is used as a movable effect if the operation receiving portion is made to emit light in a state where the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position. It is possible to appeal to.

Here, regarding the movable effect period (movement time from a specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the "operation receiving unit not operated by the player", is it when the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends arrives? , It is desirable to end before the timing tr44. As a result, the effect sound of a specific type is returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode, and the progress (switching of the effect) in the effect content corresponding to this can be smoothly promoted.

Another difference from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that a message sound such as "Deliver a sword!" Is used as the second allowable sound (message sound). It may be output or a message display such as "push" and a simulated image by "sword decoration image SYG" may be displayed as operation-related displays, so that operation errors are less likely to occur. become.

Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the operation opportunity is not given in such a second operation mode, but the "specific type of effect sound" is set to the weak suppression mode. If the operation opportunity is given based on the above, the operation error may be promoted when the recognition of which of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears is mistaken. In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs, an operation opportunity is provided under the weak suppression mode of the "specific type of effect sound". Since the weak suppression mode appears based on the fact that the production reception is done without giving it, there is a sense of unnecessary tension and expectation that "an operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be given". It will be possible to provide a production without having it.

In the above effect example (second operation mode), even if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, as in the case where there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, FIG. 398 (2). As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) within the period in which the post-operation effect is executed arrives, the operation receiving portion is vibrated to perform the vibration effect. According to such a configuration, regardless of the timing at which the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends arrives. Therefore, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will be terminated soon and new production progress will appear.

However, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is started early based on the fact that the effect is received by the operation, so that the post-operation effect is performed during the period. You may try to further improve the game entertainment. That is, in this case, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer time than when there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, unless the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. However, instead of this, if the production reception is permitted when the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, the production sound of the specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is the non-suppression mode. Percentage (0) of which the operation opportunity in the second operation mode is given, as compared with the case where the effect reception is permitted when the effect sound of a specific type (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the weak suppression mode. Or 100) may be higher.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 192 to 398), in the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function can be enabled, the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled as the set time (valid period). It is desirable to set a time value with a length longer than the sum of the set time (valid period) and the "time from the activation of the automatic button function to the end of the set time". .. According to such a configuration, a set time (valid period) having a longer time value is generated, which is more than compensated for the time that is substantially cut as the period for which the production reception is allowed. , It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment appropriately.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that may occur when in a normal gaming state,
-The operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) executed as the effect of the variation pattern itself (design effect) based on the result of the variation pattern judgment, and-The special result was obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.). As a condition, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) executed as an additional effect to the effect (effect pattern) of the variable pattern itself.
Will be prepared at least.

That is, in the "intrinsic reception effect", when a special result is obtained by the variation pattern determination (determination as to which variation pattern is used to execute the symbol effect) based on the result of the jackpot determination (a special variation pattern is selected). Then), it is confirmed that the execution is performed within the effect corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the "additional reception effect", even if "a predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect" is obtained in the variation pattern determination (even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected), the said. It is not always executed unless the result of generating the "additional reception effect" is further obtained by the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) according to the selected fluctuation pattern. Therefore, once the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is started, the effect determination is made rather than the occurrence of the "intrinsic reception effect" that is linked to the variation pattern (effect pattern) and whose occurrence is confirmed. It is more beneficial for the player to generate an "additional reception effect" that is allowed to occur depending on the result of (notice judgment, etc.), and it can be said that it is more important to enhance the game interest. Even if the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern, if an "additional reception effect" occurs in the effect, an "additional reception effect" is generated in the effect. The rate (expectation) at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when "" does not occur.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the intrinsic reception effect that may occur when the player is in a normal gaming state, a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of "BGM reproduction") is suppressed or When the production reception is permitted while the output is silent or in the non-output state, and when the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of "BGM reproduction") is output in a non-suppressed mode. In some cases, production reception is permitted. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur in the normal gaming state, the effect reception is not allowed while the output is in a suppressed mode or silent, or in the non-output state. While the production sound of a specific type is output in a non-suppressed manner, the production reception is permitted. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, when the production reception is permitted, by paying attention to whether the production sound of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode or in silence or in a non-output state, it is additional. It will be possible to recognize the possibility that reception effects will occur, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the intrinsic reception effect that may occur in the normal gaming state is operated even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. When the operation is executed in the automatic reception mode in which the post-effect can be generated, and when the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception, the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends. It may be executed in the reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effect that can occur in the normal gaming state is not executed in the automatic reception mode, but is executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the additional reception effect is generated by paying attention to whether the effect reception is automatically performed (automatic button function) within the set time. It is expected that the game will be maintained until the production is accepted.

FIG. 399 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 399, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (preliminary determination according to the variation pattern 1) performed at the start of the symbol variation, the advance notice effect is performed. At least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute A. As a result of this effect determination, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is to be executed, the advance notice effect A is applied to the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. It will be additionally executed (timing tr61 to tr62), and when it is not determined to execute the advance notice effect A, the advance notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. The symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

Here, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect change when the timing tr61 arrives. It is additionally executed for the production). It should be noted that "additionally executed" can be realized, for example, by displaying the advance notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. be. At this time, the notice effect A may be displayed by covering all of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 so that it cannot be seen, or covering only a part of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1. The notice effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the mode of "the lamp effect according to the occurrence of the advance notice effect A" is given priority over the "lamp effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 (effect pattern)". Further, in the case of the effect sound, by assigning the "effect sound according to the advance notice effect A" to a channel different from the "effect sound based on the variation pattern 1", it is based on the "variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)". The "directing sound according to the advance notice production A" is additionally output to the "directing sound".

FIG. 400 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 400, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (preliminary determination according to the variation pattern 2 etc.) performed at the start of the symbol variation, "addition" is made. At least it is determined whether or not to execute the "target reception effect". Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this effect example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390”. Therefore, as a result of this effect determination, when it is determined to execute the "additional reception effect", the "additional reception effect" is subjected to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390). When the timing tr31 in the above arrives, it will be additionally executed for the symbol effect (effect pattern) (from the timing tr31 until the post-operation effect is completed), and the "additional reception effect" will be executed. When it is not determined, even if the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the "additional reception effect" does not appear and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is only executed. Become.

Here, with respect to the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. In the meantime, the first allowable sound is output at the timing tr31, the set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr32, and the set time elapses without the automatic button function being enabled at the timing tr33. As for these, since they are as described above with reference to FIG. 390 and the like, the description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400 is not particularly disclaimed as "the content of the effect when the low expectation non-suppressed reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode" shown in FIG. 390. The parts are basically the same, and the above-mentioned related effects, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 400, an example in which the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed in the mode of the above-described alternative example in FIG. 390. It is described as. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect reception is based on the fact that the effect reception is performed. Then, "post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" and "post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)" are used as post-operation effects. At least it will be generated, but for the post-operation effect,
-While the "post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" is terminated at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33 regardless of the timing when the effect reception is performed. ,
-The "post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)" is executed in such a manner that it ends when a predetermined fixed time elapses from the timing when the effect reception is performed. It will be.

FIG. 401 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 401, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, any result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination according to the variation pattern 3, etc.) performed at the start of the symbol variation. Regardless of whether or not it is performed, at the timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3, the process of changing the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" to the above-mentioned "strong suppression mode" is performed, and the "strong suppression mode" is performed. At the timing tr41 that arrives while the above is appearing, an "intrinsic reception effect" is generated as a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 until the post-operation effect is completed).

Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this effect example is the same as the “specific variation pattern shown in FIGS. 391 to 393, or FIGS. 395 to 398”. Therefore, regarding the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 401, the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the variation pattern 3 (specific variation pattern) is strongly suppressed (for example, silence (volume 0)). When the timing tr41 arrives, the first permissible sound is output, the set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr42, and the set time is set. When the "timing tr42A" before the elapsed timing tr43 arrives without the production reception, the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Regarding these, "FIGS. 391 to 393, or FIG. Since it is as described above with reference to "395 to FIG. 398" and the like, the explanation will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 401 is the same as the effect content of the "suppression / automatic reception effect" shown in FIG. 393, FIGS. 395 to 398, etc.) can also be appropriately adopted.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal gaming state, during the period in which the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strongly suppressed mode, the "intrinsic reception" is performed as a pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern. Although "effect" may occur, "additional reception effect" that is additionally executed for the pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern does not occur, whereas "BGM reproduction" occurs. During the period when the effect sound of "" is set to the non-suppressed mode, "intrinsic reception effect" which is a pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern may occur, and additionally to the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern. In some cases, an "additional reception effect" to be executed may occur.

That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" based on the fluctuation pattern is set to the strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is the "additional reception effect" is excluded. Therefore, it becomes possible to generate a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed while an environment is formed in which the operation reception effect is executed in which mode. .. On the other hand, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the non-suppressed mode, it can be recognized that the additional reception effect may have occurred. It is expected that the game will be maintained.

In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, in addition to the case where the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" appear in separate variation patterns 2 and 3, one variation pattern (for example,). It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" can appear in sequence even within the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3). It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" occurs at a timing before the "intrinsic reception effect".

More preferably, in the production corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the production sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the non-suppressed mode, and the "additional reception production" and the "intrinsic reception production" are performed. "" Can appear in sequence, and while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a strong suppression mode, "intrinsic reception effect" can further appear. According to such a configuration, when it is possible to grasp whether "additional reception effect" or "intrinsic reception effect" is generated depending on the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode). , When it is difficult to grasp which of "additional reception effect" and "intrinsic reception effect" is occurring (non-suppressed mode), a suppressed mode for the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" appears. Through this, it will be possible to improve the taste of games.

Furthermore, if an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a strong suppression mode in the pattern effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern, the internal reception effect is present. It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" does not occur within the period from the end of the reception effect to the stop of the symbol change. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the operation reception effect is an "additional reception effect" when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode. Not only will it be excluded, but even the possibility that an "additional reception effect" will appear before the symbol change is stopped will be eliminated, so an "additional reception effect" will occur. On the other hand, which mode (acceptable sound for reception, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.) is executed by the generated "intrinsic reception effect" without giving any expectation. You will be able to concentrate.

Further, when the "additional reception effect" occurs, the "intrinsic reception effect (both non-suppressed mode and strongly suppressed mode)" that occurs after the "additional reception effect" does not occur. As described above, it is desirable to increase the ratio of execution in a mode with a high degree of expectation (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.).

Further, as described above, when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is always generated during the period in which the strong suppression mode is set. You may. In this case, among the plurality of fluctuation patterns that are candidates for selection in the fluctuation pattern determination, "a strong suppression mode is used, but during the period of the strong suppression mode, an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is performed. The "variation pattern that does not occur" is not included, and "when the strong suppression mode is set, the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode" is included. .. Alternatively, even if the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode, the period in which the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is set to the strong suppression mode may end without being generated. You may do it. In this case, among the plurality of fluctuation patterns that are candidates for selection in the fluctuation pattern determination, "a strong suppression mode is used, but during the period of the strong suppression mode, an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is performed. A variation pattern that does not occur and a variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode when the strong suppression mode is set are included. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", the "strong" effect is generated. Even if the player does not notice that the mode is "suppressed", it is possible to recognize that the possibility that "additional reception effect" is generated is excluded based on the following effect elements.

That is, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", first, even when the first allowable sound is the "additional reception effect". Even if the effect sound that can be output is output for the same time (output in the "first mode" in the figure), the "additional reception effect" is not "additional reception effect" based on the first allowable sound. It makes it possible to recognize that "intrinsic reception production" is occurring. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 400) output when the "additional reception effect" is generated ends halfway through the output even if the effect reception is performed while the output state is in effect. While it is output over a predetermined time without letting it be output, it is output when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode". When the effect reception is performed while the output state is in the output state, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 401) ends the output halfway based on the effect reception.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "intrinsic reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second permissible sound is also output, the possibility that "additional reception effect" is generated is eliminated by confirming whether or not the second permissible sound is output. It is also possible to recognize that. However, as described above, it is not always necessary to prepare the second allowable sound.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 400 and 401, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed is also shown. , When the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs (with message display) while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", the "additional reception effect" occurs. It is designed to be different depending on the case (no message is displayed), and it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is generated is excluded by this as well.

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" generated while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", the above-mentioned automatic button function can be enabled. In the "additional reception effect", the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled, and this also excludes the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is possible to recognize.

In this way, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", various effects other than the effect elements related to the "suppression mode" are produced. It is relatively excluded that the possibility that "additional reception effect" is occurring is excluded because the element has a different aspect from that when "additional reception effect" is generated. It can be easily recognized, and it becomes possible to promote concentration on the "intrinsic reception production".

On the other hand, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the "additional reception effect" and various effect elements have something in common. By making it difficult to recognize whether the "intrinsic reception effect" or the "additional reception effect" is occurring, the "additional reception effect" is generated. We are trying to provide a directing effect that makes us aware of the possibility of being present.

FIG. 402 is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when the "intrinsic reception effect" as the pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern is generated while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is set to the "non-suppressed mode". Is. The "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402 corresponds to the variation pattern when a variation pattern different from the "variation pattern capable of generating the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401" is selected. It may be generated as a design effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401 is selected, the pattern effect is generated according to the specific variation pattern. ..

As shown in FIG. 402, the "intrinsic reception effect" that occurs in the "non-suppressive mode" is also the "intrinsic" that occurs in the "strongly suppressed mode". Similar to the "target reception effect", regardless of which result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination), it always occurs when a predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the symbol effect arrives. It has become an immanence.

However, the first permissible sound (first aspect) output when the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402 is generated is the first permissible sound output when the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400 occurs. Similar to the sound (first aspect), even if the effect is received while the output is in the output state, the output is not terminated halfway and is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). .. Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first aspect, it is difficult to distinguish whether the "intrinsic reception effect" or the "additional reception effect" is generated based on the first permissible sound. ..

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, the second allowable sound is not output together with the output of the first allowable sound (first aspect), and this point is also shown in FIG. 400. It is the same as "additional reception production".

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, the operation means to be operated is also used as the operation-related display (display prompting operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed. Only the imitated image and the gauge display suggesting the remaining time are displayed, and the message display is not displayed. In this respect as well, the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400. It has become.

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the "operation button 410", and the "sword decoration body 5001" is not the target to be operated. This point is also the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400.

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled, and the post-operation effect is performed. The timing tr73 at which the set time (valid period) ends without occurring has arrived, and this point is also the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400.

In this way, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the "strong suppression mode". Unlike the case where "intrinsic reception effect" occurs, various production elements are common to the time when "additional reception effect" occurs, and "additional reception effect" may occur. You will be able to be sexually aware.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the "intrinsic reception effect (intrinsic reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled)". When "" occurs, there are cases where the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is output, and there are cases where the set time occurs without outputting the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) itself. .. On the other hand, when the "additional reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the acceptance allowance sound (first allowable sound) itself is not output. The set time is not generated, and the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is always output.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is permitted while the production sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", when the reception allowable sound is output, the "intrinsic reception production" is performed. While it is difficult to recognize which of "additional reception effect" and "additional reception effect" is occurring, when the reception allowable sound is not output, "internal reception effect" is used instead of "additional reception effect". You will be able to recognize that you are in a state of occurrence. Regarding whether or not the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output when the "intrinsic reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode". , It is desirable that it is determined according to the type of fluctuation pattern, not according to the effect judgment. "Internal reception effect" in the non-suppressed mode in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and "intrinsic reception effect" in the non-suppressed mode in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output. May be sequentially executed within the same symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect based on a specific fluctuation pattern).

Further, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled appears, when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, "intrinsic reception effect" and "additional reception effect". While it is difficult to recognize which of the above is occurring, when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is an "intrinsic reception effect". It will be like.

In the "additional reception effect", it has been described above that the first allowable sound can be output in a mode different from the first aspect based on the result of the effect determination (notice determination). It may be possible to make it impossible to output when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode" (for example, the "specification" shown in FIG. 394. Aspects "). However, for the different modes, it is desirable that the generation rate of the first permissible sound is lower than that of the output in the first mode.

Regarding the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, another example or modification of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 may be appropriately used for a portion without particular notice.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 399 and 400, for convenience of explanation, it is shown as if the production determination is performed while the symbol production is being performed, but the production determination is actually performed. Is performed at the start of the symbol change.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 390 to 402, regarding the mode of the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, the case where the big hit is obtained by the big hit judgment and the case where the big hit is lost in the big hit judgment. It may be different from. For example, when the big hit is obtained by the big hit judgment, it is as shown in the production example shown in FIGS. 390 to 402, whereas when the big hit is rejected by the big hit judgment, FIGS. 390 to FIG. The post-operation effect may be performed in a mode different from the effect example shown in 402.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various embodiments are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It is possible to improve and change the design.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic effect function, a display such as "auto button is being set" may be displayed, but the display may not necessarily be performed. In particular, when it is realized as a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic effect function can always be enabled and the process itself such as "setting to the effect state" is not installed, instead of the pachinko machine 1 set in the automatic effect mode. It is desirable not to display "Auto button is being set". In the pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with the process itself such as "setting to the effect state", the valid period in which the automatic effect function is played and the automatic effect function are set according to the type of operation reception effect that the player is allowed to operate. A valid period that is not played may occur.

In addition, when the automatic effect function is adopted in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation reception within the operation valid period is set to any timing as long as it is within the operation valid period. May be. In order to appropriately give the player an operation opportunity, the operation is performed when the operation is not detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after half or more of the operation validity period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when the operation is not detected until the timing when the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, and the post-operation effect is produced based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get started. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic effect function, if the bar display is not hidden and maintained even after the valid period ends, the operation is targeted at the timing when the valid period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). This is expected to prevent the player from misrecognizing the bar display, such as "Isn't the valid period continuing?", Even if the bar display is not hidden and is displayed continuously. Become so.

In each of the effect examples described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 303 and the effect example described with reference to FIG. 387, after the operation, the image (or bar display) is not hidden and is maintained. When starting the production, "the time from the timing when the operation is detected to the timing when the image (or bar display) is hidden (timing tf2 to tf4 period, timing tg3 to tg5 period, timing) For "th3 to th4 period, etc.)", there may be at least several frames (for example, 2 frames) of time. Alternatively, there may be only one frame of time. Even if there is such a time, the period in which the image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps with the period after the post-operation effect is started, which can be recognized by the player. In some cases.

In the effect example related to the above-mentioned "improvement of effect by using the automatic effect function (see FIG. 300)", the automatic effect function is not enabled in the state where the hold display on the effect display device 1600 is hidden. The automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled may be generated respectively. According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a reception effect in a state where it is difficult to grasp whether the number of holds is large or small, that is, the ease with which the automatic effect function is enabled is difficult to grasp. Become. Furthermore, for example, when the non-automatic reception effect occurs while the hold display is hidden, the subsequent symbol fluctuations are stopped compared to the case where the non-automatic reception effect occurs while the hold display is displayed. If the rate of automatic reception effect is increased before it is done, the hold display will be hidden and it will be difficult to understand how easy it is to enable the automatic effect function. You will be able to add fun.

The discrete component is an electronic component in which only a single-function element (an element having one electrical function (resistance element, etc.)) is enclosed. For example, a few elements having a specific function are included. It is a concept that includes parts that are enclosed in one package.

In addition, in the explanation example of the "help image that promotes understanding of the production", the ruler is illustrated as a "reference image showing the length unit in the horizontal direction", but other images should be used. You may. The point is that when the player operates it, a display image that is depicted without being affected by the special effect may appear. For example, it is not an image intended to promote understanding of the effect, but other functions. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image suggesting the degree of expectation, an image suggesting the current production state, an image suggesting the state related to the production setting, etc.) is drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. It should be noted that such an image does not necessarily have to be drawn by one, and may be drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction as a whole by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

In addition, in the explanation example of "preventing mischief against multiple operating means", mischief is very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto, and it is not possible for the hall side to take too strict measures. It can also lead to profits. Therefore, images that appear based on the detection of operations by the player (including images that appear in the process of making a specific video appear) should be realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. May be good. In short, when the player operates the plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), "the effect display device 1600 executes the game effect according to the jackpot determination." Display (playback) a specific video (which may be a video with content that has nothing to do with mischief prevention (for example, shifting to a state where a predetermined movie is played)) that cannot appear in the state where it is played. ) In the state of ", even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted and the current volume setting value is not displayed", "for brightness adjustment" Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. " All you need is. In this case, the player can also voluntarily generate a function restriction period in which the above-mentioned specific moving image is played by operating a plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (procedure). Is.

Further, in the explanatory example of "prevention of mischief for a plurality of operating means", in the state where the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, the partial restriction period may be controlled without fail.

In addition, regarding the explanation example of "noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening", the point is to control to the normal state where volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after the power is turned on. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to the normal state after passing through the restricted state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and if the game is started in the restricted state, the restricted state is terminated early. It suffices as long as it is controlled to the normal state, and the length of time maintained as the restricted state may be set appropriately (set to any of several seconds to several hours). good. If the length of time maintained as the restricted state is set too short, the above-mentioned effects will not be achieved during the game period immediately after the store opens, but the noise when the hall side sets the volume immediately after the power is turned on. Is possible to suppress this.

Further, in the explanation example of "control over the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the importance of production", the conditions are advantageous depending on whether the first special symbol is changing or the second special symbol is changing. The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the second special symbol on the side where the game is possible, but during the change of the first special symbol on the side where the game is possible under unfavorable conditions. The case where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is illustrated. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology for gaming machines that are not equipped with the second special symbol. For example, a specific symbol that is drawn under more disadvantageous conditions than the first special symbol is prepared. However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side where the game is possible under favorable conditions, but the side where the game is possible under unfavorable conditions. The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output during the fluctuation of the specific symbol of.

Further, in the explanation example of "the period during which the operation reception is permitted (valid period) itself, the effectability itself", the reception allowable sound accompanying the occurrence of the special operation reception effect and the reception allowable sound accompanying the occurrence of the first and second operation reception effects. It may be a production sound different from the reception allowable sound. Further, in FIG. 388, the reception allowable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11), but it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA, for example, as "one sound data" straddling the timing tr1 (tr11). It may be output.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 1st special symbol display 1404 1st special hold number display 1405 2nd special symbol display 1406 2nd special hold Number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting port 2005 Large winning port

Claims (1)

Judgment means to make a judgment and
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means, and a privilege granting means.
It is possible to generate an operation acceptance period in which the player is allowed to accept the predetermined operation, and if the predetermined operation is accepted within the operation acceptance period, the post-acceptance effect can be executed based on the acceptance. Equipped with a predetermined operation reception effect execution means,
In the operation acceptance period, when the acceptance is not made within the operation acceptance period, the same post-acceptance effect as when the acceptance is made may be generated in the gaming machine.
The post-acceptance effect executed based on the acceptance of the predetermined operation during the operation acceptance period is executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the privilege is given.
When the operation acceptance period occurs, it is possible to output a reception allowance sound suggesting that the player is in a state where acceptance of a predetermined operation is permitted or that acceptance is permitted. ,
When a special allowable sound is output as the reception allowable sound when the operation reception period occurs, the same post-reception effect as when the predetermined operation is not accepted within the operation reception period is performed. Generate,
When the operation acceptance period occurs, if a predetermined allowable sound different from the special allowable sound is output as the acceptance allowable sound, the acceptance is made when the predetermined operation is not accepted within the operation acceptance period. There are times when the same post-reception effect is generated, and there are times when the same post-reception effect is not generated when the reception is made.
If the reception permissible sound is not output in any of the modes when the operation reception period occurs, the same post-reception effect as when the predetermined operation is not received within the operation reception period is performed. It is designed not to occur,
Moreover,
Specific BGM is audible output is possible,
When the operation acceptance period in which the predetermined operation is allowed to be accepted occurs in a state where the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is inaudible, the operation acceptance period occurs when the operation acceptance period occurs. The predetermined allowable sound may be output as the reception allowable sound, or the special allowable sound may be output.
When the operation acceptance period in which the predetermined operation is allowed to be accepted occurs in the state where the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the predetermined allowance is given as the acceptance allowance sound when the operation acceptance period occurs. Sound may be output, but the special permissible sound is not output.
Moreover,
It is possible to display a modeled image display that imitates the target of the predetermined operation, and at least the first mode and the second mode are prepared as modes for displaying the simulated image display.
If the same post-acceptance effect as when the predetermined operation was not accepted and the same post-acceptance effect is started within the operation acceptance period during which the special permissible sound is output as the acceptance permissible sound, after the acceptance. A gaming machine characterized in that, at the time when the effect is started to be executed, the image display is not hidden and is displayed.

Images